JP7762003B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine of this type is known that, when a gaming ball enters a starting winning slot in the gaming area, a win/lose lottery is held to determine whether a special game will be played, a special symbol indicating the result of the win/lose lottery is selected, the special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and a jackpot symbol is displayed in a stationary state, indicating that the result of the win/lose lottery is that a special game will be played (a jackpot has been won), thereby executing a special game in which many prize balls can be won. In such gaming machines, the degree of advantage of the gaming profit awarded to the player is generally set to differ depending on the type of jackpot symbol selected. For example, a gaming machine is known that provides two gaming states: a non-time-saving gaming state, in which it is relatively difficult for a gaming ball to enter a specified starting winning slot, and a time-saving gaming state, in which it is relatively easy for a gaming ball to enter a specified starting winning slot. If a specific jackpot symbol is selected, the gaming state after the special game ends is set to the time-saving gaming state (see Patent Documents 1 and 2).

JP 2015-107139 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-253554

However, in gaming machines like those described above, the game state set after a special game is played is associated with the type of jackpot symbol, and the non-time-saving game state cannot be changed to the time-saving game state without deciding to play a special game (winning a jackpot) and playing the special game. As a result, there are significant restrictions on changing to different game states, making it difficult to design game specifications with a high degree of freedom, and creating the problem of being unable to provide innovative gameplay that can heighten player interest.

The present invention was conceived in light of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that offers innovative gameplay that can enhance players' interest.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention is configured as follows.
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a determination means capable of determining an execution result associated with the execution of a special game advantageous to a player, or a non-execution result associated with the execution of the special game, and a variable display means capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination by the determination means, and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of game states, including a non-time-shortened game state in which a game can be played in which the difficulty of a game ball entering a predetermined starting area is relatively high and the average time of the variable display is relatively long, thereby resulting in a relatively low frequency of variable display execution, and a time-shortened game state in which a game can be played in which the difficulty of a game ball entering a predetermined starting area is relatively low and the average time of the variable display is relatively short, thereby resulting in a relatively high frequency of variable display execution, and the time-shortened game state includes a first time-shortened game state that is set after the special game executed based on the determination when the execution result is determined, and a second time-shortened game state that is set when a non-execution result is determined. and the non-execution results include a first non-execution result and a second non-execution result, and the setting means, when a determination is made by the determining means of the number of time-shortening times corresponding to the time-shortening game state during the time-shortening game state, terminates the time-shortening game state and sets a non -time -shortening game state, and in a situation where a predetermined number of determinations have been made by the determining means during the first time-shortening game state or the second time-shortening game state and the determination of the number of time-shortening times has not been made, if the first non-execution result is determined, the time-shortening game state being set is terminated before the variable display based on the determination stops, and the second time-shortening game state can be set when the variable display based on the determination stops, while if the second non-execution result is determined, the time-shortening game state being set is not terminated before the variable display based on the determination stops, and the setting contents of the second time-shortening game state set based on the determination differ between when the first non-execution result is determined and when the second non-execution result is determined.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, by determining a non-execution result that corresponds to the fact that a special game will not be executed , it is possible to set a time-saving gaming state in which it is relatively easy for the gaming ball to enter a predetermined starting area and a game in which the variable display is executed relatively frequently can be played.Since the time -saving gaming state can be set without the need to execute a special game as in conventional gaming machines, it is possible to design gaming specifications with a high degree of freedom and to provide innovative gameplay that can increase the interest of players .

This invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that offers innovative gameplay that can enhance player interest.

FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine with the front door open. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front schematic view of the inside of the attacker device of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/fail random number determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/fail random number determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/fail random number determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/fail random number determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/fail random number determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/fail random number determination table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a special symbol random number determination table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a special electric device operating table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a game status setting table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table for determining a win in a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of the second start winning slot opening control table of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the main processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of timer interrupt processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when a sensor detects something in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when a gate is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. A flowchart showing an outline of the processing when the first start winning slot is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. A flowchart showing an outline of the processing when the second start winning port is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of a preliminary determination process in a main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when a specific area is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. This is a flowchart showing an outline of the special chart-related control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special symbol variation start processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the win/loss determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the variation pattern determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special symbol variation stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of post-stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special game control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the small win game control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special game ending process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the general map-related control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the normal pattern variation start processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the normal pattern variation stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing after the normal symbol stops on the main control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of a movable piece control process in a main control board of a pachinko machine. This is a state transition diagram showing the transition to each game state of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the variable presentation of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the variable presentation of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the variable presentation of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the variable presentation of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the variable presentation of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variable effect determination table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the execution rate of preview effects on a pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of the execution rate of the pre-reading effects of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special notification effect of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special notification effect of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special notification effect of a pachinko machine. 1 is a time chart showing the progress of the variable effects and special notification effects of a pachinko machine. 1 is a time chart showing the progress of the variable effects and special notification effects of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the main processing in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of timer interrupt processing in a sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the variable pattern command receiving process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/lose random number determination table for a pachinko machine relating to variant example (2). An explanatory diagram of a variation pattern table for a pachinko machine relating to modified example (36). An explanatory diagram of a variation pattern table for a pachinko machine relating to modified example (36). FIG. 10 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each game state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 1. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 3. FIG. 10 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each game state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 3. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 4. FIG. 10 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each game state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 4. FIG. 11 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 5. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 5. A state transition diagram showing the transition to each game state of a pachinko machine related to another application example 5. FIG. 11 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. An enlarged view of the second starting winning port and movable piece of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 6. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of various settings of a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of post-stop processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a process for counting the number of time-saving activations of a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a special game ending process of a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a process performed when clearing the RAM of a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a process at the time of transmitting a spec designation command for a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. A figure showing an example of the manner in which the number of time-saving times and the number of time-saving activation times are displayed in a pachinko machine related to another application example 6. A figure showing an example of the manner in which the number of time-saving times and the number of time-saving activation times are displayed in a pachinko machine related to another application example 6. A figure showing an example of the manner in which the number of time-saving times and the number of time-saving activation times are displayed in a pachinko machine related to another application example 6. A figure showing an example of the manner in which the number of time-saving times and the number of time-saving activation times are displayed in a pachinko machine related to another application example 6. An explanatory diagram of a win/lose random number determination table for a pachinko machine relating to another application example 7. 10 is a schematic diagram of a win/lose random number determination table for a pachinko machine relating to another application example 7. FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. An enlarged view of a specific second start winning port and movable piece of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 8. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. A state transition diagram showing the transition to each game state of a pachinko machine related to another application example 8. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variation presentation mode executed when a jackpot is won during normal game mode in a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variation presentation mode executed when a jackpot is won during normal game mode in a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special symbol variation start processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special symbol variation stop processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of post-stop processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a process for counting the number of times time-saving is activated in a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the process of starting counting the number of time-saving activations of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a special game ending process of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a process performed when clearing RAM in a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. FIG. 10 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 9. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 9. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 9. A state transition diagram showing the transition to each game state of a pachinko machine related to another application example 9. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of various settings of a pachinko machine according to another application example 10. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of various settings of a pachinko machine according to another application example 10. An explanatory diagram of the values of the first low-probability time-saving counter A and the first low-probability time-saving counter B after decrementing by 1 in a pachinko machine related to another application example 10. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special symbol variation start processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 10. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a discrimination process of a pachinko machine according to another application example 10. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a time point determination process of a pachinko machine according to another application example 10. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a special game ending process of a pachinko machine according to another application example 10. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a process performed when clearing RAM in a pachinko machine according to another application example 10. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the first low probability time-saving command reception process for a pachinko machine not passing through a jackpot, relating to another application example 10. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the first low-probability time-saving start command reception processing of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 10. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the first low-probability time-saving end command reception processing of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 10. 10 is a flowchart showing an outline of the variable pattern command reception process during the first low-probability time-shortening game state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 10. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of various settings of a pachinko machine according to another application example 11. An explanatory diagram showing an example of setting the time-saving game state of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 11. An explanatory diagram showing an example of setting the time-saving game state of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 11. An explanatory diagram showing an example of setting the time-saving game state of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 11. An explanatory diagram showing an example of setting the time-saving game state of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 11. An explanatory diagram showing an example of setting the time-saving game state of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 11. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing when a time-saving grant is won in a pachinko machine according to another application example 11. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing at the end of the time-shortened game state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 11. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 12. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 12. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing when a time-saving grant is won in a pachinko machine according to another application example 12. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the process when a small winning symbol is determined in a pachinko machine according to another application example 12. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing when the number of times of completion is reached in a pachinko machine according to another application example 12. A figure showing an example of the presentation during a high-probability time-saving game state of a pachinko machine related to another application example 12. A figure showing an example of the presentation during the first low-probability time-saving game state of a pachinko machine related to another application example 12. A figure showing an example of the presentation during the second low-probability time-saving game state of a pachinko machine related to another application example 12. A figure showing an example of the presentation during the second low-probability time-saving game state of a pachinko machine related to another application example 12. A figure showing an example of the presentation during the second low-probability time-saving game state of a pachinko machine related to another application example 12. FIG. 13 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special symbol variation start processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the process of updating the number of times at the start of fluctuation in a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the game state setting process at the start of fluctuation in a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of post-stop processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the process of updating the number of times when the stop display time of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13 is elapsed. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the game status setting process when the stop display time of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13 has elapsed. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special game ending process of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a process performed when clearing RAM in a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a process performed when power is restored without clearing RAM in a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. A figure showing an example of the presentation during a high-probability time-saving game state of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. A figure showing an example of the presentation during a high-probability time-saving game state of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. A figure showing an example of the presentation during the normal game mode of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13 and when the first low-probability time-saving game mode is set. A figure showing an example of the presentation during the normal game mode of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13 and when the first low-probability time-saving game mode is set. A figure showing an example of the presentation during the normal game mode of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13 and when the first low-probability time-saving game mode is set. A figure showing an example of the first low probability time-saving information suggestion display of a pachinko machine related to another application example 13. An explanatory diagram of the first low probability time-saving information suggestion presentation mode determination table for a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. A figure showing an example of variable presentation by mode PT4 of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. A figure showing an example of variable presentation by mode PT2 of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. A figure showing an example of variable presentation by mode PT3 of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. A figure showing an example of variable presentation by mode PT3 of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. A figure showing an example of variable presentation by mode PT3 of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. A figure showing an example of variable presentation by mode PT3 of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. An explanatory diagram of the number pattern determination table for the PT1 and PT2 aspects of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. An explanatory diagram of the mode PT3 special development performance determination table, mode PT3 number pattern determination table, and mode PT3 special reach display determination table of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. An explanatory diagram of a pattern check table for the reach stimulation effect of a pachinko machine in another application example 13. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an attention-calling effect of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the setting command reception process after the special game ends in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the time-saving number command receiving process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. A flowchart showing an outline of the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance execution process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when a predetermined mode is determined in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of various settings of a pachinko machine according to another application example 14. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of various settings of a pachinko machine according to another application example 14. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing at the start of the time-saving grant winning variation of a pachinko machine according to another application example 14. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing when the time-saving grant winning stop display time has elapsed in a pachinko machine according to another application example 14. A figure showing an example of the presentation when the third low-probability time-saving game state is set in a pachinko machine relating to another application example 14. A figure showing an example of the presentation when the third low-probability time-saving game state is set in a pachinko machine relating to another application example 14.

Hereinafter, embodiments and application examples of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
Here, unless otherwise specified, the names of components, devices, etc., the names of means, symbols, step numbers, etc. (hereinafter referred to as symbols, etc.) used in the following embodiments and each application example are used as unique symbols in the embodiment and each application example. Therefore, for convenience of explanation, although symbols, etc. may be the same in the embodiment and each application example, these indicate symbols, etc. in the embodiment and each application example.
(External configuration of pachinko machine P)
The gaming machine according to this embodiment is a pachinko machine P that uses gaming balls as a gaming medium. Although not shown in the figure, in an amusement parlor where the pachinko machines P are installed, multiple pachinko machines P are arranged side by side in an area where the gaming machines are installed called an island, and a gaming ball lending device for lending the gaming balls is installed adjacent to each pachinko machine P. Furthermore, each pachinko machine P is connected to a corresponding gaming ball lending device R.
The game ball lending device R can accept the insertion of banknotes and a storage medium (card) that stores the value information required for lending game balls. After inserting a banknote (or a card) into the game ball lending device R, a player can receive game balls from the game ball lending device R by performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine P.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the pachinko machine P of this embodiment comprises a machine frame 1, which is a rectangular frame body fixed to the island and has a hollow portion (not shown), a main body frame 2, which is also a rectangular frame body with a hollow portion (not shown) attached to the machine frame 1 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed, and a front door 3, which is attached to the main body frame 2 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed, and has an opening (not shown) formed in the front.

As shown in Figure 1, a speaker serving as an audio output device 10 is provided in the lower left corner of the machine frame 1. A game board 11 that forms the game area 12 is housed in the hollow portion of the main body frame 2. The front door 3 is provided with a transparent plate 4 that covers the opening, an upper tray 6 and a receiving tray 7 that are located below the transparent plate 4 and can receive game balls, an operating handle 5 attached to the right of the receiving tray 7 for operating the launch of game balls, and two speakers serving as audio output devices 10 attached to the upper left and right of the transparent plate 4, one each.

In this pachinko machine P, when the main frame 2 is closed against the machine casing 1 and the front door 3 is closed, the transparent plate 4 is positioned in front of the game board 11, with a gap between them. This makes it possible to view the game board 11 located behind through the transparent plate 4.

The upper tray 6 is also designed to guide game balls dispensed by the game ball dispensing device R and prize balls paid out from the pachinko machine P. The upper tray 6 is capable of holding a predetermined number of game balls, but when the upper tray 6 is full of game balls, any game balls subsequently dispensed or paid out are guided to the receiving tray 7. The bottom of the receiving tray 7 is also provided with a discharge hole for discharging the stored game balls, and an opening/closing plate that can open and close the discharge hole, although these are not specifically shown. Normally, the discharge hole is closed by the opening/closing plate, but by moving the opening/closing lever 8 (see Figure 1) attached integrally to the opening/closing plate horizontally, the opening/closing plate also moves in the same direction, opening the discharge hole. This allows the game balls to fall through the discharge hole and be discharged out of the receiving tray 7.

The operating handle 5 is also designed so that the player can rotate it in a predetermined direction. When the player rotates the operating handle 5, the game balls held in the upper tray 6 are sent to a launching device (not specifically shown), which then launches the game balls toward the play area 12 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the operating handle 5. The game balls launched in this manner are guided upward by a pair of rails 13a, 13b fixed to the game board 11, and reach the play area 12.

Here, the game area 12 is a portion of the space formed between the game board 11 and the transparent plate 4 when the main frame 2 and front door 3 are closed to the machine frame 1, which is partitioned into an approximately circular shape by a pair of rails 13a, 13b fixed to the game board 11, and is an area where game balls can flow down.
As shown in Figure 3, this play area 12 is composed of a first play area 12a, which is the area on the left side as seen from the player facing the pachinko machine P, and a second play area 12b, which is the area on the right side as seen from the player facing the pachinko machine P. The possibility of a game ball entering these two play areas 12 differs depending on the firing strength of the launching device. Specifically, when the firing strength of the launching device is less than a predetermined strength (a strength that prevents the game ball launched by the launching device from reaching the highest point in the play area 12), the game ball enters the first play area 12a. On the other hand, when the firing strength of the launching device is greater than or equal to a predetermined strength (a strength that allows the game ball launched by the launching device to reach the highest point in the play area 12), the game ball enters the second play area 12b.

Also, as shown in Figure 3, within this gaming area 12 are provided a windmill and numerous nails for causing the gaming balls to flow randomly, a general winning opening 14 through which gaming balls can enter, a first starting winning opening 15 and a second starting winning opening 16 as starting areas, a gate 20 through which gaming balls can pass, an attacker device 17 that activates when predetermined conditions are met, an outlet 19 that guides gaming balls out of the gaming area 12, and an effect display device 21 that acts as an effect device to produce effects as the game progresses. Note that Figure 3 shows only some of the nails, with the other nails omitted.

As shown in Figure 3, the general winning opening 14 is located slightly to the left of the center at the bottom of the game area 12, and when a game ball enters the general winning opening 14, a predetermined number of prize balls (five in this embodiment) are paid out.
The number and location of the general winning slots 14 are not particularly limited.

As shown in Figure 3, the first start winning opening 15 is located slightly below the center of the play area 12, and the second start winning opening 16 is located slightly above the center of the right part of the play area 12. In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, only game balls flowing down the first play area 12a can enter the first start winning opening 15, and game balls flowing down the second play area 12b cannot enter. In addition, only game balls flowing down the second play area 12b can enter the second start winning opening 16, and game balls flowing down the first play area 12a cannot enter.

3, the second start winning opening 16 is provided with a movable piece 16b (a normal electric device) that can be opened and closed. When the movable piece 16b is closed, the second start winning opening 16 is in a closed state, and it is not possible for a game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16. On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b is opened, the second start winning opening 16 is in an open state, and this movable piece 16b functions as a guide member that guides the game ball toward the second start winning opening 16, thereby enabling the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16.
Furthermore, the configuration of this movable piece 16b is not particularly limited, and may be configured, for example, as a pair of blade members that rotate left and right around an axis perpendicular to the game board 11 to open and close the second start winning opening 16, or a lid member that rotates back and forth around an axis horizontal to the game board 11 to open and close the second start winning opening 16, or as a shutter member that slides up and down to open and close the second start winning opening 16.
The installation locations of the first start winning opening 15 and the second start winning opening 16 are not particularly limited, and for example, the first start winning opening 15 and the second start winning opening 16 may be placed in a position that makes it easy for game balls flowing down either game area 12 (first game area 12a, second game area 12b) to enter.

When a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 or the second start winning slot 16, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not the player has won a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot win), whether or not the player has won a small jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a small jackpot win), and whether or not a time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving game state) is granted, and one special symbol is selected from a number of predetermined special symbols according to the results of the lottery. There are multiple types of special symbols that can be selected, and depending on the type of special symbol selected, a game benefit such as the execution of a special game advantageous to the player, the execution of a small jackpot game, or the granting of a time-saving game state (setting of the first time-saving game state, described below) is awarded.
The number of prize balls paid out based on a game ball entering the first start winning opening 15 or the second start winning opening 16 is not particularly limited as long as it is one or more, and may be any number. Also, the number of prize balls may be the same or different between the start winning opening with the movable piece 16b (second start winning opening 16) and the start winning opening without the movable piece 16b (first start winning opening 15). In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on a game ball entering the first start winning opening 15 is four, and the number of prize balls paid out based on a game ball entering the second start winning opening 16 is one.

As shown in Figure 3, the gate 20 is located above the second start winning opening 16. When a gaming ball passes through this gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol, which will be described later, is held. If the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the movable piece 16b located in the second start winning opening 16 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

As shown in FIG. 3 , the attacker device 17 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 12 (below the second start winning opening 16). The attacker device 17 includes a large winning opening 18 through which game balls can enter, and an opening/closing door 18b that opens and closes the large winning opening 18. Normally, the opening/closing door 18b is closed and the large winning opening 18 is closed, preventing game balls from entering the large winning opening 18. However, when the special game or small prize game described above is played, the opening/closing door 18b opens and the large winning opening 18 is opened, allowing game balls to enter the large winning opening 18. Specifically, during the special game described above, a round game in which the large winning opening 18 is opened is played multiple times, and during the small prize game described above, the large winning opening 18 is opened once. When one game ball enters the big prize opening 18, a predetermined number of prize balls (10 in this embodiment) are paid out.
3, game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the large prize opening 18, but game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot. Although not specifically shown, nails, windmills, etc. are arranged so that almost all game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can reach the large prize opening 18, except for those that enter the second start prize opening 16. Therefore, as long as game balls continue to be shot out as long as the large prize opening 18 is open, the game balls will enter the large prize opening 18.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 4(a) and (b), a rolling path 51 is provided inside the attacker device 17, along which a gaming ball that has entered the large prize opening 18 can roll to the left. This rolling path 51 branches into an upper passage 52 and a lower passage 53 at a predetermined position in the rolling direction, with the upper passage 52 having at its end a general area 58 into which a gaming ball that has entered the large prize opening 18 can enter, and the lower passage 53 having at its end a specific area 57 into which a gaming ball that has entered the large prize opening 18 can enter (see Figures 4(a) and (b)).

As shown in Figures 4(a) and (b), a distribution member 59 that distributes game balls to either the upper passage 52 or the lower passage 53 is provided at the position where the upper passage 52 and the lower passage 53 branch off. This distribution member 59 is rotatable about an axis perpendicular to the gaming board 11 and can be displaced between a first position that opens the path to the upper passage 52 and blocks the path to the lower passage 53, and a second position that blocks the path to the upper passage 52 and opens the path to the lower passage 53. When the distribution member 59 is in the first position, a game ball that enters the big prize opening 18 proceeds to the upper passage 52 and enters the general area 58, and when the distribution member 59 is in the second position, it proceeds to the lower passage 53 and enters the specific area 57.

In addition, although not specifically shown, the attacker device 17 is provided with a specific area outlet for discharging game balls that have entered the specific area 57 out of the big prize opening 18 (to the rear side of the game board 11), and a general area outlet for discharging game balls that have entered the general area 58 out of the big prize opening 18 (to the rear side of the game board 11).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the opening and closing manner (opening and closing pattern) of the opening and closing door 18b and the operating manner (operation pattern) of the distribution member 59 in the round game executed during the above-mentioned special game are set for each type of special pattern determined when a jackpot is won.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a predetermined number of game balls (one in this embodiment) enter the specific area 57 during a specific round of play, the game state after the special game ends is set to a game state that combines a high-probability game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and a time-saving game state. On the other hand, if the predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during a specific round of play (i.e., if all game balls that entered the big prize slot 18 enter the general area 58), the game state after the special game ends is set to a game state (normal game state) that combines a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state.
The opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door 18b, the operating pattern of the sorting member 59, and the setting of the game state will be described in detail later.
As described above, instead of setting the game state after the end of a special game to a high-probability game state or a time-saving game state when a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 during a round of play during a special game, the game state after the end of the special game may be set to a high-probability game state or a time-saving game state depending on the type of special symbol determined when a jackpot is won. For example, when a jackpot is won and a specific special symbol is determined, the game state after the end of the special game may be set to a game state combining a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state), but when a special symbol other than the specific special symbol is determined, the game state after the end of the special game may be set to a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state (normal game state). In this way, if the game state after the end of a special game is determined depending on the type of special symbol, there is no need to provide the specific area 57 described above.

As shown in Figure 3, the outlet 19 is located at the bottom of the game area 12 and receives game balls that do not enter any of the general winning openings 14, first starting winning openings 15, second starting winning openings 16, or big winning openings 18. Game balls received by the outlet 19 are then guided to the back side of the game board 11 and collected.

As shown in Fig. 3, the effect display device 21 is provided in approximately the center of the play area 12. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as this effect display device 21. The effect display device 21 is provided with a display unit 21a for displaying images such as moving images and still images, and in addition to displaying a background image, the display unit 21a displays a variable effect of effect symbols 50 (dummy symbols), and the stopped display mode of each effect symbol 50 performs a variable effect that notifies the player of the result of the lottery.
The performance display device 21 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be, for example, a drum-type display device that displays various information using multiple drums with patterns on the outer periphery.

The pachinko machine P of this embodiment is equipped with, as a performance device, a performance display device 21, as well as a speaker as the above-mentioned audio output device 10, and a lamp (see Figure 1) as a performance lighting device 23 that produces performance by emitting light in various colors and lighting patterns.
However, the performance devices are not limited to these, and may include, for example, performance prop devices that move at various times and in various ways.

In addition, a performance operation device 9 is provided in front of the upper tray 6, which the player can operate to progress or switch the performances that are executed during play or while waiting. In this embodiment, the performance operation device 9 is composed of a circular ring-shaped frame-shaped operation dial 9a that can be rotated, and an operation button 9b that is fitted into the operation dial 9a and can be pressed. When a predetermined performance is being executed by the performance display device 21, rotating the operation dial 9a or pressing the operation button 9b will progress various performances, such as variable performances, or switch to a different display.
The effect operation device 9 is not limited to the operation dial 9a and the operation button 9b, but may be provided with a cross key or the like that allows input in the up, down, left, and right directions. In addition to providing the effect operation device 9 such as the operation dial 9a and the operation button 9b, the above-mentioned cross key may be provided separately.

In addition, as shown in Figure 3, in the lower right corner of the game board 11, outside the play area 12, there are provided a first special symbol display device 30, a second special symbol display device 31, a first special symbol reserved display device 38, a second special symbol reserved display device 39, a normal symbol display device 32, and a normal symbol reserved display device 33 as devices for displaying various game conditions.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine P of this embodiment is electrically connected to the game ball lending device R, and operations on the game ball lending device R, such as lending game balls and ejecting cards, can be accepted by the pachinko machine P. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine P is provided with a value information display device 35 that displays value information (balance information) stored on the card, a ball lending button 36 that can be pressed, and a card return button 37 that can be pressed.

(Configuration of control means of pachinko machine P)
Next, the control means for controlling the game and presentation of the pachinko machine P will be described.
The above-mentioned control means is composed of various control boards, and specifically, as shown in Figure 5, it includes a main control board 100 that controls the basic game operations of the pachinko machine P, a launch/payout control board 200 that controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls, a sub-control board 300 that controls various presentations, and a game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R.

5, a launch/payout control board 200 and a sub-control board 300 are connected to the main control board 100, and a game ball lending control board 400 is connected to the launch/payout control board 200. Furthermore, an external information terminal board 500 is connected to the main control board 100 and the launch/payout control board 200 to output various information on the progress of the game to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, to a hall computer in an amusement parlor).
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, as described above, the launch and payout control board 200 controls both the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls, but a board that controls the launch of game balls (launch control board) and a board that controls the payout of prize balls (payout control board) may be provided separately.

In addition, although not specifically shown, a power supply board is connected to each board provided in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment. This power supply board is equipped with a backup power supply, and if the voltage value of the power supplied to the pachinko machine P falls below a predetermined value, it determines that a power interruption has occurred and outputs a power interruption signal to the main control board 100.

The main control board 100 controls the games played on the pachinko machine P, and specifically controls the special symbol games (lottery to determine whether the game is won or lost, determination of the special symbol, display of the change in the special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as the change in the special symbol)) that are started when the game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, the regular symbol games (lottery to determine whether the game is won or lost, display of the change in the special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as the change in the regular symbol)) that are started when the game ball passes through the gate 20, special games that are advantageous to the player, small prize games, etc.
As shown in Figure 5, this main control board 100 is equipped with a main CPU 101 that performs various calculation processes, a main ROM 102 that stores control programs for progressing the game and data and tables necessary for the game, and a main RAM 103 that is used as a temporary storage area during calculation processes.
Then, based on signals from each detection sensor and timer described later, the main CPU 101 reads out a control program stored in the main ROM 102 and performs arithmetic processing, as well as controls various devices connected to the main CPU 101 and sends commands to other boards based on the results of the arithmetic processing.

5, the main control board 100 is connected to a general prize opening detection sensor 14a that detects when a game ball enters the general prize opening 14, a first start prize opening detection sensor 15a that detects when a game ball enters the first start prize opening 15, a second start prize opening detection sensor 16a that detects when a game ball enters the second start prize opening 16, a special prize opening detection sensor 18a that detects when a game ball enters the special prize opening 18, a gate detection sensor 20a that detects when a game ball passes through the gate 20, a fraud detection sensor 35 that detects magnetism, radio waves, etc. directed toward the game board 11, and a specific area detection sensor 57a that detects when a game ball enters the specific area 57. The detection signals output from each of these detection sensors are input to the main control board 100.
It should be noted that the sensors connected to the main control board 100 are not limited to these, and for example, a general area detection sensor that detects when a gaming ball enters the general area 58 may be provided.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is connected to the following devices to be controlled: a start winning port solenoid 16c that drives the movable piece 16b of the second start winning port 16 to open and close; a large winning port solenoid 18c that drives the opening and closing door 18b of the large winning port 18 to open and close; a distribution member solenoid 59c that displaces the distribution member 59; a first special pattern display device 30; a second special pattern display device 31; a normal pattern display device 32; a first special pattern reserve display device 38; a second special pattern reserve display device 39; and a normal pattern reserve display device 33.
The main control board 100 drives each solenoid to control the opening and closing of the second start winning opening 16 and the large winning opening 18, control the displacement of the sorting member 59, and also control the display of each display device.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, multiple stages, from setting value 1 to setting value 6, are defined as settings for ball payout, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the win/lose lottery described below varies depending on the setting value. For example, setting value 6 is set to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than setting value 1, and if the probability of winning a jackpot is higher, the possibility of winning prize balls also increases, so changing the setting value changes the amount of prize balls expected to be paid out in that pachinko machine P. Also, a win/lose random number determination table 110 used in the win/lose lottery described below is provided corresponding to each of setting values 1 to 6, and when the setting value is changed, the win/lose random number determination table 110 provided for each setting value is changed in its entirety.
Although not shown, the main control board 100 is provided with a RAM clear switch and a setting switch used to change the above-mentioned setting values. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the front door 3 is open and the power is turned on with both the RAM clear switch and the setting switch on, the machine transitions to a setting change state in which the setting values can be changed. Then, in this setting change state, the setting values can be changed by operating the RAM clear switch.

Although not specifically shown, the firing and dispensing control board 200, like the main control board 100, is equipped with a CPU, ROM, and RAM, and is connected to the main control board 100 so as to enable bidirectional communication.

As shown in Figure 5, the launch/payout control board 200 is connected to devices for controlling the launch of game balls, including a touch sensor 5a that detects when a player touches the operating handle 5, an operating knob 5b that detects the operating angle (rotation angle) of the operating handle 5, a launch stop switch 5c that stops the launch of game balls, a ball feed solenoid 60 that sends game balls held in the upper tray 6 to a launching device (not shown), and a launch motor 61 that launches game balls. Control signals output from the touch sensor 5a, operating knob 5b, and launch stop switch 5c are input to the launch/payout control board 200.

When control signals from the touch sensor 5a and the operation volume 5b are input to the launch/payout control board 200, the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 are energized to launch the game balls. Also, while the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 are energized, game balls are continuously launched at 0.6 second intervals (i.e., a launch pace of 100 balls per minute). On the other hand, when a control signal from the launch stop switch 5c is input to the launch/payout control board 200, the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 are de-energized to stop the launch of the game balls.
In addition, a rotary solenoid may be used instead of the launch motor 61 as a device for launching the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 5, the launch payout control board 200 is also connected to devices for controlling the payout of game balls: a payout motor 62 that pays out game balls stored in a game ball storage section (not specifically shown) as prize balls, and a payout counting switch 63 that detects and counts the paid-out game balls. When the launch payout control board 200 receives a payout number command sent from the main control board 100, the launch payout control board 200 controls the payout motor 62 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) based on the payout number command. At this time, the number of paid-out game balls is counted by the payout counting switch 63, making it possible to determine whether the predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) have been paid out.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5, the shot/dispensing control board 200 is connected to a front door open detection sensor 3a that detects whether the front door 3 is open, and a tray full detection sensor 7a that detects whether the tray 7 is full.

When the front door open detection sensor 3a detects that the front door 3 is open, it outputs an open detection signal to the firing/dispensing control board 200. The open detection signal is output continuously while the front door 3 is open. When the open detection signal is input, the firing/dispensing control board 200 sends a door open command to the main control board 100. In response, when the front door open detection sensor 3a no longer detects that the front door 3 is open, it turns off and stops outputting the door open detection signal. When the input of the door open detection signal stops, the firing/dispensing control board 200 determines that the front door 3 is closed and stops sending the door open command to the main control board 100.

The tray full detection sensor 7a is provided at a predetermined position on the tray 7. When the tray 7 is filled with a predetermined amount of game balls to be paid out as prize balls, the stored game balls reach the predetermined position.
The tray full detection sensor 7a turns on when it detects that the gaming balls have reached the predetermined position, outputting a tray detection signal to the launch/payout control board 200. The tray detection signal is continuously output while the stored gaming balls are at the predetermined position. When the tray detection signal is input, the launch/payout control board 200 sends a tray full command to the main control board 100. In response, the tray full detection sensor 7a turns off when it no longer detects that the gaming balls have reached the predetermined position, and stops outputting the tray detection signal. When the input of the tray detection signal stops, the launch/payout control board 200 determines that the tray 7 full state has been released, and stops sending the tray full command to the main control board 100.

As mentioned above, the launch and payout control board 200 is connected to a game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R. As shown in FIG. 5, the launch and payout control board 200 is connected via the game ball lending control board 400 to a value information display device 35, a ball lending switch 36a that detects the pressing of the ball lending button 36, and a card return switch 37a that detects the pressing of the card return button 37.

When the ball lending button 36 is pressed, a detection signal output from the ball lending switch 36a is input to the launching and paying-out control board 200, and the launching and paying-out control board 200 transmits a lending request signal requesting the lending of game balls to the game ball lending device R. Then, when the game ball lending device R receives the lending request signal, the game ball lending device R performs a process of subtracting predetermined value information from the stored value information, and controls the paying-out of the number of game balls corresponding to the subtracted value information.
When the card return button 37 is pressed, a detection signal output from the card return switch 37a is input to the launch/payout control board 200, and the launch/payout control board 200 transmits a return request signal requesting the return of the card to the game ball lending device R. When the game ball lending device R receives the return request signal, the game ball lending device R controls the ejection of the card.

The sub-control board 300 controls the effects that are executed during play, standby, etc.
As shown in Figure 5, this sub-control board 300 is equipped with a sub-CPU 301 that performs various calculation processes, a sub-ROM 302 that stores control programs for executing performances, data and tables necessary for executing performances, etc., and a sub-RAM 303 that is used as a temporary storage area during calculation processes, and is connected so as to enable one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300.
Then, based on commands sent from the main control board 100 and signals from the timer, the sub-CPU 301 reads out the control program stored in the sub-ROM 302 and performs arithmetic processing, and sends commands for executing performances to an image control board (not specifically shown) for controlling image display, an audio control board (not specifically shown) for controlling audio output, and an electric lighting control board (not specifically shown) for controlling the lighting on and off.
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, as described above, the audio control board and the lighting control board are provided separately, but it is also possible to provide a single board (audio and lighting control board) that combines the functions of these boards, and to use this board to control both audio output and lighting.

The sub-control board 300 is also connected to the performance display device 21 via an image control board, and to the audio output device 10 via an audio control board. Furthermore, the sub-control board 300 is also connected to the performance lighting device 23 via an illumination control board, as well as a rotation detection sensor 9c that detects the rotation of the operation dial 9a, and a press detection sensor 9d that detects the press of the operation button 9b.

The image control board is equipped with an image CPU, image ROM, image RAM, etc., although these are not specifically shown. The image ROM of this image control board stores image data such as the effect pattern 50 and background displayed on the effect display device 21. Based on commands sent from the sub-control board 300, the image CPU reads image data from the image ROM and stores it in the image RAM, thereby controlling the image display by the effect display device 21.

The audio control board, although not specifically shown, is equipped with a sound chip (CPU), sound ROM, sound RAM, etc. The sound ROM stores sound data such as the audio and background music output from the audio output device 10. Based on commands sent from the sub-control board 300, the sound data read from the sound ROM is stored in the sound RAM, thereby controlling the audio output from the audio output device 10.

The illumination control board controls the illumination of the lighting device 23 based on commands from the sub-control board 300. Furthermore, when the illumination control board receives a rotation detection signal output from the rotation detection sensor 9c based on the rotation of the operation dial 9a, or a press detection signal output from the press detection sensor 9d based on the press of the operation button 9b, it sends a specified command to the sub-control board 300.

(Outline of Pachinko Machine P Game)
Next, the game in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment will be explained based on various tables stored in the main ROM 102.
As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the special game and the regular game proceed in parallel. In addition, as the game state when these two games proceed, either a low probability game state (so-called non-probability game state) or a high probability game state (so-called probability game state) is set as a game state that combines either a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state. In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, two time-saving game states are provided, a first time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state, and either of the time-saving game states is set.
Specifically, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, one of the following game states is set: a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state (hereinafter referred to as the normal game state), a game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-shortened game state (hereinafter referred to as the first low-probability time-shortened game state), a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state (hereinafter referred to as the second low-probability time-shortened game state), or a game state combining a high-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state (hereinafter referred to as the high-probability time-shortened game state).

Here, the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state are game states that are set so that the probability of winning a jackpot is different based on the win/lose lottery described below, and in the high-probability game state, the probability of winning a jackpot based on the win/lose lottery is set to a higher value than in the low-probability game state. In other words, it is easier to win a jackpot based on the win/lose lottery in the high-probability game state than in the low-probability game state.

Furthermore, the non-time-shortened game state and the time-shortened game state are game states that are set so that the difficulty of getting a game ball to enter the second start winning port 16 differs, and in the time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is set to be more likely to be maintained in an open state (i.e., the second start winning port 16 is more likely to be in an open state) than in the non-time-shortened game state. In other words, it is easier for a game ball to enter the second start winning port 16 during the time-shortened game state than during the non-time-shortened game state.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, two time-shortening game states, a first time-shortening game state and a second time-shortening game state, are provided, and in the second time-shortening game state, the movable piece 16b is set to be more likely to be maintained in the open state than in the first time-shortening game state. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the game ball is most likely to enter the second start winning port 16 during the second time-shortening game state, next, the game ball is most likely to enter the second start winning port 16 during the first time-shortening game state, and the game ball is least likely to enter the second start winning port 16 during the non-time-shortening game state.
In addition, the normal game mode is set in the initial state immediately after shipping from the factory or after resetting.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched by a launching device (not shown) and flowing down the game area 12 enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, a win/loss lottery is held, and a special symbol associated with a game profit based on the result of the win/loss lottery is determined. In the win/loss lottery according to this embodiment, first, a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has been won, and if a determination result is derived that the jackpot has not been won (hereinafter also referred to as a non-win of the jackpot), then a determination is made as to whether or not a small win has been won, and if a determination result is derived that the small win has not been won (hereinafter also referred to as a non-win of the small win), then a determination is made as to whether or not a time-saving game state should be granted (whether or not a time-saving game state should be set), and if a determination result is derived that the time-saving game state should not be granted (hereinafter also referred to as a non-win of the time-saving game state), then a loss is determined.
Then, when the result of this lottery indicates that a jackpot has been won (i.e., when a jackpot has been won), the jackpot opening 18 is opened and a special game is executed that allows a game ball to enter the jackpot opening 18, and furthermore, the game state after the special game ends is set to either the normal game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, or the high-probability time-shortened game state. In other words, after the special game ends, the game state transitions to either the normal game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, or the high-probability time-shortened game state.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned win/lose lottery results in a determination that a small prize has been won (i.e., when a small prize has been won), the large prize opening 18 is opened and a small prize game is played in which a game ball can enter the large prize opening 18. Then, when a game ball enters the large prize opening 18 during this small prize game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as described above. Note that the game state after the small prize game ends remains the same as the game state before the small prize game began. In other words, when a small prize game is played, the game state does not change.

Furthermore, if the result of the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery indicates that a time-saving game state will be granted (hereinafter also referred to as winning the time-saving grant), the low-probability game state remains unchanged and the first time-saving game state is set. In other words, if the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery results in a winning of the time-saving grant, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the first low-probability time-saving game state. In contrast, if the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery results in a non-winning of the time-saving grant, the game state remains in the normal game state.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the determination of whether or not the time-saving bonus will be awarded is made only in the win/loss lottery during the normal game state, and the determination of whether or not the time-saving bonus will be awarded is not made in the win/loss lottery during other game states. Therefore, since the determination result of whether or not the time-saving bonus will be awarded is not derived during other game states, the game state is set not to change without going through the winning of a jackpot and the execution of a special game.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning hole 15. Also, game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the second start winning hole 16, and enter the big winning hole 18.
During the normal game state and the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed shot) so that the game ball will enter the first start winning port 15, and during the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the high-probability time-shortened game state and the special game, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed shot) so that the game ball will enter the large winning port 18 or pass through the gate 20 and enter the second start winning port 16.
Specifically, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state and the special game state, the effect display device 21 displays a display instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b, and during the normal game state and the first low-probability time-saving game state, the effect display device 21 displays a display instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a.

The winning/losing lottery is conducted based on various random numbers obtained when the game ball enters the first starting winning port 15 or the second starting winning port 16, and various tables stored in the main ROM 102 for determining the random numbers.
Here, the pachinko machine P of this embodiment has, as random numbers for determining the win/lose lottery and the special pattern, a win/lose random number used to determine the result of the win/lose lottery (jackpot, small win, granting of time-saving game state or loss), a special pattern random number used to determine the type of special pattern, and a fluctuation pattern random number used to determine the fluctuation pattern command described below.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned win/fail random number uses a hardware random number built into the main control board 100. This win/fail random number is updated according to a set rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed each time the random number sequence completes one cycle, and the start value is changed each time the system is reset.
The variation pattern command is for determining the pattern (variation time, mode) of the variation effect that can notify the result of the winning/losing lottery. The random numbers used to determine the variation pattern command are not limited to those described above, and for example, other random numbers may be used in addition to these random numbers.

When a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, a random number value is obtained for each of the above-mentioned random numbers, and each random number value is stored in a reserved memory area of the main RAM 103.
This reserved memory area is composed of a first reserved memory area for storing each random number value (hereinafter referred to as first special random number) of the random number related to the winning/losing lottery and the determination of the special pattern, which is obtained by the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning opening 15, and a second reserved memory area for storing each random number value (hereinafter referred to as second special random number) of the random number related to the winning/losing lottery and the determination of the special pattern, which is obtained by the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning opening 16. Each of these reserved memory areas is composed of a total of four memory units, from the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit, and is capable of storing a total of four sets of first special random numbers and four sets of second special random numbers.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first start winning port 15, the first special symbol random number is stored in order, starting from the first memory section of the first reserved memory area. For example, if a gaming ball enters the first start winning port 15 when no first special symbol random number is stored in any memory section of the first reserved memory area, the first special symbol random number obtained in response to this is stored in the first memory section of the first reserved memory area. Also, if a gaming ball enters the first start winning port 15 when the first special symbol random number is stored in the first memory section of the first reserved memory area, the first special symbol random number obtained in response to this is stored in the second memory section of the first reserved memory area. Furthermore, when the first special symbol random number is stored in the first memory section and the second memory section of the first reserved memory area, if a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15, the first special symbol random number acquired in response to this is stored in the third memory section of the first reserved memory area. Furthermore, when the first special symbol random number is stored in the first to third memory sections of the first reserved memory area, if a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15, the first special symbol random number acquired in response to this is stored in the fourth memory section of the first reserved memory area. Furthermore, when the first special symbol random number is stored in the first to fourth memory sections of the first reserved memory area, if a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15, the first special symbol random number associated with this ball entry is not stored.

Similarly, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, the second special random number is stored in the first storage section of the second reserved storage area in order. The specific storage process is the same as the storage of the first special random number described above, and therefore will not be described here.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the number of sets of first special random numbers stored in the first reserve memory area (hereinafter referred to as the first reserve number) is stored in a first reserve number counter (not specifically shown), and the number of sets of second special random numbers stored in the second reserve memory area (hereinafter referred to as the second reserve number) is stored in a second reserve number counter (not specifically shown).
In this specification, as described above, the storage of the first special pattern random number and the second special pattern random number in the reserved memory area is also referred to as "reservation" or "reserved memory," and the first reserved number and the second reserved number are also simply referred to as "reserved numbers."

The pachinko machine P of this embodiment has a win/lose random number determination table 110 for determining the result of the win/lose lottery, a special pattern random number determination table 111 for determining the type of special pattern, a special electric device operation table 112 for controlling the special game that is executed when a big win is won and the small win game that is executed when a small win is won, a game state setting table 113 for setting the game state after the determination result that a time-shortened game state is granted is derived (after a time-shortened pattern that is determined to set the first time-shortened game state described below is decided) or after the special game has ended, and a fluctuation pattern table 114 for determining a fluctuation pattern command.
Note that tables related to lottery results and the like are not limited to these, and tables may be provided as appropriate when it is necessary to make judgments or decisions based on random numbers.

The win/loss random number determination table 110 is used to determine the results of the win/loss lottery (won a big win, won a small win, won or lost the time-saving grant), and is broadly divided into a win/loss random number determination table 110 (hereinafter referred to as Table A) that is referenced in low-probability game states, and a win/loss random number determination table 110 (hereinafter referred to as Table B) that is referenced in high-probability game states. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 6 to 11, Table A and Table B each have six types, depending on the currently set value.

Specifically, table A includes table A1, which is referenced when the setting value is "1," table A2, which is referenced when the setting value is "2," table A3, which is referenced when the setting value is "3," table A4, which is referenced when the setting value is "4," table A5, which is referenced when the setting value is "5," and table A6, which is referenced when the setting value is "6."
Table B includes table B1, which is referenced when the setting value is "1", table B2, which is referenced when the setting value is "2", table B3, which is referenced when the setting value is "3", table B4, which is referenced when the setting value is "4", table B5, which is referenced when the setting value is "5", and table B6, which is referenced when the setting value is "6".

In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 or the second start winning slot 16, one win/loss random number within the numerical range of 0 to 65535 is obtained. Then, depending on the setting value set in the pachinko machine P and the game status at the time the win/loss lottery is conducted, one of the above-mentioned win/loss random number determination tables 110 is selected, and the result of the win/loss lottery is determined based on the obtained win/loss random number and the selected win/loss random number determination table 110.

As shown in Figure 6(a), according to Table A1, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1373, it is determined to be a big win, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined to be a small win, if the win/loss random number is between 3310 and 3964, it is determined to be a win for the time-saving grant, and if the win/loss random number is any other than these (0 to 999, 1374 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in this Table A1, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/175, the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving grant is approximately 1/100.

As shown in Figure 7(a), according to Table A2, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1384, it is determined to be a big win, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined to be a small win, if the win/loss random number is between 3310 and 3964, it is determined to be a win for the time-saving grant, and if the win/loss random number is any other than these (0 to 999, 1385 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in Table A2, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/170, the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving grant is approximately 1/100.

As shown in Figure 8(a), according to Table A3, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1396, it is determined to be a big win, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309 it is determined to be a small win, if the win/loss random number is between 3310 and 3964 it is determined to be a win for the time-saving grant, and if the win/loss random number is any other than these (0 to 999, 1397 to 1999, 3965 to 65535) it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in Table A3, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/165, the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving grant is approximately 1/100.

As shown in Figure 9(a), according to Table A4, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1408, it is determined to be a big win, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined to be a small win, if the win/loss random number is between 3310 and 3964, it is determined to be a win for the time-saving grant, and if the win/loss random number is any other than these (0 to 999, 1409 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in Table A4, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/160, the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving grant is approximately 1/100.

As shown in Figure 10(a), according to Table A5, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1421, it is determined to be a big win, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309 it is determined to be a small win, if the win/loss random number is between 3310 and 3964 it is determined to be a win for the time-saving grant, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1422 to 1999, 3965 to 65535) it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in Table A5, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/155, the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving grant is approximately 1/100.

As shown in Figure 11(a), according to Table A6, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1434, it is determined to be a big win, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309 it is determined to be a small win, if the win/loss random number is between 3310 and 3964 it is determined to be a win for the time-saving grant, and if the win/loss random number is any other than these (0 to 999, 1435 to 1999, 3965 to 65535) it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in Table A6, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/150, the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving grant is approximately 1/100.

Also, as shown in Figure 6(b), according to table B1, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1484, it is determined to be a big win, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309 it is determined to be a small win, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1485 to 1999, 3310 to 65535) it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a big win in this table B1 is approximately 1/135, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As shown in Figure 7(b), according to Table B2, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1503, it is determined to be a big win, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined to be a small win, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1504 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a big win in Table B2 is approximately 1/130, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As shown in Figure 8(b), according to Table B3, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1523, it is determined to be a big win, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined to be a small win, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1524 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a big win in this Table B3 is approximately 1/125, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As shown in Figure 9(b), according to table B4, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1545, it is determined to be a big win, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309 it is determined to be a small win, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1546 to 1999, 3310 to 65535) it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a big win in this table B4 is approximately 1/120, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As shown in Figure 10(b), according to Table B5, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1568, it is determined to be a big win, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309 it is determined to be a small win, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1569 to 1999, 3310 to 65535) it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a big win in this Table B5 is approximately 1/115, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As shown in Figure 11(b), according to table B6, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1594, it is determined to be a big win, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309 it is determined to be a small win, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1595 to 1999, 3310 to 65535) it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a big win in this table B6 is approximately 1/110, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As described above, when comparing the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in a high-probability game state and the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in a low-probability game state (for example, table A1 and table B1), which have the same associated setting values, the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in a high-probability game state is set to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in a low-probability game state.
Furthermore, the numerical range of the win/loss random number that is determined to be a jackpot in the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in the low-probability gaming state is set to be included in the numerical range of the win/loss random number that is determined to be a jackpot in the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in the high-probability gaming state, which is associated with the same set value as the win/loss random number determination table 110 (specifically, the lower limit value of the numerical range that is determined to be a jackpot is the same, and the upper limit value is different). In other words, the win/loss random number that is determined to be a jackpot in the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in the low-probability gaming state will also be determined to be a jackpot in the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in the high-probability gaming state, which is associated with the same set value.
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, as described above, the lower limit value of the numerical range of the win/lose random number that determines whether a jackpot has been won is set to be the same and the upper limit value is set to be different, but this is not limited to this, and the upper limit value may be set to be the same and the lower limit value to be different.

In addition, in both tables, the numerical range of the win/loss random number that determines whether a small win has occurred is outside the numerical range of the win/loss random number that determines whether a large win has occurred, and the upper and lower limits of the numerical range are set to be the same, so that the probability of winning a small win is the same. In other words, regardless of the set value and game state (high probability game state, low probability game state), a small win is determined to have the same probability.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, it is possible to win a small prize in a win/lose lottery based on either the first special chart random number or the second special chart random number, but this is not limited to this, and it may be set so that it is possible to win a small prize only in a win/lose lottery based on the first special chart random number, or it may be set so that it is possible to win a small prize only in a win/lose lottery based on the second special chart random number.

In addition, in all of the win/loss random number determination tables 110 (Table A1, Table A2, Table A3, Table A4, Table A5, and Table A6) referenced in the low-probability game state, the numerical range of the win/loss random number that is determined to be a win for the time-saving award is outside the numerical range of the win/loss random number that is determined to be a win for the jackpot, and the upper and lower limits of the numerical range are set to be the same, so that the probability of winning the time-saving award is the same. Therefore, during the normal game state, regardless of the set value, the probability of winning the time-saving award is the same.
As mentioned above, since the win/loss lottery in game states other than the normal game state does not determine whether or not a time-saving bonus will be awarded, none of the win/loss random number determination tables 110 (Table B1, Table B2, Table B3, Table B4, Table B5, and Table B6) referenced in the high-probability game state have a numerical range for determining whether or not a time-saving bonus will be awarded. Therefore, during the high-probability game state, it is not determined that a time-saving bonus will be awarded.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the numerical ranges determined to represent a big win, a small win, and a time-saving bonus are all made up of continuous numerical ranges, but they are not limited to this and may be made up of discontinuous numerical ranges that include losing numbers in between.

The special pattern random number determination table 111 is used to determine the type of special pattern, and as shown in Figures 12 (a) and (b), it includes a first start winning gate determination table 111a which is referenced when a winning/losing lottery is held using a first special pattern random number, and a second start winning gate determination table 111b which is referenced when a winning/losing lottery is held using a second special pattern random number.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 or the second start winning slot 16, one special symbol random number is obtained within a numerical range of 0 to 199. Then, when the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery is performed, either the first start winning slot determination table 111a or the second start winning slot determination table 111b is selected according to the start winning slot into which the gaming ball entered, and the type of special symbol is determined based on the obtained special symbol random number and the selected special symbol random number determination table 111.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine P, there are four types of jackpot symbols (X1, X2, X3, X4) that are set as special symbols (hereafter referred to as jackpot symbols) when a jackpot is won, two types of small prize symbols (Y1, Y2) that are set as special symbols (hereafter referred to as small prize symbols) when a small prize is won, seven types of time-saving symbols (J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7) that are set as special symbols (hereafter referred to as time-saving symbols) when a time-saving bonus is awarded, and two types of losing symbols (Z1, Z2) that are set as special symbols (hereafter referred to as losing symbols) when a loss occurs.

12(a), according to the first start winning port determination table 111a, in the event of a jackpot win, if the special pattern random number is 0 to 1, the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, if the special pattern random number is 2 to 139, the jackpot pattern X2 is determined, and if the special pattern random number is 140 to 199, the jackpot pattern X3 is determined. That is, in this first start winning port determination table 111a, in the event of a jackpot win, the probability that the jackpot pattern X1 will be determined is 1%, the probability that the jackpot pattern X2 will be determined is 69%, and the probability that the jackpot pattern X3 will be determined is 30%.
In addition, in the event of a small prize win, the small prize symbol Y1 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 99, and the small prize symbol Y2 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 100 and 199. In other words, in this first start winning port determination table 111a, in the event of a small prize win, the probability that the small prize symbol Y1 and the small prize symbol Y2 are determined are both 50%.
In addition, in the event that a time-saving award is won, if the special pattern random number is between 0 and 99, time-saving pattern J1 is determined, if the special pattern random number is between 100 and 149, time-saving pattern J2 is determined, if the special pattern random number is between 150 and 183, time-saving pattern J3 is determined, if the special pattern random number is between 184 and 193, time-saving pattern J4 is determined, if the special pattern random number is between 194 and 197, time-saving pattern J5 is determined, and if the special pattern random number is between 198 and 199, time-saving pattern J6 is determined. In other words, in this first start winning slot determination table 111a, if a time-saving bonus is awarded, the probability that time-saving pattern J1 will be determined is 50%, the probability that time-saving pattern J2 will be determined is 25%, the probability that time-saving pattern J3 will be determined is 17%, the probability that time-saving pattern J4 will be determined is 5%, the probability that time-saving pattern J5 will be determined is 2%, and the probability that time-saving pattern J6 will be determined is 1%.
In addition, in the case of a loss, a loss symbol Z1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 19, and a loss symbol Z2 is determined when the special symbol random number is 20 to 199. That is, in this first start winning port determination table 111a, in the case of a loss, the probability that a loss symbol Z1 is determined is 10%, and the probability that a loss symbol Z2 is determined is 90%.

12(b), according to the second start winning port determination table 111b, in the event of a jackpot win, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined if the special symbol random number is between 0 and 139, and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined if the special symbol random number is between 140 and 199. In other words, in this second start winning port determination table 111b, in the event of a jackpot win, the probability that the jackpot symbol X1 will be determined is 70%, and the probability that the jackpot symbol X4 will be determined is 30%.
In addition, in the case where the time-saving award is won, the time-saving symbol J7 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 199 (i.e., regardless of the value of the special symbol random number). In other words, in this second start winning slot determination table 111b, the probability that the time-saving symbol J7 is determined when the time-saving award is won is 100%.
As shown in Figure 12 (b), the type of small win symbol that is determined in the event of a small win and the probability of determining that type, as well as the type of losing symbol that is determined in the event of a loss and the probability of determining that type, are set to the same content as the first start winning port determination table 111a.

The special electric device operation table 112 controls the special game that is executed when a jackpot is won and the small jackpot game that is executed when a small jackpot is won, and is referenced to activate the large prize opening solenoid 18c and the distribution member solenoid 59c during the special game and small jackpot game. In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 13(a) to 13(d), the special electric device operation table 112 includes a first operation table 112a that is referenced when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a second operation table 112b that is referenced when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a third operation table 112c that is referenced when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined, and a fourth operation table 112d that is referenced when a small jackpot is won and small jackpot symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a special game is executed by referring to a first operation table 112a shown in Figure 13(a). According to this first operation table 112a, a round game is executed a total of 10 times, from round 1 to round 10, which ends when either the large prize opening 18 remains open for 29.0 seconds or ten game balls enter the large prize opening 18. Furthermore, during the execution of each round game, the opening/closing door 18b moves from the closed position to the open position, remains in the open position for 29.0 seconds, and then moves back from the open position to the closed position (opening/closing pattern), thereby opening the large prize opening 18 only once, and the time for which the large prize opening 18 is closed between each round game (i.e., the interval time) is set to 2.0 seconds.
13(a), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the allocating member 59 operates in a manner (operation pattern) in which it stops (is located) at the first position during each of the first, second, fourth to tenth rounds of play. On the other hand, during the third round of play, the allocating member 59 operates in a manner in which it stops at the second position.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a special game is executed by referring to the second operation table 112b shown in Figure 13(b). According to this second operation table 112b, a round game that ends under the same conditions as the first operation table 112a is executed a total of 10 times from round 1 to round 10. The opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door 18b and the interval time are also set to the same contents as the first operation table 112a.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13(b), when the jackpot pattern X2 is determined, the allocating member 59 operates in a manner to stop at the first position during each of the first, second, fourth to tenth rounds of play, in the same manner as when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, and furthermore, during the third round of play, the allocating member 59 also operates in a manner to stop at the first position.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined, a special game is executed by referring to the third operation table 112c shown in Figure 13(c). According to this third operation table 112c, a round game is executed four times in total, from round 1 to round 4, which ends under the same conditions as the first operation table 112a and the second operation table 112b. The opening and closing pattern and interval time of the opening and closing door 18b are set to the same contents as the first operation table 112a and the second operation table 112b.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13(c), when the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined, the allocating member 59 operates to stay at the first position during the first, second and fourth rounds of play, in the same manner as when the jackpot symbol X1 and the jackpot symbol X2 are determined, and further, during the third round of play, the allocating member 59 operates to stay at the first position, in the same manner as when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, the large prize opening 18 is opened continuously for 29.0 seconds during three rounds of play (specific round play), and the distribution member 59 is stopped at the second position, so that as long as game balls are shot toward the second game area 12b, the game balls will enter the large prize opening 18 and a predetermined number of game balls can be reliably admitted to the specific area 57.
In contrast, when the jackpot pattern X2, X3 or X4 is determined, in three rounds of play, the large prize opening 18 is opened continuously for 29.0 seconds, but the distribution member 59 remains in the first position, so even if a game ball enters the large prize opening 18, the game ball will all enter the general area 58, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the specific area 57.

Furthermore, when a small prize is won and the small prize symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, a small prize game is executed by referring to a fourth operation table 112d shown in Fig. 13(d). According to this fourth operation table 112d, the large prize opening 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds, and when 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open, the large prize opening 18 is closed.
As shown in FIG. 13(d), during a small win game, the sorting member 59 operates in such a manner that it stays at the first position.
In this way, in a small prize game, the large prize opening 18 is only open for 0.05 seconds, making it nearly impossible to get a game ball to enter the large prize opening 18. Also, since the distribution member 50 stays in the first position during a small prize game, even if a game ball does enter the large prize opening 18, the game ball will enter the general area 58, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the specific area 57.

The game state setting table 113 is used to set the game state after the end of a special game when the special game is executed, and the game state after a time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7 is determined in a win/lose lottery during a normal game state to be awarded a time-saving symbol.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a special game is executed, the game state after the special game ends is determined based on the type of jackpot symbol determined at the time of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game and whether a predetermined number of game balls (one in this embodiment) entered the specific area 57 during the special game. Furthermore, if a time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, or J7 is determined as a win/loss symbol during the normal game state, a game state determined for each time-saving symbol is set. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, whether or not game balls can enter the specific area 57 is determined according to the type of the determined jackpot symbol, and essentially, the determined jackpot symbol determines whether or not a transition to a high-probability time-saving game state will occur after the special game based on that determination ends.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, after a jackpot is won in a low-probability time-saving game state and the game transitions to a high-probability game state, jackpot symbols associated with the high-probability game state setting are determined consecutively without transitioning to a low-probability game state, and when the number of consecutive jackpot symbols determined (hereinafter referred to as the number of consecutive high-probability settings) reaches a predetermined upper limit (10,000 in this embodiment), the low-probability game state is forcibly set after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol ends. In other words, if the jackpot symbols are determined consecutively up to the upper limit number of times without transitioning to a low-probability game state through the execution of a special game, the low-probability game state is forcibly set after the special game based on the determination ends, even if the conditions for setting the high-probability game state are met.
Similarly, after a jackpot is won in a non-time-shortened game state and the game transitions to a time-shortened game state (a second time-shortened game state in this embodiment), jackpot symbols associated with the time-shortened game state setting are determined consecutively without transitioning to the non-time-shortened game state, and when the number of times that the jackpot symbols are determined consecutively (hereinafter referred to as the number of consecutive time-shortened settings) reaches a predetermined upper limit (10,000 times in this embodiment), the non-time-shortened game state is forcibly set after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol ends. In other words, if the above-mentioned jackpot symbols are determined consecutively up to the upper limit number of times without transitioning to the non-time-shortened game state through the execution of a special game, the non-time-shortened game state is forcibly set after the special game based on the determination ends, even if the conditions for setting the time-shortened game state are met.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this form, given the set probability of winning a jackpot and the probability of determining each jackpot pattern, it is impossible for the number of consecutive high probability settings or consecutive time-saving settings to reach 10,000, and in effect, the high probability game state or time-saving game state will continue until the conditions for setting a low probability game state or a non-time-saving game state are met.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Figures 14(a) to (j), the game status setting table 113 includes a first game status setting table 113a that is referenced when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 during special play; a second game status setting table 113b that is referenced when a jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during special play; a third game status setting table 113c that is referenced when a jackpot symbol X4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during special play; a fourth game status setting table 113d that is referenced when a time-saving symbol J1 is determined in a win/loss lottery during normal play mode; and a fourth game status setting table 113d that is referenced when a time-saving symbol J2 is determined in a win/loss lottery during normal play mode. a fifth game state setting table 113e that is referenced when a win/loss lottery during the normal game state results in a win/loss to grant a time-saving bonus and time-saving symbol J3 is determined; a sixth game state setting table 113f that is referenced when a win/loss lottery during the normal game state results in a win/loss to grant a time-saving bonus and time-saving symbol J4 is determined; a seventh game state setting table 113g that is referenced when a win/loss lottery during the normal game state results in a win/loss to grant a time-saving bonus and time-saving symbol J5 is determined; a ninth game state setting table 113i that is referenced when a win/loss lottery during the normal game state results in a win/loss to grant a time-saving bonus and time-saving symbol J6 is determined; and a tenth game state setting table 113j that is referenced when a win/loss lottery during the normal game state results in a win/loss to grant a time-saving bonus and time-saving symbol J7 is determined.

14(a), when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 during a special game, if the number of consecutive high-probability setting times has not reached a predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends is set to a high-probability game state, and the number of times the high-probability game state continues (hereinafter referred to as the high-probability number of times) is set to 10,000. Accordingly, if the number of consecutive time-shortening setting times has not reached a predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends is set to a second time-shortening game state, and the number of time-shortening times is set to 10,000.
That is, in the above case, if the number of consecutive high probability settings and the number of consecutive time-saving settings have not reached the upper limit number, after the special game ends, the high probability game state and the second time-saving game state (i.e., the high probability time-saving game state) will continue until the results of the win/lose lottery are derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability game state is approximately 1/110 to 1/135, so in effect, the high probability time-saving game state will continue until a jackpot is won again.

In contrast, in the above case, when the number of consecutive high-probability settings has reached a predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends is set to a low-probability game state, and when the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached a predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends is set to a non-time-saving game state.

As described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the allocating member 59 stays at the second position during the three rounds of the special game, and therefore, as long as game balls are being shot into the second game area 12b, a predetermined number of game balls will always enter the specific area 57. In other words, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, as long as game balls are being shot into the second game area 12b, a high-probability time-shortened game state will be set with certainty.
Also, although not specifically shown, if a jackpot pattern X1 is determined but a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the special game ends is set to a low-probability time-saving game state and a non-time-saving game state (i.e., a normal game state).

14(b), if the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and the predetermined number of game balls does not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the special game ends is set to a low-probability time-shortened game state. Accordingly, if the number of consecutive time-shortened settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit and the game state at the time of the jackpot win was the time-shortened game state (i.e., the first time-shortened game state), the game state after the special game ends is set to the second time-shortened game state, and the number of time-shortened times is set to 10,000.
That is, in the above case, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit number and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is in the time-saving game state, the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state (i.e., the second low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the result of the win/lose lottery is derived 10,000 times without winning the jackpot. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability game state is approximately 1/150 to 1/175, so in effect, the second low-probability time-saving game state will continue until the jackpot is won again.

In contrast, in the above cases, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit and the game state at the time of the jackpot win was a non-time-saving game state, the game state after the special game ends will be set to a non-time-saving game state. Similarly, even if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends will be set to a non-time-saving game state. In other words, in either case, the game state after the special game ends will be set to a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state (i.e., a normal game state).

As mentioned above, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, the distribution member 59 remains in the first position during the three rounds of the special game, and the predetermined number of game balls does not enter the specific area 57. In other words, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, either the second low-probability time-saving game state or the normal game state is always set.

14(c), if the jackpot symbol X4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the special game ends is set to a low-probability time-shortening game state. Accordingly, if the number of consecutive time-shortening settings has not reached a predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends is set to a second time-shortening game state, and the number of time-shortening settings is set to 100.
In other words, in the above case, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state (i.e., the second low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the results of the win/lose lottery are derived 100 times without winning a jackpot.

In contrast, in the above case, when the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends is set to a non-time-saving game state. In other words, in this case, the game state after the special game ends is set to a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state (i.e., a normal game state).

As mentioned above, when jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the allocating member 59 remains in the first position during the three rounds of the special game, and the predetermined number of game balls does not enter the specific area 57. In other words, when jackpot symbol X4 is determined, either the second low-probability time-saving game state or the normal game state is always set.

As shown in Figure 14(d), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win/lose award for time-saving and determines time-saving symbol J1, the game state after that determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing from the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and first time-saving game state (i.e., the first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the win/lose lottery results are derived 10 times without a jackpot being won.

As shown in Figure 14 (e), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win/lose award for time-saving and determines time-saving symbol J2, the game state after that determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing from the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 20. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the results of the win/lose lottery are determined 20 times without a jackpot being won.

As shown in Figure 14 (f), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win/lose award for time-saving and the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the game state after that determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing from the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 30. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the win/lose lottery results are determined 30 times without a jackpot being won.

As shown in Figure 14 (g), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win/lose award for time-saving and determines the time-saving symbol J4, the game state after that determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing from the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 50. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the win/lose lottery results are derived 50 times without a jackpot being won.

As shown in Figure 14 (h), if a win/loss lottery during the normal game state results in a win/loss award for time-saving and determines the time-saving symbol J5, the game state after that determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing from the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 100. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the win/loss lottery results are derived 100 times without a jackpot being won.

As shown in Figure 14(i), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win/lose award for time-saving and the time-saving symbol J6 is determined, the game state after that determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing from the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 1000. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the win/lose lottery results are determined 1000 times without a jackpot being won.

As shown in Figure 14 (j), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win/lose award for the time-saving feature and determines the time-saving symbol J7, the game state after that determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing from the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving plays is set to one. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the result of the win/lose lottery is determined once without a jackpot being won.

In addition, when the time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, or J7 is determined as described above, the first low-probability time-saving game state described above will be set after the special symbol (time-saving symbol) stops changing (when the next special symbol starts changing).

As described above, the variation pattern table 114 is used to determine the variation pattern command.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the special symbol is determined as described above, a variation pattern command is determined based on the result of the determination. As described above, the variation pattern command is used to determine the variation pattern of the variation presentation, and the variation pattern command determines the mode and variation time of the variation presentation (the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol). Note that in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the variation presentation is divided into a first half and a second half, and the mode and variation time of the first half of the variation presentation, as well as the mode and variation time of the second half of the variation presentation, are both determined by the variation pattern command.
Specifically, the determined variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 determines the specific form of the variation presentation (for example, the image to be displayed on the display unit 21a) based on the received variation pattern command.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, multiple types of variation pattern commands are provided, and each variation pattern command is associated with a variation pattern table 114. The type of variation pattern command to be determined and the determination ratio are set for each variation pattern table 114.

The pachinko machine P of this embodiment is equipped with, as the variation pattern table 114, table A which is referenced when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 during normal gaming mode or the first low-probability time-saving gaming mode (i.e., during left-hand play), and table B and table C which are referenced when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16 during the second low-probability time-saving gaming mode or the high-probability time-saving gaming mode (i.e., during right-hand play) (see Figure 15).

Here, in pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the game transitions to at least either the second time-saving game state or the high-probability game state, and then consecutive jackpots are won without transitioning to the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state (consecutive jackpots won from the first win while at least either the second time-saving game state or the high-probability game state is continuing; hereafter referred to as consecutive jackpots), table B is referenced if the consecutive jackpot condition, in which the number of consecutive jackpots won reaches a predetermined number (for example, three times), is not met, and table C is referenced if the consecutive jackpot condition is met.

When a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 or the second start winning slot 16, one fluctuation pattern random number within the numerical range of 0 to 249 is obtained, and a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on this obtained fluctuation pattern random number, the special symbol determined as described above, the current reserved number (first reserved number or second reserved number), the current game status, and the fluctuation pattern table 114 according to whether the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot count condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaching a predetermined number) is met.

Although not specifically shown, the fluctuation pattern table 114 also includes a table that is referenced when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16 during normal gaming mode or the first low-probability time-saving gaming mode, or when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 during the second low-probability time-saving gaming mode or the high-probability time-saving gaming mode. However, as long as the instructions for shooting the gaming ball displayed on the performance display device 21 are followed, the gaming ball will only enter the first start winning slot 15 during normal gaming mode or the first low-probability time-saving gaming mode, and will only enter the second start winning slot 16 during the second low-probability time-saving gaming mode or the high-probability time-saving gaming mode. Therefore, the entry of a game ball into the second start winning slot 16 during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the entry of a game ball into the first start winning slot 15 during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, are irregular. In the following, such irregular ball entries will not be taken into consideration, and the explanation will be given assuming that a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, and that a game ball enters the second start winning slot 16 during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state.

When determining a variation pattern command by referring to Table A (when determining a variation pattern command based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot 15), the first reserved number at that time is referenced. On the other hand, when determining a variation pattern command by referring to Table B or Table C (when determining a variation pattern command based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot 16), the second reserved number at that time is referenced.

As shown in Figure 15(a), according to Table A, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined (i.e., the result of the lottery is a losing symbol) and the current first reserved number is 0 or 1, if the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, a fluctuation pattern command "00H" is determined that corresponds to a fluctuation pattern called "13-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 13 seconds), and if the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 229, a fluctuation pattern command "00H" is determined that corresponds to a fluctuation pattern called "20-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 13 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 7 seconds). When the fluctuation pattern random number is between 230 and 239, a fluctuation pattern command "02H" is determined to be associated with a fluctuation pattern called "45-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 20 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 25 seconds); and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, a fluctuation pattern command "03H" is determined to be associated with a fluctuation pattern called "60-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 20 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 40 seconds).

In addition, if a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current first reserved number is 2 or more, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, the fluctuation pattern command "04H" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "3-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 3 seconds), when the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 229, the fluctuation pattern command "01H" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation", when the fluctuation pattern random number is 230 to 239, the fluctuation pattern command "02H" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation", and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "03H" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation".

Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern command "BAH" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "18-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 18 seconds), and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 10 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "B3H" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation".
Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, the fluctuation pattern command "BBH" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern "30-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 30 seconds), and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 10 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "B4H" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern "60-second fluctuation".
Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, the fluctuation pattern command "BCH" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "36-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 36 seconds), and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 10 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "B5H" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation".

Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J4 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern command "BDH" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "46-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 46 seconds), and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 10 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "B6H" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation".
Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J5 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, the fluctuation pattern command "BEH" associated with the fluctuation pattern "66-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 66 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 10 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "B7H" associated with the fluctuation pattern "60-second fluctuation" is determined.
Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J6 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, the fluctuation pattern command "BFH" associated with the fluctuation pattern "68-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 68 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 10 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "B8H" associated with the fluctuation pattern "60-second fluctuation" is determined.
Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J7 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 249 (whatever the value of the fluctuation pattern random number), the fluctuation pattern command "B9H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

Furthermore, when the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined (i.e., the result of the lottery is a small win), regardless of the current first reserved number, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, the fluctuation pattern command "22H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "23H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

Furthermore, when the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3 is determined (i.e., the result of the lottery is a jackpot), regardless of the current first reserved number, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, the fluctuation pattern command "A2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "A3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

As shown in Figure 15(b), according to Table B, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second reserved number is 0 or 1, if the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, the fluctuation pattern command "00H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "13-second fluctuation" is determined, if the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 239, the fluctuation pattern command "02H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "03H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, if a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second reserved number is 2 or more, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, the fluctuation pattern command "04H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "3-second fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 239, the fluctuation pattern command "02H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "03H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, the fluctuation pattern command "22H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "23H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, the fluctuation pattern command "A2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "A3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

As shown in Figure 15(c), according to Table C, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second reserved number is 0 or 1, if the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, the fluctuation pattern command "05H" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern "26-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 26 seconds); if the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 239, the fluctuation pattern command "06H" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern "90-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 30 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 60 seconds); and if the fluctuation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "07H" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern "120-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 30 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 90 seconds).

In addition, if a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second reserved number is 2 or more, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 209, the fluctuation pattern command "08H" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern "6-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 6 seconds), when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 210 and 239, the fluctuation pattern command "06H" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern "90-second fluctuation", and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "07H" is determined, which is associated with the fluctuation pattern "120-second fluctuation".

In addition, when the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, the fluctuation pattern command "26H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "90-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "27H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "120-second fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, the fluctuation pattern command "A6H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "90-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "A7H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "120-second fluctuation" is determined.

In this way, the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern determined by table C is set to be longer than the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern determined by table B. In other words, in the second low-probability time-shortened game state and the high-probability time-shortened game state, the proportion of long fluctuation times determined is higher after the above-mentioned condition for the number of consecutive jackpots is met (after the number of consecutive jackpots has reached a predetermined number) than before the condition for the number of consecutive jackpots is met (before the number of consecutive jackpots has reached a predetermined number).
As a result, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, after the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number condition is met, the interval between one jackpot and the next jackpot can be longer than before the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number condition is met, and the number of special games executed per unit time (number of jackpots won per unit time) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of situations in which a large number of special games are executed in a short period of time, causing a sudden increase in the number of prize balls won by the player, and leading to extremely high levels of gambling.

The variation pattern command determined as above is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the specific mode of the first half of the variation performance and the specific mode of the second half of the variation performance are determined based on the variation pattern command. Then, the variation performance is executed according to the specific mode determined in this way, and the sum of the variation time of the first half and the variation time of the second half set in the variation pattern command becomes the time from the start to the end of the variation performance (variable display of special symbols).
For example, if the determined fluctuation pattern command is "02H" (the fluctuation time for the first half is 20 seconds, and the fluctuation time for the second half is 25 seconds), the sum of the fluctuation time for the first half and the fluctuation time for the second half, 45 seconds (= 20 seconds + 25 seconds), will be the fluctuation time for the entire fluctuation performance (the entire fluctuation display of the special pattern).
The fluctuation pattern commands "00H", "04H", "05H", "BAH", "BBH", "BCH", "BDH", "BEH", and "BFH" have a first half fluctuation time of "0 seconds". When these fluctuation pattern commands are determined, the entire fluctuation performance is executed in the manner determined according to the fluctuation pattern command during the corresponding second half fluctuation time.

In addition, based on the above-mentioned change time, a change performance is performed on the performance display device 21, and a change display of the special pattern is performed on the special pattern display device (first special pattern display device 30 or second special pattern display device 31).
Specifically, if the starting winning slot into which the gaming ball has entered is the first starting winning slot 15, the first special symbol display device 30 will be displayed flashing during the aforementioned variable time, and if the starting winning slot into which the gaming ball has entered is the second starting winning slot 16, the second special symbol display device 31 will be displayed flashing during the aforementioned variable time. After the variable time has elapsed, the determined special symbol is displayed statically. As will be described later, this special symbol is displayed statically until the predetermined static display time has elapsed.

Regarding the mode of the variable presentation, rather than determining either the mode of the first half of the variable presentation or the mode of the second half of the variable presentation based on the variable pattern command, it is also possible to determine other commands in addition to the variable pattern command, and determine the mode of the first half of the variable presentation based on one of the commands, and determine the mode of the second half of the variable presentation based on the other command.
Furthermore, instead of dividing the variable performance into a first half and a second half, it may be divided into more parts, with the aspect of each part being determined based on the corresponding command.

Next, the processing related to normal gameplay will be explained.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball that is launched by a launching device (not shown) and flows down the game area 12 passes through the gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 and open said movable piece 16b. If a winning normal symbol is selected by the lottery, the movable piece 16b opens for a predetermined time, and the second start winning opening 16 is opened, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16.
The lottery for this normal symbol is conducted based on a winning determination random number obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 20, and a winning determination random number determination table 116 stored in the main ROM 102 for determining the random number.

When the gaming ball passes through gate 20, the above-mentioned winning determination random number is obtained, and the random number value is stored in the general map reserve memory area of main RAM 103, up to a maximum of four. Specifically, this general map reserve memory area is composed of a total of four memory units, from the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit, and the numbers are stored starting from the first memory unit in the order of passing through gate 20. Furthermore, if winning determination random numbers have already been stored in several memory units, the winning determination random number is stored in the memory unit with the smallest number among the empty memory units. Therefore, if four winning determination random numbers have already been stored in the general map reserve memory area, even if the gaming ball passes through gate 20, the winning determination random number related to this passage will not be stored in the general map reserve memory area.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the winning determination random number is a hardware random number built into the main control board 100. This winning determination random number is updated according to a set rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed each time the random number sequence completes one cycle, and the start value is changed each time the system is reset.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the number of winning determination random numbers stored in the regular number reserve memory area (hereinafter referred to as the regular number reserve number) is stored in a regular number reserve number counter (not specifically shown).

The winning determination random number judgment table 116 is used to determine whether or not a winning has occurred by drawing lots for normal symbols, and as shown in Figures 16(a) to (c), it comprises a first judgment table 116a which is referenced during a non-time-shortened game state (i.e., during a normal game state), during a special game, and during a small winning game, a second judgment table 116b which is referenced during a first time-shortened game state (i.e., during a first low-probability time-shortened game state), and a third judgment table 116c which is referenced during a second time-shortened game state (i.e., during a second low-probability time-shortened game state or a high-probability time-shortened game state).
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a gaming ball passes through gate 20, one winning random number within a numerical range of 0 to 65535 is obtained. If the game state at the time the lottery for the normal symbol is drawn is a non-time-saving game state, or if the game state at the time the lottery for the normal symbol is drawn is a special game state or a small win game state, first judgment table 116a is selected, and the lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the obtained winning random number and the selected first judgment table 116a. If the game state at the time the lottery for the normal symbol is drawn is a first-time-saving game state, second judgment table 116b is selected, and the lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the obtained winning random number and the selected second judgment table 116b. If the game state at the time the lottery for the normal symbol is drawn is a second-time-saving game state, third judgment table 116c is selected, and the lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the obtained winning random number and the selected third judgment table 116c.

16(a), according to the first judgment table 116a, a win is determined when the winning determination random number is 1, and a loss is determined when the winning determination random number is any other number (0, 2 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning in this first judgment table 116a is 1/65536.
16(b), according to the second determination table 116b, a win is determined when the winning determination random number is 1 to 5, and a loss is determined when the winning determination random number is other than these (0, 6 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning in this second determination table 116b is 5/65536.
16(c), according to the third determination table 116c, a win is determined when the winning determination random number is between 1 and 65500, and a loss is determined when the winning determination random number is other than this (0, 65501 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning in this third determination table 116c is approximately 99/100.
If the regular pattern is drawn and a winning pattern is selected, the winning pattern will be determined, and if the regular pattern is drawn and a losing pattern is selected, the losing pattern will be determined.

The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment also includes a normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117 and a second start winning slot opening control table 118, which are tables for determining the normal symbol variation pattern and controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 16b.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117 is for determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol. As described above, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed by a gaming ball passing through the gate 20, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined based on this normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 17, when the game state is a non-time-saving game state, or during a special game or a small win game, a normal symbol variation pattern with a 3-second variation time is determined; when the game state is a first time-saving game state, a normal symbol variation pattern with a 2-second variation time is determined; and when the game state is a second time-saving game state, a normal symbol variation pattern with a 0.5-second variation time is determined. Once the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 (see Fig. 3) flashes for the variation time set for this normal symbol variation pattern. When the normal symbol lottery results in a winning symbol being determined, the normal symbol display device 32 lights up; when the lottery results in a losing symbol being determined, the normal symbol display device 32 turns off.
In this specification, the flashing display of the ordinary pattern display device 32 is referred to as "change in ordinary pattern," and the lighting or turning off of the ordinary pattern display device 32 is referred to as "stop display of ordinary pattern,""stop of change in ordinary pattern,""stop of change in ordinary pattern," etc.

In addition, the second start winning opening control table 118 is referenced to control the operation of the movable piece 16b provided in the second start winning opening 16.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the normal symbol display device 32 is lit, the movable piece 16b of the second start winning hole 16 opens and closes in a manner determined by the second start winning hole opening control table 118. Specifically, when the game state is a non-time-saving game state, or during a special game or a small win game, as shown in FIG. 18, the start winning hole solenoid 16c is energized for 0.05 seconds (= 0.05 seconds × 1 time), so that the movable piece 16b of the second start winning hole 16 is opened for 0.05 seconds. Also, when the game state is a first time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 18, the start winning hole solenoid 16c is energized for 0.2 seconds (= 0.2 seconds × 1 time), so that the movable piece 16b of the second start winning hole 16 is opened for 0.2 seconds. Also, when the game state is the second time-saving game state, as shown in Figure 18, the start winning port solenoid 16c is energized for 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds x 2 times), so that the movable piece 16b of the second start winning port 16 is open for a total of 1.8 seconds.

As described above, conditions for opening and closing the second start winning port 16 are set for both the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, and depending on the content of these conditions, the second start winning port 16 is more likely to be maintained in an open state in the time-saving game state, making it easier for a game ball to enter the second start winning port 16 than in the non-time-saving game state.
Furthermore, in the first time-shortened game state among the time-shortened game states, the second start winning port 16 is more likely to be maintained in an open state than in the non-time-shortened game state, but the second start winning port 16 is less likely to be maintained in an open state than in the second time-shortened game state among the time-shortened game states. In other words, during the first time-shortened game state, it is easier for a ball to enter the second start winning port 16 than in the non-time-shortened game state, and during the second time-shortened game state, it is easier for a ball to enter the second start winning port 16 than in the first time-shortened game state. Therefore, during the second time-shortened game state, it is possible to acquire an opportunity to enter the lottery while suppressing the decrease in game balls that occurs as the game progresses, more than in the non-time-shortened game state and the first time-shortened game state, and more than in the non-time-shortened game state,

As mentioned above, when the game state is the time-saving game state, the processing to make it easier to maintain the second start winning port 16 in an open state involves the lottery for a normal symbol using the second judgment table 116b or the third judgment table 116c (a hit determination random number judgment table 116 set to have a higher probability of winning than in the non-time-saving game state), the determination of the variable time for the first time-saving game state and the variable time for the second time-saving game state (a variable time shorter than in the non-time-saving game state), and opening control using the opening pattern for the first time-saving game state and the opening pattern for the second time-saving game state (an opening pattern with a longer total opening time than in the non-time-saving game state), but this is not limited to this, and for example, at least one of the above processing steps may be performed.

(Outline of processing in pachinko machine P)
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the main control board 100 as the special game, normal game, and bonus game described above progresses will be explained using a flowchart.
First, the main processing of the main control board 100 will be described.
When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101, and the main CPU 101 executes the main processing shown in the flowchart of FIG.

In step 100, as an initialization process, the main CPU 101 reads a startup program from the main ROM 102 in response to power-on, initializes flags stored in the main RAM 103, and stores various commands to be sent to the sub-control board 300 in a performance transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 101.
In step 101, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number, which is referenced when updating the special symbol random number. This initial value update random number for the special symbol random number is used to determine the initial value of the special symbol random number. In other words, the special symbol random number is updated using the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at the time the update is started as its initial value. Then, once this random number range has been completed, the update of the special symbol random number continues using the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at that time as its initial value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 102.

In step 102, the main CPU 101 updates the fluctuation pattern random number used to determine the fluctuation pattern. After step 102 is completed, steps 101 and 102 are repeatedly executed until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

Next, the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 will be described.
A reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 100 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment), thereby executing the timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 20.

In step 200, the main CPU 101 executes a timer update process for updating various timer counters. Then, the process proceeds to step 201.
In addition, the pachinko machine P of this embodiment uses a countdown timer, and the timer counter is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 is executed, and the countdown stops when it reaches 0.
In step 201, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding "1", and if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is reset to "0", and if the random number counter has completed one cycle, the random number is updated from the value of the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at that time. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 202.

In step 202, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is an input from the gate detection sensor 20a, the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, and the specific area detection sensor 57a, and executes a sensor detection process to perform a predetermined process based on the result.Then, the process proceeds to the next step 203.
In step 203, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol-related control process for controlling the special symbol game, the special game, and the small win game. Then, the process proceeds to step 204.

In step 204, the main CPU 101 executes a general game-related control process for controlling the general game. Then, the process proceeds to step 205.
In step 205, the main CPU 101 executes error-related processing to control the occurrence and cancellation of various errors. Specifically, when the main control board 100 receives a door open command based on the opening of the front door 3 or a tray full command based on the full state of the tray 7, the main CPU 101 generates a corresponding error designation command (e.g., a door open command, a tray full command, etc.) and stores (sets) it in the performance transmission data storage area. Furthermore, when the main control board 100 no longer receives the above-mentioned commands, the main CPU 101 generates a corresponding error cancellation designation command (e.g., a door close command, a full cancellation command, etc.) and stores it in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, step 206.

In step 206, when detection signals from the general prize opening detection sensor 14a, the first start prize opening detection sensor 15a, the second start prize opening detection sensor 16a, and the special prize opening detection sensor 18a are input to the main CPU 101, the main CPU 101 updates the prize ball counters provided corresponding to each detection signal and sends a payout number designation command corresponding to each detection signal to the launch payout control board 200. When prize balls are paid out by the launch payout control board 200, a payout command is sent to the main control board 100 for each payout, and when the main CPU 101 receives this payout command, it decrements the prize ball counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 207.
In step 207, the main CPU 101 executes the creation of external information data for outputting the game status of the pachinko machine P to the outside of the pachinko machine P, start winning port solenoid data for opening and closing the movable piece 16b of the second start winning port 16, large winning port solenoid data for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning port 18, display data for various display devices (first special symbol display device 30, second special symbol display device 31, normal symbol display device 32, first special symbol reserve display device 38, second special symbol reserve display device 39, and normal symbol reserve display device 33), etc. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 208.

In step 208, the main CPU 101 executes output control processing, which performs port output to output signals for each data item created in step 207 above, and command transmission processing to transmit commands stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 is terminated.

Next, the sensor detection process in step 202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 300, the main CPU 101 executes gate detection processing for drawing a regular symbol lottery based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 20. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 301.
In step 301, the main CPU 101 executes a first start winning hole detection process for conducting a winning/losing lottery based on the game ball entering the first start winning hole 15. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 302.

In step 302, the main CPU 101 executes a process at the time of detection of the second start winning hole to perform a winning/losing lottery based on the game ball entering the second start winning hole 16. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 303.
In step 303, the main CPU 101 executes a specific area detection process for carrying out a predetermined process based on the gaming ball entering the specific area 57. Then, the sensor detection process ends.

Next, the gate detection process in step 300 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 400, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection sensor 20a. If it is determined that a detection signal has not been input from the gate detection sensor 20a, the gate detection process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a detection signal has been input from the gate detection sensor 20a, the process proceeds to the next step 401.
In step 401, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the normal map reserve counter (i.e., the current normal map reserve number) is less than "4". If it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (i.e., "4"), the gate detection processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than 4, the process proceeds to the next step 402.

In step 402, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the normal reserved number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 403.
In step 403, the main CPU 101 obtains a winning determination random number and stores it in the general map reserve memory area, and ends the gate detection processing.

Next, the processing when the first start winning slot is detected in step 301 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 23.
In step 500, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a. If it is determined that a detection signal has not been input from the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the first start winning hole detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a detection signal has been input from the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the process proceeds to the next step 501.
In step 501, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the first reserved number counter (i.e., the current first reserved number) is less than "4". If it determines that the value is not less than "4" (i.e., "4"), it ends the processing when the first start winning slot is detected. On the other hand, if it determines that the value is less than "4", it proceeds to the next step 502.

In step 502, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the first pending number counter by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step 503.
In step 503, the main CPU 101 acquires the winning/losing random number and stores it in the memory section of the first pending memory area. Then, the process proceeds to step 504.

In step 504, the main CPU 101 acquires the special symbol random number updated in the above-mentioned step 201 and stores it in the memory section of the first reserved memory area where the win/loss random number was stored in the above-mentioned step 503. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 505.
In step 505, the main CPU 101 acquires the variable pattern random number updated in step 102 described above and stores it in the memory section of the first reserved memory area where the win/loss random number was stored in step 503 described above. As a result, the acquired win/loss random number, special symbol random number, and variable pattern random number are all stored in the memory section of the same first reserved memory area. Then, proceed to the next step 506.

In step 506, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the first special symbol random number and the first time-saving symbol random number have been stored, and stores the command in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step 507.
In step 507, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is the non-time-shortened gaming state or the first time-shortened gaming state. If it is determined that the current gaming state is neither the non-time-shortened gaming state nor the first time-shortened gaming state (i.e., the current gaming state is the second time-shortened gaming state), the first start winning slot detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the non-time-shortened gaming state or the first time-shortened gaming state, the process proceeds to the next step 508.

In step 508, the main CPU 101 executes a pre-determination process for the stored first special random number to make various determinations regarding the winning/losing lottery before the fluctuation based on the first special random number begins (at the time the first special random number is acquired (stored as pending)). Then, the process when the first start winning slot is detected is terminated.

Next, the processing when the second start winning slot is detected in step 302 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 24.
In step 600, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a. If it is determined that a detection signal has not been input from the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, the second start winning hole detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a detection signal has been input from the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, the process proceeds to the next step 601.
In step 601, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the second reserved number counter (i.e., the current second reserved number) is less than "4". If it determines that the value is not less than "4" (i.e., "4"), it terminates the second start winning port detection process. On the other hand, if it determines that the value is less than "4", it proceeds to the next step 602.

In step 602, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the second reservation number counter by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step 603.
In step 603, the main CPU 101 acquires the winning/losing random number and stores it in the memory section of the second reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to step 604.

In step 604, the main CPU 101 acquires the special symbol random number updated in step 201 and stores it in the memory section of the second reserved memory area where the win/loss random number was stored in step 603. Then, the process proceeds to step 605.
In step 605, the main CPU 101 acquires the variable pattern random number updated in step 102 described above and stores it in the memory section of the second reserved memory area where the win/loss random number was stored in step 603 described above. As a result, the acquired win/loss random number, special symbol random number, and variable pattern random number are all stored in the memory section of the same second reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 606.

In step 606, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the second special symbol random number has been stored and stores it in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step 607.
In step 607, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is the second time-shortened gaming state. If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the second time-shortened gaming state (i.e., the current gaming state is the non-time-shortened gaming state or the first time-shortened gaming state), the second start winning slot detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the second time-shortened gaming state, the process proceeds to step 608.

In step 608, the main CPU 101 executes a pre-determination process for the stored second special random number to make various determinations regarding the winning/losing lottery before the fluctuation based on the second special random number begins (at the time the second special random number is acquired (stored as pending)). Then, the process when the second start winning slot is detected is terminated.

Next, the pre-determination processing of steps 508 and 608 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 25. In the pre-determination processing of step 508 described above, the following processing is executed based on the win/loss random number, special symbol random number, and variable pattern random number stored in the memory unit of the first reserved memory area, and the first reserved number, and in the pre-determination processing of step 608 described above, the following processing is executed based on the win/loss random number, special symbol random number, and variable pattern random number stored in the memory unit of the second reserved memory area, and the second reserved number.
In step 650, the main CPU 101 checks the type of start winning slot into which the game ball entered (first start winning slot 15, second start winning slot 16), the number of reserved balls (first reserved number, second reserved number), and the game state (normal game state, first low-probability time-shortened game state, second low-probability time-shortened game state, high-probability time-shortened game state). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 651.

In step 651, the main CPU 101 acquires the set value from the win/loss random number determination table 110 and one of the tables (tables A1-A6 or B1-B6) corresponding to the game state confirmed in step 650. Based on the acquired table and the stored win/loss random number, the main CPU 101 executes a win/loss determination process to determine the result of the win/loss lottery. Data relating to the result of the determination (won a jackpot, won a small jackpot, won or lost the time-saving award) is then stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Note that even in this preliminary determination process, the determination of whether the time-saving award was awarded is made only if the game state confirmed in step 650 (i.e., the game state set at that time) was the normal game state, and is not made if the game state was other than the normal game state. Therefore, if the game state was other than the normal game state, the result is determined to be either a jackpot win, a small jackpot win, or a loss. The process then proceeds to step 652.
In step 652, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination process to determine the type of special symbol. Specifically, if the start winning hole into which the gaming ball entered is the first start winning hole 15 (first special symbol random number), the main CPU 101 acquires the first start winning hole determination table 111a, and determines the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3), the type of small win symbol (small win symbol Y1, Y2), the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6), or the type of losing symbol (losing symbol Z1, Z2) based on the table and the stored special symbol random number. Furthermore, if the starting winning slot into which the game ball entered is the second starting winning slot 16 (second special symbol random number), the second starting winning slot determination table 111b is acquired, and based on the table and the stored special symbol random number, the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1, X4), the type of small win symbol (small win symbol Y1, Y2), the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J7), or the type of losing symbol (losing symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. Data relating to the result of this determination (type of special symbol) is then stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 653.

In step 653, the main CPU 101 acquires the fluctuation pattern table 114 corresponding to the game status confirmed in the above-mentioned step 650, the type of the starting winning slot into which the game ball entered, and whether or not the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot count condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaching a predetermined number) is met. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 654.
In step 654, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern command determination process to determine a variation pattern command based on the type of special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 652, the number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern table 114 acquired in the above-mentioned step 653, and the stored variation pattern random number. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 655.

In step 655, the main CPU 101 stores in the performance transmission data storage area the result of the winning/losing lottery determined in the above-mentioned step 612, the type of special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 652, and the pre-determination command including the variation pattern command determined in the above-mentioned step 654. Then, the pre-determination process ends.
Through the above processing, for the first special pattern random number or second special pattern random number stored as pending, the result of the winning/losing lottery determined when the special pattern begins to change, the type of special pattern, and the change pattern command are transmitted to the sub-control board 300 in advance (i.e., before the change begins) at the time the random number is obtained by the advance determination command.

In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the above-mentioned preliminary determination process determines the first special symbol random number obtained based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and stored in the reserved memory area (first reserved memory area), or the second special symbol random number obtained based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 and stored in the reserved memory area (second reserved memory area), but this is not limited to this. For example, the preliminary determination process may determine a random number stored in another memory area (such as a register) rather than directly determining the random number stored in the reserved memory area.

Next, the specific area detection process in step 303 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 670, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a special game is being played. If it is determined that a special game is not being played, the specific area detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a special game is being played, the process proceeds to step 671.
In step 671, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once). If it is determined that a detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has not been input the predetermined number of times, the specific area detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input the predetermined number of times, the process proceeds to step 672.
In step 672, the main CPU 101 turns on an entry flag indicating that a predetermined number of gaming balls have entered the specific area 57. Then, the specific area detection process ends.

Next, the special drawing related control processing in step 203 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 700, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the execution phase data. This execution phase data indicates which of the multiple function modules (subroutines) constituting the special symbol-related control processing is to be executed. Specifically, this execution phase data includes data "00" indicating the execution of a special symbol variation start processing described later, data "01" indicating the execution of a special symbol variation stop processing described later, data "02" indicating the execution of a post-stop processing described later, data "03" indicating the execution of a special game control processing described later, data "04" indicating the execution of a small win game control processing described later, and data "05" indicating the execution of a special game end processing described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 executes any one of the following processes based on the value of the execution phase data loaded in the above-mentioned step 700: special symbol variation start process (step 701), special symbol variation stop process (step 702), post-stop process (step 703), special game control process (step 704), small win game control process (step 705), or special game end process (step 706). Then, the special symbol-related control process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start process in step 701 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 800, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "00", which indicates the execution of the special symbol variation start process. If it is determined that the execution phase data is "00", the process proceeds to the next step 801. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is not "00", the special symbol variation start process is terminated.
In step 801, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a second special symbol random number is stored in the memory section of the second reserved memory area, i.e., whether or not the second reserved number counter is equal to or greater than "1." If it is determined that a second special symbol random number is stored, the process proceeds to step 804. On the other hand, if it is determined that a second special symbol random number is not stored, the process proceeds to the next step 802.

In step 802, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special symbol random number is stored in the memory section of the first reserved memory area, i.e., whether or not the first reserved number counter is equal to or greater than "1." If it is determined that the first special symbol random number is not stored, the process proceeds to step 812. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol random number is stored, the process proceeds to the next step 803.
In step 803, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the first reserved number counter by "1" and executes a shift process for the first reserved memory area. Specifically, the random numbers stored in the first memory section of the first reserved memory area are stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the random numbers stored in the second to fourth memory sections of the first reserved memory area are shifted to the memory section with the next smaller number. As a result, the random numbers stored in the first reserved memory area are used in the win/loss determination process described below in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) order. Then, the process proceeds to step 805.

In step 804, which is reached if it is determined in step 801 that the second special random number has been stored, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the second reserved number counter by one and executes a shift process for the second reserved memory area. Specifically, the random numbers stored in the first memory section of the second reserved memory area are stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the random numbers stored in the second to fourth memory sections of the second reserved memory area are shifted to the memory section with the next smaller number. As a result, the random numbers stored in the second reserved memory area are used in the win/loss determination process described below in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) order. Then, the process proceeds to step 805.
In step 805, the main CPU 101 increments by "1" the count value of the variation count counter, which counts the number of times the win/lose lottery has been executed (the number of times the special symbol has varied). The main CPU 101 also stores a variation count command, including the count value of the variation count counter, in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the variation count command to be sent to the sub-control board 300, allowing the sub-control board 300 to grasp the current count value of the variation count counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, 806.

In step 806, the main CPU 101 executes a win/lose determination process to derive the result of the win/lose lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step 807.
In step 807, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination process to determine the type of special symbol. Specifically, if the start winning hole into which the game ball entered is the first start winning hole 15 (first special symbol random number), the main CPU 101 acquires the first start winning hole determination table 111a, and determines the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3), the type of small win symbol (small win symbol Y1, Y2), the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6), or the type of loss symbol (loss symbol Z1, Z2) based on the table, the result of the win/loss lottery determined in the above-mentioned step 806 (win of jackpot, win of small win, win of time-saving grant, loss), and the special symbol random number stored in the predetermined processing area in the above-mentioned step 803 or step 804. Furthermore, if the starting winning slot into which the game ball entered is the second starting winning slot 16 (second special symbol random number), the second starting winning slot determination table 111b is acquired. Based on the table, the result of the lottery (jackpot win, small win, time-saving win, or loss) determined in step 806, and the special symbol random number stored in the designated processing area in step 803 or step 804, the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1, X4), the type of small win symbol (small win symbol Y1, Y2), the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J7), or the type of loss symbol (loss symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. Data corresponding to the determined special symbol is then stored in a designated temporary storage area of the main RAM 103. Furthermore, during this special symbol determination process, the current game state, i.e., the game state at the time the special symbol was determined, is stored in the game state buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 808 .
In addition, in the fluctuation start processing of the pachinko machine P in this embodiment, if both the first special chart random number and the second special chart random number are stored, the second special chart random number is processed in priority to the first special chart random number, but this is not limited to this, and the numbers may be processed in the order in which they are stored in the reserved memory area.

In step 808, the main CPU 101 stores in the performance transmission data storage area a symbol determination command indicating the type of special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 807. As a result, information regarding the determined type of special symbol is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of fluctuation. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 809.
In step 809, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the processing area in step 803 or step 804. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 810.

In step 810, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol display device 30 starts a blinking display, and when the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol display device 31 starts a blinking display. Here, the blinking display means that a "-" blinks at a predetermined interval on each display device.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the first special symbol random number is stored in the first reserve memory area, the first special symbol reserve display device 38 is displayed in a manner that allows the first reserve number to be recognized, and when the second special symbol random number is stored in the second reserve memory area, the second special symbol reserve display device 39 is displayed in a manner that allows the second reserve number to be recognized. When the above-mentioned special symbol variable display is performed based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol reserve display device 38 is displayed and controlled to indicate that the first reserved number is reduced by one simultaneously with the start of the variable display, and when the above-mentioned special symbol variable display is performed based on the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol reserve display device 39 is displayed and controlled to indicate that the second reserved number is reduced by one simultaneously with the start of the variable display.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 811.

In step 811, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "01" so that the special pattern variation stop processing is executed in the special pattern related control processing, and ends the special pattern variation start processing.
Furthermore, in step 812, which is reached when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 802 that the first special symbol random number is not stored in the first reserved memory area, the main CPU 101 executes a customer waiting determination process for displaying a customer waiting display on the performance display device 21 based on the fact that a variable display is not being performed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 counts the time during which no variable display of the special symbol is being performed, and when a predetermined customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed without a variable display of the special symbol, it determines that a customer waiting state has been entered and stores a customer waiting command for displaying a customer waiting screen on the performance display device 21 in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the special symbol variation start process is terminated.

Next, the pass/fail determination process in step 806 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 850, the main CPU 101 selects one of the win/loss random number determination tables 110 that corresponds to the set value and the current game state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state), and executes a jackpot win/loss determination process to determine whether a jackpot will be won (i.e., to determine whether a jackpot will be won) based on the selected table and the win/loss random number stored in the predetermined processing area of step 803 or step 804. Specifically, the main CPU 101 obtains information on the numerical range that will result in a jackpot win from the table, and determines whether the win/loss random number falls within this obtained numerical range. If the win/loss random number falls within the numerical range, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and if the win/loss random number does not fall within the numerical range, it is determined that a jackpot has not been won. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 851.
In step 851, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination process executed in the above-mentioned step 850 was a jackpot win (i.e., whether or not a jackpot win occurred). If it is determined that a jackpot win did not occur (a jackpot non-win), the process proceeds to step 853. On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot win occurred, the process proceeds to the next step 852.

In step 852, the main 101 stores the fact that a jackpot has been won in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, the win/loss determination process ends.
Furthermore, in step 853, which is reached if it is determined in step 851 that a jackpot has not been won, the main CPU 101 executes a small prize win/loss determination process to determine whether a small prize will be won (i.e., to determine whether a small prize will be won or not) based on the table selected in step 850 and the win/loss random number stored in the predetermined processing area of step 803 or step 804 (i.e., the same win/loss random number as the win/loss random number that was the subject of determination in step 850). Specifically, the main CPU 101 obtains information on the numerical range that will result in a small prize win from the table, and determines whether the win/loss random number falls within this obtained numerical range. Then, if the win/loss random number falls within the numerical range, it is determined that a small prize has been won, and if the win/loss random number does not fall within the numerical range, it is determined that a small prize has not been won. Then, the process proceeds to next step 854.

In step 854, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the small win determination process executed in the above-mentioned step 853 was a win of a small win (i.e., whether or not a small win was won). If it is determined that a small win was not won (a small win was not won), the process proceeds to step 856. On the other hand, if it is determined that a small win was won, the process proceeds to the next step 855.
In step 855, the main 101 stores the fact that a small win has been won in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, the win/loss determination process ends.

In step 856, which is reached when it is determined in step 854 that a small win has not been made, the main CPU 101 determines whether the currently set gaming state is the normal gaming state. If it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state (i.e., the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state, the second low-probability time-shortened gaming state, or the high-probability time-shortened gaming state), the process proceeds to step 860. On the other hand, if it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to the next step 857.
In step 857, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving award determination process to determine whether or not the time-saving award will be awarded (i.e., to determine whether or not the time-saving award will be awarded) based on the table selected in step 850 and the win/loss random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 (i.e., the same win/loss random number as the win/loss random number that was the subject of determination in step 850 and step 853). Specifically, the main CPU 101 obtains information on the numerical range that will result in a win for the time-saving award from the table, and determines whether or not the win/loss random number falls within this obtained numerical range. If the win/loss random number falls within the numerical range, it is determined that the time-saving award will be awarded, and if the win/loss random number does not fall within the numerical range, it is determined that the time-saving award will not be awarded. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, step 858.

In step 858, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the time-saving award determination process executed in the above-mentioned step 857 was a win for the time-saving award (i.e., whether or not the time-saving award was won). If it is determined that the time-saving award was not won (a small win was not won), the process proceeds to step 860. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving award was won, the process proceeds to the next step 859.
In step 859, the main 101 stores the fact that the time-saving bonus has been awarded in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, the winning/losing determination process is terminated.

In addition, in step 860, which is reached when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 856 that the normal game state is not being played, or when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 858 that the time-saving award has not been won, the main CPU 101 stores the fact that it has lost in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, the win/loss determination process is terminated.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been won, the process of determining whether or not a small jackpot has been won, and the process of determining whether or not a time-saving bonus has been awarded are all executed by a common processing program (the same module) that selects a win/lose random number determination table 110 corresponding to the set setting value and game status, obtains information on the numerical range to be determined, and determines whether or not the win/lose random number belongs to that numerical range.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process in step 809 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 900, the main CPU 101 checks the type of start winning slot into which the game ball entered (first start winning slot 15, second start winning slot 16), the number of reserved balls (first reserved number, second reserved number), and the game state (normal game state, first low-probability time-shortened game state, second low-probability time-shortened game state, high-probability time-shortened game state). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 901.
In step 901, the main CPU 101 acquires the fluctuation pattern table 114 corresponding to the game status confirmed in the above-mentioned step 900, the type of the starting winning slot into which the game ball entered, and whether or not the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot count condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaching a predetermined number) is met. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 902.

In step 902, the main CPU 101 determines a fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation pattern table 114 acquired in the above-mentioned step 901, the type of special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 807, the reserved number confirmed in the above-mentioned step 900, and the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the processing area in the above-mentioned step 803 or 804, and stores this determined fluctuation pattern command in a predetermined processing area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 903.
In step 903, the main CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command determined in step 902 in the transmission data storage area for performance.

In step 904, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation pattern table 114. The determined fluctuation time is then set in the fluctuation time timer counter. The fluctuation pattern determination process then ends.

Next, the special symbol variation stop processing in step 702 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1000, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "01", which indicates the execution of the special symbol variation stop process. If it is determined that the execution phase data is not "01", the special symbol variation stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "01", the process proceeds to the next step 1001.

In step 1001, the main CPU 101 determines whether the variable time set in the variable time timer counter in step 904 has elapsed. If it determines that the variable time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that the variable time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1002.
In step 1002, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display data for displaying the special symbol determined in step 807 on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, and executes the stop display of the special symbol. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1003.

In step 1003, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol determination command indicating that the special symbol has been determined in the effect transmission data storage area.
In step 1004, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display time for the special symbol to be displayed in the stop display time timer counter. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the determined special symbol is a time-saving symbol (J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7), the stop display time is set to 3 seconds, and otherwise the stop display time is set to 0.5 seconds. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1005.

In step 1005, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "02" so that post-stop processing is executed in the special symbol-related control processing. Then, the special symbol variation stop processing is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing in step 703 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1100, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "02," which indicates the execution of post-stop processing. If it is determined that the execution phase data is not "02," the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "02," the process proceeds to the next step 1101.
In step 1101, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop display time set in the stop display time timer counter in step 1004 has elapsed. If it is determined that the stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1102.

In step 1102, the main CPU 101 stores a stop display end command, indicating that the stop display time has elapsed, in the performance transmission data storage area. This notifies the sub-control board 300 that the stop display time has elapsed. The main CPU 101 also stores the current game status in the game status buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1103.
In step 1103, the main CPU 101 executes a time-shortening count update process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether either a first time-shortening game flag, indicating that the current game state is the first time-shortening game state, or a second time-shortening game flag, indicating that the current game state is the second time-shortening game state, is on. If the main CPU 101 determines that the first time-shortening game flag or the second time-shortening game flag is on, the main CPU 101 updates a time-shortening game count storage area provided in the main RAM 103. This time-shortening game count storage area stores the number of remaining fluctuations until the time-shortening game state ends. The stored remaining fluctuation count is then decremented by "1." Furthermore, if the remaining fluctuation count becomes "0" after updating the remaining fluctuation count, the main CPU 101 also executes a process to turn off the first time-shortening game flag or the second time-shortening game flag that was on. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that neither the first time-shortening game flag nor the second time-shortening game flag is on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1104 .

In step 1104, the main CPU 101 performs high-probability count update processing. Here, the main CPU 101 determines whether the high-probability game flag, which indicates that the current game state is a high-probability game state, is on. If it determines that the high-probability game flag is on, it updates the high-probability count storage area provided in the main RAM 103. This high-probability count storage area stores the number of variations remaining until the high-probability game state ends. The stored remaining number of variations is then decremented by "1." Furthermore, if the remaining number of variations becomes "0" after updating the remaining number of variations, processing is also executed to turn off the high-probability game flag. Furthermore, if it determines that the high-probability game flag is not on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1105.

In step 1105, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped special symbol is a big win symbol. If it determines that the stopped special symbol is not a big win symbol (i.e., a small win symbol, a time-saving symbol, or a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1111. On the other hand, if it determines that the stopped special symbol is a big win symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1106.
In step 1106, the main CPU 101 sets a command for transmitting the game status at the time of winning the jackpot and the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4) that has stopped and been displayed to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1107.

In step 1107, the main CPU 101 resets the current game state, and then proceeds to step 1108.
In step 1108, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores an opening command indicating that the opening process will start in the effect transmission data storage area.Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1109.

In step 1109, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is X1 or X2, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds to "10," and if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is X3 or X4, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds to "4." Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1110.
In step 1110, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "03" so that the special game control process is executed in the special symbol-related control process. Then, the post-stop process is terminated.

In step 1111, which is reached when it is determined in step 1105 that the special symbol displayed in a stopped state is not a big win symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol displayed in a stopped state is a small win symbol. If it is determined that the special symbol displayed in a stopped state is not a small win symbol (i.e., a time-saving symbol or a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1114. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed in a stopped state is a small win symbol, the process proceeds to step 1112.
In step 1112, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the small win game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores an opening command indicating that the opening process will start in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1113.

In step 1113, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "04" so that the small win game control process is executed in the special chart-related control process. Then, the post-stop process is terminated.

In step 1114, which is reached when it is determined in step 1111 that the special symbol displayed in the stopped state is not a small winning symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol displayed in the stopped state is a time-saving symbol. If it is determined that the special symbol displayed in the stopped state is not a time-saving symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1116. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed in the stopped state is a time-saving symbol, the process proceeds to step 1115.
In step 1115, the main CPU 101 executes a first low-probability time-saving game state setting process to set the game state to the first low-probability time-saving game state. Specifically, the first time-saving game flag is turned on, and the number of time-saving times is set to "10" if the stopped time-saving symbol is J1, set to "20" if the stopped time-saving symbol is J2, set to "30" if the stopped time-saving symbol is J3, set to "50" if the stopped time-saving symbol is J4, set to "100" if the stopped time-saving symbol is J5, set to "1000" if the stopped time-saving symbol is J6, and set to "1000" if the stopped time-saving symbol is J7. Then, the process proceeds to step 1116.

In step 1116, the main CPU 101 checks the set game state and stores a game state command indicating the game state in the effect transmission data storage area.
In step 1117, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "00" so that the special symbol variation start process is executed in the special symbol related control process. Then, the post-stop process is terminated.

Next, the special game control process in step 704 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 1200, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "03," which indicates the execution of the special game control process. If it is determined that the execution phase data is not "03," the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "03," the process proceeds to the next step 1201.
In step 1201, the main CPU 101 determines whether the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in step 1108 has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1202.

In step 1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special game control process is currently in the ending process, which is a standby process that is performed after all rounds of play have been completed. If it is determined that the ending process is currently in progress, the process proceeds to step 1210. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending process is not currently in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 1203.
In step 1203, the main CPU 101 executes a special winning opening opening/closing control process for opening and closing the special winning opening 18 and operating the distribution member 59, based on the special electric device operation table 112 corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1204.

In step 1204, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a round of play has started based on the control of opening and closing the large prize opening in step 1203. If it is determined that a round of play has not started, the process proceeds to step 1206. On the other hand, if it is determined that a round of play has started, the process proceeds to the next step 1205.
In step 1205, the main CPU 101 stores a round game start command indicating the start of a round game in the effect transmission data storage area.
In addition, a round game start command is provided for each number of round games, so that it is possible to transmit to the sub-control board 300 which number of round games has started.

In step 1206, the main CPU 101 determines whether the round game has ended based on the control of opening and closing the special prize opening in step 1203. If it is determined that the round game has not ended, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round game has ended, the process proceeds to the next step 1207.
In step 1207, the main CPU 101 decrements the number of rounds stored in the main RAM 103 by "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 1208.

In step 1208, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of rounds decremented in step 1207 is "0." If it is determined that the number of rounds is not "0," the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of rounds is "0," the process proceeds to the next step 1209.
In step 1209, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the special game, in the ending time timer counter, and stores an ending command indicating that the ending process will start in the effect transmission data storage area.Then, the special game control process is terminated.

In step 1210, which is reached when it is determined in step 1202 that the ending process is in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1209 has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step 1211.
In step 1211, the main CPU 101 stores a special game end command indicating that the special game has ended in the effect transmission data storage area.

In step 1212, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "05" so that the special game end process is executed in the special chart-related control process. The special game control process then ends.

Next, the small win game control process in step 705 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1250, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "04", which indicates the execution of the small win game control process. If it is determined that the execution phase data is not "04", the small win game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "04", the process proceeds to the next step 1251.
In step 1251, the main CPU 101 determines whether the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in step 1112 has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the small win game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1252.

In step 1252, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending process, which is a standby process performed after the opening and closing of the large prize opening 18 in this small prize game control process, is in progress. If it is determined that the ending process is in progress, the process proceeds to step 1256. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending process is not in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 1253.
In step 1253, the main CPU 101 performs a small win game execution process for opening and closing the big prize opening 18 based on the fourth operation table 112d in the special electric accessory operation table 112. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1254.

In step 1254, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening and closing of the large prize opening 18 has been completed. If it is determined that the opening and closing of the large prize opening 18 has not been completed, the small prize game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening and closing of the large prize opening 18 has been completed, the process proceeds to the next step 1255.
In step 1255, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the small win game, in the ending time timer counter, and stores an ending command indicating that the ending process will start in the performance transmission data storage area.Then, the small win game control process is terminated.

In step 1256, which is reached when it is determined in step 1252 that the ending process is in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1255 has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 ends the small win game control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step 1257.
In step 1257, the main CPU 101 stores a small win game end command indicating that the small win game has ended in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step 1258.

In step 1258, the main CPU 101 checks the set game state and stores a game state command indicating that game state in the performance transmission data storage area. The main CPU 101 also sets the execution phase data to "00" so that special symbol variation processing is executed in the special symbol-related control processing. The small win game control processing then ends.

Next, the special game ending process in step 705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 1300, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "05," which indicates the execution of special game ending processing. If it is determined that the execution phase data is not "05," the special game ending processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "05," the process proceeds to the next step 1301.
In step 1301, the main CPU 101 determines whether the entry flag is on. If it is determined that the entry flag is not on (i.e., is off), the process proceeds to step 1309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the entry flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 1302.

In step 1302, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the continuous probability variable setting number counter for counting the number of continuous probability variable setting times by 1, and also decrements the value of the continuous time-saving setting number counter for counting the number of continuous time-saving setting times by 1. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1303.
In step 1303, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the continuous probability change setting counter has reached 0, that is, whether the continuous probability change setting count has reached a predetermined upper limit. If it is determined that the value of the continuous probability change setting counter has not reached 0, the process proceeds to step 1305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous probability change setting counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to the next step 1304.

In step 1304, the main CPU 101 executes a low-probability game state setting process to set the game state to a low-probability game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns off the high-probability game flag. The main CPU 101 also sets the continuous probability change setting count counter to "10,000," which is the predetermined upper limit. Then, the process proceeds to step 1306.
In addition, in step 1305, which is reached when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 1303 that the value of the continuous probability change setting counter has not reached 0, a high probability game state setting process is executed to set the game state to a high probability game state. Specifically, the high probability game flag is turned on, and the high probability number is set to "10000". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1306.

In step 1306, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the continuous time-saving setting counter has reached 0, i.e., whether the number of continuous time-saving setting times has reached a predetermined upper limit. If it is determined that the value of the continuous time-saving setting counter has not reached 0, the process proceeds to step 1308. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous time-saving setting counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to the next step 1307.
In step 1307, the main CPU 101 executes a non-time-shortened game state setting process to set the game state to a non-time-shortened game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns off the first time-shortened game flag and the second time-shortened game flag. The main CPU 101 also sets the continuous time-shortened setting counter to "10,000," which is the predetermined upper limit number. Then, the process proceeds to step 1311.

In step 1308, which is reached when it is determined in step 1306 that the value of the continuous time-shortening setting counter has not reached 0, the main CPU 101 executes a second time-shortening game state setting process to set the game state to the second time-shortening game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns on the second time-shortening game flag and sets the time-shortening count to "10,000." Then, the process proceeds to step 1311.
In step 1309, which is reached when it is determined in step 1301 that the entry flag is not on, the main CPU 101 executes the same low-probability time-saving game state setting process as in step 1304, and sets the continuous probability change setting counter to "10,000," which is the predetermined upper limit number. Then, the process proceeds to step 1310.

In step 1310, the main CPU 101 executes a time-shortened/non-time-shortened game state setting process to set the game state to the non-time-shortened game state or the second time-shortened game state. Specifically, if the jackpot symbol determined at the time of the jackpot win is X2 or X3, and the game state at the time of the jackpot win was the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state), the second time-shortened game flag is turned on and the number of time-shortened game plays is set to "10000" to set the second time-shortened game state. In contrast, if the game state at the time of the jackpot win was the non-time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game flag and the second time-shortened game flag are turned off to set the non-time-shortened game state. Furthermore, if the jackpot symbol determined at the time of the jackpot win is X4, the second time-shortened game flag is turned on and the number of time-shortened game plays is set to "100" to set the second time-shortened game state. Then, the process proceeds to step 1311.
In step 1311, the main CPU 101 determines whether the set gaming state is either the high-probability time-shortened gaming state (the high-probability gaming state and the second time-shortened gaming state) or the second low-probability time-shortened gaming state (the low-probability gaming state and the second time-shortened gaming state). If it is determined that the set gaming state is neither of these, the process proceeds to step 1313. On the other hand, if it is determined that the set gaming state is either of these, the process proceeds to the next step 1312.

In step 1312, the main CPU 101 increments the value of a consecutive jackpot counter, which counts the number of consecutive jackpots, by 1. When the value of this consecutive jackpot counter reaches a value corresponding to a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number condition is met. Then, the process proceeds to step 1314.
In step 1313, which is reached when it is determined that the game state set in step 1311 is neither the high-probability time-shortened game state nor the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the value of the consecutive jackpot counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 1314.

In step 1314, the main CPU 101 turns off the entry flag, and then proceeds to the next step 1315.
In step 1315, the main CPU 101 sets a game state designation command in the presentation transmission data storage area according to the game state set as described above. This game state designation command includes information on whether the high probability game flag is on or off, information on whether the first time-shortened game flag is on or off, information on whether the second time-shortened game flag is on or off, the number of high probability games, and the number of time-shortened games, all of which are set as described above. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1316.

In step 1316, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "00" so that the variable start process is executed in the special chart-related control process. Then, the special game end process is terminated.

Next, the map-related control process in step 204 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1400, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the normal symbol execution phase data. This normal symbol execution phase data indicates which of the multiple function modules (subroutines) constituting the normal symbol-related control processing will be executed. Specifically, this normal symbol execution phase data has data "10" indicating the execution of the normal symbol variation start processing described later, data "11" indicating the execution of the normal symbol variation stop processing described later, data "12" indicating the execution of the normal symbol stop post-processing described later, and data "13" indicating the execution of the movable piece control processing described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 executes either the normal symbol variation start process (step 1401), the normal symbol variation stop process (step 1402), the normal symbol stop post-stop process (step 1403), or the movable piece control process (step 1404) based on the value of the normal symbol execution phase data loaded in the above-mentioned step 1400. Then, the normal symbol related control process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start processing in step 1401 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1500, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is "10", which indicates the execution of the normal symbol variation start process. If it is determined that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "10", the normal symbol variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol execution phase data is "10", the process proceeds to the next step 1501.
In step 1501, the main CPU 101 determines whether a hit random number is stored in the normal reserved memory area, that is, whether the normal reserved number counter is "1" or more. If it is determined that the normal reserved number counter is not "1" or more (i.e., "0"), the normal pattern variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal reserved number counter is "1" or more, proceed to the next step 1502.

In step 1502, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the normal reserved number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 1503.
In step 1503, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process for the regular map reserved memory area. Specifically, the winning determination random number stored in the first memory unit is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the winning determination random numbers stored in the second to fourth memory units are shifted to the memory unit with the next smaller number. As a result, the winning determination random numbers stored in the regular map reserved memory area are used in the winning determination process described below on a first-in, first-out (FIFO) basis. Then, the process proceeds to step 1504.

In step 1504, the main CPU 101 selects a winning determination random number determination table 116 (either the first determination table 116a, the second determination table 116b, or the third determination table 116c) corresponding to the current state (non-time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, special game, or small win game), and executes a winning determination process to derive the result of the lottery for the normal symbol based on the selected table and the winning determination random number stored in the processing area in step 1503. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines the winning determination random number stored in the processing area by referring to the first determination table 116a when in the non-time-saving game state, special game, or small win game state; by referring to the second determination table 116b when in the first time-saving game state; and by referring to the third determination table 116c when in the second time-saving game state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1505.
In step 1505, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the win determination process in the above-mentioned step 1504 is a win. If it is determined that there is a win, the process proceeds to the next step 1506. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no win (i.e., a loss), the process proceeds to step 1507.

In step 1506, the main CPU 101 stores the winning symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to step 1508.
In step 1507, which is reached when it is determined in step 1505 that the result of the winning determination process is not a win (i.e., a loss), the main CPU 101 stores the loss symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to step 1508.

In step 1508, the main CPU 101 checks whether the current state of the pachinko machine P is in a non-time-saving game state, a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state, a special game state, or a small win game state, and references the normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117 to set the normal symbol variation time timer counter to the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the current state of the pachinko machine P. Specifically, if the main CPU 101 is in a non-time-saving game state, a special game state, or a small win game state, it sets the normal symbol variation time counter to "3 seconds," if the main CPU 101 is in the first time-saving game state, it sets the normal symbol variation time counter to "2 seconds," and if the main CPU 101 is in the second time-saving game state, it sets the normal symbol variation time counter to "0.6 seconds." Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1509.
In step 1509, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data to start displaying the normal symbol variations. As a result, when the normal symbol variations are displayed, the normal symbol display device 32 starts flashing. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the winning determination random number is stored in the normal symbol reservation memory area, the normal symbol reservation display device 33 is displayed in a manner that allows the normal symbol reservation number to be recognized. Then, when the normal symbol variations are displayed, the normal symbol reservation display device 33 is controlled to indicate that the normal symbol reservation number is reduced by one at the same time as the variable display begins. Then, proceed to the next step 1510.

In step 1510, the main CPU 101 stores the current state of the pachinko machine P in the gaming machine state buffer as the state of the pachinko machine P at the start of fluctuation.
In step 1511, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "11" so that the normal symbol variation stop process is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol variation start process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation stop processing in step 1402 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1600, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is "11", which indicates the execution of the normal symbol variation stop process. If it is determined that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "11", the normal symbol variation stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol execution phase data is "11", the process proceeds to the next step 1601.
In step 1601, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time set in the normal symbol fluctuation time timer counter in step 1508 has elapsed. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the normal symbol fluctuation stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1602.

In step 1602, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for stopping and displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 32, and executes the stop display of the normal symbols. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1603.
In step 1603, the main CPU 101 sets the variable stop display time for stopping and displaying the normal symbols in the normal symbol stop display time timer counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 1604.

In step 1604, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "12" so that normal symbol stop post-processing is executed in the normal symbol-related control processing. Then, the normal symbol change stop processing is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing of the normal symbols in step 1403 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1700, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is "12", which indicates the execution of normal symbol stop post-processing. If it is determined that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "12", the normal symbol stop post-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol execution phase data is "12", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 1701.
In step 1701, the main CPU 101 determines whether the variable stop display time set in the normal symbol stop display time timer counter in step 1603 has elapsed. If it is determined that the variable stop display time has not elapsed, the normal symbol stop post-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1702.

In step 1702, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped normal symbols are winning symbols. If it determines that the stopped normal symbols are not winning symbols (i.e., losing symbols), the process proceeds to step 1704. On the other hand, if it determines that the stopped normal symbols are winning symbols, the process proceeds to the next step 1703.
In step 1703, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "13" so that the movable piece control process is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol stop post-processing is terminated.

Furthermore, in step 1704, which is reached when it is determined in step 1702 that the normal symbol displayed as stopped is not a winning symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "10" so that the normal symbol variation start process is executed in the normal symbol-related control process. Then, the normal symbol post-stop process is terminated.

Next, the movable piece control process in step 1404 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1800, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal execution phase data is "13", which indicates the execution of the movable piece control process. If it is determined that the normal execution phase data is not "13", the movable piece control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal execution phase data is "13", the process proceeds to the next step 1801.
In step 1801, the main CPU 101 determines whether the movable piece 16b is under operation control, i.e., whether the start winning port solenoid 16c is energized. If it is determined that the movable piece 16b is under operation control, the process proceeds to step 1804. On the other hand, if it is determined that the movable piece 16b is not under operation control, the process proceeds to the next step 1802.

In step 1802, the main CPU 101 checks whether the state of the pachinko machine P at the time when the normal symbol fluctuation started was in the non-time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state, the special game state, or the small win game state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1803.
In step 1803, the main CPU 101 refers to the second start winning port opening control table 118, and sets the number of times of energization (number of times of opening) and the energization time (opening time) as the energization control data (opening data) of the start winning port solenoid 16c according to the state of the pachinko machine P confirmed in the above-mentioned step 1802. Then, the movable piece control process is terminated.

In step 1804, which is reached when it is determined in step 1801 that the movable piece 16b is under operation control, the main CPU 101 determines whether the energization time (opening time) set in step 1803 has elapsed. If it is determined that the energization time (opening time) has not elapsed, the movable piece control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the energization time (opening time) has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1805.
In step 1805, the main CPU 101 stops the operation of the movable piece 16b, that is, stops the power supply to the start winning port solenoid 16c. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1806.

In step 1806, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "10" so that the normal symbol variation start process is executed in the normal symbol-related control process. Then, the moving piece control process is terminated.

(Gameplay of the Pachinko Machine P According to the Present Embodiment)
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, as described above, the game is set to progress in one of the following states: a normal game state (a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state), a first low-probability time-shortened game state (a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a first time-shortened game state), a second low-probability time-shortened game state (a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state), or a high-probability time-shortened game state (a game state that combines a high-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state).

When a player starts playing, the normal game mode is often set. During this normal game mode, as described above, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot). As long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, the game ball may enter the first start winning slot 15, but will not enter the second start winning slot 16. A lottery is then held to determine whether the game ball has entered the first start winning slot 15, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot pattern X1, X2, or X3 is determined (see Figure 12(a)). If jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter specific area 57, and the game state after the special game ends is set to a high-probability time-saving game state. If jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, the predetermined number of game balls do not enter specific area 57, and the game state after the special game ends is set to a normal game state (see FIGS. 14(a) and 41). In other words, in pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if left-handed shots are performed as instructed during the normal game state, a jackpot will be won, resulting in a transition to the normal game state or the high-probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 41). However, because jackpot symbol X1 is determined only in 1% of jackpot wins (see FIG. 12(a)), it is extremely difficult to transition to the high-probability time-saving game state during the normal game state, even if a jackpot is won.

Here, if a game ball enters the first start entry port 15 during normal game play, a win/loss lottery is held to determine whether or not the time-saving bonus will be awarded, and the probability of winning the time-saving bonus can be determined to be approximately 1 in 100 (see Figures 6(a), 7(a), 8(a), 9(a), 10(a), and 11(a)). When the time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7 is determined, the game state is set to the first low-probability time-saving game state without going through a jackpot or special game, and when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/loss lottery is derived 10 times without a jackpot being won, when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/loss lottery is derived 20 times without a jackpot being won, and when the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/loss lottery is derived 30 times without a jackpot being won. If the time-saving symbol J4 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/loss lottery has been derived 50 times without a jackpot being won; if the time-saving symbol J5 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/loss lottery has been derived 100 times without a jackpot being won; if the time-saving symbol J6 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/loss lottery has been derived 1000 times without a jackpot being won; and if the time-saving symbol J7 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/loss lottery has been derived once without a jackpot being won.

Furthermore, during this first low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball (left shot) toward the first game area 12a, and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the game ball's entry into the first start entry slot 15, just as in the normal game state. If a jackpot is won during this first low-probability time-saving game state, the jackpot pattern X1, X2, or X3 is determined, just as in the normal game state, and the probability of determining each jackpot pattern (the probability of determining jackpot pattern X1 is 1%, and the probability of determining jackpot pattern X2 or X3 is 99%) is also the same as in the normal game state, so if a jackpot is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the jackpot pattern X2 or X3 will almost always be determined (see Figure 12(a)). If the jackpot pattern X2 or X3 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state, since the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving game state, the game state after the special game ends is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 (see Figure 14(b) and Figure 41). In other words, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, if a jackpot is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state (until the result of the win/loss lottery has been determined 10 times if the time-saving symbol J1 is selected, until the result of the win/loss lottery has been determined 20 times if the time-saving symbol J2 is selected, until the result of the win/loss lottery has been determined 30 times if the time-saving symbol J3 is selected, until the result of the win/loss lottery has been determined 50 times if the time-saving symbol J4 is selected, until the result of the win/loss lottery has been determined 100 times if the time-saving symbol J5 is selected, until the result of the win/loss lottery has been determined 1000 times if the time-saving symbol J6 is selected, or until the result of the win/loss lottery has been determined once if the time-saving symbol J7 is selected), the machine will transition to approximately the second low-probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 41).

During the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball (hit to the right) toward the second game area 12b. As long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, the game ball has a chance of entering the second start winning slot 16, but will not enter the first start winning slot 15. A lottery is then held based on the game ball's entry into the second start winning slot 16, and if a jackpot is won, jackpot pattern X1 or X4 is determined (see Figure 12(b)). If jackpot pattern X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, as described above, and the game state after the special game ends is set to a high-probability time-saving game state, with the number of time-saving plays set to 10,000. Also, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the game state after the special game ends without the predetermined number of game balls entering the specific area 57 is set again to the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 100 (see FIG. 14(c) and FIG. 41). In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if you hit the right as instructed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, you will win a jackpot, and the second low-probability time-saving game state will be reset, or you will transition to a high-probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 41). When the first low-probability time-saving game state transitions to the second low-probability time-saving game state, the number of time-saving cycles is set to 10,000. During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning slot 16 is more likely to remain open than during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state. This reduces the loss of game balls as the game progresses, and ensures that the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, because the jackpot symbol X1 is determined 70% of the time when a jackpot is won (see Figure 12(b)), during the second low-probability time-saving game state, it is easier to transition to the high-probability time-saving game state if a jackpot is won.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball (right shot) toward the second game area 12b. As long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, a lottery is held based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry slot 16. If a jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern X1 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 12(b)). If the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the special game ends is set to the high-probability time-saving game state again, with the number of time-saving times set to 10,000. If the jackpot pattern X4 is determined, the predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the special game ends is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state, with the number of time-saving times set to 100 (see FIGS. 12(c) and 41).
During the high probability time-shortening game state, the player can almost certainly win the next big win while suppressing the decrease in game balls, similarly to the second low probability time-shortening game state.

Furthermore, if jackpot symbol X4 is determined in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving draws will be set (see Figures 12(c) and 41). However, if a jackpot is won before the 100th draw, it is possible to expect a transition to the high-probability time-saving game state again.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, during the normal game state, the aim is to transition to a first low-probability time-saving game state by winning the time-saving award (time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7) based on a win/lose lottery, and then transition to a second low-probability time-saving game state by winning a jackpot during the first low-probability time-saving game state (until the result of the win/lose lottery has been determined 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, 1000 or 1 time), and then the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state continue, thereby providing an innovative gameplay in which the aim is to acquire many game balls. In other words, the first low-probability time-saving game state, which can be entered from the normal game state without winning a jackpot or going through a special game, is given a gameplay feature that makes it a chance zone for transitioning to the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, which are more advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the player's interest.

As described above, with the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, a win/loss lottery is held during the normal game state to determine whether or not a time-saving award will be granted, and if the win/loss lottery results in a win to grant a time-saving award and the time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7 is determined, it is possible to transition to the time-saving game state without winning a jackpot or playing a special game, which gives the player a novel impression regarding the transition to the time-saving game state and provides a wide variety of transitions to the time-saving game state, thereby providing unprecedented gameplay.
Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, in the win/loss lottery, the decision as to whether or not a jackpot has been won is made based on a win/loss random number, and if it is determined that a jackpot has not been won, during the normal game state, the decision as to whether or not a time-saving bonus will be awarded is made based on the same win/loss random number, so that the number of random numbers used to make various decisions can be reduced, and the load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 and main RAM 103 can be reduced.
Furthermore, with the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving grant is the same regardless of the setting value, so the degree of advantage for each setting value changes depending on the setting of the time-saving game state that does not involve winning a jackpot, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the tendency to become too gambling becomes too great when a predetermined setting value is set.

(Outline of the effects on Pachinko machine P)
As described above, the special game, normal game, bonus game, and small win game progress by executing various processes on the main control board 100. During the progress of these games, the main control board 100 sends various commands to the sub-control board 300, which receives these commands and controls the presentation as the game progresses.
Below, we will explain the change effect that is executed while the special pattern is being displayed, and can notify the result of the win/loss lottery, and the special notification effect that can be executed together with the change effect when the result of the win/loss lottery is a win for the time-saving grant, and can notify the win of the time-saving grant and the number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state based on that win.

(Summary of the variable effects)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, during the variable display of the special symbols, a variable effect is executed in which the result of the winning/losing lottery is notified by the display mode of the effect symbols 50. In this variable effect, the variable display of the effect symbols 50 (dummy symbols) is performed superimposed on the background image displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21. Then, the result of the winning/losing lottery can be notified to the player by the combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbols 50 that are stopped and displayed after the variable display.

Specifically, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol, all the effect symbols 50 are displayed in a static state, and then the variable display of all the effect symbols 50 begins (see Figs. 42(a) and (b), Figs. 43(a) and (b)). Note that the downward arrow in the figure indicates that the effect symbols 50 are displayed scrolling from top to bottom.
After that, the effect pattern 50 located on the left side (hereinafter referred to as the first stop pattern), the effect pattern 50 located on the right side (hereinafter referred to as the second stop pattern), and the effect pattern 50 located in the center (hereinafter referred to as the third stop pattern) are displayed in this order (see Figures 42 (c) to (e) and Figures 43 (c) to (e)).

If the result of the lottery is a jackpot, all of the effect symbols 50 will be displayed as the same symbol (see Figure 43 (e)). In other words, when all of the effect symbols 50 are displayed as the same symbol, it is announced that the result of the lottery is a jackpot.

Furthermore, if the result of the lottery is a loss, not all of the effect symbols 50 will be stopped and displayed in the same pattern (see Figure 42 (e)). In other words, the result of the lottery is a loss when at least one effect symbol 50 is stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the other effect symbols 50. Note that the stop display mode described above does not actively notify the player that the result of the lottery is a loss, but simply makes the player aware that it is a loss (the player has not won either a big or small prize).
Furthermore, although not particularly shown, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a win of a small prize, the effect pattern 50 is stopped and displayed in a specific manner to indicate that (for example, a combination in which the first and second stopping patterns are the same pattern and the third stopping pattern is a special pattern indicating a win of a small prize). In other words, by the effect pattern 50 being stopped and displayed in a specific manner, it is announced that the result of the win/lose lottery is a win of a small prize.
It should be noted that the stop display mode of the effect symbols 50 in the case of a small win is not limited to the above, and may be the same as when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss (i.e., a mode in which at least one effect symbol 50 is stopped and displayed as a symbol different from the other effect symbols 50). In this way, the player may not be able to know whether the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss or a small win based on the stop display mode of the effect symbols 50.

Furthermore, if the result of the lottery is a win to grant a time-saving bonus, the effect symbol 50 is displayed stopped in a special manner to indicate this (for example, a combination where the first and second stopping symbols are the same odd number other than "7" and the third stopping symbol is "7"), and a setting image (for example, a text image saying "CHANCE ZONE ENTERED!!") indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set is displayed (see Figures 44(g)-(h)), and the number of time-saving bonuses is announced (see Figure 44(i)). In other words, the effect symbol 50 is displayed stopped in a special manner, and the above-mentioned setting image is displayed, to indicate that the result of the lottery is a win to grant a time-saving bonus, and the type of time-saving bonus that has been determined is announced by announcing the number of time-saving bonuses.

In addition, the third stop symbol is displayed at approximately the same time as the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. This prevents the special symbol from being displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31 before the effect symbol 50 is displayed, preventing the result of the lottery from being determined by the type of special symbol.

(The first half of the variable performance)
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the first half of the variable performance (from the start of the variable performance to the time when the first and second stopping patterns are stopped and displayed) is provided with a no-reach pattern in which the first and second stopping patterns are stopped and displayed as different patterns, and a reach variable pattern in which the first and second stopping patterns are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (a so-called reach display is performed).

There are a plurality of types of no-reach patterns and reach fluctuation patterns, and various ways of fluctuation are set.
Specifically, as no-reach patterns, there are provided no-reach pattern A in which the first and second stop patterns are displayed as different patterns without any particular change in the way they change or the display content of the performance pattern 50, and no-reach pattern B in which the first and second stop patterns are displayed as different patterns after a pseudo-consecutive performance in which all performance patterns 50 temporarily stop in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, the first and second stop patterns temporarily stop with numbers that are one number apart, and the third stop pattern temporarily stops with a temporary stop pattern that suggests a temporary stop) and the display resumes changing a predetermined number of times (for example, once).
In addition, as reach fluctuation patterns, there are provided reach fluctuation pattern A in which the first and second stopping patterns are displayed as the same pattern without any particular change in the way they fluctuate or the display content of the performance pattern 50, and reach fluctuation pattern B in which the first and second stopping patterns are displayed as different patterns after the above-mentioned pseudo-consecutive performance is executed.

It should be noted that the number of times and timing of the provisional stops in the pseudo consecutive effects may be set to various numbers and various points in time. Also, it may be set so that the pseudo consecutive effects in which the provisional stops are performed a specific number of times (for example, four times) are executed only when a jackpot or a time-saving award is won, and when the pseudo consecutive effects are executed, it may be possible to know that a jackpot or a time-saving award has been won. Furthermore, a pseudo consecutive effect may be provided in which a reach display is performed, a third stop symbol is temporarily stopped, and then the variable display is resumed, and it may be set so that the execution rate of the pseudo consecutive effects is high when a jackpot or a time-saving award is won.
In addition, the no-reach pattern and the reach variation pattern are not limited to the above-mentioned modes. For example, as a reach variation pattern, a mode may be provided in which a reach display in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed as the same symbol is not performed, and instead of performing the reach display, a predetermined image is displayed to notify that a reach has occurred.

(The second half of the variable performance)
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the pattern of the first half of the variable presentation is a no-reach pattern, the pattern of the second half of the variable presentation (from when the second stopping pattern is displayed to when the third stopping pattern is displayed) is a normal miss pattern in which the third stopping pattern is displayed as is, thereby announcing that the result of the win/lose lottery is a miss (see Figure 42).
When the mode of the first half of the variation presentation is a reach variation pattern, the mode of the second half of the variation presentation is such that, after the reach display, a reach development presentation is executed in which a predetermined development presentation image is displayed on the presentation display device 21 together with the variation display of the third stop pattern, and the result of the win/loss lottery is announced as a big win, a small win, a win with time-saving grant, or a loss (see Figure 44), and a no development pattern is provided in which, after the reach display, the above-mentioned reach development presentation is not executed, and the result of the win/loss lottery is announced as a big win, a small win, a win with time-saving grant, or a loss (see Figure 43).

A plurality of types of development patterns are provided, and various types of development effect images are set. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, development pattern A and development pattern B are provided as development patterns.
Development pattern A is a display of a moving image (hereinafter referred to as development image A) in which the performance symbols 50 are successively destroyed and the final displayed performance symbol 50 is determined to be the third stop symbol (see Figures 44 (e) to (g)), and as will be described later, can be executed in any of the cases of a big win, a small win, a win that grants a time-saving bonus, and a loss.
When development pattern A is executed, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a big win, a display is made to indicate that the effect pattern 50 constituting the stop display mode that will ultimately result in a big win is reached, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a small win, a display is made to indicate that the effect pattern 50 constituting the stop display mode that will ultimately result in a small win is reached, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a win for a time-saving grant, a display is made to indicate that the effect pattern 50 constituting the stop display mode that will ultimately result in a time-saving grant is reached (see Figures 44(e) to (g)), and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss, a display is made to indicate that the effect pattern 50 constituting the stop display mode that will ultimately result in a loss is reached. In this way, it is possible to notify whether the result of the win/loss lottery is a big win, a small win, a win for a time-saving grant, or a loss.

Although not specifically shown, development pattern B displays a moving image in which a predetermined character challenges a mission and the results of the challenge are shown.
This development pattern B has four types of patterns, development pattern B1, development pattern B2, development pattern B3, and development pattern B4, and each pattern is associated with a development effect image B1, development effect image B2, development effect image B3, or development effect image B4, which differs in the content of the mission to be challenged, as the moving image to be displayed. Specifically, the development effect image B1 is displayed in the development pattern B1, the development effect image B2 is displayed in the development pattern B2, the development effect image B3 is displayed in the development pattern B3, and the development effect image B4 is displayed in the development pattern B4.

Furthermore, as will be described later, this development pattern B can only be executed when either a jackpot is won or a time-saving bonus is awarded.
Then, in any case where development pattern B1, development pattern B2, development pattern B3 or development pattern B4 is executed, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot win, a display indicating that the above-mentioned mission has been successfully completed is finally displayed, followed by a stop display mode indicating a jackpot win (see Figures 46(b) to (d)), and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a time-saving grant win, a display indicating that the above-mentioned mission has been unsuccessful is finally displayed, followed by a setting image and the number of time-saving times indicating that a first low-probability time-saving game state will be set (see Figures 45(e) to (h)). In this way, it is possible to notify whether the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot win or a time-saving grant win.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when a variable effect based on development pattern B is executed, the result of the win/lose lottery is determined to be either a jackpot win or a time-saving win, thereby increasing the player's interest in the execution of a variable effect based on development pattern B.

Note that development patterns are not limited to the above-mentioned patterns. For example, development patterns may include a pattern in which, after a specific development effect image is displayed, the display switches to another development effect image with a higher expected probability of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving bonus than the specific development effect image, or a pattern in which a loss is initially announced, followed by an announcement that a jackpot or time-saving bonus has been won.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a special variation pattern is provided as a variation effect mode, separate from the various modes described above, in which all of the effect symbols 50 are displayed in a varying state, and then after the variation time has elapsed, these effect symbols 50 all stop and are displayed simultaneously.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned effects, in addition to displaying images, a specified sound may be output, and the effect lighting device 23 (lamp) may be made to emit light in a specified lighting pattern or color.

(Determination of the mode of variable presentation)
Next, we will explain how to determine the execution mode of the above-mentioned variable effects.
The main ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 stores a variation presentation determination table 119 that defines the mode of variation presentation for each variation pattern command that can be determined by the main control board 100. When the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 100 at the start of variation, it refers to the variation presentation determination table 119 and determines the mode of variation presentation based on the received variation pattern command.

The variable effect determination table 119 defines the variable effect mode in association with each variable effect pattern command and each variable effect random number obtained within a predetermined numerical range (0 to 249 in this embodiment). When the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 receives a variable effect pattern command from the main control board 100, it obtains a variable effect random number of 1 from the predetermined numerical range (0 to 249). The sub-CPU 301 then determines the variable effect mode based on the variable effect determination table 119, the received variable pattern command, and the obtained variable effect random number. As a result, a variable effect based on the determined mode is executed on the effect display device 21.

As shown in Figure 47, according to the variable effect determination table 119, if the received variable pattern command is "00H", "04H", "05H", or "08H" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a miss), either a mode in which the first half is a no-reach pattern A and the second half is a normal miss pattern (hereinafter referred to as mode 1), or a mode in which the first half is a no-reach pattern B and the second half is a normal miss pattern (hereinafter referred to as mode 2) is determined.

Furthermore, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "01H" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a loss), either a mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the second half is a no-development pattern (hereinafter referred to as mode 3), or a mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern B and the second half is a no-development pattern (hereinafter referred to as mode 9) will be determined.

Furthermore, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "02H", "03H", "06H" or "07H" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a loss), the mode will be determined as either a mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the second half is development pattern A (hereinafter referred to as mode 4), or a mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern B and the second half is development pattern A (hereinafter referred to as mode 10).

Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "22H," "23H," "26H," or "27H" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a small win), either mode 4 or mode 10 will be determined.

Also, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "A2H," "A3H," "A6H," or "A7H" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a jackpot), the following will occur: Mode 4; a mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the second half is development pattern B1 (hereinafter referred to as Mode 5); a mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the second half is development pattern B2 (hereinafter referred to as Mode 6); a mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the second half is development pattern B3 (hereinafter referred to as Mode 7); a mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the latter half is development pattern B4 (hereinafter referred to as mode 8), mode 10, the former half is reach fluctuation pattern B and the latter half is development pattern B1 (hereinafter referred to as mode 11), the former half is reach fluctuation pattern B and the latter half is development pattern B2 (hereinafter referred to as mode 12), the former half is reach fluctuation pattern B and the latter half is development pattern B3 (hereinafter referred to as mode 13), or the former half is reach fluctuation pattern B and the latter half is development pattern B4 (hereinafter referred to as mode 14).

Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "B3H" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and time-saving symbol J1 (10 time-saving times) is determined), then either mode 4, mode 5, mode 10, or mode 11 will be determined.

Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "B4H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and time-saving symbol J2 (20 times of time-saving) is determined) or "B5H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and time-saving symbol J3 (30 times of time-saving) is determined), then either mode 4, mode 5, mode 6, mode 10, mode 11 or mode 12 will be determined.

Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "B6H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and time-saving symbol J4 (50 times of time-saving) is determined) or "B7H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and time-saving symbol J5 (100 times of time-saving) is determined), then either mode 4, mode 5, mode 6, mode 7, mode 10, mode 11, mode 12 or mode 13 will be determined.

Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "B8H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J6 (1000 times of time-saving) is determined), then one of the following will be determined: Mode 4, Mode 5, Mode 6, Mode 7, Mode 8, Mode 10, Mode 11, Mode 12, Mode 13, or Mode 14.

Also, if the received variation pattern command is "B9H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J7 (1 time-saving) is determined), either mode 4 or mode 10 will be determined.

Furthermore, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "BAH", "BBH", "BCH", "BDH", "BEH", or "BFH" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a win for time-saving), a special fluctuation pattern (hereinafter referred to as mode 15) will be determined.

In Figure 47, the numbers shown in each area where a variation pattern command and a variation presentation mode are associated indicate the range of variation presentation random numbers assigned to that area, i.e., the selection rate (determination rate) of that area.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the selection ratios for the variable presentation are set separately for each of the following cases: when the result of the lottery is a miss, when a big win is won, when a small win is won, and when a time-saving award is won and a predetermined time-saving symbol is determined.

For example, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot or a time-saving bonus, the probability of reach fluctuation pattern A being determined is lower than in the case of a miss or small win, but the probability of reach fluctuation pattern B being determined is higher. Therefore, when reach fluctuation pattern B is executed, the expectation of winning a jackpot or a time-saving bonus is higher than when reach fluctuation pattern A is executed.

Furthermore, while development pattern A can be determined whether the result of the lottery is a miss, a small win, a big win, or a win for a time-saving grant, development pattern B (B1, B2, B3, B4) can only be determined whether the result of the lottery is a big win or a win for a time-saving grant. Therefore, when development pattern B is executed, a win for a big win or a win for a time-saving grant is confirmed, and it becomes clear that one of these has been won.

Furthermore, development pattern B1 can be determined when the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J1 (10 times the time-saving number), J2 (20 times the time-saving number), J3 (30 times the time-saving number), J4 (50 times the time-saving number), J5 (100 times the time-saving number), or J6 (1000 times the time-saving number) is determined. Development pattern B2 can be determined when the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J2, J3, J4, J5, or J6 is determined. Development pattern B3 can be determined when the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J4, J5, or J6 is determined. Development pattern B4 can be determined when the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J6 is determined.
In other words, if the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant, when the time-saving pattern J1 is determined, only development pattern B1 of development pattern B can be determined; when the time-saving pattern J2 or J3 is determined, development pattern B1 and development pattern B2 of development pattern B can be determined; when the time-saving pattern J4 or J5 is determined, development pattern B1, development pattern B2 and development pattern B3 of development pattern B can be determined; and when the time-saving pattern J6 is determined, development pattern B1, development pattern B2, development pattern B3 and development pattern B4 of development pattern B can all be determined.

In other words, when development pattern B is executed when time-saving pattern J1, which specifies a time-saving count of 10 times, is selected, the execution rate of development pattern B1 is 100%, and the execution rates of development patterns B2, B3, and B4 are all 0%. When development pattern B is executed when time-saving pattern J2, which specifies a time-saving count of 20 times, or time-saving pattern J3, which specifies a time-saving count of 30 times, is selected, the execution rate of development patterns B1 and B2 is 50%, and the execution rate of development patterns B3 and B4 is 0%. The execution rates are all 0%. When development pattern B is executed when time-saving symbol J4, which sets the number of time-saving times to 50, or time-saving symbol J5, which sets the number of time-saving times to 100, is selected, the execution rates for development patterns B1, B2, and B3 are all approximately 33%, and the execution rate for development pattern B4 is 0%. When development pattern B is executed when time-saving symbol J6, which sets the number of time-saving times to 1000, is selected, the execution rates for development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are all 25%. In other words, the execution rates for development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 vary depending on the number of time-saving times that is set.

When development pattern B1 is executed, a jackpot is won, or a time-saving bonus with the number of time-saving bonuses set to 10 or more (10, 20, 30, 50, 100, or 1000) is confirmed. When development pattern B2 is executed, a jackpot is won, or a time-saving bonus with the number of time-saving bonuses set to 20 or more (20, 30, 50, 100, or 1000) is confirmed. When development pattern B3 is executed, a jackpot is won, or a time-saving bonus with the number of time-saving bonuses set to 50 or more (50, 100, or 1000) is confirmed. When development pattern B4 is executed, a jackpot is won, or a time-saving bonus with the number of time-saving bonuses set to 1000 is confirmed.

In this way, with this form of pachinko machine P, the execution rate of development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 varies depending on the number of times time is reduced when a time-reduction bonus is awarded. This gives the player different expectations regarding the number of times time can be reduced depending on the type of development pattern B executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the variable effects of development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4.

In addition, in pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot or a time-saving award, variable effects using development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 can be executed; however, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a small jackpot or a loss, variable effects using development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are not executed. In other words, the execution rate of variable effects using development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 is higher when the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot or a time-saving award than when the result of the win/loss lottery is a small jackpot or a loss. Therefore, by executing variable effects using development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation for winning a jackpot or a time-saving award, thereby increasing the player's interest in the variable effects using development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4.

In addition, instead of preventing the variable effects of development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 from being executed when the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss, they may be executed at a lower rate than when the result of the lottery is a big win or a time-saving win.

In addition, during the variable performance, along with the display of the changing performance pattern 50, various preview images indicating the expected probability of winning a jackpot or a time-saving bonus are displayed, and other preview performances are also performed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the likelihood of the above-mentioned preview effects being executed in the event of a jackpot or a time-saving bonus is separately set. This makes it possible to change the player's expectations for winning a jackpot or a time-saving bonus depending on the preview effect that is executed. Specifically, certain preview effects are set to have a high likelihood of being executed in the event of a jackpot or a time-saving bonus, thereby increasing the player's expectations for winning a jackpot or a time-saving bonus.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the possibility of a specific preview effect being executed is set to be higher when a time-saving bonus is awarded than when a jackpot is won.

For example, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 48, a line preview in which lines by a predetermined character are displayed can be executed as a preview effect executed before a reach display during a variable effect. Three patterns of line preview are provided: line preview A, line preview B, and line preview C.
In addition, as a notice effect executed after a reach display during a variable effect, a cut-in notice in which a predetermined cut-in image is displayed can be executed. There are three types of cut-in notice: a blue cut-in notice in which a blue cut-in image is displayed, a red cut-in notice in which a red cut-in image is displayed, and a purple cut-in notice in which a purple cut-in image is displayed.

If the time-saving feature is awarded through the lottery, then the line previews A and B can be executed, with the probability that line preview A will be executed 15% of the time, and line preview B 10% of the time. Also, the cut-in previews that can be executed are blue cut-in preview, red cut-in preview, and purple cut-in preview, with the probability that blue cut-in preview will be executed 10% of the time, red cut-in preview 40% of the time, and purple cut-in preview 55% of the time.

In addition, if the jackpot is won through the lottery, the following line previews can be executed: Line Preview A, Line Preview B, and Line Preview C. In this case, Line Preview A will be executed 15% of the time, Line Preview B will be executed 20% of the time, and Line Preview C will be executed 25% of the time. In addition, blue cut-in previews and red cut-in previews can be executed as cut-in previews. In the above cases, the blue cut-in preview will be executed 10% of the time, and the red cut-in preview will be executed 25% of the time.

In addition, if the lottery results in a loss or small win, line preview A and line preview B can be executed as line previews, and in this case, line preview A will be executed 3% of the time, and line preview B will be executed 5% of the time. In addition, blue cut-in previews and red cut-in previews can be executed as cut-in previews, and in the above cases, blue cut-in previews will be executed 5% of the time, and red cut-in previews will be executed 10% of the time.

In other words, in pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when a time-saving bonus is awarded, the rate at which line preview A is executed is the same as when a jackpot is won, but the rates at which line preview B and line preview C are executed are both small, so when line preview B or line preview C is executed, the player can be made to feel excited about winning the jackpot. Furthermore, since line preview C can only be executed when a jackpot is won, when line preview C is executed, the jackpot is confirmed, which can increase the player's excitement.

On the other hand, when a time-saving award is won, the rate at which the blue cut-in notice is executed is the same as when a jackpot is won, and the rates at which the red cut-in notice and the purple cut-in notice are both executed are high, so when the red cut-in notice or the purple cut-in notice is executed, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation for winning the time-saving award. Note that the purple cut-in notice can only be executed when a time-saving award is won, so when the purple cut-in notice is executed, the time-saving award is confirmed, which can increase the player's interest.
This makes it possible to increase the player's expectations for winning a time-saving award which has a high probability of transitioning to a time-saving game state, rather than winning a jackpot which has a very high probability of transitioning to a time-saving game state.

In addition, the effects that can be executed on the pachinko machine P of this embodiment are not limited to the above-mentioned variable effects, and for example, a pre-reading effect may be provided that gives suggestions regarding the hold stored in the hold memory area before the variable effect related to the hold is executed.
Specifically, the predictive effects may include a hold predictive effect in which, when a new hold is stored, the hold is displayed in one of a plurality of modes including a normal mode and a special mode in which the likelihood of winning a jackpot or a time-saving grant is higher than the normal mode; a hold change predictive effect in which, at any time from the time the hold is stored until the variable effect based on the hold ends, the hold display being displayed in a predetermined mode is changed to a mode in which the likelihood of winning a jackpot or a time-saving grant is higher; and a predictive zone effect in which, when a new hold is stored, a high expectation suggestive image (for example, a background image) is displayed suggesting a high likelihood of winning a jackpot or a time-saving grant during the variable effect based on the hold, or across multiple variable effects from the variable effect based on a hold stored earlier than the hold to the variable effect based on the hold.

The system may also be configured so that the chances of a hold preview effect, hold change preview effect, preview zone effect, etc., in which the hold display is performed in the special manner described above, are higher when a time-saving bonus is awarded than when a jackpot is won.

For example, as shown in Figure 49, three patterns of hold change pre-reading effects are provided: a blue hold change where the white hold display changes to a blue hold display; a red hold change where the white hold display changes to a red hold display; and a purple hold change where the white hold display changes to a purple hold display. Also, three patterns of pre-reading zone effects are provided: zone A where a first high expectation suggestion image is displayed, zone B where a second high expectation suggestion image is displayed, and zone C where a third high expectation suggestion image is displayed.

If any of the stored holds is determined to be a winner for the time-saving grant through a win/loss lottery, a blue hold change, a red hold change, and a purple hold change can be executed as a hold change pre-reading effect for the above-mentioned holds, and in the above-mentioned cases, the probability that a blue hold change will be executed may be 10%, the probability that a red hold change will be executed may be 40%, and the probability that a purple hold change will be executed may be 55%. Furthermore, zone A and zone B can be executed as pre-reading zone effects for the above-mentioned holds, and in the above-mentioned cases, the probability that zone A will be executed may be 15%, and the probability that zone B will be executed may be 10%.

Furthermore, if any of the stored reserves is determined to be a jackpot through a win/lose lottery, a blue reserve change and a red reserve change can be executed as a reserve change pre-reading effect for the above-mentioned reserves, and in the above-mentioned cases, the probability that a blue reserve change will be executed may be 10%, and the probability that a red reserve change will be executed may be 25%. Furthermore, zones A, B, and C can be executed as pre-reading zone effects for the above-mentioned reserves, and in this case, the probability that zone A will be executed may be 15%, zone B may be executed may be 20%, and zone C may be executed may be 25%.

Furthermore, if any of the stored reserves is determined to be a miss or a small win through a win/lose lottery, a blue reserve change and a red reserve change can be executed as a reserve change pre-reading effect for the above-mentioned reserves, and in the above-mentioned cases, the probability that a blue reserve change will be executed may be 5%, and the probability that a red reserve change will be executed may be 10%. Furthermore, zone A and zone B can be executed as pre-reading zone effects for the above-mentioned reserves, and in this case, the probability that zone A will be executed may be 3%, and the probability that zone B will be executed may be 5%.

In other words, when set as described above, when it is determined that a time-saving award has been won, the rate at which a blue reserve change is executed is the same as when it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and the rates at which a red reserve change and a purple reserve change are both executed are high, so when a red reserve change or a purple reserve change is executed, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation for winning the time-saving award. Note that the purple reserve change can only be executed when it is determined that a time-saving award has been won, so when a purple reserve change is executed, the decision to award the time-saving award is confirmed, which can increase the player's interest.
Even when set in this way, the player's expectations for winning the time-saving bonus can be increased more than for winning the jackpot.

When set as described above, if it is determined that a time-saving bonus has been awarded, the probability that Zone A will be executed is the same as when it is determined that a jackpot has been awarded, but the probability that Zone B and Zone C will be executed are both small. Therefore, when Zone B or Zone C is executed, the player can feel a sense of anticipation for winning the jackpot. Furthermore, since Zone C can only be executed when it is determined that a jackpot has been awarded, when Zone C is executed, the jackpot has been confirmed, which can heighten the player's excitement.

(Outline of special announcements)
The special notification effect is an effect that can be executed in conjunction with the variation effect when the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and a variation effect is performed using a special variation pattern (i.e., when the determined variation pattern command is "BAH,""BBH,""BCH,""BDH,""BEH," or "BFH"), and can notify the player of the win of the time-saving grant and the number of times the time will be reduced in the first low-probability time-saving game state based on the win.

This special notification effect is executed continuously from the start of the fluctuation effect until the predetermined fluctuation time for each fluctuation pattern command has elapsed and the fluctuation effect has ended, and until the predetermined stop display time for each special symbol (3 seconds for all time-saving symbols) has elapsed.
Specifically, in the special notification effect, after a predetermined time (two seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, all images (such as the variation symbols 50 and background images) displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 are erased, the entire surface of the display unit 21a is displayed in black, and all lamps (the variation lighting device 23) installed in the pachinko machine P are turned off, thereby starting a blackout effect (see FIGS. 50(a)-(c)). Then, after a predetermined blackout effect execution time (four seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, a variation display of the variation symbols 50, which are smaller than the variation symbols 50 before the start of the blackout effect, is started in the upper right corner of the display unit 21a, and the variation effect is resumed. At the same time, a window is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a, and a count-up display of numbers is started within this window (see FIG. 50(d)). The count-up display is continued until the variation time specified in the variation pattern command has elapsed (see FIGS. 50(e)-(h)). Then, when the variable time has elapsed, the number in the window mentioned above reaches the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol determined based on the winning of the time-saving award, and the count-up display ends with the end of the variable effect (see FIG. 50(h)). After that, until the stop display time has elapsed, a setting image indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set and the number of time-saving times are displayed (see FIGS. 50(i) to (j)), and the special notification effect ends with the elapse of the stop display time.

In the count-up display described above, the number in the window increases by a predetermined number (1 in this embodiment) every time a predetermined count time (1 second in this embodiment) elapses until the number in the window reaches a predetermined value (20 in this embodiment) (see Figures 50 (d) to (e)).
Furthermore, when the number in the window reaches "10" or "20" (i.e., the number of times the time-saving feature can be set), a back-and-forth display between the currently displayed number and the next displayed number is performed, building anticipation for the countup to the next number (see FIGS. 50(f)-(g), 51(a)-(d), and 52(a)). If a time-saving feature corresponding to a number of times the time-saving feature is greater than the currently displayed number has been determined, the display goes through the aforementioned promotional display, counting up to the next number, and then the countup display continues (see FIGS. 51(a)-(b)). On the other hand, if a time-saving feature corresponding to the same number of times the time-saving feature is determined, the display ends with the currently displayed number after the promotional display has ended, without counting up to the next number (i.e., the variable time has elapsed at this point, and the variable display has ended), and then the setting image and the number of times the time-saving feature is set are displayed (see FIGS. 50(h)-(j), and 51(e)-(g)).

Furthermore, if a time-saving symbol corresponding to a number of times the time is reduced beyond 20 (30, 50, 100, 1000) has been determined, the number in the window will exceed "20" and a count-up display will be displayed. However, after the number in the window exceeds "20" through the above-mentioned promotional effect, a masking effect will be executed in which the number in the window is obscured by a predetermined masking image (e.g., an image of "???") (see Figure 52(b)). Then, after the time corresponding to the determined number of times the time is reduced has elapsed, the masking image will be erased and the number indicating the determined number of times the time is reduced will suddenly be displayed in the window, ending the count-up display (i.e., at this point, the variable time has elapsed and the variable effect has ended), after which the setting image and the number of times the time is reduced will be displayed (see Figures 52(c)-(e)). By obscuring the number in the window with a masking image in this way, the player's anticipation for the number that will ultimately be displayed in the window (i.e., the number of times the time is reduced corresponding to the determined time-saving symbol) can be enhanced.

The progress of the special notification effect will be explained in more detail below.
(1) When the time-saving symbol J1 (time-saving count: 10) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BAH" (fluctuation time: 18 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(a), the blackout effect starts 2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect by the special fluctuation pattern, and the blackout effect ends and the count-up display starts 6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect. Then, 16 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the number in the window reaches "10" and the hype effect is executed, and 18 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the hype effect ends and the number in the window stops at "10". At the same time, the fluctuation effect ends at this point. After that, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time-saving counts are displayed until the 3-second stop display time has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the time-saving count is set to 10, the execution time of the special notification effect is 21 seconds from the start of the variable effect until the variable effect ends and the stop display time has elapsed.

(2) When the time-saving symbol J2 (20 time-saving times) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BBH" (fluctuation time 30 seconds) is determined, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (1) until 18 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect by the special fluctuation pattern. However, after 18 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect and the hype effect has ended, the number in the window exceeds "10" and the count-up display continues. Then, 28 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the number in the window reaches "20" and the hype effect is executed, and 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the hype effect ends and the number in the window stops at "20". At this point, the fluctuation effect ends. After that, until the 3-second stop display time has elapsed, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time-saving times are displayed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the number of time-saving times is set to 20, the execution time of the special notification effect is 33 seconds from the start of the variable effect to the end of the variable effect and the elapse of the stop display time, which is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when the number of time-saving times is set to 10.

(3) When the time-saving pattern J3 (30 times of time-saving) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BCH" (fluctuation time 36 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(c), until 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation performance by the special fluctuation pattern, the special notification performance proceeds in the same manner as in (2), but after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation performance and the hype performance has ended, the shielding performance is executed. Then, 36 seconds after the start of the fluctuation performance, the shielding performance ends, the shielding image is erased, and the number "30" is displayed in the window. At the same time, the fluctuation performance ends at this point. After that, until the 3-second stop display time has passed, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time-saving times are displayed, and the special notification performance ends.
In other words, when the number of time-saving times is set to 30, the execution time of the special notification effect is 39 seconds from the start of the variable effect until the variable effect ends and the stop display time has elapsed, which is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when the number of time-saving times is set to 10 or 20.

(4) When the time-saving symbol J4 (50 time-saving times) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BDH" (fluctuation time 46 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) until 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation effect and the obscuring effect is executed. After that, 46 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the obscuring effect ends, the obscuring image is erased, and the number "50" is displayed in the window. At this point, the fluctuation effect also ends. After that, until the 3-second stop display time has passed, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time-saving times are displayed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the number of time-saving times is set to 50, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from the start of the variable effect until the variable effect ends and the stop display time has elapsed, which is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when the number of time-saving times is set to 10, 20, or 30.

(5) When the time-saving symbol J5 (100 times of time-saving) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BEH" (fluctuation time 66 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) and (4) until 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation effect and the obscuring effect is executed. After that, 66 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the obscuring effect ends, the obscuring image is erased, and the number "100" is displayed in the window. At this point, the fluctuation effect also ends. After that, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of times of time-saving are displayed until the 3-second stop display time has passed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the time-saving count is set to 100, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from the start of the variable effect until the variable effect ends and the stop display time has elapsed, which is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when the time-saving count is set to 10, 20, 30, or 50.

(6) When the time-saving symbol J6 (time-saving count 1000 times) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BFH" (fluctuation time 68 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(c), the special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) to (5) until 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation effect and the obscuring effect is executed. After that, 68 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the obscuring effect ends, the obscuring image is erased, and the number "1000" is displayed in the window. At this point, the fluctuation effect also ends. After that, until the 3-second stop display time has passed, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time-saving counts are displayed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the time-saving count is set to 1,000, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from the start of the variable effect to the end of the variable effect and the elapse of the stop display time, which is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when the time-saving count is set to 10, 20, 30, 50, or 100.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the time-saving symbol J7 (one time of time-saving) is selected, no special variation pattern is performed, and no special notification effect is executed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when a time-saving award is won, the more the number of time-saving times set corresponding to the determined time-saving symbol increases, the longer the execution time of the special notification effect. In other words, after the special notification effect is executed, the game state shifts to the first low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state), which is advantageous for the player, but if the execution period of the special notification effect becomes longer, the period during which the first low-probability time-saving game state to which the game state shifts after the execution of the effect is executed becomes longer.
Therefore, if the execution period of the special notification effect is longer, the gaming profit (amount of time-shortened gaming state) given to the player will be larger, thereby increasing the player's interest in the special notification effect.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a time-saving bonus is awarded and a special notification effect is executed, a first low-probability time-saving game state is set, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot 16 without winning a jackpot or going through a special game, and therefore the large winning slot 18 is not opened during the period from when the special notification effect is executed until when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. Therefore, there is less control over the operation of the structure (large winning slot 18) during the above-mentioned period, which reduces the burden on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101.

Next, the control processing in the sub-control board 300 for executing the various processes described above will be described.
First, the main processing of the sub-control board 300 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
In step 2000, in response to power-on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 302, and initialization and setting processes are executed for flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 303. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2001.
In step 2001, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process of updating each effect random number (variable effect random number), and thereafter repeats the process of step 2001 until an interrupt process is performed. Here, each effect random number is updated asynchronously.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 300 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
The sub-control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generating circuit (not shown) that generates clock pulses at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds). When this reset clock pulse generating circuit generates a clock pulse, the sub-CPU 301 reads a timer interrupt processing program and starts the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

In step 2100, the sub-CPU 301 executes an update process for various timer counters used in the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2101.
In addition, the pachinko machine P of this embodiment uses a countdown timer, and the timer counter is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process of the sub-control board 300 is executed, and the countdown stops when it reaches 0.
In step 2101, the sub-CPU 301 analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 303 and executes various processes according to the received command. Specifically, when a command is sent from the main control board 100, the sub-control board 300 performs command receive interrupt processing and stores the command sent from the main control board 100 in the receive buffer. The sub-CPU 301 then analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer by the command receive interrupt processing. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2102.

In step 2102, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the operation of the performance operation device 9 is acceptable, depending on the progress of the currently executing variable performance, and also determines whether or not an operation signal has been input from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c and the press operation detection sensor 9d. If the performance operation device 9 is accepting an operation when an operation signal is input from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c or the press operation detection sensor 9d, a command is stored in the transmission buffer to transmit information that the performance operation device 9 has been operated to various control boards such as an image control board (not shown), an audio control board (not shown), and an illumination control board (not shown). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2103.
In step 2103, the sub-CPU 301 transmits the commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 303 to the various control boards such as the image control board, the audio control board, the illumination control board, etc. Then, the timer interrupt process of the sub-control board 300 is completed.

Next, the variation pattern command reception process executed when a variation pattern command is received, which is part of the command analysis process of step 2101 described above, will be described with reference to the flowchart of Figure 57. As described above, the variation pattern command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 903 of the variation pattern determination process, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the output control process of step 208.
In step 2200, the sub-CPU 301 acquires the variable effect random number updated in the above-mentioned step 2001. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2201.
In step 2201, the sub-CPU 301 determines the mode of the variable effect based on the variable effect determination table 119, the variable effect random number acquired in the above-mentioned step 2200, and the received variable pattern command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2202.

In step 2202, the sub-CPU 301 sets a variable performance execution command corresponding to the determined variable performance mode in the transmission buffer. The variable performance execution command set here is sent to various control boards in step 2103 described above, and these control boards control the execution of variable performance based on the received variable performance execution command. The variable pattern command reception process then ends.

In the above-described embodiment, the special notification effect starts when the variable effect related to the winning of the time-saving award starts, and ends when the variable effect ends and the stopped display time of the special pattern has elapsed. By varying the variable time set in the variable pattern command corresponding to the time-saving pattern, the execution time of the special notification effect for each time-saving pattern (the number of time-saving times set) is set to change, but this is not limited to this.
For example, for any time-saving symbol, the fluctuation time set in the corresponding fluctuation pattern command is the same, but by varying the stop display time for each time-saving symbol, the execution time of the special notification effect for each time-saving symbol (the number of times time-saving is set) may be set to change. Also, by varying both the fluctuation time and the stop display time, the execution time of the special notification effect for each time-saving symbol (the number of times time-saving is set) may be set to change.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

Furthermore, the special notification effect may be executed not during the period from the start of the variable effect related to the winning of the time-saving award until the stop display time of the special symbol after the end of the variable effect has elapsed, but during the period from the start to the end of the variable effect described above. Specifically, the special notification effect may be executed from a predetermined start point in the variable effect described above (for example, the start point of the variable effect, a point after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, etc.) and may be executed at a predetermined end point in the variable effect (for example, a point after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the end of the variable effect, etc.).
In addition, the special notification effect may be executed during the period from when the special random number (first special random number) that resulted in the winning of the time-saving grant is obtained until the variable effect related to the winning of the time-saving grant ends. Specifically, for example, it may be executed during a period during one variable effect (hereinafter referred to as a pre-read variable effect) that is executed before the variable effect related to the winning of the time-saving grant (hereinafter referred to as the variable effect), or it may be executed during a period spanning multiple pre-read variable effects, or it may be executed during a period spanning from the pre-read variable effect to the variable effect.
When set in this way, the timing of the execution of the special notification effects can be varied, which can increase the interest of the player.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, it was possible to derive whether a time-saving award was won as a result of the judgment in the win/loss lottery, and if a time-saving award was won, a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) was set. However, instead of deriving a time-saving award as a result of the judgment in the win/loss lottery, a special symbol (i.e., a small win symbol or a losing symbol) that can be determined based on a judgment result other than a big win in the win/loss lottery (i.e., a small win symbol or a losing symbol) may be used as the time-saving symbol, and whether or not a time-saving game state can be set (whether or not a time-saving award is won) may be determined depending on the type of special symbol determined.

For example, the losing symbols that are determined when a win/loss lottery based on a win/loss random number results in a loss may be set to a loss symbol ZA1, a loss symbol ZA2, a loss symbol ZA3, etc., and when loss symbol ZA1 is determined, a first time-saving game state with a set number of time reductions of 10 may be set; when loss symbol ZA2 is determined, a first time-saving game state with a set number of time reductions of 20 may be set; and when loss symbol ZA3 is determined, a first time-saving game state with a set number of time reductions of 30 may be set. Even in this case, a variable effect using variable pattern B similar to that in the above-described embodiment may be executed, or a special notification effect similar to that in the above-described embodiment may be executed.

Similarly, small win symbols YA1, YA2, YA3, etc. may be provided as small win symbols to be determined when a small win is won by a win/loss lottery based on a win/loss random number, and when small win symbol YA1 is determined, a first time-saving game state with a set number of time-saving turns of 10 may be set, when small win symbol YA2 is determined, a first time-saving game state with a set number of time-saving turns of 20 may be set, and when small win symbol YA3 is determined, a first time-saving game state with a set number of time-saving turns of 30 may be set. In this case, too, a variable effect using variable pattern B similar to that in the above-described embodiment may be executed, or a special notification effect similar to that in the above-described embodiment may be executed.
In addition, when the time-saving game state is set based on the small win symbol as described above, the special notification effect may be set to be executed during the period from when the variable effect based on the winning of the small win starts to when the small win game based on the winning of the small win ends. In such a case, the execution time of the special notification effect for each small win symbol may be set to change by varying one or more of the variable effect change time, the stop display time of the special symbol, the opening time of the small win game, the opening time of the large prize opening 18 during the small win game, and the ending time of the small win game.
In addition, the above-mentioned special notification effect may be executed in the same manner as described above during the period from when the special random number (first special random number) that resulted in a small win is obtained until the variable effect related to the small win ends.
If set in this way, there will be a wide variety of winning times for time-saving bonuses, which will increase the player's interest.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the execution time of the special notification effect was set so that the greater the number of time-saving times set corresponding to the determined time-saving symbol, the longer the execution time of the special notification effect. However, the target of such control is not limited to the special notification effect that can be executed when a time-saving bonus is awarded. For example, if one of multiple jackpot symbols is determined based on a jackpot win, and the number of rounds of play to be executed during special play is determined for each jackpot symbol, the greater the number of rounds of play executed corresponding to the jackpot symbol, the longer the variable time of the variable effect executed based on the jackpot win. In other words, the longer the variable time of the variable effect executed based on the jackpot win, the greater the number of rounds of play executed during the special play that follows.
In addition, the setting may be such that the greater the number of rounds executed in response to the jackpot symbol, the longer the execution period of the predetermined look-ahead effect that can be executed before the variable effect executed based on the winning of the jackpot. In other words, the longer the execution period of the predetermined look-ahead effect, the greater the number of rounds during the special game that are executed thereafter.
When set up in this way, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the variable effects based on winning a jackpot and the predictive effects that can be executed before the variable effects.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the large prize opening 18 is not opened during the period from when the special notification effect is executed until the first low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is set, but it is also possible to prevent other prize openings (for example, the second start prize opening 16) from opening during the period from when the variable effect based on a jackpot is executed until the special game advantageous to the player begins.

In addition, the variable effects and special notification effects of development pattern B in the above-mentioned embodiment are not only executed when a time-saving feature is awarded through a win/loss lottery, but may also be executed when a jackpot is won and a jackpot pattern that is set to set a time-saving game state is determined.

(Modification)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the determination of whether or not the time-saving award will be granted is made only in the lottery during a normal game state that combines a low-probability game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a non-time-saving game state in which the second start winning port 16 is relatively unlikely to be maintained in an open state. The determination of whether or not the time-saving award will be granted is not made in the lottery during other game states (such as a high-probability game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high or a time-saving game state in which the second start winning port 16 is relatively likely to be maintained in an open state (i.e., during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state)). As a result, the time-saving award will only be granted during the normal game state, and will not be granted during other game states. However, the control for deriving the result of such a lottery is not limited to this.

For example, as the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced during a high-probability game state or a time-saving game state, a table (FIGS. 6(b), 7(b), 8(b), 9(b), 10(b), 11(b)) may be provided that does not have a numerical range of win/loss random numbers that will result in a win for the time-saving award, and in the win/loss lottery during a high-probability game state or a time-saving game state, the win/loss of the time-saving award may be determined based on the above-mentioned table. In this case, during a high-probability game state or a time-saving game state, the determination of the time-saving award is made based on the win/loss random number determination table 110 that will not determine a win for the time-saving award, so that, as with the above-mentioned embodiment, a win for the time-saving award cannot be made during a game state other than the normal game state.
Furthermore, for example, the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced during a high-probability game state or a time-saving game state may also be set with a numerical range of win/loss random numbers that result in a win for the time-saving award, and in the win/loss lottery during a high-probability game state or a time-saving game state, the win/loss of the time-saving award may be determined based on this table, but if a win for the time-saving award is determined, the result of the determination that the time-saving award was won may be forcibly rewritten to a time-saving award not being won, or the result of the determination that the time-saving award was won may be discarded. In such a case, as in the above-described embodiment, a win for the time-saving award may not be determined during a game state other than the normal game state.
In this case, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment is achieved, and the judgment in the win/lose lottery can be made in game states other than the normal game state in the same way as in the normal game state, so that the judgment in the win/lose lottery can be standardized and the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.
Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving award was set to be the same regardless of the set value, but this is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the time-saving award may be set to differ depending on the set value. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving award when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 and the probability of winning the time-saving award when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16 were both set to be the same, but this is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the time-saving award may be set to be different when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 and when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16. Furthermore, the number of time-saving awards may be set to differ depending on the set game state and the type of time-saving symbol determined when a time-saving award is won. Furthermore, the number of time-saving awards determined depending on the set game state and the type of time-saving symbol determined when a time-saving award is won may be 0, or may always be 1 or more.
Furthermore, when a different number of time-saving times is set for each time-saving pattern to be determined, the number of time-saving times and the probability of determining the time-saving pattern may be determined in relation to the probability of winning a jackpot in the win/lose lottery, and may be set to a value within a range that does not make the game too gambling-oriented (for example, if the probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability game state (in a pachinko machine with multiple setting values associated with settings related to ball output, the lowest probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability game state) is 1/P, then the number of time-saving times ≦ P × specific coefficient A, and the probability of determining the time-saving pattern ≦ P × specific coefficient B).
Furthermore, multiple conditions may be set for terminating the time-saving game state, which is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol. For example, the time-saving game state may be set to end when either the number of fluctuations based on the entry of game balls into the first start winning slot 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the entry of game balls into the second start winning slot 16 reaches a predetermined number (time-saving number C1), or the number of fluctuations based on the entry of game balls into the second start winning slot 16 reaches a predetermined number (time-saving number C2). In this case, the larger of the time-saving number C1 and the time-saving number C2 may be set in relation to the probability of winning the jackpot in the win/lose lottery, as described above, and may be set to a value within a range that does not result in excessive gambling.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, when a player is selected to receive a time-saving grant based on the result of a win/loss lottery using a win/loss random number, the time-saving pattern is determined by a process of determining a special pattern different from the win/loss lottery using a special pattern random number different from the win/loss random number, and the number of times the time is saved is determined according to the type of time-saving pattern (J1, J2, J3) that is determined, but this is not limited to this.
For example, it may be configured so that both the winning of the time-saving grant and the determination of the number of time-saving times can be determined by a winning/losing lottery using a winning/losing random number. In other words, the winning of the time-saving grant and the determination of the number of time-saving times can be determined by the same random number and the same process, rather than by separate random numbers and separate processes.
Specifically, the win/loss random number determination table 110 can be set to a numerical range that determines whether a win has been made for the time-saving bonus and to which a predetermined time-saving symbol is associated, and can be set so that if the acquired win/loss random number falls within that numerical range, the win/loss bonus and the number of time-saving times specified for the time-saving symbol corresponding to that numerical range are determined. For example, the win/loss random number determination table 110 can be set to a value of 1, and can be referenced in the win/loss lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning slot 15 during a low-probability game state. For example, a table A1a can be set such that if the win/loss random number is 3310 to 3637, a win/loss bonus is determined to be awarded to the time-saving bonus associated with the time-saving symbol J1 (the number of time-saving times is 10), and if the win/loss random number is 3638 to 3964, a win/loss bonus is determined to be awarded to the time-saving bonus associated with the time-saving symbol J2 (the number of time-saving times is 20) (see FIG. 58 ). According to this table A1a, if the win/loss random number is between 3310 and 3637, it is determined that the time-saving award has been won, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, and the number of time-saving times is determined to be 10. Also, if the win/loss random number is between 3638 and 3964, it is determined that the time-saving award has been won, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, and the number of time-saving times is determined to be 20.
In this case, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment is achieved, and the processing load in the win/loss lottery is reduced, as the winning or losing of the time-saving grant and the number of times the time-saving grant is granted are determined solely by the process of determining whether or not the time-saving grant has been granted in the win/loss lottery.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, after a determination is made as to whether or not a time-saving bonus will be awarded in a win/lose lottery during normal game play, if the result of the determination is a win in the time-saving bonus, a time-saving symbol corresponding to the number of times the time-saving bonus will be awarded is determined, but the order of processing is not limited to this.
For example, after determining the time-saving symbol, a lottery may be held to determine whether the time-saving award will be granted. If the time-saving award is granted, a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) may be set, and the number of time-saving times associated with the previously determined time-saving symbol may be set.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the determination of whether a big win has been won, the determination of whether a small win has been won, and the determination of whether a time-saving bonus has been awarded are all performed by referring to the same win/loss random number determination table 110, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the determination of whether or not a time-saving bonus has been awarded may be performed by referring to a specific table that is different from the bonus/failure random number determination table 110 used to determine whether or not a big win has been won and whether or not a small win has been won, and that is used only to determine whether or not a time-saving bonus has been awarded.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, multiple types of time-saving symbols are provided to which the number of time-saving times is associated, and the number of time-saving times is determined according to the determined time-saving symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, one type of time-saving symbol J may be provided to which only the winning of the time-saving award is associated and the number of time-saving times is not associated, and when the winning or losing lottery results in the winning or losing of the time-saving award, the time-saving symbol J is determined, and the number of time-saving times is determined by a specific lottery separate from the winning or losing lottery.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the storage capacity of the special symbols in the main ROM 102 can be reduced, while the space for storing other information can be increased.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the determination of whether or not a time-saving award will be granted is made only in the win/loss lottery during a normal game state that combines a low-probability game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a non-time-saving game state in which the second start winning slot 16 is relatively unlikely to be maintained in an open state, and a time-saving award can be awarded (determination of the time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3). In the win/loss lottery during a high-probability game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high or a time-saving game state in which the second start winning slot 16 is relatively likely to be maintained in an open state (i.e., during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state), a determination of whether or not a time-saving award will be granted is not made, and a time-saving award cannot be awarded. However, this is not limited to this, and a determination of whether or not a time-saving award will be granted may be made in the win/loss lottery even during a time-saving game state.

Specifically, for example, a win/loss lottery may be set up so that a time-saving award may be determined and a time-saving award may be awarded (time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3) even in a win/loss lottery during a first low-probability time-saving game state that combines a low-probability game state and a first time-saving game state (i.e., during a game state in which a time-saving game state is set). Then, when a time-saving award is awarded by determining whether a time-saving award will be awarded in the win/loss lottery during the first low-probability time-saving game state and a time-saving symbol is determined, the first time-saving game state may be reset, and the number of time-saving awards associated with the determined time-saving symbol (10 time-saving times for the time-saving symbol J1, 20 time-saving times for the time-saving symbol J2, and 1 time-saving number for the time-saving symbol J3) may be reset (overwriting the current number of time-saving times). For example, if the remaining number of time-saving times during the first low-probability time-saving game state is five and a time-saving award is won and time-saving symbol J2 (20 time-saving times) is determined, the first time-saving game state may be reset and the number of time-saving times may be set to "20" again. In this case, the first low-probability time-saving game state will continue until the results of the lottery are derived 20 times again without winning the jackpot.
Furthermore, in the above-described case, rather than resetting the number of time-saving times associated with the time-saving symbol, the number of time-saving times associated with the time-saving symbol may be added to the number of time-saving times remaining at that time. For example, if the number of time-saving times remaining during the first low-probability time-saving game state is five and a time-saving award is won and time-saving symbol J2 (20 time-saving times) is determined, the first time-saving game state may be reset, and the remaining number of time-saving times may be updated to "25 times (= 5 remaining time-saving times + 20 time-saving times determined by time-saving symbol J2)." In this case, the first low-probability time-saving game state will continue until the results of the lottery are derived 25 times again without winning a jackpot.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment are achieved, and the opportunities for the time-saving game state to be set without winning a jackpot or playing a special game are increased, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay and increase the interest of players.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, three types of time-saving symbols were provided as time-saving symbols that can be determined when a time-saving bonus is awarded: time-saving symbol J1 with the number of time-saving times set to 10, time-saving symbol J2 with the number of time-saving times set to 20, and time-saving symbol J3 with the number of time-saving times set to 1. However, this is not limited to these, and other time-saving symbols with different numbers of time-saving times may be provided.
Specifically, in addition to these time-saving symbols, there may be provided a time-saving symbol J4 in which the number of times of time-saving is set to 30, a time-saving symbol J5 in which the number of times of time-saving is set to 50, a time-saving symbol J6 in which the number of times of time-saving is set to 10,000, etc. Also, there may be provided only one type of time-saving symbol in which a predetermined number of times of time-saving is set as a time-saving symbol that can be determined when a time-saving award is won.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the variety of time-saving game states that can be set without winning a jackpot or playing special games can be increased, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay and increasing the interest of players.
Furthermore, the number of time-saving times to be set may be predetermined for each type of time-saving symbol, as described above, or may be predetermined for each type of time-saving symbol and the set game state. For example, in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), the number of time-saving times is set to 100 when the time-saving symbol J1, the time-saving symbol J2, or the time-saving symbol J3 is selected, but in the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times may be set to 100 when the time-saving symbol J1 is selected, the number of time-saving times may be set to 50 when the time-saving symbol J2 is selected, and the number of time-saving times may be set to 0 when the time-saving symbol J3 is selected (i.e., the time-saving game state is set to end at the same time as the time-saving game state is set).
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the number of time-saving times that can be set can be varied to a greater extent, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay and increasing the interest of players.
Furthermore, if the pachinko machine is set up so that a player can win a time-saving bonus in either the win/loss lottery based on a game ball entering the first start winning port 15 or the win/loss lottery based on a game ball entering the second start winning port 16, the machine may be set up so that the probability of winning a time-saving bonus in the win/loss lottery based on a game ball entering the first start winning port 15 is different from the probability of winning a time-saving bonus in the win/loss lottery based on a game ball entering the second start winning port 16 (for example, the probability of winning a time-saving bonus in the win/loss lottery based on a game ball entering the first start winning port 15 is 1/100, and the probability of winning a time-saving bonus in the win/loss lottery based on a game ball entering the second start winning port 16 is 1/10).
In this case, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment is achieved, and the degree of advantage regarding the setting of the time-saving game state changes for each starting winning slot into which the game ball enters, thereby increasing the player's interest.
Furthermore, in the time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving pattern, the normal symbol opening time, which is the time from when a normal symbol is selected by lottery and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed until the movable piece 16b opens (the second start winning port 16 opens), may be set to be different depending on the type of the determined time-saving symbol. For example, in the time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1, the normal symbol opening time may be set to 0.5 seconds, in the time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2, the normal symbol opening time may be set to 1.0 seconds, and in the time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J3, the normal symbol opening time may be set to 1.5 seconds.
In this case, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment is achieved, and the advantageous degree of the time-saving game state that is set changes for each determined time-saving pattern, thereby increasing the player's interest.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, it was possible to derive whether the time-saving award was won as a result of the judgment in the win/loss lottery, and if the time-saving award was won, a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) was set. However, instead of deriving whether the time-saving award was won as a result of the judgment in the win/loss lottery, a special symbol (i.e., a small win symbol or a losing symbol) that can be determined based on a judgment result other than a big win in the win/loss lottery (i.e., a small win symbol or a losing symbol) may be used as the time-saving symbol, and whether or not the time-saving game state can be set (whether or not the time-saving award is won) may be determined depending on the type of special symbol determined.

For example, in the case where the result of the win/loss lottery based on the win/loss random number is a loss, if the losing symbol Z1 is determined by the special symbol random number, a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving times is set to 20 may be set, and if the losing symbol Z2 is determined by the special symbol random number, the first time-saving game state may not be set. Furthermore, the losing symbols that can be determined by the special symbol random number are not limited to these, and there may be provided losing symbols that set a first time-saving game state with a different number of time-saving times than the losing symbol Z1 (for example, losing symbol Z3 that sets a first time-saving game state with a time-saving time of 50, losing symbol Z4 that sets a first time-saving game state with a time-saving time of 10,000, etc.).
In addition, rather than determining the losing symbol by the process of drawing a winning/losing lottery and determining the special symbol, as in the above-mentioned variant example (2), in a winning/losing lottery based on a winning/losing random number, it is possible to set up so that, for example, a losing symbol corresponding to a losing symbol Z1 for which the first time-shortened game state and the number of time-shortened times are set to 20, and a losing symbol corresponding to a losing symbol Z2 for which it is set that the first time-shortened game state will not be set, and if the winning/losing lottery results in a losing symbol corresponding to the losing symbol Z1, the first time-shortened game state with the number of time-shortened times 20 is set, and if the winning/losing lottery results in a losing symbol corresponding to the losing symbol Z2, the first time-shortened game state will not be set.

Also, for example, in the case where a small prize is won by a win/lose lottery based on a win/lose random number, when the small prize symbol Y1 is determined by the special pattern random number, a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving times is set to 50 is set, and when the small prize symbol Y2 is determined by the special pattern random number, the first time-saving game state may not be set. Also, the small prize symbols that can be determined by the special pattern random number are not limited to these, and small prize symbols that set a first time-saving game state with a different number of time-saving times than the small prize symbol Y1 (for example, small prize symbol Y3 that sets a first time-saving game state with a time-saving number of 80 times, small prize symbol Z4 that sets a first time-saving game state with a time-saving number of 10,000 times, etc.) may be provided.
In addition, instead of determining the small prize pattern by the process of drawing a win/lose lottery and determining the special pattern, as in the above-mentioned variant example (2), in the win/lose lottery based on the win/lose random number, for example, it is possible to derive a small prize winning corresponding to the small prize pattern Y1 for which the first time-shortened game state is set and the number of time-shortened times is set to 50, and a small prize winning corresponding to the small prize pattern Y2 for which it is set that the first time-shortened game state will not be set, and if the win/lose lottery results in a small prize winning corresponding to the small prize pattern Y1, the first time-shortened game state with the number of time-shortened times 50 is set, and if the win/lose lottery results in a small prize winning corresponding to the small prize pattern Y2, the first time-shortened game state will not be set.
Also, it may be determined that the time-shortened game state is set for all of the small win symbols that can be determined, or it may be determined that the time-shortened game state is set for some of the small win symbols that can be determined. Also, it may be determined that the time-shortened game state is set for all of the losing symbols that can be determined, or it may be determined that the time-shortened game state is set for some of the losing symbols that can be determined. Furthermore, the small win symbols or losing symbols that are determined to set the time-shortened game state may be fixed, and the small win symbols or losing symbols that are determined to set the time-shortened game state may not be switched each time a game is played.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment can be achieved, and instead of providing a new time-saving pattern as a special pattern, it is possible to use special patterns such as small win patterns and miss patterns that have been used in the past to set a time-saving game state without winning a jackpot or playing a special game, thereby simplifying the development process of pachinko machines.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, whether or not a time-shortened game state can be set is determined based on the result of the win/loss lottery based on the win/loss random number to determine whether or not a time-shortened game state can be granted. However, the control over the determination of whether or not a time-shortened game state can be set is not limited to this.
For example, a time-saving pattern random number may be provided that is a dedicated random number for determining whether or not a time-saving game state can be set, separate from the win/loss random number and the special pattern random number, and a time-saving pattern lottery may be held based on the time-saving pattern random number to determine whether or not a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) can be set, separate from the win/loss lottery and the determination of the special pattern, and based on the result of the time-saving pattern lottery, it may be determined whether or not a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) can be set and the number of time-saving times when a time-saving game state is set.
In other words, a win/loss lottery is held based on a win/loss random number, and a special pattern is determined based on the result of the win/loss lottery, and a time-saving pattern lottery is held based on the time-saving pattern random number to determine whether or not a time-saving game state can be set (the time-saving pattern described below).

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, along with the above-mentioned first special pattern random number and second special pattern random number, one time-saving pattern random number, which is a random number exclusively for the time-saving pattern lottery, is obtained within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535), and based on the obtained time-saving pattern random number, a time-saving pattern lottery is held to determine the type of time-saving pattern that determines whether or not a time-saving game state can be set.
More specifically, a time-saving symbol random number determination table is provided for determining the type of time-saving symbol in the time-saving symbol lottery. This time-saving symbol random number determination table may be provided for each type of start winning slot into which the gaming ball has entered (first start winning slot 15, second start winning slot 16). Then, when the set gaming state is the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery is performed by referring to a predetermined time-saving symbol random number determination table, and the type of time-saving symbol is determined.

The time-saving symbols may be a time-saving winning symbol that determines whether or not a time-saving award will be won (i.e., a time-saving game state will be set), or a time-saving non-winning symbol that determines whether or not a time-saving award will be won (i.e., a time-saving game state will not be set). Also, the time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of time-saving winning symbols that determine different times of time-saving (for example, a time-saving winning symbol JA1 that determines 10 times of time-saving, a time-saving winning symbol JA2 that determines 20 times of time-saving, etc.).
Then, if any winning time-saving symbol is determined by the time-saving symbol lottery, for example, a first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) is set, and the number of time-saving turns corresponding to the determined winning time-saving symbol is set. As a result, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues without winning a jackpot until the result of the lottery for the set number of time-saving turns is derived. In contrast, if a non-winning time-saving symbol is determined, the normal game state remains.
Furthermore, if the set game state is other than the normal game state (first low-probability time-saving game state, second low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state), the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery may not be performed, and a non-winning time-saving symbol may be forcibly determined. As a result, in game states other than the normal game state, a new time-saving game state will not be set.

As described above, when the type of time-saving pattern is set to be determined by a time-saving pattern lottery based on a time-saving pattern random number, the time-saving pattern lottery and the time-saving pattern may be set to be controlled in the same way as the win/lose lottery and special patterns in the above-mentioned embodiment.
For example, the obtained time-saving pattern random number may be stored in the same reserved memory area as the first special pattern random number and the second special pattern random number obtained as a result of the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, and may be set to be able to be reserved up to a predetermined maximum number (for example, four), just like the first special pattern random number and the second special pattern random number.
Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is determined as described above, it may be configured so that, similar to the special symbol, a variable display of the time-saving symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a variable of the time-saving symbol) is performed on a predetermined display device (time-saving symbol display device) different from the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31. The variable display of the time-saving symbol may be configured to start at the same timing as the variable display of the special symbol, or may be configured to have the same variable time as the variable display of the special symbol. Furthermore, when the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the time-saving symbol are started at the same timing, it may be configured so that a lottery for the time-saving symbol is performed at the start of the variable display.

Furthermore, if a winning time-saving symbol is determined in the time-saving symbol lottery described above, and the win/loss lottery executed in conjunction with the time-saving symbol lottery results in a loss, the time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) may be set after the special symbol based on the win/loss lottery has stopped changing (when the next special symbol starts changing). Furthermore, if a small prize is won in the win/loss lottery executed in conjunction with the time-saving symbol lottery, the time-saving game state may be set after the small prize game based on the small prize win has ended (when the first special symbol starts changing after the small prize game has ended).

In contrast, if a time-saving winning symbol is determined in the time-saving symbol lottery described above, and a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery executed in conjunction with the time-saving symbol lottery, the time-saving game state may not be set based on the determination of the time-saving winning symbol, and after the special game based on the jackpot win ends (when the first special symbol change begins after the special game ends), the game state may be set according to the type of jackpot symbol determined based on the jackpot win. In other words, if the determination of the time-saving winning symbol and the determination of the jackpot symbol (winning the jackpot) overlap, the determination of the time-saving winning symbol may be invalidated, and the game state may be set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol. If setting the game state based on the determination of the time-saving winning symbol is given priority over special play, there is a possibility that the game state will change when a jackpot is won, and the game state after the special play ends must be set after checking whether or not such a change has occurred, which could complicate the game state setting process. However, by taking the above steps, it is possible to appropriately prevent such a situation from occurring.

In addition, the variable pattern command, the manner of the variable presentation, the manner of the pre-reading presentation, etc. may be determined based on the results of determining the special pattern and the time-saving pattern.
Specifically, the corresponding variation pattern commands and variation presentation modes may be determined in the following cases: when the result of the win/loss lottery is a win or a loss for a small prize and a time-saving winning symbol is determined; when the result of the win/loss lottery is a win or a loss for a small prize and a time-saving non-winning symbol is determined; and when the result of the win/loss lottery is a win for a jackpot (when a time-saving non-winning symbol is determined). For example, when the result of the win/loss lottery is a win or a loss for a small prize and a time-saving winning symbol is determined, or when the result of the win/loss lottery is a win for a jackpot, the determination rate of the variation pattern command associated with a longer variation time may be set to be higher than when the result of the win/loss lottery is a win or a loss for a small prize and a time-saving non-winning symbol is determined, or the determination rate of the variation presentation mode or the foresight presentation mode in which the expectation of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving prize is set to be higher may be set to be higher.

In addition, even when the type of time-saving symbol is determined by a lottery based on a random number of time-saving symbols, the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be performed in a game state other than the normal game state to determine whether or not to set the time-saving game state. The various controls in this case are the same as those in (6) above, and therefore will not be described here.
Furthermore, rather than determining both whether or not the time-shortening game state can be set and the number of times the time can be shortened in the time-shortening pattern lottery based on the time-shortening pattern random number, the time-shortening pattern lottery based on the time-shortening pattern random number may determine only whether or not the time-shortening game state can be set, and if it is decided that the time-shortening game state should be set, a lottery may be held to determine the number of times the time can be shortened based on another random number (a time-shortening number determination random number) different from the above-mentioned time-shortening pattern random number.

In addition, the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery may be set to be performed using other random numbers instead of using the time-saving symbol random numbers.
For example, instead of using one hit/miss random number to determine both whether a jackpot has been won and whether a small win has been won, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, a jackpot determination random number that is used only to determine whether a jackpot has been won, a small win determination random number that is used only to determine whether a small win has been won, and a miss determination random number that is used only to determine whether a miss has been won can be separately provided, and a determination can be made for each random number to derive the determination result of whether a jackpot has been won, a small win has been won, or a miss, and the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery can be conducted based on one of these random numbers to determine whether a time-saving game state can be set and the number of times the time can be reduced.

In addition, instead of determining the jackpot symbol, small win symbol, or losing symbol using a single special symbol random number as in the above-described embodiment, a jackpot symbol determination random number used only to determine the type of jackpot symbol in the event of a jackpot, a small win symbol determination random number used only to determine the type of small win symbol in the event of a small win, and a losing symbol determination random number used only to determine the type of losing symbol in the event of a loss may be separately provided, and the type of jackpot symbol, small win symbol, or losing symbol may be determined based on one of the random numbers corresponding to the result of the jackpot, small win, or loss determination, and a time-saving symbol lottery may be held based on one of these random numbers to determine whether to set a time-saving game mode and the number of time-saving cycles.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P having multiple setting values associated with settings related to ball output, as in the above-described embodiment, the time-saving symbol lottery may be based on either a random number used in a lottery set to vary the lottery probability depending on the setting value (e.g., a win/lose random number, a random number determining a big win, a random number determining a small win, a random number determining a miss, etc.), or a random number used in a lottery set to have the same lottery probability regardless of the setting value (e.g., a special symbol random number), to determine whether or not to set the time-saving game mode and the number of times to shorten the time. Furthermore, rather than based on a random number used in a lottery set to vary the lottery probability depending on the setting value, the time-saving symbol lottery may be based solely on a random number used in a lottery set to have the same lottery probability regardless of the setting value, to determine whether or not to set the time-saving game mode and the number of times to shorten the time.

When configured as described above, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment are achieved, and a variety of control methods for setting the time-saving game state become available, making it possible to set the time-saving game state according to the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, when a high-probability game state is set, a jackpot is subsequently won and a special pattern (jackpot pattern X4) for which a low-probability game state is set is determined, thereby ending the high-probability game state and setting a low-probability game state. However, the control of the transition to the low-probability game state is not limited to this.
For example, after a high-probability game state is set, if a predetermined number of high-probability game lotteries (e.g., 80 times) are held without a jackpot being won, the high-probability game state may be terminated (configured as a so-called ST-type pachinko machine). In a pachinko machine configured in this way, if a game state combining a high-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state can be set, the time-saving game state may be set based on the following determination during the game state: a time-saving award is determined by a time-saving lottery as in the above-described embodiment; a small-win or losing symbol that is set to set a time-saving game state is determined as in the above-described modified example (8); or a time-saving winning symbol is determined by a time-saving symbol lottery as in the above-described modified example (9).
Furthermore, for example, a fall lottery random number may be provided to be used in a fall lottery to determine whether or not to end the high-probability gaming state and set a low-probability gaming state, and when a fall lottery based on this fall lottery random number determines that the high-probability gaming state will be ended and a low-probability gaming state will be set, the high-probability gaming state may be ended.If a fall lottery random number is provided, a time-saving symbol lottery such as that in the above-mentioned modified example (9) may be performed based on the fall lottery random number to determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state.
When set as described above, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment are achieved, and a wide variety of control methods are available for setting the time-saving game state, making it possible to set the time-saving game state according to the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, the process of determining the result of the lottery was carried out in the following order: determining whether or not there was a big win → determining whether or not there was a small win → determining whether or not there was a time-saving award; however, the order of the determination is not limited to this.
For example, the determination may be made in the following order: determining whether or not a big win has been achieved → determining whether or not a time-saving bonus has been awarded → determining whether or not a small win has been achieved.
Also, as in the above-mentioned variant example (8), in the winning/losing lottery, rather than deriving a judgment result of whether a time-shortened bonus has been awarded, it is possible to derive whether a small prize corresponding to a small prize pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (hereinafter also referred to as a small prize with time-shortened bonus) or a small prize corresponding to a small prize pattern that is determined not to set a time-shortened game state (hereinafter also referred to as a small prize without time-shortened bonus), and in pachinko machines in which a time-shortened game state is set when a small prize with time-shortened bonus is won, and a time-shortened game state is not set when a small prize without time-shortened bonus is won, for example, the judgments may be made in the order of whether a jackpot has been awarded → whether a small prize with time-shortened bonus has been awarded → whether a small prize without time-shortened bonus has been awarded, or whether a jackpot has been awarded → whether a small prize without time-shortened bonus has been awarded → whether a small prize with time-shortened bonus has been awarded.
Furthermore, as in the above-mentioned variant example (8), in the winning/losing lottery, rather than deriving a judgment result of whether or not a time-shortening bonus has been awarded, it is possible to derive a loss corresponding to a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-shortening game state (hereinafter also referred to as a loss with time-shortening), or a loss corresponding to a losing symbol that is determined not to set a time-shortening game state (hereinafter also referred to as a loss without time-shortening), and in a pachinko machine in which a time-shortening game state is set when a loss with time-shortening is obtained, and a time-shortening game state is not set when a loss without time-shortening is obtained, the judgments may be made in the order of, for example, determining whether or not there is a big win → determining whether or not there is a small win → determining whether or not there is a loss with time-shortening, or determining whether or not there is a big win → determining whether or not there is a loss with time-shortening → determining whether or not there is a small win.
In addition, in pachinko machines that are set up to determine whether or not a high probability game state will end by a drop-out lottery, the lottery processing may be carried out in the following order: drop-out lottery → win/loss lottery (determining whether or not there is a big win, whether or not there is a small win, and whether or not there is a time-saving grant).

Furthermore, as in the above-mentioned modified example (9), in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether or not a time-shortened game state can be set by a time-shortened symbol lottery and does not have multiple set values, the lottery processing may be performed in the order of time-shortened symbol lottery → win/lose lottery, or the win/lose lottery → time-shortened symbol lottery. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether or not a time-shortened game state can be set by a time-shortened symbol lottery and has multiple set values, the lottery processing may be performed in the order of time-shortened symbol lottery (a lottery that is set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the set value) → win/lose lottery (a lottery that is set so that the lottery probability differs depending on the set value).
In addition, in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether a time-saving game state can be set by a time-saving symbol lottery and to determine whether a high-probability game state can be ended by a fall lottery and that does not have multiple setting values, the lottery processing may be performed in the order of fall lottery → time-saving symbol lottery → win/lose lottery, or in the order of fall lottery → win/lose lottery → time-saving symbol lottery.In addition, in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether a time-saving game state can be set by a time-saving symbol lottery and to determine whether a high-probability game state can be ended by a fall lottery and that has multiple setting values, the lottery processing may be performed in the order of fall lottery (a lottery that is set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the setting value) → time-saving symbol lottery (a lottery that is set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the setting value) → win/lose lottery (a lottery that is set so that the lottery probability differs depending on the setting value).

When configured as described above, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to set the time-saving game mode at a timing that corresponds to the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, a special game is executed when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, but the trigger for executing the special game is not limited to this.
For example, in a small prize game that is executed not only when the result of the lottery is a jackpot win, but also when the result of the lottery is a predetermined small prize win (when a predetermined small prize symbol is determined), a specific large prize opening with a special area into which a game ball can enter is opened, and a special game may be executed even if a game ball that entered the specific large prize opening during the small prize game enters the special area (configured as a so-called type 1/2 mixed pachinko machine).Furthermore, after the special game that is executed based on the above-mentioned small prize win ends, the machine may be configured to transition to a game state (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state) corresponding to the small prize symbol determined when the above-mentioned small prize win was won.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine configured as described above (a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine), similarly to the above-described embodiments and variants, it may be configured to determine whether or not a time-saving award will be granted (the win/loss lottery in the above-described embodiment and variant (2)), determine the small winning symbols and losing symbols that determine whether or not a time-saving game state can be set (the win/loss lottery and special symbol determination processing in the above-described variant (8)), determine the time-saving winning symbols or non-time-saving winning symbols (the time-saving symbol lottery in the above-described variant (9)), etc. (hereinafter, these determinations and decisions are collectively referred to as the time-saving award determination processing), and the time-saving game state may be set without going through the winning of a jackpot or the execution of a special game.
For example, when the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery is conducted on a so-called type 1/2 mixed pachinko machine, if the time-saving symbol lottery determines that a time-saving game state will be set (a time-saving symbol (a time-saving winning symbol) that has been determined to set a time-saving game state), and the winning/losing lottery results in a loss (a losing symbol is determined), the time-saving game state will be set according to the result of the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery after the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the winning/losing lottery has stopped, and if the time-saving symbol lottery determines that a time-saving game state will be set, and the winning/losing lottery results in a small win (a small win symbol is determined), the time-saving game state will not be set according to the result of the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and after the small win game and special game based on the small win have ended, a game state corresponding to the type of small win symbol determined based on the small win may be set.
Specifically, if a time-saving pattern (time-saving winning pattern) associated with setting a first time-saving game state (number of time-saving times is 20) is determined by the above-mentioned time-saving pattern lottery, and a small prize is won in the win/lose lottery, and a small prize pattern associated with setting a second time-saving game state (number of time-saving times is 100) is determined after the small prize game and special game have ended, then after the small prize game and special game have ended, the first time-saving game state may not be set, and the second time-saving game state may be set.
In this case, in addition to achieving the same effects as the above-mentioned embodiment, it is possible to equip pachinko machines of various specifications with a lottery function that determines whether or not to set the time-shortened game state, and it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the process of setting the time-shortened game state becomes complicated when a small jackpot is won and the decision to set the time-shortened game state overlaps.

(13) If multiple types of determination results are provided as the determination results that can be determined by the above-mentioned time-saving grant determination process, a time-saving game state may be set for each determination result, with different processing contents for making it easier to maintain the second starting winning port 16 in an open state.
For example, as in the above-described embodiment, when it is set to determine a time-saving pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state by the process of winning/losing lottery and determining a special pattern, or when it is set to determine a time-saving pattern (time-saving winning pattern) that is determined to set a time-saving game state by the time-saving pattern lottery as in the above-described modified example (9), the types of time-saving patterns (time-saving winning patterns) that can be determined include the above-described patterns that are determined to set the first time-saving game state, and the probability of winning in the lottery for normal patterns is higher than in the non-time-saving game state, but the fluctuation time of normal patterns and the second start winning slot Alternatively, a symbol may be provided that is determined to set a third time-shortened game state in which the opening time of second start winning slot 16 is the same as the non-time-shortened game state, a symbol is provided that is determined to set a fourth time-shortened game state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer than in the non-time-shortened game state but the probability of winning in the lottery for the normal symbol and the opening time of second start winning slot 16 are the same as in the non-time-shortened game state, and a symbol is provided that is determined to set a fifth time-shortened game state in which the opening time of second start winning slot 16 is longer than in the non-time-shortened game state but the probability of winning in the lottery for the normal symbol and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are the same as in the non-time-shortened game state.In addition to these, a symbol may be provided that is determined to set a time-shortened game state in which any two of the probability of winning in the lottery for the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of second start winning slot 16 are higher (or longer) than in the non-time-shortened game state but the other one is the same as in the non-time-shortened game state.
Note that, as in the above-mentioned modified example (2), a similar setting can be made even when the result of the win/loss lottery can be derived as a win for the time-saving award corresponding to a predetermined time-saving symbol. For example, the win/loss lottery may be set so that the result of the win/loss lottery can be derived as a win for the time-saving award corresponding to a time-saving symbol that is determined to set the above-mentioned third time-saving game state, or a win for the time-saving award corresponding to a time-saving symbol that is determined to set the above-mentioned fourth time-saving game state, etc.

Furthermore, as in the above-mentioned modified example (8), when it is set so that whether or not a time-shortened game state can be set is determined by the small win pattern or the losing pattern determined in the process of the winning/losing lottery and the determination of the special pattern, it is also possible to provide a small win pattern Y1 (or losing pattern Z1) that is determined to set the above-mentioned first time-shortened game state, a small win pattern Y3 (or losing pattern Z3) that is determined to set the above-mentioned third time-shortened game state, a small win pattern Y4 (or losing pattern Z4) that is determined to set the above-mentioned fourth time-shortened game state, a small win pattern Y5 (or losing pattern Z5) that is determined to set the above-mentioned fifth time-shortened game state, etc. In addition to these, a small winning pattern (or losing pattern) may be provided that is determined to set a time-shortened game state in which any two of the probability of winning in the lottery for the normal pattern, the normal pattern variation time, and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 are higher (or longer) than in the non-time-shortened game state, but the other one is the same as in the non-time-shortened game state.
In addition, as in the above-mentioned modified example (8), a similar setting can be made even when it is possible to derive results such as a win of a small prize corresponding to a small prize symbol determined to set a time-shortened gaming state, or a loss corresponding to a loss symbol determined to set a time-shortened gaming state in the win/loss lottery. For example, it may be set so that it is possible to derive results such as a win of a small prize corresponding to the small prize symbol Y3 determined to set the above-mentioned third time-shortened gaming state (or a loss corresponding to the loss symbol Z3), a win of a small prize corresponding to the small prize symbol Y4 determined to set the above-mentioned fourth time-shortened gaming state (or a loss corresponding to the loss symbol Z4), etc.

When configured as described above, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and a wide variety of processing can be implemented to make it easier to maintain the second start winning port 16 in an open state during the time-saving game mode, which is set without the need for a jackpot or special game, thereby providing more innovative gameplay and increasing player interest.

(14) The types and numbers of symbols (time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols, losing symbols, etc.) that are determined to set a time-saving game state that can be determined by the time-saving grant determination process described above may be set to be different for each game state.
For example, if there are a predetermined number of types (e.g., five types) of patterns (time-saving patterns, time-saving winning patterns, small winning patterns, losing patterns, etc.) that are determined to set a time-saving game state, it may be set so that all types can be determined in the normal game state, but only one or more types can be determined in the low-probability time-saving game state, or it may be set so that all types can be determined in the low-probability time-saving game state, but only one or more types can be determined in the normal game state.
Also, for example, it may be set so that all types can be determined in a specific time-shortened game state (for example, the first time-shortened game state), but only one or more types can be determined in a time-shortened game state other than the specific one (for example, the third time-shortened game state).
When set as described above, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment can be achieved, and the rate at which the time-saving game state is set and the types of time-saving game states that can be set can be changed for each game state, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay and increase the interest of players.

(15) If the setting is such that whether or not to set a time-shortened game state is determined based on the type of small win or loss symbol, the variation pattern may be determined according to the type of small win or loss symbol that has been determined.
In this case, too, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and when the time-saving game state is set without winning a jackpot or playing a special game, a wide variety of variable effects can be executed.

(16) In the case where the setting is made so that whether or not a time-shortened game state can be set is determined depending on the type of small winning symbol or losing symbol, the time-shortened game state may be set depending on the number of times a small winning symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state or the number of times a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state is determined within a predetermined period (for example, from a predetermined start point until 100 winning/losing lotteries have been held).
For example, if a small win symbol Y1 (a small win symbol that is determined to set a first time-shortened game state with 20 time-shortened times) is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) within the above-mentioned predetermined period, the time-shortened game state determined for the small win symbol Y1 may be set. Also, if a losing symbol Z1 (a small win symbol that is determined to set a first time-shortened game state with 50 time-shortened times) is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) within the above-mentioned predetermined period, the time-shortened game state determined for the losing symbol Z1 may be set.
In this case, too, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the conditions for setting the time-saving game state can be varied to a greater extent, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay.

(17) In a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, when a time-shortened game state is set based on the type of small win symbol, the number of time-shortened increments of the time-shortened game state set after a small win game may be the same or different when the game ball enters a special area provided in a specific large prize opening during a small win game based on the determination of a small win symbol that has been determined to set a time-shortened game state and when the game ball does not enter a special area provided in a specific large prize opening during the small win game.
For example, if a small win pattern Y1 is determined which is determined to set a first time-shortened game state with 20 time-shortened times, then when the game ball enters a special area during a small win game based on the determination of the small win pattern Y1, the first time-shortened game state with 20 time-shortened times may be set after the end of the small win game and the special game, and even if the game ball does not enter the special area, the first time-shortened game state with 20 time-shortened times may be set after the end of the small win game.
Also, for example, when the above-mentioned small win pattern Y1 is determined, if the game ball enters a special area during the small win game based on the determination of the small win pattern Y1, a first time-shortened game state with 20 time-shortened times may be set after the small win game and the special game have ended, and if the game ball does not enter the special area, a first time-shortened game state with 5 time-shortened times may be set after the small win game has ended.
In this case, too, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment can be achieved, and different time-saving game states can be set depending on whether or not the game ball can land in the special area, thereby providing a wide variety of gameplay.

(18) When a time-saving game state is set when a small prize is won in the win/lose lottery (when the small prize pattern is determined), the time-saving game state may be set at any timing from the time when the small prize is won (determination of the small prize pattern) to the time when the small prize game based on the small prize is ended (for example, when the small prize is won, when the small prize pattern starts to change, when the small prize pattern stops changing, when the small prize game based on the small prize pattern starts, during the small prize game, at the time when the small prize game ends (when the first special pattern starts to change after the small prize game ends), etc.).
Similarly, when setting a time-saving game state when the winning/losing lottery results in a loss (when a losing symbol is determined), the time-saving game state may be set at any timing from the time when the winning/losing lottery result is a loss (when a losing symbol is determined) to the end of the fluctuation based on that loss (for example, the time when the losing lottery result is derived, when the losing symbol starts to fluctuate, when the fluctuation of that losing symbol ends (when the next special symbol starts to fluctuate), etc.).
Even when set in this manner, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the number of variations in transition to the time-shortened game state can be increased, thereby increasing the variety of gameplay.

(19) When the setting is such that whether or not to set a time-shortened game state is determined based on the type of small win symbol or losing symbol, the number of times time is shortened in the time-shortened game state may be set to a predetermined number of times time is shortened corresponding to the type of small win symbol or losing symbol, or a lottery may be held to determine the number of times time is shortened when transitioning to the time-shortened game state, and the number of times time is shortened determined by the lottery may be set.
In this case, too, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment can be achieved, and the number of times the time is reduced can be determined in a variety of ways, making it possible to determine the number of times the time is reduced in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(20) If the setting is such that whether or not a time-saving game state can be set is determined based on the type of small win or loss symbol, the performance of the time-saving game state to be set (the difficulty of maintaining the second start winning port 16 in an open state) may be made different depending on the type of small win or loss symbol determined.
For example, when a small winning symbol Y1 (or a losing symbol Z1) is determined, a time-saving game state A is set in which the second start winning port 16 is more likely to be maintained in an open state than in the normal game state (one or more of the following settings are set: a setting with a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, a setting with a long normal symbol fluctuation time, or a setting with a long opening time for the second start winning port 16), and when a small winning symbol Y3 (or a losing symbol Z3) is determined, a time-saving game state B is set in which the second start winning port 16 is more likely to be maintained in an open state than in the time-saving game state A.
In addition, the performance of the time-saving game state that is set may differ depending on the type of small win symbol or losing symbol and the set game state.
For example, if a small win symbol Y1 (or a losing symbol Z1) is determined in the normal game state, the above-mentioned time-saving game state A is set, but if a small win symbol Y1 (or a losing symbol Z1) is determined in the time-saving game state, the above-mentioned time-saving game state B may be set.
In the above case, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment can be achieved, and the performance of the time-saving game state that can be set can be varied to a greater extent, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay.

(21) When a time-shortened gaming state is set based on the determination of a time-shortened gaming pattern, a time-shortened winning pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened gaming state, the time-shortened gaming state may be ended on the condition of winning a jackpot without setting an upper limit on the number of time-shortened games (i.e., the number of time-shortened games is infinite), or a lottery (lottery for a time-shortened ending pattern) may be held to determine a time-shortened ending pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened gaming state, and the time-shortened gaming state may be ended on the condition that the time-shortened ending pattern is determined by the lottery.Furthermore, the time-shortened gaming state may be ended on the condition that a time-shortened gaming pattern, a time-shortened winning pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened gaming state and the number of time-shortened games is determined, and a new time-shortened gaming state and the number of time-shortened games based on that determination may be set (overwritten). In addition, the above-mentioned time-saving game state may be ended when any of the following conditions is met: the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery) reaches the time-saving number, a big win is won, a special game based on the winning of a small win is executed, or the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating time-saving, thereby setting a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state such as (29) described later (the second time-saving state described later)).
In this case, too, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the conditions for ending the time-saving game state can be varied to a greater extent, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay.

(22) In a pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter) that is configured so that when the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches a predetermined upper limit, the time-saving game state cannot be set as the next game state (a non-time-saving game state is forcibly set), if a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small win symbol, or a losing symbol that is configured to set the time-saving game state is displayed in a stopped state during normal game mode, the number of consecutive time-saving settings may or may not be updated based on the stopped display.
Also, in the time-shortening game state, even if a time-shortening pattern, a time-shortening winning pattern, a small winning pattern or a losing pattern that is determined to set the time-shortening game state is stopped and displayed, the number of consecutive time-shortening settings may or may not be updated based on the stopped display.
Furthermore, even if a time-saving pattern, a time-saving winning pattern, a small winning pattern or a losing pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state when determined during a normal game state but not to set a time-saving game state when determined during a time-saving game state is displayed in a stopped state during a time-saving game state, the number of consecutive time-saving settings may or may not be updated based on the stopped display.
In the above case, the same effect as that of the above-mentioned embodiment can be achieved, and the difficulty level at which the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches the upper limit can be changed, thereby providing more innovative gameplay.

(23) In a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter, the performance of the time-saving game state (one or more of the winning probability of a normal pattern, the fluctuation time of a normal pattern, the opening time of the second start winning port 16, and the number of times of time-saving) which is set based on the determination of the time-saving pattern, the time-saving winning pattern, the small winning pattern, or the losing pattern that is set to set the time-saving game state may be made different depending on the number of times remaining until the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches a predetermined upper limit, or may be made the same regardless of the number of times remaining.
In this case, too, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment can be achieved, and the variety of time-saving game states that can be set in pachinko machines equipped with time-saving limiters can be increased, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay.

(24) In a pachinko machine configured such that a drop-out lottery is conducted and a time-shortened game state is set by determining a time-shortened game pattern, a time-shortened winning pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, when a drop-out lottery determines that a high-probability game state will be ended and a time-shortened game pattern, a time-shortened winning pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, the number of time-shortened game states to be set based on the determination of the pattern may be set to the game state before the above-mentioned determination by the drop-out lottery and the number of time-shortened game states determined according to the type of pattern, or may be set to the game state before the above-mentioned determination by the drop-out lottery and the number of time-shortened game states determined according to the type of pattern.
In this case, too, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the number of time-saving times that can be set in the time-saving game state can be made more varied, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay.

(25) When a pre-reading effect that notifies the result of a winning or losing lottery is being executed, if a time-saving pattern, a small winning pattern, or a losing pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state is determined, the pre-reading effect that is being executed may be continued, or the pre-reading effect may be stopped without being continued.
In addition, when a hold that determines a time-saving pattern, a small winning pattern, or a losing pattern that is set to set a time-saving game state is stored, the execution of a specific effect (such as a pre-reading effect, a predetermined effect executed during a variable effect based on the other hold, etc.) that targets other holds may be restricted, or if a specific effect that targets the other hold is already being executed, the specific effect that is being executed may be continued or may be discontinued without continuing.
In addition, the same control as described above may also be performed in pachinko machines that are set to determine whether or not a time-saving game state can be set by the above-mentioned time-saving pattern lottery and that are set to execute a pre-reading effect that notifies the results of the time-saving pattern lottery.
In this case, too, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and appropriate presentation can be executed according to the situation of the determination of the time-saving pattern, small win pattern, or losing pattern that is determined to set the time-saving game state.

(26) In a pachinko machine in which the game state after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot can be set to a high-probability game state, the probability A1 that the game state after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot during a low-probability game state will be set to a high-probability game state, and the probability A2 that the game state after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot during a high-probability game state will be set to a high-probability game state may be set to the same value or to different values.
Furthermore, the above-mentioned probabilities A1 and A2 may be set to be the same value regardless of the type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) used in the win/loss lottery, or they may be set to be different values depending on the type of special random number. Furthermore, the above-mentioned probabilities A1 and A2 may be set to be the same value regardless of the type of special pattern determined in the event of a jackpot win, or they may be set to be different values depending on the type of special pattern. Furthermore, they may be set to be different values depending on the type of special random number used in the win/loss lottery and the type of special pattern determined in the event of a jackpot win.
When set in this way, there is a wide variation in the probability that a high probability game state is set from a low probability game state via the execution of a special game, and that a high probability game state is set again from a high probability game state via the execution of a special game, and therefore the gameplay that can be provided to the player can also be made more varied.

(27) In a pachinko machine that can end a high-probability game state and set a low-probability game state through a drop-out lottery, the probability B of determining whether to end a high-probability game state and set a low-probability game state may be set to only one value or to multiple values.
If only one value is set, the falling lottery is always conducted using that value, and if multiple values are set, the falling lottery may be conducted using one of the values depending on the situation (for example, depending on the number of times the special pattern has changed since the high probability game state was set, the type of starting winning slot into which the game ball entered, etc.).
Furthermore, the determination probability B may be set to be the same regardless of the set game state (high-probability time-saving game state, high-probability non-time-saving game state combining the high-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state). Furthermore, the determination probability B may be set to be the same regardless of the type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) used in the win/loss lottery, or may be set to be a different value depending on the type of special random number. Furthermore, the determination probability B may be set to be the same regardless of the type of special symbol (loss symbol) determined in the event of a loss, or may be set to be a different value depending on the type of special symbol. Furthermore, the determination probability B may be set to be a different value depending on the set game state, the type of special random number used in the win/loss lottery, and the type of special symbol determined in the event of a loss.
When set in this way, there is a wide variety of probabilities at which a high probability game state ends and a low probability game state is set, and the gameplay that can be provided to the player can also be made more varied.

(28) In a pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine equipped with a probability variable limiter) that is configured to forcibly set a low-probability game state after the end of a special game when the number of consecutive high-probability settings reaches a predetermined upper limit, the upper limit may be set to only one value or multiple values. If only one value is set, the above setting may be made when the number of consecutive high-probability settings reaches that value, and if multiple values are set, the above setting may be made when the number of consecutive high-probability settings reaches one of the values depending on the situation (for example, depending on the number of times a game has transitioned from a low-probability game state to a high-probability game state).
Similarly, in a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter, either only one value or multiple values may be set as the upper limit number. If only one value is set, the above setting is performed when the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches that value, and if multiple values are set, the above setting may be performed when the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches one of the values depending on the situation (for example, depending on the number of times a game has transitioned from a non-time-saving game state to a time-saving game state).
When set in this way, there is a wide variety of options for the maximum number of consecutive high probability settings and the maximum number of consecutive time-saving settings, and the gameplay that can be offered to players can also be made more varied.

(29) In the above-described embodiment, the time-saving game state is set when the time-saving grant is awarded as a result of the determination of whether or not the time-saving grant is awarded in the win/loss lottery during the normal game state. However, the trigger for setting the time-saving game state is not limited to this.
For example, if the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result is derived in the win/lose lottery) is counted, and the game state when the count value reaches a predetermined number of times LN to activate the time-saving function without winning a jackpot is other than the time-saving game state (normal game state or high-probability non-time-saving game state), the time-saving game state may be set in which the number of times to activate the time-saving function becomes the specific number of times TN to activate the time-saving function without winning a jackpot or playing a special game. Also, the specific number of times TN to activate the time-saving function may be set to be greater than the number of times LN to activate the time-saving function.
In this setting, even if a jackpot is not won, the time-shortened game state is set if the number of times the special symbols change reaches the time-shortened game state activation count LN, so that the number of variations in which the time-shortened game state can be set is increased, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

(30) In a pachinko machine set as in the above-mentioned modified example (29), the count value may be cleared at one or more of the following times: (a) when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared); (b) when the number of times the special symbol changes during the normal game state reaches the number of times LN that the time-saving feature is activated, or when the number of times the special symbol changes during the normal game state reaches the number of times LN that the time-saving feature is activated and then a lottery is held to determine whether the specific number of times TN that the time-saving feature is activated is successful or not without a jackpot being won (when the time-saving game state that was set by reaching the number of times LN that the time-saving feature is activated is ended); (c) when a jackpot is won or when the special game based on a jackpot is ended; (d) when the time-saving game state is set in a pachinko machine that sets the time-saving game state by determining a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small win symbol, or a losing symbol that is set to set the time-saving game state; or (e) when the RAM is cleared by executing a change of the setting value in a pachinko machine that has a setting value. That is, the counting of the above-mentioned count value may be started from the time points (a) to (e). Note that the clearing at the time point (c) may be set to be always executed.
Furthermore, the count value may be cleared at a time point other than (a) to (e).
In addition, the above-mentioned count value may be set to always be counted regardless of the set game state, or may not be counted during a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, during a high probability game state, a time-saving game state, etc.).
In addition, the timing for counting the above-mentioned count value may be any time from the time the winning/losing lottery results in a loss (when the losing symbol is determined) to the end of the fluctuation based on the loss (for example, the time when the losing lottery result is derived, when the losing symbol starts to change, when the fluctuation of the losing symbol ends, when the stop display time has elapsed after the fluctuation of the losing symbol has ended (when the next special symbol starts to change), etc.), or when the winning/losing lottery results in a jackpot (when the jackpot symbol is determined), it may be any of the above-mentioned times or the end of the special game based on the winning jackpot, etc.
In addition, the timing at which the time-shortened gaming state is set may be set to be the same as the timing at which the above-mentioned count value is counted.
Furthermore, the above-mentioned count value may, for example, during normal game play, be set to count the variation of the special pattern based on the first special pattern random number that is mainly obtained during the normal game play state, or may be set to count not only the variation of the special pattern based on the first special pattern random number but also the variation of the special pattern based on the second special pattern random number.
When set in this way, there is a wide variety of timings for setting the time-shortened gaming state, which can increase the interest of the player.
Furthermore, when the counting of the above-mentioned count value is started from the end of the special game, the fluctuation at the time when the count value reaches the time-saving activation number LN may be made to be executable by a specific fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Furthermore, when the counting of the above-mentioned count value is started from the time when the RAM is cleared, the fluctuation at the time when the count value reaches the time-saving activation number LN may not be made to be executable by a specific fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

(31) In a pachinko machine configured as in the above-mentioned variant (29), the number of times LN at which time-saving is activated may be determined in relation to the probability of winning the jackpot in the win/lose lottery, and may be set to a value within a range that does not make the game too gambling-oriented (for example, if the probability of winning the jackpot in the win/lose lottery is 1/P, then P × activation lower limit coefficient (for example, 2.5) ≦ number of times LN at which time-saving is activated ≦ P × activation upper limit coefficient (for example, 3.0)). Also, it may be set to an appropriate value according to the game specifications of the pachinko machine, regardless of the probability of winning the jackpot. Also, the number of times LN at which time-saving is activated may be set to only one value, or multiple values.
When multiple setting values corresponding to settings for ball output are set, a different number of times LN for activating the time-saving function may be set for each setting value, or the same number of times LN for activating the time-saving function may be set for any setting value (the number of times LN for activating the time-saving function determined based on the probability of winning a jackpot for any setting value (for example, the lowest probability of winning a jackpot)).
When set in this manner, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature based on the setting of the time-shortened gaming state from becoming too high, and also to increase the variety of timing at which the time-shortened gaming state is set.

(32) In a pachinko machine set as in the above-mentioned variant (29), the specific number of time-saving times TN may be determined in relation to the probability of winning the jackpot in the win/lose lottery, and may be set to a value within a range that does not result in excessive gambling (for example, if the probability of winning the jackpot in the win/lose lottery is 1/P, then P × specific lower limit coefficient (for example, 0.4) ≦ specific number of time-saving times TN ≦ P × specific upper limit coefficient (for example, 3.8)). Also, it may be set to an appropriate value according to the game specifications of the pachinko machine, regardless of the probability of winning the jackpot. Also, the specific number of time-saving times LN may be set to only one value, or multiple values.
In addition, the number of times the time-shortened game state is set based on winning a jackpot, and the number of times the time-shortened game state is set based on the determination of a pattern that is determined to set the time-shortened game state, regardless of winning a jackpot, may also be set to be within the above-mentioned range.
Furthermore, when multiple setting values corresponding to settings related to ball output are set, a different specific number of time-saving times TN may be set for each setting value, or the same specific number of time-saving times TN (a specific number of time-saving times TN determined based on the probability of winning a jackpot at any setting value (for example, the lowest probability of winning a jackpot)) may be set for any setting value.
In addition, the time-saving game state that is set based on the count value of the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaching the time-saving activation number LN may be set to end by satisfying the same time-saving end condition as the time-saving game state that is set based on the winning of a jackpot or the determination of a symbol that is determined to set the time-saving game state. For example, the time-saving game state may be set to end when a jackpot is won or when a win/loss lottery is held a specific number of times TN for the time-saving game.
Furthermore, if multiple patterns are set as conditions for ending the time-shortened game state, for example, the sum of the number of times the special pattern changes based on the first special pattern random number and the number of times the special pattern changes based on the second special pattern random number reaches the specific time-shortened number TN1, and the number of times the special pattern changes based on the second special pattern random number reaches the specific time-shortened number TN2, then both the specific time-shortened numbers TN1 and TN2 may be set to fall within the above-mentioned range, or only either the specific time-shortened number TN1 or TN2 (for example, only the larger value of the specific time-shortened number TN1 or TN2) may be set to fall within the above-mentioned range.
When set in this manner, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature based on the setting of the time-shortened game state from becoming too high, and also to increase the variety of timing at which the set time-shortened game state ends.

(33) In a pachinko machine configured as in the above-mentioned variant (29), the time-saving game state that is set based on the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN may be provided with multiple time-saving game states with different processing contents to make it easier to maintain the second start winning port 16 in an open state, and one of the time-saving game states may be set depending on the situation.
Specifically, a first time-shortening game state in the above-described embodiment, a third time-shortening game state, a fourth time-shortening game state, a fifth time-shortening game state, etc. in the above-described modified example (13) are provided, and one of the time-shortening game states may be set, for example, depending on the type of jackpot pattern when the last jackpot was won before the time-shortening activation count LN was reached, the type of small jackpot pattern when the last small jackpot was won before the time-shortening activation count LN was reached, or the type of jackpot pattern, small jackpot pattern, missing pattern, time-shortening pattern, or time-shortening winning pattern when the time-shortening game state was set before the time-shortening activation count LN was reached.
When set in this way, there are a wide variety of time-saving game states that are set based on the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the number of times time-saving is activated LN, which can increase the interest of the player.

(34) In a pachinko machine in which the time-saving game state is set based on the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN as in the above-mentioned variant example (29), the time-saving game state may also be set based on the determination of a pattern (time-saving pattern, time-saving winning pattern, small win pattern or losing pattern) that is determined to set the time-saving game state during the normal game state (low probability game state).
In a pachinko machine set up in this way, the pattern that is determined to set the time-shortened game state is not determined during the time-shortened game state, and the pattern that is determined to set the time-shortened game state is determined only during the non-time-shortened game state, or the pattern that is determined to set the time-shortened game state may be determined even during the time-shortened game state.
In addition, if the above-mentioned count value reaches the number of times LN that time-saving is activated during normal game mode (low probability game mode) and at the same time the above-mentioned pattern is determined during normal game mode (low probability game mode) (i.e., if the setting conditions for multiple time-saving game modes are met simultaneously), one of the time-saving game modes may be set.
Furthermore, the above-mentioned count value may be set to be counted not only during the normal game state but also during the low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state may be reset when the count value reaches the time-saving activation count LN during the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state. In this case, when the time-saving game state is reset, the time-saving count may be reset to the time-saving count corresponding to the reset time-saving game state (i.e., the specific time-saving count TN), or the time-saving count corresponding to the reset time-saving game state may be added to the remaining time-saving count at that time. Furthermore, when the above-mentioned count value reaches the time-saving activation count LN, a time-saving game state based on that reaching may be set after the time-saving game state set at that time ends.
In this case, the time-shortening game state that can be set can be varied in a wide variety, which can increase the interest of the player.

(35) Even in so-called type 1 and type 2 mixed pachinko machines, as in the above-mentioned variant example (29), the time-saving game state may be set based on the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-saving activation number LN.
In addition, the above-mentioned count value may not be cleared based on winning a small prize.
Furthermore, in a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine set up as described above, when the result of the win/lose lottery is a jackpot, a special game is executed, and when the result of the win/lose lottery is a predetermined small jackpot, a small jackpot game is executed and the special game is executed when the game ball enters a special area of a specific large prize opening, in the case where the special game is set up so that the special game is executed when the result of the win/lose lottery is a predetermined small jackpot, as in the above-mentioned modified examples (31) and (32), the probability P used to determine the number of times LN to activate the time-saving function or the number of times TN to activate the specific time-saving function may be either the probability of winning the jackpot described above, the probability of winning the predetermined small jackpot described above (the probability of winning the small jackpot in the win/lose lottery based on the special random number mainly obtained during the non-time-saving game state), or the combined probability of the probability of winning the jackpot described above and the probability of winning the predetermined small jackpot described above.
Furthermore, in a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine set up as described above, there is no provision for winning a jackpot as a result of the win/lose lottery, and in the small prize game that is executed when the result of the win/lose lottery is a win for a predetermined small prize, when the special game is set up so that the special game is executed simply by the game ball entering a special area of a specific large prize entry port, as in the above-mentioned modified examples (31) and (32), the probability P used to determine the number of times LN to activate the time-saving function or the number of times TN to activate the specific time-saving function may be either the probability of winning the above-mentioned predetermined small prize (the probability of winning a small prize in the win/lose lottery based on the special chart random number that is mainly obtained during the non-time-saving game state), or the probability of winning the predetermined small prize and having the game ball enter the special area (the probability that the special game is executed via winning the predetermined small prize).
In addition, when a small prize is won, the number of times LN for activating the time reduction may be updated or not updated depending on the type of the small prize pattern determined based on the win.
In addition, in a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, if the time-shortened game state is set based on the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-shortened game activation count LN, and the time-shortened game state is also set based on the determination of a time-shortened game pattern, a time-shortened winning game pattern, a small win game pattern or a losing game pattern that is determined to set the time-shortened game state during the normal game state (low probability game state), then one of the time-shortened game states may be set when the above-mentioned count value reaches the time-shortened game activation count LN and the above-mentioned pattern is determined at the same time (i.e., when the setting conditions for multiple time-shortened game states are met simultaneously).
Also, in a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, when the time-saving game state is set based on the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN, a small prize is won by a lottery at the time the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the time-saving activation count LN, and a predetermined small prize pattern is determined, and when the game ball enters the special area during the small prize game based on the small prize, after the small prize game ends, instead of setting the time-saving game state based on the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN, a game state determined for the predetermined small prize pattern (for example, a time-saving game state different from the time-saving game state based on reaching the time-saving activation count LN (a time-saving game state with a different difficulty level in which the second start winning port 16 is maintained in an open state, a time-saving game state with a different number of time-saving times set, etc.)) may be set.
Furthermore, in a so-called type 1/2 mixed pachinko machine, if a time-saving game state is set based on the count value of the number of times the special symbol changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN, and a small prize is won by a win/lose lottery when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the time-saving activation count LN and a predetermined small prize symbol is determined, but the game ball does not enter the special area during the small prize game based on that small prize, the time-saving game state may be set based on the number of times the special symbol changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN after the small prize game ends. If the time-saving game state described above is set during a small prize game, when the game ball enters the special area during the small prize game and a special game is executed, processing must be performed to end the set time-saving game state, but if it is set as described above, it is possible to prevent the complicated processing of ending the set time-saving game state.
In the above-described manner, it is possible to increase the variety of time-saving game states that can be set in a type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, thereby increasing the interest of players.

(36) In addition, the pachinko machine has a time-saving game state, which is set after the end of a special game based on the determination of a jackpot pattern that is set to set the time-saving game state (i.e., a time-saving game state that is set through the winning of a jackpot and the execution of a special game, hereinafter also referred to as a first time-saving game state), a time-saving game state that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/losing lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of time-saving activations LN (i.e., a time-saving game state that is set after the winning of a jackpot and the execution of a special game, hereinafter also referred to as a first time-saving game state), and a time-saving game state that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/losing lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of time-saving activations LN (i.e., a time-saving game state that is set after the winning of a jackpot and the execution of a special game, It is also possible to provide all of the following: a time-shortened game state that is set without going through the execution of a jackpot or a special game, hereinafter also referred to as the second time-shortened game state), and a time-shortened game state that is set based on the determination of a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened game pattern, the time-shortened winning pattern, the small winning pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, the losing pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) (i.e., a time-shortened game state that is set without going through the winning of a jackpot or the execution of a special game, hereinafter also referred to as the third time-shortened game state).
By doing so, the variety of time-saving game states that can be set is increased, which can increase the interest of the player.

(37) In addition, in the above-mentioned first time reduction, the setting may be such that the probability of winning in the lottery for the normal symbol is higher than in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state), the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter, and the opening time of the second start winning slot 16 is longer than in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state). In addition, in the above-mentioned second time reduction, the setting may be such that the probability of winning in the lottery for the normal symbol is the same as in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state), the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter, and the opening time of the second start winning slot 16 is longer than in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state). In addition, in the above-mentioned third time reduction, the setting may be such that the probability of winning in the lottery for the normal symbol is the same as in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state), the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter, and the opening time of the second start winning slot 16 is longer than in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state).
In addition, among the first time reduction, the second time reduction and the third time reduction, only in the first time reduction, the setting may be made so that the probability of winning in the lottery for the normal symbol is higher than in the normal game state (non-time reduction game state).
By doing this, the degree of advantage of various time-saving game states can be changed, and the interest of the player can be increased.

(38) Furthermore, in a pachinko machine equipped with first, second, and third time reductions, when a jackpot symbol that is set to set a time-shortened game state during the first time reduction is determined, the following control may be adopted: (1a) end the first time reduction and set a new first time reduction after the special game ends. Furthermore, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the first time reduction (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of time-shortened game states LN, the following control may be adopted: (2a) end the first time reduction and set a new second time reduction, (2b) continue the first time reduction, or (2c) end the first time reduction and set a new second time reduction if the number of time-shortened game states when the second time reduction is set is greater than the number of time-shortened game states remaining in the first time reduction. Furthermore, when a symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened gaming state (such as the above-mentioned time-shortened symbol, a time-shortened winning symbol, a small winning symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened gaming state, or a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened gaming state) is determined during the first time-shortened period, (3a) the first time-shortened period ends and a new third time-shortened period is set, (3b) the first time-shortened period continues, or (3c) if the number of time-shortened periods when the third time-shortened period is set is greater than the number of time-shortened periods remaining in the first time-shortened period, the first time-shortened period ends and a new third time-shortened period is set, or any of the following controls (3a) to (3c) may be adopted.

Furthermore, when a jackpot symbol that is set to set a time-saving game state is determined during the second time-saving mode, (4a) the second time-saving mode may be terminated, and a new first time-saving mode may be set after the special game ends. Furthermore, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the second time-saving mode (the number of times the lottery result is derived) reaches a predetermined number of time-saving activations LN, (5a) the second time-saving mode may be terminated, and a new second time-saving mode may be set, or (5b) the second time-saving mode may be continued. Furthermore, when a symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (such as the above-mentioned time-shortened symbol, a time-shortened winning symbol, a small winning symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, or a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state) is determined during the second time-shortened mode, (6a) the second time-shortened mode ends and a new third time-shortened mode is set, (6b) the second time-shortened mode continues, or (6c) if the number of time-shortened modes when the third time-shortened mode is set is greater than the number of time-shortened modes remaining in the second time-shortened mode, the second time-shortened mode ends and a new third time-shortened mode is set, or any of the following controls (6a) to (6c) may be adopted.

In addition, when a jackpot symbol that is set to set a time-shortened game state is determined during the third time-shortened period, (7a) the third time-shortened period may be terminated, and a new first time-shortened period may be set after the special game ends. Furthermore, when the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the results of the win/lose lottery are derived) during the third time-shortened period reaches a predetermined number of time-shortened periods LN, (8a) the third time-shortened period may be terminated, and a new second time-shortened period may be set, (8b) the third time-shortened period may be continued, or (8c) if the number of time-shortened periods when the second time-shortened period is set is greater than the number of time-shortened periods remaining in the third time-shortened period, the third time-shortened period may be terminated, and a new second time-shortened period may be set. Furthermore, when a symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (such as the above-mentioned time-shortened symbol, a time-shortened winning symbol, a small winning symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, or a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state) is determined during the third time reduction, (9a) the third time reduction is ended and a new third time reduction is set, (9b) the third time reduction is continued, or (9c) if the number of time reductions when the third time reduction is set is greater than the number of time reductions remaining in the third time reduction, the third time reduction is ended and a new third time reduction is set, or any of the following controls (9a) to (9c) may be adopted.

In addition, when various decisions are made in the first, second, and third time reductions described above, the controls may be applied in appropriate combinations based on the above content.
For example, the following control can be performed.
When a big win symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state is determined during a normal game state (low probability game state, non-time-shortened game state), a first time-shortened state is set after the special game ends, when the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating time-shortened state, a second time-shortened state is set, and when a symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened symbol, time-shortened winning symbol, small win symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, losing symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) is determined, a third time-shortened state is set.
During the first time reduction, when a big win pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state is determined, the first time reduction is ended and a new first time reduction is set after the special game is ended, and when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating the time reduction, the first time reduction is continued without setting the second time reduction, and when a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened pattern, a time-shortened winning pattern, a small win pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, a losing pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) is determined, the first time reduction is continued without setting the third time reduction.
During the second time reduction, when a big win symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state is determined, the second time reduction is ended and a new first time reduction is set after the special game ends, and when the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating the time reduction, the second time reduction that is currently set is continued without setting a new second time reduction, and when a symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened symbol, a time-shortened winning symbol, a small win symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) is determined, the second time reduction is continued without setting a third time reduction.
During the third time reduction, when a big win symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state is determined, the third time reduction is ended and a new first time reduction is set after the special game is ended, when the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for time reduction activation, the third time reduction is ended and a new second time reduction is set, and when a symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened symbol, time-shortened winning symbol, small win symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, losing symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) is determined, the currently set third time reduction is continued without setting a new third time reduction.
When a jackpot pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state is determined during a high-probability time-shortened game state or a high-probability non-time-shortened game state (i.e., during a high-probability game state), a first time-shortened game is set after the special game ends, and when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating time-shortened game, a second time-shortened game is not set, and when a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened pattern, a time-shortened winning pattern, a small win pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, a losing pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) is determined, a third time-shortened game is not set.
By doing so, the number of variations in the time-shortening game state settings is increased, which can increase the interest of the player.

As stated in (31) above, if a pachinko machine is provided with a second time reduction and a setting value associated with the setting for the ball output is set, the same number of times LN for activating the time reduction may be set regardless of which setting value is used.
By doing this, it is possible to prevent the advantageous degree between each set value from changing excessively due to the setting of the second time reduction.
Furthermore, the main control board 100 may be configured to count the number of times the special symbols change (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) to determine whether or not the time-saving activation count LN has been reached, and this counting may be always performed during a low-probability game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state) but not during a high-probability game state (high-probability non-time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state). In other words, during a low-probability game state, the above-mentioned counting may always be performed regardless of whether or not the time-saving game state is set.
By doing this, the second time reduction can be reliably set only during a low probability game state.
Furthermore, the above-mentioned counting may be cleared at the time of RAM clearing, which is performed by performing a predetermined operation when the power is turned on (for example, pressing a RAM clear button to clear the RAM, etc.), at the time of RAM clearing, which is performed by changing the set value in a pachinko machine that has a set value, at the time when the count value by the above-mentioned counting reaches the number of time-saving activations LN and the second time-saving is set, at the time when a jackpot is won (at the start of a special game based on a small jackpot win), or at the end of a special game. Note that the clearing at the time when the second time-saving is set, and at the time when a jackpot is won (at the start of a special game based on a small jackpot win), or at the end of a special game may always be performed.
The timing at which it is determined that the count value of the above-mentioned count has reached the time-saving activation count LN may be any of the timing at which the special symbol starts to change, the timing at which the special symbol changes, and the timing at which the special symbol changes and the stop display time has elapsed.The second time-saving may be set at the timing at which it is determined that the count value of the above-mentioned count has reached the time-saving activation count LN.

In addition, the conditions for ending the second time-saving mode may be set as (10a) a big win, (10b) the sum of the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the first starting winning port 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second starting winning port 16 reaches the number of time-saving times, (10c) the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second starting winning port 16 reaches a specific number, or (10d) the number of small wins reaches a predetermined number, and any one or more of (10a) to (10c) may be set.
For example, the following conditions can be set as the termination conditions for the first time reduction, the second time reduction, and the third time reduction.
Specifically, in a pachinko machine, jackpot symbols that are determined to set a time-shortened game state include jackpot symbol XA1 (in a variable presentation, the first, second, and third stopping symbols all become "7") and jackpot symbol XA2 (in a variable presentation, the first, second, and third stopping symbols all become other than "7"), and time-shortened game symbol JD1 (in a variable presentation, the first and second stopping symbols are the same odd number symbols other than "7", and the third stopping symbol becomes "7") that is determined to set a time-shortened game state is provided, and when the number of times the special symbols change (the number of times the result of the win/lose lottery is derived, i.e., the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches a predetermined number of time-shortened activations LN (for example, 1000 times), the time-shortened game state is set, and it becomes possible to win a small jackpot in the win/lose lottery.
In this pachinko machine, the first time reduction that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern XA1 can be set to end when a jackpot is won, and can be set to end when the total number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the first starting winning port 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second starting winning port 16 reaches 100 times (time reduction number), when the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second starting winning port 16 reaches 10 times (specific number), or when the number of small jackpot wins reaches 2 times (predetermined number).
In addition, the first time reduction that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern XA2 can be set to end when a jackpot is won, and can be set to end when the total number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the first starting winning port 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second starting winning port 16 reaches 50 times (time reduction number), when the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second starting winning port 16 reaches 4 times (specific number), or when the number of small jackpot wins reaches 1 time (predetermined number).
In addition, the second time-saving mode, which is set when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the result of the win/lose lottery is derived, i.e., the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches a predetermined number of times LN to activate the time-saving mode, can be set to end when a jackpot is won, and can also be set to end when the total number of times of changes based on the game ball entering the first starting winning port 15 and the number of times of changes based on the game ball entering the second starting winning port 16 reaches 600 times (number of times of time-saving), when the number of times of changes based on the game ball entering the second starting winning port 16 reaches 50 times (specific number of times), or when the number of times small jackpots are won reaches 10 times (predetermined number of times).
In addition, the third time-saving period, which is set when the time-saving pattern JD1 is determined, can be set to end when a jackpot is won, and can be set to end when the total number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the first starting winning port 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second starting winning port 16 reaches 60 times (time-saving number of times), when the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second starting winning port 16 reaches 8 times (specific number of times), or when the number of small jackpot wins reaches 3 times (predetermined number of times).
By doing so, it is possible to provide a wide variety of endings for the time-saving game state, and various gameplay features can be provided.

Furthermore, if the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols during the second time reduction is set to be the same as during the normal game state (non-time reduction game state), it is necessary to set the above-mentioned probability of winning during the normal game state to a certain degree high in order to make it easier to maintain the second start winning port 16 in an open state during the second time reduction. In this case, the movable piece 16b is designed to be able to protrude and retract freely relative to the gaming board 11, and when the movable piece 16b protrudes from the gaming board 11, the gaming ball is guided by the movable piece 16b to the second start winning hole 16, allowing it to enter the second start winning hole 16, while when the movable piece 16b is retracted into the gaming board 11, the gaming ball is not guided to the second start winning hole 16 and does not enter the second start winning hole 16. In addition, by setting the protruding time (open time) of the movable piece 16b to be shorter during the normal gaming state than during the second time-saving period, if a winning normal symbol is drawn in the normal gaming state, the rate at which gaming balls enter the second start winning hole 16 can be reduced compared to when a winning normal symbol is drawn in the second time-saving period.

Furthermore, the number of times that the second time reduction can be set between one jackpot win and the next jackpot win may be limited to one. Specifically, after a jackpot win (end of special game), the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery, i.e., the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for triggering the time reduction, and the second time reduction is set, and then, even if the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery, i.e., the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches the number of times LN for triggering the time reduction again without winning a jackpot, the second time reduction may not be set.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the time-shortened gaming state from being set too much, and the tendency to gamble too much.

Furthermore, as described above, during a low-probability game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the main control board 100 counts the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result for the win/lose lottery is derived) to determine whether or not the time-saving activation count LN has been reached, but after a jackpot is won (the special game ends), the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result for the win/lose lottery is derived) has reached the time-saving activation count LN, and the second time-saving is set, and the above-mentioned counting may be stopped.
In this way, the processing load on the main control board 100 can be reduced.

Furthermore, even if the first or second time reduction is set to continue without setting a third time reduction when a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (such as the above-mentioned time-shortened game pattern, time-shortened winning pattern, small winning pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, or losing pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state) is determined during the first or second time reduction, the third time reduction may be set when a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (such as the above-mentioned time-shortened game pattern, time-shortened winning pattern, small winning pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, or losing pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state) is determined based on the final win/loss lottery for the first or second time reduction (the win/loss lottery held immediately before the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result for the win/loss lottery, i.e., the count value based on the above-mentioned count) reaches the number of time reductions).
By doing so, the continuity of the time-saving game state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the case where the settings are as described above, when a pattern (such as the above-mentioned time-shortening pattern, time-shortening winning pattern, small winning pattern determined to set a time-shortening game state, or losing pattern determined to set a time-shortening game state, etc.) determined to set a time-shortening game state in the final draw of the first or second time-shortening game (the win/lose lottery held immediately before the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result for the win/lose lottery is derived, i.e., the count value determined by the above-mentioned count) reaches the number of times the time-shortening game is played), the first or second time-shortening game can be ended upon the end of the special pattern change in the final draw, and a non-time-shortening game state can be set, and after the non-time-shortening game state is set, a stopped display of the pattern determined to set the above-mentioned time-shortening game state can be displayed, and after the stopped display, the third time-shortening game can be set. In addition, in conjunction with the setting of the above-mentioned non-time-shortened game state, the transmission of an external signal (time-shortened signal) that is sent to the outside of the pachinko machine in the time-shortened game state and indicates that the game is in the time-shortened game state may be terminated, and in conjunction with the setting of the above-mentioned third time-shortened game state, the external signal may be transmitted again.
By doing so, it is possible to reliably execute control of the termination of the time-shortened game state and the new setting, and also to reliably notify the outside of the pachinko machine of the switch to the time-shortened game state.

In addition, if a small prize is won in the win/lose lottery at the time when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result is derived in the win/lose lottery, i.e., the count value by the count described above) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating time-saving, it is possible to set it so that both a small prize game based on the small prize win and a second time-saving setting due to the number of times the special pattern changes reaching LN for activating time-saving are executed.
Furthermore, when set in this manner, the second time reduction may be set at any of the following times: (i) from the time a small win is won until the small win pattern is displayed and the small win game starts; (ii) from the time the small win game starts until the time it ends; or (iii) after the small win game ends.
By doing this, when the winning of a small prize and the establishment of the conditions for setting the second time reduction coincide with each other, there are many variations in the timing at which the second time reduction is set, and therefore it is possible to provide a wide variety of gameplay.

Furthermore, when the second and third time reductions are installed, the second and third time reductions may be set to have the same advantageous degree (i.e., the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols, the normal symbol fluctuation time, and the opening time of second start winning slot 16 may all be set to be the same), or the advantageous degrees may be set to be different (one or more of the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols, the normal symbol fluctuation time, and the opening time of second start winning slot 16 may be set to be different). For example, the second time reduction may be set to have a higher advantageous degree than the third time reduction (one or more of the following may be set: a higher probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols, a shorter normal symbol fluctuation time, and a longer opening time of second start winning slot 16).
By doing this, it is possible to provide a wide variety of advantageous degrees for the second and third time reductions, thereby increasing the interest of the player.
In addition, when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the result of the win/lose lottery is derived, i.e., the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches the predetermined number of times LN to activate the time-saving mode and a pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state (the above-mentioned time-saving pattern, time-saving winning pattern, small winning pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state, losing pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state, etc.) is determined, the second time-saving mode may be set in priority over the third time-saving mode.
By doing this, even if the conditions for setting the second time reduction and the third time reduction overlap, the second time reduction can be reliably set.

(39) Furthermore, the first time reduction, the second time reduction, and the third time reduction may also be installed in a pachinko machine (hereinafter also referred to as a simultaneous rotation machine) that is configured to simultaneously change the special pattern based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and change the special pattern based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 (i.e., when both a hold based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and a hold based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 are stored, so-called simultaneous rotation control is performed, in which both holds are processed simultaneously), and settings such as those described above in (1) to (38) may be performed.
In the case where the first time reduction, the second time reduction, and the third time reduction are installed in the simultaneous spinning machine, a pattern (the above-mentioned time reduction pattern, the time reduction winning pattern, the small winning pattern for which the time reduction game state is set, the losing pattern for which the time reduction game state is set, etc.) for which the time reduction game state is set is determined based on the entry of a game ball into either the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, and during the variation of the special pattern based on the determination, the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/losing lottery is derived, that is, the number of times the count by the above-mentioned count is determined) is determined based on the entry of a game ball into either the other. When the count value) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating time reduction, during the variation of the special pattern based on the game ball entering one of the above-mentioned boxes, the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery, i.e., the count value by the above-mentioned count) based on the game ball entering one of the above-mentioned boxes has reached the number of times LN for activating time reduction, a second time reduction is set, and after the second time reduction is set, a stopped display of a pattern is displayed to set a time-shortened game state determined based on the game ball entering one of the above-mentioned boxes, but control may be exercised so that a third time reduction is not set.
Furthermore, when a pattern (such as the above-mentioned time-shortening pattern, time-shortening winning pattern, small winning pattern determined to set a time-shortening game state, or losing pattern determined to set a time-shortening game state, etc.) is determined based on the entry of a game ball into either the first start winning slot 15 or the second start winning slot 16, and a jackpot pattern is determined (a jackpot is won) based on the entry of a game ball into either of the other slots during the variation of the special pattern based on the entry of a game ball into either of the above-mentioned slots, a first time-shortening game state is set because the jackpot pattern was determined based on the entry of a game ball into either of the above-mentioned slots during the variation of the special pattern based on the entry of a game ball into either of the above-mentioned slots, and after the first time-shortening game state is set, a stopped display of a pattern determined to set a time-shortening game state determined based on the entry of a game ball into either of the above-mentioned slots is made, but the third time-shortening game state may not be set.
By doing this, even if the conditions for setting the first time reduction or the second time reduction are met in the simultaneous rotation machine and the conditions for setting the third time reduction are also met in an overlapping manner, the first time reduction or the second time reduction can be reliably set.

(40) In addition, when a time-shortened game state is set after the end of a special game based on the determination of a jackpot symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (i.e., when a first time-shortened game state is set), during at least one of the fluctuation of the jackpot symbol (during the execution of the fluctuation presentation based on the determination of the jackpot symbol) and the execution of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol, for a predetermined period (for example, a period shorter than the longest fluctuation time or the period of the special game when the number of rounds of play is the smallest) For a period shorter than the time from start to finish (for example, 10 seconds), a display instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right hit) may be displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the entire area of the display unit 21a) on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, a mark suggesting the player to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b may continue to be displayed in an area smaller than the above-mentioned predetermined area (for example, the area in the upper right corner or the area in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a).
By doing this, the player can be made aware that a time-saving game state will be set after the variable effect and special game have ended, and the player can be impressed with the fact that a game ball will be shot toward the second game area 12b after the variable effect and special game have ended.

In addition, when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the result of the win/lose lottery is derived, i.e., the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches the number of times the time-saving activation LN and a time-saving game state is set (i.e., when the second time-saving is set), while the special pattern is changing (while the change effect is being executed) at the time the number of times the time-saving activation LN is reached, a display instructing the game ball to be shot toward the second game area 12b (so-called right hit) may be displayed in a specific area (e.g., an area about half the size of the display unit 21a) on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 for a period shorter than the above-mentioned specified period (for example, a period shorter than the shortest change time (e.g., 2 seconds)), and after the period shorter than the above-mentioned specified period has passed, a mark suggesting the game ball to be shot toward the second game area 12b may continue to be displayed in an area smaller than the above-mentioned specific area (for example, an area in the upper right corner or the lower right corner of the display unit 21a).
By doing this, during the fluctuation presentation at the time when the number of times the special pattern fluctuates reaches the time-saving activation number LN, the player can be made aware that a time-saving game state will be set thereafter, and even if a short fluctuation time is determined as the fluctuation time at the above-mentioned time, the player can be made to feel that the game ball will be shot toward the second game area 12b after the fluctuation presentation ends, without feeling any discomfort.
The predetermined area and the specific area may be the same area or different areas. The specific area may be a part of the predetermined area. The area in which a mark indicating a game ball being launched toward the second game area 12b is displayed when the first time reduction is set, and the area in which a mark indicating a game ball being launched toward the second game area 12b is displayed when the second time reduction is set, may be the same area or different areas, or may be areas of different sizes. One area may be a part of the other area.

In addition, if a jackpot is won by the win/lose lottery at the time when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the result of the win/lose lottery is derived, i.e., the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches the number of times the time-saving mode is activated LN, and a jackpot pattern is determined that specifies that the time-saving mode will not be set, a second time-saving mode may be set after the special mode based on the winning of the jackpot has ended.
By doing so, there are more opportunities to set the time-shortened gaming state, which can increase the player's interest.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by the win/lose lottery at the time when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the result of the win/lose lottery is derived, i.e., the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches the number of times the time-saving feature is activated LN, and a jackpot pattern is determined that is set to a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state), after the special game based on the jackpot win ends, the high-probability game state and time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state) based on the jackpot pattern may be set without setting a second time-saving feature.
By doing this, a more advantageous gaming state for the player is set after the special game ends, which can increase the player's interest.

(41) In a pachinko machine that is set so that a special game is executed only when a jackpot is won, a second time-saving mode may be set at the time when the stop display time (the so-called pattern determination time) for a variation that has reached the time-saving activation count LN has elapsed or at a predetermined time after the stop display time has elapsed.
In addition, in a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, if the result of the lottery when the time-saving activation count LN is reached is a loss, the second time-saving may be set at any point between the time when the special symbol stops changing and the time when the stop display time has elapsed (for example, the time when the special symbol stops changing, the time when the stop display time has elapsed, etc.). Also, if the result of the lottery when the time-saving activation count LN is reached is a small win, the second time-saving may be set at the end of the small win game based on the small win (the end of the ending process for the small win game).
In addition, in a so-called simultaneous spinning machine, the second time reduction may be set at the start of the fluctuation when the time reduction activation count LN is reached.
By doing so, the second time reduction can be set at an appropriate timing according to the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(42) In addition, the pachinko machine P may be configured to transmit multiple external signals to an external device installed outside the pachinko machine P, such as a hall computer or a data display device that displays the number of jackpot wins (number of times special games are played), the number of changes after the end of special games, the number of times the time-saving game state is set, etc.
For example, as the external signal, a plurality of jackpot signals may be provided that are transmitted in response to a jackpot win and the execution of a special game.
The first jackpot signal among the multiple jackpot signals may be set to be continuously transmitted to the hall computer or data display device from the start to the end of the special game, allowing the hall computer or data display device to count the number of jackpots (number of times the special game is executed) and display that number. Furthermore, when the hall computer or data display device receives the first jackpot signal, it may reset the number of times that has changed since the end of the special game.
Furthermore, the second jackpot signal among the multiple jackpot signals may be set to be continuously transmitted to the hall computer or data display device from the start of the special game until the end of the time-shortened game state (third time-shortened) that is set after the end of the special game, so that the hall computer or data display device can count the number of times the third time-shortened state has occurred and display that number. Furthermore, when the hall computer or data display device receives the second jackpot signal, it may reset the number of times that has changed since the end of the special game.
Furthermore, the third jackpot signal among the multiple jackpot signals may be configured to be continuously transmitted to the hall computer or data display device from the time the second time reduction is set until it ends, allowing the hall computer or data display device to count the number of times the second time reduction has been set and display that number. Furthermore, when the hall computer or data display device receives the third jackpot signal, it may reset the number of times the special game has changed since its end. Furthermore, when the data display device receives the third jackpot signal, it may notify the user that the second time reduction has been set. It should be noted that the third jackpot signal may not be continuously transmitted from the time the second time reduction is set until it ends, but may be transmitted only when the second time reduction is set.
Furthermore, the jackpot signal may be transmitted to only one of the hall computer and the data display device, rather than to both. For example, the first and second jackpot signals may be transmitted only to the data display device, and the third jackpot signal may be transmitted only to the hall computer.
By doing the above, it becomes possible to know from outside the pachinko machine P that the second time reduction has been set.

(43) In the above-described embodiment, after the above-described consecutive jackpot count condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaching a predetermined number) is met, the number of special games executed per unit time (the number of jackpot wins per unit time) is reduced by increasing the determination ratio of a longer variable time than before the consecutive jackpot count condition is met. However, the control method by the main CPU 101 for reducing the number of special games executed per unit time is not limited to this. Specific examples will be explained below.
As mentioned above, consecutive jackpots refer to consecutive jackpots that are won in the normal game state, transition to at least one of the time-saving game state or the high-probability game state, and then without transitioning back to the normal game state.

(Specific Example 1)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., three times), in the variations executed thereafter, (A) a setting ratio of determining a variation time longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation executed previously may be set higher. Also, in the special games executed thereafter, (B) an opening time longer than the opening time of the special games executed previously may be set, (C) an ending time longer than the ending time of the special games executed previously may be set, (D) an interval time longer than the interval time of the special games executed previously may be set, or (E) an opening time longer than the opening time of the jackpot opening 18 in the special games executed previously may be set.

(Specific Example 2)
For example, if the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 20 times), the variables and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).
(Specific Example 3)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., three times) and the total number of rounds executed during the consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 20 times), the variables and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).

(Specific Example 4)
For example, if the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., three times), and the jackpot pattern determined when the predetermined number of times is reached or in the jackpot after the predetermined number of times is a specific pattern (such as a jackpot pattern set for a relatively large number of rounds to be played during special play (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the above-mentioned settings (A) to (E) may be made in the variations related to the winning of the jackpot and variations played thereafter, and in the special play based on the winning of the jackpot and special play played thereafter.
(Specific Example 5)
For example, during consecutive jackpots, if the total number of rounds executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), and the jackpot pattern determined when a jackpot is won after the predetermined number has been reached is a specific pattern (such as a jackpot pattern set for a relatively large number of rounds executed during special play (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the above-mentioned settings (A) to (E) may be made in the variations related to the jackpot winning and variations executed thereafter, and in the special play based on the jackpot winning and special play executed thereafter.

(Specific Example 6)
For example, if the number of fluctuations from the end of a predetermined special game during consecutive jackpots until the next jackpot is won is a specific number (for example, 10 times) or less, or if the total number of fluctuations after the end of all special games during consecutive jackpots reaches a specific number, the fluctuations related to the jackpot winning and the fluctuations executed thereafter, and the special game based on the jackpot winning and the special game executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).
(Specific Example 7)
For example, if the number of fluctuations from the end of a predetermined special game to the winning of the next jackpot during consecutive jackpots is a specific number (for example, 10 times) or less, and the jackpot pattern determined when the next jackpot is won is a specific pattern (such as a jackpot pattern set for a relatively large number of rounds to be played during special game play (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the fluctuations related to the winning of the jackpot and fluctuations played thereafter, and the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and special games played thereafter may be set as in (A) to (E) above.

(Specific Example 8)
For example, if the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3,000 balls), the variables and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).
(Specific Example 9)
For example, if the total number of prize balls paid out during successive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3,000 balls), and the jackpot pattern determined in the jackpot after the predetermined number is reached is a specific pattern (such as a jackpot pattern set for a relatively large number of rounds played during special play (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the above-mentioned settings (A) to (E) may be used in the variations related to the winning of the jackpot and in the variations played thereafter, and in the special play based on the winning of the jackpot and in the special play played thereafter.

(Specific Example 10)
For example, if the difference between the number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots and the number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 1,500 balls), the variables and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).
(Specific Example 11)
For example, if the difference between the number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots and the number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,500 balls), and the jackpot pattern determined in the jackpot after the predetermined number has been reached is a specific pattern (such as a jackpot pattern set for a relatively large number of rounds to be played during special play (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the above-mentioned settings (A) to (E) may be used in the variations related to the winning of the jackpot and in the variations played thereafter, and in the special play based on the winning of the jackpot and in the special play played thereafter.

(Specific Example 12)
For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined when a specific jackpot is won during consecutive jackpots is a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (3 seconds, 6 seconds, etc.) set), the fluctuations executed thereafter may be set as in (A) above, or the special games based on the winning of the jackpot and the special games executed thereafter may be set as in (B) to (E) above.
(Specific Example 13)
For example, when the first special chart random number or the second special chart random number is stored, a pre-determination process is set to be executed before the start of fluctuations based on the first special chart random number or the second special chart random number, in which a win/lose lottery is held for the first special chart random number or the second special chart random number and various judgments are made regarding the determination of the special pattern (determining whether or not it will result in a jackpot, determining the type of special pattern to be determined, etc.), and if, during consecutive jackpots, the judgment result of the pre-determination process is a predetermined content (for example, the pending numbers stored at the end of the special game include one that will result in a jackpot), the fluctuations and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).

(Specific Example 14)
For example, if the total elapsed time during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 15 minutes), the variables and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).
(Specific Example 15)
For example, if the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., three times) and the total time elapsed during the consecutive jackpots is less than a predetermined time (e.g., five minutes), the variables and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).

(Specific Example 16)
For example, if the total execution time of special games during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes), the variables and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).
(Specific Example 17)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., three times) and the total execution time of special games during the consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined time (e.g., five minutes), the variables and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).

When set as above, it is possible to reduce the number of special games executed per unit time (number of jackpot wins per unit time), just as in the above-mentioned embodiment. This makes it possible to appropriately prevent situations where a large number of special games are executed in a short period of time, resulting in a sudden increase in the number of prize balls won by the player, and where the tendency to gamble becomes extremely high.

Furthermore, the various conditions in the above specific examples 1 to 17 can be set in combination with each other to the extent that no contradictions arise. Furthermore, when the various conditions are met, the above settings (A) to (E) can be set either alone or in combination.

Furthermore, a counter (configured in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103) for counting the number of consecutive jackpots may be provided in the main control board 100, and a determination may be made as to whether or not the number of consecutive jackpots has reached a predetermined number based on the count value of the counter. Then, when the various conditions in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, any one or more of the above-mentioned settings (A) to (E) may be set.
Furthermore, because the game ball enters the second start winning slot 16 during the high-probability time-saving game state, consecutive jackpots are primarily jackpots won based on the second special random number. Therefore, the counter described above may be configured to count the number of consecutive jackpots won based on the second special random number, and to reset the count value of the counter when a jackpot is won based on the first special random number. When the number of consecutive jackpots won based on the second special random number reaches a predetermined number, it may be determined that the conditions for the number of consecutive jackpots in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 have been met. In other words, when a jackpot is won based on the first special random number, the consecutive jackpots may be treated as having been interrupted, and the conditions for the number of consecutive jackpots in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 may be set so that the conditions for the number of consecutive jackpots are not met unless a jackpot is won based on the second special random number in succession.
When a jackpot is won based on the second special random number, it is more likely that a special game with a relatively larger number of game balls that can be won will be decided than when a jackpot is won based on the first special random number, and there is a high possibility that the number of prize balls won by the player will increase rapidly in a short period of time. When set as described above, only jackpots based on the second special random number are subject to the conditions regarding the number of consecutive jackpots, so it is possible to prevent the above settings (A) to (E) from being made excessively.

Furthermore, when the various conditions in specific examples 1 to 17 are met, and (A) relating to the variable time and at least one of (B) to (E) relating to the various times during special play are set in combination, after the various conditions are met, both the variable time and the various times during special play will be longer than before the various conditions are met, but the rate of change of the variable time may be set to be greater than the rate of change of the various times during special play.
For example, when the conditions in Specific Example 1 are satisfied, and (A) and (B) are set in combination, before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time for the special symbol fluctuation is likely to be set to 3 seconds or 6 seconds, and after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the fluctuation time for the special symbol fluctuation is likely to be set to 13 seconds or 15 seconds (changing to 2.5 to 5 times the fluctuation time before the predetermined number is reached), and it may also be set so that before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the opening time during special game is 10 seconds, and after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the opening time during special game is 15 seconds (changing to 1.5 times the opening time before the predetermined number is reached).

Furthermore, when the various conditions in specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, if (A) regarding the fluctuation time is set, after the various conditions are satisfied, both the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that results in the no-reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that results in the reach fluctuation pattern will be longer than before the various conditions are satisfied, but the rate of change in the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that results in the reach fluctuation pattern may be set to be larger than the rate of change in the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that results in the no-reach fluctuation pattern, or the rate of change in the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that results in the no-reach fluctuation pattern may be set to be larger than the rate of change in the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that results in the reach fluctuation pattern.
For example, when (A) is set when the conditions in specific example 2 are satisfied, before the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 3 seconds or 6 seconds is likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a no-reach fluctuation pattern, and after the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 13 seconds or 15 seconds (which changes to 2.5 to 5 times the fluctuation time before reaching the predetermined number) is likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a no-reach fluctuation pattern. Also, before the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 20 seconds or 30 seconds is likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a reach fluctuation pattern, and after the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 180 seconds or 240 seconds (which changes to 6 to 12 times the fluctuation time before reaching the predetermined number) may be likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a reach fluctuation pattern.
Furthermore, when (A) is set when the conditions in specific example 8 are satisfied, before the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 3 seconds or 6 seconds is likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that results in a no-reach fluctuation pattern, and after the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 13 seconds or 15 seconds (changing to 2.5 to 5 times the fluctuation time before reaching the predetermined number) is likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that results in a no-reach fluctuation pattern, and before the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 20 seconds or 30 seconds is likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that results in a reach fluctuation pattern, and after the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 40 seconds or 45 seconds (changing to about 1.3 to 2.25 times the fluctuation time before reaching the predetermined number) may be likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that results in a reach fluctuation pattern.
Furthermore, when the various conditions in specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, by setting at least one of (B) to (E) relating to the various times during the special game without setting (A) relating to the variable time, the variable time does not change after the various conditions are satisfied, but the execution time of the special game (opening time, ending time, interval time, opening time of the large prize opening 18) may be lengthened. In this case, for example, the opening time after the various conditions are satisfied may be set to be longer than the other times after the conditions are satisfied (ending time, interval time, opening time of the large prize opening 18), or the rate of change of the opening time before and after the various conditions are satisfied may be set to be larger than the rate of change of the other times.

Furthermore, when the various conditions in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, other settings may be made instead of the settings (A) to (E) above. For example, when various conditions are satisfied, in the normal symbol game executed thereafter, (F) the setting ratio may be set so that it is longer than the normal symbol fluctuation time executed previously, or (G) the setting may be set so that it is shorter than the opening time of the movable piece 16b of the second start winning port 16 previously.
Also, for example, if various conditions are satisfied, after the end of the subsequent special game, (H) the number of time-saving times may be set to be less than the number of time-saving times set after the end of the previous special game.
By setting it in this way, the frequency with which game balls enter the second start winning port 16 decreases, and the opportunities for winning or losing lotteries also decrease, so the number of special games played per unit time (the number of jackpot wins per unit time) can be reduced.

Also, for example, if various conditions are met, in the special game that is executed thereafter, (I) the large prize opening 18 may be set to open and close in a manner that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the previous special game (for example, by repeating a predetermined number of times of opening for 0.5 seconds and closing for 1.0 second).
When set in this way, the number of prize balls that can be won during a special game is reduced, and the total number of prize balls per unit time can be reduced. This makes it possible to limit the number of prize balls won by a player even when multiple special games are played in a short period of time, thereby appropriately preventing situations in which players become extremely gambling-oriented.

Also, for example, if various conditions are met, when the special pattern changes thereafter, (J) when both the first special pattern random number and the second special pattern random number are stored, the first special pattern random number may be set to be processed in priority to the second special pattern random number.
When set in this way, the probability that a small number of rounds of special games will be decided is higher when a jackpot is won based on the first special random number than when a jackpot is won based on the second special random number, so the expected number of prize balls that can be won during special games decreases, and the expected number of total prize balls per unit time can be reduced. This makes it possible to limit the number of prize balls won by a player even when a large number of special games are played in a concentrated period of time, thereby appropriately preventing situations in which players become extremely gambling-oriented.

As with (A) to (E), the settings (F) to (J) may be set singly or in combination with one another. Also, the settings (F) to (J) may be set in combination with at least one of (A) to (E).
In addition, in the settings (A) to (G), when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, various times are lengthened, but it is also possible to set the predetermined times to be longer while shortening other times. For example, when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, it is also possible to set the rate at which a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation executed previously is determined to be higher (setting (A)), and to set an ending time shorter than the ending time of the special game executed previously (setting (C)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, after the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met, the time from the start of fluctuation to the end of the special game becomes too long, thereby severely hindering the player's profits.

Furthermore, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met, settings (A) to (E) are made, and when the various times are lengthened, the frequency of execution of specific effects may be set to increase within the lengthened period.
For example, when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, if the setting ((A)) is made so that the rate of determining a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation time of the previously executed special symbol fluctuation is high, when a long fluctuation time is determined, the setting may be made so that the frequency of execution of a suggestive effect (specific effect) showing the expected probability of winning a jackpot in that fluctuation is high. Also, the setting may be made so that the frequency of execution of a special effect (specific effect) showing content unrelated to the result of the win/lose lottery is high.

Furthermore, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met, if an opening time longer than the opening time of the special game previously executed is set (setting (B)), or if an ending time longer than the ending time of the special game previously executed is set (setting (C)), the frequency of execution of a pre-reading effect (specific effect) suggesting that there is something among the pending items stored at that time that may be determined to be a jackpot win may be increased until the opening time or ending time has elapsed.
The degree of change in the frequency of execution of a specific effect is not particularly limited. For example, although a specific effect was not executed before the various conditions described above were satisfied, it may be set so that the specific effect is executed after the various conditions described above are satisfied, or although a specific effect was executed at a predetermined execution rate before the various conditions described above were satisfied, it may be set so that the specific effect is executed at a rate higher than the predetermined execution rate after the various conditions described above are satisfied.
In this case, as described above, it is possible to appropriately prevent situations in which the player's tendency to gamble becomes extremely high, while also preventing the player's interest from decreasing due to various times being longer.

Furthermore, when one or more of the settings (A) to (J) are made when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met, the settings may be cancelled (i.e., restored to the settings before the various conditions were met) when a predetermined termination condition is met.
The predetermined termination conditions can be, for example, when a predetermined number of changes (e.g., 30 times) have been made as a result of the setting made after the various conditions described above have been satisfied, when a predetermined number of special games (e.g., 3 times) have been made (a predetermined number of jackpots have been won) as a result of the setting made after the various conditions described above have been satisfied, or when it has been determined that the consecutive jackpots have been broken (for example, when a jackpot pattern that will result in the normal game state being set after the special game has ended has been determined, when the normal game state has been set, when a predetermined number of changes have been made since the normal game state was set, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the setting for preventing a situation in which gambling becomes too strong from continuing for a long time, and to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

In addition, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met and one or more of the settings (A) to (J) are made, even if at least one of the time-shortened game state or the high-probability time-shortened game state continues (i.e., when consecutive jackpots are occurring), if a specific condition is met (for example, when the jackpot pattern X2 associated with the execution of a special game in which the number of obtainable game balls is relatively large is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, twice, etc.) in succession), the above-mentioned setting may be canceled (i.e., the setting may be restored to the state before the various conditions above were met).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the setting for preventing a situation in which gambling becomes too strong from continuing for a long time, thereby preventing the player's interest from decreasing.

Furthermore, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met, specific external information may be sent to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, a device located outside the pachinko machine P, such as a hall computer) in order to communicate the settings made based on this, or a predetermined display (for example, a specific mark image or a warning display such as "game progress time is being changed") may be made on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 to notify that the above-mentioned settings have been made, or a lamp may be turned on in a predetermined manner.
Furthermore, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met, history information indicating this may be stored in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100 or the sub-RAM 303 of the sub-control board 300. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency and period for which settings are made to prevent situations in which gambling becomes more likely, which can be useful in developing pachinko machines that are less likely to cause situations in which gambling becomes more likely.

In addition, the pachinko machine P is provided with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables 114 that are set so that the length of the fluctuation time that can be determined and the determination ratio of the fluctuation time are different, and when a jackpot is won without satisfying the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17, after the special game based on the jackpot has ended, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined by referring to a different fluctuation pattern table 114 based on the jackpot symbol determined at the time of the jackpot being won.
Even when the settings are made in this way, if a jackpot is won with the various conditions described above being met and one or more of the settings (A) to (J) being made, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) may be determined by referring to the common fluctuation pattern table 114, regardless of which jackpot symbol is determined at the time of the jackpot.
Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the various conditions described above are not met, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined after the special game based on the jackpot is completed by referring to the first fluctuation pattern table 114, in which the proportion of relatively long fluctuation times is set high, and if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined when the various conditions described above are not met, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined after the special game based on the jackpot is completed by referring to the second fluctuation pattern table 114, in which the proportion of relatively short fluctuation times is set high. Then, when set in this way, regardless of whether a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined when the various conditions described above are met, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) may be determined after the special game based on the jackpot is completed by referring to the third fluctuation pattern table 114, in which the proportion of longer fluctuation times than the fluctuation time that can be determined by the first fluctuation pattern table 114 is set high.

The pachinko machine P may also be provided with a variation pattern table 114 as follows. The variation pattern table 114 will be specifically explained below. Note that the explanation will be given here using an example in which the winning of the time-saving grant (determination of the time-saving symbol) is not taken into consideration, the winning of the small prize is not determined in the winning/losing lottery, and when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16, two types of big win symbols, X1 and X2, are determined, and one type of losing symbol, Y2, is determined.
For example, as shown in Figures 59 to 60, there may be provided a table C that is referenced when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are not met during a high-probability, time-shortened game state, and tables D1, D2, and D3 that are referenced when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met during a high-probability, time-shortened game state and one or more of the settings (A) to (J) above are made.

As shown in FIG. 59, according to table C, when a losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, a fluctuation pattern command "C0H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "3 second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern with the entire fluctuation time set to 3 seconds) is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, a fluctuation pattern command "C1H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "5 second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern with the entire fluctuation time set to 5 seconds) is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 224, a fluctuation pattern command "C2H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "10 second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern with the entire fluctuation time set to 10 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 225 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "C3H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "15 second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern with the entire fluctuation time set to 15 seconds) is determined.
Furthermore, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, a fluctuation pattern command "D0H" is determined to which a fluctuation pattern of "30 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 30 seconds) is associated, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, a fluctuation pattern command "D1H" is determined to which a fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds) is associated, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174, a fluctuation pattern command "D2H" is determined to which a fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 100 seconds) is associated, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "D3H" is determined to which a fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 120 seconds) is associated.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), according to table D1, when a losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 12, a fluctuation pattern command "C0H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "3 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 13 to 25, a fluctuation pattern command "C1H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "5 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 26 to 50, a fluctuation pattern command "C4H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "50 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 50 seconds) is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 51 to 150, a fluctuation pattern command "C5H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 225 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "C6H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined.
Furthermore, when the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, a fluctuation pattern command "D1H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, a fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174, a fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "150 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 150 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "D5H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "200 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 200 seconds) is determined.

As shown in Figure 60 (b), according to table D2, when a losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 24, a fluctuation pattern command "C4H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "50 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 25 to 74, a fluctuation pattern command "C5H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 75 to 149, a fluctuation pattern command "C7H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "70 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 70 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 150 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "C6H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined.
Furthermore, when the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, a fluctuation pattern command "D1H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, a fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174, a fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "150 seconds fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "D5H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "200 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

As shown in Figure 60 (c), according to table D3, when the losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "C5H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.
Furthermore, when the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, a fluctuation pattern command "D1H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, a fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174, a fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "150 seconds fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "D5H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "200 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are not met during a high-probability, time-shortened game state, the fluctuation pattern (i.e., fluctuation time) is determined by referring to table C, and if a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met during a high-probability, time-shortened game state and one or more of the settings (A) to (J) above are made, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to any one of the fluctuation pattern tables 114 of table D1, table D2, or table D3.
Furthermore, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met during a high-probability time-saving gaming state and one or more of the settings (A) to (J) described above are performed, if a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16, the referenced fluctuation pattern table 114 may be switched by satisfying a predetermined switching condition. Specifically, the referenced fluctuation pattern table 115 may be switched from table D1 to table D2 to table D3 depending on the number of consecutive jackpots. Furthermore, the referenced fluctuation pattern table 114 may be switched from table D3 to table D2 to table D1 depending on the number of fluctuations.

(Other game features to which the time-saving game state setting is applied)
Next, we will explain other examples of gameplay that apply control to set a time-saving game state without winning a jackpot or executing a special game. Note that the following will mainly explain configurations and controls that are different from the above-mentioned embodiment, and explanations of similar configurations and controls will be omitted unless necessary. Also, it is assumed that none of the pachinko machines P related to the other application examples below are provided with a set value.
(Another Application Example 1)
(Configuration and control overview)
Although not specifically shown, the configuration of the game board 11 (game area 12) of the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 1, as well as the devices and components installed therein, are substantially the same as those in the above-described embodiment.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 1, the game state is set to one of the following, similar to the above-mentioned embodiment: a normal game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state), a second low-probability time-shortened game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state), or a high-probability time-shortened game state (a game state combining a high-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state).
As in the above-described embodiment, during the normal game state, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a, and so as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, the game ball can enter the first start winning hole 15. On the other hand, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the special game, and the small win game, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b, and so as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second start winning hole 16, and enter the large winning hole 18 (see FIG. 3).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, when a jackpot is won based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot 15, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and when a jackpot is won based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot 16, a jackpot symbol X2 is determined. Note that the probability of winning a jackpot during the normal game state is set to approximately 1/150, and the probability of winning a jackpot during the high-probability time-saving game state is set to approximately 1/110.
When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, four rounds of play are executed during the special game based on the determination, and if a predetermined number (for example, one ball) of game balls cannot enter the specific area 57 during a specific round of play (for example, three rounds), the game returns to the normal game state after the special game ends. Also, approximately 400 game balls can be acquired during the special game.
On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, 10 rounds of play are executed during the special game based on the determination, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 in a specific round of play, and after the special game ends, a high probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving times is 10,000) is set. Also, approximately 1,000 game balls can be acquired during the special game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, unlike the embodiment described above, a judgment of whether or not a time-saving award will be awarded in a win/loss lottery and a determination of a time-saving symbol in the event of a win/loss award are not performed. Instead, as losing symbols that can be determined when the result of the win/loss lottery based on the game ball entering the first start winning slot 15 is a loss, a losing symbol Z1 that is determined to set a second time-saving game state (the number of time-saving times that is set is a predetermined number (10,000 times in this application example)) and a losing symbol Z2 that is determined to not set a time-saving game state are provided. Then, in the normal game state, when a loss occurs based on the game ball entering the first start winning slot 15 and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the second time-saving game state described above is set. That is, when a losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning slot 15 during the normal game state, the game state thereafter transitions from the normal game state to the second low-probability time-shortened game state. In contrast, when a losing symbol Z2 is determined, the game state remains the normal game state.
In addition, the probability that a losing symbol Z1 will be determined when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 is set to approximately 1/500.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, if a loss occurs based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot 16, the losing symbol Z1 is not determined. Furthermore, even if a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 and a losing symbol Z1 is determined during a game state other than the normal game state (the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state), the second time-saving game state is not set. In other words, even if a losing symbol Z1 is determined based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot 15 during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the game state at that time is not changed, and the number of time-saving times of 10,000 is not reset. The remaining number of time-saving times at that time is updated (i.e., decremented by 1).

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, the upper limit for the number of consecutive probability change settings is set to five. As described above, in this pachinko machine P, when a jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends. Therefore, if a jackpot symbol X2 is determined five times in a row, the normal game state is forcibly set after the special game based on that determination ends.

(Gameability of the Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 1)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 1, as described above, the game is set to progress in either a normal game state (a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state), a second low-probability time-shortened game state (a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state), or a high-probability time-shortened game state (a game state that combines a high-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state).

When a player starts playing, the normal game mode is often set. During this normal game mode, as described above, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot). As long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, the game ball may enter the first start winning slot 15, but will not enter the second start winning slot 16. A lottery is then held based on the game ball's entry into the first start winning slot 15, and if a jackpot is won, jackpot pattern X1 is determined. If jackpot pattern X1 is determined, the game mode after the specified number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 and the special game ends is set to the normal game mode (see Figure 61). In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 1, the high-probability time-saving game mode is not set during the normal game mode through the winning of a jackpot or the execution of a special game.

Here, if a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 during normal game mode, the result of the win/lose lottery will be a loss, and a loss symbol Z1 may be determined (the probability of determination is approximately 1/500). If a loss symbol Z1 is determined, the game mode is set to a second low-probability time-saving game mode without winning a jackpot or going through special game play, and this second low-probability time-saving game mode continues until the result of the win/lose lottery has been determined 10,000 times without winning a jackpot.

During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball (right hit) toward the second game area 12b. As long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, the game ball may enter the second start winning slot 16, but will not enter the first start winning slot 15. A lottery is then held based on the game ball's entry into the second start winning slot 16, and if a jackpot is won, jackpot pattern X2 is determined. If jackpot pattern X2 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the special game ends is set to a high-probability time-saving game state, with the number of time-saving plays set to 10,000. In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 1, if the player hits the right as instructed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the player will win a jackpot and transition to the high-probability time-saving game state (see Figure 61). During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning port 16 is much more likely to remain open than during the normal game state, which reduces the loss of game balls as the game progresses, making it almost certain that the next jackpot will be won, and transitioning to the high-probability time-saving game state occurs.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, just as during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to shoot game balls (hit to the right) toward the second game area 12b. As long as game balls are shot in accordance with this instruction, a lottery is held based on the game balls entering the second start entry slot 16, and if a jackpot is won, jackpot pattern X2 is determined. If jackpot pattern X2 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the special game ends is set again to the high-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving cycles is set to 10,000. During the high-probability time-saving game state, just as during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the player is almost certain to win the next jackpot while minimizing the loss of game balls, and the high-probability time-saving game state is set again.

In this way, in pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, when the high-probability time-shortened game state is set, essentially, a jackpot is won again during that game state, and the high-probability time-shortened game state is set again. Therefore, once the high-probability time-shortened game state is set, jackpot pattern X2 can be determined consecutively, and the high-probability time-shortened game state continues until jackpot pattern X2 is determined five times in a row (until the number of consecutive probability variation settings reaches the upper limit). Then, when jackpot pattern X2 is determined five times in a row, the game state after the special game based on that determination ends is set to the normal game state. In other words, in pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, when the high-probability time-shortened game state is set, the special game based on the determination of jackpot pattern X2 is executed five times in a row without transitioning to the normal game state.

For example, let us assume that the pachinko machine P is configured to set a high-probability time-saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 (400 game balls that can be acquired during special play). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state is set, and similarly to the above, when the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the jackpot symbol X2 can be determined consecutively without transitioning to the normal game state.
However, in a pachinko machine P configured in this manner, the high-probability time-saving game state is established based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, and the determination of this jackpot symbol X1 also counts as the number of consecutive probability variable settings. Then, if the jackpot symbol X2 is determined four times in a row after the high-probability time-saving game state is established based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, the number of consecutive probability variable settings reaches the upper limit, and the game state after the special game based on that determination ends is set to the normal game state. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired between the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 (the determination to transition to the high-probability time-saving game state) and the establishment of the normal game state is 4,400 (= 400 game balls that can be acquired per special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 × 1 + 1,000 game balls that can be acquired per special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 × 4).

In contrast, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 1, as described above, the high-probability time-shortened game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 during the first low-probability time-shortened game state via the second low-probability time-shortened game state, which is set based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1 during the normal game state. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired from the time the jackpot symbol X2 is determined (the time-shortened transition to the high-probability time-shortened game state is determined) until the normal game state is set is 5,000 (= 1,000 game balls that can be acquired in one special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 x 5 times).

Here, for example, a pachinko machine is set up so that when a jackpot is won based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot 15, either the first jackpot pattern or the second jackpot pattern is determined, and when either jackpot pattern is determined, a high probability game state is always set, provided that the number of consecutive special mode settings has not reached the upper limit, but when the first jackpot pattern is determined, a time-saving game state is set after the special game ends, and when the second jackpot pattern is determined, a non-time-saving game state is set after the special game ends. Furthermore, in this pachinko machine P, when a jackpot is won and a jackpot symbol is determined based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot 16, the machine is always set to a high probability game state, provided that the number of consecutive probability changes has not reached the upper limit, and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a special game when a jackpot is achieved by a game ball entering the second start winning slot 16 is set to be greater than the number of game balls that can be acquired during a special game when a jackpot is achieved by a game ball entering the first start winning slot 15. Furthermore, in this pachinko machine P, during the non-time-saving game state, game balls are shot toward the first game area 12a to enter the first start winning slot 15, and during the time-saving game state, game balls are shot toward the second game area 12b to enter the second start winning slot 16.

In a pachinko machine configured as described above, when a second jackpot symbol is determined based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot 15, after the special game based on that determination ends, the machine transitions to a high-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, so although the number of consecutive probability hits set increases, a lottery to determine whether a win or loss occurs based on game balls entering the first start winning slot 15 continues. Then, when the first jackpot symbol is determined and the machine transitions to the time-saving game state, the number of consecutive probability hits has already increased, and by the time the number of consecutive probability hits set reaches the upper limit, the number of times the player can win a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot 16, which is advantageous to the player, will have decreased, to the player's disadvantage.

In contrast, if the pachinko machine is set to transition to the time-saving game state based on the determination of a specific losing symbol or small winning symbol that is not a big winning symbol, as in the pachinko machine according to Application Example 1, the number of consecutive probability changes set does not increase before transitioning to the time-saving game state, and the machine transitions to the time-saving game state with the number of consecutive probability changes set at 0, so the unfavorable situation described above does not occur.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 1, the game does not transition directly to a high-probability time-shortened game state in which the game ball enters the second start winning port 16 based on the determination of a predetermined jackpot pattern when the game ball enters the first start winning port 15 during the normal game state, but rather transitions via a low-probability time-shortened game state (second low-probability time-shortened game state) in which the game ball enters the second start winning port 16 based on the determination of a specific losing pattern (losing pattern Z1) when the game ball enters the first start winning port 15 during the normal game state, and then transitions to a high-probability time-shortened game state based on the determination of a predetermined jackpot pattern when the game ball enters the second start winning port 16.
Therefore, from the time when the jackpot pattern that determines the transition to a high-probability time-saving game state is determined until the high-probability time-saving game state ends, it is possible to obtain game profits that can be awarded based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 (for example, the number of rounds during special game that is executed based on winning a jackpot), and it is possible to provide innovative gameplay that increases the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, the time-saving game state is set by determining a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) during the normal game state, but this is not limited to this, and the time-saving game state may also be set by determining a specific small winning symbol during the normal game state.
Also, similar to the above-described embodiment, when a losing symbol Z1, for which a time-saving game state is set, is determined in the normal game state, the execution rate of a particular effect (such as a pre-reading effect, a reach development effect that gives the player high expectations during a variable effect, etc.) may be set to be higher than when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined.

(Another Application Example 2)
The pachinko machine P according to the second application example has almost the same configuration and control as the pachinko machine P according to the first application example.
However, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, when a game ball enters the second start winning slot 16 and a jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state is set in which the number of time-saving times is 100 after the special game based on that determination ends. Since the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 is set to approximately 1/110, similar to the other application example 1, the next jackpot will not necessarily be won during the high-probability time-saving game state, and if the lottery is performed 100 times without a jackpot being won, the normal game state is set.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 2, there is no particular upper limit set on the number of consecutive consecutive jackpot settings, and the high-probability time-saving game state continues until the condition for setting the low-probability time-saving game state is met (100 win/loss lotteries are held without winning a jackpot during the high-probability time-saving game state).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, even if the result of the lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into not only the first start winning slot 15 but also the second start winning slot 16 is a loss, a loss symbol Z1 that is determined to set a second time-shortened gaming state (the number of time-shortened times that is set is a predetermined number (10,000 times in this application example)) or a loss symbol Z2 that is determined to not set a time-shortened gaming state can be determined. Furthermore, even if a loss occurs based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 16 during the normal gaming state and a loss symbol Z1 is determined, the second time-shortened gaming state is set. In other words, when a loss symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 16 during the normal gaming state, the gaming state thereafter transitions from the normal gaming state to the second low-probability time-shortened gaming state. On the other hand, when a losing symbol Z2 is determined in the normal game state, the game state remains the normal game state.
In addition, the probability that a losing symbol Z1 will be determined when a game ball enters the second start winning slot 16 is set to approximately 1/7.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, even if a losing symbol Z1 is determined based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot 16 in a game state other than the normal game state (the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state), the second time-saving game state is not reset. In other words, even if a losing symbol Z1 is determined based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot 16 in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the game state at that time will not change, and the number of time-saving times of 10,000 will not be reset. However, the remaining number of time-saving times at that time will be updated (i.e., decremented by 1).

(Gameability of the Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 2)
The flow of play in the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 2, from the normal game state through the second low-probability time-shortened game state to the high-probability time-shortened game state, is the same as that in the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 1.
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 2, as described above, the number of time-saving times in the high-probability time-saving game state is set to 100, so if the win/loss lottery is held 100 times without winning a jackpot, the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.
Here, during the high-probability time-saving game state, game balls are constantly shot into the second game area 12b, and the game balls can pass through the gate 20. Then, when the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, it is highly likely that the second reserved number will be four, which is the upper limit (i.e., the upper limit of four second special symbol random numbers will be reserved and stored). Also, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, the second special symbol random number is processed with priority over the first special symbol random number, so that the winning/losing lottery processing is performed for up to four second special symbol random numbers that are reserved and stored at the time the above-mentioned normal game state is set, before the first special symbol random number that is reserved and stored at that time.

After the normal game state is set, the shooting of game balls toward the first game area 12a is resumed, and the game balls are aimed at entering the first start winning hole 15, and the game state is again aimed at transitioning to a high probability time-shortened game state.
However, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, if a losing symbol Z1 is determined in a winning/losing lottery based on up to four second special symbol random numbers reserved and stored at the time the normal game state is set, a second low-probability time-saving game state with 10,000 time-saving cycles is set, and after this, the high-probability time-saving game state is reset. In other words, even if the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, a losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the reserved second special symbol random number at this time, and the machine transitions to the second low-probability time-saving game state, allowing a game ball to enter the second start winning slot 16, and when a jackpot symbol X2 is determined based on the ball entering, the machine re-transitions to the high-probability time-saving game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 2, when a specific losing pattern (losing pattern Z1) is determined based on the second special random number obtained by the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 during normal game mode, the machine transitions to a second low-probability time-saving game mode without winning a jackpot or executing a special game, and then can transition to a high-probability time-saving game mode.
As a result, when the high probability time-shortening game state is ended and the normal game state is set, based on the second special chart random number that is reserved and stored, it is possible to re-transition to the high probability time-shortening game state without winning a jackpot or executing a special game, and it is possible to provide an innovative game feature that increases the interest of the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 2, as in Application Example 1, the time-saving gaming state may be set by determining a specific small winning symbol during the normal gaming state.

(Another Application Example 3)
(Configuration and control overview)
The pachinko machine P relating to another application example 3 is a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, which is configured so that a special game is executed when a big win is won or when the game ball enters a special area described below during a small win game based on a small win.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P relating to Other Application Example 3, and the devices and components installed on the game board 11, are the same as those of Other Application Example 1 and Other Application Example 2, except for the attacker device 17.
Although not specifically shown, the attacker device 17 has the same internal structure as the above-mentioned embodiment, other application example 1 and other application example 2, except that instead of the specific area 57 provided in the above-mentioned embodiment, other application example 1 and other application example 2, it has a special area which has the same structure as the specific area 57 but a different function.

Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, other application example 1, and other application example 2, during a special game based on winning a big prize or during a small prize game based on winning a small prize, the large prize opening 18 opens, allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening 18. However, during a special game, the allocating member 59 stays at the first position, and game balls that enter the large prize opening 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. In contrast, during a small prize game, the allocating member 59 stays at the second position, and game balls that enter the large prize opening 18 do not enter the general area 58, but all enter the special area.
In other words, the game ball can enter the special area only during a small win game, so that the game ball enters the special area during a small win game based on a small win, and a special game is executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 3, unlike the above-mentioned embodiment, other application example 1 and other application example 2, the game state after the special game ends is not set depending on whether a predetermined number of game balls enter a predetermined area (specific area 57) of the large prize opening 18 during the special game, but rather the game state is set according to the large prize symbol determined when a large prize is won and the small prize symbol determined when a small prize is won.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 3, one of the following game states is set: a normal game state combining a low probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state; a first low-probability time-shortened game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-shortened game state (the winning probability of a normal pattern, the change time of the normal pattern, and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 are the same as in the above-mentioned embodiment); or a second low-probability time-shortened game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state (the winning probability of a normal pattern, the change time of the normal pattern, and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 are the same as in the above-mentioned embodiment).
As in the above-described embodiment, during the normal game state and the first low-probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a, and so as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, the game ball can enter the first start winning hole 15. On the other hand, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the special game, and the small win game, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b, and so as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second start winning hole 16, and enter the large winning hole 18 (see FIG. 3).

62, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, a jackpot can be won when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15, and when a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined. That is, during the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (during left-hand hitting), a special game is executed based on the winning of a jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbol X1).
The probability of winning a jackpot when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 is set to approximately 1/300 regardless of the gaming status. Also, the upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers that can be stored when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 (upper limit of first reserved numbers) is set to 2. However, the upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers is not limited to this.

When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, 10 rounds of play are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 1,000 game balls can be acquired.
62, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings described below has not reached the upper limit, regardless of whether the game state at the time of determination is the normal game state or the time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state), the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving settings is 100) is set after the special game based on that determination ends. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.

62, in the case of a loss in the lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning slot 15, a loss symbol Z1 is determined. If the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit when a loss symbol Z1 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of time-saving settings is 100) is set after the determination, regardless of whether the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal gaming state is set after the determination.
In other words, when a losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-shortening game state and the number of consecutive time-shortening settings has not reached the upper limit, the first low-probability time-shortening game state and the number of time-shortening settings will be reset.

62, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16, it is possible to win a big win or a small win, and when a big win is won, a big win symbol X2 is determined, and when a small win is won, a small win symbol Y1 is determined. In other words, during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (during right-hand hitting), a special game is executed through a small win game that is executed based on whether a big win is won (the big win symbol X2 is determined) or a small win is won (the small win symbol Y1 is determined).
62, the probability of winning a jackpot when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16 is set to approximately 1/300 regardless of the gaming state, and the probability of winning a small prize when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16 is set to approximately 299/300 regardless of the gaming state. In other words, when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16, the winning or losing lottery determines whether the winning or losing is a jackpot or a small prize, and does not determine whether the winning or losing is a loss. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16, a special game is always executed.
In addition, the upper limit number of reserved second special random numbers that can be stored when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16 (upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is set to 1. However, the upper limit number of reserved second special random numbers is not limited to this.

When the big win symbol X2 is determined and when the small win symbol Y1 is determined, 10 rounds of play are executed during the special play based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls can be acquired.
62, when the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, if the game state at the time of determination was the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state (number of time-saving settings is 100) is set after the special game based on that determination ends, and if the game state at the time of determination was the normal game state, the normal game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.
That is, when a big win pattern X2 or a small win pattern Y1 is determined during the second low-probability time-shortening game state and the number of consecutive time-shortening settings has not reached the upper limit number, the second low-probability time-shortening game state and the number of time-shortening times are reset.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, the upper limit for the number of consecutive time-saving settings is set to three. In this pachinko machine P, as described above, when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal game mode or the first low-probability time-saving game mode, the second low-probability time-saving game mode is set; when a losing symbol Z1 is determined during the normal game mode or the first low-probability time-saving game mode, the first low-probability time-saving game mode is set; and when a jackpot symbol X2 or a small win symbol Y1 is determined during the normal game mode or the second low-probability time-saving game mode, the second low-probability time-saving game mode is set; therefore, any of these determinations is counted as the number of consecutive time-saving settings. Furthermore, when these determinations are made three times in a row, the upper limit for the number of consecutive time-saving settings is reached, and therefore, after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol or small win symbol described above ends and the aforementioned losing symbol is determined, the normal game mode is forcibly set.

(Gameplay of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 3, as described above, either the normal game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state), the first low-probability time-shortened game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-shortened game state), or the second low-probability time-shortened game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state) is set, and the game progresses.

(1) When a jackpot is won in the normal game mode (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) and the second low-probability time-saving game mode is set. When a player starts playing, the normal game mode is often set, and in the normal game mode, the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0 (i.e., there are 3 remaining times until the upper limit is reached).
During the normal game state, as described above, the game ball is instructed to be shot toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot), and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball has a possibility of entering only the first start winning hole 15, and therefore, during this game state, a lottery is held to determine whether the game ball will win or lose based on the game ball entering the first start winning hole 15. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the game state after the special game based on this determination is completed is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state (see Figures 62 and 63).

Here, as described above, when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0), the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 (there are 2 remaining until the upper limit number is reached).
Furthermore, during the second low-probability time-shortening game state, as described above, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (i.e., a right shot). As long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, the game ball has a chance of landing only in the second start winning slot 16. Therefore, during this game state, a win/loss lottery is held based on the game ball's entry into the second start winning slot 16. As described above, this win/loss lottery results in either a big win (determination of the big win symbol X2) or a small win (determination of the small win symbol Y1). When the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined during the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state is reset after the special game based on this determination ends (see FIGS. 62 and 63), and the number of consecutive time-shortening settings is increased by one (the number of times remaining until the upper limit is reached is reduced by one). Therefore, after the second low-probability time-shortening game state is set, the special game is continuously executed until the number of consecutive time-shortening settings reaches the upper limit number.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, and thereafter, if the jackpot pattern X2 or the small win pattern Y1 is determined twice, the normal game state is forcibly set after the special game based on that determination ends.
As mentioned above, the maximum number of reserved second special random numbers that can be stored when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16 (maximum number of second reserved numbers) is set to one. During fluctuations based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or the small jackpot symbol Y1, a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16 and one reserved second special random number is stored. Therefore, even if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small jackpot symbol Y1 is determined twice and the normal game mode is forcibly set, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small jackpot symbol Y1 is determined once more based on the single reserved second special random number at this point, and a special game based on that determination is executed. Furthermore, if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small jackpot symbol Y1 is determined during normal game mode, the game mode after the special game based on that determination is set to the normal game mode (see Figures 62 and 63). Therefore, after the special game mode ends, the normal game mode remains unchanged from before the special game mode was executed.

In this way, in pachinko machine P according to Application Example 3, if a jackpot is won in normal game mode where the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0, special games will be played a total of two times (three times in total if special games played based on a jackpot or small jackpot based on the reserved second special chart random number are included) before the normal game mode is set again.

(2) In the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1), a jackpot is won and a second low-probability time-saving game state is set. In contrast to (1), if a winning or losing lottery based on the game ball entering the first start winning slot 15 in the normal game state results in a loss and a losing symbol Z1 is determined, the game state after the determination is set to the first low-probability time-saving game state (see Figures 62 and 63). Then, based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 2).
In this first low-probability time-shortening game state (when the number of consecutive time-shortening set times is 1), game balls continue to be shot into the first game area 12a. Then, when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning slot 15, the game state after the special game based on that determination is set to the second low-probability time-shortening game state (see Figures 62 and 63), and therefore, based on the determination of that jackpot symbol X1, the number of consecutive time-shortening set times becomes 2 (there is 1 time remaining until the upper limit is reached).

Then, in the first low-probability time-shortening game state (when the number of consecutive time-shortening settings is 1), if a big win symbol X1 is determined and a second low-probability time-shortening game state is set, when a big win symbol X2 or a small win symbol Y1 is determined once thereafter, the normal game state is forcibly set after the special game based on that determination ends.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 3, if a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of consecutive time-saving settings is one, a special game will be executed once (a total of two times if the special game executed based on a jackpot or small jackpot based on the second special chart random number that has been reserved and stored) before the normal game state is set again.

(3) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two) and a second low-probability time-saving game state is set: Also, when the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is one) is set based on the determination of a losing symbol Z1 during the normal game state, if a further losing symbol Z1 is determined in the first low-probability time-saving game state, the game state after the determination is reset to the first low-probability time-saving game state (see Figures 62 and 63). Then, based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes two (the remaining number until the upper limit is reached is one).
Then, in this first low-probability time-shortening game state (when the number of consecutive time-shortening settings is 2), when a jackpot pattern X1 is determined based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15, the number of consecutive time-shortening settings becomes 3 (the number of times remaining until the upper limit number is reached is 0) based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1.
Then, even though the big winning symbol X1 is determined, the number of consecutive time-shortening settings reaches the upper limit of three times, so after the special game based on the determination is finished, the second low-probability time-shortening game state is not set and the normal game state is forcibly set.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 3, if a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two, the normal game state will be set again without the special game based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 being executed.

In addition, if a losing symbol Z1 is determined based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot 15 in the first low-probability time-saving game state described above (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two), the number of consecutive time-saving settings will be three (0 times remaining until the upper limit is reached) based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1, and after this determination, the normal game state will be forcibly set (see Figures 62 and 63). Then, steps (1) to (3) described above will be repeated.

In this way, in pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set and the set number of consecutive time-shortened games is updated based on the determination of a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-shortened game state without the need for a jackpot or the execution of a special game. Then, at the time the second low-probability time-shortened game state is set, the number of times remaining until the upper limit of the set number of consecutive time-shortened games is reached changes depending on the number of times the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-shortened game state. This changes the number of consecutive special games that are executed during the second low-probability time-shortened game state (until the normal game state is set again), providing a novel gameplay element that heightens the player's interest.

It is not necessary to set the system so that a big win or small win is always won when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16; it may be set so that a loss occurs with a predetermined probability.

(Another Application Example 4)
(Configuration and control overview)
The pachinko machine P relating to another application example 4 is also a so-called mixed type 1 and type 2 pachinko machine, and the configuration of the game board 11, the devices and components installed on the game board 11, the game states that are set, and the game area 12 from which game balls are shot out during each game state are all the same as those of another application example 3.

64, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 4, as in Application Example 3, a jackpot can be won when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15, and when a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined. That is, during the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (during left-hand hitting), a special game is executed based on the winning of a jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbol X1).
The probability of winning a jackpot when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 is set to approximately 1/300 regardless of the gaming status. Also, the upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers that can be stored when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 (upper limit of first reserved numbers) is set to 2. However, the upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers is not limited to this.

When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, four rounds of play are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 400 game balls can be acquired.
64, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings described below has not reached the upper limit, regardless of whether the game state at the time of determination is the normal game state or the time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state), the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving settings is 100) is set after the special game based on that determination ends. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.

64, if the winning/losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning slot 15 results in a loss, a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined. The probability of determining the losing symbol Z1 is set to approximately 1/50, and the probability of determining the losing symbol Z2 is set to approximately 49/50.
When the losing symbol Z1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving settings is 10,000) is set after the determination, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state or the time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state).On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the determination.
In other words, when a losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-shortening game state and the number of consecutive time-shortening settings has not reached the upper limit, the first low-probability time-shortening game state and the number of time-shortening times will be reset.

In contrast, when a losing symbol Z2 is determined, the time-saving game state is not set. In other words, if a losing symbol Z2 is determined during the normal game state, the normal game state continues even after the determination, and if a losing symbol Z2 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues even after the determination.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 64, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, if a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16, it is possible to win a jackpot or a small jackpot; if a jackpot is won, jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and if a small jackpot is won, small jackpot symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined. In other words, during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (during right-hand play), a special game is executed via a small jackpot game that is executed based on whether a jackpot is won (jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined) or a small jackpot is won (determination of small jackpot symbol Y1 or Y2).

As shown in FIG. 64, the probability of winning a jackpot when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16 is set to approximately 1/300 regardless of the gaming state, and the probability of winning a small jackpot when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16 is set to approximately 299/300 regardless of the gaming state. In other words, when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16, the winning or losing lottery determines whether the winning or losing is a jackpot or a small jackpot; a loss is never determined. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 3, when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16, a special game is always executed.

64, when a jackpot is won, the probability of hitting the jackpot symbol X2 and the probability of hitting the jackpot symbol X3 are both 1/2. Similarly, when a small jackpot is won, the probability of hitting the small jackpot symbol Y1 and the probability of hitting the small jackpot symbol Y2 are both 1/2.
In addition, the upper limit number of reserved second special random numbers that can be stored when a gaming ball enters the second start winning port 16 (upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is set to 2. However, the upper limit number of reserved second special random numbers is not limited to this.

When the big win symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and when the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, four rounds of play are played during the special game based on that determination, allowing the player to win approximately 400 game balls.

64, when the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, regardless of whether the game state at the time of determination was the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving settings is 100) is set after the special game based on that determination ends. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.
In other words, when a big win pattern X2 or a small win pattern Y1 is determined during the normal game state or the second low-probability time-shortening game state, and the number of consecutive time-shortening settings has not reached the upper limit, the second low-probability time-shortening game state and the number of time-shortening times will be set (reset during the second low-probability time-shortening game state).

In contrast, as shown in Figure 64, when the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, if the game state at the time of determination was the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state (number of time-saving settings is 100) is set after the special game based on that determination ends, and if the game state at the time of determination was the normal game state, the normal game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.
That is, when the big win pattern X3 or the small win pattern Y2 is determined during the second low-probability time-shortening game state and the number of consecutive time-shortening settings has not reached the upper limit number, the second low-probability time-shortening game state and the number of time-shortening times are reset.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, the upper limit on the number of consecutive time-shortening settings is set to 3. In this pachinko machine P, as described above, when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state is set; when a losing symbol Z1 is determined during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set; when a jackpot symbol X2 or a small win symbol Y1 is determined during the normal game state or the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state is set; and when a jackpot symbol X3 or a small win symbol Y2 is determined during the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state is set; therefore, any of these determinations is counted as the number of consecutive time-shortening settings. If these determinations are made three times in a row, the maximum number of consecutive time-saving settings will be reached, and after the special game based on the determination of the big win or small win symbol described above ends and the determination of the losing symbol described above, the game will be forcibly set to normal play.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, the upper limit of the number of reserved normal balls is set to 0, and normal balls are not reserved when a game ball passes through the gate 20. The second low-probability time-saving game state set as described above ends when the fluctuation based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning slot 16 starts, and then the normal game state is set.
For example, when a game transitions from a normal game state or a first low-probability time-saving game state to a second low-probability time-saving game state via a special game, the second low-probability time-saving game state may be set without the second special random number being reserved. In this case, the second start winning slot 16 is opened when a game ball passes through the gate 20, and when the first game ball enters the open second start winning slot 16 and a fluctuation is initiated based on that ball, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends. However, because the second start winning slot 16 is still open when the fluctuation begins, if a game ball enters the second start winning slot 16 during this time, up to two second special random numbers will be reserved and stored.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, since a game ball entering the second start winning slot 16 always results in a big win or small win, after the special game based on that win ends, a second low-probability time-saving game state may be set with the second special random number reserved and stored. In this case, as soon as the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, a governing lottery (the lottery result is a big win or small win) is held based on the reserved and stored second special random number, and fluctuations begin, so the second low-probability time-saving game state ends immediately after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set. Therefore, even if a game ball passes through gate 20 after the special game ends, since the second low-probability time-saving game state has already ended, second start winning slot 16 is extremely unlikely to remain open, and game balls will not enter second start winning slot 16.

In addition, when the winning/losing lottery is held based on the last reserved second special random number, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again with the second special random number not reserved. In this case, the same processing as described above will be carried out.

(Gameability of Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 4)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 4, either a normal game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state), a first low-probability time-shortened game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-shortened game state), or a second low-probability time-shortened game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state) is set, and the game progresses.

(1) When a jackpot is won in the normal game mode (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) and the second low-probability time-saving game mode is set. When a player starts playing, the normal game mode is often set, and in the normal game mode, the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0 (i.e., there are 3 remaining times until the upper limit is reached).
During the normal game state, as described above, the game ball is instructed to be shot toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot), and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball has a possibility of entering only the first start winning hole 15, and therefore, during this game state, a lottery is held to determine whether the game ball will enter the first start winning hole 15. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the game state after the special game based on this determination is completed is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state (see Figures 64 and 65).

Here, as described above, when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0), the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 (there are 2 remaining until the upper limit number is reached).
Furthermore, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the game ball is instructed to be shot toward the second game area 12b (so-called right shot), and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball has the potential to enter only the second start winning port 16, so during this game state, a lottery is held to determine whether the game ball will win or lose based on whether it enters the second start winning port 16.
In addition, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above, the second special random number is not reserved and stored. Therefore, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second start winning hole 16 is opened, and a winning/losing lottery and fluctuation are performed based on the first game ball entering the second start winning hole 16 while it is open. Furthermore, based on the second and third game balls entering the second start winning hole 16, up to the upper limit of two second special random numbers are reserved and stored.

Then, in the above-mentioned win/lose lottery, as described above, one of the following lottery results is derived: determination of jackpot pattern X2 based on a jackpot win, determination of jackpot pattern X3 based on a jackpot win, determination of small win pattern Y1 based on a small win, or determination of small win pattern Y2 based on a small win. During the second low-probability time-saving game state, regardless of which of the above patterns is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset after the special game based on that determination ends (see Figures 64 and 65), and the number of consecutive time-saving settings increases by one (the number remaining until the upper limit is reached decreases by one). Therefore, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, special games will be played continuously until the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches the upper limit.

As described above, if jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of consecutive time-saving settings will be 1 based on the determination of jackpot symbol X1. Therefore, if jackpot symbol X2, jackpot symbol X3, small win symbol Y1, or small win symbol Y2 is subsequently determined twice, the normal game state will be forcibly set after the special game based on that determination ends. Furthermore, because the normal game state has been forcibly set, the number of consecutive time-saving settings will be reset to 0.

As described above, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, two second special random numbers are reserved and stored in addition to the second special random number used for the initial winning/losing lottery and fluctuation. Therefore, when the above-mentioned symbol is determined twice and the normal game state is forcibly set, the remaining one second special random number is reserved and stored.
Then, a winning/losing lottery is conducted based on the last reserved second special symbol random number, and either the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small jackpot symbol Y1, or the small jackpot symbol Y2 is determined. Here, since the normal game state is set at the time of the lottery, if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small jackpot symbol Y1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again (see Figures 64 and 65), and the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 2). In contrast, if the jackpot symbol X3 or the small jackpot symbol Y2 is determined, the normal game state is set (see Figures 64 and 65).

Then, since the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery has been conducted, the second special random number is no longer reserved and stored, and when the second low probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the big win pattern X2 or the small win pattern Y1, the second start winning port 16 is opened again, and the winning/losing lottery and fluctuation are conducted based on the entry of the first game ball into the second start winning port 16 while it is open, and further, based on the entry of the second or third game ball into the second start winning port 16, the second special random number is reserved and stored up to the upper limit of two.
As a result, the special game is continuously executed until either the big win symbol X2, the big win symbol X3, the small win symbol Y1 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined twice again.

On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol X3 or the small jackpot symbol Y2 is determined and the normal game state is set, the aim is to win another jackpot (determine the jackpot symbol X2) from the normal game state and transition to the second low-probability time-saving game state based on that winning.

In this way, if a jackpot is won in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving game state will be repeatedly set and the special game will continue to be played continuously unless the jackpot pattern X3 or the small jackpot pattern Y2 is determined based on the last remaining second special pattern random number when the game state is transitioned to the normal game state.
For example, if the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined when the game is first switched to the normal game mode, a total of four special games will be executed, from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2. Also, if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined when the game is first switched to the normal game mode, and the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined when the game is second switched to the normal game mode, a total of seven special games will be executed, from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2.

(2) In the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1), a jackpot is won and a second low-probability time-saving game state is set. In contrast to (1), if a winning or losing lottery based on the game ball entering the first start winning slot 15 in the normal game state results in a loss and a losing symbol Z1 is determined, the game state after the determination is set to the first low-probability time-saving game state (see Figures 64 and 65). Then, based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 2).
In this first low-probability time-shortening game state (when the number of consecutive time-shortening set times is 1), game balls continue to be shot into the first game area 12a. Then, when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning slot 15, the game state after the special game based on that determination is set to the second low-probability time-shortening game state (see Figures 64 and 65), and therefore, based on the determination of that jackpot symbol X1, the number of consecutive time-shortening set times becomes 2 (there is 1 time remaining until the upper limit is reached).
Also, as in the case of (1), after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first game ball enters the second start winning port 16, and based on this, a lottery is held to determine whether the result is a win or a loss, and the result is changed.Furthermore, based on the second or third game ball entering the second start winning port 16, the second special random number is reserved and stored up to the maximum number of two.

As described above, if jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal game mode (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1) and the second low-probability time-saving game mode is set, the number of consecutive time-saving settings will be 2 based on the determination of jackpot symbol X1. Therefore, if jackpot symbol X2, jackpot symbol X3, small win symbol Y1, or small win symbol Y2 is subsequently determined once, the normal game mode will be forcibly set after the special game based on that determination ends. Furthermore, because the normal game mode has been forcibly set, the number of consecutive time-saving settings will be reset to 0.

(A) In the normal game state that is forcibly set, when the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined based on the second special symbol random number that was previously reserved and stored. Note that here, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above, in addition to the second special symbol random number used for the initial win/loss lottery and fluctuation, two other second special symbol random numbers are reserved and stored. Therefore, when the above-mentioned symbol is determined once and the normal game state is forcibly set, the remaining two second special symbol random numbers are reserved and stored.
Then, a lottery is held based on the second special random number that was reserved earlier out of the two reserved and stored, and one of the big win symbol X2, big win symbol X3, small win symbol Y1, or small win symbol Y2 is determined. Here, since the normal game state is set at the time of the lottery, if the big win symbol X2 or small win symbol Y1 is determined, the second low probability time-saving game state is set again as in the case of (1) (see Figures 64 and 65), and the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 2).
At this point, since the remaining second special random number is stored in reserve, one of the above-mentioned patterns is determined based on this last second special random number, and the second low probability time-saving game state is set again (see Figures 64 and 65), and the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes two (one remaining until the upper limit is reached).

Then, since the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery has been conducted, the second special random number is no longer reserved and stored, and when the second low probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of any of the above-mentioned patterns, the second start winning port 16 is opened again, and a winning/losing lottery and change are conducted based on the entry of the first game ball into the second start winning port 16 while it is open, and further, based on the entry of the second or third game ball into the second start winning port 16, the second special random number is reserved and stored up to the maximum number of two.
As mentioned above, at this point, the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two (one remaining until the upper limit is reached), so if the winning/losing lottery based on the first game ball entering the game determines whether the big win symbol X2, the big win symbol X3, the small win symbol Y1, or the small win symbol Y2, the game will be forced to enter the normal game state, resulting in the same situation as described above.

(b) In a normal game state that has been forcibly set, if a big win pattern X3 or a small win pattern Y2 is determined based on the second special pattern random number that has been previously reserved and stored In contrast, if a normal game state is forcibly set as described above and a big win pattern X3 or a small win pattern Y2 is determined based on the second special pattern random number that has been previously reserved and stored of the two that have been reserved and stored at this time, the normal game state is set again based on that determination (see Figures 64 and 65).
At this point, the remaining second special random number is stored in reserve, so if the big win pattern X2 or small win pattern Y1 is determined based on this last second special random number, the second low probability time-saving game state will be set again (see Figures 64 and 65), resulting in a situation similar to that described above in (1).
On the other hand, if the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the normal game state will continue to be set (see Figures 64 and 65), and in this case, the situation will be the same as (1) above.

In this way, if a jackpot is won in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving game state will be repeatedly set and special games will continue to be played continuously unless the jackpot pattern X3 or the small jackpot pattern Y2 is determined for either of the two second special random numbers remaining when the game state is transitioned to the normal game state.
For example, if the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined for both the first and second reserved second special symbol random numbers when the game is first switched to the normal game mode, a total of four special games will be played, from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2. Also, if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined based on the first reserved second special symbol random number when the game is first switched to the normal game mode, and the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined for both the first and second reserved second special symbol random numbers when the game is second switched to the normal game mode, a total of seven special games will be played, from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2.
Furthermore, when the game state is shifted to the normal game mode for the first time, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small jackpot symbol Y1 is determined based on the first reserved second special symbol random number, when the game state is shifted to the normal game mode for the second time, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small jackpot symbol Y1 is determined based on the first reserved second special symbol random number, and when the game state is shifted to the normal game mode for the third time, if the jackpot symbol X3 or the small jackpot symbol Y2 is determined for both the first and second reserved second special symbol random numbers, a total of 10 special games will be played, from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or the small jackpot symbol Y2.

(3) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-shortening game state (the number of consecutive time-shortening settings is two) and the second low-probability time-shortening game state is set As with the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 3, when a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-shortening game state in which the number of consecutive time-shortening settings is two, the special game based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 is not executed and the normal game state is set again.
Furthermore, even if a losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the game ball entering the first starting winning slot 15 during the first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two), after the determination, the normal game state is forcibly set (see Figures 64 and 65), and the above-mentioned steps (1) to (3) are repeated, just like the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 3.

In this way, in pachinko machine P according to Application Example 4, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set and the number of consecutive time-saving settings is updated based on the determination of a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state without the need for a jackpot win or the execution of a special game. Furthermore, when transitioning from the second low-probability time-saving game state to the normal game state via a special game, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again when a predetermined jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X2) or small jackpot symbol (small jackpot symbol Y1) is determined based on the remaining second special symbol random number that was reserved and stored at that time. As a result, the number of times remaining until the upper limit of consecutive time-saving settings is reached changes when the second low-probability time-saving state is set, depending on the number of times the first low-probability time-saving state has been set in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving state. Also, since it is possible to re-transition to the second low-probability time-saving state depending on the lottery results at the time of transition to the normal game state, the number of times consecutive special games are executed changes during the second low-probability time-saving state (until the normal game state is set again), providing innovative gameplay that heightens the player's interest.

It is not necessary to set the game so that when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16, it will always result in a big win or a small win, and it may be set so that it will result in a loss with a predetermined probability.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 and a loss is determined, a specific loss pattern (loss pattern Z1) that sets the first time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state) may be determined.
In addition, when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 and a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol for setting the normal gaming state may be determined.
Furthermore, rather than setting the first time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state) based on the determination of a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15, it is also possible to provide a specific big win symbol or small win symbol that sets the first time-shortened game state when the game ball enters the first start winning port 15, and to set the first time-shortened game state based on the determination of the specific big win symbol or small win symbol.

(Another Application Example 5)
(Configuration and control overview)
The pachinko machine P according to Application Example 5 is also a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine. As shown in Fig. 66, the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 5 has a normal starting opening 70 into which game balls can enter, located at the bottom center of the game area 12. Only game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter this normal starting winning opening 70.

In addition, an entry device 80 through which game balls can enter is provided at the lower left of the normal starting opening 70. As shown in Figure 66, this entry device 80 is equipped with an entrance 81 through which game balls can enter, an opening/closing door 82 (a normal electric device) that opens and closes the entrance 81, a first flow-down passage 83 and a second flow-down passage 84 through which game balls that enter through the entrance 81 can flow down, a distribution member 85 that can be displaced to a first position or a second position and, when in the first position, distributes game balls that enter through the entrance 81 to the first flow-down passage 83 and, when in the second position, distributes game balls that enter through the entrance 81 to the second flow-down passage 84, a first gate 86 through which game balls flowing down the first flow-down passage 83 can pass, a second gate 87 through which game balls flowing down the second flow-down passage 84 can pass, and an outlet (not specifically shown) that discharges game balls that have passed through the first gate 86 and the second gate 87 to the back of the game board 11.
66, a first start winning opening 15 equipped with an openable/closeable door 90 and a second start winning opening 16 equipped with an openable/closeable door 91 are provided side by side in the center of the left part of the game area 12. In addition, an attacker device 17 having the same configuration as in Application Example 3 and Application Example 4 is provided in the lower left part of the game area 12.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to this other application example 5, as in other application examples 3 and 4, either a normal game state, a first low-probability time-shortened game state, or a second low-probability time-shortened game state is set, but in any game state, the game ball is instructed to be shot (left hit) toward the first game area 12a.
When a gaming ball flowing down the first gaming area 12a enters the normal symbol starting port 70, a lottery for a normal symbol is held, and if the lottery results in a winning combination, the opening and closing door 82 opens, allowing the gaming ball to enter the ball entrance 81 of the entry device 80, and the sorting member 85 stops at the first or second position, so that the gaming ball that entered through the ball entrance 81 is guided to the first flow-down passage 83 or the second flow-down passage 84. Which flow-down passage the gaming ball is guided to is predetermined according to the set gaming state.

Furthermore, when a gaming ball guided to the first flow-down passage 83 passes through the first gate 86, the opening/closing door 90 opens (the second start winning port 16 is opened), allowing the gaming ball to enter the second start winning port 16. Then, when two gaming balls enter the second start winning port 16, the opening/closing door 90 closes. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, the upper limit number of reserved first special chart random numbers that can be stored when a gaming ball enters the first start winning port 15 (the upper limit number of first reserved numbers) is set to one.
Furthermore, when the gaming ball guided to the second flow passage 84 passes through the second gate 87, the opening/closing door 91 opens (the first start winning port 15 is opened), allowing the gaming ball to enter the second start winning port 16. Then, when two gaming balls enter the second start winning port 16, the opening/closing door 91 closes. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, the upper limit number of reserved second special chart random numbers that can be stored when a gaming ball enters the second start winning port 16 (upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is set to one.

Furthermore, in pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, as shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the lottery for a normal symbol during the non-time-reduced play state (normal play state) is set to approximately 1/150, and the opening time for the opening/closing door 82 when a win occurs is 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds x 2 times). Furthermore, when a win occurs during the lottery for a normal symbol during the non-time-reduced play state, the sorting member 85 is designed to stop at the second position, and as a result, the game ball entering through the ball entry port 81 passes through the second gate 87, opening the second start entry port 16.

Also, as shown in Figure 67, the probability of winning in the lottery for a normal symbol during the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) is set to approximately 1/2, and the opening time for the opening/closing door 82 when a winning symbol occurs is 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds x 2 times). Furthermore, when a winning symbol occurs in the lottery for a normal symbol during the first time-saving game state, the sorting member 85 is designed to stay in the first position, and as a result, the game ball entering through the ball entrance 81 passes through the first gate 86, opening the first start winning entrance 15.

Also, as shown in Figure 67, the probability of winning in the lottery for a normal symbol during the second time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) is set to approximately 1/1.1, and the opening time for the opening/closing door 82 when a winning symbol occurs is 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds x 2 times). Furthermore, when a winning symbol occurs in the lottery for a normal symbol during the second time-saving game state, the sorting member 85 is designed to stop at the second position, and as a result, the game ball entering through the ball entrance 81 passes through the second gate 87, opening the second start winning entrance 16.

67, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 5, as in Application Examples 3 and 4, a jackpot can be won when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15, and when a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and when a jackpot is lost, a losing symbol Z1 is determined. The probability of winning a jackpot when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 is set to approximately 1/300 regardless of the game state.
When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, 10 rounds of play are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 1,000 game balls can be acquired.

Also, as shown in FIG. 67, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state or the time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state), the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving times is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination ends.
Furthermore, when a losing symbol Z1 is determined, if the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state, a second low-probability time-shortened game state (100 time-shortened games) is set after the determination. In contrast, if the game state at the time of the determination is the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the time-shortened game state is not set. In other words, if a losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the first low-probability time-shortened game state continues even after the determination.

Also, as shown in Figure 67, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16, it is possible to win a big win or a small win, and when a big win is won, a big win pattern X2 or X3 is determined, when a small win is won, a small win pattern Y1 or Y2 is determined, and when a loss occurs, a loss pattern Z2 is determined.
When the game ball enters the second start winning port 16, a big win is won (the big win symbol X2 or X3 is determined), or a special game is played through a small win game that is played based on the small win (the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined).

67, the probability of winning a big prize when a gaming ball enters the second start winning port 16 is set to approximately 1/300 regardless of the gaming state, and the probability of winning a small prize when a gaming ball enters the second start winning port 16 is set to approximately 149/300 regardless of the gaming state. In other words, the probability of winning a big prize or small prize and executing a special game when a gaming ball enters the second start winning port 16 is approximately 1/2.
67, the probability of winning the jackpot symbol X2 and the probability of winning the jackpot symbol X3 when a jackpot is won are both 1/2. Similarly, the probability of winning the small win symbol Y1 and the probability of winning the small win symbol Y2 when a small win is won are both 1/2.
When the big win symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and when the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, 10 rounds of play are executed during the special play based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls can be acquired.

Also, as shown in FIG. 67, when a big win pattern X2 or a small win pattern Y1 is determined, if the game state at the time of the determination is a normal game state, a second low-probability time-saving game state (number of time-saving times is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination ends, and if the game state at the time of the determination is a second low-probability time-saving game state, a normal game state is set after the special game based on the determination ends.
67, when the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state or the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state (the number of time-shortened times is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination is completed. In other words, when the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined during the normal game state or the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state and the number of time-shortened times are set (reset during the second low-probability time-shortened game state).

Also, as shown in Figure 67, if a losing symbol X2 is determined, and the game state at the time of determination is the normal game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state (999 time-saving cycles) is set after the determination. In contrast, if the game state at the time of determination is the second low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is not set. In other words, if a losing symbol Z2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state will continue even after the determination.

(Gameability of Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 5)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 5, as described above, either the normal game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state), the first low-probability time-shortened game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-shortened game state), or the second low-probability time-shortened game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state) is set, and the game progresses.

Immediately after shipping from the factory or in the initial state after resetting, the normal game mode is set.
During normal play, game balls can enter the normal start winning opening 70, and a lottery for a normal symbol is held based on the game balls entering the normal start winning opening 70. If a winning ball is selected in the lottery for the normal symbol, as described above, the opening and closing door 82 is opened, allowing the game ball that entered the entry device 70 to pass through the second gate 87, and the second start winning opening 16 is opened when the game ball enters the opened second start winning opening 16. Then, when one game ball enters the opened second start winning opening 16, the second start winning opening 16 is closed, and a winning or losing lottery is held once based on the game ball that entered.
In this lottery, if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and after the special game based on that determination ends, the second low-probability time-saving game state (100 time-saving times) is set (see Figures 67 and 68).In contrast, if a loss occurs, the losing symbol Z1 is determined, and after that determination, the first low-probability time-saving game state (999 time-saving times) is set (see Figures 67 and 68).

(1) When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set During the second low-probability time-saving game state, as during the normal game state, game balls can enter the normal symbol start winning opening 70, and when a winning normal symbol is selected in the lottery based on the game ball entering the normal symbol start winning opening 70, the opening/closing door 82 opens, allowing the game ball that entered the entry device 70 to pass through the second gate 87, and the game ball passing through the gate opens the second start winning opening 16. Then, when one game ball enters the opened second start winning opening 16, the second start winning opening 16 is closed, and a winning/losing lottery is held once based on the game ball that entered.

In this lottery, if a jackpot is won, jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined; if a small jackpot is won, small jackpot symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined; and if a loss occurs, small jackpot symbol Z2 is determined (see Figures 67 and 68). If jackpot symbol X3 or small jackpot symbol Y2 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again after the special game based on that determination ends (see Figures 67 and 68). In contrast, if jackpot symbol X2 or small jackpot symbol Y1 is determined, the normal game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends (see Figures 67 and 68). If a loss symbol Z2 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state continues even after that determination ends (see Figures 67 and 68).

Since the number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state is set to 100, the second low-probability time-saving game state will end if the above-mentioned win/loss lottery is performed 100 times without winning a jackpot. However, since the second start winning slot 16 is frequently opened during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the probability of winning a jackpot or small jackpot in the win/loss lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning slot 16 is set to approximately 1/2, the second low-probability time-saving game state will essentially continue until a jackpot or small jackpot is won again.
Then, once the second low-probability time-shortened game state is set, the second low-probability time-shortened game state will be repeatedly set via special games based on winning a big win or a small win, unless the big win pattern X2 or the small win pattern Y1 is determined in the above-mentioned win/lose lottery.

On the other hand, if a regular game state is set after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or the small jackpot symbol Y1 has ended, a win/loss lottery is held based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning slot 16, as described above, if the regular game symbol is a win in the lottery. If the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state (100 time-saving times) is set again, and if a losing symbol Z1 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set.

(2) When the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state is set As described above, when a losing symbol Z1 is determined in the normal gaming state, the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state is set.
During the first low-probability time-saving game state, as during the normal game state and the second low-probability time-saving game state, game balls can enter the normal symbol start entry slot 70. If a game ball enters the normal symbol start entry slot 70 and a winning symbol is selected, the opening/closing door 82 opens, allowing the game ball entering the entry device 70 to pass through the first gate 86. The first start entry slot 15 opens when two game balls enter the opened first start entry slot 15. The first start entry slot 15 then closes, and the winning/losing lottery and variation are performed based on the first game ball that entered. The first special symbol random number obtained based on the second game ball is reserved and stored. Furthermore, when the ongoing variation ends, the winning/losing lottery and variation are performed based on the reserved and stored first special symbol random number.

Then, in the lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start winning slot 15, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a second low-probability time-shortened gaming state is set after the special game based on that determination ends (see Figures 67 and 68). The flow of the game after the second low-probability time-shortened gaming state is set is the same as (1).
In contrast, if the winning/losing lottery results in a loss and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the time-saving game state is not set, and the first low-probability time-saving game state continues as is. Also, by performing one winning/losing lottery, the remaining number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state decreases by one.

Here, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, two game balls enter the first start winning slot 15 while it is open due to the determination of a winning normal symbol lottery, so one first special symbol random number is maintained in a reserved state. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, as described above, the number of time-saving rounds in the first low-probability time-saving game state is set to an odd number, 999. Then, if 999 winning/losing rounds are performed without a jackpot being won during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set (see FIG. 68), but at this point one first special symbol random number is reserved and stored.
Then, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number stored in reserve at the time the normal game state is set, and if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends (see Figures 67 and 68). Furthermore, even if the win/loss lottery results in a loss and the loss symbol Z1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after that determination (see Figures 67 and 68).
In other words, after the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set, if the lottery is held 999 times without a jackpot being won, the game state thereafter will always be set to the second low-probability time-shortened game state, which is more advantageous to the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 5, when a predetermined number of win/loss lotteries are performed without a jackpot being won in a predetermined game state (first low-probability time-saving game state), a specific game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) that is highly advantageous to the player is set, regardless of whether a specific jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1) or a specific loss symbol (loss symbol Z1) is determined in the next win/loss lottery. This makes it possible to set an upper limit (a so-called ceiling) on the number of win/loss lotteries before transitioning to a specific game state, thereby providing a novel gameplay element that heightens the player's interest.
In addition, when a miss occurs based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16, only the miss pattern Z2 is determined, which is determined to set the first low-probability time-shortened game state (999 times of time-shortened game), but this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be possible to determine the miss pattern Z1, which is determined to set the second low-probability time-shortened game state (100 times of time-shortened game).

(Another Application Example 6)
(Configuration and control overview)
Although not specifically shown, the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6 is not a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed machine, but is configured so that special games are only played based on winning a jackpot, similar to the above-mentioned embodiment.

(Outline of the structure within the play area 12)
Within the game area 12 of the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, similar to the above-mentioned embodiment, there are provided a general winning port 14, a first start winning port 15, a second start winning port 16, a movable piece 16b, an attacker device 17, an outlet 19, a gate 20, and a performance display device 21 (see Figure 69).
Note that the structure and installation position of some of these devices and members are different from those in the above-described embodiment.
The structure within the game area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6 will be described below, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In a pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, as shown in FIG. 69, the gate 20 is located in the upper right corner of the effect display device 21 (above the second game area 12b). The gate 20 is designed so that only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, almost all game balls that enter the second game area 12b pass through the gate 20.

As shown in Figure 69, below the gate 20, a second starting winning opening 16 and a flat movable piece 16b (a normal electric device) that can be protruded and retracted into the game board 11 are arranged side by side.
The upper surface of the movable piece 16b is formed so as to slope downward from the right end to the left end when protruding from the game board 11. The right end of the movable piece 16b is located directly below the gate 20, and the second start winning hole 16 is located to the left of the left end of the movable piece 16b. The second start winning hole 16 is cup-shaped and opens upward, so that a game ball that reaches the opening will enter the second start winning hole 16.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, when the movable piece 16b protrudes from the game board 11, the upper surface of this movable piece 16b functions as a guide member that guides the game ball to the opening of the second start winning opening 16, thereby enabling the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16 (see FIG. 70(b)). On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b is sunk into the game board 11, the movable piece 16b cannot guide the game ball to the opening of the second start winning opening 16, making it impossible for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16 (see FIG. 70(a)). In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, the length from the right end of the movable piece 16b to the second start winning port 16 is approximately the same as the width of the flow passage through which the game balls flow down within the second game area 12b, so when the movable piece 16b is protruding, almost all of the game balls that enter the second game area 12b and pass through the gate 20 can enter the second start winning port 16.

Then, as in the above-described embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol is conducted, and the variable display of the normal symbol begins. If the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a win, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, after which the winning symbol is displayed statically, and the above-described movable piece 16b is in a protruding state for a predetermined operating time (see FIG. 70(b)). On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a loss, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, after which the losing symbol is displayed statically, and the above-described movable piece 16b remains immersed in the gaming board 11 (see FIG. 70(a)).
In addition, only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the second start winning port 16, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through.
In addition, when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16, a predetermined number of game balls (one in another application example 6) are paid out.

69, an attacker device 17 is provided below the second start winning opening 16 and the movable piece 16b. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, unlike the above-mentioned embodiment, the special area 57, the general area 58, and the sorting member 59 are not provided within the big winning opening 18.
Only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the big prize opening 18, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, after the special game that is executed based on the winning of the jackpot is completed, the game state is set according to the type of jackpot pattern that was determined at the time of the winning of the jackpot.

(Control and Game Overview)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, one of the following game states is set: a normal game state which is a game state combining a low probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state; a first low-probability time-shortened game state which is a game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-shortened game state; a second low-probability time-shortened game state which is a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state; or a high-probability time-shortened game state which is a game state combining a high-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the non-time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state, and the second time-shortened game state are set so that the frequency of game balls entering the second start winning hole 16 (the difficulty of ball entry, in other words, the frequency of winning/losing lottery based on game balls entering the second start winning hole 16) is different from each other. The specific settings will be described in detail later.
As in the above-described embodiment, the normal game mode is set in the initial state after shipping from the factory or after resetting.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning port 15, and game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the second start winning port 16, and enter the large winning port 18.
During the normal game state, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot) so that the game ball will enter the first start winning port 15, and during the first low probability time-shortened game state, the second low probability time-shortened game state, the high probability time-shortened game state and the special game, the game ball will pass through the gate 20 and enter the second start winning port 16, and the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right shot) so that the game ball will enter the large winning port 18.

71(a), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, a jackpot can be won in a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning slot 15, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined. The probability of winning a jackpot when the gaming state at the time of the win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning slot 15 is a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low-probability time-shortened gaming state, second low-probability time-shortened gaming state) is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a jackpot when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-shortened gaming state) is set to approximately 3/300 (i.e., approximately 1/100).
In addition, the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X1 and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 are both set to 50/100 (i.e., 50%).
Furthermore, if the result of the above-mentioned lottery is a loss, a loss symbol Z1 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 (the upper limit of the first reserved numbers) is set to 4. The upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers is not limited to this.

71(a), a jackpot can also be won in a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 16, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X3 is determined. The probability of winning a jackpot when the gaming state at the time of the win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 15 is a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low-probability time-shortened gaming state, second low-probability time-shortened gaming state) is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a jackpot when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-shortened gaming state) is set to approximately 3/300 (1/100).
In addition, the probability of winning the jackpot symbol X3 is set to 100/100 (i.e., 100%).
Furthermore, if the result of the above-mentioned lottery is a loss, a loss symbol Z2 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of reserved second special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the second start winning slot 16 (the upper limit of the second reserved numbers) is set to 4. The upper limit of the number of reserved second special random numbers is not limited to this.

As shown in Figure 71 (a), in either case where a jackpot is won and jackpot patterns X1 or X2 are determined, five rounds of play are played during the special game based on that determination, and the rounds end when either the large prize opening 18 is open for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18, and approximately 500 game balls can be won.
Furthermore, when the big win symbol X3 is determined, the above-mentioned round game is executed 10 times, and approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired.

(General overview of general games)
Next, an outline of the normal game executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6 will be described.
As shown in Figure 71 (c), during the non-time-saving game state (normal game state), the probability of winning by lottery of normal symbols is set to approximately 1/1.2, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds, and the operation time of movable piece 16b when the lottery of normal symbols is a winning one (the time during which movable piece 16b is in a protruding state) is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not specifically shown, the same settings are also made during special games.
Furthermore, during the first time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is set to approximately 1/1.2, the same as during the non-time-shortened game state, the normal symbol variation time is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a normal symbol is drawn and winning is set to 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-shortened game state.
Furthermore, during the second time-shortened game state (during the second low-probability time-shortened game state, during the high-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1, which is higher than during the non-time-shortened game state and the first time-shortened game state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortened game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a normal symbol is drawn and winning is set to 5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortened game state.

In other words, during both the non-time-saving game mode and the special game mode, there is a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through gate 20, and there are many opportunities for movable piece 16b to be in a protruding state. However, because the normal symbol change time is 5 seconds and the movable piece 16b operation time is 0.05 seconds, although the time it takes for movable piece 16b to change from a recessed state to a protruding state is long (the interval from one protruding state to the next protruding state is long), the time that movable piece 16b remains in a protruding state is extremely short. Therefore, during the non-time-saving game mode, movable piece 16b is almost always in a recessed state, making it nearly impossible for a game ball that enters second game area 12b to enter second start winning slot 16.

In contrast, during the first time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is the same as during the non-time-shortened game state, so there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to be in a protruding state, just as during the non-time-shortened game state. Furthermore, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state, and the movable piece 16b operates for 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-shortened game state. Therefore, although the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to change from a recessed state to a protruding state is short (the interval from one protruding state to the next protruding state is short), the time the movable piece 16b remains in a protruding state is long. Therefore, during the first time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is almost always in a protruding state, and there is a high possibility that a game ball that enters the second game area 12b will enter the second start winning slot 16.

Furthermore, during the second time-shortened game state (during the second low-probability time-shortened game state and the high-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is higher than during the non-time-shortened game state or the first time-shortened game state, so there are many opportunities for movable piece 16b to be in a protruding state. Furthermore, since the normal symbol fluctuation time is the same as during the first time-shortened game state (0.5 seconds), and the operating time of movable piece 16b is the same as during the first time-shortened game state (5 seconds), similar to during the first time-shortened game state, the time it takes for movable piece 16b to change from a recessed state to a protruding state is short (the interval from one protruding state to the next protruding state is short), but the time movable piece 16b is maintained in a protruding state is long. Therefore, during the second time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is more likely to be in a protruding state than during the first time-shortened game state, and the possibility that a game ball that enters the second game area 12b will enter the second start winning hole 16 is higher than during the first time-shortened game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 6, the probability of winning by drawing a normal pattern is set high overall in all of the non-time-saving play state, the first time-saving play state and the second time-saving play state, but by varying the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the operation time of the movable piece 16b, the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 (i.e., the frequency of the game ball entering the second start winning port 16, in other words, the frequency of the winning/losing lottery being held based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16) is changed.
In other words, during the first time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is more likely to be maintained in a protruding state than in the non-time-shortened game state, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning port 16, and during the second time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is even more likely to be maintained in a protruding state than in the first time-shortened game state, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning port 16.
Therefore, during the second time-shortened game state, more opportunities for winning or losing lottery can be acquired while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses than during the non-time-shortened game state and the first time-shortened game state, and during the first time-shortened game state, more opportunities for winning or losing lottery can be acquired while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses than during the non-time-shortened game state.

(Outline of game state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, one of the game states is set to a normal game state, a first low-probability time-shortened game state, a second low-probability time-shortened game state, or a high-probability time-shortened game state.
Specifically, as long as the game ball is shot toward the first game area 12a as instructed during normal game mode, it is possible to win a jackpot through a lottery based on whether the game ball enters the first start winning port 15, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 will be determined.
71(b), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the game state after the special game ends is set to the low-probability game state, and is also set to the second time-shortened game state, thereby setting the second low-probability time-shortened game state. When the second low-probability time-shortened game state is set, the number of time-shortened times is set to 100.
In other words, after the second low-probability time-shortened game state is set, the second low-probability time-shortened game state continues until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 without a jackpot being won (i.e., until the results of the win/lose lottery are derived 100 times).

71(b), when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the game state after the special game ends is set to the high probability game state, and is also set to the second time-saving game state, thereby setting the high probability time-saving game state. When the high probability time-saving game state is set, both the high probability number of times and the time-saving number of times are set to 100.
That is, after the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the high-probability time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 without a jackpot being won (that is, until the result of the win/lose lottery is derived 100 times).

Furthermore, during both the second low-probability time-shortened game state and the high-probability time-shortened game state, as described above, the movable piece 16b is almost in a protruding state, and there is a high possibility that a game ball that enters the second game area 12b will enter the second start winning hole 16. Therefore, as long as a game ball is shot toward the second game area 12b as instructed during the second low-probability time-shortened game state or the high-probability time-shortened game state, the game ball will enter the second start winning hole 16. Then, in a win/loss lottery based on this ball entering, it is possible to win a jackpot, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3 is determined.
Then, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the jackpot pattern X3 is determined, the game state after the special game ends is set to a high probability game state, and is also set to a second time-shortened game state, thereby setting the high probability time-shortened game state, and the number of high probability plays and the number of time-shortened plays are both set to 100.

Furthermore, after the second low-probability time-shortened game state is set, if the results of the lottery for winning or losing all 100 times are other than a jackpot (i.e., a miss), the second time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state, and a normal game state is set.
Similarly, after the high probability time-shortened game state is set, if the results of the winning/losing lottery are other than a jackpot all 100 times, the high probability game state is changed to a low probability game state, and the second time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state, thereby setting a normal game state.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the normal game state is set after the RAM is cleared. After the special game based on the jackpot symbol X1 ends, a second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 without a jackpot being won, the normal game state is set. After the special game based on the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 ends, a high-probability time-saving game state is set, and when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 without a jackpot being won, the normal game state is set.
71(b), if the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the predetermined number of times for activating time-saving (500 times in other application example 6) without winning a jackpot after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set (i.e., if the results of all 500 win/lose lotteries after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set are other than a jackpot), the low-probability game state remains as is, and the non-time-saving game state is changed to the first time-saving game state, thereby setting the first low-probability time-saving game state. When the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving times is set to 600.
In other words, after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 600 without a jackpot being won (i.e., until all 600 win/lose lotteries result in something other than a jackpot).

Furthermore, during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, as during the second low-probability time-shortened game state and the high-probability time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is in a protruding state, and there is a high possibility that a game ball that enters the second game area 12b will enter the second start winning hole 16. Therefore, as long as the game ball is shot toward the second game area 12b as instructed during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the game ball will enter the second start winning hole 16. Then, in a win/loss lottery based on this ball entry, it is possible to win a jackpot, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3 is determined.
In contrast to this, in the first low-probability time-shortened game state, if the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 600 without winning a jackpot (i.e., if all 600 results of the winning/losing lottery are other than a jackpot), the first time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state, and a normal game state is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, a time-saving activation counter for counting the number of times (500 times) time-saving is activated, which will result in the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) being set, is configured using a specified memory area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of this time-saving activation counter is reset when any one of the following reset conditions is met: RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation, a special game ends, or a first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is set. When the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the time-saving activation counter starts counting, and this counting is executed only during the normal game state and the second low-probability time-saving game state (i.e., during the low-probability game state).

Specifically, when the RAM is cleared (reset), the game state thereafter is set to the normal game state (low probability game state), and from this point on, the time-saving activation counter starts counting.
Furthermore, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 is finished, the subsequent game state is set to a second low-probability time-saving game state (low-probability game state), and from this point on, counting by the time-saving activation number counter is started.
On the other hand, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 ends, the game state thereafter is set to a high probability time-saving game state (high probability game state). Therefore, the time-saving activation counter does not start counting from the point when the special game ends, but starts counting from the point when the high probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, a time-saving activation counter counts each time the special symbol is varied. When the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the above-mentioned time-saving activation number, the variation of the special symbol at that time ends (i.e., the special symbol is stopped and displayed), and a predetermined stopped display time has elapsed, and a first low-probability time-saving game state is set.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, when the number of times the special pattern changes after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set (the count value obtained by counting the number of times time-saving is activated) reaches the number of times time-saving is activated, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set without winning a jackpot or executing a special game, which makes it possible to provide innovative gameplay and increase the interest of the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) can be set only once after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the special game based on winning a jackpot has ended until the next jackpot is won.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the number of time-saving activations (500 times) after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving game state cannot be set again until the next jackpot is won.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter is reset by setting the first low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving activation counter is set to stop counting until the next jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6, it is not specified that a time-saving game state be set for any of the losing symbols (Z1, Z2). Therefore, after a losing symbol stops, the game state does not change, and the game state at the time the losing symbol was determined continues.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6, the number of consecutive time-saving settings or the number of consecutive probability-changing settings are not set as in the above-described embodiment, and whenever jackpot pattern X1 is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends, and whenever jackpot pattern X2 or X3 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends.

(Outline of transmission of information regarding game play status)
The main CPU 101 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6 transmits, at various times, information relating to the game state at that time (hereinafter also referred to as game state designation information) to the sub-control board 300 .

Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 6, 13 types of game state designation information are provided: normal A designation information, second low-probability time-saving designation information, designation information for a predetermined number of times before the end of the second low-probability time-saving time, second low-probability final time-saving designation information, high-probability time-saving pending designation information, high-probability time-saving designation information, designation information for a predetermined number of times before the end of the high-probability time-saving time, high-probability final time-saving designation information, designation information for a first low-probability time-saving time, first low-probability time-saving designation information, designation information for a predetermined number of times before the end of the first low-probability time-saving time, first low-probability final time-saving designation information, and normal B designation information.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, when the above-mentioned game state designation information transmitted to the sub-control board 300 is changed after a special symbol is displayed in a stopped state and the stopped display time has elapsed (for example, when the game state is changed from a second low-probability time-saving game state to a normal game state), the main CPU 101 transmits a game state change designation command including information that the game state designation information will be changed when the above-mentioned stopped display time has elapsed (i.e., when the special symbol displayed in a stopped state is confirmed).
In addition, when the special game ends, the main CPU 101 transmits a post-special game game state designation command including information on the game state to be set thereafter.
Furthermore, the main CPU 101 transmits a specification designation command including model information of the pachinko machine P at the following times: when a predetermined customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner; when the special symbol starts to vary; when the special symbol is displayed in a static manner and the static display time has elapsed; when the opening process starts when a special game is played; when the round game starts when a special game is played (when the large prize opening 18 opens); when the round game ends when a special game is played (when the large prize opening 18 closes); when the ending process starts when a special game is played; when the RAM is cleared; and when the power is turned on (when power is restored after a power outage). The above-mentioned times at which the specification designation command is transmitted are collectively referred to as the specification designation command transmission times.
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, predetermined game state designation information is included in the game state change designation command, the game state designation command after special play, or the spec designation command, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(1) Normal A Designation Information Normal A designation information indicates that the game is currently in the normal game state (hereinafter also referred to as normal game state A), which is set after the RAM is cleared and the second low-probability time-saving game state has ended without a jackpot being won, or after the high-probability time-saving game state has ended without a jackpot being won.
The normal A designation information is included in a game state change designation command that is sent when the special symbol is displayed stationary and the stop display time has elapsed in the 100th variation that has been reached since the second low-probability time-shortened game state was set without a jackpot being won (i.e., a variation in which the second low-probability time-shortened game state ends without a jackpot being won), or when the special symbol is displayed stationary and the stop display time has elapsed in the 100th variation that has been reached since the high-probability time-shortened game state was set without a jackpot being won (i.e., a variation in which the high-probability time-shortened game state ends without a jackpot being won), and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the normal A designation information is included in a specification designation command that is sent when the specification designation command transmission time arrives during normal gaming state A, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, each time a special symbol starts varying during normal gaming state A, the normal A designation information is included in a specification designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, if a power outage occurs during normal gaming state A, the normal A designation information is included in a specification designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300 when the power is restored, or when the RAM is cleared and the normal gaming state A is established, and the normal A designation information is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, if a jackpot is won during normal gaming state A and a special game is executed, the normal A designation information is included in a specification designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of an opening process, the start of a round of game, the start of an ending process, etc.

(2) Second Low-Probability Time-Shortening Designation Information The second low-probability time-shortening designation information indicates that the special pattern has changed from the 1st to the 95th time since the second low-probability time-shortening game state was set.
The second low probability time-shortening designation information is included in a post-special game state designation command that is sent when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 ends, and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the second low-probability time-shortening designation information is included in a designation command that is sent when the designation command transmission time arrives during the first to 95th variations of the special symbol after the second low-probability time-shortening game state is established, and is sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, each time the first to 95th variations of the special symbol begin after the second low-probability time-shortening game state is established, the second low-probability time-shortening designation information is included in a designation command that is sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, if a power interruption occurs during the first to 95th variations of the special symbol after the second low-probability time-shortening game state is established, the second low-probability time-shortening designation information is included in a designation command that is sent to the sub-control board 300 when the power interruption is restored. In addition, if a jackpot is won in the first to 95th draws after the second low-probability time-shortening game state is set and a special game is executed, the second low-probability time-shortening designation information is included in the specification designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc.

(3) Information specifying a predetermined number of times before the end of the second low-probability time-saving game The information specifying a predetermined number of times before the end of the second low-probability time-saving game indicates that the special pattern has changed 96 to 99 times since the second low-probability time-saving game state was set (i.e., the change is four, three, two, or one times before the last change of the second low-probability time-saving game state).
The information specifying the predetermined number of times before the end of the second low-probability time-saving game state is included in a game state change specification command that is sent when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state and the stopped display time has elapsed, at the 95th change after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set to have the predetermined number of times before the end of the game, and the designation information is included in the designation command that is sent when the designation command transmission time occurs during the 96th to 99th variation of the special symbol after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the designation information is sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, each time the special symbol begins to vary 96th to 99th times after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set to have the predetermined number of times before the end of the game, and the designation information is sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, if a power interruption occurs during the 96th to 99th variation of the special symbol after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set to have the predetermined number of times before the end of the game, and the designation information is sent to the sub-control board 300 when the power interruption is restored. In addition, if a jackpot is won in the 96th to 99th draws after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set and a special game is executed, information specifying the number of times before the end of the second low-probability time-saving game is included in the specification specification command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc.

(4) Second low probability time-saving final designation information The second low probability time-saving final designation information indicates that this is the 100th change of the special pattern since the second low probability time-saving game state was set (i.e., that this is the final change of the second low probability time-saving game state).
The second low probability time-saving final designation information is included in a game state change designation command that is sent when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state and the stopped display time has elapsed at the 99th change after the second low probability time-saving game state is set, and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the second low-probability time-shortening final designation information is included in a designation command that is sent when the designation command transmission time arrives at the 100th variation of the special symbol after the second low-probability time-shortening game state is established, and is sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, at the time when the 100th variation of the special symbol begins after the second low-probability time-shortening game state is established, the second low-probability time-shortening final designation information is included in the designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, if a power interruption occurs during the 100th variation of the special symbol after the second low-probability time-shortening game state is established, the second low-probability time-shortening final designation information is included in the designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 when the power interruption is restored. In addition, if a jackpot is won in the 100th draw after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set and a special game is executed, the second low-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the specification designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc.

(5) High-probability time-saving reserved designation information The high-probability time-saving reserved designation information indicates that the special pattern is changing based on the reserved memory (hereinafter also referred to as high-probability reserved memory) of the second special pattern random number stored at the time the high-probability time-saving game state is set.
The high probability time-shortening hold designation information is included in a post-special game state designation command that is sent when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X2 or X3 ends, and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the high-probability time-shortening hold designation information is included in the designation command that is sent when the time for sending the designation command is reached during the variation of the special symbol based on the above-mentioned high-security hold, and is sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, each time the variation of the special symbol based on the high-security hold starts, the high-probability time-shortening hold designation information is included in the designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300. Also, for example, if a power outage occurs during the variation of the special symbol based on the above-mentioned high-security hold, the high-probability time-shortening hold designation information is included in the designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 when the power outage is restored. Also, when a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery based on the above-mentioned high-security hold and a special game is played, the high-probability time-shortening hold designation information is included in the designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc.

(6) High-probability time-saving designation information The high-probability time-saving designation information indicates that after the change of the special pattern based on the above-mentioned high-security hold has ended, the number of times the special pattern will change after the high-probability time-saving game state is set will be up to 95 times.
The high probability time-shortening designation information is included in a game status change designation command that is sent when the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state and the stopped display time has elapsed, in the case of a change in the special pattern based on the latest stored hold among the above-mentioned high-security holds, and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the high-probability time-saving designation information is included in the designation command that is sent when the designation command transmission time occurs between the next change after the end of the special symbol change based on the high-probability hold and the 95th special symbol change since the high-probability time-saving game state was established, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, if four high-probability hold-ups are stored when the high-probability time-saving game state is established, the high-probability time-saving designation information is included in the designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300 each time the fifth through 95th special symbol changes begin since the high-probability time-saving game state was established. Also, for example, in the above case, if a power interruption occurs during the fifth through 95th special symbol changes since the high-probability time-saving game state was established, the high-probability time-saving designation information is included in the designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300 when power is restored. In addition, in the above case, when a jackpot is won in the 5th to 95th draw after the high-probability time-saving game state is set and a special game is executed, high-probability time-saving designation information is included in the specification designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc.

(7) Information specifying a predetermined number of times before the end of high probability time-saving The information specifying a predetermined number of times before the end of high probability time-saving indicates that the special pattern has changed 96th to 99th times since the high probability time-saving game state was set (i.e., that it is the change 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, or 1 time before the last change of the high probability time-saving game state).
The information specifying the predetermined number of times before the high probability time-saving end is included in a game state change specification command that is sent when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state and the stopped display time has elapsed at the 95th change after the high probability time-saving game state is set, and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the information specifying the predetermined number of times before the high-probability time-saving end is included in the specification designation command that is sent when the specification designation command is sent during the 96th to 99th variation of the special symbol after the high-probability time-saving game state is established, and is sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, each time the variation of the special symbol begins for the 96th to 99th time after the high-probability time-saving game state is established, the information specifying the predetermined number of times before the high-probability time-saving end is included in the specification designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300. Furthermore, for example, if a power interruption occurs during the 96th to 99th variation of the special symbol after the high-probability time-saving game state is established, the information specifying the predetermined number of times before the high-probability time-saving end is included in the specification designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the time when the power interruption is restored. In addition, if a jackpot is won in the 96th to 99th draw after the high-probability time-saving game state is set and a special game is executed, information specifying the number of times before the high-probability time-saving end is specified is included in the specification specification command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc.

(8) High-Probability Time-Shortening Final Designation Information The high-probability time-shortening final designation information indicates that this is the 100th change in the special pattern since the high-probability time-shortening game state was set (i.e., that this is the final change in the high-probability time-shortening game state).
The high probability time-saving final designation information is included in a game state change designation command that is sent when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state and the stopped display time has elapsed at the 99th change after the high probability time-saving game state is set, and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the high-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the designation command that is sent when the designation command transmission time occurs during the 100th variation of the special symbol after the high-probability time-saving game state is established, and is then transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, when the 100th variation of the special symbol begins after the high-probability time-saving game state is established, the high-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, when a power outage occurs during the 100th variation of the special symbol after the high-probability time-saving game state is established, the high-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300 when the power is restored. Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the 100th win/loss lottery after the high-probability time-saving game state is established and a special game is executed, the high-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, or the like.

(9) Designation information before reaching first low-probability time-saving state The designation information before reaching first low-probability time-saving state indicates that the special pattern will change for the 500th time since the normal game state (normal game state A) or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game ends (i.e., the change will occur immediately before the first low-probability time-saving game state is set).
The designation information before the first low-probability time-saving state is reached is included in a game state change designation command that is sent when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state and the stopped display time has elapsed, at the 499th change after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game ends, and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, when a power outage occurs during the 499th change of the special pattern after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game ends, at the time of power recovery, the specification information before the first low-probability time-saving state is reached is included in the specification specification command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, if a jackpot is won in the 499th draw after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game has ended and the special game is executed, the specification designation information before the first low-probability time-saving state is reached is included in the specification designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc.

(10) First Low-Probability Time-Shortening Designation Information The first low-probability time-shortening designation information indicates that the special pattern has changed from the 1st to 595th time since the first low-probability time-shortening game state was set.
The first low probability time-shortening designation information is included in a game state change designation command that is sent when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state and the stopped display time has elapsed, at the 500th change after the normal game state is set after the RAM is cleared, or at the 500th change after the normal game state or the second low probability time-shortening game state is set after the special game ends, and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the first low-probability time-shortening designation information is included in a designation command that is sent when the designation command transmission time arrives during the first to 595th fluctuations of the special symbol after the first low-probability time-shortening game state is established, and is sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, each time the first to 595th fluctuations of the special symbol begin after the first low-probability time-shortening game state is established, the first low-probability time-shortening designation information is included in a designation command that is sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, when a power interruption occurs during the first to 595th fluctuations of the special symbol after the first low-probability time-shortening game state is established, the first low-probability time-shortening designation information is included in a designation command that is sent to the sub-control board 300 when the power interruption is restored. Furthermore, if a jackpot is won in the first to 595th draws after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set and a special game is executed, the first low-probability time-saving designation information is included in the specification designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc.

(11) Information specifying a predetermined number of times before the end of the first low-probability time-saving game The information specifying a predetermined number of times before the end of the first low-probability time-saving game indicates that the special pattern has changed 596 to 599 times since the first low-probability time-saving game state was set (i.e., that the change is four, three, two, or one times before the last change of the first low-probability time-saving game state).
The designation information for the predetermined number of times before the end of the first low-probability time-saving game state is included in a game state change designation command that is sent when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state and the stopped display time has elapsed, at the 595th change after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set to have the first low-probability time-saving game state end a predetermined number of times before the specified number of times is included in the specification designation command that is sent when the specification designation command transmission time occurs during the 596th to 599th variation of the special symbol after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the specification designation command is sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, each time the special symbol begins to vary 596th to 599th times after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving game state end a predetermined number of times before the specified number of times is included in the specification designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300. Furthermore, for example, when a power interruption occurs during the 596th to 599th variation of the special symbol after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving game state end a predetermined number of times before the specified number of times is included in the specification designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the time when the power interruption is restored. In addition, if a jackpot is won in the 596th to 599th draw after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set and a special game is executed, information specifying the number of times before the end of the first low-probability time-saving game is included in the specification specification command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc.

(12) First low probability time-saving final designation information The first low probability time-saving final designation information indicates that this is the 600th change of the special pattern since the first low probability time-saving game state was set (i.e., that this is the final change of the first low probability time-saving game state).
The first low-probability time-saving final designation information is included in a game state change designation command that is sent when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state and the stopped display time has elapsed at the 599th change since the first low-probability time-saving game state was set, and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the first low-probability time-shortening final designation information is included in a designation command that is sent when the designation command transmission time arrives at the 600th variation of the special symbol after the first low-probability time-shortening game state is established, and is sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, at the time when the 600th variation of the special symbol begins after the first low-probability time-shortening game state is established, the first low-probability time-shortening final designation information is included in the designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, when a power interruption occurs during the 600th variation of the special symbol after the first low-probability time-shortening game state is established, the first low-probability time-shortening final designation information is included in the designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 when the power interruption is restored. In addition, if a jackpot is won in the 600th draw after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set and a special game is executed, the first low-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the specification designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc.

(13) Normal B Designation Information Normal B designation information indicates that the player is in the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as normal gaming state B), which is set after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state ends without winning a jackpot.
The normal B designation information is included in the game state change designation command that is sent when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state and the stopped display time has elapsed in the 600th variation that has occurred since the first low-probability time-shortened game state was set without a jackpot being won (i.e., a variation that ends the first low-probability time-shortened game state without a jackpot being won), and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the normal B designation information is included in a specification designation command that is sent when the specification designation command transmission time comes during normal gaming state B, and is sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, each time a special symbol starts varying during normal gaming state B, the normal B designation information is included in a specification designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300. Also, for example, if a power outage occurs during normal gaming state B, the normal B designation information is included in a specification designation command when the power is restored, and sent to the sub-control board 300. Also, for example, if a jackpot is won during normal gaming state B and a special game is played, the normal B designation information is included in a specification designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of an opening process, the start of a round of game, the start of an ending process, etc.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the above-mentioned game state designation information corresponding to the set game state, the number of times the special symbols change, etc. is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100, and in the event of a power outage, the stored data in the main RAM 103, including the above-mentioned game state designation information, is backed up. As a result, the above-mentioned game state designation information corresponding to the game state set before the power outage, the number of times the special symbols change, etc., can be acquired when the power is restored and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Then, when the sub-CPU 301 receives the game state designation information, it stores the received game state designation information in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 303 in the sub-control board 300 .

As described above, with the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6, game state designation information corresponding to the set game state and the number of times the special symbol has changed is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at each of the above-mentioned times. This allows the sub-control board 300 to grasp the game state set at each of the above-mentioned times and the number of times the special symbol has changed since that game state was set, and makes it possible to execute effects corresponding to the game state and the number of times the special symbol has changed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, at the time of power recovery (at the time when the power supply of the pachinko machine P is turned on from off), the game status designation information before the power failure occurs is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
In the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6, if an unexpected power outage occurs in the pachinko machine P due to, for example, a lightning strike, the data stored in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100 is backed up, but the data stored in the sub-RAM 303 of the sub-control board 300 is not backed up. Therefore, if the sub-control board 300 is reset due to the above-mentioned power outage, the data stored in the sub-RAM 303 of the sub-control board 300 is cleared. This also clears the game state designation information stored in the sub-RAM 303 as described above. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6, one-way communication is possible from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, so the main control board 300 cannot detect that a reset has occurred in the sub-control board 300. Therefore, if a power outage occurs, when power is restored, the main CPU 101 transmits the game state designation information stored in the main RAM 103 to the sub-control board 300, which enables the sub-control board 300 to grasp the game state designation information before the power outage. As a result, even if a power outage occurs, it is possible to re-execute the effects corresponding to the game state that was set before the power outage.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, during the first low-probability time-shortened game state which is set when the number of times the special pattern changes after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-shortened game state is set reaches the number of times the time-shortened game state is activated (i.e., during the time-shortened game state which is set without winning a jackpot or playing a special game), and during the second low-probability time-shortened game state which is set after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 has ended (i.e., during the time-shortened game state which is set through winning a jackpot and playing a special game), game state designation information corresponding to each time-shortened game state is defined.
Therefore, according to the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, the sub-control board 300 can determine whether the set time-shortening game state has been set without winning a jackpot and playing a special game (i.e., whether it is the first low-probability time-shortening game state), or whether it has been set through winning a jackpot and playing a special game (i.e., whether it is the second low-probability time-shortening game state), and it becomes possible to execute presentations according to each time-shortening game state.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, at the point in time when the stop display time for the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation that will result in the setting of the first low-probability time-shortening game state has elapsed, the main CPU 101 transmits to the sub-control board 300 designation information before the first low-probability time-shortening game state is reached, indicating that the next fluctuation is the fluctuation immediately before the setting of the first low-probability time-shortening game state.
As a result, with the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, data for the effects to be executed at the time the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set can be prepared before that time, making it possible to prevent situations such as the content of the effects suddenly changing at that time, which would give the player a sense of discomfort regarding the progress of the effects.

(Summary of various transmission frequencies)
The main CPU 101 of the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6 transmits numerical information (numerical data) regarding various numbers, such as the number of times time-saving is performed and the number of times time-saving is activated, to the sub-control board 300 at the time when each of the above-mentioned game states is set or at the time when the time-saving activation counter starts counting.

Specifically, at the time when the second low-probability time-shortened game state is set (i.e., at the time when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 ends), the main CPU 101 transmits numerical information of "100 times", which is the number of times time is shortened in the second low-probability time-shortened game state, to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, at the time when the high-probability time-shortened game state is set (i.e., at the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X2 or X3), the main CPU 101 transmits to the sub-control board 300 numerical information of "100 times", which is the number of high-probability times in the high-probability time-shortened game state, and numerical information of "100 times", which is the number of time-shortened times.
In addition, the main CPU 101 transmits numerical information of "500 times", which is the number of times the time-saving feature has been activated in the first low-probability time-saving feature state, to the sub-control board 300 at the start of counting by the time-saving feature activation counter (i.e., at the time when the RAM is cleared, or at the time when the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving feature state is set after the special game has ended).
In addition, at the time when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set (i.e., at the time when the count value of the time-saving activation count counter reaches the number of time-saving activations (500 times)), the main CPU 101 transmits numerical information of "600 times", which is the number of time-saving activations in the first low-probability time-saving game state, to the sub-control board 300.

Although not specifically shown here, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, all of the numerical information corresponding to the various numbers mentioned above is composed (represented) by number data A and number data B, which are 1-byte (8-bit) binary data.
Specifically, the seven lowest bits of both count data A and count data B, excluding the most significant bit, represent a numerical value ranging from "0000000b" (0 in decimal; numbers with a "b" at the end are represented in binary; the same applies below) to "1111111b" (127 in decimal). The seven lowest bits of count data A represent the remainder when the above-mentioned various count values are divided by "128", which is the maximum value "127" (decimal) that can be represented in a 7-bit binary number plus 1, and the seven lowest bits of count data B represent the quotient when the above-mentioned various count values are divided by the above-mentioned "128".
At the various times described above, the main CPU 101 transmits the count data A configured as described above to the sub-control board 300, and then transmits the count data B configured as described above to the sub-control board 300. When the sub-CPU 301 receives the count data A and the count data B, it can calculate the corresponding count by adding the value of the lowest 7 bits of the count data A received earlier to the product of the value of the lowest 7 bits of the subsequently received count data B and the above-mentioned "128." This allows the sub-control board 300 to grasp the various counts described above.

For example, if the number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state is "100 times," the quotient of dividing this "100 times" by the above-mentioned "128" is "0," and the remainder is "100." Therefore, the lowest 7 bits of the number-of-times data A corresponding to this "100 times" number of time-saving times will be "1100100b" (100 in decimal), and the lowest 7 bits of the number-of-times data B will be "0000000b" (0 in decimal).
Then, at the time of setting the second low-probability time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 transmits count data A whose lowest 7 bits are "1100100b" to the sub-control board 300, and then transmits count data B whose lowest 7 bits are "0000000b" to the sub-control board 300.
When the sub-CPU 301 receives the count data A and the count data B, it can calculate the number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state, "100 times," by adding the lowest 7 bits of the count data A, "1100100b" (100 in decimal), to the product of the lowest 7 bits of the count data B, "0000000b" (0 in decimal), and the above-mentioned "128." This makes it possible for the sub-control board 300 to obtain the numerical information of "100 times," which is the number of time-saving times, at the time the second low-probability time-saving game state is set.

Also, for example, if the number of times the time-saving feature has been activated in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is "500 times," the quotient of dividing this "500 times" by the above-mentioned "128" is "3," with a remainder of "116." Therefore, the lowest 7 bits of the count data A corresponding to this "500 times" time-saving feature activation number are "1110100b" (116 in decimal), and the lowest 7 bits of the count data B are "0000011b" (3 in decimal).
Then, at the start of counting by the time-saving activation count counter, the main CPU 101 transmits count data A whose lowest 7 bits are "1110100b" to the sub-control board 300, and then transmits count data B whose lowest 7 bits are "0000011b" to the sub-control board 300.
When the sub-CPU 301 receives the count data A and the count data B, it can calculate the number of time-saving activations in the first low-probability time-saving game state, "500 times," by adding the lowest 7 bits of the count data A, "1110100b" (116 in decimal), to the product of the lowest 7 bits of the count data B, "0000011b" (3 in decimal), and the above-mentioned "128," resulting in "384." This makes it possible for the sub-control board 300 to obtain the numerical information of "500 times," which is the number of time-saving activations, at the start of counting by the time-saving activation count counter.

Also, for example, if the number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is "600 times," the quotient of dividing this "600 times" by the above-mentioned "128" is "4," and the remainder is "88." Therefore, the lowest 7 bits of the number-of-times data A corresponding to this "600 times" number of time-saving times are "1011000b" (88 in decimal), and the lowest 7 bits of the number-of-times data B are "0000100b" (4 in decimal).
Then, at the time of setting the first low-probability time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 transmits count data A whose lowest 7 bits are "1011000b" to the sub-control board 300, and then transmits count data B whose lowest 7 bits are "0000100b" to the sub-control board 300.
When the sub-CPU 301 receives the count data A and the count data B, it can calculate the number of time-shortened plays in the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state, "600 times," by adding the value of the lowest 7 bits of the count data A, "1011000b" (decimal 88), to "512," which is the product of the lowest 7 bits of the count data B, "0000100b" (decimal 4), and the above-mentioned "128." This makes it possible for the sub-control board 300 to obtain the numerical information of "600 times," which is the number of time-shortened plays, at the time the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 6, count data A containing the remainder when various counts such as the number of times time-saving is performed and the number of times time-saving is activated are divided by a value that is 1 greater than the maximum value that can be expressed in a binary number of multiple bits (7 bits in other application example 6), and count data B containing the quotient value are transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 is able to calculate the above-mentioned counts based on the received count data A and count data B.
As a result, with the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, even if various numbers such as the number of times time-saving has been performed or the number of times time-saving has been activated become large values, the above-mentioned numbers can be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 while reducing the amount of data sent to the sub-control board 300.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, after sending the number of times data A including the above-mentioned remainder value, the number of times data B including the above-mentioned quotient value is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
As a result, for example, in a pachinko machine, if various numbers such as the number of times time-saving has been performed or the number of times time-saving has been activated are set to be equal to or less than the maximum value that can be expressed in binary numbers of multiple bits as described above, the quotient value included in the number-of-times data B will always be 0, and the number of times described above can be calculated based only on the previously transmitted number-of-times data A. Therefore, in the above case, the calculation process of the number of times described above on the sub-control board 300 can be simplified.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, for the number of times time is reduced in the first low-probability time-shortened game state (i.e., a time-shortened game state that is set without winning a jackpot and playing a special game) that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-shortened game state is set reaches the number of times time is reduced to activate, and for the number of times time is reduced in the second low-probability time-shortened game state (i.e., a time-shortened game state that is set through winning a jackpot and playing a special game) that is set after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 has ended, data (number of times data A, number of times data B) configured in a predetermined format is sent to the sub-control board 300, so that the sub-control board 300 can obtain (understand) the above-mentioned number of times time is reduced based on the data.
Therefore, by executing the same process, the sub-control board 300 can obtain both the number of time-saving times for the time-saving game state that is set without winning a jackpot and playing a special game, and the number of time-saving times for the time-saving game state that is set through winning a jackpot and playing a special game, thereby preventing the process of obtaining this information from becoming complicated.

Next, the progress of the above-mentioned special game will be explained using a flowchart, focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned embodiment.
First, the post-stop processing that is executed after the variation of the special pattern has stopped and the stop display time for displaying the special pattern has been set in the stop display time timer counter will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 72.
In step 3000, the main CPU 101 determines whether the static display time set in the static display time timer counter has elapsed. If it determines that the static display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that the static display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 3001.
In step 3001, the main CPU 101 stores the current game status in the game status buffer. Then, the process proceeds to step 3002.

In step 3002, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving count update process. This time-saving count update process is the same as the time-saving count update process in the above-described embodiment, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to step 3003.
In step 3003, the main CPU 101 executes a high probability count update process. This high probability count update process is the same as the high probability count update process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to step 3004.

In step 3004, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped special symbol is a jackpot symbol. If it determines that the stopped special symbol is not a jackpot symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 3009. On the other hand, if it determines that the stopped special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 3005.
In step 3005, the main CPU 101 sets a command for transmitting the game status at the time of winning the jackpot and the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3) that is stopped and displayed to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3006.

In step 3006, the main CPU 101 resets the current game state, and then proceeds to step 3007.
In step 3007, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores an opening command indicating that the opening process will start in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3008.

In step 3008, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is X1 or X2, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds to "5," and if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is X3, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds to "10." Then, post-stop processing ends.

In step 3009, which is reached when it is determined in step 3004 that the special symbol displayed in the stopped state is not a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving activation count execution process for counting using a time-saving activation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 3010.
In step 3010, the main CPU 101 determines whether the high-probability time-shortened gaming state has ended. Specifically, it determines whether the second time-shortened gaming flag has changed from on to off in the above-mentioned step 3002, and whether the high-probability gaming flag has changed from on to off in the above-mentioned step 3003. If it is determined that the high-probability time-shortened gaming state has not ended, the process proceeds to step 3012. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high-probability time-shortened gaming state has ended, the process proceeds to the next step 3011.

In step 3011, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving activation count counter to "500." The main CPU 101 also transmits count data A and count data B corresponding to the time-saving activation count "500" to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3012.
In step 3012, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game state designation information to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at that time will be changed, and if it determines that the game state designation information will be changed, it stores a game state change designation command including the changed game state designation information in the performance transmission data storage area. Note that if it determines that the game state designation information will not be changed, the main CPU 101 does nothing here. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Next, the time-saving activation count execution process in step 3010 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 3100, the main CPU 101 determines whether the high probability game flag is off. If it is determined that the high probability game flag is not off (i.e., it is on), the main CPU 101 ends the time-saving activation count execution process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability game flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 3101.

In step 3101, the main CPU 101 determines whether a time-saving activation count flag indicating that the count value of the time-saving activation count counter has reached the time-saving activation count is off. If it is determined that the time-saving activation count flag is not off (i.e., it is on), the main CPU 101 terminates the time-saving activation count execution process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving activation count flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 3102.
In step 3102, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the time-saving activation counter by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step 3103.

In step 3103, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the time-saving activation counter has reached 0. If it is determined that the count value has not reached 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time-saving activation count execution process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value has reached 0, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 3104.
In step 3104, the main CPU 101 executes a first low-probability time-shortened gaming state setting process to set the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time-shortened gaming flag and sets the number of time-shortened games to "600." Note that, when the time-shortened game count is reached, the normal gaming state is set and the high-probability gaming flag is off. This high-probability gaming flag remains off. In addition, the main CPU 101 transmits count data A and count data B corresponding to the time-shortened game count "600" of the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3105.

In step 3105, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the time-saving activation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 3106.
In step 3106, the main CPU 101 turns on the time-saving activation count reaching flag, and then ends the time-saving activation count execution process.

Next, the special game ending process executed when the special game ends will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 3200, the main CPU 101 checks the jackpot pattern (stored in the processing area of the main RAM 103) that triggered the execution of the special game that has ended, and executes a game state setting process to set the game state after the special game has ended, depending on the jackpot pattern.
Specifically, when the jackpot symbol is X1 (i.e., when the second low-probability time-shortened game state is set), the main CPU 101 turns off the high-probability game flag, turns on the second time-shortened game flag, and sets the number of time-shortened games to 100. Also, when the jackpot symbol is X2 or X3 (i.e., when the high-probability time-shortened game state is set), the main CPU 101 turns on both the high-probability game flag and the second time-shortened game flag, and sets the high-probability number of times and the number of time-shortened games to 100.
Furthermore, when a high-probability time-shortened gaming state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits count data A and count data B corresponding to the high-probability count of "100" to the sub-control board 300, and also transmits count data A and count data B corresponding to the time-shortened count of "100" to the sub-control board 300. Furthermore, when a second low-probability time-shortened gaming state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits count data A and count data B corresponding to the time-shortened count of "100" to the sub-control board 300.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3201.

In step 3201, the main CPU 101 stores the game state set in step 3200 and the post-special game state designation command including the corresponding game state designation information in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step 3202.
In step 3202, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the time-saving activation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 3203.

In step 3203, the main CPU 101 turns off the time-saving activation count reaching flag, and then proceeds to step 3204.
In step 3204, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second low-probability time-shortened gaming state was set in the above-mentioned step 3200. Specifically, in the above-mentioned step 3200, it determines whether the high-probability gaming flag is OFF and the second time-shortened gaming flag is ON. If it is determined that the second low-probability time-shortened gaming state has not been set, the special gaming end processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second low-probability time-shortened gaming state has been set, the process proceeds to the next step 3205.

In step 3205, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving activation count counter to "500." The main CPU 101 also transmits count data A and count data B corresponding to the time-saving activation count of "500" to the sub-control board 300. The special game end process then ends.

Next, the RAM clear processing executed based on RAM clear (reset) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 3300, the main CPU 101 executes a normal game state setting process to set the normal game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns off the high probability game flag, the first time-shortened game flag, and the second time-shortened game flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3301.
In step 3301, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the time-saving activation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 3302.

In step 3302, the main CPU 101 turns off the time-saving activation count reaching flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 3303.
In step 3303, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving activation count counter to "500." The main CPU 101 also transmits count data A and count data B corresponding to the time-saving activation count "500" to the sub-control board 300. Then, the RAM clear post-processing is terminated.

Next, the spec designation command transmission time processing that is executed when the spec designation command is transmitted will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 3400, the main CPU 101 stores the model information of the pachinko machine P and the spec designation command including the corresponding game state designation information in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the spec designation command transmission time processing is terminated.

(Overview of various displays, such as background image display, countdown display of remaining time-saving times, count-up display of times toward time-saving activation times, etc.)
In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, the background images displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 include a normal background image corresponding to the normal game state (see Figures 77(d) to (e) etc.), a first low-probability time-shortening background image corresponding to the first low-probability time-shortening game state (see Figures 77(i) to (j) etc.), a second low-probability time-shortening background image corresponding to the second low-probability time-shortening game state (see Figures 77(a) to (b) etc.), and a high-probability time-shortening background image corresponding to the high-probability time-shortening game state (see Figures 79(a) to (c) etc.), and the corresponding background image is displayed on the display unit 21a during each game state.

Specifically, a normal background image is displayed during the normal game state, a second low-probability time-saving background image is displayed during the second low-probability time-saving game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, a high-probability time-saving background image is displayed during the high-probability time-saving game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X2 or X3, and a first low-probability time-saving background image is displayed during the first low-probability time-saving game state that is set when the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the time-saving activation number.
When the game state is switched, the displayed background image is also switched accordingly (see Figure 77(d), Figure 77(i), etc.).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6, during both the first low-probability time-saving game state and the second low-probability time-saving game state, an upper display frame for displaying a predetermined display is displayed in a predetermined location on the display unit 21a (the upper right corner in Application Example 6), and within this upper display frame, a countdown display of the remaining number of time-saving plays is displayed each time a special symbol changes (change effect) is performed (see Figures 77(a)-(c), 77(j), 78(a), etc.). Similarly, during the high-probability time-saving game state, a countdown display of the remaining number of high-probability plays (number of time-saving plays) is displayed within the above-mentioned upper display frame each time a special symbol changes (change effect) is performed (see Figures 79(a)-(c), etc.).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6, while the time-saving activation counter is counting (i.e., while the second low-probability time-saving game state and normal game state A are set), a lower display frame for displaying a predetermined display is displayed in a predetermined location on the display unit 21a (in Application Example 6, the lower right corner), and within this lower display frame, a count-up display is displayed of the number of times the time-saving activation counts up towards 500, which is the number of times the time-saving activation counts up each time a special pattern variation (variation effect) is performed (see Figures 77(a)-(h), 79(d)-(g), 80(a)-(c), etc.).

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the above-mentioned low-probability time-shortened game background image is displayed, and a display indicating that the first low-probability time-shortened game state is in progress (in another application example 6, the text "Lucky Time in Progress") is displayed in the above-mentioned lower display frame (see Figures 77(i)-(j), 78(a), 79(h), 80(d), etc.).

The above-mentioned various displays will be explained in more detail below.
(1) Display after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 As described above, after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and counting by the time-saving activation counter begins.
Then, upon setting the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the display unit 21a displays the second low-probability time-shortening background image, a display indicating that the second low-probability time-shortening game state has been set (in another application example 6, the text "Revenge mode starts!" is displayed), the upper display frame, the initial value of the remaining number of time-shortening times for which the countdown display will be performed (i.e., the number of time-shortening times in the second low-probability time-shortening game state "100"), the lower display frame, and the initial value ("1") of the count-up display toward the number of times the time-shortening will be activated (see Figure 77 (a)).

Thereafter, each time a change (change display) of the special pattern is executed, when the stop display time for that change has elapsed, a countdown display of the remaining number of times the time-saving feature will be activated is displayed, and a countup display of the number of times the time-saving feature will be activated is displayed.
Then, when the special symbol changes 100 times without winning a jackpot, the remaining number of times to play the time-saving mode becomes "0," and the number of times to activate the time-saving mode becomes "100" (see FIG. 77(b)). When the stop display time for the change has elapsed, the normal game state (normal game state A) is set. With this normal game state being set, the second low-probability time-saving background image is switched to the normal background image, a display is displayed indicating that the second low-probability time-saving mode has ended (in another application example 6, the text "Revenge mode ended"), the display in the upper display frame is cleared, and the display of the remaining number of times to play the time-saving mode is cleared (see FIGS. 77(c)-(d)). The number of times to activate the time-saving mode continues to be counted up (see FIG. 77(d)).

After that, each time a change (change display) of the special pattern is executed, when the stop display time for that change has elapsed, a count-up display of the number of times toward the number of times the time-saving feature is activated is displayed (see Figures 77 (e) to (g)).
Then, if the special symbol fluctuates 400 more times without winning a jackpot, the number of times toward the time-saving activation count will be displayed as "500" (see FIG. 77(g)), and when the stop display time for that fluctuating state has elapsed, the first low-probability time-saving game state will be set. With this first low-probability time-saving game state being set, the normal background image will be switched to the first low-probability time-saving background image, a display will be displayed indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set (in another application example 6, the text "Lucky time starts!" will be displayed), the initial value of the remaining number of time-saving counts for which the countdown display will be performed (i.e., the number of time-saving counts in the first low-probability time-saving game state "600") will be displayed, the display of the number of times that the count-up display was performed will be cleared, and a display will be displayed indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state is in progress (see FIGS. 77(h)-(i)).

After that, each time a change (change display) of the special pattern is executed, a countdown display of the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed when the stop display time for that change has elapsed.
Then, if the special symbol fluctuations occur 600 times without a jackpot being won, the remaining number of times of time-saving will be displayed as "0" (see FIG. 77(j)), and when the stop display time for that fluctuation has elapsed, a normal game state (normal game state B) will be set. With the setting of this normal game state, the first low-probability time-saving background image will be switched to the normal background image, a display will be displayed indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state has ended (in another application example 6, the text "Lucky time ended" will be displayed), the display in the lower display frame will be cleared, and the display indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state is in progress will be cleared (see FIGS. 78(a)-(b)).

Note that because the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set once, the time-saving activation counter will not count after the normal game state (normal game state B) described above is set. Therefore, until the next jackpot is won, the lower display frame will not be displayed, and the count-up display toward the number of time-saving activations will not be displayed (see Figure 78 (c)).

(2) Display after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 As described above, after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3, a high probability time-saving game state is set. As described above, during the high probability time-saving game state, the time-saving activation counter does not count.
Then, with the high probability time-shortening game state being set, the display unit 21a displays a high probability time-shortening background image, a display indicating that the high probability time-shortening game state has been set (in another application example 6, the text "Super mode start!" is displayed), an upper display frame, and the initial values of the remaining high probability number of times and the time-shortening number of times for which the countdown display will be performed (i.e., the high probability number of times and the time-shortening number of times in the high probability time-shortening game state are "100") (see FIG. 79(a)). Note that, since the time-shortening activation counter is not counting, the lower display frame and the initial values of the count-up display toward the time-shortening activation number are not displayed at this point (see FIG. 79(a)).

Thereafter, each time a change (change display) of the special pattern is executed, a countdown display of the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed at the point when the stop display time for that change has elapsed.
Then, when the special symbol fluctuation occurs 100 times without winning a jackpot, the remaining number of high-probability and time-saving times is displayed as "0" (see FIG. 79(b)). When the stop display time for the fluctuation has elapsed, the normal game state (normal game state A) is set. With this normal game state being set, the high-probability time-saving background image is switched to the normal background image, a message is displayed indicating that the high-probability time-saving game state has ended (in another application example 6, the text "Super Mode Ended" is displayed), the upper display frame is cleared, and the remaining number of time-saving times is cleared (see FIGS. 77(c)-(d)). Furthermore, since the normal game state has been set, the time-saving activation counter starts counting, and the lower display frame is displayed, and the initial value ("1") is displayed in the count-up display toward the number of time-saving activations (see FIG. 79(d)).

After that, each time a change (change display) of the special pattern is executed, when the stop display time for that change has elapsed, a count-up display of the number of times toward the number of times the time-saving feature is activated is displayed (see Figures 79 (e) to (f)).
Then, if the special symbol fluctuates 500 times without winning a jackpot, the number of times toward the time-saving activation count will be displayed as "500" (see FIG. 79(f)), and when the stop display time for that fluctuating state has elapsed, the first low-probability time-saving game state will be set. With this first low-probability time-saving game state being set, as in (1) above, the normal background image will be switched to the first low-probability time-saving background image, a display will be displayed indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set, the initial value ("600") of the number of times remaining for which the countdown display will be performed will be displayed, the display of the number of times for which the countup display was performed will be cleared, and a display will be displayed indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state is in progress (see FIGS. 79(g)-(h)).
The subsequent display flow is the same as in (1) above, and therefore will not be described here.

(3) Display after RAM Clearing As described above, after RAM is cleared, the normal game state (normal game state A) is set, and the time-saving activation counter starts counting.
Then, with the normal game state being set, the display unit 21a displays the normal background image, the lower display frame, and the initial value ("1") of the count-up display toward the number of times the time-saving feature is activated (see Figure 80 (a)).

Thereafter, each time a change (change display) of the special pattern is executed, when the stop display time for that change has elapsed, a countdown display of the remaining number of times the time-saving feature will be activated is displayed, and a countup display of the number of times the time-saving feature will be activated is displayed.
Then, when the special symbol changes 500 times without winning a jackpot, the number of times toward the time-saving activation count is displayed as "500" (see FIG. 80(b)), and when the stop display time for that change has elapsed, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. With the setting of this first low-probability time-saving game state, as in (1) and (2) above, the normal background image is switched to the first low-probability time-saving background image, a display is displayed indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set, the initial value of the number of time-saving activations remaining for the countdown display is displayed, the display of the number of times that the countup display was performed is cleared, and a display is displayed indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state is in progress (see FIGS. 80(c)-(d)).
The subsequent display flow is the same as in (1) above, and therefore will not be described here.

(Summary of the above display after power is restored)
As described above, if an unexpected power outage occurs in the pachinko machine P due to, for example, a lightning strike, the game status designation information stored in the sub-RAM 303 is cleared. However, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6, when power is restored from the power outage, the game status designation information backed up in the main control board 100 at the time of the power outage is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. This makes it possible to continue to execute the predetermined display that was being executed before the power outage occurred, based on the received game status designation information, even after power is restored.

For example, if the second low-probability time-shortening game state was set before the power outage, when power is restored, the main control board 100 transmits to the sub-control board 300 game state designation information stored before the power outage, such as the second low-probability time-shortening designation information, the designation information for the predetermined number of times before the end of the second low-probability time-shortening designation information, and the second low-probability time-shortening final designation information. This allows the sub-control board 300 to determine that the game state set before the power outage was the second low-probability time-shortening game state, and therefore the sub-control board 300 can display the second low-probability time-shortening background image as the background image, and can also display the upper display frame and the lower display frame, etc.

Furthermore, if the first low-probability time-shortening game state was set before the power outage, when power is restored, the game state designation information stored before the power outage, such as the first low-probability time-shortening designation information, the designation information before the end of the first low-probability time-shortening predetermined number of times, and the first low-probability time-shortening final designation information, is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300. This allows the sub-control board 300 to determine that the game state set before the power outage was the first low-probability time-shortening game state, and therefore allows the first low-probability time-shortening background image to be displayed as the background image, as well as the upper and lower display frames and a display indicating that the first low-probability time-shortening game state is in progress (such as the text "Lucky Time in progress"), etc.

Furthermore, if normal game state A was set before the power outage, when power is restored, the game state designation information for the normal A designation information stored before the power outage is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300. This allows the sub-control board 300 to determine that the game state set before the power outage was normal game state A, and therefore allows the normal background image to be displayed as the background image, and the lower display frame to be displayed, etc.

Furthermore, if normal game state B was set before the power outage, when power is restored, the game state designation information for the normal B designation information stored before the power outage is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300. This allows the sub-control board 300 to determine that the game state set before the power outage was normal game state B, so the normal background image can be displayed as the background image and the lower display frame can be hidden.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, when power is restored after a power outage, the game status designation information stored before the power outage occurs is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the display of a background image, etc. can be performed based on the game status designation information.
In other words, according to the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, various displays according to the game status that were set before the power outage can be reliably resumed after the power outage is restored, thereby preventing a situation in which inappropriate presentations are executed when a power outage occurs.

In the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6, when power is restored from a power outage, the remaining number of time-saving times before the power outage and the count value of the time-saving activation counter are not transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Therefore, the sub-control board 300 cannot grasp these values and cannot display them accurately.
Therefore, although not specifically shown, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, a power interruption occurs in the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, or the high-probability time-shortened game state, and after the power is restored from this interruption, the upper display frame is displayed, but a specific display that does not allow the exact number of times to be recalled (for example, the display of a "?" mark or the display of "0") is displayed within this upper display frame. Similarly, when a power interruption occurs in the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, or the normal game state A, and after the power is restored from this interruption, the lower display frame is displayed, but the above-mentioned display is displayed within this lower display frame.
This can prevent the player from misunderstanding the remaining number of time-saving times or the number of times remaining until the time-saving times are activated.

In addition, when power is restored after a power outage, the remaining number of time-saving times and the count value of the time-saving activation counter before the power outage can be set to be sent to the sub-control board 300, so that an accurate count can be displayed after power is restored.

(Modification of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, one gate 20 is provided only in the second game area 12b, but the installation location and number of gates 20 are not limited to this.
For example, one gate 20 may be provided in the first game area 12a, or one gate 20 may be provided in each of the first game area 12a and the second game area 12b.
In this case, even when a game ball is shot toward the first game area 12a, there is an opportunity to execute a lottery for a normal symbol, which can increase the interest of the player.
In addition, the second game area 12b may be provided with a normal symbol operation winning port that is configured to allow entry of almost all game balls that enter the second game area 12b and do not enter the second start winning port 16 or the large winning port 18, and when a game ball enters the second game area 12b, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one) are paid out and a lottery for a normal symbol is held.
In this case, for example, when a game ball is shot toward the second game area 12b during a non-time-saving game state, the game ball will not enter the second start winning port 16, but the game ball will enter the normal symbol operation winning port, which provides an opportunity for the game ball to be paid out and for a normal symbol lottery to be held, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, during the first time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state) which is set when the count value of the time-shortened game counter reaches the number of time-shortened game activations, a winning probability is set in the lottery for the normal symbol as during the non-time-shortened game state, but this is not limited to this, and the machine may be set so that a winning probability is set in the lottery for the normal symbol during the first time-shortened game state compared to the non-time-shortened game state.
In addition, during the first time-shortened game state, it may be possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning port 16 by setting the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols to be higher than during the non-time-shortened game state, setting the time for which the normal symbols change to be shorter, or setting the operating time of the movable piece 16b to be longer.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, the time-saving game states provided are a time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) that is set through winning a jackpot (determination of jackpot patterns X1, X2, X3) and executing a special game, and a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the number of times that the time-saving mode is activated without winning a jackpot in a low-probability game state (normal game state, second low-probability time-saving game state), but the types of time-saving game states are not limited to these.
For example, a time-shortened game state may be set based on the determination of a special pattern other than a big win pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (for example, a losing pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, a small win pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.).
In addition, the time-saving game state that is set through winning a jackpot and playing a special game, the time-saving game state that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the number of times that the time-saving game state is activated without winning a jackpot in a low-probability game state, and the time-saving game state that is set based on the determination of a special pattern other than a jackpot pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state may be set so that the difficulty of the game ball entering the second start entry port 16 is different, or may be set so that the difficulty is the same.
Even in the above case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, a total of 13 types of game status designation information (normal A designation information, second low-probability time-saving designation information, designation information before the end of the second low-probability time-saving predetermined number of times, second low-probability final time-saving designation information, high-probability time-saving pending designation information, high-probability time-saving designation information, designation information before the end of the high-probability time-saving predetermined number of times, high-probability final time-saving designation information, designation information before the arrival of the first low-probability time-saving designation information, first low-probability time-saving designation information, designation information before the end of the first low-probability time-saving predetermined number of times, first low-probability final time-saving designation information, and normal B designation information) were provided, but game status designation information other than these may also be provided.

For example, in a pachinko machine that is set so that a special variation pattern is determined for a specific period until a predetermined number of variations have occurred in the normal game state that is set after the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state has ended, the game state designation information may include specific period designation information indicating that this is a variation of a special pattern during the above-mentioned specific period, or specific period final designation information indicating that this is the last variation of a special pattern during the above-mentioned specific period, etc.
Also, for example, in a pachinko machine in which it is possible to win a small prize by lottery and it is specified that a time-saving game state is set to a predetermined small prize pattern that can be determined when a small prize is won, the game state designation information may include small prize time-saving designation information indicating that it is a change in a special pattern in the time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as the small prize time-saving game state) that is set based on the determination of the above-mentioned small prize pattern, and small prize time-saving final designation information indicating that it is a change in the last special pattern in the small prize time-saving game state.
Also, for example, in a pachinko machine in which it is specified that a time-saving game state is set to a predetermined losing symbol that can be determined in the event of a loss, the game state designation information may include loss time-saving designation information indicating that the time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as a loss time-saving game state) that is set based on the determination of the above-mentioned losing symbol, loss time-saving final designation information indicating that the time-saving game state is the last special symbol that changes in the loss time-saving game state, etc.
Even when set in this way, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, the game status designation information is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the time when the stop display time has elapsed, at the time when the special game has ended, and at the time when the specification designation command is sent (at the time when the customer waiting time has elapsed, at the time when the special pattern starts to change, at the time when the opening process starts, at the time when the round game has started, at the time when the round game has ended, at the time when the ending process has started, at the time when the ending process has ended, at the time when the RAM is cleared, and at the time when the power is turned on (at the time when power is restored after a power outage)), but the timing of transmitting the game status designation information is not limited to these.
For example, in a pachinko machine in which a small prize can be won by a lottery and a small prize game is executed when a small prize is won, game status designation information may be sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the small prize game, the end of the small prize game, etc.
Also, for example, in a pachinko machine that has a setting value associated with a setting related to the number of balls dispensed, and that has modes related to the setting value, such as a setting value change mode for changing the setting value and a setting value confirmation mode for confirming the set setting value, game status designation information may be sent to the sub-control board 300 at the time when the setting value change mode is ended, the time when the setting value confirmation mode is ended, etc.
Even when set in this way, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, the number of times constituted by the above-mentioned number of times data A and number of times data B is the number of high probability times, the number of time-saving times, and the number of time-saving times activated, but is not limited to these.
For example, in a pachinko machine that is configured to be able to switch the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern depending on the number of times the special pattern varies after the special game ends (hereinafter also referred to as the special number of times), the special number of times may be configured using the above-mentioned number of times data A and number of times data B.
Also, for example, in a pachinko machine in which the condition for ending the time-saving game state is that a predetermined event occurs a specific number of times (for example, in a pachinko machine in which it is possible to win a small prize by lottery, the number of times that a small prize has been won reaches a specific number, or the number of times a predetermined small prize pattern is determined reaches a specific number), the specific number of times may be constituted by the above-mentioned number of times data A and number of times data B.
Furthermore, for example, in a pachinko machine that is set up so that the time-shortened game state ends when either the sum of the number of times of fluctuation based on the first special chart random number and the number of times of fluctuation based on the second special chart random number reaches the first number of times of time-shortened, or the number of times of fluctuation based on the second special chart random number reaches the second number of times of time-shortened, is met, both the first number of times of time-shortened and the second number of times of time-shortened may be configured using the above-mentioned number data A and number data B.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 6 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the number of times data A and the number of times data B are both 1-byte data, and the lowest 7 bits of the number of times data A are used to form the remainder when the numerical value of each type of number of times is divided by a value 1 greater than the maximum value that can be expressed in 7-bit binary numbers, and the lowest 7 bits of the number of times data B are used to form the quotient value, but the data format is not limited to this.
For example, both the number data A and the number data B may be binary data of 2 bytes or more, and the data sizes of the number data A and the number data B may be set to be different from each other.
Specifically, for example, both the count data A and the count data B may be configured as two-byte data consisting of an upper byte and a lower byte. In this configuration, the upper byte of data may be used to identify the type of data being transmitted (e.g., count data A relating to the high probability count, count data B relating to the high probability count, etc.), and the lower byte of data may be used to identify the numerical value of the count. By referencing the upper byte of data, the type of count identified by the lower byte of data that follows can be reliably transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, not only the count data A and count data B, but also other commands and data (for example, a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of fluctuation, a pre-determination command indicating the result of the pre-determination process, and reserved number data indicating the number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers) transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300 may be configured as 2-byte data consisting of an upper byte (which specifies the type of command or data to be transmitted) and a lower byte (which specifies the specific content of the command or data), as described above. This allows the format of data transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300 to be standardized, thereby reducing the processing load associated with receiving data transmitted from the main control board 100.
Furthermore, when the count data A and count data B are configured as two-byte data consisting of an upper byte and a lower byte as described above, the first bit of the upper byte may always be set to a predetermined value (for example, 1), and the first bit of the lower byte may always be set to a value different from the predetermined value (for example, 0). This allows the sub-control board 300 to determine whether the data is the upper byte or the lower byte by determining the value set in the first bit.
Then, if the first bits of consecutively received 1-byte data (the data received first is also called preceding data, and the data received after preceding data is also called subsequent data) are all the same value (if the first bit of the preceding data and the first bit of the subsequent data are both a predetermined value, or if the first bit of the preceding data and the first bit of the subsequent data are both a value different from the predetermined value), the sub-control board 300 determines that the upper or lower byte of the various commands and data configured as described above could not be received due to the occurrence of noise, etc., and may discard the preceding data, discard the subsequent data, or discard both the preceding data and the subsequent data, thereby not performing various processes based on the received data.
On the other hand, if the first bit of the preceding data is a predetermined value and the first bit of the succeeding data is a value different from the predetermined value, it may be determined that the upper byte and the lower byte of the various commands and data configured as described above have been properly received, and various processing may be performed based on the received data.
The bit to which the above-mentioned predetermined value or a value different from the predetermined value is set is not limited to the first bit, and may be any other bit.
Furthermore, the bits constituting the above-mentioned remainder value and quotient value may be, for example, the most significant 7 bits, or 7 bits excluding a predetermined bit (for example, the fourth bit from the first bit).
The remainder and quotient values may also be formed using multiple bits other than 7 bits (for example, 5 bits, 8 bits, etc.). For example, the lowest 5 bits of count data A may be used to form a remainder when various count values are divided by a value that is 1 greater than the maximum value that can be expressed in a 5-bit binary number, and the lowest 5 bits of count data B may be used to form a quotient value.
Alternatively, the number of times data A may be used to form the quotient value, and the number of times data B may be used to form the remainder value.
Even if the above-mentioned method is used, even if various numbers such as the number of time-saving times and the number of time-saving activation times become large values, the above-mentioned numbers can be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 while reducing the amount of data sent to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, the main CPU 101 may be configured to transmit information on the number of time-saving activations that will result in the first low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving activations in the first low-probability time-saving game state (number of times data A, number of times data B) to the sub-control board 300 even in a game stop state in which game progress is disabled due to a backup error, etc. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine that is provided with setting values associated with settings related to ball output and that is provided with setting value modes such as a setting value change mode for changing the setting value after game progress is disabled and a setting value confirmation mode for confirming the setting value that has been set after game progress is disabled, the main CPU 101 may be configured to transmit information on the number of time-saving activations that will result in the first low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving activations in the first low-probability time-saving game state (number of times data A, number of times data B) to the sub-control board 300 even in the setting value change mode and the setting value confirmation mode.

(Another Application Example 7)
The external configuration of the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 7 (the configuration of the game board 11 (game area 12), the devices and components installed), the configuration of the control means, the progress of the game, and the various random numbers and tables used in the game are almost identical to those of the pachinko machine P relating to the above-mentioned embodiment, and only the conditions under which the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set and the configuration of the win/lose random number determination table 110, etc., differ from those of the pachinko machine P relating to the above-mentioned embodiment.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, during the normal game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the second low-probability time-saving game state, the lottery result is determined to be either a big win, a small win, or a loss, and in the case of a big win, one of the big win patterns X1, X2, or X3 is determined as in the above-mentioned embodiment, and in the case of a small win, one of the small win patterns Y1 or Y2 is determined as in the above-mentioned embodiment, and in the case of a loss, a loss pattern Z1 or Z2 is determined.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, it is specified that a first time-shortened game state (time-shortened game state, the number of time-shortened game times is 50) is set for a losing symbol Z2, and when a losing symbol Z2 is selected during a normal game state, the first time-shortened game state is set and the machine transitions to a first low-probability time-shortened game state. Note that if a losing symbol Z2 is selected during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state is not reset, and the first low-probability time-shortened game state continues. Similarly, if a losing symbol Z2 is selected during a second low-probability time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state is not set, and the second low-probability time-shortened game state continues.
In contrast, the setting of the first time-shortened game state for the losing symbol Z1 is not specified, and when the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the game state at the time of determination continues. That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the normal game state, the normal game state continues, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the first low-probability time-shortened game state continues, and when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state continues.

Furthermore, even during the high-probability time-saving game state, the lottery result is determined as either a big win, a small win, or a loss. In the case of a big win, either the big win symbol X1 or X4 is determined, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, and in the case of a small win, either the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, and in the case of a loss, the loss symbol Z1 is determined. In other words, if there is a loss during the high-probability time-saving game state, the loss symbol Z2 is not determined.

As shown in Figure 81, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 7, the win/loss random number determination table 110 is provided with table TL which is referenced when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16 in a low probability game state (normal game state, first low probability time-saving game state, second low probability time-saving game state), and table TH which is referenced when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16 in a high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state).
Here, the win/loss random number determination table 110 of Application Example 7 is set with a plurality of numerical ranges that determine the result of the lottery (jackpot win, small win, or loss) and that define the type of special symbol corresponding to the determined result of the lottery, and the result of the lottery and the type of special symbol are determined according to the numerical range to which the acquired win/loss random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number) belongs. That is, in the pachinko machine P of Application Example 7, both the result of the win/loss lottery and the type of special symbol are determined by the win/loss random number determination table 110 and the win/loss random number. Therefore, the pachinko machine P of Application Example 7 does not have the special symbol random number and special symbol random number determination table 111 for determining the type of special symbol that are provided in the pachinko machine P of the above-mentioned embodiment.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 81(a) and 82(a), according to table TL, if the win/loss random number is between 0 and 63570, it is determined to be a loss and loss symbol Z1 is determined; if the win/loss random number is between 63571 and 63963, it is determined to be a loss and loss symbol Z2 is determined; if the win/loss random number is between 63964 and 63965, it is determined to be a jackpot win and jackpot symbol X1 is determined; if the win/loss random number is between 63966 and 6414, it is determined to be a jackpot win. If the result is 7, it is determined that a big win has been won and big win pattern X2 is determined; if the win/loss random number is between 64148 and 64225, it is determined that a big win has been won and big win pattern X3 is determined; if the win/loss random number is between 64226 and 64880, it is determined that a small win has been won and small win pattern Y1 is determined; if the win/loss random number is between 64881 and 65535, it is determined that a small win has been won and small win pattern Y2 is determined.

Also, as shown in Figures 81(b) and 82(b), according to table TH, if the win/loss random number is between 0 and 63570, it is determined to be a loss and loss symbol Z1 is determined; if the win/loss random number is between 63571 and 64028, it is determined to be a big win and big win symbol X1 is determined; if the win/loss random number is between 64029 and 64225, it is determined to be a big win and big win symbol X4 is determined; if the win/loss random number is between 64226 and 64880, it is determined to be a small win and small win symbol Y1 is determined; and if the win/loss random number is between 64881 and 65535, it is determined to be a small win and small win symbol Y2 is determined.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 7, the numerical range in which the jackpot pattern is determined (i.e., determined to be a jackpot win) on table TH referenced in a high probability game state (hereinafter referred to as the high probability jackpot pattern determination numerical range) is wider than the numerical range in which the jackpot pattern is determined on table TL referenced in a low probability game state (hereinafter referred to as the low probability jackpot pattern determination numerical range), and on table TL, the range equivalent to the difference between the high probability jackpot pattern determination numerical range and the low probability jackpot pattern determination numerical range is set as the numerical range in which a losing pattern Z2 is determined to be a miss and which is set to set the first time-shortened game state.
That is, the numerical range in which the losing symbol Z2 is determined in the table TL is set to be switched to the numerical range in which the big winning symbol is determined in the table TH.
By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine a losing symbol that is determined to set the first time-shortened game state by effectively using a numerical range in which a jackpot symbol is determined in a high-probability game state but in which a jackpot symbol is not determined in a low-probability game state, and it is possible to reliably execute control in which a jackpot is won and a transition to a time-shortened game state is made without going through a special game in a high-probability game state, while a jackpot is won and a transition to a time-shortened game state is made without going through a special game in a low-probability game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 7, a special pattern random number and special pattern random number determination table 111 for determining the type of special pattern are not provided, and the result of the win/loss lottery and the type of special pattern are determined using only the win/loss random number and the win/loss random number determination table 110, but this is not limited to this.
For example, similarly to the above-described embodiment, a special symbol random number and a special symbol random number determination table 111 may be provided, and the result of the win/loss lottery may be determined using the win/loss random number and the win/loss random number determination table 110, and then the type of special symbol may be determined using the special symbol random number and the special symbol random number determination table 111 while referring to the determined win/loss lottery result. Even in this case, similarly to the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7, a numerical range may be set for the win/loss random number determination table 110.

Specifically, table TL, which is the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in a low-probability gaming state, is provided with, for example, a first numerical range and a second numerical range determined to be a loss, a numerical range determined to be a big win, and a numerical range determined to be a small win, and table TH, which is the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in a high-probability gaming state, is provided with, for example, a first numerical range determined to be a loss, a numerical range determined to be a big win, and a numerical range determined to be a small win.Then, in table TL, a range equivalent to the difference between the numerical range determined to be a big win in table TH and the numerical range determined to be a big win in table TL is set as the above-mentioned second numerical range.
In addition, the special pattern random number determination table 111 is set so that, for example, if it is determined that a miss belonging to the first numerical range has occurred, a miss pattern Z1 (a miss pattern that is not determined to set the first time-shortened game state) is determined regardless of the value of the acquired special pattern random number, if it is determined that a miss belonging to the second numerical range has occurred, a miss pattern Z2 (a miss pattern that is determined to set the first time-shortened game state) is determined regardless of the value of the acquired special pattern random number, if it is determined that a jackpot has occurred, one of the jackpot patterns X1, X2, X3 or X4 is determined, and if it is determined that a small jackpot has occurred, one of the small jackpot patterns Y1 or Y2 is determined.
When set as described above, the second numerical range that is determined to be a loss in the win/loss lottery in the low-probability game state is switched to the numerical range that is determined to be a jackpot in the win/loss lottery in the high-probability game state. When a loss that falls within the second numerical range is determined, the loss symbol Z2 that is determined to set the first time-shortened game state is always determined. Therefore, the same effect as that of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7 is achieved.

As with the above-described embodiment, the special symbol random number determination table 111 may have separate tables for each type of starting winning slot into which the gaming ball entered (i.e., each type of special symbol random number obtained (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number)), and different types of special symbols may be determined for each table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 7, whether the game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, table TL is referenced in the low probability time-shortened game state, and table TH is referenced in the high probability time-shortened game state, but this is not limited to this.
For example, a win/lose random number determination table 110 may be provided separately which is referenced when the game is in a low-probability time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first start winning port 15, a win/lose random number determination table 110 which is referenced when the game is in a low-probability time-saving game state and the game ball enters the second start winning port 16, a win/lose random number determination table 110 which is referenced when the game is in a high-probability time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first start winning port 15, and a win/lose random number determination table 110 which is referenced when the game is in a high-probability time-saving game state and the game ball enters the second start winning port 16, and a numerical range may be set for each table to correspond to the result of the win/lose lottery and the type of special pattern.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 7 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, the range corresponding to the difference between the numerical range for determining a high probability jackpot pattern and the numerical range for determining a low probability jackpot pattern is judged as a miss in the table TL and is completely consistent with the numerical range for determining the miss pattern Z2, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the numerical range that is determined to be a miss in table TL and in which the miss pattern Z2 is determined may be set to be part of the range corresponding to the difference between the numerical range for determining a high probability jackpot pattern and the numerical range for determining a low probability jackpot pattern.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 7 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, the numerical range in which the losing symbol Z2 is determined on the table TL is set to determine the big winning symbol on the table TH, but this is not limited to this, and it may be set to determine the small winning symbol.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 7 can be achieved.

(Another Application Example 8)
The pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8 is configured to simultaneously change the special pattern based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and change the special pattern based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 (when both a hold based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and a hold based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 are stored, both holds are processed simultaneously, so-called simultaneous rotation control is performed).

(Outline of the structure within the game area 12)
In the game area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, there are provided, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, a general winning opening 14, a first start winning opening 15, a second start winning opening 16, a movable piece 16b, an attacker device 17, an outlet 19, a gate 20, and an effect display device 21 (see FIG. 83). In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, there are provided, as the second start winning opening 16, two openings: a normal second start winning opening 16c without a movable piece 16b, and a specific second start winning opening 16d with a movable piece 16b.
Note that the structure and installation position of some of these devices and members are different from those in the above-described embodiment.
The structure within the game area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8 will be described below, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In a pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, as shown in FIG. 83, the first start winning opening 15 is located slightly below the center of the game area 12 (below the performance display device 21). Only game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning opening 15; game balls flowing down the second game area 12b cannot enter.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, as shown in FIG. 83, the gate 20 is provided in the upper right corner of the effect display device 21 (above the second game area 12b). The gate 20 is designed so that only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot. Further, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, almost all game balls that enter the second game area 12b pass through the gate 20.

As shown in Figure 83, below the gate 20, a specific second start winning opening 16d and a flat movable piece 16b (a normal electric device) that can be protruded and retracted into the game board 11 are arranged side by side.
The upper surface of the movable piece 16b is formed so as to slope downward from the right end to the left end when protruding from the game board 11. The right end of the movable piece 16b is located directly below the gate 20, and the specific second start winning opening 16d is located to the left of the left end of the movable piece 16b. The specific second start winning opening 16d is cup-shaped and opens upward, so that a game ball that reaches the opening will enter the specific second start winning opening 16d.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, when the movable piece 16b protrudes from the game board 11, the upper surface of the movable piece 16b functions as a guide member that guides the game ball to the opening of the specific second start winning opening 16d, thereby enabling the game ball to enter the specific second start winning opening 16d (see FIG. 84(b)). On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b is sunk into the game board 11, the movable piece 16b cannot guide the game ball to the opening of the specific second start winning opening 16d, making it impossible for the game ball to enter the specific second start winning opening 16d (see FIG. 84(a)). Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, the length from the right end of the movable piece 16b to the specific second start winning port 16d is approximately the same as the width of the flow passage through which the game balls flow down within the second game area 12b, so when the movable piece 16b is protruding, almost all of the game balls that enter the second game area 12b and pass through the gate 20 can enter the specific second start winning port 16d.

Then, as in the above-described embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol is conducted, and the variable display of the normal symbol begins. If the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a win, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, after which the winning symbol is displayed statically, and the above-described movable piece 16b is in a protruding state for a predetermined operating time (see FIG. 84(b)). On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a loss, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, after which the losing symbol is displayed statically, and the above-described movable piece 16b remains immersed in the gaming board 11 (see FIG. 84(a)).
In addition, only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the specific second start winning port 16d, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter.

83, an attacker device 17 is provided below the specific second start winning opening 16d and the movable piece 16b. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, unlike the above-described embodiment, the specific area 57, the general area 58, and the sorting member 59 are not provided within the large winning opening 18.
Only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the big prize opening 18, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the big prize opening 18.
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, after the special game that is executed based on the winning of the jackpot is completed, the game state is set according to the type of jackpot pattern that was determined at the time of the winning of the jackpot.

As shown in Figure 83, a normal second start winning opening 16c is provided below the attacker device 17. Only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the normal second start winning opening 16c, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter. Game balls that enter the second game area 12b and do not enter the specific second start winning opening 16d or the large winning opening 18 can enter the normal second start winning opening 16c.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 8, when a game ball normally enters the second start winning port 16c, a predetermined number of game balls (three in other application example 8) are paid out, and when a game ball enters the specific second start winning port 16d or the first start winning port 15, a number of game balls different from the above-mentioned predetermined number (one in other application example 8) are paid out.

(Control and Game Overview)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, one of the following game states is set: a normal game state, which is a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state; a low-probability time-shortened game state (hereinafter also referred to as low-probability time-shortened) which is a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a first time-shortened game state; and a high-probability time-shortened game state (hereinafter also referred to as high-probability time-shortened) which is a game state that combines a high-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, the non-time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state, and the second time-shortened game state are set so that the frequency of game balls entering the second start winning hole 16 (the difficulty of ball entry, in other words, the frequency of winning/losing lottery based on game balls entering the second start winning hole 16) is different from each other. The specific settings will be described in detail later.
As in the above-described embodiment, the normal game mode is set in the initial state after shipping from the factory or after resetting.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning port 15, and game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the special second start winning port 16d, enter the large winning port 18, or enter the normal second start winning port 16c.
In principle, during normal game play, the player is required to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot) so that the game ball will enter the first start winning port 15, and during low probability time-saving game play, high probability time-saving game play, special game play, and small win game play, the game ball will pass through the gate 20 and enter the specific second start winning port 16d or the normal second start winning port 16c, and the player is required to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right shot) so that the game ball will enter the large winning port 18.

85(a), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, a jackpot can be won in a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning slot 15, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined. When the gaming state at the time when the win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning slot 15 is a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, low-probability time-shortened gaming state), the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-shortened gaming state), the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 6/300.
The probability of winning the jackpot symbol X1 is set to 70/100 (i.e., 70%), and the probability of winning the jackpot symbol X2 is set to 30/100 (i.e., 30%). Furthermore, if the winning/losing lottery results in a loss, the losing symbol Z1 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 (the upper limit of the first reserved numbers) is set to 4. The upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers is not limited to this.

85(a), a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 16 (normal second start winning slot 16c, specific second start winning slot 16d) allows for a winning jackpot or a small winning jackpot, and if a winning jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X3 is determined, and if a small winning jackpot is won, a small winning symbol Y1 is determined. When the gaming state at the time when the winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 16 is a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, low-probability time-saving gaming state), the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state), the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 6/300.
The probability of winning the big win symbol X3 is set to 100/100 (i.e., 100%), and the probability of winning the small win symbol Y1 is set to 100/100 (100%). Furthermore, if the winning/losing lottery results in a loss, the losing symbol Z2 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of reserved second special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the second start winning slot 16 (the upper limit of the second reserved numbers) is set to 4. The upper limit of the number of reserved second special random numbers is not limited to this.

As shown in Figure 85(a), if a jackpot is won and jackpot pattern X1 is determined, during the special game based on that determination, five round games are played that end when either the large prize opening 18 is open for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18, and approximately 500 game balls can be won.
As shown in Figure 85(a), in either case where a jackpot is won and the jackpot pattern X2 or X3 is determined, the above-mentioned round game is executed 10 times during the special game based on that determination, and approximately 1,000 game balls can be won.
86(a), when a small prize is won and the small prize symbol Y1 is determined, the large prize opening 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds, and if 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open, a small prize game is executed in which the large prize opening 18 closes. During this small prize game, as described above, the large prize opening 18 is only open for 0.05 seconds, making it nearly impossible to get game balls to enter the large prize opening 18.

Also, as shown in Figure 85 (b), in pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, during normal game play, a win/lose lottery based on the first special symbol random number results in a loss and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, and if the first reserved number at that time is less than 2 (0 or 1), either a "13-second fluctuation (a fluctuation pattern in which the special symbol fluctuation time is set to 13 seconds)" or a "30-second fluctuation (a fluctuation pattern in which the special symbol fluctuation time is set to 30 seconds)" fluctuation pattern is determined. Also, if the first reserved number at the above-mentioned time is 2 or more, either a "5-second fluctuation (a fluctuation pattern in which the special symbol fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds)" fluctuation pattern or a "30-second fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is determined.

During normal game mode, if the winning/losing lottery based on the second special chart random number results in a loss and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the variation pattern of "13-second variation" is determined.
In the normal game state, when a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, and when a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the variation pattern of "120-second variation (variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 120 seconds)" is determined.
During normal game mode, if a small win is won by a lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the small win symbol Y1 is determined, the variation pattern of "3-second variation (variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 3 seconds)" is determined.

Also, as shown in Figure 85 (b), in the low probability time-saving game state or the high probability time-saving game state, if the winning/losing lottery based on the first special chart random number results in a loss and the losing pattern Z1 is determined, and if the winning/losing lottery based on the second special chart random number results in a loss and the losing pattern Z2 is determined, either a "5-second fluctuation,""30-secondfluctuation," or "60-second fluctuation" fluctuation pattern will be determined.
In the low probability time-shortened game state or the high probability time-shortened game state, when a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, and when a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the variation pattern of "60-second variation" is determined.
In a low probability time-shortened game state or a high probability time-shortened game state, when a small win is won by a win/loss lottery based on the second special chart random number and a small win symbol Y1 is determined, a variation pattern of "3-second variation" is determined.

(Overview of simultaneous rotation control)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, a control, so-called simultaneous rotation control, is executed to simultaneously vary the special symbols based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning hole 15 and vary the special symbols based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning hole 16. The simultaneous rotation control in another application example 8 will be described below.

In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, when a special game is not being played and the first special pattern display device 30 and the second special pattern display device 31 are not displaying changing special patterns, it is possible to draw a winning or losing lottery based on the first special pattern random number and the second special pattern random number.
In addition, when the first special pattern display device 30 is displaying the changing special pattern but the second special pattern display device 31 is not displaying the changing special pattern, it is possible to draw a lottery to see whether the winner will win or lose based on the second special pattern random number, and when the second special pattern display device 31 is displaying the changing special pattern but the first special pattern display device 30 is not displaying the changing special pattern, it is possible to draw a lottery to see whether the winner will win or lose based on the first special pattern random number.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, the display of the changing special symbols by the first special symbol display device 30 and the display of the changing special symbols by the second special symbol display device 31 are performed simultaneously. Then, when the display of the changing special symbols by the first special symbol display device 30 is completed, if the first special symbol random number is stored, the display of the changing next special symbol is started by the first special symbol display device 30, and when the display of the changing special symbols by the second special symbol display device 31 is completed, if the second special symbol random number is stored, the display of the changing next special symbol is started by the second special symbol display device 31.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, when a new win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special pattern random number while the first special pattern display device 30 is displaying a changing special pattern, if the special pattern being displayed is the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 (that is, when the jackpot was won in the win/loss lottery that triggered the changing display in relation to the ongoing changing display), the jackpot cannot be won as a result of the newly held win/loss lottery, and if it is determined that a jackpot has been won, the result of the lottery is forced to be a loss. In other words, the result of the lottery is a loss.
Similarly, when a new lottery is held based on the first special pattern random number while the second special pattern display device 31 is displaying a variable special pattern, if the variable special pattern is the jackpot pattern X3, the result of the newly held lottery is not a jackpot, and if it is determined that a jackpot has been won, the result of the lottery is set to be a forced loss. In other words, the result of the lottery is either a win or a loss for the small prize.
Therefore, for example, if a jackpot is won based on the second special random number and the second special pattern display device 31 is displaying a variable special pattern (jackpot pattern X3) based on the jackpot, and a new lottery is held based on the first special random number, the result of the lottery will be a loss. Also, if a jackpot is won based on the first special random number and the first special pattern display device 30 is displaying a variable special pattern (jackpot pattern X1 or X2) based on the jackpot, and a new lottery is held based on the second special random number, the result of the lottery will be a win or a loss for the small prize.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, when the big win pattern X1 or X2 is displayed stopped on the first special pattern display device 30, if the small win pattern Y1 is being displayed in a variable manner on the second special pattern display device 31, this small win pattern Y1 is forcibly changed (rewritten) to the losing pattern Z2, and then this losing pattern Z2 is forcibly stopped.
In addition, when the big win pattern X1 or X2 is displayed stopped on the first special pattern display device 30, if a losing pattern Z2 is being displayed variably on the second special pattern display device 31, this losing pattern Z2 is forced to stop.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, when the big win pattern X3 or the small win pattern Y1 is displayed stopped on the second special pattern display device 31, if the losing pattern Z1 is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special pattern display device 30, this losing pattern Z1 is forcibly stopped.
Furthermore, when the small winning symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, if the big winning symbol X1 or X2 is being displayed variably on the first special symbol display device 30, the big winning symbol X1 or X2 is forcibly changed (rewritten) to the losing symbol Z1, and then the losing symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped.

In contrast, when a losing symbol (Z1, Z2) is displayed stationary on either the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, if the other device is displaying a jackpot symbol (X1, X2, X3), a small win symbol (Y1), or a losing symbol (Z1, Z2), the display of the jackpot symbol, small win symbol, or losing symbol will not stop, and will continue to display the changing symbols.

(General overview of general games)
Next, an outline of the normal game executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8 will be described.
86(b), in the non-time-shortened game state (normal game state), the probability of winning by lottery of normal symbols is set to approximately 1/1.2, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds, and the operation time of movable piece 16b when the lottery of normal symbols is a winning one (the time during which movable piece 16b is in a protruding state) is set to 0.05 seconds. Note that, although not specifically shown, the same settings are made during special games and small winning games.
Furthermore, during the first time-shortened game state (low-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is set to approximately 1/1.2, the same as during the non-time-shortened game state, the normal symbol variation time is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a normal symbol is drawn and a winning symbol is set to 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-shortened game state.
Furthermore, during the second time-shortened game state (high-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1, which is higher than during the non-time-shortened game state and the first time-shortened game state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortened game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a normal symbol is drawn and a winning symbol is set to 5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortened game state.

In other words, during non-time-saving game mode (normal game mode), special game mode, or small win game mode, there is a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through gate 20, and there are many opportunities for movable piece 16b to be in a protruding state. However, because the normal symbol change time is 10 seconds and the movable piece 16b operation time is 0.05 seconds, although the time it takes for movable piece 16b to change from a recessed state to a protruding state is long (the interval from one protruding state to the next protruding state is long), the time that movable piece 16b remains in a protruding state is extremely short. Therefore, during non-time-saving game mode, special game mode, or small win game mode, movable piece 16b is almost always in a recessed state, making it virtually impossible for a game ball that enters second game area 12b to enter specific second start winning hole 16d.

In contrast, during the first time-shortened game state (low-probability time-shortened game state), winning occurs with the same probability as during the non-time-shortened game state, so there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to be in a protruding state, just as during the non-time-shortened game state. Furthermore, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state, and the movable piece 16b operates for 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-shortened game state. Therefore, although the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to change from a recessed state to a protruding state is short (the interval from one protruding state to the next protruding state is short), the time the movable piece 16b remains in a protruding state is long. Therefore, during the first time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is almost always in a protruding state, and almost all game balls that enter the second game area 12b enter the specific second start winning hole 16d.

Furthermore, during the second time-shortened game state (high-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning is higher than during the non-time-shortened game state or the first time-shortened game state, so there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to be in a protruding state. Furthermore, the normal symbol fluctuation time is the same as during the first time-shortened game state, 0.5 seconds, and the movable piece 16b operates for the same 5 seconds as during the first time-shortened game state. Therefore, as in the first time-shortened game state, the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to change from a recessed state to a protruding state is short (the interval from one protruding state to the next protruding state is short), but the time the movable piece 16b remains in a protruding state is long. Therefore, during the second time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is almost always in a protruding state, and almost all game balls that enter the second game area 12b enter the specific second start winning hole 16d.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, the probability of winning by drawing a normal pattern is set to be extremely high overall in all of the non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, but by varying the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the operation time of the movable piece 16b, the possibility of the game ball entering the specific second start winning port 16d (i.e., the frequency of the game ball entering the specific second start winning port 16d, in other words, the frequency of the winning/losing lottery being held based on the game ball entering the specific second start winning port 16d) is changed.
That is, during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, unlike during the non-time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is maintained in a protruding state, so that it is relatively easy for the game ball to enter the specific second start winning hole 16d. Therefore, during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, it is possible to acquire an opportunity to win or lose the lottery while suppressing the decrease in game balls that accompanies the progress of the game compared to the non-time-shortened game state.

(Outline of game state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, one of the game states is set to the normal game state, the low probability time-shortened game state, or the high probability time-shortened game state.
85(c), in either case where a jackpot is won by a win/lose lottery based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, or where a jackpot is won by a win/lose lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined (i.e., when a jackpot is won), the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to a high probability game state, and is also set to a second time-saving game state, thereby setting a high probability time-saving game state. When the high probability time-saving game state is set, the number of high probability wins and the number of time-saving wins are both set to 50.
In other words, after the special game that is executed when the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3 is determined ends, the game state is set to a high-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state continues until the results of the win/lose lottery based on the first special pattern random number and the results of the win/lose lottery based on the second special pattern random number have been derived a total of 50 times (until the total number of times the special pattern determined based on the first special pattern random number (hereinafter also referred to as the first special pattern) has changed and the total number of times the special pattern determined based on the second special pattern random number (hereinafter also referred to as the second special pattern) has changed reaches 50).
Then, during the high-probability time-saving game state, if the results of the winning/losing lottery based on the first special chart random number and the winning/losing lottery based on the second special chart random number are all other than a big win (small win, miss) for all 50 times, the high-probability game state is changed to a low-probability game state, and the second time-saving game state is changed to a non-time-saving game state, thereby changing the game state to a normal game state.

In addition, if a jackpot is won during the high-probability time-saving game state described above and jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3 is determined, the high-probability time-saving game state will be set again after the special game based on that determination ends.

85(c), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, after the low-probability game state (normal game state) is set, if the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes reaches the predetermined number of times for time-saving activation (500 times in another application example 8) without winning a jackpot (i.e., in the low-probability game state, the results of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number all result in something other than a jackpot), the low-probability game state is left as it is, and the first time-saving game state is set, thereby setting the low-probability time-saving game state. When the low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving times is set to 450.
After the low-probability time-saving game state is set, the low-probability time-saving game state continues without winning a jackpot until the total number of times the first special chart changes and the second special chart changes reaches 450 (i.e., until the results of the win/loss lottery based on the first special chart random number and the win/loss lottery based on the second special chart random number are derived a total of 450 times).
Then, during the low-probability time-saving game state, if the results of the winning/losing lottery based on the first special chart random number and the winning/losing lottery based on the second special chart random number are all other than a big win (small win, miss) for a total of 450 times, the low-probability game state remains as it is, and the first time-saving game state is changed to a non-time-saving game state, thereby changing the game state to a normal game state.

In addition, if a jackpot is won during the low-probability time-saving game state described above and jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state will be set after the special game based on that determination ends.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, a time-saving activation counter for counting the number of times (500 times) time-saving is activated, which will result in the low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) being set, is configured in a specified memory area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of this time-saving activation counter is reset when one of the following reset conditions is met: RAM is cleared (reset) by a specified operation, special play ends, or a low-probability time-saving play state (first time-saving play state) is set.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the game state thereafter is set to the normal game state (low probability game state), and from this point on, the time-saving activation counter starts counting.
Furthermore, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3 ends, the game state thereafter is set to a high-probability time-saving game state (high-probability game state). Therefore, the time-saving activation counter does not start counting from the point when the special game ends, but starts counting from the point when the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state (low-probability game state) is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, a time-saving activation counter counts each time the first special design changes (a win/lose lottery based on the first special design random number) or the second special design changes (a win/lose lottery based on the second special design random number), and when the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the number of time-saving activations, a low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above.

As mentioned above, counting by the time-saving activation counter begins when the normal game mode is set. If counting by the time-saving activation counter begins when the normal game mode is set, the game mode will become the normal game mode when the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches 500 time-saving activations (i.e., when the low-probability time-saving game mode is set).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, the low probability time-saving game state can be set only once after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the special game based on winning a jackpot has ended until the next jackpot is won.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the time-saving activation count (500 times) and the low-probability time-saving game state is set, the low-probability time-saving game state cannot be set again until the next big win is won.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter is reset by setting the low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving activation counter is set to stop counting until the next jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 8, it is not specified that a time-saving game state be set for either the losing symbols (Z1, Z2) or the small win symbol (Y1). Therefore, after a losing symbol stops, the game state does not change, and the game state at the time the losing symbol was determined continues. Furthermore, after the small win game based on the determination of the small win symbol ends, the game state at the start of the small win game continues.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 8, the number of consecutive time-saving settings or the number of consecutive probability-changing settings are not set as in the above-described embodiment, and whenever a jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends.

(Gameability of Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 8)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, as described above, the game state is set to one of the normal game state (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state), the low probability time-shortened game state (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a first time-shortened game state), or the high probability time-shortened game state (a game state that combines a high probability game state and a second time-shortened game state), and the game progresses.

When a player starts playing, the normal game mode is often set. During the normal game mode, as described above, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot). As long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, the game ball may enter the first start winning slot 15, but will not enter the second start winning slot 16 (normal second start winning slot 16c, special second start winning slot 16d). A lottery is then held based on the game ball's entry into the first start winning slot 15, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined (see FIG. 85(a)). If the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, a special game in which five rounds of play are played is executed, and if the jackpot pattern X2 is determined, a special game in which ten rounds of play are played is executed, and the game state after the special game ends is set to a high-probability time-saving game state (see Figure 85 (c)).
In this way, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, if you hit the left side as instructed during normal game mode, you will hit a jackpot and be able to transition to a high-probability time-saving game mode (see Figure 87).

During the high probability time-shortened game state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than during the normal game state, and game balls are more likely to enter the specific second start winning hole 16d, so that the player can more easily win a jackpot while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses than during the normal game state.
During the high-probability time-saving game state, if the player hits the ball to the right as instructed, there is an extremely high probability that the game ball will enter the second start winning slot 16 (normal second start winning slot 16c, specific second start winning slot 16d). Then, during the high-probability time-saving game state, a lottery is conducted based on the game ball entering the second start winning slot 16, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X3 is always determined (see FIG. 85(a)). In other words, if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the second special symbol random number, a special game (a special game with 10 rounds of play) is executed, which allows the player to acquire more game balls than a special game (a special game with 5 rounds of play) based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, and the game state after the special game is ended is reset to the high-probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 85(c)).
In this way, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, if you hit the right side as instructed during the high-probability time-saving game state, you will win a jackpot, which will result in the execution of a relatively advantageous special game, and you will be able to transition again to the high-probability time-saving game state (see Figure 87).

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, as described above, if the number of times the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change during normal game mode reaches the number of times the time-saving feature is activated (500 times) without a jackpot being won (if the number of times the results of the win/lose lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number reach the number of times the time-saving feature is activated), the game mode thereafter will be set to a low-probability time-saving game mode (see FIG. 85(c)). In other words, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, if left-handed shots are performed as instructed during normal game mode, the results of all 500 win/lose lotteries will be something other than a jackpot, and the machine will transition to a low-probability time-saving game mode (see FIG. 87).

During the low probability time-shortened game state, although the probability of winning a jackpot remains the same as during the normal game state, game balls are more likely to enter the specific second start winning hole 16d than during the normal game state, and a chance to win or lose can be obtained while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses compared to during the normal game state.
Then, during the low-probability time-shortened game state, as in the high-probability time-shortened game state, if the player hits the ball to the right as instructed, there is an extremely high possibility that the game ball will enter the second start winning hole 16. Then, during the low-probability time-shortened game state, as in the high-probability time-shortened game state, a lottery is conducted based on the game ball entering the second start winning hole 16, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3 is always determined (see FIG. 87).
In this way, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, if you hit the right side as instructed during the high-probability time-saving game state, you will win a jackpot, which will result in the execution of a relatively advantageous special game, and you will be able to transition again to the high-probability time-saving game state (see Figure 87).

Here, the low-probability time-saving game state, which is set when the results of all 500 win/lose lotteries during the low-probability game state (normal game state) are other than a jackpot, can hold down the reduction in game balls as the game progresses, while allowing for up to 450 win/lose lotteries based on game balls entering the second start entry port 16, and is an advantageous game state for the player because there is a high expectation of winning a jackpot (execution of a special game in which 10 rounds of play are played).
As described above, when a jackpot is won in a hit/miss lottery based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot 15, a special game with four rounds of play is more likely to be played than a special game with ten rounds of play, and it is more likely that only a relatively small number of game balls will be acquired. Therefore, when the count value of the time-saving activation counter is close to reaching the time-saving activation count in the normal game state, it is more desirable for the player that the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the time-saving activation count without winning a jackpot and a low-probability time-saving game state is set, rather than winning a jackpot in a hit/miss lottery based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot 15.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, if a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning hole 15 during the normal game state, the player is suggested to that effect (see FIGS. 88(a)-(d) and 89(a)-(d)). As a result, when the above suggestion is made, even though the game is still in the normal game state, the player can aim to win a small jackpot (determine the small jackpot symbol Y1) by shooting a gaming ball toward the second game area 12b and having the gaming ball enter the normal second start winning hole 16c before the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30.
As described above, if the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special pattern display device 30 when the small win pattern Y1 is displayed in a static manner on the second special pattern display device 31, this jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is forcibly changed to the losing pattern Z1, and this losing pattern Z1 is then forcibly stopped. Therefore, if a small win is won in a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 16c during the variable display of the jackpot pattern X1 or X2, and the small win pattern Y1 can be stopped and displayed, the jackpot that was already won is canceled and becomes a loss, so winning the jackpot can be avoided.

Specifically, during normal game play, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning slot 15, a jackpot suggestion image (for example, a text image of "!!!") indicating that a jackpot has been won is displayed as the variable presentation begins (see Figures 88(a) to (d) and 89(a) to (d)).
In addition, during the variable presentation during normal game play, a variable presentation pattern 50 corresponding to a win/lose lottery based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a of the presentation display device 21, and a variable presentation pattern 50 corresponding to a win/lose lottery based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a of the presentation display device 21 (see Figures 88(a) to (e) and 89(a) to (e)).

When the jackpot suggestion image is displayed, the game ball can be shot toward the second game area 12b so that it will enter the second start winning hole 16c.
Here, if a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 during normal game play and a jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, a "120-second fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is determined (see FIG. 85(b)), and the first special symbol display device 30 displays a variable display (variation effect) of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 for 120 seconds. In contrast, if a gaming ball enters the second normal start winning slot 16c (second start winning slot 16) during normal game play and a losing symbol Z2 is determined, a "13-second fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is determined (see FIG. 85(b)), and the second special symbol display device 31 displays a variable display (variation effect) of the losing symbol Z2 for 13 seconds. Thus, during the variable display of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, a maximum of nine winning/losing lotteries based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second normal start winning slot 16c can be performed. Therefore, if a small win is won in the maximum nine win/lose lotteries that can be performed while the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is being displayed in a changing state, and the small win pattern Y1 is displayed stationary while the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is being displayed in a changing state, the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 (the winning of the jackpot in the win/lose lottery based on the game ball entering the first start winning slot 15) will be canceled.

If the small win symbol Y1 is displayed as a static symbol on the second special symbol display device 31 while the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is being displayed as a variable symbol on the first special symbol display device 30, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is changed to the losing symbol Z1, and the losing symbol Z1 is forcibly displayed as a static symbol on the first special symbol display device 30. Accordingly, the effect symbols 50 are displayed as static symbols in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 in a manner indicating a small win (for example, a manner in which all effect symbols 50 are even-numbered symbols), and the effect symbols 50 are displayed as static symbols in the center of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 in a manner indicating a loss (see Figures 88(c)-(e)). Furthermore, the jackpot suggestion image is erased (see Figure 88(e)).

On the other hand, if the 120-second variable time elapses without the small win symbol Y1 being displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, and the big win symbol X1 or X2 is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, when the second special symbol is being displayed, the losing symbol Z2 is displayed on the second special symbol display device 31. Accordingly, the effect symbol 50 is displayed in a static manner in the center of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 to indicate a big win, and the effect symbol 50 is displayed in a static manner in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 to indicate a loss (see Figures 89(c) to 89(e)). Furthermore, the big win suggestion image is erased (see Figure 89(e)).
In addition, when the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is displayed in a stopped state on the first special pattern display device 30, if the second special pattern is being displayed in a stopped state, no special display is made.

In this way, when a jackpot is won in a normal game state when the number of time-saving activations is about to be reached, there is a possibility that the jackpot can be canceled by executing the above-mentioned game method and aiming to win a small jackpot through a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the normal second start winning slot 16c. If the jackpot can be canceled, the count value of the time-saving activation counter will not be cleared, so it is possible to continue aiming to reach the number of time-saving activations.
It is not necessary to execute the above-described game method when a jackpot is won in the normal game state. For example, if a jackpot is won shortly after the time-saving activation counter has started counting (when the time-saving activation count is far from being reached), a special game based on the jackpot may be executed without executing the above-described game method.

As described above, in pachinko machine P according to other application example 8, not only can it transition to a high-probability time-saving game state with a higher advantage than the normal game state through winning a jackpot (determining the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3) and playing a special game, but it can also transition to a low-probability time-saving game state with a higher advantage than the normal game state by having all 500 win/loss lotteries (win/loss lotteries based on the first special symbol random number and the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number) that trigger the time-saving game during the low-probability game state (normal game state) result in something other than a jackpot (a miss, a small win), without winning a jackpot or playing a special game, thereby providing innovative gameplay and increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, in pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, in the second time-saving game state that is set based on the determination of jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3, the number of time-saving plays is set to a number that is less than the number of time-saving play activations (50 times). This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the second time-saving game state being set is changed to a different time-saving game state by the count value of the time-saving play activation counter reaching the time-saving play activation number during a game state that combines the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, if a jackpot is won in a hit/miss lottery based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot 15 during normal game play, this fact is notified. If a small jackpot is won in a hit/miss lottery based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot 16c during the variable display of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 and the small jackpot symbol Y1 is displayed as a stopped jackpot, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is changed to a losing symbol Z1, and this losing symbol Z1 is forcibly displayed as a stopped jackpot, thereby canceling the jackpot win. This allows the player to choose whether to aim for a small win by throwing a game ball into the second start winning slot 16c and cancel the big win depending on the progress of the game (for example, when the count value of the time-saving activation counter is close to reaching the number of times the time-saving activation count has been reached), thereby providing a new and innovative gameplay that is rich in strategy and increases the player's interest.

Next, the progress of the above-mentioned special game will be explained using a flowchart, focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned embodiment.
First, the special symbol variation start process executed when the special symbol variation starts will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 5000, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special symbol random number is stored in the memory section of the second reserved memory area, i.e., whether or not the second reserved number counter is equal to or greater than "1." If it is determined that the second special symbol random number is not stored, the process proceeds to step 5013. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol random number is stored, the process proceeds to the next step 5001.

In step 5001, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special symbol (the special symbol determined based on the second special symbol random number) is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step 5013. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to the next step 5002.
In step 5002, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the second reserved number counter by "1" and executes a shift process of the second reserved memory area. This shift process is the same as the process of step 804 in the above embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to step 5003.

In step 5003, the main CPU 101 executes a win/lose determination process. This win/lose determination process is the same as the win/lose determination process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, step 5004.
In step 5004, the main CPU 101 executes a second special symbol determination process to determine the type of the second special symbol. This second special symbol determination process is the same as the special symbol determination process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5005.

In step 5005, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 5004 is the big win symbol X3. If it is determined that the second special symbol is not the big win symbol X3 (i.e., the small win symbol Y1 or the losing symbol Z2), the process proceeds to step 5008. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol is the big win symbol X3, the process proceeds to the next step 5006.
In step 5006, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area, which will be described later, relates to the big win symbol X1 or X2.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, as described above, the first special symbol (a special symbol determined based on a first special symbol random number) and the second special symbol can be displayed simultaneously in a variable manner. When the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the determined second special symbol (i.e., the second special symbol displayed as a still image) is stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area. Similarly, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the determined first special symbol (i.e., the first special symbol displayed as a still image) is stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area. That is, the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 30 is stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area, and the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 31 is stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area.
Therefore, in this step 5006, when the variable display of the jackpot pattern X3 determined as the second pattern is started, it is determined whether or not the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 determined as the first special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner in the first special pattern display device 30.
If it is determined that the data does not relate to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 (i.e., it is a losing symbol Z1), the process proceeds to step 5008. On the other hand, if it is determined that the data relates to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, the process proceeds to the next step 5007.

In step 5007, the main CPU 101 rewrites the data relating to the jackpot symbol X3 stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area to data relating to the losing symbol Z2. That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts during the variable display of the first special symbol in which the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 has been determined, if the jackpot symbol X3 is determined as the second special symbol, the jackpot symbol X3 is forcibly rewritten to the losing symbol Z2.
As described above, after the second special chart is determined, the determined jackpot pattern X3 is not forcibly rewritten to the losing pattern Z2, but when the second special chart is determined, the first special pattern display device 30 may determine whether or not the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 determined as the first special chart is being displayed in a variable manner, and if it is determined that the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is being displayed in a variable manner, the losing pattern Z2 may always be determined as the second special chart.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5008.
In step 5008, the main CPU 101 stores the symbol determination command indicating the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Specifically, the second special symbol (big win symbol X3, small win symbol Y1, or losing symbol Z2) determined in the above-mentioned step 5004, or the losing symbol Z2 if a forced rewrite was performed in the above-mentioned step 5007, is stored. As a result, information related to the second special symbol is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the variable effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5009.

In step 5009, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process. This fluctuation pattern determination process is the same as the fluctuation pattern determination process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5010.
In step 5010, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 31. This starts the variable display on the second special symbol display device 31. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5011.

In step 5011, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving count update process. This time-saving count update process is the same as the time-saving count update process in the above-described embodiment, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to step 5012.
In step 5012, the main CPU 101 executes a high probability count update process. This high probability count update process is the same as the high probability count update process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to step 5013.

In step 5013, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first special symbol random number is stored in the memory section of the first reserved memory area, that is, whether the first reserved number counter is equal to or greater than "1". If it is determined that the first special symbol random number is not stored, the variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol random number is stored, the process proceeds to the next step 5014.
In step 5014, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first special symbol is being displayed. If it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display start process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 5015.

In step 5015, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the first reserved number counter by "1" and executes a shift process of the first reserved memory area. This shift process is the same as the process of step 803 in the above embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to step 5016.
In step 5016, the main CPU 101 executes a win/lose determination process. This win/lose determination process is the same as the win/lose determination process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5017.

In step 5017, the main CPU 101 executes a first special symbol determination process to determine the type of the first special symbol. This first special symbol determination process is the same as the special symbol determination process in the above-mentioned embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5018.
In step 5018, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 5017 is the jackpot symbol X1 or X2. If it is determined that the first special symbol is not the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 (i.e., it is a losing symbol Z1), the process proceeds to step 5021. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol is the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, the process proceeds to the next step 5019.

In step 5019, the main CPU 101 determines whether the data stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area relates to the jackpot symbol X3. That is, when the main CPU 101 starts the variable display of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 determined as the first symbol, it determines whether the jackpot symbol X3 determined as the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 31. If it is determined that the data does not relate to the jackpot symbol X3 (i.e., it is the small win symbol Y1 or the losing symbol Z2), the process proceeds to step 5021. On the other hand, if it is determined that the data relates to the jackpot symbol X3, the process proceeds to the next step 5020.
In step 5020, the main CPU 101 rewrites the data relating to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area to data relating to the losing symbol Z1. That is, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts during the variable display of the second special symbol in which the jackpot symbol X3 has been determined, if the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined as the first special symbol, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is forcibly rewritten to the losing symbol Z1.
After the first special pattern is determined, the determined jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is not forcibly rewritten to the losing pattern Z1, but when the first special pattern is determined, the second special pattern display device 31 may determine whether or not the jackpot pattern X3 determined as the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and if it is determined that the jackpot pattern X3 is displayed in a variable manner, the losing pattern Z1 may always be determined as the first special pattern.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5021.

In step 5021, the main CPU 101 stores the symbol determination command indicating the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area in the performance transmission data storage area. Specifically, the first special symbol (jackpot symbol X1 or X2, or losing symbol Z1) determined in the above-mentioned step 3017, or the losing symbol Z1 if a forced rewrite was performed in the above-mentioned step 5020, is stored. As a result, information related to the first special symbol is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the variable performance. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5022.
In step 5022, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern process. This fluctuation pattern determination process is the same as the fluctuation pattern determination process in the above-described embodiment, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5023.

In step 5023, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 30. This starts the variable display on the first special symbol display device 30. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5024.
In step 5024, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving count update process. This time-saving count update process is the same as the time-saving count update process in the above-described embodiment, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to step 5025.

In step 5025, the main CPU 101 executes high probability count update processing. This high probability count update processing is similar to the high probability count update processing in the above-described embodiment, so explanation will be omitted. Then, the special pattern variation start processing ends.

Next, the special symbol variation stop processing that is executed when the variation of the special symbol stops will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 91.
In step 5100, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 30. If it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step 5106. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to the next step 3101.
In step 5101, the main CPU 101 determines whether the variable time of the first special symbol has elapsed. If it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step 5106. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 5102.

In step 5102, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display data for the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area to the first special symbol display device 30, and executes the stop display of the first special symbol. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5103.
In step 5103, the main CPU 101 stores a first special symbol stop display command indicating that the first special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step 5104.

In step 5104, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol stop display time for which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as the first special symbol stop display time). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5105.
In step 5105, the main CPU 101 sets the first special symbol stop display time timer counter to the first special symbol stop display time determined in the above-mentioned step 5104. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5106.

In step 5106, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 31. If it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation stop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 5107.
In step 5107, the main CPU 101 determines whether the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed. If it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation stop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 5108.

In step 5108, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display data for the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area to the second special symbol display device 31, and executes the stop display of the second symbol. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5109.
In step 5109, the main CPU 101 stores a second special symbol stop display command indicating that the second special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step 5110.

In step 5110, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol stop display time for which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as the second special symbol stop display time). Then, the process proceeds to step 5111.
In step 5111, the main CPU 101 sets the second special symbol stop display time timer counter to the second special symbol stop display time determined in the above-mentioned step 5110. Then, the special symbol variation stop processing is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing that is executed after the special pattern variation stop processing is completed will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 92.
In step 5200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special symbol stop display time set in the first stop display time timer counter in the above-mentioned step 5105 has elapsed. If it is determined that the first special symbol stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step 5202. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol stop display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 5201.
In step 5201, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second special symbol stop display time set in the second special symbol stop display time timer counter in the above-mentioned step 5011 has elapsed. If it is determined that the second special symbol stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 5202.

In step 5202, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a jackpot symbol. If it is determined that the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol (i.e., a small jackpot symbol or a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 5209. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 5203.
In step 5203, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a special symbol currently being displayed, i.e., whether or not another special symbol different from the stopped special symbol is currently being displayed. Specifically, if the stopped first special symbol is the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, it determines whether or not the second special symbol is currently being displayed, and if the stopped second special symbol is the jackpot symbol X3, it determines whether or not the first special symbol is currently being displayed. If it is determined that there is no special symbol currently being displayed, it proceeds to step 5207. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a special symbol currently being displayed, it proceeds to the next step 5204.

In step 5204, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is a small win symbol. If it determines that it is not a small win symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), it proceeds to step 5206. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a small win symbol, it proceeds to the next step 5205.

In step 5205, the main CPU 101 rewrites the data relating to the small win symbol being changed (i.e., the data relating to the small win symbol Y1 stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area) to the data relating to the losing symbol. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5206.
In step 5206, the main CPU 101 forcibly stops and displays the special symbol being displayed. Specifically, if the special symbol being displayed is a losing symbol, the losing symbol stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area or the second special symbol temporary storage area is displayed on the corresponding special symbol display device even if the variable time has not elapsed. Also, if the first special symbol is being displayed, the losing symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 even if the variable time for the first special symbol has not elapsed. Also, if the second special symbol is being displayed, the losing symbol Z2 is forcibly stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31 even if the variable time for the second special symbol has not elapsed. Then, the process proceeds to step 5207.

In step 5207, the main CPU 101 turns off the high probability game flag and the time-shortened game flag (first time-shortened game flag, second time-shortened game flag). Note that if the high probability game flag and the time-shortened game flag are off, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5208.
In step 5208, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores an opening command indicating the start of opening processing in the effect transmission data storage area. In addition, the number of rounds in the special game to be executed after the opening time has elapsed is set in the round number storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

In step 5209, which is reached when it is determined in step 5202 that the special symbol is not a big win symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped special symbol is a small win symbol. If it is determined that the special symbol is not a small win symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step 5218. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is a small win symbol, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step 5210.
In step 5210, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving activation count execution process for counting using the time-saving activation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 5211.

In step 5211, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, specifically, whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner when the second special symbol that has stopped and been displayed is the small winning symbol Y1. If it is determined that there is no special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step 5216. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to the next step 5212.
In step 5212, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol being variably displayed is a jackpot symbol. If it is determined that the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 5214. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 5213.

In step 5213, the main CPU 101 rewrites the data relating to the currently changing jackpot symbol (i.e., the data relating to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area) with the data relating to the losing symbol Z1. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5214.

In step 5214, the main CPU 101 forcibly stops and displays the special symbol currently being displayed. Specifically, if the special symbol currently being displayed is a losing symbol Z1, the losing symbol Z1 stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display device 30, even if the change time has not yet elapsed, if the special symbol has been rewritten in step 5213 described above, or the losing symbol Z1 stored in the rewritten first special symbol temporary storage area is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display device 30, even if the change time for this first special symbol has not yet elapsed. Then, proceed to the next step 5215.

In step S215, the main CPU 101 executes a process for counting the number of times the time-saving feature is activated. Then, the process proceeds to step S216.
In step S216, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving activation count start process to start counting by the time-saving activation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step S217.

In step 5217, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time timer counter to the opening time set at the start of the small win game, and stores an opening command indicating that the opening process will begin in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the post-stop process ends.

In step 5218, which is reached when it is determined in step 5209 that the symbol is not a small winning symbol, the main CPU 101 executes a process for counting the number of times the time-saving feature is activated.
In step 5219, the main CPU 101 executes a process for starting counting the number of times the time-saving feature is activated. Then, the process proceeds to step 5220.

In step 5220, the main CPU 101 checks the current game status and stores a game status command in the performance transmission data storage area. This game status command includes information on whether the high probability game flag is on or off, information on whether the time-saving game flags (first time-saving game flag, second time-saving game flag) are on or off, information on the number of high probability games, information on the number of time-saving games, etc. Then, post-stop processing is terminated.

Next, the time-saving activation count execution process of steps 5210, 5215, and 5218 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 5300, the main CPU 101 determines whether the high probability game flag is off. If it is determined that the high probability game flag is not off (i.e., it is on), the main CPU 101 ends the time-saving activation count execution process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability game flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 5301.
In step 5301, the main CPU 101 determines whether a time-saving activation count flag indicating that the count value of the time-saving activation count counter has reached the time-saving activation count is off. If it is determined that the time-saving activation count flag is not off (i.e., is on), the main CPU 101 terminates the time-saving activation count execution process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving activation count flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 5302.

In step 5302, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the time-reduction activation counter by 1. If the count value is 0, the main CPU 101 does nothing here. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5303.
In step 5303, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the time-saving activation counter has reached 0. If it is determined that the count value has not reached 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time-saving activation count execution process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value has reached 0, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 5304.

In step 5304, the main CPU 101 executes a first time-shortened gaming state setting process to set the first time-shortened gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time-shortened gaming flag and sets the number of time-shortened games to "450." Note that, when the number of time-shortened game runs is reached, the normal gaming state is set and the high-probability gaming flag is turned off. This high-probability gaming flag is left off. As a result, the low-probability time-shortened gaming state is set. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5305.
In step 5305, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the time-saving activation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 5306.
In step S306, the main CPU 101 turns on the time-saving activation count reaching flag, and then ends the time-saving activation count execution process.

Next, the process of starting counting the number of time-saving activations in steps 5216 and 5219 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 94.
In step 5350, the main CPU 101 determines whether the high-probability time-shortening game state has ended. Specifically, it determines whether the high-probability game flag has changed from on to off in step 5012 or step 5025 described above. If it is determined that the high-probability time-shortening game state has not ended, the process of starting the count of the number of time-shortening activations is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high-probability time-shortening game state has ended, the process proceeds to the next step 5351.

In step 5351, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving activation count counter to "500". Then, the time-saving activation count start process ends.

Next, the special game ending process executed when the special game ends will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 5400, the main CPU 101 checks the jackpot pattern (stored in the processing area of the main RAM 103) that triggered the execution of the special game that has ended, and executes a game state setting process to set the game state after the special game has ended, depending on the jackpot pattern.
Specifically, regardless of whether the jackpot pattern is X1, X2, or X3, the main CPU 101 turns on both the high probability game flag and the second time-saving game flag, and sets both the high probability number of times and the time-saving number of times to "50."
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5401.

In step 5401, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the time-saving activation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 5402.
In step S402, the main CPU 101 turns off the time-reduction activation count reaching flag, and then ends the special game ending process.

Next, the RAM clearing process executed based on RAM clearing (resetting) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 5500, the main CPU 101 executes a normal game state setting process to set the normal game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns off both the high probability game flag and the time-shortened game flag (the first time-shortened game flag and the second time-shortened game flag). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5501.
In step 5501, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the time-saving activation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 5502.

In step 5502, the main CPU 101 turns off the time-saving activation count reaching flag, and then proceeds to step 5503.
In step S5503, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving activation number counter to the time-saving activation number of 500. Then, the RAM clearing process is terminated.

(Modification of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, during the first time-shortened game state (low probability time-shortened game state) which is set when the count value of the time-shortened game counter reaches the number of time-shortened game activations, a winning probability is set in the lottery for the normal symbol, which is the same as during the non-time-shortened game state; however, this is not limited to this, and the machine may be set so that a winning probability is set in the lottery for the normal symbol, which is the higher probability during the first time-shortened game state, than during the non-time-shortened game state.
In addition, during the first time-shortened game state, it may be possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the specific second start winning port 16d by setting the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols to be higher than during the non-time-shortened game state, setting the time for which the normal symbols change to be shorter, or setting the operating time of the movable piece 16b to be longer.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 8 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, the time-saving game states provided include a time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) that is set through winning a jackpot (determination of the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3) and executing a special game, and a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the number of times that the time-saving mode is activated without winning a jackpot in a low-probability game state (normal game state), but the types of time-saving game states are not limited to these.
For example, a time-shortened game state may be set based on the determination of a special symbol other than a big win symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (for example, a losing symbol determined to set a time-shortened game state, a small win symbol determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.).
In addition, the time-saving game state that is set through winning a jackpot and playing a special game, the time-saving game state that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the number of times that the time-saving game state is activated without winning a jackpot in a low-probability game state, and the time-saving game state that is set based on the determination of a special pattern other than a jackpot pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state may be set so that the difficulty of the game ball entering the specific second start entry port 16d is different, or may be set so that the difficulty is the same.
In the above case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, so-called simultaneous spin control is executed, and the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) is set based on the sum of the number of times the first special symbol changes and the number of times the second special symbol changes, but this method of setting the time-saving game state may be applied to pachinko machines other than those in which simultaneous spin control is executed. That is, even in pachinko machines in which the second special symbol cannot change while the first special symbol is changing, and the first special symbol cannot change while the second special symbol is changing (pachinko machines in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol cannot change simultaneously, and only one of the two changes is performed), the time-saving game state may be set based on the sum of the number of times the first special symbol changes and the number of times the second special symbol changes.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 8 can be achieved.

In addition, the timing of counting by the time-saving activation counter may be either the time when the special pattern starts to change, the time when the special pattern is displayed as stopped, or the time when the special pattern is displayed as stopped and the stopped display time (so-called pattern confirmation time) has elapsed.
Furthermore, if the time-saving activation counter is used to count when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the time-saving activation counter may also be used to count when a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery that triggers the fluctuating special symbol. If the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the number of times that the time-saving activation occurs during the fluctuating special symbol fluctuating, the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) based on the reaching of the time-saving activation state may not be set, and the game state based on the jackpot may be set after the special game ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, in a high probability time-saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3, the number of high probability plays and the number of time-saving plays set are all the same number, but this is not limited to this, and different numbers may be set.
For example, the number of times of time reduction set in a high probability time-saving game state may be set to be less than the number of times of high probability, such as 50 times for high probability and 10 times for time reduction.
Furthermore, when a predetermined jackpot pattern is determined, instead of setting a high-probability time-saving game state after the special game based on that determination ends, a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as a low-probability time-saving game state X) may be set.
Furthermore, the game state (low-probability time-saving game state X) that combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state that is set through winning a jackpot and playing a special game as described above, and the low-probability time-saving game state that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the number of times that time-saving is activated without winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state, may be set so that the difficulty of getting the game ball to enter the specific second start winning port 16d is different, or may be set so that the difficulty is the same. For example, in either the game state (low probability time-saving game state X) that combines a low probability game state and a time-saving game state that is set through winning a jackpot and playing a special game as described above, or the low probability time-saving game state that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the number of times that time-saving is activated without winning a jackpot in the low probability game state, at least one of the following settings may be made to make it easier for the game ball to enter the specific second start-up winning port 16d compared to the other state: to make the probability of winning in the lottery for normal patterns higher, to make the time for the normal pattern change shorter, or to make the operating time of the movable piece 16b longer.
In the above case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 8, counting by the time-saving activation counter is performed only in the normal game state (a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state), but this is not limited to this.
For example, in a pachinko machine that has a game state in which a low-probability game state is set, in addition to the normal game state, a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state X) that is set after the end of a special game based on the determination of a predetermined jackpot pattern, if the result of the win/loss lottery in either the normal game state or the game state that combines the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state X) is other than a jackpot, the time-saving activation counter may be counted, or if the result of the win/loss lottery in both the normal game state and the game state that combines the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state X) is other than a jackpot, the time-saving activation counter may be counted. Then, when the count value of the time-saving activation count counter reaches the number of time-saving activations, a game state (low-probability time-saving game state) that combines the low-probability time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state in other application example 8 may be set.
In the above case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be achieved.

Furthermore, the time-saving activation counter in other application example 8 is configured to count toward the number of time-saving activations by decrementing the value of the time-saving activation count set at the start of counting by a predetermined value ("1" in other application example 8) at the time of counting, but is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined starting value (e.g., "0") may be set at the start of counting, and the count toward the number of time-saving activations may be incremented by a predetermined value (e.g., "1") at the time of counting.
Even in the above case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, when a jackpot is won during normal game play, a jackpot suggestion image is displayed in conjunction with a variable presentation to notify the player that a jackpot has been won, but the method of notification is not limited to this.
For example, in addition to the jackpot suggestion image, the fact that a jackpot has been won may be notified by outputting a predetermined sound or lighting a predetermined lamp in a predetermined lighting mode. Also, the fact that a jackpot has been won may be notified in a pre-reading effect that can be executed before the start of the variable effect based on the first special random number that determines the jackpot.
In addition, the notification may be made not only during the normal game mode but also when a jackpot is won in the high probability time-saving game mode.
Even in the above case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be achieved.

(Another Application Example 9)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 is configured so that a special game is executed only when a jackpot is won, similarly to the above-described embodiment.

(Outline of the structure within the game area 12)
In the game area 12 of the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 9, similar to the above-mentioned embodiment, a general winning port 14, a first start winning port 15, a second start winning port 16, a movable piece 16b, an attacker device, an outlet 19, a gate 20, and a performance display device 21 are provided (see Figure 97).
Of these devices and components, the attacker device has a different configuration from the above-described embodiment, but the components other than the attacker device have the same configuration (structure, installation position, etc.) as the above-described embodiment.
The structure within the game area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 will be described below, focusing on the attacker device that differs from the embodiment described above.

A pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 is provided with two attacker devices, a first attacker device 170 and a second attacker device 180 .
As shown in Figure 97, the first attacker device 170 is located at the lower left of the performance display device 21 (lower part of the first game area 12a), and the second attacker device 180 is located at the lower right of the performance display device 21 (lower part of the second game area 12b).

The first attacker device 170 includes a first large prize opening 171 through which game balls can enter, and a first opening/closing door 172 that opens and closes the first large prize opening 171. Normally, the first opening/closing door 172 is closed and the first large prize opening 171 is blocked, preventing game balls from entering the first large prize opening 171. However, when a special game based on a jackpot is played, the first opening/closing door 172 opens and the first large prize opening 171 is opened, allowing game balls to enter the first large prize opening 171. When one game ball enters the first large prize opening 171, a predetermined number of prize balls (15 in other application example 9) are paid out.
This first large winning opening 171 is designed so that game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter it, but game balls flowing down the second game area 12b cannot enter it.

The second attacker device 180 includes a second large prize opening 181 through which game balls can enter, and a second opening/closing door 182 that opens and closes the second large prize opening 181. Normally, the second opening/closing door 182 is closed and the second large prize opening 181 is blocked, preventing game balls from entering the second large prize opening 181. However, when a special game based on a jackpot is played, the second opening/closing door 182 opens and the second large prize opening 181 is opened, allowing game balls to enter the second large prize opening 181. When one game ball enters the second large prize opening 181, a predetermined number of prize balls (15 in other application example 9) are paid out.
This second large winning opening 181 is designed so that game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter it, but game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter it.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 9, unlike the above-mentioned embodiment, the specific area 57, general area 58 and distribution member 59 are not provided within the first large prize opening 171 and the second large prize opening 181.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, after the special game that is executed based on the winning of the jackpot is completed, the game state is set according to the type of jackpot pattern that was determined at the time of the winning of the jackpot.

(Control and Game Overview)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 9, one of the following game states is set: a normal game state, which is a game state combining a low probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state; a low probability time-shortened game state, which is a game state combining a low probability game state and a first time-shortened game state; a high probability time-shortened game state, which is a game state combining a high probability game state and a second time-shortened game state; or a high probability non-time-shortened game state, which is a game state combining a high probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, the non-time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state, and the second time-shortened game state are set so that the frequency of game balls entering the second start winning hole 16 (the difficulty of ball entry, in other words, the frequency of winning/losing lottery based on game balls entering the second start winning hole 16) is different from each other. The specific settings will be described in detail later.
As in the above-described embodiment, the normal game mode is set in the initial state after shipping from the factory or after resetting.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 9, game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start entry port 15 and the first large entry port 171, and game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the second start entry port 16, and enter the second large entry port 181.
During the normal game state, the high-probability non-time-shortened game state, and the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 described later, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (i.e., hit with the left) so that the game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 and the first large winning hole 171. During the low-probability time-shortened game state, the high-probability time-shortened game state, and the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, X3, or X4 described later, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (i.e., hit with the right) so that the game ball passes through the gate 20 and enters the second start winning hole 16 and the second large winning hole 181.

98(a), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, a jackpot can be won in a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning slot 15, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern X1, X2, or X4 is determined. When the gaming state at the time when the win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning slot 15 is held is a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, low-probability time-shortened gaming state), the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/33, and when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-shortened gaming state, high-probability non-time-shortened gaming state), the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/15.
In addition, the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X1 is set to 98.9%, the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 is set to 1%, and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X4 is set to 0.1%.
The upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 (the upper limit of the first reserved numbers) is set to 4. The upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers is not limited to this.

98(a), it is also possible to win a jackpot in a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 16, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined. The probability of winning a jackpot when the gaming state at the time of the win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 15 is a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, low-probability time-saving gaming state) is set to approximately 1/33, and the probability of winning a jackpot when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) is set to approximately 1/15.
In addition, the probability of winning the jackpot symbol X3 is set to 3%, and the probability of winning the jackpot symbol X4 is set to 97%.
Furthermore, if the result of the above-mentioned lottery is a loss, a loss symbol Z2 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of reserved second special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the second start winning slot 16 (the upper limit of the second reserved numbers) is set to 4. The upper limit of the number of reserved second special random numbers is not limited to this.

98(a) and 98(c), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, two rounds of play are executed during the special game based on that determination, and the rounds end when either the first large prize opening 171 opens for 29.0 seconds or one game ball enters the first large prize opening 171. Including the game ball that enters just before the first large prize opening 171 closes and is detected after the first large prize opening 171 closes, an average of 1.8 game balls can enter during one round of play. Therefore, an average of 36 game balls can be won during the special game.
Furthermore, if a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X2 is determined, two rounds of play are played during the special game based on that determination, and the rounds end when either the second large prize opening 181 opens for 29.0 seconds or one game ball enters the second large prize opening 181. Including the game ball that enters just before the second large prize opening 181 closes and is detected after the second large prize opening 181 closes, an average of 1.8 game balls can enter during one round of play. Therefore, an average of 36 game balls can be won during the special game.
In addition, when the jackpot pattern X3 or X4 is determined, during the special game based on that determination, 10 round games are played, which end when either the second large prize opening 181 opens for 29.0 seconds or one game ball enters the second large prize opening 181, and an average of 270 game balls can be won.

(General overview of general games)
Next, an outline of the normal game executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 will be described.
99, during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state, high-probability non-time-saving game state), the probability of winning by lottery of a normal symbol is set to approximately 1/1.2, the normal symbol variation time is set to 10 seconds, and the operation time of the movable piece 16b when a winning normal symbol is drawn (the time when the movable piece 16b is in an open state) is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not specifically shown, the same settings are also made during special games.
Furthermore, during the first time-shortened game state (low-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is set to approximately 1/1.2, the same as during the non-time-shortened game state, the normal symbol variation time is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a normal symbol is drawn and a winning symbol is set to 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-shortened game state.
Furthermore, during the second time-shortened game state (high-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1, which is higher than during the non-time-shortened game state and the first time-shortened game state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortened game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a normal symbol is drawn and a winning symbol is set to 5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortened game state.

In other words, during both the non-time-saving game mode (normal game mode, high-probability non-time-saving game mode) and the special game mode, there is a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through gate 20, and there are many opportunities for movable piece 16b to be in the open state. However, because the normal symbol change time is 5 seconds and the movable piece 16b operation time is 0.05 seconds, although the time it takes for movable piece 16b to change from a closed state to an open state is long (the interval from the open state to the next open state is long), the time that movable piece 16b remains in the open state is extremely short. Therefore, during the non-time-saving game mode, movable piece 16b is almost always in the closed state, making it nearly impossible for a game ball that enters second game area 12b to enter second start winning slot 16.

In contrast, during the first time-shortened game state (low-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is the same as during the non-time-shortened game state, so there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to be in the open state, just as during the non-time-shortened game state. Furthermore, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state, and the movable piece 16b operates for 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-shortened game state. Therefore, although the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to change from a closed state to an open state is short (the interval from the open state to the next open state is short), the time the movable piece 16b remains in the open state is long. Therefore, during the first time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is almost always in the open state, and there is a high probability that a game ball that enters the second game area 12b will enter the second start winning slot 16.

Furthermore, during the second time-shortened game state (during the second low-probability time-shortened game state and the high-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is higher than during the non-time-shortened game state or the first time-shortened game state, so there are many opportunities for movable piece 16b to be in the open state. Furthermore, since the normal symbol fluctuation time is the same as during the first time-shortened game state, 0.5 seconds, and the operating time of movable piece 16b is the same as during the first time-shortened game state, 5 seconds, similarly to during the first time-shortened game state, while the time it takes for movable piece 16b to change from a closed state to an open state is short (the interval from the open state to the next open state is short), the time movable piece 16b remains in the open state is long. Therefore, during the second time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is more likely to be in an open state than during the first time-shortened game state, and the possibility that a game ball that enters the second game area 12b will enter the second start winning hole 16 is higher than during the first time-shortened game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 9, the probability of winning by drawing a normal pattern is set high overall in all of the non-time-saving play state, the first time-saving play state and the second time-saving play state, but by varying the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the operation time of the movable piece 16b, the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 (i.e., the frequency of the game ball entering the second start winning port 16, in other words, the frequency of the winning/losing lottery being held based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16) is changed.
In other words, during the first time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is more likely to be maintained in an open state than in the non-time-shortened game state, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning port 16, and during the second time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is even more likely to be maintained in an open state than in the first time-shortened game state, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning port 16.
Therefore, during the second time-shortened game state, more opportunities for winning or losing lottery can be acquired while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses than during the non-time-shortened game state and the first time-shortened game state, and during the first time-shortened game state, more opportunities for winning or losing lottery can be acquired while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses than during the non-time-shortened game state.

(Outline of game state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, one of the game states is set to a normal game state, a low probability time-shortened game state, a high probability time-shortened game state, or a high probability non-time-shortened game state.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 98 (b), in both cases where a jackpot is won and jackpot pattern X1 is determined by a win/lose lottery based on the first special chart random number, and where a jackpot is won and jackpot pattern X3 is determined by a win/lose lottery based on the second special chart random number, the game state after the end of the special game based on that determination is set to a high probability game state, and is also set to a non-time-saving game state, thereby setting the normal game state.

98(b), when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined by the lottery based on the first special symbol random number, the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to a high probability game state, and the game state is set to a second time-saving game state, thereby setting a high probability time-saving game state. Also, the number of high probability wins is set to 10,000, and the number of time-saving wins is set to 5.
That is, after the special game that is executed when the jackpot pattern X2 is determined is completed, the game state is set to a high-probability time-shortened game state, and the high-probability time-shortened game state continues until the results of the winning/losing lottery are derived five times (until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches five times).
Then, during this high-probability time-shortening game state, if the results of all five lotteries are other than a jackpot (a miss), the second time-shortening game state is changed to a non-time-shortening game state while the high-probability game state remains as it is, thereby changing the game state to a high-probability non-time-shortening game state.
After that, the high-probability non-time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/loss lottery is derived 9,995 times (until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 9,995). Then, during this high-probability time-saving game state, if the result of the win/loss lottery is not a jackpot (a miss) all 9,995 times, the non-time-saving game state remains, and the high-probability game state is changed to a low-probability game state, thereby changing the game state to a normal game state. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state is approximately 1/15, so essentially the high-probability non-time-saving game state continues until a jackpot is won again.

98(b), when a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to a high probability game state, and the game state is set to a second time-saving game state, thereby setting a high probability time-saving game state. In addition, the number of high probability wins and the number of time-saving wins are both set to 10,000.
That is, after the special game that is executed when the jackpot pattern X4 is determined is completed, the game state is set to a high-probability time-shortened game state, and the high-probability time-shortened game state continues until the results of the winning/losing lottery are derived 10,000 times (until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10,000 times).
Then, during this high-probability time-shortened gaming state, if the results of the lottery for winning or losing all 10,000 times are other than a jackpot (a miss), the high-probability gaming state is changed to a low-probability gaming state, and the second time-shortened gaming state is changed to a non-time-shortened gaming state, thereby changing the gaming state to a normal gaming state. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is approximately 1/15, so in effect, the high-probability time-shortened gaming state will continue until another jackpot is won.

98(b), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, after the low-probability game state (normal game state) is set, if the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the predetermined number of times for activating time-saving (100 times in another application example 9) without winning a jackpot (i.e., if the results of the win/lose lottery in the low-probability game state are other than a jackpot all 100 times), the low-probability game state is left as it is and a first time-saving game state is set, thereby setting a low-probability time-saving game state. When the low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving times is set to 100.
After the low-probability time-shortened game state is set, the low-probability time-shortened game state continues until the number of times the special symbols change reaches 100 times (i.e., until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 100 times) without winning a jackpot.
Then, if the results of the lottery for winning or losing all 100 times during the low-probability time-shortened game state are other than a jackpot (a miss), the first time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state while the low-probability game state remains as it is, and the game state is changed to a normal game state.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 9, a time-saving activation counter for counting the number of times (100 times) time-saving is activated, which will result in the low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) being set, is configured in a specified memory area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of this time-saving activation counter is reset when one of the following reset conditions is met: RAM is cleared (reset) by a specified operation, special play ends, or a low-probability time-saving play state (first time-saving play state) is set.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the game state thereafter is set to the normal game state (low probability game state), and from this point on, the time-saving activation counter starts counting.
Furthermore, when the special game based on the determination of the big win symbol X1 or X3 is finished, the game state thereafter is set to the normal game state, and from this point onwards, counting by the time-saving activation counter is started.
Furthermore, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X4 ends, the game state thereafter is set to a high probability time-saving game state (high probability game state). Therefore, the time-saving activation counter does not start counting from the point when the special game ends, but starts counting from the point when the normal game state (low probability game state) is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 9, a time-saving activation counter counts each time a special symbol changes, and when the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the number of time-saving activations, a low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above.

As mentioned above, counting by the time-saving activation counter begins when the normal game mode (low-probability game mode) is set. If counting by the time-saving activation counter begins when the normal game mode is set, the game mode will become the normal game mode when the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches 100 time-saving activations (i.e., when the low-probability time-saving game mode is set).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 9, the low probability time-saving game state can be set only once after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the special game based on winning a jackpot has ended until the next jackpot is won.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the time-saving activation count (100 times) and the low-probability time-saving game state is set, the low-probability time-saving game state cannot be set again until the next big win is won.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 9, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter is reset by setting the low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving activation counter is set to stop counting until the next jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 9, it is not specified that a time-saving game state is set for the losing symbols (Z1, Z2). Therefore, after the losing symbol stops, the game state does not change, and the game state at the time the losing symbol was determined continues.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 9, the number of consecutive time-saving settings or the number of consecutive probability-changing settings are not set as in the above-mentioned embodiment, and whenever a jackpot symbol X2 or X4 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends.

(Gameability of Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 9)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 9, as described above, the game is set to proceed in one of the following states: a normal game state (a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state), a low-probability time-shortened game state (a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a first time-shortened game state), a high-probability time-shortened game state (a game state that combines a high-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state), or a high-probability non-time-shortened game state (a game state that combines a high-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state).

When a player starts playing, the normal game mode is often set. During this normal game mode, as described above, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot), and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, the game ball may enter the first start winning hole 15 but will not enter the second start winning hole 16. A lottery is then held based on the game ball's entry into the first start winning hole 15, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X4 is determined (see FIG. 98(a)).
Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the game state after the special game based on that determination is completed is set to the normal game state, and when the jackpot symbol X2 or X4 is determined, the game state after the special game based on that determination is completed is set to the high probability time-saving game state (see Figures 98(b) and 100). In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, if the left hit is performed as instructed during the normal game state, the jackpot will be won and the game will transition to the normal game state or the high probability time-saving game state (see Figure 100).
However, since the jackpot pattern X2 is determined in 1% of cases where a jackpot is won, and the jackpot pattern X4 is determined in 0.1% of cases where a jackpot is won (see Figure 98 (a)), during the normal game state, even if a jackpot is won, it is extremely difficult to transition to the high-probability time-shortened game state.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the number of times the special symbol changes during normal game mode reaches the time-saving activation count (100 times) without winning a jackpot (if the number of times the result of the win/lose lottery reaches the time-saving activation count), the game mode thereafter will be set to a low-probability time-saving game mode (see Figure 98 (b)). That is, in pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, if you hit the left side as instructed during normal game mode, all 100 win/lose lottery results will be other than a jackpot (i.e., a miss), and the machine will transition to a low-probability time-saving game mode (see Figure 100). This low-probability time-saving game mode will continue until the result of the win/lose lottery has been determined 100 times without winning a jackpot.

During the low-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning port 16 is more likely to be maintained in an open state than during the normal game state, making it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning port 16, allowing the player to aim for the next jackpot while minimizing the loss of game balls as the game progresses. Also, during the low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball (hit to the right) toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball has a chance of entering the second start winning port 16 and will not enter the first start winning port 15. A lottery is then held based on the game ball's entry into the second start winning port 16, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 98(a)).
Then, when the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the game state after the special game based on that determination is completed is set to the normal game state, and when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, as described above, the game state after the special game based on that determination is completed is set to the high probability time-saving game state (see Figures 98(b) and 100). In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, if you hit the right as instructed during the low probability time-saving game state, you will win a jackpot and transition to the normal game state or the high probability time-saving game state (see Figure 100).
In addition, since the jackpot pattern X4 is determined in 97% of cases when a jackpot is won (see Figure 98 (a)), when a jackpot is won during a low-probability time-shortened game state, it is extremely easy to transition to a high-probability time-shortened game state.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning hole 16 is more likely to remain open than during the low-probability time-saving game state, making it extremely easy for game balls to enter the second start winning hole 16. This allows the player to aim for the next jackpot while minimizing the loss of game balls as the game progresses. Also, during the high-probability time-saving game state, just like during the low-probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball (to the right) toward the second game area 12b. As long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this instruction, the game ball has a chance of entering the second start winning hole 16 and will not enter the first start winning hole 15. A lottery is then held based on the game ball's entry into the second start winning hole 16, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined (see Figure 98(a)).

Here, in the high-probability time-saving game state that is set based on the determination of jackpot symbol X4, the number of time-saving cycles is set to 10,000 (see Figure 98 (b)). As mentioned above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state is approximately 1/15, so during this high-probability time-saving game state, a jackpot can be won again through a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning slot 16. If a jackpot is won through this win/lose lottery, jackpot symbol X4 is determined with an extremely high probability. Therefore, once jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the execution of special games based on the determination of jackpot symbol X4 and the setting of the high-probability time-saving game state are repeated unless jackpot symbol X3, which has an extremely low probability of being determined (3%), is determined, making it highly likely that a large number of game balls can be won at once.

On the other hand, in the high-probability time-saving game state, which is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, the number of time-saving times is set to five (see Figure 98 (b)). If the result of all five win/loss lotteries is a loss without a jackpot being won, the game transitions to the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and an instruction is given to shoot (left-handed) the game ball toward the first game area 12a. Therefore, after the transition to the high-probability non-time-saving game state, a win/loss lottery is held based on the game ball entering the first start winning slot 15, just as in the normal game state. Then, after the high-probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, a maximum of nine win/loss lotteries will be held based on the game ball entering the second start winning slot 16 (a win/loss lottery for the number of time-saving times (five) and a win/loss lottery for the maximum number of second reserves (four) that can be stored at the end of the fifth win/loss lottery). If a jackpot is won in these maximum nine draws, there is an extremely high probability that jackpot symbol X4 will be determined and the high-probability time-saving game state will be set again; however, a jackpot is not necessarily won in these maximum nine draws. Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving game state set based on the determination of jackpot symbol X2, the high-probability time-saving game state is less likely to be set again than in the high-probability time-saving game state set based on the determination of jackpot symbol X4.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 9, when a high-probability time-shortened game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4, the execution of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4 and the setting of the high-probability time-shortened game state are repeated with an extremely high probability. In other words, the high-probability time-shortened game state set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4 is an extremely advantageous game state for the player.
Then, even if a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 during a normal game state or during a high-probability non-time-saving game state which is entered after the end of a high-probability time-saving game state, and a jackpot is won by a hit/miss lottery based on said ball entering, the jackpot pattern X4 is almost never determined. However, if a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 during a low-probability time-saving game state which is entered when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the number of time-saving activations (without winning a jackpot or playing a special game), and a jackpot is won by a hit/miss lottery based on said ball entering, the jackpot pattern X4 will be determined with an extremely high probability.
Therefore, a novel game feature is given in which the low probability time-shortening game state, which can be shifted from the normal game state without winning a jackpot or going through a special game, becomes a chance zone for shifting to a high probability time-shortening game state based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X4, which is extremely advantageous for the player, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, not only can it be possible to transition to a high-probability time-saving game state with a higher advantage than the normal game state through winning a jackpot (determining the jackpot symbol XX2 or X4) and playing a special game, but it can also be possible to transition to a low-probability time-saving game state with a higher advantage than the normal game state by having the result of a win/lose lottery (a loss) for all 100 times during the low-probability game state (normal game state), which is the number of times the time-saving function is activated, be other than a jackpot (a loss), without winning a jackpot or playing a special game, thereby providing innovative gameplay and increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, in the second time-saving game state that is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, the number of time-saving plays is set to a number that is less than the number of time-saving play activations (5 times). This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the second time-saving game state being set is changed to a different time-saving game state by the count value of the time-saving play activation counter reaching the time-saving play activation number during a game state that combines the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state.

Note that the progress of the special symbol game in Other Application Example 9 is almost identical to the contents of the flowchart explaining the progress of the special symbol game in the pachinko machine P according to the above-mentioned embodiment and Other Application Example 6, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

(Modification of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, during the first time-shortened game state (low probability time-shortened game state) which is set when the count value of the time-shortened game counter reaches the number of time-shortened game activations, a winning probability is set in the lottery for the normal symbol, which is the same as during the non-time-shortened game state; however, this is not limited to this, and the machine may be set so that a winning probability is set in the lottery for the normal symbol, which is higher during the first time-shortened game state than during the non-time-shortened game state.
In addition, during the first time-shortened game state, it may be possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning port 16 by setting the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols to be higher than during the non-time-shortened game state, setting the time for which the normal symbols change to be shorter, or setting the operating time of the movable piece 16b to be longer.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, the time-saving game states provided are a time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) that is set through winning a jackpot (determination of jackpot pattern X2 or X4) and executing a special game, and a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the number of times that the time-saving mode is activated without winning a jackpot in a low-probability game state (normal game state), but the types of time-saving game states are not limited to these.
For example, a time-shortened game state may be set based on the determination of a special symbol other than a big win symbol that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (for example, a losing symbol determined to set a time-shortened game state, a small win symbol determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.).
In addition, the time-saving game state that is set through winning a jackpot and playing a special game, the time-saving game state that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the number of times that the time-saving game state is activated without winning a jackpot in a low-probability game state, and the time-saving game state that is set based on the determination of a special pattern other than a jackpot pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state may be set so that the difficulty of the game ball entering the second start entry port 16 is different, or may be set so that the difficulty is the same.
Furthermore, in a time-saving game state that is set based on the determination of a special pattern other than a jackpot pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state, the probability of determining the jackpot pattern X4, which is extremely advantageous to the player, may be set to be extremely high, similar to the low-probability time-saving game state in other application example 9.
Even in the above case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be achieved.

Furthermore, when a predetermined jackpot pattern is determined, instead of setting a high-probability time-saving game state after the special game based on that determination ends, a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as a low-probability time-saving game state X) may be set.
Furthermore, the game state (low-probability time-saving game state X) that combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state that is set through winning a jackpot and executing a special game as described above, and the low-probability time-saving game state that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the number of times that time-saving is activated without winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state, may be set so that the difficulty of getting the game ball to enter the second start entry port 16 is different, or may be set so that the difficulty is the same. For example, in either the game state (low probability time-saving game state X) that combines a low probability game state and a time-saving game state that is set through winning a jackpot and playing a special game as described above, or the low probability time-saving game state that is set when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the number of times that time-saving is activated without winning a jackpot in the low probability game state, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning port 16 by setting the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery to be higher than in the other state, setting the time for the normal pattern to change to be shorter, or setting the operating time of the movable piece 16b to be longer.
Even in the above case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 9, counting by the time-saving activation counter is performed only in the normal game state (a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state), but this is not limited to this.
For example, in a pachinko machine in which a low-probability game state is set, in addition to the normal game state, a game state (low-probability time-shortened game state X) is provided that combines a low-probability game state and a time-shortened game state that is set after the end of a special game based on the determination of a predetermined jackpot pattern, if the result of the win/loss lottery is other than a jackpot in either the normal game state or the game state (low-probability time-shortened game state X) that combines the low-probability game state and the time-shortened game state, counting may be performed using the time-shortened activation counter, or if the result of the win/loss lottery is other than a jackpot in both the normal game state and the game state (low-probability time-shortened game state X) that combines the low-probability game state and the time-shortened game state, counting may be performed using the time-shortened activation counter. Then, when the count value of the time-saving activation count counter reaches the number of time-saving activations, a game state (low-probability time-saving game state) that combines the low-probability time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state in other application example 9 may be set.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be achieved.

In addition, the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 9 may be configured by applying various settings and controls of the above-mentioned embodiment and its modified examples, and the pachinko machines P relating to other application examples 1 to 8 and their modified examples, within the scope that does not cause contradictions.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be achieved.

(Another Application Example 10)
The pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10 is not a so-called mixed type 1 and type 2 pachinko machine or a pachinko machine that performs so-called simultaneous rotation control, but is configured so that special games are executed only based on winning a jackpot, similar to the above-mentioned embodiment and other application example 6.

(Outline of the structure within the game area 12)
In the game area 12 of the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10, similar to the above-mentioned embodiment, a general winning port 14, a first starting winning port 15, a second starting winning port 16, a movable piece 16b, an attacker device 17, an outlet 19, a gate 20, and a performance display device 21 are provided, but only the internal structure of the attacker device 17 differs from that of the above-mentioned embodiment.
Specifically, unlike the above-described embodiment, the special area 57, the general area 58, and the allocating member 59 are not provided in the jackpot opening 18 of the attacker device 17. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, after the special game executed based on the winning of the jackpot is completed, the game state is set according to the type of jackpot symbol determined at the time of the winning of the jackpot.
The other devices and components have the same structure and are installed in the same positions as in the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 3), and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

(Control and Game Overview)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In a pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, one of the following game states is set: a normal game state, which is a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state; a first low-probability time-shortened game state (hereinafter also referred to as the first low-probability time-shortened game state), which is a game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-shortened game state (time-shortened game state); a second low-probability time-shortened game state (hereinafter also referred to as the second low-probability time-shortened game state), which is a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state (time-shortened game state); or a high-probability time-shortened game state (hereinafter also referred to as the high-probability time-shortened game state), which is a game state combining a high-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state.

Here, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10, the non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state are set so that the frequency of game balls entering the second start winning port 16 (the difficulty of ball entry, in other words, the frequency of winning/losing lottery based on game balls entering the second start winning port 16) is different from each other.
As in the above-described embodiment, the normal game mode is set in the initial state after shipping from the factory or after resetting.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10, game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning port 15, and game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the large winning port 18, and enter the second start winning port 16.
During the normal game state, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot) so that the game ball will enter the first start winning port 15b, and during the first low probability time-shortened game state, the second low probability time-shortened game state, the high probability time-shortened game state and the special game, the game ball will pass through the gate 20 and enter the second start winning port 16, and the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right shot) so that the game ball will enter the large winning port 18.

As shown in Figure 101 (a), in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10, it is possible to win a jackpot in a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning port 15, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined.
The probability of winning a jackpot when the game state at the time when the winning/losing lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting winning slot 15 is a low-probability game state (normal game state, first low-probability time-saving game state, second low-probability time-saving game state) is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a jackpot when the above-mentioned game state is a high-probability game state (high-probability time-saving game state) is set to approximately 6/300.
In addition, the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X1 is set to 25/100 (25%), and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 is set to 75/100 (75%).
Furthermore, if the result of the above-mentioned lottery is a loss, a loss symbol Z1 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 (the upper limit of the first reserved numbers) is set to 4. The upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers is not limited to this.

101(a), it is possible to win a jackpot in a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 16, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern X3, X4, or X5 is determined. If the gaming state at the time of the win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 16 is a low-probability gaming state, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and if the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 6/300.
In addition, the probability of winning the jackpot symbol X3 is set to 25/100 (25%), the probability of winning the jackpot symbol X4 is set to 30/100 (30%), and the probability of winning the jackpot symbol X5 is set to 45/100 (45%).
Furthermore, if the result of the above-mentioned lottery is a loss, a loss symbol Z2 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of reserved second special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the second start winning slot 16 (the upper limit of the second reserved numbers) is set to 4. The upper limit of the number of reserved second special random numbers is not limited to this.

As shown in Figure 101(a), in any case where a jackpot is won and jackpot patterns X1, X2, X3, or X4 are determined, four round games are played during the special game based on that determination, and the game ends when either the large prize opening 18 is open for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18, and approximately 400 game balls can be won.
When the jackpot is won and the jackpot pattern X5 is determined, the above-mentioned round game is executed 10 times during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 1,000 game balls can be acquired.

(General overview of general games)
Next, an outline of the normal game executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 will be described.
101(c), in the non-time-saving game state (normal game state), the probability of winning by lottery of normal symbols is set to approximately 1/1.1, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds, and the operation time of movable piece 16b when the lottery of normal symbols is a winning one (the time that movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state) is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not specifically shown, the same settings are made during special games.
In addition, during both the first time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state) and the second time-shortened game state (second low-probability time-shortened game state, high-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1, the same as during the non-time-shortened game state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a normal symbol is drawn and winning is set to 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-shortened game state.

In other words, during the non-time-saving game mode (normal game mode), there is a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery that is held when a game ball passes through gate 20, and there are many opportunities for movable piece 16b to open. However, because the normal symbol fluctuation time is 10 seconds and the movable piece 16b operation time is 0.05 seconds, although the time it takes for movable piece 16b to change from a closed state to an open state is long (the interval from the open state to the next open state is long), the time that movable piece 16b remains in the open state is extremely short. Therefore, during the non-time-saving game mode, movable piece 16b is almost always in a closed state, and game balls that enter second game area 12b almost never enter second start winning slot 16.

In contrast, during the first time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state) and the second time-shortened game state (second low-probability time-shortened game state, high-probability time-shortened game state), winning probability is the same as during the non-time-shortened game state, so there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to open, just as during the non-time-shortened game state. Furthermore, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-shortened game state. Therefore, although the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to change from a closed state to an open state is short (the interval from the open state to the next open state is short), the time that the movable piece 16b remains in the open state is long. Therefore, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is almost always in an open state, and game balls that enter the second game area 12b can enter the second start winning hole 16 with a high frequency.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10, the probability of winning by drawing a normal pattern is set to be extremely high overall in all of the non-time-saving play state, the first time-saving play state and the second time-saving play state, but by varying the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the operation time of the movable piece 16b, the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 (i.e., the frequency of the game ball entering the second start winning port 16, in other words, the frequency of the winning/losing lottery being held based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16) is changed.
That is, during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, unlike during the non-time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is maintained in an almost open state, so that it is relatively easy for game balls to enter the second start winning hole 16. Therefore, during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, it is possible to acquire an opportunity to win or lose the lottery while suppressing the decrease in game balls that accompanies the progress of the game compared to during the non-time-shortened game state.

(Outline of game state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10, one of the game states is set to a normal game state, a first low-probability time-shortened game state, a second low-probability time-shortened game state, or a high-probability time-shortened game state.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 101 (b), in both cases where a jackpot is won and a jackpot symbol X1 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the first special random number, and where a jackpot is won and a jackpot symbol X3 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number, the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to a low-probability game state, and is also set to a second time-saving game state, thereby setting a second low-probability time-saving game state. Also, the number of time-saving times is set to 100.
Then, during this second low-probability time-shortened game state, if the results of the winning/losing lottery are all losses 100 times, the second time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state, and the game state is changed to a normal game state.

101(b), when a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, or when a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbol X4 or X5 is determined, the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to a high probability game state, and is also set to a second time-saving game state, thereby setting a high probability time-saving game state. Also, the number of high probability wins and the number of time-saving wins are both set to 10,000.
That is, after the special game that is executed when the jackpot pattern X2, X4 or X5 is determined is completed, the game state is set to a high-probability time-shortened game state, and the high-probability time-shortened game state continues until the results of the win/loss lottery are derived 10,000 times without winning the jackpot (until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10,000 times).
If the results of the lottery for winning or losing during this high-probability time-shortened game state are all losses 10,000 times, the high-probability game state is changed to a low-probability game state, and the second time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state, thereby changing the game state to a normal game state. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state is approximately 6/300 (1/50), so in effect, the high-probability time-shortened game state will continue until another jackpot is won.

101(b), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, after the low-probability game state (normal game state, second low-probability time-saving game state) is set, if the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the predetermined number of times for activating time-saving (900 times in another application example 10) without winning a jackpot (i.e., if the results of the win/loss lottery in the low-probability game state are all losses), the low-probability game state is left as it is, and the first time-saving game state is set, thereby setting the first low-probability time-saving game state. When the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving times is set to 1200.
After the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set, the first low-probability time-shortened game state continues until the number of times the special symbols change reaches 1200 without winning a jackpot (i.e., until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 1200 times).
Then, if the results of the lottery for winning or losing during the first low-probability time-shortened game state are all losses 1,200 times, the low-probability game state remains the same, and the first time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state, thereby changing the game state to a normal game state. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state is approximately 1/300, and it is almost certain that a jackpot will be won during the first low-probability time-shortened game state.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10, a time-saving activation counter for counting the number of times (900 times) time-saving is activated, which will result in the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) being set, is configured using a specified memory area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of this time-saving activation counter is reset when one of the following reset conditions is met: RAM is cleared (reset) by a specified operation, special game play ends, or the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is set.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the game state thereafter is set to the normal game state (low probability game state), and from this point on, the time-saving activation counter starts counting.
Furthermore, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X3 is finished, the subsequent game state is set to the first low probability time-shortened game state, and from this point onwards, counting by the time-shortened activation counter is started.
When the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, X4, or X5 ends, the game state thereafter is set to a high-probability time-saving game state (high-probability game state). Therefore, the time-saving activation counter does not start counting from the point when the special game ends, but starts counting from the point when the normal game state (low-probability game state) is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the first low-probability time-saving game state can be set only once after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the special game based on winning a jackpot has ended until the next jackpot is won.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the number of time-saving activations (900 times) and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving game state cannot be set again until the next big win is won.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter is reset by setting the first low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving activation counter is set to stop counting until the next jackpot is won or the RAM is cleared.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, it is not specified that a time-saving game state is set for the losing symbols (Z1, Z2). Therefore, after the losing symbol stops, the game state does not change, and the game state at the time the losing symbol was determined continues.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the number of consecutive time-saving settings or the number of consecutive probability-changing settings are not set as in the above-mentioned embodiment, and whenever a jackpot symbol X2, X4, or X5 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends.

(Outline of control related to determination of variation pattern command)
A pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 is provided with table A, table B, table C, and table D as a fluctuation pattern table 114 storing fluctuation pattern commands associated with fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 102(a)). Then, similar to the above-described embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, a fluctuation pattern command is determined by referring to one of the fluctuation pattern tables 114.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another low usage example 10, in order to improve the presentation effect after the special game ends in balance with the executed special game, the tendency of the variation pattern that can be determined according to the number of times the special pattern changes after the special game ends (for example, only a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time set is determined, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time set is likely to be determined, etc.) is changed so that a presentation according to the number of times the special pattern changes can be executed, so that after a jackpot is won and a special game is executed, the variation pattern table 114 that is referenced when determining the variation pattern command can be switched according to the number of times the special pattern changes after the special game ends.
That is, after the special game ends, it is possible to determine a variation pattern command based on different variation pattern tables 114 depending on the number of variations even during the same game state.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern table 114 referred to when determining the variation pattern command is switched as described above according to the number of variations without the execution of a special game, the tendency of the variation pattern determined will change even though a special game is not being played, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable with the presentation. Therefore, after the RAM is cleared, switching of the variation pattern table 114 according to the number of variations of the special symbol since the RAM was cleared is prohibited until the first jackpot is won, and the variation pattern command is determined based on the variation pattern table 114 associated with the currently set game state.
In other words, from the time the RAM is cleared until the first big win is won, if the same game state is in effect, the variation pattern command is always determined based on the same variation pattern table 114 according to the currently set game state.

(Determining the fluctuation pattern table 114 to be referenced)
Here, the process of determining the fluctuation pattern table 114 to be referenced when determining the fluctuation pattern command in another application example 10 will be described.
A pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 has, as tables used to determine the variation pattern table 114 to be referenced, a selection state value table for determining the selection state value described below, and a determination table that defines the variation pattern table 114 to be referenced. When determining a variation pattern command, the variation pattern table 114 to be referenced is determined based on information related to these tables.

The selection state value table defines the selection state values used to determine the fluctuation pattern table 114. As shown in FIG. 102(b), this selection state value table defines the selection state values that are set based on the winning of a jackpot or the execution of RAM clear (reset processing).
If a jackpot is won by the win/lose lottery, a selection state value corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5) determined at the time of the jackpot is acquired in a special game end process executed at the end of the special game based on the win, and this acquired selection state value is set in a selection state flag configured by a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Furthermore, if a RAM clear is executed, a selection state value corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear is acquired, and this acquired selection state is set in the above-mentioned selection state flag.

As shown in Figure 102 (b), according to the selection state value table, if the jackpot pattern determined at the time of winning is X1 or X3, a selection state value of "01H" is obtained, and if the jackpot pattern determined at the time of winning is X2, X4 or X5, a selection state value of "02H" is obtained.
Furthermore, if the RAM is cleared, the selection state value "00H" is acquired.

The decision table defines the fluctuation pattern table 114 to be referenced.
In this determination table, as shown in FIG. 102(c), when the selection state value set in the selection state flag is "01H" or "02H" (i.e., when the special game based on winning the jackpot has ended), a variation pattern table 114 to be referenced is determined for each number of variations since the end of the special game executed based on winning the jackpot.
Furthermore, when the selection state value set in the selection state flag is "00H" (i.e., after RAM clearing), the variation pattern table 114 to be referenced is determined depending on whether the time-shortened game flag (first time-shortened game flag indicating that the first time-shortened game state is in progress, second time-shortened game flag indicating that the second time-shortened game state is in progress) is on or off (i.e., whether or not the game is in a time-shortened game state).
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the second time-shortened game state is set via a special game based on winning a jackpot, so after the RAM is cleared, only the first time-shortened game state, which does not go through a special game, can be set unless a jackpot is won. Therefore, when the selected state value is "00H", both the first time-shortened game flag and the second time-shortened game flag are turned off, or the first time-shortened game flag is turned on.

As shown in Figure 102(c), according to the determination table, if the selection status value set in the selection status flag is "01H" (if a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X1 is determined by the lottery based on the first special symbol random number, or if a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X3 is determined by the lottery based on the second special symbol random number), then the number of times the special symbol changes after the end of the special game based on that determination is 1, table C is determined if the number of times it changes is 2 to 99, table D is determined if the number of times it changes is 100, table A is determined if the number of times it changes is 101 to 900, table C is determined if the number of times it changes is 901, table B is determined if the number of times it changes is 902 to 2099, table D is determined if the number of times it changes is 2100, and table A is determined from 2101 onwards.

That is, for the first fluctuation during the second low-probability time-shortened game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern described above, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table C, for the 2nd to 99th fluctuations during the second low-probability time-shortened game state, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table B, and for the 100th fluctuation during the second low-probability time-shortened game state (the final fluctuation during the second low-probability time-shortened game state), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table D.
For the 1st to 800th fluctuations during the normal gaming state that is set after the end of the second low-probability time-shortening gaming state, the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table A. In other words, during the normal gaming state, the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table A.
For the first fluctuation during the first low-probability time-shortening game state that is set after the end of the normal game state described above, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table C, for the 2nd to 1199th fluctuations during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table B, and for the 1200th fluctuation during the first low-probability time-shortening game state (the final fluctuation during the first low-probability time-shortening game state), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table D.
For fluctuations during the normal game state that is set after the end of the above-mentioned first low-probability time-shortened game state, the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table A.

Also, as shown in FIG. 102(c), if the selection status value set in the selection status flag is "02H" (if a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X2 is determined by the lottery based on the first special symbol random number, or if a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X4 or X5 is determined by the lottery based on the second special symbol random number), then the number of times the special symbol changes after the end of the special game based on that determination is 1, table C is determined if the number of times it changes is 2 to 9999, table D is determined if the number of times it changes is 10000, table A is determined if the number of times it changes is 10001 to 10900, table C is determined if the number of times it changes is 10901, table B is determined if the number of times it changes is 10902 to 12099, table D is determined if the number of times it changes is 12100, and table A is determined if the number of times it changes is 12101 or later.

That is, for the first fluctuation during the high-probability time-shortening game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern described above, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table C, for the 2nd to 9999th fluctuations during the high-probability time-shortening game state, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table B, and for the 10,000th fluctuation during the high-probability time-shortening game state (the final fluctuation during the high-probability time-shortening game state), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table D.
For the 1st to 900th fluctuations during the normal gaming state that is set after the end of the above-mentioned high-probability time-shortening gaming state, the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table A. In other words, during the normal gaming state, the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table A.
For the first fluctuation during the first low-probability time-shortening game state that is set after the end of the normal game state described above, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table C, for the 2nd to 1199th fluctuations during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table B, and for the 1200th fluctuation during the first low-probability time-shortening game state (the final fluctuation during the first low-probability time-shortening game state), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table D.
For fluctuations during the normal game state that is set after the end of the above-mentioned first low-probability time-shortened game state, the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table A.

Also, as shown in FIG. 102(c), if the selection status value set in the selection status flag is "00H" (after RAM clearing), table A is determined when the time-shortened game flag is off (i.e., when both the first time-shortened game flag and the second time-shortened game flag are off), and table B is determined when the time-shortened game flag is on (when the first time-shortened game flag is on).

In other words, for fluctuations during the normal game state that is set after RAM is cleared, the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table A. Furthermore, for fluctuations during the first low-probability time-saving game state that is set when the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches 900 during that normal game state, the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table B.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, as in the above-described embodiment, a variation counter is provided for counting the number of times the win/lose lottery is executed (the number of times the special symbol changes). The count value of this variation counter is reset when the RAM is cleared or the special game ends, and is incremented by "1" each time the win/lose lottery (special symbol change) is executed, so that the main CPU 101 can determine the number of changes since the special game ended based on the count value of this variation counter.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, in the first low-probability time-shortened game state set after the RAM is cleared (the first low-probability time-shortened game state executed without going through a jackpot), the variation pattern table 114 to be referenced when determining the variation pattern command is determined to be table B, depending on the selection state value ("00H") set in the selection state flag and whether the time-shortened game flag is on or off (i.e., the set game state). Then, during the first low-probability time-shortened game state set after the RAM is cleared, the variation pattern command is always determined based on table B, and table B is not switched to another variation pattern table 114.
This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the tendency of the determined fluctuation pattern changes during the first low-probability time-shortened game state set after RAM is cleared, causing a sense of incongruity in the presentation.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state, and the high-probability time-shortening game state, which are set via a jackpot, a variation pattern command is determined based on either table B, table C, or table D, and switching from table B to table C and switching from table C to table D are executed.
This makes it possible to execute presentations according to the number of times the special symbols change during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state, and the high-probability time-shortening game state, which are set via a jackpot, thereby improving the presentation effect.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, both switching from table B to table C and switching from table C to table D are executed, but this is not limited to this, and only switching from table B to table C may be executed, or only switching from table C to table D may be executed. Also, switching to another fluctuation pattern table 114 different from the above fluctuation pattern table 114 may be executed.

Then, the fluctuation mode command and fluctuation pattern command are determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table 114 determined as described above.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 102(a), according to Table A, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined (i.e., the result of the lottery is a loss), and the number of reserved symbols at the time of determination (the first reserved number in the case of a losing symbol Z1, and the second reserved number in the case of a losing symbol Z2) is less than 2, either the variation pattern command "00H" associated with the variation pattern of "13-second variation (the variation time of the special symbol is 13 seconds)" (probability of determination is 85%), the variation pattern command "03H" associated with the variation pattern of "20-second variation (the variation time of the special symbol is 20 seconds)" (probability of determination is 10%), or the variation pattern command "04H" associated with the variation pattern of "60-second variation (the variation time of the special symbol is 60 seconds)" (probability of determination is 5%) will be determined.
Furthermore, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the number of reserved symbols at the time of determination is 2 or more, the following will be determined: the variation pattern command "01H" (determination probability 85%) associated with the variation pattern of "6-second variation (special symbol variation time is 6 seconds)", the above-mentioned variation pattern command "03H" (determination probability 10%), or the above-mentioned variation pattern command "04H" (determination probability 5%).
In addition, when the jackpot pattern X1, X2, X3, X4 or X5 is determined, regardless of the number of reserved symbols, either the fluctuation pattern command "A3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds fluctuation" (probability of determination is 5%) or the fluctuation pattern command "A4H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" (probability of determination is 95%) will be determined.

As shown in Figure 102 (a), according to Table B, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, regardless of the number of reserved symbols, either the variation pattern command "02H" (probability of determination: 85%) associated with the variation pattern of "6-second variation", the above-mentioned variation pattern command "03H" (probability of determination: 10%), or the above-mentioned variation pattern command "04H" (probability of determination: 5%) will be determined.
In addition, when the jackpot pattern X1, X2, X3, X4 or X5 is determined, regardless of the number of reserved symbols, either the above-mentioned variable pattern command "A3H" (probability of determination is 5%) or the above-mentioned variable pattern command "A4H" (probability of determination is 95%) will be determined.

As shown in Figure 102 (a), according to table C, when a losing pattern Z1 or Z2 is determined, regardless of the number of reserved numbers, the fluctuation pattern command "0AH" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "6-second fluctuation" is determined.
In addition, when the jackpot pattern X1, X2, X3, X4 or X5 is determined, regardless of the number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "ABH" (determination probability is 100%) is determined, which is associated with the variation pattern of "5-second variation (variation time of special symbol is 5 seconds)."

As shown in Figure 102 (a), according to table D, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, regardless of the number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "0BH" (determination probability is 100%) is determined, which is associated with the variation pattern of "10-second variation (the variation time of the special symbol is 10 seconds)."
In addition, if the jackpot pattern X1, X2, X3, X4 or X5 is determined, the above-mentioned "ABH" (determination probability is 100%) will be determined regardless of the number of reserved symbols.

(Outline of control in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state)
In a pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, during the variable presentation at the time of setting and ending the first low-probability time-shortening game state, a presentation is executed to suggest a change in the game state.

Specifically, if the win/loss lottery at the time the first low-probability time-saving game state is set results in a loss, a start-time loss variation effect is executed as a variation effect to notify the player of a loss, and if the win/loss lottery at the time the first low-probability time-saving game state ends results in a loss, an end-time loss variation effect is executed as a variation effect to notify the player of a loss.

In the start miss variation effect, the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 displays the variation of the effect pattern 50, and from the start of the variation display (start of the variation effect) to a predetermined end timing (for example, 3 seconds after the start of the variation display of the effect pattern 50), a start notification effect (for example, display of an image saying "Chance mode start!" (not specifically shown)) is displayed to indicate that the first low probability time-saving game state has been set.
In addition, in the end miss variation effect, when the variation display of the performance pattern 50 ends and a stop display is made on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, an end notification effect (for example, the display of an image saying "Chance mode ended" (not specifically shown)) is started to indicate that the first low probability time-saving game state has ended, and when the remaining variation time has elapsed, the stop display of the performance pattern 50 and the end notification effect end.
The above-mentioned start miss variation effect is executed based on one video data (performance data) in which the display of the variation of the performance pattern 50 and the execution content of the start notification effect are determined, and the above-mentioned start miss variation effect is executed based on one video data (performance data) in which the display of the variation of the performance pattern 50 and the execution content of the end notification effect are determined. In other words, by playing the above-mentioned video data, the display of the variation of the performance pattern 50 and the start notification effect (or end notification effect) are executed in an integrated manner.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the variable effects, including the above-mentioned start miss variable effect and end miss variable effect, are initiated based on the reception of a variable pattern command sent from the main control board 100 when the special symbol starts to vary, and are terminated based on the reception of a pattern confirmation command sent from the main control board 100 when the display of the special symbol variation ends (when the special symbol is displayed as stopped). In other words, the variable effect currently being executed will not end unless the pattern confirmation command is received. For example, if a start miss variable effect is being executed, the display of the stopped effect pattern 50 will continue until the pattern confirmation command is received, and if a end miss variable effect is being executed, the display of the stopped effect pattern 50 and the end notification effect will continue until the pattern confirmation command is received.

Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10, after a jackpot is won and a special game is played, the variation pattern table 114 to be referenced when determining the variation pattern command is switched depending on the number of times the special pattern has changed since the end of the special game.
At the time of setting the first low-probability time-shortened game state after the execution of special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, X2, X3, X4 or X5 (i.e., the first low-probability time-shortened game state set via winning the jackpot), a variation pattern command is determined by referring to table C (see Figures 102(b) and (c)). According to this table C, when a losing pattern Z1 or Z2 is determined, a variation pattern command of "0AH" is always determined (see Figure 102(a)).
Furthermore, at the end of the first low-probability time-saving game state after the execution of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, X2, X3, X4 or X5, a variation pattern command is determined by referring to table D (see Figures 102(b) and (c)). According to this table D, when the losing pattern Z1 or Z2 is determined, a variation pattern command of "0BH" is always determined (see Figure 102(a)).

The above-mentioned "0AH" variation pattern command is determined only when a miss occurs at the time when the first low-probability time-shortened game state, which is set via a jackpot win, is set, and the above-mentioned "0BH" variation pattern command is determined only when a miss occurs at the time when the first low-probability time-shortened game state, which is set via a jackpot win, ends (see Figures 102(a), 102(b) and (c)).
As a result, by receiving the "0AH" variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 100, the sub-control board 300 can understand that the current point in time is the setting point of the first low-probability time-shortened game state that was set via winning a jackpot, and the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 can execute the above-mentioned start-up miss variation presentation based on this "0AH" variation pattern command.
Furthermore, by receiving the "0BH" variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 100, the sub-control board 300 can understand that the relevant point in time is the end point of the first low-probability time-shortened game state that was set via winning a jackpot, and therefore the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 can execute the above-mentioned end-time miss variation presentation based on this "0BH" variation pattern command.

In contrast to this, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, after the RAM is cleared, switching of the variation pattern table 114 according to the number of times the special pattern has changed since the RAM was cleared is prohibited until the first jackpot is won, and the variation pattern command is determined based on the variation pattern table 114 associated with the currently set game state.
During the first low-probability time-shortened game state after RAM clearing (i.e., the first low-probability time-shortened game state set without going through a jackpot win), the variation pattern command is always determined by referring to Table B (see FIGS. 102(b) and (c)). According to this Table B, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, one of the variation pattern commands "02H,""03H," or "04H" is determined (see FIG. 102(a)). That is, in the first low-probability time-shortened game state after RAM clearing, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined at the time of setting, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined at the time of ending, or when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined at a time other than the time of setting or the time of ending, one of the variation pattern commands "02H,""03H," or "04H" is determined.

In this case, during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, which is set without a jackpot win, the sub-control board 300 can receive the "02H," "03H," or "04H" variation pattern command sent from the main control board 100 and determine that a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 has been determined. However, this variation pattern command alone cannot determine whether the current time is the setting point of the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the end point, or a time other than the setting point or end point, and the above-mentioned start-time loss variation effect or end-time loss variation effect cannot be properly executed. Therefore, if a variation effect is to be executed in a manner similar to the start-time loss variation effect or end-time loss variation effect at the setting point or end point of the above-mentioned first low-probability time-shortened game state, it is necessary to replace the variation effect based on the "02H," "03H," or "04H" variation pattern command with a manner similar to the above-mentioned start-time loss variation effect or end-time loss variation effect.

Furthermore, other than at the time of setting and ending the first low-probability time-shortened game state that is set via winning a jackpot, and during the first low-probability time-shortened game state after RAM is cleared (during the first low-probability time-shortened game state that is set without winning a jackpot), the variation pattern command is determined by referring to Table B (see Figures 102(b) and (c)), so when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined by the winning/losing lottery, one of the variation pattern commands "02H", "03H" or "04H" is determined (see Figure 102(a)).
Then, the sub-control board 300 cannot determine, based on only the "02H,""03H," or "04H" variation pattern command, whether the current time is during the first low-probability time-shortened game state that was established via a jackpot win, or during the first low-probability time-shortened game state that was established without a jackpot win. Therefore, for example, when performing control to change the mode of the effect to be executed (for example, the design mode of the effect pattern 50, the mode of the display that counts down the number of remaining time-shortened games, the mode of the display of the suggestive image that gives a predetermined suggestion during the variation effect, etc.) between the first low-probability time-shortened game state that was established via a jackpot win and the first low-probability time-shortened game state that was established without a jackpot win, there is a risk that the change in the mode of the effect cannot be executed appropriately.

Therefore, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the main CPU 101 transmits a first low-probability time-shortening start command to the sub-control board 300 at the time when the special symbol starts to change at the time when the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set, indicating that the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set, and also transmits a first low-probability time-shortening end command to the sub-control board 300 at the time when the special symbol starts to change at the time when the first low-probability time-shortening game state ends, indicating that the first low-probability time-shortening game state ends.

Specifically, when the variation of the special symbols ends when the number of time-saving activations (900 times) is reached, the normal game state ends and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. The main CPU 101 transmits the above-mentioned first low-probability time-saving start command to the sub-control board 300 based on the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state and the start of variation of the special symbols.
Furthermore, when the variation of the special symbols ends 1200 times (the number of time-shortening cycles) without winning a jackpot during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the first low-probability time-shortening game state ends and the normal game state is set. The main CPU 101 transmits the above-mentioned first low-probability time-shortening end command to the sub-control board 300 based on the start of the variation of the special symbols for the 1200th time without winning a jackpot since the first low-probability time-shortening game state was set.

Furthermore, when the special pattern starts to change during the first low-probability time-shortening game state after the RAM is cleared (during the first low-probability time-shortening game state set without going through a jackpot win), the main CPU 101 is configured to send a first low-probability time-shortening command not going through a jackpot to the sub-control board 300, indicating that the game is in the first low-probability time-shortening game state after the RAM is cleared.
The control regarding the first low probability time-saving command not via a jackpot will be described in detail later.

As a result, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10, the sub-control board 300 can determine, based on whether or not the first low-probability time-shortening start command has been received, whether or not the first low-probability time-shortening end command has been received, and whether or not the first low-probability time-shortening command not via a jackpot has been received, whether the relevant time point is the setting point of the first low-probability time-shortening game state after RAM is cleared, other than the setting point and end point of the first low-probability time-shortening game state after RAM is cleared, the end point of the first low-probability time-shortening game state after RAM is cleared, the setting point of the first low-probability time-shortening game state set via a jackpot, other than the setting point and end point of the first low-probability time-shortening game state set via a jackpot, or the end point of the first low-probability time-shortening game state set via a jackpot. Based on the results of this determination, it is possible to execute the above-mentioned start miss variation effect or end miss variation effect, replace the start miss variation effect or end miss variation effect with a similar mode, or execute different effects in the first low-probability time-saving game state established via a jackpot and the first low-probability time-saving game state established without a jackpot.

(Details of Control in the First Low-Probability Time-Shortened Gaming State)
Next, the control in the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state will be explained in detail.
A pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 is provided with two counters used for predetermined determination in the first low-probability time-shortening game state: a first low-probability time-shortening counter A and a first low-probability time-shortening counter B. Both of these counters are configured in predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
When the special game ends or the RAM is cleared, predetermined start values are set in the first low-probability time-saving counter A and the first low-probability time-saving counter B, and these counters count each time the special symbol changes. Then, predetermined determinations are made based on the count values of these counters.

Specifically, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X3 ends, the main CPU 101 sets the first low-probability time-shortening counter A to a predetermined starting value of "900" (the number of fluctuations (number of time-shortening activations) from that point in time until the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set via the second low-probability time-shortening game state and the normal game state), and sets the first low-probability time-shortening counter B to a predetermined starting value of "2100" (the number of fluctuations from that point in time until the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set via the second low-probability time-shortening game state and the normal game state, and the first low-probability time-shortening game state ends (the total value of 900 times the time-shortening activations and 1200 times the time-shortening of the first low-probability time-shortening game state)).
In addition, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X2, X4 or X5 ends, the main CPU 101 sets the first low-probability time-saving counter A to "10900" (the number of fluctuations from that point in time until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set via the high-probability time-saving game state and the normal game state) as a predetermined starting value, and sets the first low-probability time-saving counter B to "12100" (the number of fluctuations from that point in time until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set via the high-probability time-saving game state and the normal game state) as a predetermined starting value.
In addition, when the RAM is cleared, the main CPU 101 sets both the first low-probability time-saving counter A and the first low-probability time-saving counter B to "0" as a predetermined starting value.

Then, as described above, when a predetermined starting value is set in the first low-probability time-saving counter A and the first low-probability time-saving counter B, counting by the counters begins.
When the main CPU 101 performs a winning/losing lottery based on the first special symbol random number or the second special symbol random number, it decrements the count values of the first low-probability time-saving counter A and the first low-probability time-saving counter B by "1" at the start of the special symbol variation. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count values of the first low-probability time-saving counter A and the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the decrement are less than "0" (negative values). Furthermore, if it is determined that the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A after the decrement is less than "0," it resets the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A to "0," and if it is determined that the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the decrement is less than "0," it resets the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B to "0."

Here, as described above, when the RAM is cleared, the first low-probability time-saving counter A is set to "0", and when the special game ends, the first low-probability time-saving counter A is set to "900" or "10900".
After the RAM is cleared, the first low-probability time-saving counter A is decremented from "0" to the above-mentioned "1", and if it is determined that the count is less than "0" as described above, it is set to "0" again, so that the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is always less than "0".
In other words, in the first low-probability time-saving game state after the RAM is cleared (the first low-probability time-saving game state set without going through a jackpot), the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is performed is always less than "0" at the setting time, the end time, and any time other than the setting time and the end time.

On the other hand, after the special game ends, the first low-probability time-saving counter A is decremented by "1" from "900" or "10900." Also, as described above, the values "900" and "10900" are the number of times the first low-probability time-saving game state is set.
Then, in the first low-probability time-saving game state after the end of the special game (the first low-probability time-saving game state set via a jackpot), at the time of setting, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is made will be "0", and at times other than the time of setting and the end, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is made will be less than "0", and at the end, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is made will be less than "0".

Also, as described above, when the RAM is cleared, the first low-probability time-saving counter B is set to "0", and when the special game ends, the first low-probability time-saving counter B is set to "2100" or "12100".
After the RAM is cleared, the first low-probability time-saving counter B is decremented from "0" to the above-mentioned "1", and if it is determined that the count is less than "0" as described above, it is set to "0" again, so that the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is always less than "0".
In other words, in the first low-probability time-saving game state after the RAM is cleared, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is always less than "0" at the setting point, the ending point, and any point other than the setting point and the ending point.

On the other hand, after the special game ends, the first low-probability time-saving counter B is decremented by "1" from "2100" or "12100." Also, as described above, the values "2100" and "12100" are the number of fluctuations until the first low-probability time-saving game state ends.
Then, in the first low-probability time-saving game state after the special game ends, at the setting point, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is made will be a value greater than "0", and at times other than the setting point and the end point, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is made will be a value greater than "0", and at the end point, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is made will be "0".

According to the above, in the first low-probability time-saving game state after RAM is cleared, the count value of first low-probability time-saving counter A and the count value of first low-probability time-saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" are both always less than "0" (see Figure 103). On the other hand, in the first low-probability time-saving game state after the end of special play, the count value of first low-probability time-saving counter A and the count value of first low-probability time-saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" are both never less than "0" (see Figure 103).

(Determination of the first low probability time-saving gaming state after RAM clearing)
In the first low-probability time-shortening gaming state, if the count values of first low-probability time-shortening counter A and first low-probability time-shortening counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" are both less than "0," it can be determined that the first low-probability time-shortening gaming state was set after RAM was cleared (set without passing through a jackpot). In this case, the main CPU 101 transmits the above-mentioned first low-probability time-shortening command without passing through a jackpot to the sub-control board 300.
Also, as described above, the main CPU 101 transmits a first low-probability time-shortening start command to the sub-control board 300 at the time when the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set, and transmits a first low-probability time-shortening end command to the sub-control board 300 at the time when the first low-probability time-shortening game state ends.

Then, when the sub-control board 300 receives the first low probability time-shortening command without going through a jackpot and the first low probability time-shortening start command in the first low probability time-shortening game state, it can understand that this point in time is the setting point of the first low probability time-shortening game state after the RAM is cleared.
In this case, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and a fluctuation pattern command of "02H", "03H" or "04H" is received by referring to the fluctuation pattern table 114 (Table B) corresponding to that time, the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 replaces the fluctuation effect based on that fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation effect that notifies of a loss) with the above-mentioned start-time losing fluctuation effect mode and executes it.

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 300 receives a first low-probability time-shortening command that does not involve a jackpot and a first low-probability time-shortening end command in the first low-probability time-shortening game state, it can understand that this point in time is the end point of the first low-probability time-shortening game state after the RAM is cleared.
In this case, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and a variation pattern command of "02H", "03H" or "04H" determined by referring to the variation pattern table 114 (table B) corresponding to that time point is received, the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 replaces the variation effect based on that variation pattern command (variation effect that notifies of a loss) with the above-mentioned ending loss variation effect mode and executes it.

Furthermore, if the sub-control board 300 receives a first low probability time-shortening command that does not involve a jackpot in the first low probability time-shortening game state, but does not receive either the first low probability time-shortening start command or the first low probability time-shortening end command, it can determine that the time in question is other than the setting time and end time of the first low probability time-shortening game state after the RAM is cleared.
In this case, even if the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 receives a variation pattern command of "02H,""03H," or "04H" determined by referring to the variation pattern table 114 (table B) corresponding to the time point when the losing pattern Z1 or Z2 has been determined, it does not perform the replacement as described above, but instead executes the variation performance based on the variation pattern command in the same manner.

In any of the above cases, when the jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4 or X5 is determined and the variation pattern command is "A3H" or "A4H" determined by referring to the variation pattern table 114 (Table B) corresponding to that time, the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 does not perform the replacement described above, but instead executes the variation effect (variation effect announcing a jackpot) based on that variation pattern command in its original form.

(Determination of the first low-probability time-saving game state after the end of the special game)
In contrast, in the first low-probability time-shortening game state, if the count values of the first low-probability time-shortening counters A and B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" are not less than "0," it can be determined that the first low-probability time-shortening game state was set after the special game ended (set without going through a jackpot). In this case, the main CPU 101 does not transmit the above-mentioned first low-probability time-shortening command without going through a jackpot to the sub-control board 300.
Also, as described above, the main CPU 101 transmits a first low-probability time-shortening start command to the sub-control board 300 at the time when the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set, and transmits a first low-probability time-shortening end command to the sub-control board 300 at the time when the first low-probability time-shortening game state ends.

Then, when the sub-control board 300 does not receive the first low probability time-shortening command without going through a jackpot in the first low probability time-shortening game state, but receives the first low probability time-shortening start command, it can understand that this point in time is the setting point of the first low probability time-shortening game state after the end of the special game.
In this case, when the losing pattern Z1 or Z2 is determined and a fluctuation pattern command of "0AH" is received by referring to the fluctuation pattern table 114 (table C) corresponding to that time, the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 executes the starting losing fluctuation performance based on the fluctuation pattern command.

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 300 does not receive the first low probability time-shortening command without going through a jackpot in the first low probability time-shortening game state, but receives the first low probability time-shortening end command, it can understand that this point in time is the end point of the first low probability time-shortening game state after the end of the special game.
In this case, when the losing pattern Z1 or Z2 is determined and a variation pattern command of "0BH" is received that is determined by referring to the variation pattern table 114 (table D) corresponding to that time, the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 executes the ending losing variation performance based on the variation pattern command.

Furthermore, if the sub-control board 300 does not receive the first low probability time-shortening command without going through a jackpot in the first low probability time-shortening game state, and does not receive either the first low probability time-shortening start command or the first low probability time-shortening end command, it can determine that the time in question is other than the setting time and end time of the first low probability time-shortening game state after the end of the special game.
In this case, even if the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 receives a variation pattern command of "02H,""03H," or "04H" determined by referring to the variation pattern table 114 (table B) corresponding to the time point when the losing pattern Z1 or Z2 has been determined, it does not perform the replacement as described above, but instead executes the variation performance based on the variation pattern command in the same manner.

In any of the above cases, when the jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4 or X5 is determined and the variation pattern command is "A3H", "A4H", "AAH" or "ABH" determined by referring to the variation pattern table 114 (Table B, Table C or Table D) appropriate to that time, the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 does not perform the replacement described above, but instead executes the variation effect (variation effect announcing a jackpot) based on that variation pattern command in its original form.

By performing the above-described control, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the sub-control board 300 can also appropriately determine the setting point of the first low-probability time-shortened game state after RAM is cleared (i.e., the first low-probability time-shortened game state set without a jackpot), other than the setting point and end point of the first low-probability time-shortened game state after RAM is cleared, the end point of the first low-probability time-shortened game state after RAM is cleared, the setting point of the first low-probability time-shortened game state after the end of special play (i.e., the first low-probability time-shortened game state set via a jackpot), other than the setting point and end point of the first low-probability time-shortened game state after the end of special play, and the end point of the first low-probability time-shortened game state after the end of special play.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, in the first (i.e., the start point) or 1200th (i.e., the end point) fluctuation in the first low-probability time-shortened game state after the RAM is cleared, a fluctuation pattern command with a defined fluctuation pattern is determined under the same conditions (i.e., by referring to the same fluctuation pattern table 114 (Table B)) as in the fluctuations other than the first or 1200th in the first low-probability time-shortened game state after the RAM is cleared. Then, the fluctuation pattern command that can be determined in the first or 1200th fluctuation in the first low-probability time-shortened game state after the RAM is cleared and the fluctuation pattern command that can be determined in the fluctuations other than the first or 1200th in the first low-probability time-shortened game state after the RAM is cleared are similar. However, even when a similar variation pattern command is determined, a first low-probability time-shortening start command is sent to the sub-control board 300 for the first variation in the first low-probability time-shortening game state after the RAM is cleared, and a first low-probability time-shortening end command is sent to the sub-control board 300 for the 1200th variation in the first low-probability time-shortening game state after the RAM is cleared, so that the sub-control board 300 that receives the command can grasp that this is the first or 1200th variation in the first low-probability time-shortening game state after the RAM is cleared. Even when a similar variation pattern command is received, based on the reception of the first low-probability time-shortening start command or the first low-probability time-shortening end command, a start notification effect indicating that the first low-probability time-shortening game state has been set or an end notification effect indicating that the first low-probability time-shortening game state has ended can be executed during the variation effect relating to the first or 1200th variation in the first low-probability time-shortening game state after the RAM is cleared.
As a result, with the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10, it is possible to execute appropriate presentations according to the number of fluctuations in the first low-probability time-saving game state set without going through a jackpot, thereby making it possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistencies in the presentation, etc.

Next, an overview of the progress of the special game described above will be explained using a flowchart, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment and other application example 6.
First, the special symbol variation start process executed when the special symbol variation starts will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 104.
The processing of steps 6000 to 6007 is almost the same as the processing of steps 801 to 808 of the special symbol variation start processing in the above-mentioned embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted here and the process will proceed to step 6208.

In step 6008, the main CPU 101 executes a determination process for determining whether the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state is in effect.
In step 6009, the main CPU 101 executes a time determination process to determine whether the current time is the start time or end time of the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state.

In step 6010, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process. In this fluctuation pattern determination process, the process of acquiring the fluctuation pattern table 114 that is referenced when determining a fluctuation pattern command differs from the fluctuation pattern determination process in the above-described embodiment, but the other processes are almost the same as the fluctuation pattern determination process in the above-described embodiment, so only the process of acquiring the fluctuation pattern table 114 will be described.
Specifically, in the variation pattern determination process in another application example 10, as described above, if the selection state value set in the selection state flag is "01H" or "02H", a variation pattern table 114 corresponding to the number of variations since the end of the special game executed based on the winning of the jackpot is acquired based on the determination table. Also, if the selection state value set in the selection state flag is "00H", a variation pattern table 114 corresponding to whether the time-saving game flag is on or off is acquired based on the determination table.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6011.
The processing of step 6011 and the processing of step 6012 are almost the same as the processing of step 810 and the processing of step 812 of the special symbol variation start processing in the above embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted here. Then, the special symbol variation start processing ends.

Next, the determination process in step 6008 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 6100, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step 6101.
In step 6101, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A is less than "0." If it is determined that the count value is not less than "0" (i.e., is greater than or equal to "0"), the process proceeds to step 6108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value is less than "0," the process proceeds to the next step 6102.

In step 6102, the main CPU 101 sets the first low-probability time-saving counter A to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step 6103.
In step 6103, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step 6104.

In step 6104, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B is less than "0." If it is determined that the count value is not less than "0," the determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value is less than "0," the process proceeds to the next step 6105.
In step 6105, the main CPU 101 sets the first low-probability time-saving counter B to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step 6106.

In step 6106, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current time is in the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state (i.e., whether or not the high-probability gaming flag indicating that the current time is in the high-probability time-shortened gaming state is off and the first time-shortened gaming flag indicating that the current time is in the first time-shortened gaming state is on).If it is determined that the current time is not in the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state, the determination process is terminated.On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is in the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state, the process proceeds to the next step 6107.
In step 6107, the main CPU 101 sets a first low-probability time-saving command not via a jackpot, indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state is in effect after the RAM is cleared, in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the first low-probability time-saving command not via a jackpot to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300. The determination process then ends.

In step 6108, which is reached when it is determined in step 6101 that the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A is not less than 0, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step 6109.
In step 6109, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B is less than "0." If it is determined that the count value is not less than "0," the determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value is less than "0," the process proceeds to the next step 6110.
In step S6110, the main CPU 101 sets the first low-probability time-saving counter B to "0", and then ends the determination process.

Next, the time point determination process in step 6009 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 6200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the time to set the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state (i.e., whether or not the count value of the time-shortened activation counter is 1200, which is the number of time-shortened activations). If it is determined that it is not the time to set the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state, the process proceeds to step 6202. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the time to set the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state, the process proceeds to the next step 6201.
In step 6201, the main CPU 101 sets a first low-probability time-saving start command, which indicates that the first low-probability time-saving game state is being set, in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the first low-probability time-saving start command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6202.

In step 6202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state has ended (i.e., whether or not the count value of the time-shortened gaming state counter is 0). If it is determined that the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state has not ended, the time determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state has ended, the process proceeds to step 6203.
In step 6203, the main CPU 101 sets a first low-probability time-saving end command, which indicates that the first low-probability time-saving game state has ended, in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the first low-probability time-saving end command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Then, the time determination process is terminated.

Next, the special game ending process executed at the end of the special game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
The processing of steps 6300 to 6303 is almost the same as the processing of steps 3200 to 3203 of the special game ending processing in other application example 6, so the explanation will be omitted here and the flow proceeds to step 6304.
In step 6304, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined start value (900) in the first low-probability time-saving counter A, and sets a predetermined start value (2100) in the first low-probability time-saving counter B. Then, the process proceeds to step 6305.

The processing of steps 6305 to 6306 is almost the same as the processing of steps 3204 to 3205 of the special game ending processing in other application example 6, so a description thereof will be omitted here.
In step 6307, which is reached when it is determined in step 6305 that the game is in the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the main CPU 101 sets the selection state flag to the selection state value "01H." Then, the special game end process is terminated.
In step 6308, which is reached when it is determined in step 6305 that the game is not in the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the main CPU 101 sets the selection state flag to the selection state value "02H." Then, the special game end process is terminated.

Next, the RAM clearing process performed when the RAM is cleared will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
The processing of steps 6400 to 6403 is almost the same as the processing of steps 3300 to 3303 in the RAM clear processing in other application example 6, so the explanation will be omitted here and the flow proceeds to the next step 6404.
In step 6404, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined start value (0) in the first low-probability time-saving counter A, and also sets a predetermined start value (0) in the first low-probability time-saving counter B. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6405.
In step 6405, the main CPU 101 sets the selection status flag to the selection status value "02H," and then ends the RAM clear processing.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 10, the same post-stop processing and time-saving activation count execution processing as in Application Example 6 are also executed, but as the content is almost the same, a description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, the control processing in the sub-control board 300 for executing the various processes described above will be described.
First, the non-jackpot first low probability time-saving command reception processing executed when the non-jackpot first low probability time-saving command is received will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 109.
In step 6500, the sub-CPU 301 turns on the RAM clear flag, which indicates that the first low-probability time-saving game state is in progress after RAM clearing. Note that in the initial state (after factory shipment or after a reset due to RAM clearing, etc.), this RAM clear flag is off. Then, the first low-probability time-saving command reception process without a jackpot is terminated.

Next, the first low-probability time-saving start command reception processing that is executed when the first low-probability time-saving start command is received will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 110.
In step 6600, the sub-CPU 301 turns on the setting time flag, which indicates that the first low-probability time-shortening game state is being set. Note that in the initial state described above, this setting time flag is off. Then, the first low-probability time-shortening start command reception process is terminated.

Next, the first low probability time-saving end command reception processing that is executed when the first low probability time-saving end command is received will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 111.
In step 6700, the sub-CPU 301 turns on the end flag indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state has ended. Note that in the initial state described above, this end flag is off. Then, the first low-probability time-saving end command reception process is terminated.

Next, the processing for receiving a variable pattern command during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, which is executed when a variable pattern command is received during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 112.
In step 6800, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the game is currently in the first low-probability time-shortening game state. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, information on the game state set after the special game ends and the changed game state when the game state is changed is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 is able to grasp the currently set game state based on this information. If it is determined that the game is not currently in the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the first low-probability time-shortening game state variable pattern command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is currently in the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the process proceeds to step 6801.
In step 6801, the sub-CPU 301 determines the mode of the variation presentation based on the received variation pattern command. Then, the process proceeds to step 6802.

In step 6802, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the received variation pattern command is "02H", "03H", or "04H" (i.e., whether the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 has been determined and the variation pattern command has been determined by referring to table B). If it is determined that the variation pattern command is not "02H", "03H", or "04H", the process proceeds to step 6808. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command is "02H", "03H", or "04H", the process proceeds to the next step 6803.
In step 6803, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the RAM clear flag is on. If it is determined that the flag is not on (i.e., off), the process proceeds to step 6808. On the other hand, if it is determined that the flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 6804.

In step 6804, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the setting time flag is on. If it is determined that the setting time flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to step 6806. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting time flag is on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 6805.
In step 6805, the sub-CPU 301 replaces the variable effect mode determined in the above-mentioned step 6801 (i.e., the variable effect mode for announcing a loss) with the variable effect mode for a loss at the start. Then, the process proceeds to step 6808.

In step 6806, which is reached if it is determined in step 6804 that the setting time flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the end time flag is on. If it is determined that the end time flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to step 6808. On the other hand, if it is determined that the end time flag is on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 6807.
In step 6807, the sub-CPU 301 replaces the variable effect mode determined in the above-mentioned step 6801 (the variable effect mode for announcing a loss) with the variable effect mode for an end-of-game loss. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6808.

In step 6808, the sub-CPU 301 sets in the transmission buffer a variable performance execution command corresponding to the variable performance mode determined in the above-mentioned step 6801 or the variable performance mode replaced in the above-mentioned step 6805 or step 6807. The variable performance execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards, and these control boards control the execution of variable performance based on the received variable performance execution command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6809.
In step S6809, the sub-CPU 301 turns off the RAM clear flag, the setting time flag, and the end time flag, and then ends the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state fluctuation pattern command reception process.

(Modification of Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 10)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10, whether it is the first low-probability time-shortened game state after RAM is cleared or the first low-probability time-shortened game state after the end of special play, the setting time and ending time of the first low-probability time-shortened game state are determined by the number of times time-shortened is activated and the number of times time-shortened is activated, but the method of determination is not limited to this.
As described above, after the RAM is cleared, the first low-probability time-saving counter A is decremented from "0" by "1" as described above. If it is determined that the counter is less than "0," it is reset to "0" as described above. Therefore, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A after the decrement of "1" described above is always less than "0." Therefore, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A after the decrement of "1" described above becomes "0" only after the special game ends. Furthermore, since the values "900" and "10900" set as the predetermined starting values of the first low-probability time-saving counter A are the number of times the counter fluctuates until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A after the decrement of "1" described above becomes "0" only at the time the first low-probability time-saving game state is set.
Similarly, after the RAM is cleared, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is always less than 0. Therefore, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" becomes "0" only after the special game ends. Furthermore, since the values "2100" and "12100" set as the predetermined starting values in the first low-probability time-saving counter B are the number of fluctuations until the first low-probability time-saving game state ends, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" becomes "0" only at the end of the first low-probability time-saving game state.

From the above, when the count value of first low-probability time-shortening counter A becomes "0" after the above-mentioned decrement of "1," it may be determined that this point in time is the setting point of the first low-probability time-shortening game state after the special game ends, and when the count value of first low-probability time-shortening counter B becomes "0" after the above-mentioned decrement of "1," it may be determined that this point in time is the end point of the first low-probability time-shortening game state after the special game ends. Then, based on this determination result, a command may be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 indicating that the first low-probability time-shortening game state after the special game ends is in progress, that the setting point of the first low-probability time-shortening game state has been reached, or that the end point of the first low-probability time-shortening game state has been reached.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the sub-CPU 301 is configured to terminate the start miss variation presentation and the end miss variation presentation based on the reception of a pattern confirmation command sent to the sub-control board 300 at the time when the display of the special pattern variation has ended, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the start miss variable effect or end miss variable effect may be set to end based on the reception of a stop display time elapsed command sent to the sub-control board 300 when the variable display of the special pattern has ended and the stop display time has elapsed, or a variable pattern command sent to the sub-control board 300 when the variable display of the next special pattern (variable effect) begins.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, a single video data (performance data) is played back in which the execution contents of the miss change performance at the start and the miss change performance at the end are defined, so that the display of the change in the performance pattern 50 and the start notification performance (or end notification performance) are performed in an integrated manner, but this is not limited to this.
For example, video data defining the execution content of the variable effect that notifies a loss and video data defining the execution content of the start notification effect (or end notification effect) may be provided separately, and moving images played based on these video data may be displayed superimposed on each other to execute the variable display of the effect pattern 50 and the start notification effect (or end notification effect). Even in this case, the effect being executed (playback of the moving images) may not end unless a predetermined command (such as a pattern determination command) is received.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 can be achieved.
Furthermore, the image of the end notification effect (an image indicating the end of the chance mode) may be configured to continue to be displayed even after the variable effect has ended (after a symbol determination command, etc. has been received). For example, the image of the end notification effect may be continued to be displayed even during a customer waiting state in which the first special symbol random number or the second special symbol random number has not been reserved and the variable display (variable effect) of the next special symbol has not started, or the image of the end notification effect may be continued to be displayed until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed after the variable display of the next special symbol has started.
In this case, it is possible to more reliably notify the player that the first low-probability time-shortening gaming state has ended.

(Another Application Example 11)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, like the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, is not a so-called mixed type 1 and type 2 pachinko machine or a pachinko machine that performs so-called simultaneous rotation control, but is configured to execute special games based on winning a jackpot.
The pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11 differs from the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 10 in that it is possible to derive a judgment result of whether or not a time-shortening award has been won in a win/lose lottery during a low-probability game state, and in that if a time-shortening award is won, it is possible to set a time-shortening game state based on that winning.
Below, we will omit explanations of the same configuration as the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 10 (such as the structure within the game area 12 (the structure of various components, installation position)) unless necessary, and will focus on the configuration that differs from the pachinko machine relating to other application example 10 (such as the winning/losing lottery and game state settings).

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, in addition to the normal game state, first low-probability time-shortened game state, second low-probability time-shortened game state, and high-probability time-shortened game state of another application example 10, the settable game states include a third low-probability time-shortened game state (hereinafter also referred to as the third low-probability time-shortened game state), which is a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a third time-shortened game state (time-shortened game state) described below, and a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state (hereinafter also referred to as the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state), which is a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a fourth time-shortened game state (time-shortened game state) described below, and the game progresses by setting one of the game states.

In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11, the frequency of game balls entering the second start winning port 16 (the difficulty of the ball entering, in other words, the frequency of the winning/losing lottery based on the game balls entering the second start winning port 16) is set to a predetermined content for each of the non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state.
As with the other application examples 10, the normal game state is set in the initial state after factory shipment or resetting.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, during the normal game state, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot) so that the game ball will enter the first start winning port 15, and during the first low probability time-shortened game state, the second low probability time-shortened game state, the third low probability time-shortened game state, the fourth low probability time-shortened game state, the high probability time-shortened game state and the special game, the game ball will pass through the gate 20 and enter the second start winning port 16, and the game ball will enter the large winning port 18, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right shot).
Then, a lottery for winning or losing is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15 and the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole 16.

As shown in Figure 113 (a), in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11, when a low probability game state (normal game state, first low probability time-shortened game state, second low probability time-shortened game state, third low probability time-shortened game state, fourth low probability time-shortened game state) is set, in the win/loss lottery it is possible to win a jackpot or a time-shortened game, and when a high probability game state (high probability time-shortened game state) is set, it is not possible to win a time-shortened game but only a jackpot.
Also, as shown in Figure 113(a), when a low probability game state is set, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is set to approximately 3/300, and when a high probability game state is set, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 6/300.

In a win/loss lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning slot 15, if a jackpot is won, jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, with the probability of determining jackpot symbol X1 being 25/100 (25%) and the probability of determining jackpot symbol X2 being 75/100 (75%). Furthermore, in the above-mentioned win/loss lottery, if a time-saving bonus is awarded, time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, with the probability of determining time-saving symbol J1 being 80/100 (80%) and the probability of determining time-saving symbol J2 being 20/100 (20%). Furthermore, if the above-mentioned win/loss lottery results in a loss, loss symbol Z1 is determined.
In contrast, in the lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning slot 16, if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3, X4 or X5 is determined, and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X3 is set to 25/100 (25%), the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X4 is set to 30/100 (30%), and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X5 is set to 45/100 (45%). Furthermore, if the above-mentioned lottery results in a loss, the loss symbol Z2 is determined.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, if a time-saving award is won by a win/lose lottery during a low-probability game state, the low-probability game state can be changed to the third or fourth time-saving game state described below. In other words, if a time-saving award is won, the third or fourth time-saving game state is set without going through a jackpot win or the execution of a special game. For example, if a time-saving award is won by a win/lose lottery during a normal game state, the low-probability game state remains unchanged, and the non-time-saving game state is changed to the third or fourth time-saving game state, thereby transitioning to the third or fourth low-probability time-saving game state.
Here, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11, since it is possible to win the time-saving award by a win/lose lottery during the low-probability game state, it is possible to win the time-saving award not only during the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), but also during the time-saving game states, namely the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state.
The control regarding the setting of the game state when a time-saving bonus is awarded will be described in detail later.
In addition, since the time-saving award is not won in the win/lose lottery during the high-probability time-saving game state, the game state does not change based on the win of the time-saving award during the high-probability time-saving game state.

(General overview of general games)
Next, an outline of the normal game executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11 will be described. Since the performance of the non-time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state, and the second time-shortened game state in another application example 11 (the probability of winning by lottery of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the operation time of the movable piece 16b) is the same as that of another application example 10, the explanation will be omitted here, and the explanation will focus on the third time-shortened game state and the fourth time-shortened game state.
As shown in FIG. 113(c), during the third time-shortened game state (third low-probability time-shortened game state) and the fourth time-shortened game state (fourth low-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning by lottery for a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1, which is the same as during the non-time-shortened game state (normal game state), the first time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state) and the second time-shortened game state (second low-probability time-shortened game state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state and longer than during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a winning normal symbol is drawn is set to 3.5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-shortened game state and shorter than during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state.

During the non-time-saving game mode (normal game mode), there is a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery that is held when a game ball passes through gate 20, and there are many opportunities for movable piece 16b to open. However, because the normal symbol fluctuation time is 10 seconds and the movable piece 16b operation time is 0.05 seconds, although the time it takes for movable piece 16b to change from a closed state to an open state is long (the interval from the open state to the next open state is long), the time that movable piece 16b remains in the open state is extremely short. Therefore, during the non-time-saving game mode, movable piece 16b is almost always in a closed state, and game balls that enter second game area 12b almost never enter second start winning slot 16.

Furthermore, during the third time-shortened game state (third low-probability time-shortened game state) and the fourth time-shortened game state (fourth low-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning is the same as during the non-time-shortened game state, so there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to open, just as during the non-time-shortened game state. Furthermore, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state, and the movable piece 16b operating time is 3.5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-shortened game state. Therefore, although the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to change from a closed state to an open state is short (the interval from the open state to the next open state is short), the time the movable piece 16b remains open is long. Therefore, during the third time-shortened game state and the fourth time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b remains open for a long period of time, and game balls that enter the second game area 12b can frequently enter the second start winning slot 16.

Furthermore, during the first time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state) and the second time-shortened game state (second low-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning is the same as during the non-time-shortened game state, the third time-shortened game state, and the fourth time-shortened game state, so there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to open, just as during the non-time-shortened game state, the third time-shortened game state, and the fourth time-shortened game state. Furthermore, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds, which is even shorter than during the third time-shortened game state and the fourth time-shortened game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds, which is even longer than during the third time-shortened game state and the fourth time-shortened game state. Therefore, although the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to change from a closed state to an open state is extremely short, the time for which the movable piece 16b remains in the open state is extremely long. Therefore, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is almost always in an open state, and game balls that enter the second game area 12b can enter the second start winning hole 16 with extremely high frequency.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11, the probability of winning by drawing a normal pattern is set to be extremely high overall in any of the non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state, but by varying the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the operation time of the movable piece 16b, the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 (i.e., the frequency of the game ball entering the second start winning port 16, in other words, the frequency of the winning/losing lottery being held based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16) is changed.
That is, during the third time-shortened game state and the fourth time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is maintained in an open state for a longer period than during the non-time-shortened game state, so that game balls are more likely to enter the second start winning hole 16 than during the non-time-shortened game state. Also, during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is maintained in an open state for an even longer period than during the third time-shortened game state and the fourth time-shortened game state, so that game balls are more likely to enter the second start winning hole 16 than during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state. Therefore, during the third time-shortened game state and the fourth time-shortened game state, it is possible to acquire an opportunity to enter the lottery while suppressing the decrease in game balls that occurs as the game progresses, compared to the non-time-shortened game state, and during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, compared to the third time-shortened game state and the fourth time-shortened game state.

It should be noted that the ease with which a game ball can enter the second start winning port 16 is the same during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, but this is not limited to this. By varying one or more of the probability of winning by lottery for a normal symbol, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the operation time of the movable piece 16b, it is possible to set it so that a game ball can enter the second start winning port 16 more easily during the first time-shortened game state than during the second time-shortened game state, or it is possible to set it so that a game ball can enter the second start winning port 16 more easily during the second time-shortened game state than during the first time-shortened game state.
Similarly, during the third time-shortened game state and the fourth time-shortened game state, rather than making the ease of the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 the same, it is possible to set one of them so that it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning port 16 than the other.
Furthermore, rather than making it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning port 16 during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state than during the third time-shortened game state and the fourth time-shortened game state, it is also possible to make it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning port 16 during the third time-shortened game state and the fourth time-shortened game state than during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state.
In addition, the ease of a game ball entering the second start winning port 16 may be set to be different during the first time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state, the third time-shortened game state, and the fourth time-shortened game state, or the ease of a game ball entering the second start winning port 16 may be set to be the same for two or more time-shortened game states.

(Outline of game state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11, one of the game states is set to a normal game state, a first low-probability time-shortened game state, a second low-probability time-shortened game state, a third low-probability time-shortened game state, a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, or a high-probability time-shortened game state.
When the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, or the high-probability time-saving game state is set, a time-saving count counter configured in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 begins counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to each time-saving game state. Specifically, when the above-mentioned time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving times corresponding to each time-saving game state is set in the time-saving count counter, and the count value of the time-saving count counter is decremented by one each time a special symbol is displayed. The count value of the time-saving count counter is also reset when the RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation or when the special game ends. When the count value of the time-saving count counter reaches the number of time-saving times (i.e., when the count value of the time-saving count counter reaches 0), the currently set time-saving game state ends.

113(b), regardless of the game state being set, if a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X1 is determined by the lottery based on the first special random number, or if a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X3 is determined by the lottery based on the second special random number, the game state after the special game based on that determination is set to a low-probability game state, and is set to a second time-saving game state, thereby setting the second low-probability time-saving game state. Also, the number of time-saving times is set to 100.
Then, during this second low-probability time-shortened game state, if the results of the winning/losing lottery are all losses 100 times, the second time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state, and the game state is changed to a normal game state.

113(b), regardless of the game state being set, if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, or if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbol X4 or X5 is determined, the game state after the special game based on that determination is set to a high probability game state, and is also set to a second time-saving game state, thereby setting a high probability time-saving game state. Also, the number of high probability wins and the number of time-saving wins are both set to 10,000.
That is, after the special game that is executed when the jackpot pattern X2, X4 or X5 is determined is completed, the game state is set to a high-probability time-shortened game state, and the high-probability time-shortened game state continues until the results of the win/loss lottery are derived 10,000 times without winning the jackpot (until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10,000 times).
If the results of the lottery for winning or losing during this high-probability time-shortened game state are all losses 10,000 times, the high-probability game state is changed to a low-probability game state, and the second time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state, thereby changing the game state to a normal game state. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state is approximately 6/300 (1/50), so in effect, the high-probability time-shortened game state will continue until another jackpot is won.

113(b), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, when the number of times the special symbols change reaches the predetermined number of times for activating time-saving (900 times in another application example 11) without winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state (i.e., when the results of the win/loss lottery in the low-probability game state are all losses), the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. When the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of times for time-saving is set to 1200.
After the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set, the first low-probability time-shortened game state continues until the number of times the special symbols change reaches 1200 without winning a jackpot (i.e., until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 1200 times).
Then, if the results of the winning/losing lottery during the first low-probability time-shortening game state are all losses 1,200 times, the first time-shortening game state is changed to a non-time-shortening game state while the low-probability game state remains as it is, and the game state is changed to a normal game state.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11, a time-saving activation counter for counting the number of times (900 times) time-saving is activated to set the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is configured in a specified memory area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of this time-saving activation counter is reset when one of the following reset conditions is met: RAM is cleared (reset) by a specified operation, special game play ends, or the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is set.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the game state thereafter is set to the normal game state (low probability game state), and from this point on, counting by the time-saving activation number counter begins.
Furthermore, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X3 is finished, the subsequent game state is set to the first low probability time-shortened game state, and from this point onwards, counting by the time-shortened activation counter is started.
When the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, X4, or X5 ends, the game state thereafter is set to a high-probability time-saving game state (high-probability game state). Therefore, the time-saving activation counter does not start counting from the point when the special game ends, but starts counting from the point when the normal game state (low-probability game state) is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11, the first low-probability time-saving game state can be set only once after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the special game based on winning a jackpot has ended until the next jackpot is won.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the number of time-saving activations (900 times) and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving game state cannot be set again until the next big win is won.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter is reset by setting the first low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving activation counter is set to stop counting until the next jackpot is won or the RAM is cleared.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 11, the number of consecutive time-saving settings or the number of consecutive probability-changing settings are not set as in the above-described embodiment, and whenever a jackpot symbol X2, X4, or X5 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends.

As mentioned above, in pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, it is possible to win a time-saving award through a lottery during a low-probability game state, and if the time-saving award is won, a third low-probability time-saving game state can be set. As shown in FIG. 113(b), if the time-saving award is won, a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, and if the third low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of time-saving symbol J1, the number of time-saving plays can be set to 20, and if the third low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of time-saving symbol J2, the number of time-saving plays can be set to 40.

(Setting the gaming state when a time-saving award is won)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11, it is possible to win a time-saving award by a win/lose lottery during a low-probability game state, so it is possible to win a time-saving award during a normal game state in which a non-time-saving game state is set, and it is also possible to win a time-saving award during a first low-probability time-saving game state, a second low-probability time-saving game state, a third low-probability game state, or a fourth low-probability game state in which a time-saving game state is set.
Below, we will explain how to set the game state when you win a time-saving bonus during the normal game state, or when you win a time-saving bonus during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, or the third low-probability time-saving game state.

(1) When a player wins a time-saving award during normal game mode, in this case, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined based on the winning, the game mode is set to the third low-probability time-saving game mode and the number of time-saving times is set to 20 at the point when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning has finished and the stop display time has elapsed.
Furthermore, when the time-saving pattern J2 is determined based on the winning, the game state is set to the fourth low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times is set to 40 at the point when the variable display of the special pattern based on the winning has finished and the stop display time has elapsed.
Then, the time-saving number counter starts counting the number of time-saving times mentioned above, and when the count value of the time-saving number counter reaches the number of time-saving times mentioned above, the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

(2) If a time-saving bonus is awarded during the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, the same control is performed during the first low-probability time-saving game state and the second low-probability time-saving game state. Therefore, the control will be explained here based on the first low-probability time-saving game state, and an explanation of the control in the second low-probability time-saving game state will be omitted.
In this case, even if the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined based on the winning of the time-saving award, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the winning is not set, and the first low-probability time-saving game state that is currently set is maintained, but the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol that has been determined is set in the time-saving number counter, and counting of the number of time-saving times begins. As a result, the counting of the number of time-saving times corresponding to the first low-probability time-saving game state that is currently set and the counting of the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol (J1, J2) determined based on the above-mentioned winning are executed in parallel.

Then, when the count value of the time-saving count counter that counts the number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state reaches the number of time-saving times, if the count value of the time-saving count counter that counts the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving pattern determined based on the above-mentioned winning is 1 or more, the first low-probability time-saving game state currently set ends and the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set at the time when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stop display time has elapsed.
In other words, when the count value of the time-saving number counter reaches the number of time-saving times and the first low-probability time-saving game state currently set ends, if there are still time-saving times remaining based on winning the time-saving award, a new third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set.
In other words, when a time-saving award is won, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state currently set is smaller than the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the time-saving award winning, when the count value of the time-saving number counter reaches the number of time-saving times and the first low-probability time-saving game state currently set ends, a new third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set.

On the other hand, when the count value of the time-saving count counter that counts the number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state reaches the time-saving count, if the count value of the time-saving count counter that counts the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving pattern determined based on the above-mentioned winning is not 1 or more (i.e., 0 or less), when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the first low-probability time-saving game state being set ends, but a new third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state is not set and a normal game state is set.In other words, when the count value of the time-saving count counter reaches the time-saving count and the first low-probability time-saving game state being set ends, if there are no more time-saving times based on the winning of the time-saving award, a normal game state is set without a new third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state being set.
In other words, when a time-saving award is won, if the remaining number of time-saving awards in the first low-probability time-saving game state currently set is equal to or greater than the number of time-saving awards corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the time-saving award win, when the count value of the time-saving award counter reaches the number of time-saving awards and the first low-probability time-saving game state currently set ends, the normal game state is set without the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state being set.

(Specific example 1 of (2))
A first specific example of (2) will be described with reference to FIG. 114(a).
For example, suppose that the 1,150th drawing in the first low-probability time-saving game state results in a win for the time-saving award and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined. In other words, suppose that when the remaining number of time-saving turns in the first low-probability time-saving game state is 50, a determination is made that the third low-probability time-saving game state with 20 time-saving turns can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning/losing lottery for the time-saving grant has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state based on that winning is not set, and the first low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the time-saving number of 20 times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 is set in the time-saving number counter, and counting of the time-saving number of times begins. As a result, the counting of the time-saving number of times in the first low-probability time-saving game state (50 remaining times) and the counting of the time-saving number of times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 (20 remaining times) are carried out in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state (50 times) is greater than the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 (20 times). Then, before the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state reaches the number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state (i.e., before the first low-probability time-saving game state ends), the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 reaches the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1. Therefore, when the first low-probability time-saving game state ends, the count value of the time-saving number counter corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 becomes 0 or less, so that even though the time-saving award has been won, the third low-probability time-saving game state is not set, and the normal game state is set.
That is, in the above case, when the first low-probability time-saving game state with 1200 time-saving times ends, the normal game state is set as is.

(Specific example 2 of (2))
A specific example 2 of (2) will be described with reference to FIG. 114(b).
For example, suppose that the 1,190th drawing in the first low-probability time-saving game state results in a win for the time-saving award and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. In other words, suppose that when the remaining number of time-saving turns in the first low-probability time-saving game state is 10, a determination is made that the fourth low-probability time-saving game state with 40 time-saving turns can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning/losing lottery for the time-saving grant has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on that winning is not set, and the first low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the time-saving number of 40 times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 is set in the time-saving number counter, and counting of the time-saving number of times begins. As a result, the counting of the time-saving number of times in the first low-probability time-saving game state (10 times remaining) and the counting of the time-saving number of times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 (40 times remaining) are carried out in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-saving plays in the first low-probability time-saving game state (10 plays) is less than the number of time-saving plays corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 (40 plays). Thus, even if the count value of the time-saving play counter for counting the number of time-saving plays in the first low-probability time-saving game state reaches the number of time-saving plays in the first low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the time-saving play counter for counting the number of time-saving plays corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 does not reach the number of time-saving plays corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the first low-probability time-saving game state ends, the count value of the time-saving play counter corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 becomes 1 or greater, and a fourth low-probability time-saving game state is established.
At this point, the remaining number of time-saving turns in the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is 30. If the special symbol variable display is performed 30 times without winning a jackpot or time-saving award, the number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 is reached, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, and the normal game state is set.
In other words, in the above case, when the first low-probability time-saving game state with 1200 time-saving cycles ends, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state can continue until the special symbol variable display is performed 30 times. Then, when the special symbol variable display is performed 30 times during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

(Specific example 3 of (2))
A specific example 3 of (2) will be described with reference to FIG. 115(a).
For example, suppose that the time-saving symbol J2 is selected in the 30th drawing during the second low-probability time-saving game state. In other words, suppose that when the remaining number of time-saving turns in the second low-probability time-saving game state is 70, it is determined that the fourth low-probability time-saving game state with 40 time-saving turns can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning/losing lottery for the time-saving grant has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on that winning is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the time-saving number of 40 times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 is set in the time-saving number counter, and counting of the time-saving number of times begins. As a result, the counting of the time-saving number of times in the second low-probability time-saving game state (70 remaining times) and the counting of the time-saving number of times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 (40 remaining times) are carried out in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state (70 times) is greater than the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 (40 times). Then, before the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state reaches the number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state (i.e., before the second low-probability time-saving game state ends), the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 reaches the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state ends, the count value of the time-saving number counter corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 becomes 0 or less, so that even though the time-saving award has been won, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is not set, and the normal game state is set.
That is, in the above case, when the second low probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving times ends, the normal game state is set as it is.

(Specific example 4 of (2))
A specific example 4 of (2) will be described with reference to FIG. 115(b).
For example, suppose that the 90th drawing in the second low-probability time-saving game state wins the time-saving award and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined. In other words, suppose that when the remaining number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state is 10, it is determined that the third low-probability time-saving game state with 20 time-saving times can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning/losing lottery for the time-saving grant has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state based on that winning is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the time-saving number of 20 times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 is set in the time-saving number counter, and counting of the time-saving number of times begins. As a result, the counting of the time-saving number of times in the second low-probability time-saving game state (10 times remaining) and the counting of the time-saving number of times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 (20 times remaining) are carried out in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (10 times) is less than the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 (20 times). Even if the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state reaches the number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 does not reach the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving gaming state ends, the count value of the time-saving number counter corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 becomes 1 or more, and a third low-probability time-saving gaming state is established.
At this point, the remaining number of time-saving turns in the third low-probability time-saving game state is 10. If the special symbol variable display is performed 10 times without winning a jackpot or time-saving award, the number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 is reached, the third low-probability time-saving game state ends, and the normal game state is set.
In other words, in the above case, when the second low-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving cycles ends, the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the third low-probability time-saving game state can continue until the special symbol variable display is performed 10 times. Then, when the special symbol variable display is performed 10 times during the third low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

(3) When a player wins a time-saving award during normal game mode and then wins another time-saving award while the number of time-saving awards based on that winning is being counted. As described above, when a player wins a time-saving award during normal game mode, once the variable display of the special pattern based on that winning has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game mode or the fourth low-probability time-saving game mode is set, and the counting of the corresponding number of time-saving awards begins.
Then, if the time-saving grant is won again while the number of times the time-saving has been counted (i.e., during the set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state), and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the second win ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the second win is not set, and the currently set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state is maintained, but the number of times the time-saving has been granted corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the second win is set in the time-saving number counter, and counting of the number of times the time-saving has been granted begins. As a result, the counting of the number of times the time-saving has been granted corresponding to the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state, and the counting of the number of times the time-saving has been granted corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol (J1, J2) determined based on the above-mentioned second win, are executed in parallel.

Then, when the count value of the time-saving count counter that counts the number of time-saving times in the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state reaches the time-saving count, if the count value of the time-saving count counter that counts the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving pattern determined based on the above-mentioned second win is 1 or more, the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends at the time when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stop display has passed, and a new third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the above-mentioned second win is set.
In other words, when the count value of the time-saving number counter reaches the number of time-saving times and the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, if there are still time-saving times remaining based on winning another time-saving award, a new third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set.
In other words, when a player wins the time-saving award again, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state is smaller than the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of time-saving pattern determined based on the second time-saving award winning, when the count value of the time-saving number counter reaches the number of time-saving times, the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, and a new third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set.

In contrast, when the count value of the time-saving count counter that counts the number of time-saving times in the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state reaches the time-saving count, if the count value of the time-saving count counter that counts the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving pattern determined based on the above-mentioned second win is not 1 or more (i.e., 0 or less), when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, but a new third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state is not set and the normal game state is set.
In other words, when the count value of the time-saving number counter reaches the number of time-saving times and the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, if there are no time-saving times remaining based on winning another time-saving award, the normal game state is set without a new third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state being set.
In other words, when a player wins the time-saving award again, if the number of remaining time-saving times in the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state is equal to or greater than the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the second time-saving award win, when the count value of the time-saving number counter reaches the number of time-saving times and the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, the normal game state is set without a new third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state being set.

(Specific example 1 of (3))
A first specific example of (3) will be described with reference to FIG. 116(a).
For example, suppose that a win/loss lottery during a normal game state results in a win for time-saving award and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, thereby setting a fourth low-probability time-saving game state of 40 times, and then a win/loss lottery during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state results in a win for time-saving award again and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined. In other words, suppose that when the remaining number of time-saving awards in the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is 30, a determination is made again that a third low-probability time-saving game state of 20 times can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the second winning of the time-saving grant has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state based on the second winning of the time-saving grant is not set, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as it is, but the time-saving number of 20 times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the second winning of the time-saving grant is set in the time-saving number counter, and counting of the time-saving number of times begins. As a result, the counting of the time-saving number of times (30 remaining) of the fourth low-probability time-saving game state that was previously set and the counting of the time-saving number of times (20 remaining) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the second winning of the time-saving grant are performed in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-saving times (30 times) in the previously set fourth low-probability time-saving game state is greater than the number of time-saving times (20 times) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the second time-saving award. Then, before the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-saving times in the previously set fourth low-probability time-saving game state reaches the time-saving number for the fourth low-probability time-saving game state (i.e., before the previously set fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends), the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the second time-saving award reaches the time-saving number corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1. Therefore, when the previously set fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, the count value of the time-saving number counter corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the second time-saving award becomes 0 or less. Therefore, even though the time-saving award has been won again, the third low-probability time-saving game state is not set, and the normal game state is set.
That is, in the above case, when the fourth low probability time-saving game state with the previously set number of time-saving times of 40 ends, the normal game state is set as it is.

(Specific example 2 of (3))
A specific example 2 of (3) will be described with reference to FIG. 116(b).
For example, suppose that a win/loss lottery during a normal game state results in a win for time-saving award and time-saving symbol J1 is determined, thereby setting the third low-probability time-saving game state for 20 times, and then a win/loss lottery during the third low-probability time-saving game state results in a win for time-saving award again and time-saving symbol J2 is determined. In other words, suppose that when the remaining number of time-saving times in the third low-probability time-saving game state is 10, a determination is made again that a fourth low-probability time-saving game state with 40 time-saving times can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the second winning of the time-saving grant has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the second winning of the time-saving grant is not set, and the third low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as it is, but the time-saving number of 40 times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the second winning of the time-saving grant is set in the time-saving number counter, and counting of the time-saving number of times begins. As a result, the counting of the time-saving number of times (10 times remaining) of the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state and the counting of the time-saving number of times (40 times remaining) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the second winning of the time-saving grant are performed in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-saving times (10 times) in the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state is less than the number of time-saving times (40 times) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the second time-saving award. Thus, even if the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-saving times in the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state reaches the number of time-saving times in the third low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the second time-saving award does not reach the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state ends, the count value of the time-saving number counter corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the second time-saving award becomes 1 or greater, and a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set.
At this point, the remaining number of time-saving cycles in the newly set fourth low-probability time-saving game state is 30. If the special symbol variable display is performed 30 times without winning a jackpot or time-saving award, the number of time-saving cycles corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on another time-saving award win is reached, the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, and the normal game state is set.
In other words, in the above case, when the third low-probability time-saving game state with 20 time-saving cycles ends, a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state can continue until the special symbol variable display is performed 30 times. Then, when the special symbol variable display is performed 30 times during the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

(Specific example 3 of (3))
A specific example 3 of (3) will be described with reference to FIG. 116(c).
For example, suppose that a fourth low-probability time-saving game state with 40 times of time-saving is set by winning the lottery for time-saving award during the normal game state and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, and then a tenth lottery for time-saving award during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is again won and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined again. In other words, suppose that when the remaining number of time-saving times in the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is 30, a determination is made that the fourth low-probability time-saving game state with 40 times of time-saving can be set again.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the second winning of the time-saving grant has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the second winning of the time-saving grant is not set, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the time-saving number of 40 times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 determined based on the second winning of the time-saving grant is set in the time-saving number counter, and counting of the time-saving number of times begins. As a result, the counting of the time-saving number of times (30 remaining) of the fourth low-probability time-saving game state that was previously set and the counting of the time-saving number of times (40 remaining) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the second winning of the time-saving grant are carried out in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-saving times (30 times) in the previously set fourth low-probability time-saving game state is less than the number of time-saving times (40 times) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the second time-saving award. Thus, even if the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-saving times in the previously set fourth low-probability time-saving game state reaches the number of time-saving times in the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the second time-saving award does not reach the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the previously set fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, the count value of the time-saving number counter corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 becomes 1 or greater, and a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set.
At this point, the remaining number of time-saving times in the newly set fourth low-probability time-saving game state is 10. If the special symbol variable display is performed 10 times without winning a jackpot or time-saving award, the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on another time-saving award win is reached, the newly set fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, and the normal game state is set.
In other words, in the above case, when the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends after 40 time-saving cycles, a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state can continue until the special symbol variable display is performed 10 times. Then, when the special symbol variable display is performed 10 times during the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set. In other words, in this case, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state continues for 50 special symbol variable displays.

(4) When a player wins a time-saving award during the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, and then wins a time-saving award again while the number of time-saving awards based on that winning is being counted. As described above, when a player wins a time-saving award during the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state that is currently set is maintained, and the number of time-saving awards corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on that winning is set in the time-saving award counter, and counting of the number of time-saving awards begins.
Furthermore, if a time-saving award is won again while the number of times the time-saving pattern J1 or J2 is being counted based on the above-mentioned winning, when the variable display of the special pattern based on the second winning has ended and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the second winning is not set, and the number of times the time-saving pattern corresponding to the type of time-saving pattern determined based on the second winning is set in the time-saving counter, and counting of the number of times the time-saving pattern is started.
As a result, the following are executed in parallel: counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first; counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of time-saving pattern (J1, J2) determined based on the first time-saving award winning; and counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of time-saving pattern (J1, J2) determined based on the second time-saving award winning.

Then, when the count value of the time-saving count counter (hereinafter also referred to as the first time-saving count counter), which counts the number of time-saving cycles in the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first, reaches the time-saving count, if the count value of the time-saving count counter (hereinafter also referred to as the second time-saving count counter), which counts the number of time-saving cycles corresponding to the time-saving symbol determined based on the first time-saving win mentioned above, is 1 or greater, the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends when the special symbol variable display ends and the stationary display elapses, and a new third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the first time-saving win mentioned above is set.

Furthermore, when a new third low-probability time-shortening game state or a fourth low-probability time-shortening game state is set based on the first winning of the time-shortening grant, if the count value of the second time-shortening number counter reaches the number of time-shortening times, and the count value of the time-shortening number counter (hereinafter also referred to as the third time-shortening number counter) that counts the number of time-shortening times corresponding to the time-shortening pattern determined based on the above-mentioned winning of the second time-shortening grant is 1 or more, the new third low-probability time-shortening game state or the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state ends when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stop display elapses, and a new third low-probability time-shortening game state or a fourth low-probability time-shortening game state is set based on the above-mentioned winning of the second time-shortening grant.
On the other hand, when a new third low-probability time-shortened game state or a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state is set based on the first winning of the time-shortened grant, if the count value of the third time-shortened game state counter is not 1 or more when the count value of the second time-shortened game count counter reaches the number of time-shortened games, the new third low-probability time-shortened game state or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state ends when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stop display passes, and the normal game state is set without setting a new third low-probability time-shortened game state or a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state based on the above-mentioned second winning of the time-shortened grant.

On the other hand, if the count value of the second time-shortening counter is not 1 or greater when the count value of the first time-shortening counter reaches the number of time-shortening times, and the count value of the third time-shortening counter is also not 1 or greater, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the first low-probability time-shortening game state or the second low-probability time-shortening game state that was set first will end, but a new third low-probability time-shortening game state or a fourth low-probability time-shortening game state based on the first time-shortening grant mentioned above will not be set, and further, a new third low-probability time-shortening game state or a fourth low-probability time-shortening game state based on the second time-shortening grant mentioned above will not be set.
On the other hand, if the count value of the second time-shortening counter is not 1 or more when the count value of the first time-shortening counter reaches the number of time-shortening times, and the count value of the third time-shortening counter is 1 or more, then when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the first low-probability time-shortening game state or the second low-probability time-shortening game state that was set first ends, and although a new third low-probability time-shortening game state or a fourth low-probability time-shortening game state based on the first time-shortening grant mentioned above is not set, a new third low-probability time-shortening game state or a fourth low-probability time-shortening game state based on the second time-shortening grant mentioned above is set.

(Specific example 1 of (4))
A first specific example of (4) will be described with reference to FIG. 117(a).
For example, suppose that the 90th draw during the second low-probability time-shortened game state is successful in awarding the time-shortened game and the time-shortened game symbol J1 is determined, and the 95th draw during the second low-probability time-shortened game is successful in awarding the time-shortened game and the time-shortened game symbol J2 is determined. In other words, suppose that when the number of time-shortened games remaining in the second low-probability time-shortened game state is 10, a determination is made that a third low-probability time-shortened game state with 20 time-shortened games can be set, and when the number of time-shortened games remaining in the second low-probability time-shortened game state is 5, a determination is made that a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state with 40 time-shortened games can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the first winning of the time-saving award has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state based on the first winning of the time-saving award is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the second time-saving count counter is set to 20 time-saving times and counting of the time-saving times begins. Also, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the second winning of the time-saving award has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the second winning of the time-saving award is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the third time-saving count counter is set to 40 time-saving times and counting of the time-saving times begins. After this, the number of time-saving times (5 times remaining) for the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first, the number of time-saving times (15 times remaining) corresponding to the time-saving pattern J1 based on the first time time-saving grant win, and the number of time-saving times (40 times remaining) corresponding to the time-saving pattern J2 based on the second time time-saving grant win are counted in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-saving times in the first-set second low-probability time-saving game state is less than the remaining number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the first winning of the time-saving award. Then, even if the count value of the first time-saving number counter (a counter for counting the number of time-saving times in the first-set second low-probability time-saving game state) reaches the number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the second time-saving number counter does not reach the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1. Therefore, when the first-set second low-probability time-saving game state ends, the count value of the second time-saving number counter becomes 1 or more, and a new third low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the first winning of the time-saving award.
Furthermore, the remaining number of time-saving turns in the newly set third low-probability time-saving game state is less than the remaining number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the second winning of the time-saving award. Then, even if the count value of the second time-saving counter reaches the number of time-saving turns in the third low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the third time-saving counter does not reach the number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the newly set third low-probability time-saving game state ends, the count value of the third time-saving counter becomes 1 or greater, and a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the second winning of the time-saving award.
In other words, in the above case, when the second low-probability time-saving game state, which has had 100 time-saving cycles, ends, a new third low-probability time-saving game state is established, and this new third low-probability time-saving game state can continue until the special symbol variable display has occurred 10 times. Also, when the new third low-probability time-saving game state ends after 30 special symbol variable display cycles, a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is established, and this new fourth low-probability time-saving game state can continue until the special symbol variable display has occurred 25 times. Then, when the special symbol variable display has occurred 25 times during the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, and the normal game state is established.

(Specific example 2 of (4))
A specific example 2 of (4) will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b).
For example, suppose that the 70th draw during the second low-probability time-shortened game state results in a win for the time-shortened award and the time-shortened symbol J2 is determined, and the 75th draw during the second low-probability time-shortened game state results in a win for the time-shortened award and the time-shortened symbol J1 is determined. In other words, suppose that when the number of time-shortened times remaining in the second low-probability time-shortened game state is 30, a determination is made that a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state with 40 time-shortened times can be set, and when the number of time-shortened times remaining in the second low-probability time-shortened game state is 25, a determination is made that a third low-probability time-shortened game state with 20 time-shortened times can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the first winning of the time-saving award has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the first winning of the time-saving award is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as it is, but the second time-saving count counter is set to 40 time-saving times and counting of the time-saving times begins. Also, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the second winning of the time-saving award has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state based on the second winning of the time-saving award is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as it is, but the third time-saving count counter is set to 20 time-saving times and counting of the time-saving times begins. After this, the number of time-saving times (25 times remaining) for the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first, the number of time-saving times (35 times remaining) corresponding to the time-saving pattern J2 based on the first time time-saving grant win, and the number of time-saving times (15 times remaining) corresponding to the time-saving pattern J1 based on the second time time-saving grant win are counted in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first is less than the remaining number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the first winning of the time-saving award. Then, even if the count value of the first time-saving number counter reaches the number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the second time-saving number counter does not reach the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the second time-saving number counter becomes 1 or more, and a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the first winning of the time-saving award.
Here, the count value of the third time-saving count counter reaches the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 before the new fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. In other words, the number of time-saving times remaining in the newly set fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state becomes greater than the number of time-saving times remaining corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on winning the time-saving award again. Therefore, when the newly set fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state ends, the count value of the third time-saving count counter becomes 0 or less, and a new third low-probability time-saving gaming state based on winning the time-saving award again is not set.
In other words, in the above case, when the second low-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving cycles ends, a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state can continue until the special symbol variable display is performed 10 times. Then, when the special symbol variable display is performed 10 times during the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

(Specific example 3 of (4))
A specific example 3 of (4) will be described with reference to FIG. 117(c).
For example, suppose that the 50th draw during the second low-probability time-shortened game state is a win for the time-shortened award and the time-shortened symbol J1 is determined, and the 55th draw during the second low-probability time-shortened game state is a win for the time-shortened award and the time-shortened symbol J2 is determined. In other words, suppose that when the number of time-shortened times remaining in the second low-probability time-shortened game state is 50, a determination is made that a third low-probability time-shortened game state with 20 time-shortened times can be set, and when the number of time-shortened times remaining in the second low-probability time-shortened game state is 45, a determination is made that a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state with 40 time-shortened times can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the first winning of the time-saving award has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state based on the first winning of the time-saving award is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the second time-saving count counter is set to 20 time-saving times and counting of the time-saving times begins. Also, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the second winning of the time-saving award has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the second winning of the time-saving award is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the third time-saving count counter is set to 40 time-saving times and counting of the time-saving times begins. After this, the number of time-saving times (45 times remaining) for the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first, the number of time-saving times (15 times remaining) corresponding to the time-saving pattern J1 based on the first time time-saving grant win, and the number of time-saving times (40 times remaining) corresponding to the time-saving pattern J2 based on the second time time-saving grant win are counted in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-saving turns in the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first is greater than the remaining number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the first winning of the time-saving award. Then, before the count value of the first time-saving counter reaches the number of time-saving turns in the second low-probability time-saving game state (i.e., before the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends), the count value of the second time-saving counter reaches the number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the second time-saving counter becomes 0 or less, and a new third low-probability time-saving game state based on the first winning of the time-saving award is not set.
Furthermore, the remaining number of time-saving turns in the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first is greater than the remaining number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the second time-saving award. Then, before the count value of the first time-saving counter reaches the number of time-saving turns in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the third time-saving counter reaches the number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the third time-saving counter becomes 0 or less, and a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the winning of the second time-saving award is not set.
That is, in the above case, when the second low probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving times ends, the normal game state is set.

(Specific example 4 of (4))
A fourth specific example of (4) will be described with reference to FIG. 118(a).
For example, suppose that the 70th draw during the second low-probability time-shortened game state results in a win for the time-shortened award and the time-shortened symbol J1 is determined, and the 80th draw during the second low-probability time-shortened game state results in a win for the time-shortened award and the time-shortened symbol J2 is determined. In other words, suppose that when the number of time-shortened plays remaining in the second low-probability time-shortened game state is 30, a determination is made that a third low-probability time-shortened game state with 20 time-shortened plays can be set, and when the number of time-shortened plays remaining in the second low-probability time-shortened game state is 20, a determination is made that a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state with 40 time-shortened plays can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the first winning of the time-saving award has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state based on the first winning of the time-saving award is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the second time-saving count counter is set to 20 time-saving times and counting of the time-saving times begins. Also, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the second winning of the time-saving award has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the second winning of the time-saving award is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the third time-saving count counter is set to 40 time-saving times and counting of the time-saving times begins. After this, the number of time-saving times (20 times remaining) for the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first, the number of time-saving times (10 times remaining) corresponding to the time-saving pattern J1 based on the first winning of the time-saving grant, and the number of time-saving times (40 times remaining) corresponding to the time-saving pattern J2 based on the second winning of the time-saving grant are counted in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-saving turns in the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first is greater than the remaining number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the first winning of the time-saving award. Then, before the count value of the first time-saving counter reaches the number of time-saving turns in the second low-probability time-saving game state (i.e., before the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends), the count value of the second time-saving counter reaches the number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the second time-saving counter becomes 0 or less, and a new third low-probability time-saving game state based on the first winning of the time-saving award is not set.
Meanwhile, the remaining number of time-saving turns in the first-set second low-probability time-saving game state is less than the remaining number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the second time-saving award winning. Then, even if the count value of the first time-saving counter reaches the number of time-saving turns in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the third time-saving counter does not reach the number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the first-set second low-probability time-saving game state ends, the count value of the third time-saving counter becomes 1 or greater, and a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the second time-saving award winning.
In other words, in the above case, when the second low-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving cycles ends, a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state can continue until the special symbol variable display is performed 20 times. Then, when the special symbol variable display is performed 20 times during the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

(Specific example 5 of (4))
A specific example 5 of (4) will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b).
For example, suppose that the 50th draw during the second low-probability time-shortened game state is a win for the time-shortened award and the time-shortened symbol J2 is determined, and the 60th draw during the second low-probability time-shortened game state is a win for the time-shortened award and the time-shortened symbol J1 is determined. In other words, suppose that when the number of time-shortened times remaining in the second low-probability time-shortened game state is 50, a determination is made that a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state with 40 time-shortened times can be set, and when the number of time-shortened times remaining in the second low-probability time-shortened game state is 40, a determination is made that a third low-probability time-shortened game state with 20 time-shortened times can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the first winning of the time-saving award has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the first winning of the time-saving award is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the second time-saving count counter is set to 20 time-saving times and counting of the time-saving times begins. Also, when the variable display of the special symbol based on a second winning of the time-saving award has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state based on a second winning of the time-saving award is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is maintained as is, but the third time-saving count counter is set to 20 time-saving times and counting of the time-saving times begins. After this, the number of time-saving times (40 times remaining) for the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first, the number of time-saving times (30 times remaining) corresponding to the time-saving pattern J2 based on the first winning of the time-saving grant, and the number of time-saving times (20 times remaining) corresponding to the time-saving pattern J1 based on the second winning of the time-saving grant are counted in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-saving turns in the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first is greater than the remaining number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the first winning of the time-saving award. Then, before the count value of the first time-saving counter reaches the number of time-saving turns in the second low-probability time-saving game state (i.e., before the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends), the count value of the second time-saving counter reaches the number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the second time-saving counter becomes 0 or less, and a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the first winning of the time-saving award is not set.
Furthermore, the remaining number of time-saving turns in the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first is greater than the remaining number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the second time-saving award. Then, before the count value of the first time-saving counter reaches the number of time-saving turns in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the third time-saving counter reaches the number of time-saving turns corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the third time-saving counter becomes 0 or less, and a new third low-probability time-saving game state based on the winning of the second time-saving award is not set.
That is, in the above case, when the second low probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving times ends, the normal game state is set.

As described above, in pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, not only can it transition to the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, which are more advantageous than the normal game state, by winning a jackpot (determining the jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, or X5) and playing a special game, but it can also transition to the first low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, which are more advantageous than the normal game state, without winning a jackpot or playing a special game, by losing all 1,200 time-saving game lotteries during the low-probability game state or winning the time-saving award during the low-probability time-saving game state. This allows for innovative gameplay and heightened player interest.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11, if a time-shortening award is won during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the third low-probability time-shortening game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state, the time-shortening game state can be continued until the number of time-shortening awards corresponding to the current time-shortening game state is reached, and the number of time-shortening awards corresponding to the time-shortening game state that can be set based on the winning of the time-shortening award is counted, and when the number of time-shortening awards corresponding to the current time-shortening game state is reached and the time-shortening game state is ended, if the remaining number of time-shortening awards based on the winning of the time-shortening award is 1 or more, the time-shortening game state based on the winning of the time-shortening award is set.
As a result, even in cases where the time-shortening game state described above overlaps with the time-shortening game state due to winning a time-shortening grant, both time-shortening game states can be appropriately generated within the range of the number of time-shortenings that can be set, thereby increasing the opportunities to set various time-shortening game states and increasing the player's interest.

Next, an overview of the processing related to winning the time-saving award will be explained using a flowchart.
First, the processing executed when a time-saving award is won will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 119.
In step 7000, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time has elapsed, which is the time for which the special symbol is displayed in a static state after the variable display of the special symbol has ended. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the time-saving grant winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 7001.
In step 7001, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the player has won the time-saving bonus by lottery. If the player has not won the time-saving bonus, the main CPU 101 ends the time-saving bonus winning process. On the other hand, if the player has won the time-saving bonus, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 7002.

In step 7002, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game is in a normal game mode. If it determines that the game is not in a normal game mode (i.e., the game is in the first low-probability time-shortened game mode, the second low-probability time-shortened game mode, the third low-probability time-shortened game mode, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game mode), the process proceeds to step 7004. On the other hand, if it determines that the game is in a normal game mode, the process proceeds to the next step 7003.
In step 7003, the main CPU 101 sets a game state corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the winning of the time-saving award. Specifically, if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, and if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 7004.

In step 7004, the main CPU 101 sets the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the winning of the time-saving award in the corresponding time-saving number counter. This starts counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to the set time-saving game state, and the count value of the above-mentioned time-saving number counter is decremented by 1 each time a variable display of a special symbol is executed. Then, the time-saving award winning processing ends.

Next, the processing at the end of the time-shortened game state, which is executed when the number of time-shortened games corresponding to the currently set time-shortened game state is reached and the time-shortened game state ends, will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 120.
In step 7100, the main CPU 101 determines whether the above-mentioned stop display time has elapsed. If it is determined that the stop display time has not elapsed, the time-saving game state end processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 7101.
In step 7101, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game is currently in the first, second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state. If it determines that the game is not currently in the first, second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, it terminates the time-shortened game state end processing. On the other hand, if it determines that the game is currently in the first, second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, it proceeds to step 7102.

In step 7102, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the time-shortening count counter corresponding to the currently set time-shortening game state (either the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the third low-probability time-shortening game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state) has reached 0, i.e., whether the time-shortening count corresponding to the currently set time-shortening game state has been reached. If it is determined that the count value of the corresponding time-shortening count counter has not reached 0, the time-shortening game state termination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value of the corresponding time-shortening count counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to the next step 7103.
In step 7103, the main CPU 101 ends the time-shortened gaming state that has been set, and then proceeds to step 7104.

In step 7104, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a time-saving counter whose current count value is equal to or greater than 1. If it is determined that there is no time-saving counter whose count value is equal to or greater than 1, the process proceeds to step 7106. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a time-saving counter whose count value is equal to or greater than 1, the process proceeds to the next step 7105.
In step 7105, the main CPU 101 sets the time-shortened game state (either the third low-probability time-shortened game state or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state) corresponding to the time-shortened game counter that started counting earliest among the time-shortened game counters whose current count value is 1 or more. Then, the time-shortened game state end processing is terminated.

Furthermore, in step 7106, which is reached if it is determined in step 7104 above that no time-saving count counter has a count value of 1 or greater, the main CPU 101 sets the normal game state. Then, the time-saving game state termination processing is terminated.

(Modification of Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 11)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, if a time-saving award is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the currently set time-saving game state ends and a new time-saving game state (the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state) can be set when the variable display of the special pattern that is executed when the number of time-saving turns corresponding to each time-saving game state is reached (the end of each game state) ends and the stopped display time has elapsed, but the timing for ending the currently set time-saving game state and setting a new time-saving game state is not limited to this.
For example, the currently set time-saving game state may be ended and a new time-saving game state may be set at the timing when the display of the changing special pattern that is executed when the number of time-saving times corresponding to the currently set time-saving game state is reached ends, or at the timing when the display of the changing special pattern that is executed after the display of the changing special pattern begins.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 11 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, if a time-shortening award is won during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the third low-probability time-shortening game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state, the time-shortening game state is not set based on the time-shortening award winning until the currently set time-shortening game state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, internally, when a time-shortening grant is won, a time-shortening play state based on the winning of the time-shortening grant is set in addition to the time-shortening play state that was previously set, but the setting of the time-shortening play state based on the winning of the time-shortening grant may be disabled until the previously set time-shortening play state ends, and when the previously set time-shortening play state ends, the setting of the time-shortening play state based on the winning of the time-shortening grant may become valid.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 11 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11, when a time-saving award is won during the third low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving pattern J1 is determined, or when a time-saving award is won during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving pattern J2 is determined, the time-saving game state is temporarily ended by reaching the number of time-saving plays corresponding to the previously set time-saving game state, and then the same time-saving game state is newly set, but this is not limited to this.
For example, in the above case, even if the number of time-saving plays corresponding to the previously set time-saving play state is reached, the time-saving play state may not be terminated, but the time-saving play state may be continued as is, and only the number of time-saving plays may be newly set.
In this case, the same effect as that of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 11 can be achieved, and the processing load can be reduced when the time-saving grant is won and the number of time-saving times corresponding to the previously set time-saving game state is reached.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, it was possible to derive the lottery results for both winning the jackpot and winning the time-saving grant by drawing a win/lose lottery, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the result of the lottery for winning the time-saving grant may not be derived through the win/lose lottery, but the result of the lottery for winning the time-saving grant may be derived through a lottery other than the win/lose lottery.
Even when set in this way, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 11 can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, if a time-shortening award is won during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the third low-probability time-shortening game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state, the time-shortening game state is not set based on the time-shortening award winning until the currently set time-shortening game state ends, but the number of time-shortening awards based on the time-shortening award winning is counted, and when the currently set time-shortening game state ends, control (hereinafter also referred to as control A) is executed to set the time-shortening game state based on the time-shortening award winning. However, the control when a time-shortening award is won during a time-shortening game state is not limited to this, and the following control B or control C may also be executed.

(Control B)
If a time-saving award is won during each of the above-mentioned time-saving game states, the currently set time-saving game state may be ended and a time-saving game state based on the winning may be set at the point when the variable display of the special pattern based on the winning has finished and the stop display time has elapsed.
(Specific example of control B)
For example, suppose that a time-saving award is won in the 20th draw during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and time-saving symbol J2 is determined. In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the time-saving award win ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the currently set second low-probability time-saving game state ends, and a new 40-time fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the time-saving award win is set. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 40 times during the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, and the normal game state is set. In other words, in this case, the time-saving game state can continue until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 60 times.
Also, for example, suppose that the time-saving award is won in the 80th draw during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the time-saving award win ends and the static display time has elapsed, the currently set second low-probability time-saving game state ends, and a new 40-time fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the time-saving award win is set. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 40 times during the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, and the normal game state is set. In other words, in this case, the time-saving game state can continue until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 120 times.
When set in this manner, the processing load can be reduced when a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state.

(Control C)
If a time-saving award is won during each of the time-saving game states described above, the time-saving game state based on the winning may not be set thereafter.
(Specific example of control C)
Specifically, for example, suppose that a player wins the time-saving award in the 20th draw during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. However, in this case, a new 40-time fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the winning of the time-saving award is not set. Therefore, if the special symbol variable display is performed 100 times during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set. In other words, in this case, the time-saving game state can continue until the special symbol variable display is performed 100 times.
Also, for example, suppose that the time-saving award is won in the 80th draw during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. However, even in this case, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is not newly set for 40 times based on the time-saving award win. Therefore, if the special symbol variable display is performed 100 times during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set. In other words, even in this case, the time-saving game state can continue until the special symbol variable display is performed 100 times.
When set in this manner, the processing load can be reduced when a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, the above-mentioned control A is executed regardless of whether a time-saving bonus is awarded during any time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this, and different controls may be executed depending on the time-saving game state currently set.
For example, if a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the above-mentioned control A is executed, but if a time-saving award is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the above-mentioned control B may be executed.
In this case, the control when a time-saving award is won during the time-saving game state can be varied, and various gameplay features can be provided.

(Another Application Example 12)
The pachinko machine P relating to another application example 12 has almost the same configuration as the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11, but differs from the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 11 in the lottery results derived by the win/lose lottery, the game state that is set, and the processing for setting the game state when a time-saving grant is won during the time-saving game state.
Below, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, and explanations of the same configurations will be omitted unless necessary.

(Types of game states)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, as in the other application example 11, the settable game states are a normal game state, a first low-probability time-shortened game state, a second low-probability time-shortened game state, a third low-probability time-shortened game state, a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, and a high-probability time-shortened game state, and the game progresses by setting one of the game states.
Here, the high-probability time-saving game state in other application example 12 is not a game state that combines a high-probability game state and a second time-saving game state as in other application example 11, but a game state that combines a high-probability game state and a first time-saving game state.

(Outline of lottery)
As shown in Figure 121 (a), in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 12, when a low probability game state (normal game state, first low probability time-shortened game state, second low probability time-shortened game state, third low probability time-shortened game state, fourth low probability time-shortened game state) is set, in the win/loss lottery it is possible to win a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a time-shortened bonus, and when a high probability game state (high probability time-shortened game state) is set, it is not possible to win a time-shortened bonus, and only a jackpot or a small jackpot can be won.
The probability of winning a small prize when a low-probability game state is set, and the probability of winning a small prize when a high-probability game state is set, are both set to approximately 30/300. In addition, when a small prize is won by a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning slot 15, and when a small prize is won by a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning slot 16, the small prize symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, and the probability of determining the small prize symbol Y1 and the probability of determining the small prize symbol Y2 are both set to 50/100 (50%).
In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot, the type of jackpot pattern determined if a jackpot is won, the probability of winning a time-saving bonus, the type of time-saving pattern determined if a time-saving bonus is won, and the type of losing pattern determined if a losing bonus is won are the same as those in other application example 11.

(Outline of the fluctuation pattern to be determined)
Also, although not specifically shown, when a small win is won during normal gameplay and the small win pattern Y1 or Y2 is determined, a fluctuation pattern command of "D0H" is determined, which sets a fluctuation pattern of "13-second fluctuation (the fluctuation time of the special pattern is set to 13 seconds)" regardless of the number of reserved balls at that time (first reserved number, second reserved number) and the type of starting winning slot into which the game ball entered (first starting winning slot 15, second starting winning slot 16).
When a small win is won during the first low-probability time-shortened game state or the high-probability time-shortened game state and the small win pattern Y1 or Y2 is determined, a variation pattern command of "D1H" is determined, which sets the variation pattern to "3-second variation (the variation time of the special pattern is set to 3 seconds)" regardless of the number of reserved balls at that time and the type of starting winning slot into which the game ball entered.
When a small win is won and small win pattern Y1 is determined during the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, a variation pattern command of "D2H" is determined, which sets a variation pattern of "20-second variation (variation time of special pattern is set to 20 seconds)" regardless of the number of reserved balls at that time or the type of starting winning slot into which the game ball entered, and when small win pattern Y2 is determined, a variation pattern command of "D3H" is determined, which sets a variation pattern of "20-second variation" regardless of the number of reserved balls at that time or the type of starting winning slot into which the game ball entered.

Furthermore, if a time-saving award is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "E0H" is determined, which sets the fluctuation pattern to "45-second fluctuation (the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to 45 seconds)" regardless of the number of reserved balls at that time and the type of starting winning slot into which the game ball entered.
When a time-saving award is won and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, a fluctuation pattern command of "E1H" which sets a fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" is determined, regardless of the number of reserved balls at that time and the type of starting winning slot into which the game ball entered, and when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, a fluctuation pattern command of "E2H" which sets a fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" is determined, regardless of the number of reserved balls at that time and the type of starting winning slot into which the game ball entered.

(Outline of small win game)
121(b), when a small prize is won and small prize pattern Y1 or Y2 is determined, the large prize opening 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds, and if 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open, a small prize game is executed in which the large prize opening 18 closes. During this small prize game, as described above, the large prize opening 18 is only open for 0.05 seconds, making it nearly impossible to get game balls to enter the large prize opening 18.

(Outline of game state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 12, one of the game states is set to a normal game state, a first low-probability time-shortened game state, a second low-probability time-shortened game state, a third low-probability time-shortened game state, a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, or a high-probability time-shortened game state.

When the first low-probability time-saving game state, second low-probability time-saving game state, third low-probability time-saving game state, fourth low-probability time-saving game state, or high-probability time-saving game state is set, a time-saving count counter configured in a specified memory area of main RAM 103 begins counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to each time-saving game state. Specifically, when the above-mentioned time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving times corresponding to each time-saving game state is set in the time-saving count counter, and the count value of the time-saving count counter is decremented by 1 each time a special pattern variation is displayed. This counts the remaining number of time-saving times in each time-saving game state. When the count value of the time-saving count counter reaches the number of time-saving times (i.e., when the count value of the time-saving count counter reaches 0), the remaining number of time-saving times becomes 0. The count value of the time-saving count counter is reset when the RAM is cleared (reset) by a specified operation or when the special game ends.

(1) First Low-Probability Time-Shortening Game State As shown in FIG. 122, when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the predetermined number of times for activating the time-shortening game (900 times in other application example 12) without winning a jackpot in a low-probability game state (normal game state, second low-probability time-shortening game state, third low-probability time-shortening game state, fourth low-probability time-shortening game state) (i.e., when the results of the win/lose lottery in the low-probability game state are not all jackpots), the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set. When the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set, the number of times for activating the time-shortening game state is set to 1200.

The first low-probability time-saving game state ends when one of the following conditions is met: a jackpot is won, or the result of the win/lose lottery is derived 1,200 times, which is the number of time-saving times, without winning a jackpot (the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 1,200) (see Figure 122).
Specifically, when a jackpot is won during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the first low-probability time-shortened game state ends as described above, and after the special game based on the winning is completed, a game state is set according to the jackpot pattern determined based on the winning.
Furthermore, if the results of the win/lose lottery during the first low-probability time-shortened game state are anything other than a jackpot for all 1,200 times, the first time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state while the low-probability game state remains the same, thereby ending the first low-probability time-shortened game state as described above and setting the normal game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 12, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state is approximately 1/300, so essentially the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until a jackpot is won.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 12, a time-saving activation counter for counting the number of times (900 times) time-saving is activated to set the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is configured in a specified memory area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of this time-saving activation counter is reset when one of the following reset conditions is met: RAM is cleared (reset) by a specified operation, special game play ends, or the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is set.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the game state thereafter is set to the normal game state (low probability game state), and from this point on, counting by the time-saving activation number counter begins.
Furthermore, as will be described later, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X3 ends, the subsequent game state is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state, and from this point on, counting by the time-saving activation counter begins.
On the other hand, as will be described later, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, X4, or X5 ends, the game state is set to a high-probability time-saving game state (high-probability game state). Therefore, the time-saving activation counter does not start counting from the point at which the special game ends. Then, for example, if the result of the win/loss lottery is derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot and the normal game state (low-probability game state) is set, the time-saving activation counter starts counting from this point.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 12, the first low-probability time-saving game state can be set only once after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the special game based on winning a jackpot has ended until the next jackpot is won.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the number of time-saving activations (900 times) and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving game state cannot be set again until the next big win is won.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 12, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter is reset by setting the first low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving activation counter is set to stop counting until the next jackpot is won or the RAM is cleared.

(2) High-Probability Time-Shortening Game State As shown in FIG. 122, regardless of the currently set game state, if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, or if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbol X4 or X5 is determined, the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to a high-probability game state, and is set to the first time-shortening game state, thereby setting a high-probability time-shortening game state. In addition, the number of high-probability wins and the number of time-shortening wins are both set to 10,000.

The high-probability time-saving game state ends when one of the following conditions is met: a jackpot is won; or the result of the win/lose lottery is derived 10,000 times, which is the number of high-probability and time-saving times, without winning a jackpot (the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10,000) (see Figure 122).
Specifically, when a jackpot is won during the high probability time-saving game state, the high probability time-saving game state ends as described above, and after the special game based on the winning is completed, the game state is set according to the jackpot pattern determined based on the winning.
Furthermore, if the results of the win/lose lottery during the high-probability time-shortening game state are other than a jackpot for all 10,000 times, the high-probability game state is changed to a low-probability game state, and the first time-shortening game state is changed to a non-time-shortening game state, thereby ending the high-probability time-shortening game state as described above and setting the normal game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 12, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state is approximately 6/300 (1/50), so in effect, the high-probability time-saving game state continues until another jackpot is won.

(3) Second Low-Probability Time-Shortening Game State As shown in FIG. 122, regardless of the currently set game state, if a jackpot is won and a jackpot symbol X1 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the first special random number, or if a jackpot is won and a jackpot symbol X3 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number, the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to a low-probability game state and a second time-shortening game state, thereby setting the second low-probability time-shortening game state. In addition, the number of time-shortening times is set to 10,000.

The second low-probability time-saving game state ends when one of the following termination conditions is met: a jackpot is won; the result of the win/lose lottery is derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot (the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10,000); the count value of the time-saving activation count counter reaches the number of times time-saving is activated (900 times); the small win pattern Y1 based on a small win is determined a predetermined number of times (three times in this example); or a time-saving award is won (see Figure 122).
Specifically, if a jackpot is won during the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state ends as described above, and after the special game based on the winning is completed, a game state corresponding to the jackpot pattern determined based on the winning is set.
Furthermore, if the results of the win/lose lottery during the second low-probability time-shortened game state are other than a jackpot all 10,000 times, the low-probability game state remains unchanged and the second time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state, thereby ending the second low-probability time-shortened game state and setting the normal game state as described above. Furthermore, if the count value of the time-shortened game activation count counter during the second low-probability time-shortened game state reaches the time-shortened activation count, the low-probability game state remains unchanged and the second time-shortened game state is changed to the first time-shortened game state, thereby ending the second low-probability time-shortened game state and setting the first low-probability time-shortened game state as described above. Here, during the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the count value of the time-shortened game activation count counter reaches the number of times to activate the time-shortened game before the result of the win/lose lottery is other than a jackpot all 10,000 times during the second low-probability time-shortened game state, so it is impossible for the result of the win/lose lottery to be other than a jackpot all 10,000 times during the second low-probability time-shortened game state, and in fact, when this end condition is satisfied, the second low-probability time-shortened game state ends and the normal game state is not set.
Furthermore, if the small winning symbol Y1 is determined three times during the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state while the low-probability game state remains as it is, thereby ending the second low-probability time-shortened game state as described above and setting the normal game state.
In addition, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12 is provided with a determination count counter (configured in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103) for counting the number of times the small win symbol Y1 is determined. Then, from the point when the second low-probability time-shortened gaming state is set, the determination count counter starts counting the number of times the small win symbol Y1 is determined, and when the count value of this determination count counter reaches the aforementioned number of times of termination (three times), the second low-probability time-shortened gaming state ends. The count value of the determination count counter is reset when the RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation, or when the second low-probability time-shortened gaming state currently set ends.
Furthermore, if a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the second time-saving game state ends and the game changes to a third time-saving game state while the low-probability game state remains unchanged, thereby ending the second low-probability time-saving game state and establishing the third low-probability time-saving game state as described above. More specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the win ends and the static display time has elapsed, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the third low-probability time-saving game state is established. On the other hand, if a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the second time-saving game state ends and the game changes to a fourth time-saving game state while the low-probability game state remains unchanged, thereby ending the second low-probability time-saving game state and establishing the fourth low-probability time-saving game state as described above. More specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the second low-probability time-shortened game state ends and a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state is set.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 12, when a time-saving grant is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state, a different type of time-saving game state is set, but the time-saving game state itself continues.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability game state is approximately 1/300, and the probability of determining the small prize symbol Y1 is approximately 1/20 (probability of winning a small prize 30/300 (1/10) × probability of determining the small prize symbol Y1 when a small prize is won 50/100 (1/2)). Therefore, during the second low probability time-saving game state, the count value of the time-saving activation number counter will not reach the time-saving activation number, and furthermore, as described above, the result of the win/lose lottery will not be derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot.
Therefore, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends when a jackpot is won, when a time-saving bonus is awarded, or when the small prize symbol Y1 is determined three times. In particular, since the probability of determining the small prize symbol Y1 (1/20) and the probability of winning the time-saving bonus (3/300 (1/100)) are higher than the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state (1/300), the second low-probability time-saving game state ends when a time-saving bonus is awarded or when the small prize symbol Y1 is determined three times.

(4) Third Low-Probability Time-Shortening Game State As shown in FIG. 122, if a time-shortening award is won and the time-shortening symbol J1 is determined during the normal game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the third low-probability time-shortening game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state, the low-probability game state remains, the non-time-shortening game state, the second time-shortening game state, the third time-shortening game state, or the fourth time-shortening game state ends, and the third low-probability time-shortening game state is set. In addition, the number of time-shortening times is set to 10,000.

The third low-probability time-saving game state ends when one of the following termination conditions is met: a jackpot is won; the result of the win/lose lottery is derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot (the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10,000); the count value of the time-saving activation count counter reaches the number of times time-saving is activated (900 times); the small win pattern Y1 based on a small win is determined a predetermined number of times (three times in this example); or a time-saving award is won (see Figure 122).
Specifically, if a jackpot is won during the third low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state ends as described above, and after the special game based on the winning is completed, a game state is set according to the jackpot pattern determined based on the winning.
Furthermore, if the results of the win/lose lottery during the third low-probability time-shortening game state are other than a jackpot all 10,000 times, the low-probability game state remains unchanged and the third time-shortening game state is changed to a non-time-shortening game state, thereby ending the third low-probability time-shortening game state and setting the normal game state as described above. Furthermore, if the count value of the time-shortening activation counter during the third low-probability time-shortening game state reaches the time-shortening activation count, the low-probability game state remains unchanged and the third time-shortening game state is changed to the first time-shortening game state, thereby ending the third low-probability time-shortening game state and setting the first low-probability time-shortening game state as described above. Here, during the third low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the number of times to activate the time-saving game before the result of the win/lose lottery is other than a jackpot all 10,000 times, so it is impossible for the result of the win/lose lottery to be other than a jackpot all 10,000 times during the third low-probability time-saving game state, and in fact, when this termination condition is satisfied, the third low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is not set.
Furthermore, if the small winning symbol Y1 is determined three times during the third low-probability time-shortened game state, the third time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state while the low-probability game state remains as it is, thereby ending the third low-probability time-shortened game state as described above and setting the normal game state.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, the determination count counter starts counting the number of times the small win symbol Y1 is determined from the time the third low-probability time-shortened game state is set, and when the count value of this determination count counter reaches the above-mentioned number of times the end is established (3 times), the third low-probability time-shortened game state ends. The count value of the determination count counter is reset when RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation or when the third low-probability time-shortened game state currently set ends.
Furthermore, if a time-saving award is won during the third low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the third time-saving game state ends temporarily while the low-probability game state remains, but the third time-saving game state is set again after this end. More specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the win ends and the static display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state ends temporarily, but the third low-probability time-saving game state is reset based on this end. In other words, if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined during the third low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state essentially continues.
On the other hand, if a time-saving award is won during the third low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the third time-saving game state ends and changes to the fourth time-saving game state while the low-probability game state remains, thereby ending the third low-probability time-saving game state and setting the fourth low-probability time-saving game state as described above. More specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning has ended and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state ends and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 12, when a time-saving grant is won during the third low-probability time-saving game state, the same or a different type of time-saving game state is set, and the time-saving game state itself continues.

In the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 12, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state is approximately 1/300, and the probability of determining the small-win symbol Y1 is approximately 1/20. Therefore, the result of the lottery will not be derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot during the third low-probability time-saving game state.
On the other hand, as described above, counting by the time-saving activation count counter begins from the time the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and counting by the time-saving activation count counter continues in the normal game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, which may be set after the second low-probability time-saving game state ends, so the count value of the time-saving activation count counter may reach the number of time-saving activations during the third low-probability time-saving game state.
Therefore, the third low-probability time-saving game state essentially ends when a jackpot is won, when the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the time-saving activation count, when a time-saving award is won, or when the small win symbol Y1 is determined three times. In particular, since the probability of determining the small win symbol Y1 (1/20) and the probability of winning the time-saving award (3/300 (1/100)) are higher than the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state (1/300), the third low-probability time-saving game state ends almost always when a time-saving award is won or when the small win symbol Y1 is determined three times.

(5) Fourth Low-Probability Time-Shortening Game State As shown in FIG. 122, if a time-shortening award is won and the time-shortening symbol J2 is determined during the normal game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the third low-probability time-shortening game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state, the low-probability game state remains, the non-time-shortening game state, the second time-shortening game state, the third time-shortening game state, or the fourth time-shortening game state ends, and the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state is set. In addition, the number of time-shortening times is set to 10,000.

The fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends when one of the following termination conditions is met: a jackpot is won; the result of the win/lose lottery is derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot (the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10,000); the count value of the time-saving activation count counter reaches the number of times time-saving is activated (900 times); the small win pattern Y1 based on a small win is determined a predetermined number of times (five times in this example); or a time-saving award is won (see Figure 122).
Specifically, if a jackpot is won during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends as described above, and after the special game based on the winning is completed, a game state corresponding to the jackpot pattern determined based on the winning is set.
Furthermore, if the results of the win/lose lottery during the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state are other than a jackpot all 10,000 times, the low-probability game state remains unchanged and the fourth time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state, thereby ending the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state and setting the normal game state as described above. Furthermore, if the count value of the time-shortened game activation count counter during the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state reaches the time-shortened activation count, the low-probability game state remains unchanged and the fourth time-shortened game state is changed to the first time-shortened game state, thereby ending the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state and setting the first low-probability time-shortened game state as described above. Here, during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the number of times to activate the time-saving game before the result of the win/lose lottery is other than a jackpot all 10,000 times, so it is impossible for the result of the win/lose lottery to be other than a jackpot all 10,000 times during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, and in fact, when this termination condition is satisfied, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is not set.
Furthermore, if the small winning symbol Y1 is determined five times during the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, the fourth time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state while the low-probability game state remains as it is, and as a result, the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state ends and the normal game state is set as described above.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, the determination count counter starts counting the number of times the small win symbol Y1 is determined from the time the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state is set, and when the count value of this determination count counter reaches the above-mentioned number of times the end is established (5 times), the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state ends. The count value of the determination count counter is reset when RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation or when the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state currently set ends.
Furthermore, if a time-saving award is won during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the fourth time-saving game state ends and changes to the third time-saving game state while the low-probability game state remains, thereby ending the fourth low-probability time-saving game state and setting the third low-probability time-saving game state as described above. More specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning has ended and the stop display time has elapsed, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends and the third low-probability time-saving game state is set.
On the other hand, if a time-saving award is won during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the fourth time-saving game state ends temporarily while the low-probability game state remains, but the fourth time-saving game state is set again after this end. More specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the win ends and the static display time has elapsed, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends temporarily, but the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is reset based on this end. In other words, if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state essentially continues.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 12, when a time-saving grant is won during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the same or a different type of time-saving game state is set, and the time-saving game state itself continues.

In the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 12, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state is approximately 1/300, and the probability of determining the small-win symbol Y1 is approximately 1/20. Therefore, the result of the lottery will not be derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state.
On the other hand, as described above, counting by the time-saving activation count counter begins from the time the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and counting by the time-saving activation count counter continues in the normal game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, which may be set after the second low-probability time-saving game state ends, so the count value of the time-saving activation count counter may reach the number of time-saving activations during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state.
Therefore, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state essentially ends when a jackpot is won, when the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the time-saving activation count, when a time-saving award is won, or when the small win symbol Y1 is determined five times. In particular, since the probability of determining the small win symbol Y1 (1/20) and the probability of winning the time-saving award (3/300 (1/100)) are higher than the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state (1/300), the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends almost always when a time-saving award is won or when the small win symbol Y1 is determined five times.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 12, when a time-saving award is won in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the game state is set based on control B in the modified example of another application example 11.
In other words, if a player wins a time-saving grant during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the currently set time-saving game state will end and the time-saving game state based on the winning will be set once the variable display of the special pattern based on the winning has finished and the stop display time has elapsed.

Here, as described above, from the time when the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state is set, the determination count counter starts counting the number of times the small winning pattern Y1 is determined, and when the count value of the determination count counter reaches the above-mentioned number of times the ending is established (3 or 5 times), the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state ends.
Then, if the time-saving award is won and a new third or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state is set before the count value of the determination count counter reaches the aforementioned number of times that the end game is established, the count value of the determination count counter is reset, and the determination count counter starts counting the number of times that the small win symbol Y1 is determined. In other words, if the time-saving award is won before the number of times that the small win symbol Y1 is determined in the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state reaches the aforementioned number of times that the end game is established, the number of times that the small win symbol Y1 is determined is counted again from the time when the new third or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state is set, toward reaching the aforementioned number of times that the end game is established.

For example, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, if the small win symbol Y1 is determined once and the time-saving award is won and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state currently set ends, and a new third low-probability time-saving game state is set. At this time, the count value of the determination number counter is reset, so the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined becomes 0. Then, from the time the new third low-probability time-saving game state is set, a new count of the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined begins, and when the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined reaches three, the third low-probability time-saving game state currently set ends.
Furthermore, for example, after the new third low-probability time-saving game state described above is set, if the small win symbol Y1 has been determined twice and the time-saving award is again won and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the currently set third low-probability time-saving game state is temporarily terminated, and a new third low-probability time-saving game state is reset. At this time, as described above, the count value of the determination count counter is reset, so the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined becomes 0. Then, from the time the third low-probability time-saving game state is reset, a new count of the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined begins, and when the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined reaches three, the reset third low-probability time-saving game state ends.
Furthermore, for example, after the third low-probability time-saving game state is reset, if the small win symbol Y2 is determined once and the time-saving award is again won and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the reset third low-probability time-saving game state ends, and a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set. At this time, as described above, the count value of the determination number counter is reset, so the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined becomes 0. Then, from the time the new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, a new count of the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined begins, and when the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined reaches 5, the currently set fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends.

Next, an overview of the processing related to winning the time-saving award and counting the number of times the end has been achieved in another application example 12 will be explained using a flowchart.
First, the process executed when a time-saving award is won will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 123.
In step 7200, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time has elapsed, which is the time for which the special symbol is statically displayed after the variable display of the special symbol has ended. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the time-saving grant winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 7201.
In step 7201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the player has won the time-saving bonus by lottery. If the player has not won the time-saving bonus, the main CPU 101 ends the time-saving bonus winning process. On the other hand, if the player has won the time-saving bonus, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 7202.

In step 7202, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game is currently in the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state. If it determines that the game is not currently in the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, it terminates the time-shortened award winning process. On the other hand, if it determines that the game is currently in the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, it proceeds to step 7203.
In step 7203, the main CPU 101 ends the currently set game state (the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state), resets the count value of the determination number counter, and then proceeds to the next step 7204.

In step 7204, the main CPU 101 sets a game state corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the winning of the time-saving award. Specifically, if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, and if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set. Regardless of which game state is set, the time-saving count counter is set to 10,000 time-saving times. Furthermore, if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the main CPU 101 sets the determination count counter to 3 times, and if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the determination count counter is set to 5 times. This starts counting the number of times the end has been achieved corresponding to the set time-saving game state (counting the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined), and each time a small win is won and the small win symbol Y1 is determined, the count value of the determination count counter is decremented by 1. Then, the time-saving award winning process ends.

Next, the process at the time of determining the small win symbol Y1, which is executed based on the determination of the small win symbol Y1, will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 124. Note that this process at the time of determining the small win symbol is a process executed at the time when the small win symbol Y1 is determined by winning the small win lottery.
In step 7210, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small win symbol Y1 has been determined based on the small win in the win/lose lottery. If it determines that the small win symbol Y1 has not been determined, it ends the small win symbol determination process. On the other hand, if it determines that the small win symbol Y1 has been determined, it proceeds to the next step 7211.
In step 7211, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game is currently in the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state. If it determines that the game is not currently in the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, the main CPU 101 terminates the small win symbol determination process. On the other hand, if it determines that the game is currently in the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step 7212.

In step 7212, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the determination count counter by 1. The main CPU 101 also stores a determination count command indicating the count value of the determination count counter after the decrement in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the current count value of the determination count counter to be sent to the sub-control board 300, allowing the sub-control board 300 to recognize the count value of the determination count counter. In other words, the sub-control board 300 is able to grasp the number of times that the small win symbol Y1 has been determined in the currently set second low-probability time-shortened game state, third low-probability time-shortened game state, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state. The small win symbol determination processing then ends.

Next, the processing executed when the number of times the small winning pattern Y1 is determined reaches the number of times the end is established in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state currently being set ends, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 125.
In step 7220, the main CPU 101 determines whether the above-mentioned static display time has elapsed. If it is determined that the static display time has not elapsed, the process when the termination establishment count is reached is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the static display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 7221.
In step 7221, it is determined whether the game is in the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state. If it is determined that the game is not in the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, the process for when the end establishment count is reached is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step 7222.

In step 7222, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the determination counter has reached 0, i.e., whether the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined has reached the end-established number of times. If it is determined that the count value of the determination counter has not reached 0, the process when the end-established number of times has been reached is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value of the determination counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to the next step 7223.
In step 7223, the main CPU 101 ends the currently set game state (the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state), resets the count value of the determination number counter, and then proceeds to step 7224.

In step 7224, the main CPU 101 sets the normal game mode. Then, it ends the processing when the number of times the end is reached is reached.

When the time-saving count corresponding to the currently set time-saving game state is reached and the time-saving game state ends, the processing of steps 7100 to 7103 in the processing at the end of the time-saving game state in Application Example 11 is executed, and after step 7103 is completed, processing to set the normal game state is executed. Furthermore, the processing related to the execution of special game play based on a jackpot win, the processing when the count value of the time-saving activation count counter reaches the time-saving activation count, and other processing are almost the same as in Application Example 6 and Application Example 10, so explanations will be omitted.

(Outline of the production)
Next, an outline of the effects executed in the high-probability time-shortened game state, the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, and the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12 will be described. The following mainly describes the display of the background image and the remaining number of determinations suggesting effect that is executed in the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, and the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state and suggests how many times the small win symbol Y1 will be determined remaining until the number of times the game is completed to end is reached.

(Overview of background image display)
In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 12, the background images displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 include a normal background image corresponding to the normal game state (see Figures 127(a) and 130(e)), a time-saving background image A corresponding to the high-probability time-saving game state (see Figures 126(a) to (e)), a time-saving background image B corresponding to the first low-probability time-saving game state (see Figures 127(b) to (c)), and a time-saving background image C corresponding to the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state (see Figures 128(a) to (h), 129(a) to (g), and 130(a) to (c)), and the corresponding background image is displayed on the display unit 21a during each game state.

Specifically, a normal background image is displayed during the normal game state, a time-saving background image A is displayed during the high-probability time-saving game state which is set after the end of a special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X2, X4 or X5, a time-saving background image B is displayed during the first low-probability time-saving game state which is set when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number, and a time-saving background image C is displayed during the second low-probability time-saving game state which is set after the end of a special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 or X3, during the third low-probability time-saving game state which is set based on the determination of the time-saving pattern J1, and during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state which is set based on the determination of the time-saving pattern J2.
When the game state is changed, the displayed background image is also changed accordingly.

As mentioned above, in pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, if a time-saving bonus is awarded during the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-saving game state in which the time-saving background image C is displayed, the currently set game state ends and a new third or fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set. However, when a new third or fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, the time-saving background image C that was displayed before the new setting is not switched, and the time-saving background image C continues to be displayed.

(Outline of effects in high probability time-saving game state)
As described above, after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, X4 or X5 ends, a high probability time-shortened game state is set.
Then, with the setting of the high probability time-shortened game state, the display unit 21a displays the time-shortened background image A and a display indicating that the high probability time-shortened game state has been set (for example, the text "Super chance mode start!"), and then a variable effect is executed with the display of the special pattern changing (see Figures 126 (a) to (b)).

In addition, during the high probability time-saving game state, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss and a predetermined variation pattern is determined, or if the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot and a predetermined variation pattern is determined, a BATTLE presentation is executed in which a notification is given based on the results of a BATTLE between multiple characters.
Specifically, when the fluctuation presentation based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern starts, a BATTLE presentation start image (for example, a text image saying "BATTLE START!") indicating the start of the BATTLE presentation is displayed (see Figure 126 (c)), and then a BATTLE image (not specifically shown) indicating the BATTLE content is displayed.
If the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the above-mentioned BATTLE image is displayed for a predetermined time, and then a BATTLE result image (for example, a text image saying "WIN!!") indicating that a specific character has won the BATTLE is displayed, and further, a jackpot notification image (for example, a text image saying "BONUS!!") is displayed to notify the player that they have won the jackpot (see Figures 126 (d) to (e)).
On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is a loss, the above-mentioned BATTLE image is displayed for a predetermined time, and then a BATTLE result image (for example, a text image saying "LOSE...") indicating that a specific character has lost the BATTLE is displayed, thereby informing the player that the lottery result is a loss, although this is not specifically shown.

(Outline of effects in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state)
As described above, after the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.
For example, when the number of times to activate the time-saving function is reached during normal game play, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the normal background image displayed on the display unit 21a is switched to time-saving background image B, a message indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set (for example, a text display of "Lucky time starts!") is displayed, and the initial value of the remaining number of times to activate the time-saving function (1,200 times) for the first low-probability time-saving game state is displayed (see Figures 127 (a) to (b)).
After that, each time a special pattern change (change display) is executed, a countdown display of the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed when the stop display time for that change has elapsed (see Figure 127 (c)).

Also, although not specifically shown, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss and a predetermined variation pattern is determined, or if the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot and a predetermined variation pattern is determined, the above-mentioned BATTLE effect is executed, just as during the high-probability time-saving game state, and the result of the win/loss lottery is announced.

Note that during the first low-probability time-saving game state, a display indicating that the game state is in progress (for example, the text "Lucky Time in Progress") may be displayed. Furthermore, until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, i.e., while the time-saving activation counter is counting, a count-up display may be displayed each time the special symbol changes (change display) once, counting up the number of times toward 900, which is the number of times the time-saving activation has occurred.

(Outline of effects in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state)
As described above, after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 or X3 ends, a second low-probability time-shortened game state is set, after the variable display of the special pattern based on the determination of the time-shortened pattern J1 ends, a third low-probability time-shortened game state is set, and after the variable display of the special pattern based on the determination of the time-shortened pattern J2 ends, a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state is set.
Then, in conjunction with the setting of the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, the display unit 21a displays the time-shortened background image C and a display indicating that the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state has been set (for example, the text "Chance mode start!"), and then a variable effect is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the special pattern (see Figures 128 (a) to (b)).

Furthermore, as described above, in the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, and the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, a display indicating the number of remaining decisions is executed.
The remaining number of determinations indication display indicates how many times the small winning symbol Y1 remains to be determined until the above-mentioned number of times of ending is reached in each of the above-mentioned game states, thereby enabling the player to visually recognize whether the time-saving game state is about to end or not.
Specifically, in the remaining number indication effect in other application example 12, when the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the third low-probability time-shortening game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state is set, predetermined remaining number indication images (e.g., heart mark images) are displayed in the number corresponding to the number of times the game has ended (see FIG. 128(a)). For example, when a special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X3 ends and the second low-probability time-shortening game state is set, or when the third low-probability time-shortening game state is set by winning the time-shortening award and determining the time-shortening symbol J1 in the normal game state, three remaining number indication images corresponding to the number of times the game has ended (three times) are displayed (see FIG. 128(a)). When the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state is set by winning the time-shortening award and determining the time-shortening symbol J2 in the normal game state, five remaining number indication images corresponding to the number of times the game has ended (five times) are displayed.

After that, each time the small win symbol Y1 is determined, the remaining number suggestion images being displayed are erased one by one (see FIG. 128(d)-(e)). This notifies the player that the small win symbol Y1 has been determined.
Then, when the number of times the small win symbol Y1 is determined reaches the number of times to end the time-saving game state (either the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state) that has been set ends, all of the remaining number suggestion images are erased (see Figures 130(c) to 130(d)). This notifies the player that the number of times the small win symbol Y1 is determined has reached the number of times to end the time-saving game state that has been set and that the time-saving game state that has been set has ended.

On the other hand, if a time-saving award is won while the remaining number suggestion image is being displayed (second low-probability time-saving game state, third low-probability time-saving game state, fourth low-probability time-saving game state), the number of remaining number suggestion images corresponding to the number of times the time-saving game state (third low-probability time-saving game state, fourth low-probability time-saving game state) determined based on the winning is achieved will be displayed (see Figure 128 (g)).
Specifically, if the number corresponding to the number of times the time-saving game state is set to end is greater than the number of remaining number suggestion images currently displayed, additional remaining number suggestion images equivalent to the difference between these numbers will be displayed (see Figure 128 (g)).
Also, although not specifically shown, if the number corresponding to the number of times the time-saving game state is set to end is less than the number of remaining number suggestion images currently being displayed, the number of remaining number suggestion images corresponding to the difference between these two numbers will be erased.
Furthermore, although not specifically shown, if the number corresponding to the number of times the time-saving game state is set to end is the same as the number of remaining number suggestion images currently being displayed, the current number of remaining number suggestion images will continue to be displayed.

(Example of remaining number of decisions suggestion effect)
The remaining number of decisions suggestion effect will be explained in more detail below with specific examples. Note that the following explanation will be mainly based on the remaining number of decisions suggestion effect in the second low-probability time-saving game state, but the remaining number of decisions suggestion effect in the third low-probability time-saving game state and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state will also be processed in the same way.

For example, when the special game based on the determination of jackpot symbol X1 ends and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, as described above, three remaining number indication images corresponding to the number of times the second low-probability time-saving game state has ended (three times) are displayed, and then a variable effect is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol (see Figures 128(a)-(b)).

Also, for example, in a state where three remaining number suggestion images are displayed in the second low-probability time-shortened game state (i.e., a state where the small win pattern Y1 has not yet been determined after the second low-probability time-shortened game state has been set), if a small win is won by the win/lose lottery and the small win pattern Y1 is determined, one remaining number suggestion image will be erased.
Here, when a small jackpot is won in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, and the variation pattern of "20 seconds variation" related to the variation pattern command of "D2H" or "D3H" is determined, the above-mentioned BATTLE effect is executed. Then, when the small jackpot symbol Y1 is determined based on the above-mentioned small jackpot win, the BATTLE effect is executed, and the remaining number suggestion image is erased (see Figures 128(c) to (e)).
Specifically, when the small win symbol Y1 is determined, the "20-second variation" variation pattern associated with the "D2H" variation pattern command is determined. When the variation effect based on the determined variation pattern begins, a BATTLE effect start image is displayed (see FIG. 128(c)), followed by a BATTLE image (not specifically shown) showing the BATTLE content. After the BATTLE image is displayed for a predetermined time, a BATTLE result image (for example, a text image saying "DAMAGE!!") indicating that a specific character has been damaged is displayed, and one remaining number suggestion image is erased, leaving only two remaining remaining number suggestion images (see FIGS. 128(d)-(e)). This determines the small win symbol Y1, and notifies the user that the remaining number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined until the final number of times is reached is two.

Furthermore, for example, in a state in which one remaining number suggestion image is displayed in the second low-probability time-shortened game state (i.e., a state in which the small win symbol Y1 has been determined twice after the second low-probability time-shortened game state was established), if a small win is won and the small win symbol Y1 is determined in the win/lose lottery, the second low-probability time-shortened game state currently being set ends. In this case, as described above, the remaining number suggestion image is erased after the execution of the BATTLE effect, and the number of remaining number suggestion images currently being displayed becomes zero (see FIGS. 130(a)-(c)). In other words, all remaining number suggestion images are erased. In addition, an end display (e.g., a message "Chance Mode Ended") indicating that the second low-probability time-shortened game state has ended is displayed (see FIG. 130(d)). As a result, the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined in the second low-probability time-shortened game state reaches three, which is the number of times the end has been achieved, and a notification is issued that the second low-probability time-shortened game state currently being set has ended.
Then, when the second low-probability time-shortening game state ends and the normal game state is set, the time-shortening background image C that was displayed during the second low-probability time-shortening game state is switched to the normal background image (see Figure 130 (e)).

Furthermore, for example, if two remaining number suggestion images are displayed in the second low-probability time-shortened game state (i.e., after the second low-probability time-shortened game state is established and the small win symbol Y1 has been determined once), and the time-shortened game state is awarded through a win/lose lottery and the time-shortened game symbol J2 is determined, the second low-probability time-shortened game state currently being set ends and a fourth low-probability time-shortened game state is set. In addition, three remaining number suggestion images are additionally displayed, corresponding to the difference between the number of times the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state will end (five times) based on the determination of the time-shortened game symbol J2 and the number of remaining number suggestion images currently being displayed (two). In other words, five remaining number suggestion images corresponding to the number of times the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state will end (five times) will be displayed.
Here, the above-mentioned BATTLE effect is also executed when a time-saving award is won in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, and the variation pattern of "20-second variation" related to the variation pattern command "E1H" or "E2H" is determined. Then, when the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined based on the above-mentioned time-saving award winning, the BATTLE effect is executed, and an image indicating the remaining number of times is additionally displayed (see FIGS. 128(f) to 128(g)).
Specifically, when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, a "20-second variation" variation pattern associated with the "E2H" variation pattern command is determined. When the variation effect based on the determined variation pattern begins, a BATTLE effect start image is displayed (see FIG. 128(f)), followed by a BATTLE image (not specifically shown) showing the BATTLE content. After the BATTLE image is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a BATTLE result image (e.g., a text image saying "Life Charge!") indicating that a specific character's damage has been recovered is displayed, and three additional remaining number indication images are displayed, bringing the remaining remaining number of remaining number indication images to five (see FIGS. 128(g)-(h)). This results in a time-saving award being awarded, the time-saving symbol J2 being determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state being ended, a fourth low-probability time-saving game state being established, and a notification that the remaining number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined until the end number of times is reached is announced.

Furthermore, although not specifically shown, for example, if two remaining number suggestion images are displayed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving grant is awarded through a win/lose lottery and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state currently set ends, and a third low-probability time-saving game state is set. In addition, in conjunction with this, one remaining number suggestion image is additionally displayed, corresponding to the difference between the number of times (three) that the third low-probability time-saving game state will end based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 and the number of remaining number suggestion images currently displayed (two). In other words, three remaining number suggestion images corresponding to the number of times (three) that the third low-probability time-saving game state will end will be displayed.
Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, for example, if five remaining number suggestion images are displayed during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state and a time-saving award is awarded through a win/lose lottery and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state currently set ends and the third low-probability time-saving game state is established. In addition, two remaining number suggestion images corresponding to the difference between the number of times the third low-probability time-saving game state will end (three times) based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 and the number of remaining number suggestion images currently displayed (five) are erased. In other words, three remaining number suggestion images corresponding to the number of times the third low-probability time-saving game state will end (three times) are displayed. When the remaining number suggestion images are erased due to the time-saving award, a BATTLE result image indicating that a specific character has been damaged is displayed in the BATTLE presentation, just as when the small win symbol Y1 is determined.
Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, for example, if three remaining number suggestion images are displayed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and a time-saving award is awarded through a win/lose lottery and the time-saving symbol J1 is selected, the second low-probability time-saving game state currently set is terminated and a third low-probability time-saving game state is established. In this case, the number of remaining number suggestion images currently displayed (three) is the same as the number of times the third low-probability time-saving game state will end based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 (three), so the three remaining number suggestion images currently displayed are maintained. Furthermore, if the time-saving award is awarded but the current number of remaining number suggestion images is maintained, a BATTLE result image (see FIG. 129(c)) is displayed in the BATTLE presentation, indicating that a specific character has avoided damage, similar to the case where the small win symbol Y2 described below is selected.

As mentioned above, if the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state currently set is terminated due to a time-shortened bonus, and a new third or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state is set, the time-shortened background image C that was displayed before the termination will continue to be displayed. In other words, in this case, the display of the time-shortened background image C will not change, and only the display of the remaining number of plays indication image will be changed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, although a small win may be won by a win/lose lottery and the small win symbol Y2 may be determined, the determination of the small win symbol Y2 is not set as a condition for ending the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state. Therefore, even if the small win symbol Y2 is determined in the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, the remaining number suggestion image being displayed is not erased (see FIGS. 129(c)-(d)).
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, the above-mentioned BATTLE effect is executed even when the small win symbol Y2 is determined in the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, but unlike when the small win symbol Y1 is determined, the remaining number of plays indication image currently being displayed is not erased even if the BATTLE effect is executed.
For example, if two remaining number suggestion images are displayed in the second low-probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 129(a)), and a small jackpot is won and the small jackpot symbol Y2 is determined, the "20-second variation" variation pattern associated with the "D3H" variation pattern command is determined. Then, when the variation effect based on this determined variation pattern begins, a BATTLE effect start image is displayed (see FIG. 129(b)), followed by a BATTLE image (not specifically shown) showing the BATTLE content. After the BATTLE image is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a BATTLE result image (e.g., a text image reading "Damage Avoided!!") indicating that a specific character has avoided damage is displayed, and the two remaining number suggestion images remain displayed (see FIGS. 129(c)-(d)). This determines the small jackpot symbol Y2, and notifies the player that the remaining number of times the small jackpot symbol Y1 will be determined remains two until the end number of times is reached.

Furthermore, in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss and a predetermined variation pattern is determined, or if the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot and a predetermined variation pattern is determined, the above-mentioned BATTLE presentation will be executed, just as in the high-probability time-saving game state and the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the result of the win/loss lottery will be announced (see Figures 129 (e) to (g)).

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, when a time-saving award is won in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the currently set time-saving game state ends, and a time-saving game state that is the same as or different from the currently set time-saving game state (the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state) is set, and the time-saving game state continues. Then, when the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 is determined reaches the number of times that the end of the time-saving game state corresponding to the currently set time-saving game state is established, the currently set game state ends, and the normal game state is set.
That is, after the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state is set, the game state switches to the same or a different type of time-shortened game state based on whether a time-shortened game state is won, but the time-shortened game state continues until the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 is determined reaches the number of times that the ending corresponding to the set time-shortened game state is established and the normal game state is set.
Then, while the time-saving game state continues, the time-saving background image C continues to be displayed, while the number of displayed remaining number suggestion images increases or decreases based on the determination of the small win symbol Y1 and the winning of the time-saving grant. Then, when the number of times the small win symbol Y1 is determined reaches the number of times that the time-saving game state is ended, the number of displayed remaining number suggestion images becomes 0 (i.e., all remaining number suggestion images are erased).
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, after the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state is set, there is a possibility that the machine will switch to the same or a different type of time-shortened game state based on the winning of the time-shortened award during the period until the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 is determined reaches the number of times that the time-shortened game state is ended, but by continuing to display the time-shortened background image C during this period, the player can be strongly impressed that the time-shortened game state is continuing without being made aware of the switch in the time-shortened game state. Also, the increase or decrease in the remaining number indication image allows the player to visually recognize whether the time-shortened game state is about to end.

In addition, in pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, information such as the result of the winning/losing lottery, the type of special symbol, the variation pattern (variation pattern command), the set game state, the count value of the time-saving activation count counter, the remaining number of time-saving activations in the first low-probability time-saving game state, the number of times the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state has ended, and the count value of the determination count counter (the number of times the small win symbol Y1 has been determined) is transmitted from main control board 100 to sub-control board 300. Then, based on this received information, sub-CPU 301 obtains the effect data stored in sub-ROM 302, and controls the execution of various effects based on the effect data, such as the display of the background image described above, the variation effect, the BATTLE effect, and the effect indicating the number of remaining decisions.

As described above, in pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, not only is a second low-probability time-saving game state or a high-probability time-saving game state, which are more advantageous than the normal game state, established through a jackpot win (determination of jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, or X5), but it is also possible to establish a first low-probability time-saving game state, which is more advantageous than the normal game state, without winning a jackpot by losing all 1,200 time-saving lotteries during the low-probability game state. Furthermore, by winning a time-saving grant during the low-probability game state, it is possible to establish a third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state, which are more advantageous than the normal game state, without winning a jackpot. This allows for innovative gameplay and heightened player interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, when a time-shortening award is won during the second low-probability time-shortening game state that is set via a jackpot win, the second low-probability time-shortening game state ends, and a third low-probability time-shortening game state or a fourth low-probability time-shortening game state that does not involve a jackpot win can be set. When the second low-probability time-shortening game state ends and the third low-probability time-shortening game state or the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state is set, the time-shortening game state continues following the second low-probability time-shortening game state, but the end condition for ending the currently set game state (time-shortening game state) can be changed.
Similarly, if a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X1 or X3 is determined during the third low-probability time-shortened game state or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, which are set without a jackpot win, the third low-probability time-shortened game state or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state ends, and after the special game based on the jackpot win ends, a second low-probability time-shortened game state can be set that is set via a jackpot win. Even when the third low-probability time-shortened game state or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state ends and the second low-probability time-shortened game state is set, the time-shortened game state continues following the third low-probability time-shortened game state or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, but the end condition for ending the currently set game state can be changed.
Furthermore, if a time-saving award is won during the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, which is set without winning a jackpot, the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, and a new third low-probability time-saving game state or a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state can be set without winning a jackpot. Even when the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends and a new third low-probability time-saving game state or a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, the time-saving game state continues following the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, but the end condition for ending the currently set game state can be changed.
In other words, when an opportunity to set a new time-shortened game state occurs during a predetermined time-shortened game state, the new time-shortened game state is set and the time-shortened game state continues, while the conditions for ending the time-shortened game state are changed, which provides a wide range of variations until the time-shortened game state ends, further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state are configured to end when the number of times the small win symbol Y1 is determined based on the winning of a small win reaches a predetermined number of times. In these game states, a display related to the winning of a small win (a display related to the determination of the small win symbol Y1, i.e., a display of an image indicating the number of remaining times) is displayed, and a display not related to the winning of a small win (a display of the time-saving background image C) is displayed. When a time-saving award is won in these game states, the display related to the winning of a small win can be changed (the image indicating the number of remaining times can be deleted or displayed again), and the display not related to the winning of a small win can be continued.
This increases the variety of effects that can be executed before the time-shortened game state ends, further increasing the player's interest.

(Modification of Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 12)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, if a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state currently set is ended, and a time-saving game state (the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state) corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined is set, but the manner in which the game state is switched based on the winning of a time-saving award is not limited to this.
For example, even if a time-saving award is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state may be terminated and a time-saving game state may be set according to the type of time-saving symbol that has been determined. Furthermore, if a time-saving award is won during the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, a new time-saving game state may not be set. Furthermore, the time-saving game state that is set when a time-saving award is won is not limited to the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, but may be set to only one of these, or may be set to another low-probability time-saving game state.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 12 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, when the number of times that the small winning pattern Y1 is determined reaches the number of times that the ending is established during the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, the set game state ends and the normal game state is set, but the conditions for ending each time-shortened game state are not limited to this.
For example, the termination conditions may be that the number of times that small win pattern Y2 is determined instead of small win pattern Y1 reaches a predetermined number, that the number of times that small wins are won reaches a predetermined number regardless of the type of small win pattern determined, that the number of times that both small win patterns Y1 and Y2 are determined reaches a predetermined number, that the number of times that small win pattern Y1 is determined and the number of times that small win pattern Y2 is determined each reach a predetermined number (which may be the same or different numbers), that small win pattern Y1 and small win pattern Y2 are determined in a predetermined order, that small win patterns other than small win patterns Y1 and Y2 are provided and the number of times that small win pattern is determined reaches a predetermined number, etc.
In this case, too, the same effect as that of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 12 can be achieved, and the variety of triggers for ending each time-shortened game state can be increased, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

In addition, instead of using the content related to the winning of a small prize as the termination condition for each time-shortened game state, the content related to the lottery or variation of normal symbols may be used as the termination condition for each time-shortened game state.
For example, the termination conditions may be that the number of winning normal symbol lottery wins reaches a predetermined number during the second, third, or fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, or that the number of normal symbol variable displays reaches a predetermined number. Furthermore, when set in this manner, the currently set time-shortened game state may be terminated at any time between the start and end of the variable display of the normal symbol, and a new time-shortened game state may be set according to the type of time-shortened symbol determined. Furthermore, when a new time-shortened game state is set, the count of the number of times may be restarted, and the display of the background image and the effect indicating the number of remaining times may be controlled in the same manner as in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 12.
In this case, too, the same effect as that of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 12 can be achieved, and the variety of triggers for ending each time-shortened game state can be increased, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 12, the number of times that the end is achieved in the second low-probability time-shortened game state and the third low-probability time-shortened game state is three, and the number of times that the end is achieved in the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state is five, but the end conditions may be different for each time-shortened game state or may be the same.
For example, the number of times an end occurs in the second low-probability time-shortened game state may be two, the number of times an end occurs in the third low-probability time-shortened game state may be three, and the number of times an end occurs in the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state may be five, or the number of times an end occurs in each of the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, and the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state may all be three.
Also, for example, in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the termination condition may be that the number of times small wins are won reaches a predetermined number, in the third low-probability time-saving game state, the termination condition may be that the number of times small win pattern Y2 is determined reaches a predetermined number, and in the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the termination condition may be that the number of times both small win patterns Y1 and Y2 are determined reaches a predetermined number.
In this case, too, the same effect as that of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 12 can be achieved, and the variety of triggers for ending each time-shortened game state can be increased, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, when the time-saving pattern J1 is determined during the third low-probability time-saving game state or when the time-saving pattern J2 is determined during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, although the same type of time-saving game state is set, the previously set third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state is first terminated and then the same third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state is newly set, but the control of switching game states when a time-saving award is won is not limited to this.
For example, in the above case, the third low-probability time-shortening game state or the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state that is currently set may be allowed to continue as is without being terminated.
In this case, the same effect as that of the pachinko machine P relating to the other application example 12 is achieved, and the control of switching the game state when a time-saving bonus is awarded is simplified, thereby reducing the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101.

In the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, and the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, an external signal indicating that a time-shortened game state has been set may be set to be output to an external device of the pachinko machine P (such as a hall computer or a data display device that displays the number of jackpots, etc.).
Then, when a time-saving award is won in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, and the currently set time-saving game state is terminated and a new third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, the output of the above-mentioned external signal may be temporarily stopped upon the termination of the currently set time-saving game state, and then the output of the above-mentioned external signal may be started again upon the setting of the new third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state.
In this case, it is possible to reliably communicate to the external device that a new time-shortened game state has been set due to the winning of the time-shortened award.

In addition, if a time-saving award is won in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, and the currently set time-saving game state is terminated and a new third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, the output of the above-mentioned external signal may be continued without being stopped.
In this case, the output of the external signal is not stopped or started, so that the control of the output of the external signal when a time-saving grant is won is simplified, and the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.

In addition, in the remaining number of determinations suggestion effect in another application example 12, the remaining number of determinations of the small win symbol Y1 until the end number of determinations is reached is notified by displaying an increase or decrease in the number of heart mark images (remaining number of determinations suggestion images), but the presentation form is not limited to this. For example, in a predetermined meter image, the meter may be displayed so that it decreases every time the small win symbol Y1 is determined and increases when the time-saving award is won, thereby notifying the remaining number of determinations of the small win symbol Y1 until the end number of determinations is reached.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 12 can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, in the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, and the fourth low-probability time-shortened game state, if a jackpot is won, if a small jackpot is won and the small jackpot pattern Y1 is determined, if a small jackpot is won and the small jackpot pattern Y2 is determined, or if a time-shortened award is won, the same BATTLE presentation is executed, and a notification or display corresponding to the result of the win or determination is made; however, this is not limited to this, and different types of presentations may be executed for each result of the win or determination, and after the presentation is executed, a notification or display corresponding to the result of the win or determination may be made.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 12 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, control B in the modified example of another application example 11 is adopted, and based on winning the time-shortening award, the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the third low-probability time-shortening game state, or the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state that is currently set is terminated, and a new third low-probability time-shortening game state or a new fourth low-probability time-shortening game state is set, but this is not limited to this, and control A of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11 may also be adopted.
Specifically, if a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state will not be set based on the time-saving award winning until the currently set time-saving game state ends, but the number of times the small win pattern Y1 is determined based on the time-saving award winning will be counted by a determination number counter, and when the currently set time-saving game state ends, the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the time-saving award winning may be set.
In addition, as a display for indicating the number of remaining times to be determined in such a case, for example, when a time-saving award is won, the image indicating the number of remaining times to be determined is not updated, but an image (for example, a text image saying "Damage recovery??") is displayed indicating that the image indicating the number of remaining times may be updated when the currently set time-saving play state ends, and when the currently set time-saving play state ends, if the number of times the small win pattern Y1 based on the time-saving award has been won has not reached the number of times that the game has ended, the image indicating the number of remaining times may be updated at this point, but if the number of times the small win pattern Y1 based on the time-saving award has been won has reached the number of times that the game has ended, the image indicating the number of remaining times may not be updated.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 12 can be achieved.

(Another Application Example 13)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, like the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, is configured to simultaneously change the special pattern based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and change the special pattern based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 (when both a hold based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and a hold based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 are stored, both holds are processed simultaneously, so-called simultaneous rotation control is performed).

(Outline of the structure within the play area 12)
In the game area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, there are provided, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, a general winning opening 14, a first start winning opening 15, a second start winning opening 16, an attacker device 17, an outlet 19, a gate 20, and an effect display device 21 (see FIG. 131). In addition, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 has, as the second start winning opening 16, two openings: a normal second start winning opening 161 that is not provided with a movable piece 16b, and a specific second start winning opening 162 that is provided with a movable piece 16b.
Note that the structure and installation position of some of these devices and members are different from those in the above-described embodiment.
Below, the structure within the game area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In a pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, as shown in FIG. 131, the first start winning opening 15 is located slightly below the center of the game area 12 (below the performance display device 21). Only game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning opening 15; game balls flowing down the second game area 12b cannot enter.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, as shown in FIG. 131, the gate 20 is provided in the upper right corner of the effect display device 21 (above the second game area 12b). The gate 20 is designed so that only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot. Further, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the majority of game balls that enter the second game area 12b pass through the gate 20.

131, a specific second start winning opening 162 is provided below the gate 20. Only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the specific second start winning opening 162, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through.
This specific second start winning port 162 has the same configuration as the second start winning port 16 in the above-mentioned embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted here.
Then, as in the above-described embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol is conducted, and the variable display of the normal symbol begins. If the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a win, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, after which the winning symbol is displayed statically, and movable piece 16b provided in specific second start winning opening 162 is opened for a predetermined operating time, and specific second start winning opening 162 is opened. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a loss, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, after which the losing symbol is displayed statically, and since the above-described movable piece 16b remains closed, specific second start winning opening 162 also remains closed.

131, an attacker device 17 is provided below the specific second start winning opening 162 and the movable piece 16b. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, unlike the above-described embodiment, the specific area 57, the general area 58, and the sorting member 59 are not provided within the large winning opening 18.
Only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the big prize opening 18, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the big prize opening 18.
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, after the special game that is executed based on the winning of the jackpot is completed, the game state is set according to the type of jackpot pattern that was determined at the time of the winning of the jackpot.

131, a normal second start winning port 161 that opens upward is provided below the attacker device 17. Only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the normal second start winning port 161, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter. Also, although not particularly shown, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, approximately half of the game balls that enter the second game area 12b and do not enter the specific second start winning port 162 or the large winning port 18 are configured to be able to enter the normal second start winning port 161.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15, a predetermined number of game balls (three in another application example 13) are paid out, and when a game ball enters the normal second start winning port 161 or the specific second start winning port 162, a number of game balls different from the above-mentioned predetermined number (one in another application example 13) are paid out.

Although not shown, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 is provided with a right-hit notification lamp HL, which notifies the player that a game ball will be shot toward the second game area 12b, at a predetermined location outside the game area 12 on the game board 11. The right-hit notification lamp HL is connected to the sub-control board 300.
In the normal game mode, the right-hit notification lamp HL is off, but when a time-shortened game mode (first low-probability time-shortened game mode, second low-probability time-shortened game mode, high-probability time-shortened game mode) described below is set, a command indicating that the time-shortened game mode has been set (a state transition command described below) is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving this command, turns on the right-hit notification lamp HL. The right-hit notification lamp HL remains lit during the time-shortened game mode described above. Then, when the time-shortened game mode described above ends and the normal game mode described below is set, a command indicating that the normal game mode has been set (a state transition command) is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving this command, turns off the right-hit notification lamp HL.
In addition, this right-hit notification lamp HL may be connected to the main control board 100 instead of the sub-control board 300, and the main control board 100 may control its turning on and off.

(Control and Game Overview)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, one of the following game states is set: a normal game state, which is a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state; a first low-probability time-shortened game state (hereinafter also referred to as the first low-probability time-shortened game state) which is a game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-shortened game state; a second low-probability time-shortened game state (hereinafter also referred to as the second low-probability time-shortened game state) which is a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state; or a high-probability time-shortened game state which is a game state combining a high-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the frequency of game balls entering the specific second start winning hole 162 (the difficulty of ball entry, in other words, the frequency of winning/losing lottery based on game balls entering the specific second start winning hole 162, in other words, the frequency of execution of variable display of special symbols) is set to predetermined contents in the non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state. The specific contents of the settings will be described in detail later.
As in the above-described embodiment, the normal game mode is set in the initial state after shipping from the factory or after resetting.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning port 15, and game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the normal second start winning port 161, enter the large winning port 18, or enter the specific second start winning port 162.
During the normal game state, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot) so that the game ball will enter the first start winning port 15, and during the first low probability time-shortened game state, the second low probability time-shortened game state, the high probability time-shortened game state and the special game, the game ball will pass through the gate 20 and enter the normal second start winning port 161 or the specific second start winning port 162, and the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right shot) so that the game ball will enter the large winning port 18.

132(a), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, a jackpot can be won in a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning slot 15, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern X1, X2, or X3 is determined. When the gaming state at the time when the win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning slot 15 is a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low-probability time-shortened gaming state, second low-probability time-shortened gaming state), the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-shortened gaming state), the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 6/300.
In addition, the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X1 is set to 55/100 (i.e., 55%), the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 is set to 10/100 (i.e., 10%), and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X3 is set to 35/100 (i.e., 35%).
Furthermore, if the result of the above-mentioned lottery is a loss, a loss symbol Z1 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 (the upper limit of the first reserved numbers) is set to 4. The upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers is not limited to this.

132(a), a jackpot can be won in a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 16 (normal second start winning slot 161, specific second start winning slot 162), and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern X4, X5, or X6 is determined. When the gaming state at the time when the win/lose lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning slot 16 is a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low-probability time-shortened gaming state, second low-probability time-shortened gaming state), the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-shortened gaming state), the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 6/300.
In addition, the probability of winning the jackpot symbol X4 is set to 15/100 (15%), the probability of winning the jackpot symbol X5 is set to 50/100 (50%), and the probability of winning the jackpot symbol X6 is set to 35/100 (35%).
Furthermore, if the result of the above-mentioned lottery is a loss, a loss symbol Z2 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of reserved second special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the second start winning slot 16 (the upper limit of the second reserved numbers) is set to 4. The upper limit of the number of reserved second special random numbers is not limited to this.

As shown in Figure 132 (a), in any case where a jackpot is won and the jackpot pattern X1, X3, X4 or X6 is determined, five round games are played during the special game based on that determination, and the game ends when either the large prize opening 18 is open for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18, and approximately 500 game balls can be won.
Also, as shown in Figure 132(a), in either case where a jackpot is won and the jackpot pattern X2 or X5 is determined, the above-mentioned round game is executed 10 times during the special game based on that determination, and approximately 1,000 game balls can be won.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13, as in the above-described embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 or the second start winning slot 16, a winning/losing lottery is held, and a special symbol is determined, a variation pattern command is determined corresponding to a variation pattern that specifies the variation mode (variation time) of the variation display (variation presentation) of the special symbol. The variation display (variation presentation) of the special symbol is then executed based on the variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern command. The determination of the variation pattern command will be described in detail later.

(Overview of simultaneous rotation control)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, a control, so-called simultaneous rotation control, is executed to simultaneously vary the special symbols based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning hole 15 and vary the special symbols based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start winning hole 16. The simultaneous rotation control in another application example 13 will be described below.

In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, when a special game is not being played and the first special pattern display device 30 and the second special pattern display device 31 are not displaying changing special patterns, it is possible to draw a winning or losing lottery based on the first special pattern random number and the second special pattern random number.
In addition, when the first special pattern display device 30 is displaying the changing special pattern but the second special pattern display device 31 is not displaying the changing special pattern, it is possible to draw a lottery to see whether the winner will win or lose based on the second special pattern random number, and when the second special pattern display device 31 is displaying the changing special pattern but the first special pattern display device 30 is not displaying the changing special pattern, it is possible to draw a lottery to see whether the winner will win or lose based on the first special pattern random number.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the display of the changing special symbols by the first special symbol display device 30 and the display of the changing special symbols by the second special symbol display device 31 are performed simultaneously. Then, when the display of the changing special symbols by the first special symbol display device 30 is completed, if the first special symbol random number is stored, the display of the changing next special symbol is started by the first special symbol display device 30, and when the display of the changing special symbols by the second special symbol display device 31 is completed, if the second special symbol random number is stored, the display of the changing next special symbol is started by the second special symbol display device 31.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when a new win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special pattern random number while the first special pattern display device 30 is displaying a changing special pattern, if the special pattern being displayed changing is the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3 (that is, when the jackpot was won in the win/loss lottery that triggered the changing display in relation to the ongoing changing display), the new win/loss lottery does not result in a winning jackpot, and if it is determined that a jackpot has been won, the result of the lottery is set to be forced to be a loss. In other words, the result of the lottery is a loss.
Similarly, when a new lottery is held based on the first special pattern random number while the second special pattern display device 31 is displaying a changing special pattern, if the special pattern being displayed is a jackpot pattern X4, X5, or X6, the result of the newly held lottery is not a jackpot, and if it is determined that a jackpot has been won, the result of the lottery is set to be a forced loss. In other words, the result of the lottery is a loss.
Therefore, for example, if a jackpot is won based on the second special random number and the second special pattern display device 31 is displaying a variable special pattern (jackpot pattern X4, X5, or X6) based on the jackpot, and a new lottery is held based on the first special random number, the result of the lottery will be a loss. Also, if a jackpot is won based on the first special random number and the first special pattern display device 30 is displaying a variable special pattern (jackpot pattern X1, X2, or X3) based on the jackpot, and a new lottery is held based on the second special random number, the result of the lottery will be a loss.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when a jackpot pattern (X1, X2, X3) is displayed stopped on the first special pattern display device 30, if a losing pattern (Z2) is being displayed in a variable manner on the second special pattern display device 31, this losing pattern is forcibly stopped.
Similarly, when a jackpot pattern (X4, X5, X6) is displayed in a stopped state on the second special pattern display device 31, if a losing pattern (Z1) is being displayed in a changing state on the first special pattern display device 30, this losing pattern is forcibly stopped.

In addition, when a jackpot symbol (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6) is displayed in a static manner on either the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, if a losing symbol (Z1, Z2) is being displayed in a variable manner on the other device, the measurement of the variable time of the losing symbol (Z1, Z2) may be stopped. In other words, the measurement of the variable time may simply be stopped, and the variable display of the losing symbol (Z1, Z2) may continue.
Specifically, if the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3 is displayed as a stopped pattern on the first special pattern display device 30 while the losing pattern Z2 is being displayed as a changing pattern on the second special pattern display device 31, the losing pattern Z2 that is being displayed as a changing pattern will not be displayed as a stopped pattern, and by stopping the measurement of this changing time, the display of the changing pattern Z2 of the losing pattern will continue while maintaining the remaining changing time at that time, and when the special game based on the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3 ends, the measurement of the changing time of the stopped losing pattern Z2 may be resumed.
Similarly, if the jackpot pattern X4, X5 or X6 is displayed as a stopped pattern on the second special pattern display device 31 while the losing pattern Z1 is being displayed as a changing pattern on the first special pattern display device 30, the losing pattern Z1 that is being displayed as a changing pattern will not be displayed as a stopped pattern, and by stopping the measurement of this changing time, the display of the changing pattern Z1 will continue while maintaining the remaining changing time at that time, and when the special game based on the jackpot pattern X4, X5 or X6 ends, the measurement of the changing time of the stopped losing pattern Z1 may be resumed.

Furthermore, when a losing symbol (Z1, Z2) is displayed statically on either the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, if the other device is displaying a jackpot symbol (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6) or a losing symbol (Z1, Z2), the measurement of the fluctuation time will not be stopped. The display of the jackpot symbol or losing symbol described above will continue to fluctuate without stopping.

(General overview of general games)
Next, an outline of the normal game executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 will be described.
132(b), in the non-time-saving game state (normal game state), the probability of winning by lottery of normal symbols is set to approximately 1/1.1, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds, and the operation time of movable piece 16b when the lottery of normal symbols is a winning one (the time for which movable piece 16b is maintained in an open state) is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not specifically shown, the same settings are also made during special games.
In addition, during the first time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state) and the second time-shortened game state (second low-probability time-shortened game state, high-probability time-shortened game state), the probability of winning by lottery of a normal symbol is set to approximately 1/1.1, the same as during the non-time-shortened game state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 0.2 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a win is achieved by lottery of a normal symbol is set to 2 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-shortened game state.

In other words, during the non-time-saving game mode (normal game mode), there is a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery that is held when a game ball passes through gate 20, and there are many opportunities for movable piece 16b to open. However, because the normal symbol fluctuation time is 10 seconds and the movable piece 16b operation time is 0.05 seconds, although the time it takes for movable piece 16b to change from a closed state to an open state is long (the interval from the open state to the next open state is long), the time that movable piece 16b remains in the open state is short. Therefore, during the non-time-saving game mode, movable piece 16b is likely to be in a closed state, making it difficult for a game ball that enters second game area 12b to enter the specific second start winning opening 162.

In contrast, during the first time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state) and the second time-shortened game state (second low-probability time-shortened game state, high-probability time-shortened game state), winning probability is the same as during the non-time-shortened game state, and therefore, just as during the non-time-shortened game state, there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to open. Furthermore, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state, and the movable piece 16b operating time is 2 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-shortened game state. Therefore, although the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to change from a closed state to an open state is short (the interval from the open state to the next open state is short), the time the movable piece 16b remains open is long. Therefore, during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is more likely to be in an open state, making it easier for a game ball entering the second game area 12b to enter the specific second start winning hole 162.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, the probability of winning by lottery for the normal pattern is set high overall in all of the non-time-saving play state, the first time-saving play state and the second time-saving play state, but by varying the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the operation time of the movable piece 16b, the possibility of the game ball entering the specific second start winning port 162 (i.e., the frequency of the game ball entering the specific second start winning port 162) is changed.
That is, during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, unlike during the non-time-shortened game state, the movable piece 16b is likely to be maintained in an open state, so that it is relatively easy for game balls to enter the specific second start winning hole 162. Therefore, during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, it is possible to acquire an opportunity to win or lose a lottery while suppressing the decrease in game balls that accompanies the progress of the game compared to during the non-time-shortened game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the variation time of the special symbol that can be determined in the event of a jackpot during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state is the same as the variation time of the special symbol that can be determined in the event of a jackpot during the non-time-shortened game state, but the variation time of the special symbol that can be determined in the event of a loss during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state is set to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol that can be determined in the event of a loss during the non-time-shortened game state (see FIG. 133(a)). In other words, during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, control is performed to shorten the average variation time of the special symbol (the so-called special symbol variation shortening function is activated) compared to during the non-time-shortened game state. This changes the frequency of the win/loss lottery (in other words, the frequency of the special symbol variation display).
Specifically, during the first time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state) and the second time-shortened game state (second low-probability time-shortened game state, high-probability time-shortened game state), the average time for the special pattern to change is shorter than during the non-time-shortened game state (normal game state), and this, combined with the fact that the game ball is more likely to enter the specific second start winning slot 162 mentioned above, makes it easier to execute the winning/losing lottery and display the change in the special pattern compared to during the non-time-shortened game state.
Therefore, during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, the frequency of the winning/losing lottery (display of the changing special symbols) can be increased while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses, compared to during the non-time-shortened game state.

In addition, during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, the performance of the normal game (the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol fluctuation time, and the operation time of the movable piece 16b) may be set to the same as during the non-time-shortened game state, and only the special symbol fluctuation shortening function described above may be activated. Even in this case, during the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, it is possible to make it easier to execute the win/lose lottery and the special symbol fluctuation display than during the non-time-shortened game state.

(Outline of game state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, one of the game states is set to a normal game state, a first low-probability time-shortened game state, a second low-probability time-shortened game state, or a high-probability time-shortened game state.

(Outline of settings of the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state)
Specifically, as long as a game ball is shot toward the first game area 12a as instructed during normal game play, the game ball can enter the first start winning hole 15. In addition, a jackpot can be won in a lottery based on the ball entering the game, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3 is determined (see FIG. 132(a)).

132(c), when the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the game state after the special game ends is set to a low-probability game state and a second time-saving game state, thereby setting a second low-probability time-saving game state. When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving cycles is set to 100. The second low-probability time-saving game state ends when a jackpot is won and a special game is started, or when the total number of cycles of the special symbol determined based on the first special symbol random number (hereinafter also referred to as the first special symbol) and the second special symbol random number (hereinafter also referred to as the second special symbol) reaches 100 without a jackpot being won (i.e., the total number of times the winning/losing lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are executed reaches 100).
In contrast, as shown in Figure 132 (c), when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, the game state after the special game ends is set to a high-probability game state and a second time-saving game state, thereby setting a high-probability time-saving game state. When the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of high-probability games and the number of time-saving games are both set to 100. Furthermore, the high-probability time-saving game state ends when a jackpot is won and a special game starts, or when the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes reaches 100 without a jackpot being won.

During both the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), as described above, the movable piece 16b is likely to be in an open state, so that game balls that enter the second game area 12b are likely to enter the specific second start winning port 162, and game balls that do not enter the specific second start winning port 162 are likely to enter the normal second start winning port 161. Therefore, as long as game balls are shot toward the second game area 12b as instructed during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the game balls can enter the normal second start winning port 161 or the specific second start winning port 162.

In a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the normal second start winning port 161 or the specific second start winning port 162, it is possible to win a jackpot, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot pattern X4, X5 or X6 will be determined (see Figure 132 (a)).
132(c), when the jackpot symbol X6 is determined, a second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game ends, and the number of time-saving times is set to 100. In contrast, when the jackpot symbol X4 or X5 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game ends, and both the high-probability number of times and the number of time-saving times are set to 100.

Then, if the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes reaches 100 without a jackpot being won during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the low-probability game state remains unchanged and the second time-saving game state is changed to a non-time-saving game state, thereby ending the second low-probability time-saving game state and setting the normal game state as described above. Also, if the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes reaches 100 without a jackpot being won during the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability game state is changed to a low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state is changed to a non-time-saving game state, thereby ending the high-probability time-saving game state and setting the normal game state as described above.

(Outline of the setting of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state)
132(c), after a low-probability game state, either the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, is set, if the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times for time-saving activation (900 times in other application example 13) without winning a jackpot (i.e., the total number of times the winning/losing lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the number of times the winning/losing lottery based on the second special symbol random number is executed reaches 900), the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. When the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of times time-saving is set to 1200.
The first low-probability time-shortening game state ends when a jackpot is won and a special game is started, or when the total number of times the first special chart changes and the second special chart changes reaches 1200 times without a jackpot being won.

During the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state), as during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is likely to be in an open state. This means that game balls that enter the second game area 12b are likely to enter the specific second start winning hole 162, and game balls that do not enter the specific second start winning hole 162 are likely to enter the normal second start winning hole 161. Therefore, as long as game balls are shot toward the second game area 12b as instructed during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball can enter the normal second start winning hole 161 or the specific second start winning hole 162. If a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the ball entering, the jackpot pattern X4, X5, or X6 will be determined (see Figure 132 (a)).

As described above, if a jackpot symbol X6 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state, a second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game ends, and the number of time-saving plays is set to 100 (see Figure 132(c)). Furthermore, if a jackpot symbol X4 or X5 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game ends, and both the number of high-probability plays and the number of time-saving plays are set to 100 (see Figure 132(c)).

On the other hand, if the total number of times the first special chart changes and the second special chart changes reaches 1,200 without winning a jackpot during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state while the low-probability game state remains, thereby ending the first low-probability time-shortened game state as described above and setting the normal game state.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state is approximately 1/300, so in effect, the first low-probability time-saving game state will continue until a jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the first low-probability time-shortened game state can only be set once after the RAM is cleared (reset) or after the end of a special game based on a jackpot win until the next jackpot win. In other words, after the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set, the first low-probability time-shortened game state cannot be set again until the next jackpot win.

(Outline of the setting timing of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state)
In another application example 13 of the pachinko machine P, a time-saving activation counter for counting the number of times (900 times) time-saving is activated that will result in the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) being set is configured using a specified memory area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
Then, when either the RAM is cleared (reset) by a specified operation or the special game ends, the time-saving activation counter is set to "900," which corresponds to the number of times the time-saving activation has occurred (900 times).

In addition, the main control board 100 of the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13 is provided with a RAM clear switch (not specifically shown) that can be pressed, and by turning on the power while pressing this RAM clear switch, the RAM is cleared (reset) and the time-saving activation count counter is set to "900".
On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch, the RAM is not cleared and the time-saving activation counter is not set to 900. In other words, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch, the count value of the time-saving activation counter remains the value currently stored and is not changed.

In addition, although not specifically shown, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 is provided with a RAM clear post-execution pre-win flag (configured in a specified storage area in the main RAM 103) that indicates that the RAM has been cleared and that the machine is in a state where a jackpot has not yet been won since power was restored (hereinafter also referred to as the pre-win state after RAM clear execution), and a RAM non-clear post-win flag (configured in a specified storage area in the main RAM 103) that indicates that the machine has not been cleared and that the machine has not yet won a jackpot since power was restored (hereinafter also referred to as the pre-win state after no RAM clear execution).

When the main CPU 101 turns on the power supply while pressing the RAM clear switch, it turns on the RAM clear execution pre-winning flag and turns off the RAM non-clear execution pre-winning flag. When the main CPU 101 turns on the power supply without pressing the RAM clear switch, it turns off the RAM clear execution pre-winning flag and turns on the RAM non-clear execution pre-winning flag.
Therefore, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch, the RAM clear execution pre-win flag is turned on (RAM clear non-execution pre-win flag is turned off), and the time-saving activation count counter is set to "900", whereas when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch, the RAM clear non-execution pre-win flag is turned on (RAM clear non-execution pre-win flag is turned off), but the count value of the time-saving activation count counter remains the value currently stored.
Furthermore, when a big win is won, the main CPU 101 turns off both the RAM clear execution pre-win flag and the RAM non-clear execution pre-win flag.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the game state thereafter is set to the normal game state (low probability game state), and from this point on, counting by the time-saving activation number counter begins.
Furthermore, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X3 or X6 is completed, the subsequent game state is set to a second low-probability time-saving game state (low-probability game state), and from this point on, counting by the time-saving activation counter begins.
On the other hand, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, X2, X4, or X5 ends, the subsequent game state is set to a high-probability time-saving game state (high-probability game state). When the high-probability time-saving game state is set, counting by the time-saving activation counter does not start from the point at which this special game ends. Then, as described above, if the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes reaches 100 without winning a jackpot during the high-probability time-saving game state (the total number of times the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the number of times the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is executed reaches 100), and the normal game state (low-probability game state) is set, counting by the time-saving activation counter starts from this point.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the count value of the time-saving activation counter is decremented by 1 at the point in time when the stop display time, which is the time for the special symbol to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbol has ended, has elapsed, and when the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches "0," it is considered that the count value of the time-saving activation counter has reached the number of times the time-saving activation has occurred. At this point, a first low-probability time-saving game state is set.
When set in this way, the 900th time that the special symbol variable display is performed without winning a jackpot after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set will be the variable display immediately before the first low-probability time-saving game state is set (hereinafter also referred to as the variable display immediately before the first low-probability time-saving setting). In other words, when the 900th time that the special symbol variable display starts, the count value of the time-saving activation counter is "1," and when the variable display ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the count value is decremented by 1 to "0," and at this point the first low-probability time-saving game state is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13, once the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the time-saving activation counter is not counted (i.e., is stopped) until the next jackpot is won or the RAM is cleared.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stop display time for stopping the special pattern has elapsed.
Here, instead of setting the first low-probability time-saving game state when the above-mentioned stop display time has elapsed, it is also conceivable to set the first low-probability time-saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol starts. More specifically, it is also conceivable to update the count value of the time-saving activation counter when the variable display of the special symbol starts, and set the first low-probability time-saving game state when the count value becomes "0".
When set in this manner, the count value of the time-saving activation counter is "1" before the start of the 900th special pattern change display that occurs without winning a jackpot after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and when the change display starts, the count value is decremented by 1 to "0," and at this point the first low-probability time-saving game state is set.
However, in the case where simultaneous spin control is executed as in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13, when the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set and the 899th variable display of the first special symbol starts without a jackpot being won, the count value of the time-saving activation counter becomes "1" at this point, and when a game ball is shot toward the second game area 12b and enters the normal second start winning hole 161, the variable display of the second special symbol starts. Then, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the count value of the time-saving activation counter becomes "0," and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set at this point. In other words, even though the 899th variation display is being performed by the first special chart, which would not normally result in the first low-probability time-shortening game state being set, the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set, making it easier for the game ball to enter the specific second start winning port 162, and therefore, by shooting the game ball toward the second game area 12b during the 899th variation display by this first special chart, it becomes easy to win prize balls by having the game ball enter the specific second start winning port 162.
Therefore, if the first low-probability time-saving game state is set at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, there is a high possibility that a game will be played by intentionally shooting a game ball toward the second game area 12b when the 899th variable display of the first special symbol begins, causing the game ball to enter the normal second start winning slot 161, and quickly transitioning to the first low-probability time-saving game state in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the specific second start winning slot 162. This will create a difference in the degree of advantage in the game between players who perform this method and those who do not, and there is a risk that fair play will not be guaranteed.

In contrast to this, in the case of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set at the point when the stop display time has elapsed, even if a game ball is normally inserted into the second start winning port 161 during the 899th variable display of the above-mentioned first special chart, and the variable display of the second special chart based on the ball entry is started, the first low-probability time-shortening game state is not set at this point.
Furthermore, the 900th display of the first special symbol is the display immediately before the first low-probability time-saving game state is established, and since the normal game state is in effect during the 900th display, as described below, the display of the second special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the normal second start winning slot 161 during this display is executed for a long time of 590 seconds, regardless of whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or a miss (see FIG. 133(a)). As a result, the 900th display of the first special symbol ends earlier than the second special symbol, and the first low-probability time-saving game state is established when the stop display time of the first special symbol has elapsed. In other words, even if a game ball enters the normal second start winning slot 161 during the display of the first special symbol immediately before the first low-probability time-saving game state is established (during the 900th display of the first special symbol), the first low-probability time-saving game state is not established during the display of the first special symbol.
In this way, according to the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, it is possible to prevent playing by a method such as quickly transitioning to the first low-probability time-saving game state while the first special chart is being displayed in a changing state as described above, thereby ensuring fair play.

Furthermore, even if the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set when the stop display time has elapsed, for example, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is normally started when a game ball enters the second start winning port 161 before the variable display of the first special symbol (900th variable display) immediately before the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set, ends during the variable display of the first special symbol and the stop display time has elapsed, the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set during the variable display of the first special symbol.
However, because the time for the variable display of the first special symbol is determined by lottery, it is almost impossible to intentionally cause a game ball to enter the second start winning slot 161 so that the variable display of the second special symbol ends during the 900th variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, when the first low probability time-saving game state is set at the time when the stop display time has elapsed, it is an extremely irregular case for the variable display of the second special symbol to end during the 900th variable display of the first special symbol.
In the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13, when such an irregular case occurs, a predetermined measure is taken to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable in terms of the presentation. This measure will be described in detail later.

(Outline of the end timing of the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state)
In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, a time-saving counter for counting the number of times the special pattern changes (number of times the special pattern changes) until the set time-saving game state ends is configured in a specified memory area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The time-shortening number counter counts both the number of times the first special chart changes and the number of times the second special chart changes, and counting is performed by this time-shortening number counter during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state, and the high-probability time-shortening game state.

Specifically, when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the time-saving count counter is set to "1200," which corresponds to the number of time-saving times (1200 times) corresponding to the first low-probability time-saving game state. Thereafter, each time the first special symbol variable display or the second special symbol variable display is executed, the count value of the time-saving count counter is decremented by 1 at the time (immediately after the start) when the variable display of the special symbol begins. Then, when the count value of the time-saving count counter reaches "0," the total number of times the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display have reached 1200, which is the number of time-saving times, and at this point the first low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.
When the count value of the time-shortening counter reaches "0" and the first low-probability time-shortening game state ends, the counting by the time-shortening counter also ends, and thereafter, no counting by the time-shortening counter is performed until any of the time-shortening game states (first low-probability time-shortening game state, second low-probability time-shortening game state, high-probability time-shortening game state) is set.

Furthermore, when the special game ends and the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the time-saving count counter is set to "100," which corresponds to the number of time-saving times (100 times) corresponding to the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state. Thereafter, as in the first low-probability time-saving game state, each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed, the count value of the time-saving count counter is decremented by one when the display of the special symbol begins (immediately after the display of the special symbol begins). When the count value of the time-saving count counter reaches "0," the sum of the number of times the first special symbol changes and the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches 100, and the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state currently set ends (and the high-probability game state also ends with the end of the second time-saving game state, as described below), and the normal game state is set.
As in the case of the first low-probability time-shortening game state, when the count value of the time-shortening count counter reaches "0" and the second low-probability time-shortening game state or the high-probability time-shortening game state ends, counting by the time-shortening count counter also ends, and thereafter no more counting by the time-shortening count counter is performed until one of the time-shortening game states (first low-probability time-shortening game state, second low-probability time-shortening game state, high-probability time-shortening game state) is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, a high probability count counter for counting the number of times the special pattern changes display until the set high probability game state ends is configured in a specified memory area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
Furthermore, when the special game ends and the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the high-probability count counter is set to "100," corresponding to the high-probability count (100 times). Thereafter, each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed, the count value of the high-probability count counter is decremented by one when the display of the special symbol begins (immediately after the start of the display). When the count value of the high-probability count counter reaches "0," the sum of the number of times the first special symbol changes and the number of times the second special symbol changes has reached 100, which is the high-probability count. Here, since the high-probability count is the same as the time-saving count (100 times), when the count value of the high-probability count counter reaches "0," the count value of the time-saving count counter also becomes "0" as described above. At this point, the second time-saving game state ends, and the high-probability game state also ends, thereby ending the currently set high-probability time-saving game state and setting the normal game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the first low-probability time-shortened game state ends when the variable display of the special symbol begins. The timing for ending the first low-probability time-shortened game state can be, for example, when the variable display of the special symbol ends or when the stop display time has elapsed, but by ending the first low-probability time-shortened game state when the variable display of the special symbol begins, the first low-probability time-shortened game state can be ended as soon as possible. This makes it possible to reduce the advantage of the first low-probability time-shortened game state and prevent situations in which the gambling element becomes too high.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, all of the time-shortened game states (first low-probability time-shortened game state, second low-probability time-shortened game state, high-probability time-shortened game state) are configured to end when the display of the special pattern changes begins, so that the processing for ending the time-shortened game state can be centralized, and the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.

(Outline of sending state transition commands)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, as described above, if one of the time-shortening game states (first low-probability time-shortening game state, second low-probability time-shortening game state, high-probability time-shortening game state) ends and the normal game state is set when the variable display of the special symbol begins, the main CPU 101 transmits a state transition command to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, indicating that the normal game state has been set (indicating that the game state has changed). Also, as described above, if the normal game state ends and the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 transmits a state transition command to the sub-control board 300 at the end of the stop display time, indicating that the first low-probability time-shortening game state has been set (indicating that the game state has changed).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, when the game state is changed both at the start of the variable display of the special pattern and at the end of the stop display time, a state transition command indicating the changed game state is sent.
This ensures that the change in game state can be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 reliably.

(Outline of control related to determination of variation pattern command)
A pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 is provided with tables A, B, C, D, E, and F as a fluctuation pattern table 114 storing fluctuation pattern commands associated with fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 133(a)). Then, similar to the above-described embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, a fluctuation pattern command is determined by referring to one of the fluctuation pattern tables 114.

Here, in the pachinko machine P relating to another low usage example 13, in order to improve the presentation effect after the special game ends in balance with the executed special game, the tendency of the variation pattern that can be determined according to the number of times the special pattern changes after the special game ends (for example, only a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time set is determined, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time set is likely to be determined, etc.) is changed so that a presentation according to the number of times the special pattern changes can be executed, so that after a jackpot is won and a special game is executed, the variation pattern table 114 that is referenced when determining the variation pattern command can be switched according to the number of times the special pattern changes after the special game ends.
That is, after the special game ends, it is possible to determine a variation pattern command based on different variation pattern tables 114 depending on the number of variations even during the same game state.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern table 114 referred to when determining the variation pattern command is switched as described above according to the number of variations without the execution of a special game, the tendency of the variation pattern determined will change even though a special game is not being played, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable with the presentation. Therefore, after the RAM is cleared, switching of the variation pattern table 114 according to the number of variations of the special symbol since the RAM was cleared is restricted until the first jackpot is won (a special game is executed), and the variation pattern command is determined based on the variation pattern table 114 associated with the game state being set.
That is, during the period from when the RAM is cleared until the first big win is won, the variation pattern command is not determined based on a different variation pattern table 114 according to the number of variations during the same game state. In other words, during this period, as long as the same game state is in play, the variation pattern command is always determined based on the same variation pattern table 114 according to the game state being set.

A pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 has a decision table that defines the variation pattern table 114 to be referenced when determining a variation pattern command. When determining a variation pattern command, the variation pattern table 114 to be referenced is determined based on the information defined in the decision table.

As shown in Figure 133(b), according to the determination table, when jackpot symbol X3 or X6 is determined (when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends), table C is determined if the number of times the special symbol changes since the end of the special game based on that determination is between 1 and 99 times, table D is determined at the 100th time, table A is determined at the 101st to 899th time, table B is determined at the 900th time, table E is determined at the 901st to 2099th time, table F is determined at the 2100th time, and table A is determined from 2101st time onwards.

That is, for the 1st to 99th fluctuations in the second low-probability time-shortened game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern described above, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table C, and for the 100th fluctuation in the second low-probability time-shortened game state (the final fluctuation that starts during the second low-probability time-shortened game state), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table D.
Furthermore, for the 1st to 799th fluctuations in the normal game state that is set after the end of the second low-probability time-shortening game state (the 101st to 899th fluctuations after the special game ends and the second low-probability time-shortening game state is set), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table A, and for the 800th fluctuation in the normal game state (the fluctuation immediately before the setting of the first low-probability time-shortening game state (the 900th fluctuation after the special game ends and the second low-probability time-shortening game state is set)), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table B.
Furthermore, for the 1st to 1199th fluctuations in the first low-probability time-shortened game state that is set after the end of the above-mentioned normal game state (the 901st to 2099th fluctuations after the special game ends and the second low-probability time-shortened game state is set), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table E, and for the 1200th fluctuation in the first low-probability time-shortened game state (the final fluctuation that starts during the first low-probability time-shortened game state (the 2100th fluctuation after the special game ends and the second low-probability time-shortened game state is set)), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table F.
In addition, for fluctuations in the normal game state that are set after the end of the above-mentioned first low-probability time-shortened game state (fluctuations from the 2101st time onwards after the special game has ended and the second low-probability time-shortened game state has been set), the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table A.

Also, as shown in Figure 133(b), if the jackpot symbol X1, X2, X4, or X5 is determined (if a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends), table C is determined if the number of times the special symbol changes after the special game based on that determination ends is 1 to 99 times, table D is determined on the 100th time, table A is determined on the 101st to 999th time, table B is determined on the 1000th time, table E is determined on the 1001st to 2199th time, table F is determined on the 2200th time, and table A is determined from 2201st time onwards.

That is, for the 1st to 99th fluctuations in the high-probability time-shortening game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern described above, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table C, and for the 100th fluctuation in the high-probability time-shortening game state (the final fluctuation that starts during the high-probability time-shortening game state), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table D.
Furthermore, for the 1st to 899th fluctuations in the normal game state that are set after the end of the above-mentioned high-probability time-shortening game state (the 101st to 999th fluctuations after the special game ends and the high-probability time-shortening game state is set), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table A, and for the 900th fluctuation in the normal game state (the fluctuation immediately before the first low-probability time-shortening setting (the 1000th fluctuation after the special game ends and the high-probability time-shortening game state is set)), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table B.
Furthermore, for the 1st to 1199th fluctuations in the first low-probability time-shortening game state that is set after the end of the above-mentioned normal game state (the 1001st to 2199th fluctuations after the special game ends and the high-probability time-shortening game state is set), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table E, and for the 1200th fluctuation in the first low-probability time-shortening game state (the final fluctuation that starts during the first low-probability time-shortening game state (the 2200th fluctuation after the special game ends and the high-probability time-shortening game state is set)), a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table F.
In addition, for fluctuations in the normal game state that are set after the end of the above-mentioned first low-probability time-shortened game state (fluctuations from the 2201st time onwards after the special game has ended and the high-probability time-shortened game state has been set), the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table A.

In contrast, as shown in FIG. 133(b), for fluctuations in the normal gaming state that are set after the RAM is cleared (the 1st to 900th fluctuations after the RAM is cleared), the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table A. Also, for fluctuations in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state that is set when the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches 900 in that normal gaming state (the 901st to 2100th fluctuations after the RAM is cleared), the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table E. Also, for fluctuations in the normal gaming state that are set after the above-mentioned first low-probability time-saving gaming state has ended (the 2101st fluctuation or later after the RAM is cleared), the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table A.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13, in addition to the time-saving activation count counter and time-saving count counter described above, a variation count counter is provided for counting the number of times the win/lose lottery is executed (the number of times the special symbol changes), just as in the above-described embodiment. The count value of this variation count counter is reset when the RAM is cleared or the special game ends, and is incremented by "1" each time the win/lose lottery (special symbol change) is executed. The main CPU 101 is able to determine the number of changes since the RAM was cleared and the number of changes since the special game ended, based on the count value of this variation count counter.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, in each of the game states of the second low-probability time-shortening game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X3 or X6, the normal game state that is set after the end of the second low-probability time-shortening game state, and the first low-probability time-shortening game state that is set after the end of the normal game state, and in each of the game states of the high-probability time-shortening game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, X2, X4, or X5, the normal game state that is set after the end of the high-probability time-shortening game state, and the first low-probability time-shortening game state that is set after the end of the normal game state, it is possible to determine a variation pattern command based on different variation pattern tables 114 according to the number of variations (the number of times the special pattern has varied since the special game ended).
On the other hand, in each of the game states, namely the normal game state set after the RAM is cleared, the first low-probability time-shortened game state set after the normal game state ends, and the normal game state set after the first low-probability time-shortened game state ends, it is possible to determine the variation pattern command based on the same variation pattern table 114 regardless of the number of variations.

It is also possible to determine the variation pattern command based on the different variation pattern tables 114 corresponding to the number of fluctuations only in one or more game states, rather than determining the variation pattern command based on the different variation pattern tables 114 corresponding to the number of fluctuations in all of the following states: the second low-probability time-shortening game state which is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X3 or X6, the normal game state which is set after the end of the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the first low-probability time-shortening game state which is set after the end of the normal game state, the high-probability time-shortening game state which is set after the end of the high-probability time-shortening game state, the normal game state which is set after the end of the normal game state.
In this case, the control for determining the variation pattern command can be changed for each game state, making it possible to provide a variety of gameplay features.

In addition, in this application example, fluctuations other than the final fluctuations in each of the above-mentioned game states (i.e., after the end of special play based on the determination of jackpot symbol X3 or X6, fluctuations from 1 to 99 in the second low-probability time-saving game state, fluctuations from 1 to 799 in the normal game state, and fluctuations from 1 to 1199 in the first low-probability time-saving game state; after the end of special play based on the determination of jackpot symbol X1, X2, X4, or X5, fluctuations from 1 to 99 in the high-probability time-saving game state, fluctuations from 1 to 899 in the normal game state, and fluctuations from 1 to 1199 in the first low-probability time-saving game state) and the final fluctuations in each game state (i.e., after the end of special play based on the determination of jackpot symbol X3 or X6, fluctuations from 10 in the second low-probability time-saving game state) In the previous example, the variation pattern table 114 referenced to determine the variation pattern command was set to be different for the 0th variation, the 900th variation in the normal game state, the 1200th variation in the first low-probability time-shortened game state, and after the end of special game play based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, X2, X4 or X5, the 100th variation in the high-probability time-shortened game state, the 900th variation in the normal game state, and the 1200th variation in the first low-probability time-shortened game state. However, this is not limited to this, and the period from the first variation to the final variation in each game state may be divided into smaller sections, and different variation pattern tables 114 referenced to determine the variation pattern command may be used for each variation in each divided section.

For example, the above-mentioned first low-probability time-shortened game state may be divided into the 1st to 600th fluctuations (i.e., the first half of the first low-probability time-shortened game state), the 601st to 1199th fluctuations (i.e., the second half of the first low-probability time-shortened game state), and the 1200th fluctuation (i.e., the end of the first low-probability time-shortened game state), and for the 1st to 600th fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern command may be determined based on the fluctuation pattern table 114 in which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of 2 seconds fluctuation) is likely to be determined, for the 601st to 1199th fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern command may be determined based on the fluctuation pattern table 114 in which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of 5 seconds fluctuation) is likely to be determined, and for the 1200th fluctuation, if the result of the lottery is a loss, the fluctuation pattern command may be determined based on the fluctuation pattern table 114 in which a fluctuation pattern with a predetermined specific fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of 20 seconds fluctuation) is always determined.
In this case, the fluctuation time per one time becomes longer in the latter half of the first low-probability time-shortened game state compared to the first half, and once the first low-probability time-shortened game state is halfway through, the game progresses more slowly compared to the first half, giving the player the impression that the first low-probability time-shortened game state is unlikely to end. Also, in the final fluctuation of the first low-probability time-shortened game state, a fluctuation display of a special symbol is always executed at a specific fluctuation time, so that in the fluctuation effect executed in conjunction with the fluctuation display, for example, a notification effect indicating that the first low-probability time-shortened game state is ending can be reliably executed.
Also, for example, in contrast to the above, for the first half of the fluctuations (1st to 600th fluctuations) in the first low-probability time-shortened game state described above, the fluctuation pattern command may be determined based on a fluctuation pattern table 114 in which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is likely to be determined, and for the second half of the fluctuations (601st to 1199th fluctuations), the fluctuation pattern command may be determined based on a fluctuation pattern table 114 in which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is likely to be determined.
In this case, the fluctuation time per one time is shorter in the latter half of the first low-probability time-shortening game state than in the first half, and once the first low-probability time-shortening game state is halfway through, the game progresses more quickly than in the first half, giving the player a thrilling impression regarding the end of the first low-probability time-shortening game state.

Furthermore, for example, with regard to the normal game state that is set after the end of a special game through a second low-probability time-shortening game state or a high-probability time-shortening game state, from a predetermined number of times before the final variation (for example, three times before) until the final variation, a variation pattern command may be determined based on a variation pattern table 114 that differs for each variation.
Specifically, for example, in the case of a change three times before the final change, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a loss, the change pattern command is determined based on the change pattern table 114 in which a change pattern with a first change time (for example, a change pattern with a 3-second change) is always determined, and in the case of a change two times before the final change, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a loss, the change pattern command is determined based on the change pattern table 114 in which a change pattern with a second change time longer than the above-mentioned first change time (for example, a change pattern with a 6-second change) is always determined, and For the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a losing ticket, the fluctuation pattern command may be determined based on a fluctuation pattern table 114 which always determines a fluctuation pattern in which a third fluctuation time longer than the above-mentioned second fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of 13 seconds fluctuation) is set, and for the final fluctuation, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a losing ticket, the fluctuation pattern command may be determined based on a fluctuation pattern table 114 which always determines a fluctuation pattern in which a fourth fluctuation time longer than the above-mentioned third fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of 20 seconds fluctuation) is set.
In this case, the fluctuation time gradually becomes longer from the fluctuation three times before the final fluctuation of the normal game state to the final fluctuation, and this change in fluctuation time can give the player the impression that the first low-probability time-shortened game state is about to be set.
Contrary to the above, for example, in the case of a change three times before the final change, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a loss, the change pattern command is determined based on the change pattern table 114 in which a change pattern with a first change time (for example, a change pattern with an 18-second change) is always determined, and in the case of a change two times before the final change, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a loss, the change pattern command is determined based on the change pattern table 114 in which a change pattern with a second change time shorter than the above-mentioned first change time (for example, a change pattern with a 13-second change) is always determined. For the fluctuation immediately before the final fluctuation, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a losing ticket, the fluctuation pattern command may be determined based on fluctuation pattern table 114 which always determines a fluctuation pattern in which a third fluctuation time shorter than the above-mentioned second fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of 9 seconds fluctuation) is set, and for the final fluctuation, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a losing ticket, the fluctuation pattern command may be determined based on fluctuation pattern table 114 which always determines a fluctuation pattern in which a fourth fluctuation time shorter than the above-mentioned third fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of 5 seconds fluctuation) is set.
In this case, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, during the normal game state which is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X3 or X6 via the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the normal game state and the first low-probability time-shortened game state, and during the normal game state which is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, X2, X4 or X5 via the high-probability time-shortened game state, the normal game state and the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the variation pattern command is always determined based on the same variation pattern table 114 (table A), but even during the above-mentioned normal game state, it may be possible to determine the variation pattern command based on different variation pattern tables 114 according to the number of variations.
In this case, even during the normal game state described above, it becomes easier to execute the variable display of the special pattern at a specific variable time depending on the number of variations, thereby improving the playability and the presentation effects of the various presentations executed in conjunction with the variable display.
Even after the RAM is cleared, it may be possible to determine a variation pattern command based on a different variation pattern table 114 according to the number of variations during the same game state.

The variation pattern command is then determined by referencing the variation pattern table 114 determined as described above.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 133 (a), according to Table A, if the winning/losing lottery based on the first special pattern random number results in a losing result and the losing pattern Z1 is determined, and if the first reserved number at that time is less than 2, then either the variation pattern command "00H" associated with the variation pattern of "13 second variation (special pattern variation time is 13 seconds)" (probability of determination is 90%), the variation pattern command "02H" associated with the variation pattern of "20 second variation (special pattern variation time is 20 seconds)" (probability of determination is 8%), or the variation pattern command "03H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 second variation (special pattern variation time is 60 seconds)" (probability of determination is 2%) will be determined. If the first reserved number at the above-mentioned time is 2 or more, either the fluctuation pattern command "01H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "6-second fluctuation (special pattern fluctuation time is 6 seconds)" (probability of determination is 90%), the fluctuation pattern command "02H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" (probability of determination is 8%), or the fluctuation pattern command "03H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" (probability of determination is 2%) will be determined.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the first special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X1 or X3 is determined, regardless of the first reserved number, either the fluctuation pattern command "A2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" (determination probability is 10%) or the fluctuation pattern command "A3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" (determination probability is 90%) will be determined.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the first special pattern random number and the jackpot pattern X2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "A6H" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined regardless of the first reserved number.
In addition, if the winning/losing lottery based on the second special pattern random number results in a loss and the losing pattern Z2 is determined, regardless of the second reserved number, the variation pattern command "04H" (determination probability is 100%) is determined, which is associated with the variation pattern of "590 second variation (the variation time of the special pattern is 590 seconds)."
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot pattern X4, X5 or X6 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "A4H" (with a 100% probability of being determined) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "590 seconds fluctuation" will be determined regardless of the second reserved number.

As shown in Figure 133 (a), according to Table B, if the lottery based on the first special pattern random number results in a loss and the losing pattern Z1 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "05H" (determination probability 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" is determined regardless of the first reserved number.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the first special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "A5H" (with a 100% probability of determination) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "10-second fluctuation" is determined regardless of the first reserved number.
In addition, if the lottery based on the second special chart random number results in a loss and the losing pattern Z2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "04H" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "590 seconds fluctuation" is determined regardless of the second reserved number.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot pattern X4, X5 or X6 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "A4H" (with a 100% probability of being determined) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "590 seconds fluctuation" will be determined regardless of the second reserved number.

As shown in Figure 133 (a), according to Table C, if the winning/losing lottery based on the first special pattern random number results in a losing draw and losing pattern Z1 is determined, regardless of the first reserved number, and if the winning/losing lottery based on the second special pattern random number results in a losing draw and losing pattern Z2 is determined, regardless of the second reserved number, either the variation pattern command "11H" associated with the variation pattern of "5 second variation (special pattern variation time is 5 seconds)" (probability of determination is 90%), the variation pattern command "12H" associated with the variation pattern of "20 second variation" (probability of determination is 8%), or the variation pattern command "13H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 second variation" (probability of determination is 2%) will be determined.
Furthermore, if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the first special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3 is determined, regardless of the first reserved number, and if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the second special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X4, X5 or X6 is determined, regardless of the second reserved number, either the fluctuation pattern command "B2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" (probability of determination is 10%) or the fluctuation pattern command "B3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" (probability of determination is 90%) will be determined.

As shown in Figure 133 (a), according to Table D, if the winning/losing lottery based on the first special pattern random number results in a losing draw and the losing pattern Z1 is determined, regardless of the first reserved number, and if the winning/losing lottery based on the second special pattern random number results in a losing draw and the losing pattern Z2 is determined, regardless of the second reserved number, the variation pattern command "14H" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the variation pattern of "15 second variation (special pattern variation time is 15 seconds)" is determined.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the first special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3 is determined, regardless of the first reserved number, and if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the second special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X4, X5 or X6 is determined, regardless of the second reserved number, the variation pattern command "B4H" (with a 100% probability of being determined) associated with the variation pattern of "15-second variation" is determined.

As shown in Figure 133 (a), according to Table E, if the winning/losing lottery based on the first special pattern random number results in a losing draw and losing pattern Z1 is determined, regardless of the first reserved number, and if the winning/losing lottery based on the second special pattern random number results in a losing draw and losing pattern Z2 is determined, regardless of the second reserved number, the variation pattern command "21H" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the variation pattern of "3 second variation (special pattern variation time is 3 seconds)" is determined.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the first special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3 is determined, regardless of the first reserved number, and if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the second special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X4, X5 or X6 is determined, regardless of the second reserved number, the variation pattern command "C1H" (with a 100% probability of being determined) associated with the variation pattern of "3-second variation" is determined.

As shown in Figure 133 (a), according to Table F, if the winning/losing lottery based on the first special chart random number results in a loss and the losing pattern Z1 is determined, regardless of the first reserved number, and if the winning/losing lottery based on the second special chart random number results in a loss and the losing pattern Z2 is determined, regardless of the second reserved number, the variation pattern command "22H" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the variation pattern of "15 second variation" is determined.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the first special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3 is determined, regardless of the first reserved number, and if a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the second special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X4, X5 or X6 is determined, regardless of the second reserved number, the variation pattern command "C2H" (with a 100% probability of being determined) associated with the variation pattern of "3-second variation" is determined.

When the "590-second variation" variation pattern is determined, the special symbol variation display and variation presentation will be carried out for an extremely long time (590 seconds) compared to other variation patterns. This "590-second variation" variation pattern is determined only when a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is held in normal game mode (see Figure 133 (a)). As mentioned above, during normal game mode, an instruction is given to shoot a game ball into the first game area 12a, and if a game ball is shot into the first game area 12a in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will not enter the second start winning slot 16, and therefore the "590-second variation" variation pattern will not be determined.

(Summary of special symbol stop display time)
In a pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, a stop display time for stopping the display of a special pattern after the display of the special pattern has finished is determined according to the determined change pattern command (change pattern), and when the display of the special pattern has finished changing, the special pattern is stopped for the stop display time according to the change pattern command determined when the special pattern started to change.
133(c), a stop display time table in which stop display times corresponding to variable pattern commands that can be determined is stored in the main ROM 102 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13. When the variable display of the special symbol has ended, the main CPU 101 refers to the stop display time table and obtains the stop display time corresponding to the determined variable pattern command.
According to the stop display time table, if the determined fluctuation pattern command is "05H" (if the fluctuation immediately before the first low-probability time-saving setting results in a miss based on the first special pattern random number and the missing pattern Z1 is determined), a stop display time of 20 seconds is acquired, and if the determined fluctuation pattern command is other than "05H", a stop display time of 0.5 seconds is acquired.

It should be noted that if the variation pattern command is other than "05H", the same stop display time (0.5 seconds) is acquired, but this is not limited to this, and different stop display times may be acquired depending on the type of variation pattern command.
For example, if the determined variation pattern command corresponds to a miss determined during the first low-probability time-shortened game state or the second low-probability time-shortened game state, a longer or shorter stop display time may be determined than if the determined variation pattern command corresponds to a miss determined during the normal game state.
Also, for example, if the determined variation pattern command corresponds to a miss determined based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15, a longer or shorter stop display time may be determined than if the determined variation pattern command corresponds to a miss determined based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16.

Next, an overview of the progress of the above-mentioned special game will be explained using a flowchart, focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned embodiment and other application example 8.
First, the special symbol variation start processing executed when the special symbol variation starts will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 134.
The processing of steps 7500 to 7502 is almost the same as the processing of steps 5000 to 5002 of the special pattern change start processing in other application example 8, the processing of step 7503 is almost the same as the processing of step 805 of the special pattern change start processing in the above-mentioned embodiment, and the processing of steps 7504 to 7511 is almost the same as the processing of steps 5003 to 5010 of the special pattern change start processing in other application example 8, so we will omit the explanation here and proceed to step 7512.
In step 7512, the main CPU 101 executes a variation start count update process for updating the count values of various counters at the time when the variable display of the special symbol starts. Then, the process proceeds to step 7513.

In step 7513, the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process at the start of variation for setting the game state at the time when the variable display of the special symbol starts. Then, the process proceeds to step 7514.
In step 7514, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the first pending number counter is equal to or greater than 1. If it is determined that the value is not equal to or greater than 1, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step 7528. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than 1, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 7515.

The processing of steps 7515 to 7516 is almost the same as the processing of steps 5014 to 5015 of the special pattern change start processing in other application example 8, the processing of step 7517 is almost the same as the processing of step 805 of the special pattern change start processing in the above-mentioned embodiment, and the processing of steps 7518 to 7525 is almost the same as the processing of steps 5016 to 5023 of the special pattern change start processing in other application example 8, so we will omit the explanation here and proceed to step 7526.
In step 7526, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation start count update process, and then proceeds to step 7527.

In step S7527, the main CPU 101 executes the game state setting process at the start of variation, and then ends the special symbol variation start process.
Furthermore, in step 7528, which is reached when it is determined in step 7514 that the value of the first reserved number counter is not 1 or greater, the main CPU 101 executes a customer waiting determination process for displaying a customer waiting display on the performance display device 21 based on the fact that a variable display is not being performed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 counts the time during which a variable display of a special symbol is not being performed, and when a predetermined customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without a variable display of a special symbol, it determines that a customer waiting state has been entered and stores a customer waiting command for displaying a customer waiting screen on the performance display device 21 in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the special symbol variation start process is terminated.

Next, the process of updating the number of times at the start of fluctuation in step 7512 or 7526 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 7550, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current time is in a time-shortened gaming state (i.e., whether or not the current time is in a first low-probability time-shortened gaming state, a second low-probability time-shortened gaming state, or a high-probability time-shortened gaming state). If it is determined that the current time is not in a time-shortened gaming state, the process proceeds to step 7553. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is in a time-shortened gaming state, the process proceeds to the next step 7551.
In step 7551, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the time-saving number counter by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step 7552.

In step 7552, the main CPU 101 stores a time-saving count command indicating the current count value of the time-saving count counter in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the current count value of the time-saving count counter (i.e., the number of remaining fluctuations until the currently set time-saving game state ends) is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 7553.
In step 7553, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current time is in a high-probability game state (i.e., whether or not the current time is in a high-probability time-shortened game state). If it is determined that the current time is not in a high-probability game state, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation start count update process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is in a high-probability game state, the process proceeds to the next step 7554.

In step 7554, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the high probability count counter by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step 7555.
In step 7555, the main CPU 101 stores a high probability count command indicating the current count value of the high probability count counter in the performance transmission data storage area. This transmits the current count value of the high probability count counter (i.e., the remaining number of fluctuations until the currently set high probability game state ends) to the sub-control board 300. Then, the fluctuation start count update process ends.

Next, the game state setting process at the start of fluctuation in step 7513 or 7527 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 136.
In step 7570, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current time is in the time-shortened gaming state. If it is determined that the current time is not in the time-shortened gaming state, the process proceeds to step 7573. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is in the time-shortened gaming state, the process proceeds to the next step 7571.
In step 7571, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the time-saving counter is "0." If it is determined that the count value is not "0," the main CPU 101 proceeds to step 7573. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value is "0," the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 7572.

In step 7572, the main CPU 101 turns off the time-shortened game flags (the first time-shortened game flag indicating the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state flag indicating the second time-shortened game state) that indicate the time-shortened game state. That is, the game state is set to the non-time-shortened game state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 7573.
In step 7573, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is a high-probability game state. If it is determined that the current state is not a high-probability game state, the process proceeds to step 7576. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is a high-probability game state, the process proceeds to the next step 7574.

In step 7574, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the high probability count counter is "0". If it is determined that the count value is not "0", the process proceeds to step 7576. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value is "0", the process proceeds to the next step 7575.
In step 7575, the main CPU 101 turns off the high probability gaming flag, which indicates that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. That is, the gaming state is set to a low probability gaming state. Then, the process proceeds to step 7576.

In step 7576, if the game state has changed (i.e., if the non-time-saving game state has been set by the processing of step 7572 described above, or if the low-probability game state has been set by the processing of step 7575 described above), the main CPU 101 stores a state transition command indicating this in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the game state setting process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the variable display of the special symbol stops), a special symbol variation stop process is executed, which is a process for statically displaying the special symbol for a predetermined static display time; however, this process is almost the same as the special symbol variation stop process of the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 8, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the post-stop processing that is executed after the special pattern variation stop processing is completed will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 137.
In step 7600, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop display time of the first special symbol (first special symbol stop display time) set in a predetermined first stop display time timer counter in the special symbol variation stop processing has elapsed. If it is determined that the first special symbol stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step 7602. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol stop display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 7601.
In step 7601, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop display time of the second special symbol (second special symbol stop display time) set in the predetermined second stop display time timer counter in the special symbol variation stop processing has elapsed. If it is determined that the second special symbol stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 7602.

In step 7602, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a jackpot symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 7607. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 7603.
In step 7603, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a special symbol currently being displayed, i.e., whether or not another special symbol different from the stopped special symbol is currently being displayed. Specifically, if the stopped first special symbol is a jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special symbol is currently being displayed. Also, if the stopped second special symbol is a jackpot symbol X4, X5, or X6, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special symbol is currently being displayed. Then, if it is determined that there is no special symbol currently being displayed, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step 7605. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a special symbol currently being displayed, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 7604.

In step 7604, the special symbol being displayed is forcibly stopped. Specifically, if the special symbol being displayed is a losing symbol, the losing symbol stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area or the second special symbol temporary storage area is displayed as a stopped symbol on the corresponding special symbol display device, even if the change time has not yet elapsed. If the first special symbol is being displayed as a changing symbol, the losing symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, even if the change time for this first special symbol has not yet elapsed. Furthermore, if the second special symbol is being displayed as a changing symbol, the losing symbol Z2 is forcibly stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, even if the change time for this second special symbol has not yet elapsed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, step 7605.

In step 7605, the main CPU 101 turns off the high probability game flag and the time-shortened game flag (first time-shortened game flag, second time-shortened game flag). Note that if the high probability game flag and the time-shortened game flag are off, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 7606.
In step 7606, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores an opening command indicating that the opening process will start in the effect transmission data storage area. The main CPU 101 also sets the number of rounds in the special game to be executed after the opening time has elapsed in the round number storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, the post-stop process is terminated.

In step 7607, which is reached when it is determined in step 7602 that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 101 executes a stop display time elapse count update process for updating the count values of various counters when the stop display time has elapsed.Then, the process proceeds to step 7608.
In step 7608, the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process at the time of lapse of the stop display time for setting the game state at the time of lapse of the stop display time, and then ends the post-stop process.

Next, the process of updating the number of times when the stopped display time has elapsed in step 7607 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 7630, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current time is in the normal game mode or the second low-probability time-shortened game mode. If it is determined that the current time is not in the normal game mode or the second low-probability time-shortened game mode, the main CPU 101 ends the stop display time elapsed count update process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is in the normal game mode or the second low-probability time-shortened game mode, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 7631.
In step 7631, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the time-reduction activation counter by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step 7632.
In step 7632, the main CPU 101 stores a time-saving activation count command indicating the current count value of the time-saving activation count counter in the effect transmission data storage area. This transmits the current count value of the time-saving activation count counter (i.e., the number of remaining fluctuations until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set) to the sub-control board 300. Then, the stop display time elapse count update process is terminated.

Next, the game status setting process when the stop display time has elapsed in step 7608 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 139.
In step 7650, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time-saving activation count reach flag, which indicates that the time-saving activation count has been reached, is on. If it is determined that the flag is on, the main CPU 101 ends the game status setting process when the stop display time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the flag is not on (i.e., off), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 7651.
In step 7651, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-shortened game state is in progress (i.e., whether or not the first time-shortened game flag or the second time-shortened game flag is on). If it is determined that the time-shortened game state is in progress, the game state setting process upon lapse of the stop display time is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-shortened game state is not in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 7652.

In step 7652, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the time-saving activation counter is "0." If it is determined that the count value is not "0," the main CPU 101 ends the game status setting process when the stop display time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value is "0," the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 7653.
In step 7653, the main CPU 101 sets the first low-probability time-shortened game state. That is, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time-shortened game flag and turns off the high-probability game flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 7654.

In step 7654, the main CPU 101 stores a state transition command indicating that the gaming state has been changed to the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step 7655.
In step 7655, the main CPU 101 turns on the time-saving activation count reaching flag, and then ends the game state setting process when the stop display time has elapsed.

Next, the special game ending process that is executed when all rounds of play have been completed (i.e., when the special game has been completed) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
The processing of step 7670 is almost the same as the processing of step 5400 of the special game end processing in other application example 8, so the explanation will be omitted here and the flow will proceed to step 7671.
In step 7671, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value ("900" corresponding to 900 times of time-saving activation) in the time-saving activation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 7672.

Since the processing of step 7672 is almost the same as step 5402 of the special game end processing in other application example 8, the explanation will be omitted here and the process will proceed to step 7673.
In step 7673, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving count counter and the high-probability count counter to predetermined values corresponding to the set game state (if the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the time-saving count counter is set to "100", and if the high-probability time-saving game state is set, both the time-saving count counter and the high-probability count counter are set to "100"). The main CPU 101 also stores a special game end setting command indicating the game state set after the special game ends and the values set in the time-saving count counter and the high-probability count counter in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the game state after the special game ends and the values set in the time-saving count counter and the high-probability count counter to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 7674.

In step 7674, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the fluctuation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 7675.
In step 7675, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear execution pre-win flag or the RAM non-clear execution pre-win flag is on. If it determines that neither flag is on (i.e., off), it ends the special game end process. On the other hand, if it determines that the above flag is on, it proceeds to next step 7676.

In step 7676, the main CPU 101 turns off the flags (the pre-win flag after RAM clear execution, the pre-win flag after RAM non-clear execution) that were determined to be on in step 7675. Then, the process proceeds to step 7677.
In step 7677, the main CPU 101 turns off the pre-win flag after RAM clear execution and the pre-win flag after no RAM clear execution, and stores a pre-win state end command indicating that the pre-win state after RAM clear execution and the pre-win state after no RAM clear execution have ended in the performance transmission data storage area. This transmits information to the sub-control board 300 that the pre-win state after RAM clear execution and the pre-win state after no RAM clear execution have ended. The special game end process then ends.

Next, the RAM clearing process performed when the RAM is cleared will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
The processing of step 7680 is almost the same as the processing of step 5500 in the RAM clear processing in other application example 8, so the explanation will be omitted here and the process proceeds to the next step 7681.
In step 7681, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value ("900" corresponding to 900 times of time-saving activation) in the time-saving activation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 7682.

The processing of step 7682 is almost the same as the processing of step 5502 in the RAM clear processing in other application example 8, so a description thereof will be omitted here.
In step 7683, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the fluctuation counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 7684.

In step 7684, the main CPU 101 turns on the pre-winning flag after RAM clear execution. If the pre-winning flag after RAM non-clear execution is on, the main CPU 101 turns off the flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 7685.
In step 7685, the main CPU 101 turns on the pre-win flag after RAM clearing and stores a pre-win state command after RAM clearing, indicating that the state has become pre-win state after RAM clearing, in the performance transmission data storage area. This notifies the sub-control board 300 that the state has become pre-win state after RAM clearing. Then, the RAM clear processing ends.

Next, the RAM clear non-execution power recovery processing that is executed when power is restored without RAM clearing (i.e., when power is turned on without the RAM clear switch being pressed) will be described with reference to the flowchart of Figure 142.
In step 7690, the main CPU 101 turns on the pre-winning flag after RAM clearing is not executed. If the pre-winning flag after RAM clearing is on, the main CPU 101 turns off the flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 7691.
In step 7691, the main CPU 101 turns on the RAM clear non-execution pre-winning flag and stores a RAM clear non-execution pre-winning state command, indicating that the RAM clear non-execution pre-winning state has been entered, in the performance transmission data storage area. This notifies the sub-control board 300 that the RAM clear non-execution pre-winning state has been entered. Then, the RAM clear non-execution power recovery processing ends.

(Outline of the production)
Next, with regard to the effects executed in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, we will mainly explain the variable effects, the number display effects executed during the high-probability time-shortening game state and indicating the remaining number of times the special pattern will be displayed to change until the game state ends (i.e., the remaining number of time-shortening games and the number of high-probability games), the effects executed before and after the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set, the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effects that indicate various information related to the setting of the first low-probability time-shortening game state, and the warning effects that issue specified warnings to the player.
(Summary of the variable effects)
In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, similar to the above-mentioned embodiment, a variable presentation is executed on the display unit 21a of the presentation display device 21 to announce the result of a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port 15 or the result of a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning port 16 (see Figures 143 to 146).

Specifically, in the variable presentation, a variable display of the presentation pattern 50 corresponding to the winning/losing lottery for the first start winning slot 15 or the second start winning slot 16, whichever slot the gaming ball will mainly enter during the set gaming state, is performed in the center of the display unit 21a of the presentation display device 21 (see Figures 143 to 146), and a variable display of the presentation pattern 50 corresponding to the winning/losing lottery for the slot where the gaming ball will not enter is not performed. Note that, although not specifically shown, for the slot where the gaming ball will not enter, a variable display is performed in a predetermined display location on the display unit 21a (for example, the upper left corner or the upper right corner of the display unit 21a) using a presentation pattern 50 that is extremely smaller in size (a size that is extremely difficult for the player to see) than the presentation pattern 50 that is variable displayed in the center of the display unit 21a.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, during the normal game state, an instruction is given to shoot a game ball toward the first game area 12a, and so long as this instruction is followed, the game ball will enter the first start winning hole 15. That is, during the normal game state, the game ball is designed to mainly enter the first start winning hole 15. Therefore, during the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15, a variable display of the effect pattern 50 corresponding to the winning/losing lottery based on that ball is performed in the center of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, but even if a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, a variable display of the effect pattern 50 corresponding to the winning/losing lottery based on that ball is not performed in the center of the display unit 21a, and a variable display of an extremely small effect pattern 50 that is difficult for the player to see is performed in the upper right corner of the display unit 21a.
Furthermore, during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state, or the high-probability time-shortening game state, an instruction is given to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b, and as long as this instruction is followed, the game ball will enter the second start winning hole 16 (normal second start winning hole 161, specific second start winning hole 162). In other words, during these game states, the game ball will mainly enter the second start winning hole 16. Therefore, during these game states, when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16, a changing display of the performance pattern 50 corresponding to the winning/losing lottery based on that ball entering is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, but even when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15, a changing display of the performance pattern 50 corresponding to the winning/losing lottery based on that ball entering is not displayed in the center of the display unit 21a, but rather a changing display of an extremely small performance pattern 50 that is difficult for the player to see is displayed in the upper left corner of the display unit 21a.

In addition, the form of the performance pattern 50 that is displayed in a variable manner in the center of the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 differs depending on the game state, and in the variable performance, the variable display is performed using the performance pattern 50 of a form that corresponds to the game state currently being set.
Specifically, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, for example, the effect pattern 50 that is displayed in a variable manner during the normal game state is an upright Gothic number pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a normal effect pattern) (see Figures 145(a), 146(a) etc.), the effect pattern 50 that is displayed in a variable manner during the high probability time-saving game state is an upright Mincho number pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a high probability time-saving effect pattern) (see Figures 143(c) to (h) etc.), and the effect pattern 50 that is displayed in a variable manner during the first low probability time-saving game state is an italic Gothic number pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a first low probability time-saving effect pattern) (see Figures 145(e), (g) to (i), Figures 146(d), (f) to (g) etc.). Also, although not specifically shown, the effect pattern 50 that changes and is displayed during the second low-probability time-saving game state is a number pattern with a different design from the normal effect pattern, the high-probability time-saving effect pattern, and the first low-probability time-saving effect pattern.
When the game state is switched, the appearance of the effect pattern 50 displayed in the center of the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 is also switched accordingly.
The appearance of the effect symbols 50 is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to provide effect symbols 50 with different display colors, effect symbols 50 with different characters, etc. for each game state. Also, it is possible to have a variable display using effect symbols 50 of different appearances in all game states, or to have a variable display using effect symbols 50 of the same appearance in some game states.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, all of the performance patterns 50 have numerical patterns of "1" to "8", and the variable display of the performance patterns 50 is such that the numerical patterns of "1" to "8" are displayed in a cyclical manner in ascending order (i.e., "1" → "2" → ... → "7" → "8" → "1" → "2" → ...).
If a jackpot is won, the first, second and third stop patterns are all stopped and displayed as the same number pattern (for example, 222, 555, etc.), thereby announcing the jackpot, and if a loss is won, at least one of the first, second and third stop patterns is stopped and displayed as a different number pattern (for example, 312, 558, 282, etc.), thereby announcing the loss.
Furthermore, in the event of a jackpot win, when the jackpot symbols X2 and X5 are determined, any of the numerical symbols "1" through "8" may be displayed as a static display, but when the jackpot symbols X1, X3, X4, and X6 are determined, any numerical symbol except "7" may be displayed as a static display. In other words, the numerical symbol "7" (777) may be displayed as a static display when the jackpot symbols X2 and X5 are determined, but it will not be displayed as a static display when the jackpot symbols X1, X3, X4, and X6 are determined. Here, when the jackpot symbols X2 and X5 are determined, 10 rounds of play are executed during the special game based on that determination, and when the jackpot symbols X1, X3, X4, and X6 are determined, 5 rounds of play are executed during the special game based on that determination (see FIG. 132(a)). Therefore, if the first, second and third stopping patterns are all displayed as the number "7" (if they are displayed as 777), not only will you be notified that you have won the jackpot, but that a special game will be played, with 10 rounds of play.

In addition, when a jackpot is won, any of the number symbols "1" to "8" may be displayed when the jackpot symbols X1, X2, X4, or X5 are determined (when a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination has ended), but when the jackpot symbols X3 or X6 are determined (when a second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination has ended), only the even-numbered number symbols ("2,""4,""6," and "8") may be displayed. In other words, with this setting, odd-numbered number symbols ("1,""3,""5," and "7") may be displayed when the jackpot symbols X1, X2, X4, or X5 are determined, but they will not be displayed when the jackpot symbols X3 or X6 are determined. Therefore, if the first, second and third stopping symbols are all displayed as odd numbers (111, 333, 555, 777), not only will you be notified that you have won the jackpot, but that a high-probability time-saving game state will be set after the special game ends.
Furthermore, the effect pattern 50 that is stopped and displayed is not limited to a number pattern, and a special pattern (for example, a pseudo consecutive pattern that indicates that a pseudo consecutive effect will be executed, a look-ahead pattern that indicates that a look-ahead effect will be executed, etc.) that indicates that a predetermined effect (for example, a pseudo consecutive effect described below, or a look-ahead effect that is executed for a predetermined hold and can be executed before a variable effect based on the hold) will be executed when stopped and displayed may be provided. Also, a first low-probability time-saving pattern that indicates that a first low-probability time-saving game state will be set when stopped and displayed may be provided.

The modes of the variation effects include a normal miss variation pattern in which the result of the win/loss lottery is a miss after the first and second stop symbols are stopped and displayed as different symbols (i.e., without a reach display being performed), a reach variation pattern with development in which a reach development effect is performed in which the first and second stop symbols are stopped and displayed as the same symbol, and then a reach development effect is executed to display a predetermined development effect image (not particularly shown), and then the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot or a miss, and a reach variation without development in which the result of the win/loss lottery is notified as a jackpot or a miss after a reach display is performed, without a reach development effect being performed. There are provided a special big win variation pattern which notifies that the result of the win/loss lottery is a big win by the first, second and third stopping patterns all stopping and displaying the same pattern at the same time without any pattern or reach display; a first special variation pattern which notifies that the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss and then notifies that a first low-probability time-shortened game state will be set; a second special variation pattern which notifies that the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss and then notifies that the second low-probability time-shortened game state or the high-probability time-shortened game state will end; and a third special variation pattern which notifies that the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss and then notifies that the first low-probability time-shortened game state will end.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the determined variation pattern command is "00H", "01H", "04H", "11H", or "21H", a variation presentation is executed by the normal miss variation pattern, when the determined variation pattern command is "02H", "12H", "A2H", "A4H", or "B2H", a variation presentation is executed by the no-development reach variation pattern, when the determined variation pattern command is "03H", "13H", "A3H", "A6H", or "B3H", a variation presentation is executed by the development reach variation pattern, when the determined variation pattern command is "A5H", "B4H", "C1H", or "C2H", a variation presentation is executed by the special jackpot variation pattern, when the determined variation pattern command is "05H", a variation presentation is executed by the first special variation pattern, when the determined variation pattern command is "14H", a variation presentation is executed by the second special variation pattern, and when the determined variation pattern command is "22H", a variation presentation is executed by the third special variation pattern.

Each of the above patterns has a plurality of modes.
For example, each of the above-mentioned patterns includes a mode in which a predetermined preview image is displayed in conjunction with the changing display of the performance pattern 50 (a mode in which a preview performance is executed), a mode in which a predetermined suggestion or notification is given when the operation button 9b is pressed (a mode in which a button operation performance is executed), and a mode in which the reel performance device operates in a predetermined mode (a mode in which a reel operation performance is executed).
Furthermore, for example, the reach fluctuation pattern with development and the reach fluctuation pattern without development may have a display in which all the performance symbols 50 temporarily stop in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, the first and second stop symbols temporarily stop with numbers that are one number apart, and the third stop symbol temporarily stops with a temporary stop symbol that suggests a temporary stop), and then the display in this mode is resumed a predetermined number of times, after which a reach display is displayed (a mode in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed), etc.
Furthermore, for example, the reach variation pattern with development includes a mode in which, after executing a reach development effect in which a predetermined development effect image is displayed, it switches to a reach development effect in which a high expectation development effect image is displayed, which suggests that the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher than that of the predetermined development effect image (a mode in which a chance-up effect is executed).
In addition, the above-mentioned preview image, the operation mode of the accessory effect device, the number of times the temporary stop is executed, the high expectation development effect image, etc. are provided in a plurality of types with different expectations of winning the jackpot.
Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned effects, in addition to displaying images and outputting sounds, the effect lighting device 23 (lamp) may be made to emit light in a predetermined lighting pattern or color.

Here, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, the normal miss fluctuation pattern (i.e., the pattern of fluctuation presentation executed when the miss pattern Z1 is determined and the fluctuation pattern command of "00H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of 13 seconds fluctuation is determined) executed when the game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 during the normal game state excluding the fluctuation just before the first low probability time reduction includes a mode PT1 (see Figure 151) in which the second stop pattern is displayed stopped with a reach prompting presentation that suggests whether or not a reach display will be made, but the reach display is not made (see Figure 151), and a mode PT2 (see Figure 151) in which the second stop pattern is displayed stopped with the reach prompting presentation, but the reach display is not made, and the third stop pattern is displayed stopped, thereby temporarily announcing a miss, and then the fact that it is a miss is overturned and a development prompting presentation that suggests whether or not a reach display and a reach development presentation will be made is executed.
In addition, the reach fluctuation patterns with development executed in the above cases (i.e., the fluctuation presentation pattern executed when the losing symbol Z1 is determined and the fluctuation pattern command of "03H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds is determined, the fluctuation presentation pattern executed when the jackpot symbol X1 or X3 is determined and the fluctuation pattern command of "A3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds is determined, and the fluctuation presentation pattern executed when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined and the fluctuation pattern command of "A6H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds is determined) have the above-mentioned reach provocation presentation and development provocation presentation executed, and after these presentations are executed, a mode PT3 (see Figures 152 to 155) in which a special reach display and a special development presentation are executed is provided.
The above aspects PT1, PT2 and PT3 will be described in more detail later.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the no-development reach variation pattern executed in the above-mentioned cases (i.e., the variation presentation pattern executed when a losing symbol Z1 is determined and a variation pattern command of "02H" associated with a variation pattern of 20 seconds is determined, and the variation presentation pattern executed when a jackpot symbol X1 or X3 is determined and a variation pattern command of "A2H" associated with a variation pattern of 20 seconds is determined) is provided with a mode PT4 (see Figures 150 (a) to (c)) in which the second stop symbol is displayed in a stopped state accompanied by a reach-inducing presentation, and a reach display is performed.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, although not shown, a presentation mode determination table is provided in the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300, which stores the above-mentioned pattern modes in association with each of the variation pattern commands that can be determined. When the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 receives a variation pattern command at the start of variation, it acquires a predetermined presentation random number and determines the variation presentation mode based on the acquired presentation random number, the received variation pattern command, and the above-mentioned presentation mode determination table.
Specifically, although not particularly shown, the effect mode determination table stores a plurality of modes including the above-mentioned mode PT1 and mode PT2 as modes of the normal miss variation pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned variation pattern command of "00H." Then, when the sub-CPU 301 receives the above-mentioned variation pattern command of "00H," it determines one of the plurality of modes of the normal miss variation pattern based on the effect mode determination table.
Furthermore, although not particularly shown, the presentation mode determination table stores a plurality of modes including the above-mentioned mode PT4 as modes of the no-development reach variation pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned variation pattern command of "02H" or "A2H". Then, when the sub-CPU 301 receives the above-mentioned variation pattern command of "02H" or "A2H", it determines one of the plurality of modes of the no-development reach variation pattern based on the presentation mode determination table.
Furthermore, although not particularly shown, the presentation mode determination table stores a plurality of modes including the above-mentioned mode PT3 as modes of the reach variation pattern with development corresponding to the above-mentioned variation pattern command of "03H", "A3H", or "A6H". Then, when the sub-CPU 301 receives the above-mentioned variation pattern command of "03H", "A3H", or "A6H", it determines one of the plurality of modes of the reach variation pattern with development based on the presentation mode determination table.
Then, the variable performance is executed according to this determined mode.

Also, although not specifically shown, during the second low-probability time-shortened game state or the high-probability time-shortened game state, it is set so that there are more types of variable presentations that can be executed (types of presentations that can be executed during variable presentations) when the game ball enters the second start winning port 16 (the start winning port that mainly the game ball enters) than when the game ball enters the first start winning port 15 (the start winning port that the ball does not enter when shooting according to instructions). In other words, it is set so that there are more executable presentations when the game ball enters the second start winning port 16 than when the game ball enters the first start winning port 15.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, during the above-mentioned game state, when the game ball enters the second start winning port 16, the number of variable pattern commands that can be determined is increased compared to when the game ball enters the first start winning port 15, so that more effects can be executed, but the method of varying the number of effects that can be executed is not limited to this.
For example, by increasing the number of types of effects associated with the variation pattern commands that can be determined when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 compared to the number of types of effects associated with the variation pattern commands that can be determined when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15, it is possible to set it so that there are more effects that can be executed when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 than when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15.
In addition, not only during the second low-probability time-shortening game state and the high-probability time-shortening game state, but also during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the system may be set so that more effects can be executed when the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 than when the game ball enters the first start winning hole 15.

(Overview of background image display)
In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, a background image corresponding to each game state is provided, and during each game state, the corresponding background image is displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21.
Specifically, for example, a normal background image corresponding to the normal game state (see Figures 145(a), 146(a) to (c), etc.), a high-probability time-shortening background image corresponding to the high-probability time-shortening game state (see Figures 143(a) to (i)), etc.), a first low-probability time-shortening background image corresponding to the first low-probability time-shortening game state (see Figures 145(e) to (i), 146(d) to (g), etc.), and a second low-probability time-shortening background image (not particularly shown) corresponding to the second low-probability time-shortening game state are provided, and during the normal game state the normal background image is displayed on the display unit 21a, during the high-probability time-shortening game state the high-probability time-shortening background image is displayed on the display unit 21a, during the first low-probability time-shortening game state the first low-probability time-shortening background image is displayed on the display unit 21a, and during the second low-probability time-shortening game state the second low-probability time-shortening background image is displayed on the display unit 21a. When the game state is changed, the displayed background image is also changed accordingly.

(Overview of the number of times display effect)
In a pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, during a high-probability time-saving game state, a number display effect is executed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, which indicates the remaining number of times the special pattern will change until the high-probability time-saving game state ends (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving and high-probability times, hereinafter also referred to as the remaining number of times).
Here, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, as the number of times display effect, a first number of times display effect is executed which continuously indicates the remaining number of times from the setting of the high probability time-shortened game state until the end of the high probability time-shortened game state, and a second number of times display effect which can indicate the remaining number of times when the remaining number of times is a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) or less.

(Outline of the first number display effect)
When the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, X2, X4 or X5 ends and a high-probability time-shortening game state is set, the display unit 21a displays a high-probability time-shortening background image, a high-probability time-shortening setting notification that a high-probability time-shortening game state has been set (for example, a high-probability time-shortening setting notification image saying "Super time start!" is displayed), and an operation notification prompting the player to perform an operation to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (for example, an operation notification image saying "Right hit →→→") is displayed (see Figure 143 (a)), and the right-hit notification lamp HL lights up.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, the above-mentioned operation notification image in the operation notification is set to have a higher display priority than the above-mentioned high-probability time-shortening setting notification image in the high-probability time-shortening setting notification, and the operation notification image is displayed superimposed on a part of the high-probability time-shortening setting notification image in front of the high-probability time-shortening setting notification image (i.e., a part of the high-probability time-shortening setting notification image is hidden by the operation notification image).
Also, although not specifically shown, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, the operation notification ends when a predetermined operation notification time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation notification began (the operation notification image of "hit right →→→" is erased).
Furthermore, if the above-mentioned operation notification is not being made during the high probability time-saving game state and a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15, the operation notification is executed again. After the start of the second operation notification, when a predetermined second operation notification time (for example, 3 seconds) that is shorter than the above-mentioned operation notification time has elapsed, the second operation notification is terminated.
In addition, operation notifications and re-operation notifications may be made not only by displaying an operation notification image, but also by outputting a predetermined sound (for example, outputting a sound such as ``Please hit to the right'') to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b.

Then, the first number display effect is started in conjunction with the execution of the above-mentioned display, notification, etc.
Specifically, in the lower left corner of the display unit 21a, a first remaining number suggestion image "100" is displayed, indicating the initial value of the remaining number of times (i.e., the number of times the special symbol changes from when the high-probability time-shortened game state is set until it ends, in other words, the number of high-probability times and the number of time-shortened times in the high-probability time-shortened game state) of 100 (see FIG. 143(a)). Thereafter, each time the special symbol changing display is performed, at the time the changing display starts, the first remaining number suggestion image being displayed is updated to correspond to the remaining number of times at that time (see FIGS. 143(b) to (i), etc.).
Furthermore, the first remaining number suggestion image displayed in the first number display effect is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to see (for example, smaller in size than the effect pattern 50), and furthermore, as described above, it is displayed in the lower left corner of the display unit 21a, so the suggestion of the remaining number of times by the first number display effect is difficult for the player to focus on (see) while playing.

Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the sum of the number of times the first special symbol changes and the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches 100, which is the number of times of time reduction and high probability, the high probability game state is set to end. In other words, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the remaining number of times is updated.
As described above, during the high probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b, and as long as this instruction is followed, the game ball will enter the second start winning port 16, so the remaining number of plays is updated mainly based on the changing display of the second special chart.However, even if the player shoots the game ball toward the first game area 12a due to an operating error or the like and the game ball enters the first start winning port 15, the remaining number of plays will also be updated based on the changing display of the first special chart executed by the ball entering.
As mentioned above, during the high probability time-saving game state, the game ball mainly enters the second start winning port 16, so when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16, the changing display of the performance pattern 50 based on the ball entering is executed in the center of the display unit 21a, but even if a game ball enters the first start winning port 15, the changing display of the performance pattern 50 based on the ball entering is not executed in the center of the display unit 21a.
Therefore, during the high probability time-saving game state, when the second special symbol is displayed, the display of the effect symbol 50 is executed in the center of the display unit 21a, and the first remaining number suggestion image is updated (see Fig. 143(b)-(c), Fig. 143(e), Fig. 143(i) etc.). On the other hand, when the first special symbol is displayed, the display of the effect symbol 50 is not executed in the center of the display unit 21a, but the first remaining number suggestion image is updated (see Fig. 143(d) etc.).

(Specific example of first number display effect)
For example, suppose a high probability time-saving game state is set, the first remaining number suggestion image "100" is displayed indicating the initial remaining number of times of 100, and then the first variable display is executed as the variable display of the second special chart.
In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the first variable display, begins, the variable display of the performance symbol 50 corresponding to the second special symbol is executed in the center of the display unit 21a (see FIG. 143(b)). Then, since the variable display of the second special symbol results in the remaining number of times being 99, the first remaining number suggestion image "100" being displayed is updated to "099", which indicates the remaining number of times at that time, 99 (see FIG. 143(b)). By updating the display of the first remaining number suggestion image in this way, it is possible to suggest that the remaining number of times is counted down by one each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed.

Also, for example, after the first variable display described above is completed, the variable display of the first special chart is executed as the second variable display.
In this case, even if the second variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 50 is not executed in the center of the display unit 21a (see Figures 143(c) to (d)). However, since the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the remaining number of times becomes 98, and the first remaining number suggestion image "099" being displayed is updated to "098" indicating the remaining number of times at that time, 98 (see Figure 143(d)). In other words, after the first variable display is completed, the effect symbol 50 in the center of the display unit 21a remains in a stopped display state, and only the first remaining number suggestion image is updated (see Figures 143(c) to (d)).

(Outline of the second number display effect)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the remaining number of times is a predetermined number (5 times) or less in the high-probability time-shortened game state, it is possible to perform the second number of times display effect. In other words, when the high-probability time-shortened game state is in the high-probability time-shortened game state, the second number of times display effect can be performed in conjunction with the execution of the 95th or subsequent variable display. Therefore, after the start of the 95th variable display, the second number of times display effect can be performed in parallel with the first number of times display effect that has already started.
In the second number display effect, each time the special pattern changing display is performed, at the time the changing display begins, a second remaining number indication image indicating the remaining number of times at that time is displayed superimposed on the performance pattern 50 in the center of the display unit 21a for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) (see Figures 143 (e) to (i), etc.).
The second remaining number indication image displayed in the second number display effect is in a display format that is easy for the player to see (for example, larger than the effect symbol 50), and furthermore, since it is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a as described above, the indication of the remaining number of times by the second number display effect is easily noticed (seen) by the player during play. This makes it possible to make a very impressive appeal to the player about the number of times remaining until the high probability time-saving game state ends.

Here, as described above, the remaining number of times is updated when either the first special chart variable display or the second special chart variable display is executed, but even if a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 during a high probability time-saving game state and the first special chart variable display is executed, the variable display of the performance pattern 50 is not performed and the performance pattern 50 in the center of the display section 21a remains displayed as stopped.
Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the performance symbol 50 remains stopped in the center of the display section 21a, but only the second remaining number indication image is displayed, which gives the player a sense of discomfort in terms of the presentation.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, after determining whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol has been executed, the second remaining number suggestion image is displayed by the second number display effect only when the variable display of the second special symbol has been executed, and when the variable display of the first special symbol has been executed, the second remaining number suggestion image is not displayed by the second number display effect. As a result, only when the variable display of the effect symbol 50 has been executed, the second remaining number suggestion image is displayed by the second number display effect accordingly, which can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the presentation.

(Specific example of second number display effect)
(Specific Example 1)
For example, suppose that during a high probability time-saving game state, the second special symbol variable display is executed as the 95th variable display, and after the 95th variable display is completed, the second special symbol variable display is executed as the 96th variable display, and furthermore, after the 96th variable display is completed, the second special symbol variable display is executed as the 97th variable display.
In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the 95th variable display, begins, the variable display of the performance symbol 50 corresponding to the second special symbol is executed in the center of the display unit 21a (see FIG. 143(e)). Then, since the variable display of the second special symbol results in the remaining number of times being 5, the first remaining number suggestion image is updated to "005" indicating the remaining number of times at that time, which is 5, and a second remaining number suggestion image (for example, a number image "5") indicating the remaining number of times, which is 5, is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a for a predetermined time (see FIG. 143(e)). After that, when the variable time has elapsed, the 95th variable display ends and the performance symbol 50 is displayed stationary (see FIG. 143(f)).
Similarly to the 95th variable display, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the 96th variable display, begins, the variable display of the performance symbol 50 corresponding to the second special symbol is executed in the center of the display unit 21a (see FIG. 143(g)). Then, since the variable display of the second special symbol results in the number of remaining times being four, the first remaining number suggestion image is updated to "004" indicating the remaining number of times at that time, which is four, and a second remaining number suggestion image (for example, a number image "4") indicating the remaining number of times being four is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a for a predetermined time (see FIG. 143(g)). After that, when the variable time has elapsed, the 96th variable display ends and the performance symbol 50 is displayed stationary (see FIG. 143(h)).
Furthermore, similar to the 95th and 96th change displays, when the change display of the second special chart, which is the 97th change display, begins, the change display of the performance pattern 50 in the center of the display unit 21a, the update display of the first remaining number suggestion image to "003" (indicating the remaining number of times at that time, 3), and the second remaining number suggestion image (for example, a number image "3") indicating the remaining number of times 3 are displayed in the center of the display unit 21a for a predetermined period of time (see Figure 143 (i)).

(Specific Example 2)
For example, suppose that the second special symbol variable display is executed as the 95th variable display during a high probability time-saving game state, but after the 95th variable display is completed, the first special symbol variable display is executed as the 96th variable display, and furthermore, after the 96th variable display is completed, the second special symbol variable display is executed as the 97th variable display.
In this case, the various displays in the 95th variable display will be the same as those in the above-mentioned specific example 1 (see Figure 144 (a)).
After that, the 96th variable display, the first special symbol variable display, begins, but even when this variable display begins, the variable display of the performance pattern 50 is not executed in the center of the display unit 21a, and the performance pattern 50 remains statically displayed in the manner when the 95th variable display ended (see Figures 144(b) to (d)). However, since the remaining number of times becomes four when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the first remaining number suggestion image is updated to "004", which indicates the remaining number of times at that time, that is, four, but the second remaining number suggestion image, which indicates the remaining number of times of four due to the second number display effect, is not displayed (see Figures 144(c) to (d)). In other words, when the 95th variable display ends and the performance pattern 50 in the center of the display unit 21a remains statically displayed, the second remaining number suggestion image is not displayed, and only the first remaining number suggestion image is updated.
After that, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the 97th variable display, begins, the variable display of the performance symbol 50 corresponding to the second special symbol is executed in the center of the display unit 21a (see FIG. 144(e)). Then, since the variable display of the second special symbol means that the remaining number of times becomes 3, the first remaining number of times suggestion image is updated to "003" indicating the remaining number of times at that time, which is 3, and the second remaining number of times suggestion image indicating the remaining number of times, which is 3, is displayed for a predetermined time in the center of the display unit 21a (see FIG. 143(e)).

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, only when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed, is executed during the high probability time-shortened game state, the variable display of the performance symbol 50 in the center of the display unit 21a is executed. Then, only when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the variable display of the performance symbol 50 is executed, the second remaining number suggestion image is displayed by the second number display effect, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the variable display of the performance symbol 50 is not executed, the second remaining number suggestion image is not displayed by the second number display effect.
This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the presentation, such as when the second remaining number suggestion image is displayed in the center of the display section 21a even though the display of the changing presentation pattern 50 is not being executed.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, during a high probability time-saving game state, the first remaining number indication image is updated and displayed regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (when the variable display of the performance pattern 50 is executed).
This makes it possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the number of remaining times until the high probability time-shortening game state ends cannot be grasped at all, even when the first special chart is displayed in a variable manner and the second remaining number suggestion image is not displayed.

(Outline of effects when the first time-saving gaming state is set)
Next, we will explain the outline of the presentation when the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the special pattern is displayed for the 900th time without winning a jackpot, and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set.

(1) When the second low-probability time-shortening game state is set after the end of a special game, and then the 900th variable display by the first special symbol ends without a jackpot being won and the stopped display time of the first special symbol has elapsed, thereby setting the first low-probability time-shortening game state; or when the high-probability time-shortening game state set after the end of a special game ends without a jackpot being won, and then the normal game state is set after the end of the high-probability time-shortening game state, and then the 900th variable display by the first special symbol ends without a jackpot being won and the stopped display time of the first special symbol has elapsed, thereby setting the first low-probability time-shortening game state. As described above, the 900th variable display by the first special symbol is the variable immediately before the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set, and the normal game state is set from the start of the variable display until the stopped display time of the first special symbol has elapsed, and when the stopped display time has elapsed, the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set (switched to the first low-probability time-shortening game state).
At the start of the 900th variable display of the first special symbol, the normal background image is displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 (see Fig. 145(a) and (b)). Then, the variable display starts with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol.
Here, in the case of (1), since the special game has ended, the above-mentioned 900th variation display determines the variation pattern (variation pattern command) by referring to Table B (see FIG. 133(b)). If the result of the above-mentioned 900th winning/losing lottery is a loss, the variation pattern command "05H" is determined (see FIG. 133(a)), and a variation effect is executed by the first special variation pattern. Therefore, in this variation effect, the variation display of the normal effect pattern (effect pattern 50) is started superimposed on the normal background image, and after the result of the winning/losing lottery is notified by stopping at least one of the first, second, and third stop patterns with a different pattern, a first low-probability time-saving setting notification (for example, a first low-probability time-saving setting notification image saying "Lucky time has begun!") is displayed to notify that a first low-probability time-saving game state has been set (see FIGS. 145(b)-(d)). This allows the player to recognize that the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set through the change presentation that is executed in conjunction with the 900th change display described above.

When the 900th variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the stopped display time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set as described above. At this time, a state transition command indicating that the first low-probability time-shortened game state has been set is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and based on receiving the state transition command, the sub-CPU 301 determines that the first low-probability time-shortened game state has been set and turns on the right-hit notification lamp HL.

Then, after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above, when the display of the second special chart changes (changing effect) based on the game ball that has entered the second starting winning port 16 (the starting winning port into which the game ball mainly enters during the first low-probability time-saving game state) begins or when the machine enters a waiting state for customers, various effects based on the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state are executed.
Specifically, the displayed normal background image is switched to a first low-probability time-saving background image, and the displayed normal effect symbol is switched to a first low-probability time-saving effect symbol. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, even during the first low-probability time-saving game state, a first number display effect and a second number display effect are executed to indicate the number of times remaining until the first low-probability time-saving game state ends, and a first remaining number indication image is displayed indicating the initial value of the remaining number of times, 1,200, when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. Furthermore, an operation notification (display of an operation notification image of "right hit →→→") is issued to prompt the player to perform an operation to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (see FIG. 145(e)).
The sub-CPU 301 receives a state transition command indicating that the first low-probability time-shortened game state has been set, and then receives a change pattern command determined at the start of the change in the second special chart based on the game ball that has entered the second start winning port 16, or receives a customer waiting command, thereby controlling the execution of various presentations based on the setting of the above-mentioned first low-probability time-shortened game state.
In addition, the control to execute various effects based on the setting of the above-mentioned first low-probability time-saving game state may be performed by starting the display of the change in the first special chart based on the game ball that has entered the first start winning port 15 (by receiving a change pattern command determined at the time the change in the first special chart based on the game ball that has entered the first start winning port 15 begins).

In addition, the above-mentioned operation notification image in the operation notification that prompts the player to perform the operation of shooting the game ball toward the second game area 12b is set to have a higher display priority than the performance pattern 50, and the operation notification image is displayed superimposed on a part of the performance pattern 50 in front of the performance pattern 50 (i.e., a part of the performance pattern 50 is hidden by the operation notification image) (see Figure 145 (e)).
Also, although not specifically shown, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, similar to the high probability time-saving game state, the above-mentioned operation notification ends when a predetermined operation notification time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation notification began (the operation notification image of "right hit →→→" is erased).
Furthermore, similarly to the high-probability time-shortened game state, if the above-mentioned operation notification is not made during the first low-probability time-shortened game state and a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15, the above-mentioned operation notification is executed again. Then, after the start of the second operation notification, when a predetermined second operation notification time (for example, 3 seconds) that is shorter than the above-mentioned operation notification time has elapsed, the second operation notification is terminated.

(Outline of subsequent performance in case of (1))
After the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first remaining number indication image is updated each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed (see FIG. 145(f)-(g)). Then, when the variable display starts for the 1200th time without winning a jackpot and the count value of the time-saving number counter becomes 0, the normal game state is set (switched to the normal game state).
Although not shown in the figure, at the start of the 1200th variable display, the first low-probability time-saving background image is displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21. Then, the variable display starts in conjunction with the start of the variable display.
Here, in the case of (1), since the special game has ended, the above-mentioned 1200th variation display determines the variation pattern (variation pattern command) by referring to Table F (see FIG. 133(b)). If the result of the above-mentioned 1200th winning/losing lottery is a loss, the "22H" variation pattern command is determined (see FIG. 133(a)), and a variation effect is executed by the third special variation pattern. Therefore, in this variation effect, the variation display of the normal effect pattern (effect pattern 50) is started superimposed on the normal background image, and after the result of the winning/losing lottery is notified by stopping at least one of the first, second, and third stopping patterns with a different pattern, a first low-probability time-saving end notification (for example, a first low-probability time-saving end notification image saying "Lucky Time Ends") is displayed to notify the end of the first low-probability time-saving game state (see FIGS. 145(h)-(i)). This allows the player to recognize the end of the first low-probability time-saving game state through the change presentation that is executed in conjunction with the 1200th change display described above.

Furthermore, when the 1200th variable display begins and the count value of the time-saving counter reaches 0, the first low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, as described above. At this time, a state transition command indicating that the normal game state has been set is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving this state transition command, recognizes that the normal game state has been set and turns off the right-hit notification lamp HL.

Then, the normal game state is set, and after the 1200th variable display has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the variable display (variable presentation) of the first special chart based on the game ball that has entered the first start winning port 15 (the start winning port into which game balls mainly enter during the normal game state) begins, or when the machine enters a customer waiting state, various presentations based on the setting of the normal game state are executed.
Specifically, the first low-probability time-saving background image that was displayed is switched to a normal background image, the first low-probability time-saving effect symbol that was displayed is switched to a normal effect symbol, and the first remaining number suggestion image is erased. Furthermore, an operation notification (display of an operation notification image of "←←← left hit") is given to prompt the player to perform an operation to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (see FIG. 145(j)).
The sub-CPU 301 receives a state transition command indicating that the normal game state has been set, and then receives a change pattern command determined at the start of the change of the first special chart based on the game ball that has entered the first start winning port 15, or receives a customer waiting command, thereby controlling the execution of various presentations based on the setting of the above-mentioned normal game state.
In addition, the control to execute various effects based on the settings of the normal game state described above may be performed by starting the display of the change in the second special chart based on the game ball that has entered the second start winning port 16 (by receiving a change pattern command determined at the time the change in the second special chart based on the game ball that has entered the second start winning port 16 begins).

In addition, the above-mentioned operation notification image in the operation notification that prompts the player to perform an operation to launch a game ball toward the first game area 12a is set to have a higher display priority than the effect pattern 50, and the operation notification image is displayed in front of the effect pattern 50, superimposed on a portion of the effect pattern 50 (i.e., a portion of the effect pattern 50 is hidden by the operation notification image) (see Figure 145 (j)).

(2) When the normal game state is set after the RAM is cleared, the 900th variable display of the first special symbol ends without a jackpot being won, and the stopped display time of the first special symbol has elapsed, thereby setting the first low-probability time-saving game state. In this case, as in (1), at the start of the 900th variable display of the first special symbol, the normal background image is displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 (see Figures 146(a) and (b)). Then, the variable display starts with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol.
Here, in the case of (2), since the RAM has been cleared, in the above-mentioned 900th variation display, the variation pattern (variation pattern command) is determined by referring to Table A, just as when the results of the 1st to 899th winning/losing lotteries during the normal gaming state are losses (see FIG. 133(b)). Then, when the result of the above-mentioned 900th winning/losing lottery is a loss, a variation pattern command of "00H", "01H", "02H" or "03H" is determined (see FIG. 133(a)), so that the variation presentation is executed by the normal loss variation pattern, the reach variation pattern without development or the reach variation pattern with development, just as when the results of the 1st to 899th winning/losing lotteries during the normal gaming state are losses. Therefore, in this variation effect, the normal variation display (variation display of the variation pattern 50) begins superimposed on the normal background image. In the normal miss variation pattern, no reach display is performed. In the reach variation pattern without development, the reach display is displayed and then no reach development display is performed. In the reach variation pattern with development, the reach display is displayed and then the reach development display is performed. When at least one of the first, second, and third stop patterns stops with a different pattern, the result of the win/loss lottery is notified that the lottery result is a loss (see Figures 146(b)-(c)). And, because this variation effect is not due to the first special variation pattern, unlike in case (1), the first low-probability time-saving setting notification is not performed after the notification that the lottery result is a loss. In other words, the variation effect executed in conjunction with the above-mentioned 900th variation display does not notify the user that the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set.

After that, as in the case of (1), when the 900th variable display by the first special chart ends and the stop display time of the first special chart elapses, the first low probability time-saving game state is set, the right-hit notification lamp HL lights up based on the reception of a state transition command from the main control board 100.
Furthermore, after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, when the display of the second special chart (variation effect) based on the game ball that has entered the second starting winning port 16 (the starting winning port into which the game ball mainly enters during the first low-probability time-saving game state) begins or the game enters a waiting state for customers, various effects based on the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state (switching to the first low-probability time-saving background image, switching to the first low-probability time-saving effect pattern, displaying the first remaining number indication image, and operation notification urging the player to perform an operation to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b) are executed (see Figure 146 (d)).
As described above, in the case of (2), since it is not possible to determine the variation pattern command of "05H" in which the variation effect by the first special variation pattern is executed, unlike the case of (1), the first low-probability time-saving setting notification is not made in the variation effect executed in conjunction with the above-mentioned 900th variation display. Then, when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set and the variation display of the second special symbol starts or the customer waiting state is entered, an operation notification is suddenly made to switch to the first low-probability time-saving background image, switch to the first low-probability time-saving effect symbol, display the first remaining number suggestion image, and to perform an operation to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b.

In the case of (2), although the first low-probability time-saving setting notification is not performed in the variable effect executed in conjunction with the 900th variable display described above, the first low-probability time-saving setting notification may be performed as one of various effects based on the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state, which is executed, for example, when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set and the variable display of the second special symbol begins or when the game enters a waiting state. In other words, the first low-probability time-saving setting notification may be performed as an effect separate and independent from the variable effect executed in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol. In this case, the effect executed separately from the variable effect on the display unit 21a can make the player aware of the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state even after the RAM is cleared.
Also, as in the case of (1), the control to execute various effects based on the setting of the above-mentioned first low-probability time-saving game state may be performed by starting the display of the change in the first special chart based on the game ball that has entered the first start winning port 15 (by receiving a change pattern command determined at the time the change in the first special chart based on the game ball that has entered the first start winning port 15 begins).

Furthermore, as in the case of (1), when a predetermined operation notification time has elapsed since the start of the above-mentioned operation notification, the operation notification will end. If the above-mentioned operation notification is not being made during the first low-probability time-saving game state and a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15, the above-mentioned operation notification will be executed again, and when a predetermined second operation notification time, which is shorter than the above-mentioned operation notification time, has elapsed since the start of the second operation notification, the second operation notification will end.

(Outline of subsequent production in case of (2))
As in the case of (1), after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first remaining number indication image is updated each time the special pattern changing display is executed (see Figures 146 (e) to (f)).
Then, when the 1200th variable display starts without winning a jackpot and the count value of the time-saving counter reaches 0, the normal game state is set, but at the start of this 1200th variable display, the first low-probability time-saving background image is displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 (not shown). Then, the variable display starts with the start of the variable display.
Here, in the case of (2), since the RAM has been cleared, in the above-mentioned 1200th variation display, the variation pattern (variation pattern command) is determined by referring to Table E, just as when the results of the 1st to 1199th win/loss lottery during the first low-probability time-saving game state are losses (see FIG. 133(b)). And, when the result of the above-mentioned 1200th win/loss lottery is a loss, the variation pattern command "21H" is determined (see FIG. 133(a)), and a variation effect is executed using the normal loss variation pattern. Therefore, in this variation effect, the variation display of the normal effect pattern (effect pattern 50) begins superimposed on the normal background image, and without a reach display, the fact that the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss is notified by stopping at least one of the first, second, and third stop patterns with a different pattern (see FIG. 146(g)). And because this variation effect is not due to the third special variation pattern, unlike the case of (1), the notification of the end of the first low-probability time-saving mode is not made after the notification of the fact that it is a miss. In other words, the notification of the end of the first low-probability time-saving mode is not made by the variation effect executed in conjunction with the above-mentioned 1200th variation display.

As in the case of (1), when the 1200th variable display begins and the count value of the time-saving counter reaches 0, the first low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, as described above. At this time, a state transition command indicating that the normal game state has been set is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving this state transition command, determines that the normal game state has been set and turns off the right-hit notification lamp HL.

After that, as in the case of (1), the normal game state is set, and after the 1200th variable display has ended and the stop display time has elapsed, the variable display (variable presentation) of the first special chart based on the game ball that entered the first start winning port 15 (the start winning port into which the game ball mainly enters during the normal game state) begins, or when the game enters a waiting state for customers, various presentations based on the setting of the normal game state (switching to the normal background image, switching to the normal presentation pattern, erasing the first remaining number indication image, and operation notification urging the player to perform the operation of shooting the game ball toward the first game area 12a) are executed (see Figure 146 (h)).
As described above, in the 1200th variation display in case (2), the variation pattern command for "22H" in which the variation effect by the third special variation pattern is executed cannot be determined, and therefore, unlike case (1), the first low-probability time-saving end notification is not made in the variation effect executed in conjunction with the 1200th variation display. Then, when the normal game state is set and the variation display of the first special symbol starts or the customer waiting state is entered, an operation notification is suddenly made to switch to the normal background image, switch to the normal effect symbol, erase the first remaining number suggestion image, and prompt the player to perform an operation to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a.

In the case of (2), although the first low-probability time-saving end notification is not performed in the variable effect executed in conjunction with the 1200th variable display described above, the first low-probability time-saving end notification may be performed as one of various effects based on the setting of the normal game state described above, which is executed when, for example, the normal game state is set and the variable display of the first special symbol begins or when the player enters the waiting state. In other words, the first low-probability time-saving end notification may be performed as an effect separate and independent from the variable effect executed in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol. In this case, the effect executed separately from the variable effect on the display unit 21a can make the player aware of the end of the first low-probability time-saving game state even after the RAM is cleared.
Also, as in the case of (1), the control to execute various effects based on the settings of the normal game state described above may be performed by starting the display of the change in the second special chart based on the game ball that has entered the second start winning port 16 (by receiving a change pattern command determined at the time the change in the second special chart based on the game ball that has entered the second start winning port 16 begins).

(3) During the 900th variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol that was previously performed has ended and the stop display time of the second special symbol has elapsed, so that the first low probability time-saving game state is set (in the case of the irregular case described above).
In this case, as in (1) and (2), at the start of the 900th variable display by the first special symbol, the normal background image is displayed on the display unit 21a of the display device 21 (see Fig. 147(a) and (b)). Then, the variable display starts with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, the variable display of the normal display pattern (display pattern 50) starts superimposed on the normal background image (see Fig. 147(b)).

Here, in the case of (3), during the 900th variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol that had been performed earlier has ended and the stop display time has elapsed, so the first low-probability time-saving game state is set at that time due to the elapse of the stop display time of the second special symbol. In other words, even though the 900th variable display of the first special symbol is in progress, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set.
At this time, as in (1) and (2), a state transition command indicating that the first low-probability time-shortened game state has been set is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving the state transition command, understands that the first low-probability time-shortened game state has been set, and turns on the right-hit notification lamp HL, even though the 900th change display by the first special chart is in progress.

On the other hand, although the first low-probability time-saving game state is set as the stop display time of the second special symbol has passed, the 900th variable display by the first special symbol continues to be executed. Therefore, if, based on the setting of this first low-probability time-saving game state, an operation notification is displayed such as switching to the first low-probability time-saving background image, switching to the first low-probability time-saving symbol, or an operation notification image prompting the player to perform an operation to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (displaying an operation notification image of "hit right →→→"), or displaying the first remaining number of times suggestion image, the content of the various effects will be changed even though the variable effect is being executed, resulting in an unnatural effect in the effect.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set due to the lapse of the stop display time of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-hit notification lamp HL is turned on at that time, but the various effects based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state are not executed, and the various effects and displays (such as the display of a normal background image and the variable display of normal effect symbols) that were being performed before the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state are continued (see Figures 147(c) to (e)). This makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned strange effects from occurring even when the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set due to the occurrence of an irregular case.

Then, after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above and the 900th variable display by the first special symbol has ended, the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol based on the game ball that has entered the second starting winning port 16 (the starting winning port into which the game ball mainly enters during the first low-probability time-saving game state) begins or the game enters a waiting state for customers, various effects based on the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state (switching to the first low-probability time-saving background image, an operation notification urging the player to perform an operation to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b, switching to the first low-probability time-saving effect pattern, displaying the first remaining number of plays indication image, etc.) are executed, as in (1) and (2) (see Figure 147 (f)).
Although not specifically shown, if the first low-probability time-saving game state is set without winning a jackpot after the special game ends, as in (1), the change presentation accompanying the 900th change display by the first special chart described above is executed by the first special change pattern, and therefore, in the change presentation, after a miss is announced, the first low-probability time-saving setting announcement is executed.
Then, after receiving a state transition command indicating that the first low-probability time-shortened game state has been set, the sub-CPU 301 receives a variation pattern command determined at the start of the variation of the second special symbol based on the game ball that entered the second start winning port 16 after the 900th variation display by the first special symbol described above has ended, or receives a customer waiting command, thereby controlling the execution of various presentations based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state described above.
As with (1) and (2), the control of executing various effects based on the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state described above may be performed by receiving a change pattern command determined at the start of the change of the first special chart based on the game ball that entered the first start winning port 15.

Furthermore, the manner of the operation notification executed in (3) to prompt the player to perform the operation of shooting the game ball toward the second game area 12b is the same as in (1) and (2). Specifically, the operation notification ends when a predetermined operation notification time has elapsed since the operation notification was initiated, and if the game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 when the operation notification is not being issued, the operation notification is executed again. Then, when a predetermined second operation notification time, which is shorter than the operation notification time, has elapsed since the second operation notification was initiated, the second operation notification ends.

In addition, when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set due to the occurrence of an irregular case such as (3), an operation notification may be executed to prompt the player to perform an operation to shoot the game ball toward the above-mentioned second game area 12b at that time, even if the first special chart is being displayed in a changing state.
When the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set due to the occurrence of an irregular case, the various effects and displays that were in place before the first low-probability time-shortening game state was set continue, making it difficult for the player to understand that the first low-probability time-shortening game state has been set. However, by executing the above-mentioned operation notification, the player can be made aware that the first low-probability time-shortening game state has been set even in the above-mentioned case.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, an operation notification (display of an operation notification image of "Hit right → → →") is executed to prompt the player to perform an operation to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state, and the operation notification ends when the operation notification time has elapsed from the start of the operation notification. This makes it possible to reliably prompt the player to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b when the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set, while also preventing as much as possible a situation in which the above-mentioned operation notification impedes the visibility of effects that are of great interest to the player, such as variable effects that notify the results of the win/loss lottery.
Furthermore, when the above-mentioned operation notification is not performed during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, if a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15, the above-mentioned operation notification is executed again. This makes it possible to encourage a player who is inappropriately shooting game balls (shooting game balls toward the first game area 12a) during the first low-probability time-shortened game state to shoot game balls appropriately (shooting game balls toward the second game area 12b).
Furthermore, when a second operation notification is executed, the second operation notification ends when the second operation notification time has elapsed since the start of the second operation notification, and the second operation notification time is shorter than the above-mentioned operation notification time. As a result, when a second operation notification is executed, it is possible to more easily prevent a situation in which the visibility of an effect that is of great interest to a player is obstructed by the operation notification than when an operation notification based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state is executed.

(Variation regarding operation notification prompting the player to perform an operation to launch a game ball toward the second game area 12b in the first low-probability time-shortened game state)
The re-operation notification time in the first low-probability time-shortening game state may be set to be shorter than a predetermined variable time that can be determined in that game state (for example, a variable time that can be determined when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 in the first low-probability time-shortening game state, a variable time that is most likely to be determined in the first low-probability time-shortening game state, etc.).

Specifically, for example, the re-operation notification time in the first low-probability time-saving game state may be set to be shorter than the "3-second" variation time that is most likely to be determined if a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 during the first low-probability time-saving game state. In this way, when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15, causing a special symbol variation display and a variation effect to be executed and a re-operation notification to be executed, it is possible to prevent the re-operation notification from interfering with the notification of the result of the lottery for the variation effect.

Furthermore, for example, the re-operation notification time in the first low-probability time-saving game state may be set to be shorter than any of the variable times (3 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds) that can be determined when a miss or jackpot occurs during the first low-probability time-saving game state. Even when set in this way, it is possible to prevent the re-operation notification from interfering with the notification of the win/loss lottery results through the variable presentation.

Also, for example, the re-operation notification time in the first low-probability time-saving game state may be set to be longer than the variable time that may be determined when a miss occurs during the first low-probability time-saving game state, but shorter than the variable time that may be determined when a jackpot occurs. This setting prevents the notification of a jackpot through a variable effect, which is particularly important to notify the player, from being hindered by a re-operation notification, while also ensuring sufficient time to encourage the player to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b.

Furthermore, for example, if the re-operation notification time in the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set to be shorter than a predetermined fluctuation time that can be determined during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, when the fluctuation effect for which the fluctuation time has been determined is executed and a second operation notification is executed, the various effects described above may be executed so as to suggest that the various effects executed after the re-operation notification time has elapsed during the above-mentioned fluctuation effect suggest that the likelihood of winning a jackpot is higher than the various effects (for example, a preview effect in which a predetermined preview image is displayed, a hold display effect in which a predetermined hold image is displayed based on a hold memory) that indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot executed during the above-mentioned fluctuation effect until the re-operation notification time has elapsed.
More specifically, for example, during the above-mentioned variable performance, a preview image with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot may be displayed until the re-operation notification time has elapsed, but after the above-mentioned variable performance, a preview image with a relatively high probability of winning a jackpot may be displayed.
Also, for example, during the above-mentioned variable performance, a predetermined pending image may be displayed until the re-operation notification time has elapsed, but after the above-mentioned variable performance, the pending image being displayed may be changed to a pending image that has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the pending image.
In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a presentation that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot is interrupted by a second operation notification, and the player's interest is reduced.

In addition, the operation notification or the re-operation notification based on the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state may be given a higher display priority than the display of the changing effect pattern 50 executed during the changing effect or various effects that indicate the expected probability of winning the jackpot mentioned above.
For example, when an operation notification or a second operation notification based on the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state is executed in conjunction with various effects indicating the effect pattern 50 or the expected probability of winning a jackpot, the operation notification image may be displayed superimposed on the image relating to the effect pattern 50 or the various effects described above in front of these images (i.e., the operation notification image may hide at least a portion of the image relating to the effect pattern 50 or the various effects described above).
In this case, the player can be reliably encouraged to hit the game ball toward the second game area 12b.

Furthermore, the operation notification based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state and the second operation notification may be the same or different.
Different aspects include: (1) an operation notification based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state displays an operation notification image, and a second operation notification displays a predetermined audio output or a predetermined background image in addition to the display of the operation notification image; (2) an operation notification based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state displays a predetermined operation notification image, and a second operation notification displays an operation notification image (for example, a large image, an image with intense movement, etc.) that is easier for the player to focus on than the operation notification image displayed in the operation notification based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state; (3) an operation notification based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state outputs a predetermined audio, and a second operation notification outputs an audio that is easier for the player to hear than the audio output in the operation notification based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state (for example, a louder audio, a higher-pitched audio, etc.).
In this case, the function of alerting the player by the second operation notification can be enhanced more than the operation notification based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state.

Furthermore, the operation notification in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set to end when the operation notification time has elapsed from the start of the operation notification, but this is not limited to this, and the operation notification may be set to end when a termination condition is met, such as when a predetermined number of game balls have been shot out or when a predetermined number of game balls have been received into the outlet 19. Similarly, the second operation notification may also be set to end when these termination conditions are met.
Furthermore, the re-operation notification in the first low-probability time-saving game state was designed to be executed when a game ball entered the first start winning port 15, but this is not limited to this, and may be executed when a re-execution condition is met, such as a game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and the variable display of a special pattern (variation presentation) starting, a game ball entering the first start winning port 15 while the variable display of a special pattern (variation presentation) is being executed and the game ball is stored as a reserved item, or a game ball being detected by a component capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the first game area 12a (for example, a general winning port provided in the first game area 12a).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, in addition to the above-mentioned operation notification, the right-hit notification lamp HL is also turned on based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state, but in this case too, the same processing and control as the operation notification based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state and the second operation notification may be performed.
For example, the lighting of the right-hit notification lamp HL executed based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened game state may be terminated after a predetermined execution time has elapsed, and may be executed again when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15, and may be terminated after a predetermined re-execution time has elapsed. In addition, the execution time and re-execution time may be set in the same manner as the modified examples of the operation notification time and re-operation notification time described above.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned operation notification and re-operation notification may be performed not only in the high-probability time-shortened game state and the first low-probability time-shortened game state, but also in the second low-probability time-shortened game state.

(Summary of the first low probability time-saving information suggestion effect)
The first low probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed when the game is in the pre-winning state after RAM clear execution or the pre-winning state after RAM clear not being executed (i.e., between the time when the power is restored and the time when the first jackpot is won), and suggests various information related to the setting of the first low probability time-saving game state, such as state information as to whether the time of execution is the pre-winning state after RAM clear execution or the pre-winning state after RAM clear not being executed, and information on the number of remaining time-saving times until the first low probability time-saving game state is set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the machine enters a customer waiting state, a customer waiting screen based on the customer waiting state is displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 (see FIGS. 148(a) to 148(d)). Then, while this customer waiting screen is being displayed and the machine is in the state before winning after RAM clearing or the state before winning after RAM clearing is not executed, each time a predetermined operation (an operation by a device provided in the pachinko machine P that can be operated by the player, for example, pressing the operation button 9b) is performed, a first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect is executed. In this first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect, an image of a box with a "?" mark on the front is displayed, followed by an image of the box with the top open, and an image of the contents popping out of the box is displayed (see FIGS. 148(c) to 148(d)).
There are seven different types of images in which the contents fly out of the box: mode 1 where a white medal pops out, mode 2 where a bronze medal pops out, mode 3 where a silver medal pops out, mode 4 where a gold medal pops out, mode 5 where a large number of bronze medals pop out, mode 6 where a large number of silver medals pop out, and mode 7 where a large number of gold medals pop out.Depending on any of these modes, the first low probability time-saving information suggestion effect will be executed.

(Outline of determination of the mode of the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance)
In another application example 13, the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 stores a first low-probability time-saving information suggestion display mode determination table for determining whether to execute the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion display in any of modes 1 to 7, as shown in FIG. 149.
This first low-probability time-saving information suggestion presentation mode determination table defines the presentation mode of the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion in correspondence with the state at the time of execution of the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion presentation (the state before winning after RAM clearing is executed or the state before winning after RAM clearing is not executed), the number of times the special pattern has changed since the power was restored until the time of execution, the count value of the time-saving activation counter at the time of execution (the number of remaining changes until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set), and each presentation random number obtained within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 249).
Then, when the operation button 9b is pressed while the machine is in a waiting-for-customer state and in a state after RAM clearing and before winning or a state after RAM clearing has not been executed and before winning, the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 obtains an effect random number of 1 from the above-mentioned range of values, and determines one of modes 1 to 7 as the mode of the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect based on the state at that time, the number of times the special symbol has changed since the power was restored, the count value of the time-saving activation counter, the obtained effect random number, and the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect mode determination table.The first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect will then be executed according to the mode determined.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, modes 2, 3, and 4 are used to suggest the possibility that RAM clearing may not have been performed when power is restored after a power outage, and it is predetermined that mode 2 executes the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect to suggest that it is unlikely that RAM clearing will have been performed when power is restored, mode 3 executes the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect to suggest that it is highly likely that RAM clearing will not have been performed when power is restored, and mode 4 executes the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect to suggest that RAM clearing will not have been performed when power is restored (that it has been confirmed that it will not have been performed).
Furthermore, aspects 5, 6, and 7 are used to suggest the possibility that the number of remaining changes until the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set is less than a predetermined number (300 times in other application example 13), and it is predetermined that by executing the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect in aspect 5, it is suggested that it is unlikely that the number of remaining changes until the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set is less than 300 times, by executing the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect in aspect 6, it is suggested that it is highly likely that the number of remaining changes until the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set is less than 300 times, and by executing the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect in aspect 7, it is suggested that the number of remaining changes until the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set is less than 300 times (that it has been confirmed that it is less than 300 times).
It is predetermined that no special suggestion will be made when the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed in accordance with aspect 1.

Also, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, although not shown, when the state becomes a pre-winning state after RAM clearing, a pre-winning state command after RAM clearing is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, indicating that, and when the state becomes a pre-winning state after not clearing RAM, a pre-winning state command after not clearing RAM is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, indicating that, and information indicating that state is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 303 on the sub-control board 300. This allows the sub-CPU 301 to know whether the point in time when the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect is executed is the pre-winning state after RAM clearing or the pre-winning state after not clearing RAM.
Furthermore, although not specifically shown, the sub-control board 300 is provided with a counter (configured by a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 303) for counting the number of times the special symbol has changed since the power was restored. This counter is cleared to zero when a pre-win state command after RAM clear execution or a pre-win state command after RAM non-clear execution is received from the main control board 100 (i.e., when the power is restored), and is incremented by one each time a change pattern command is received from the main control board 100 (i.e., each time the change display (change presentation) of the special symbol is started). This allows the sub-CPU 301 to grasp the number of times the special symbol has changed (the number of times the special symbol has changed since the power was restored) from the time the power was restored until the time the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion presentation was executed.
138, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, each time the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the time-saving activation count counter by one, a time-saving activation count command indicating the count value is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and although not shown, the count value is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 303 in the sub-control board 300. This allows the sub-CPU 301 to grasp the count value of the time-saving activation count counter at the time when the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed (the number of fluctuations remaining until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set).

As shown in FIG. 149, according to the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion display mode determination table, if the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion display is executed in a state after RAM clearing and before winning, and the number of times the special pattern has changed since the power was restored is the first specific number of times (1 to 100 times in other application example 13), then mode 1 (determination probability 96.5%), mode 2 (determination probability 1.5%), mode 3 (determination probability 0.5%), mode 5 (determination probability 1%) or mode 6 (determination probability 0.5%) is determined. In this case, mode 4 and mode 7 are not determined.
In this case, the count value of the time-saving activation counter is 300 or more.

As shown in FIG. 149, when the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed in a state before winning after RAM clearing, and the number of times the special pattern has changed since the power was restored is the second specific number of times (101 or more times in other application example 13), and the count value of the time-saving activation counter is 300 or more, mode 1 (probability of determination is 94.5%), mode 2 (probability of determination is 2%), mode 3 (probability of determination is 1%), mode 5 (probability of determination is 1.5%) or mode 6 (probability of determination is 1%) is determined. In this case, mode 4 and mode 7 are not determined either.
Also, in the above case, when the count value of the time-saving activation counter is between 1 and 299, mode 1 (probability of determination is 91.5%), mode 2 (probability of determination is 2%), mode 3 (probability of determination is 1%), mode 5 (probability of determination is 2.5%), mode 6 (probability of determination is 2%) or mode 7 (probability of determination is 1%) is determined. In this case, mode 4 is not determined.
In the above case, when the count value of the time-saving activation counter is 0, mode 1 (with a determination probability of 100%) is determined. In this case, modes 2 to 7 are not determined.

As shown in FIG. 149, when the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed in a state after RAM clearing has not been executed and before a win, and the number of times the special pattern has changed since the power was restored is between 1 and 100, and the count value of the time-saving activation counter is 300 or more, mode 1 (probability of determination is 91%), mode 2 (probability of determination is 3%), mode 3 (probability of determination is 2%), mode 4 (probability of determination is 1%), mode 5 (probability of determination is 1%) or mode 6 (probability of determination is 0.5%) is determined. In this case, mode 7 is not determined.
Also, in the above case, when the count value of the time-saving activation counter is between 1 and 299, mode 1 (probability of determination is 92.5%), mode 2 (probability of determination is 3%), mode 3 (probability of determination is 2%), mode 4 (probability of determination is 1%), mode 5 (probability of determination is 1.5%), mode 6 (probability of determination is 1%) or mode 7 (probability of determination is 0.5%) is determined.
In the above case, when the count value of the time-saving activation counter is 0, mode 1 (determination probability is 100%) is determined. In this case, modes 2 to 7 are not determined.

As shown in FIG. 149, when the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed in a state before winning after RAM clearing has not been executed, and the number of times the special pattern has changed since the power was restored is 101 or more, and the count value of the time-saving activation counter is 300 or more, mode 1 (probability of determination is 87.5%), mode 2 (probability of determination is 4%), mode 3 (probability of determination is 3%), mode 4 (probability of determination is 2%), mode 5 (probability of determination is 2%) or mode 6 (probability of determination is 1.5%) is determined. In this case, mode 7 is not determined.
Also, in the above case, when the count value of the time-saving activation counter is between 1 and 299, mode 1 (probability of determination is 85.5%), mode 2 (probability of determination is 4%), mode 3 (probability of determination is 3%), mode 4 (probability of determination is 2%), mode 5 (probability of determination is 2.5%), mode 6 (probability of determination is 2%) or mode 7 (probability of determination is 1%) is determined.
In the above case, when the count value of the time-saving activation counter is 0, mode 1 (with a determination probability of 100%) is determined. In this case, modes 2 to 7 are not determined.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the count value of the time-saving activation counter is 0 from the time the first low-probability time-saving game state is set until a jackpot is won. In other words, the count value of the time-saving activation counter is 0 during the first low-probability time-saving game state, and during the normal game state that is set after the first low-probability time-saving game state ends without a jackpot being won, until a jackpot is won. Therefore, during this period, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is always executed in the first mode.

In addition, in Figure 149, the numbers written in each area corresponding to the form of the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect, the state at the time the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed (state before winning after RAM clear is executed, state before winning after RAM clear is not executed), the number of times the special pattern has changed since power was restored, and the count value of the time-saving activation counter indicate, as described above, the determination ratio of that area (the proportion of the range of random numbers allocated to that selected area to the range of all random numbers).

As described above, in pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to aspect 1 can be executed regardless of the state at the time the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed (state before winning after RAM clearing is executed, state before winning after RAM clearing is not executed), the number of times the special pattern has changed since power was restored, and the count value of the time-saving activation counter (number of changes remaining until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set), and no special suggestion is made by the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to aspect 1.

In contrast to this, the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect according to aspect 2 and the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect according to aspect 3 can be executed when the game is in a normal gaming state in a state before a win after a RAM clear has been executed, or when the game is in a normal gaming state in a state before a win after a RAM clear has not been executed, and are set to be more likely to be executed in a state before a win after a RAM clear has not been executed than in a state before a win after a RAM clear has been executed. As a result, the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect according to aspect 2 and the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect according to aspect 3 can suggest that the RAM clear may not have been executed when the power was restored.
Furthermore, since the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to mode 3 is set to be less likely to be executed than the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to mode 2, when the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to mode 3 is executed, it can be suggested that there is a higher possibility that RAM clearing was not performed when power was restored than when the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to mode 2 is executed.

Furthermore, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to aspect 4 is not executed when the state is after RAM clearing has been executed and before a win has been made, but can only be executed when the state is after RAM clearing has not been executed and before a win has been made. Therefore, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to aspect 4 can suggest that RAM clearing has not been performed (that it has been confirmed that RAM clearing has not been performed) when the power is restored.

Furthermore, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to aspect 5 and the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to aspect 6 can be executed when the count value of the time-saving activation count counter is 300 or greater, or when the count value of the time-saving activation count counter is 1 to 299, and is set to be more likely to be executed when the count value of the time-saving activation count counter is 1 to 299 than when it is 300 or greater. As a result, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to aspect 5 and the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to aspect 6 can suggest that there is a possibility that the number of remaining fluctuations until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set is less than 300.
Furthermore, since the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to mode 6 is set to be less likely to be executed than the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to mode 5, when the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to mode 6 is executed, it can be suggested that the number of remaining fluctuations until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set is more likely to be less than 300 than when the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect according to mode 5 is executed.

Furthermore, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect of aspect 7 is not executed when the count value of the time-saving activation counter is 300 or greater, but can only be executed when it is between 1 and 299. Therefore, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect of aspect 7 can indicate that the number of remaining fluctuations until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set is less than 300 (that it has been confirmed that it will be less than 300).

As described above, in pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the machine is in a customer waiting state and in a state after RAM clearing before winning or a state after not clearing RAM before winning (i.e., between the time the power is restored and the first jackpot is won), a first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect can be executed. This first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect can indicate whether the point in time at which the effect is executed is a state after RAM clearing before winning or a state after not clearing RAM before winning, and can also indicate the number of time-shortening effects remaining until the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, if the variable display of the special symbol is performed 900 times without winning a jackpot after the RAM clear is executed and the normal game state is set, the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set. The number of times the special symbol changes before this first low-probability time-shortened game state is set is counted by the time-shortened activation counter, and this count value is reset when the power is restored after the RAM clear is executed, but if the power is restored without the RAM clear being executed, it is not reset and the current count value is maintained.
For example, if the power is restored with a RAM clear when 300 special symbol variations have been displayed since the RAM was cleared, the count value of the time-saving activation counter will be reset, so the number of special symbol variations from that point until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set will be 900. In contrast, if the power is restored without a RAM clear, the count value of the time-saving activation counter will not be reset, so the number of special symbol variations from that point until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set will be 600.

Furthermore, although not shown, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, by performing a predetermined operation using the operation button 9b, the number of jackpots won since the power was restored (the number of times the special game has been played) and the number of times the special symbol has changed are displayed on the display unit 21a. Furthermore, although not shown, the pachinko machine P is connected to a data display device that is installed outside the pachinko machine P and is capable of displaying various data, and this data display device also displays the number of jackpots won since the power was restored (the number of times the special game has been played) and the number of times the special symbol has changed.
Here, the display of the number of jackpot wins and the number of times the special symbol has changed is cleared whether the power is restored with or without RAM clearing, and when the power is restored, the number of jackpot wins is displayed as "0." However, when the number of jackpot wins is displayed as "0," although this display allows one to know that a jackpot has not yet been won since the power was restored, it is not possible to know whether the power was restored with or without RAM clearing. For example, if the number of jackpot wins is displayed as "0" and the number of times the special symbol has changed is displayed as "100," then if this "100" display is the number of times the special symbol has changed after power has been restored with RAM clearing, the number of times the remaining change until the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set will be 800, but if it is the number of times the special symbol has changed after power has been restored without RAM clearing, the number of times the remaining change until the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set will not necessarily be 800, but will be the number obtained by subtracting the number of times the special symbol has changed from when RAM clearing is performed until power is restored.
In this way, when the number of times the jackpot has been won is "0," it is not possible to accurately determine the number of times the remaining changes until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set from the number of times the special pattern changes displayed on the display unit 21a or the data display device.

However, according to the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect in other application example 13, it is possible to suggest that the state is before a win after a RAM clear has been executed (i.e., the state after power is restored with a RAM clear) or before a win after a RAM clear has not been executed (i.e., the state after power is restored without a RAM clear), or to suggest that the number of remaining runs until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set is less than a predetermined number.This makes it possible to infer the number of remaining changes until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, even when the number of jackpot wins is "0", thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, in the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect in another application example 13, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect in any mode is set to be more likely to be executed when the number of times the special symbol changes since the power is restored is a second specific number (101 or more times) than when the number of times the special symbol changes since the power is restored is a first specific number (1 to 100 times). In other words, the execution rate of the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect in a predetermined mode differs depending on the number of times the special symbol changes since the power is restored.
This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game even if the number of times the special symbols displayed on the display unit 21a or the data display device change is small after the power is restored.

(Variation regarding the first low probability time-saving information suggestion effect)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect is executed in the customer waiting state, but is not limited to this. For example, the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect (for example, at the start of the variable effect, during the execution of the variable effect, from the start of the variable effect until the reach display is displayed, from the reach display is displayed until the variable effect ends, at the end of the variable effect, etc.).
Furthermore, if the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect, the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect may be executed automatically in conjunction with the execution of the variable effect, without requiring a predetermined operation. Specifically, for example, if the variable effect is executed in a state before a win after a RAM clear has been executed or in a state before a win after a RAM clear has not been executed, the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect in one of the modes may be executed at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect. Furthermore, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to execute the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect, and when the execution of the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect is determined by the lottery, the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion effect in one of the modes may be executed at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect.
In this case, the opportunities to execute the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect will be more varied, which can increase the player's interest.

In addition, when the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect may be executed so as not to interfere with the visibility of the variable effect. For example, it may be executed in a display area of the display unit 21a where the variable display of the effect pattern 50 is not performed or in a display area where the effect suggesting the likelihood of winning the jackpot (display of a preview image or a reserved image) is not performed.
In addition, the various images in the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion display may be given a higher display priority than the display pattern 50, preview image, pending image, etc.
In this case, the visibility of the first low probability time-saving information suggestion effect can be improved, and the player's interest can be increased.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed in any of modes 1 to 7, but the execution modes are not limited to these. For example, a mode suggesting that there is a medium possibility that RAM clearing has not been executed when the power is restored, a mode suggesting that there is a medium possibility that the number of remaining fluctuations until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set is less than a predetermined number, etc. may be provided.
In this case, there will be a wide variety of ways in which the first time-saving information suggestion presentation can be executed, which will increase the player's interest.

In addition, in the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion display in another application example 13, both an indication of whether the time when the display is executed is the state before winning after RAM clearing or the state before winning after RAM clearing is not executed, and an indication of the remaining predetermined number of times until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set are executed, but this is not limited to this, and only one of the suggestions may be executed.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect in other application example 13, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect in any mode was set to be more likely to be executed when the number of times the special symbol changes after power recovery is the second specific number (101 times or more) than when the number of times is the first specific number (1 to 100 times), but this is not limited to this. For example, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect in any mode, rather than all modes, may be set to be more likely to be executed when the number of times the special symbol changes after power recovery is the second specific number than when the number is the first specific number.
Furthermore, the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion display in either mode, or the first low-probability time-shortening information suggestion display in either mode, may be set to be less likely to be executed when the number of times the special pattern changes since the power is restored is a second specific number than when it is a first specific number.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed each time a predetermined operation is performed, but this is not limited to this. For example, after a predetermined operation is performed and the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect may not be executed even if a predetermined operation is performed until the variable display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times.
In this case, the player can be encouraged to continue playing the game in order to execute the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect.
In addition, an upper limit may be set on the number of times that the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed, and after the number of times that the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect is executed reaches the upper limit, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect may not be executed until a predetermined release condition (for example, RAM clearing is executed, a jackpot is won, or the special pattern changing display (changing effect) is executed a predetermined number of times) is met.
In this case, the timing at which the first low probability time-saving information suggestion display is performed can be left to the player's discretion, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, the execution modes of modes 1 to 7 in the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect may be reused as execution modes for effects other than the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect.
For example, if a player performs a predetermined operation during the waiting-for-customer state after winning the first jackpot after the power is restored, a waiting-for-customer effect may be executed in which one of modes 1 to 7 is displayed to heighten the player's interest during the waiting-for-customer state. Note that in this waiting-for-customer effect, it is desirable to make the probability of determining modes 1 to 7 the same (equal) regardless of the number of times the special symbol has changed since the power was restored or the count value of the time-saving activation counter, so as not to suggest the number of changes remaining until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set.
In this case, it is possible to increase the opportunities for executing the same type of effect without preparing new effect data, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

In addition, in the normal game state that is set after the first low-probability time-shortened game state has ended without a jackpot being won, it may be suggested that the first low-probability time-shortened game state will not be set unless a jackpot is won thereafter.
In this case, the player can be made aware that the first low-probability time-shortening game state will not be set, and the decision of whether or not to continue playing can be left to the player.

(Summary of the variation effects of modes PT1, PT2, and PT3 executed when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 during a normal game state excluding the variation immediately before the first low-probability time-saving)
Next, among the variation effects that are executed when the game ball enters the first starting winning slot 15 during normal gameplay, excluding the variation immediately before the first low-probability time-saving, we will explain the PT1 and PT2 modes in the normal miss variation pattern, as well as the PT3 mode in the development reach variation pattern that is executed in that case.

(Summary of mode PT1)
The mode PT1 in the above-mentioned normal miss variation pattern is a mode in which the second stop symbol is displayed in a stopped state accompanied by a reach prompting effect that suggests whether or not a reach display will be made, but the reach display is not made.
In the reach-inducing effect, after the first stop symbol is displayed in a state where all the effect symbols 50 are displayed in a varying manner, the number symbol that is the same as the first stop symbol that is displayed in a varying manner changes in a special manner (for example, the number symbol trembles slightly and the speed of the changing display slows down more gradually than the normal behavior while changing to a stopped display) that is different from the normal behavior (for example, the speed of the changing display slows down more gradually than the normal behavior while changing to a stopped display), thereby causing the second stop symbol to change (see Figures 151(a)-(b)). This can heighten the player's anticipation for the reach-in display to be displayed.
Here, in the normal miss variation pattern, the reach display is not performed. Therefore, in the mode PT1, the display is performed in the above-mentioned behavior that gives the impression that the second stop pattern is stopped and displayed with the same number pattern as the first stop pattern by executing the reach-inducing performance, but the same number pattern is not stopped and displayed (without the reach display), and the display is scrolled downward, and the second stop pattern is stopped and displayed with a number pattern that is one larger than the first stop pattern (see Figure 151 (c)).
Then, after the second stop symbol is stopped and displayed, the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 151(d)). In another application example 13, the third stop symbol that is stopped and displayed when a reach-inducing effect is performed is set to be the same number symbol as the first stop symbol.
When the third stop symbol is displayed, the variable effect according to mode PT1 ends, and after the stop display time has elapsed, the next variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) can begin (see Figure 151 (g)).

The second stop symbol that is stopped and displayed is not limited to a number symbol that is one number larger than the first stop symbol, but may be a number symbol that is two or more numbers larger than the first stop symbol. Also, after displaying in a manner that gives the impression that the same number symbol as the first stop symbol is stopped and displayed as described above, the same number symbol may be scrolled in the opposite direction (upward) to the previous scrolling direction, so that the second stop symbol is stopped and displayed as a number symbol that is one or more numbers smaller than the first stop symbol.
Furthermore, the third stop symbol that is stopped and displayed is not limited to the same number symbol as the first stop symbol, but may be a number symbol different from the first stop symbol.

(Summary of mode PT2)
In the above-mentioned normal miss variation pattern, mode PT2 is a mode in which the second stop pattern accompanied by the above-mentioned reach teasing effect is displayed as stopped, but the reach display is not performed, and the third stop pattern is displayed as stopped, thereby initially announcing a miss, and then a development teasing effect is executed to reverse the fact that it is a miss and tease as to whether or not the reach display and reach development effect will be performed.
In other words, in mode PT2, the flow from the stop display of the second stop pattern accompanied by the reach teasing effect until the stop display of the third stop pattern (see Figures 151 (a) to (d)) is the same as mode PT1, but it differs from mode PT1 in that the development teasing effect is executed after the stop display of the third stop pattern (see Figures 151 (e) to (f)).
In the development prompting effect, after the third stop symbol is displayed in a stopped state and all the effect symbols 50 are displayed in a stopped state as described above, a predetermined development prompting display (for example, a display in which all the effect symbols 50 that are displayed in a stopped state shake) is performed (see FIG. 151(e)). As a result, although a loss is initially notified, the fact that it is a loss is later overturned, and the player's expectations for the reach display and reach development effect to be executed can be increased.
Here, as mentioned above, since the reach display is not performed in the normal miss variation pattern, in mode PT2, the development teasing effect as described above is executed, but thereafter, the reach display or reach development effect is not performed, and the variation effect ends with the stop display mode before the development teasing effect is executed (see FIG. 151(f)). Then, after the end of the variation effect, when the stop display time has elapsed, the next variation effect (variation display of special symbols) can be started (see FIG. 151(g)).

(Summary of Aspect PT3)
The mode PT3 in the above-mentioned development reach fluctuation pattern is a mode in which the above-mentioned reach provocation effect and development provocation effect are executed, and after these effects are executed, a special reach display and a special development effect are executed.
In other words, in mode PT3, the second stop pattern is displayed stopped with a reach-inducing effect, and then the third stop pattern is displayed stopped and then the development-inducing effect is executed (see Figures 152 (a) to (e)), which is the same as mode PT2, but it differs from mode PT2 in that a special reach display and a special development effect are then executed (see Figures 152 (g) to (j), 153, and 154).

In mode PT3, after the above-mentioned development teasing effect is executed, the indication that it is a miss is overturned and a development suggestion effect (for example, a display in which light is shone from behind the stopped display effect pattern 50) is displayed, suggesting that a special reach display and special development display will be executed (see Figure 152 (f)), and then the special reach display is executed.

A special reach display is a reach display where there are multiple combinations of the first and second stop symbols that make up a reach, that is, a reach display where there are multiple lines (hereinafter also referred to as reach lines) formed by the display positions of the first and second stop symbols that make up a reach. In this way, when a special reach display is made, the number symbols that make up the reach (i.e., the number symbols that result in a jackpot) increase to multiple symbols, and if any of these multiple number symbols causes the third stop symbol to stop and be displayed, a jackpot will be achieved, thereby increasing the player's expectations of winning the jackpot.

The special reach display executed in mode PT3 has three types of patterns: a two-line pattern with two reach lines (two number symbols that make up the reach), a four-line pattern with four reach lines (four number symbols that make up the reach), and an eight-line pattern with eight reach lines (eight number symbols that make up the reach), and the special reach display is executed using one of the patterns.
The patterns of the special reach display are not limited to these, and a pattern with a different number of lines (for example, a six-line pattern with six reach lines) may be provided.

When the special reach display is executed by the two-line pattern, if the third stop pattern is stopped and displayed by either of the two number patterns constituting the reach, it is a big win, and if the third stop pattern is stopped and displayed by a number pattern other than the two number patterns constituting the reach, it is a loss.
In addition, when a special reach display is executed by a 4-line pattern, if the third stop pattern is stopped and displayed by any of the four number patterns constituting the reach, it is a big win, and if the third stop pattern is stopped and displayed by a number pattern other than the four number patterns constituting the reach, it is a loss.
Furthermore, when a special reach display is executed by an 8-line pattern, a jackpot occurs when the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed by any of the eight number symbols that make up the reach. Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, eight number symbols are provided as the performance symbols 50, so in the 8-line pattern, a reach is formed by all the number symbols. In other words, a jackpot occurs when the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed by any number symbol.
As described above, when the special reach display is executed using the 2-line pattern or 4-line pattern, there is a possibility of both winning and losing the jackpot, but when the special reach display is executed using the 8-line pattern, there is no chance of losing and the jackpot is confirmed. In other words, when the result of the win/loss lottery is a win, the special reach display is executed using either the 2-line pattern, 4-line pattern or 8-line pattern, whereas when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss, the special reach display is executed using either the 2-line pattern or the 4-line pattern.

In the special reach display, first, the first reach line (hereinafter also referred to as the first reach line) is displayed using the number symbol that was the target of the reach display prompt in the reach prompting performance described above (i.e., the number symbol stopped and displayed as the first stop symbol) (see FIG. 152(g)). After that, below the first reach line, a second reach line (hereinafter also referred to as the second reach line) is additionally displayed using the number symbol that comes just before the number symbol that makes up the first reach line in the display order of the cyclic display (for example, if the number symbol that makes up the first reach line is "8", then "7", and if the number symbol that makes up the first reach line is "1", then "8") (see FIG. 152(h)).
If the special reach display that was executed is a two-line pattern, the special reach display ends when the second reach line is displayed. On the other hand, if the special reach display that was executed is a four-line pattern or an eight-line pattern, additional reach lines are displayed in the same manner as the additional display of the second reach line described above until the number of lines corresponding to each pattern is reached (see Figure 152(i)).

Specifically, for example, if the executed special reach display is a four-line pattern, a third reach line (hereinafter also referred to as the third reach line) is additionally displayed below the second reach line, with a number pattern that is one step before the number pattern that makes up the second reach line in the display order of the cyclic display, and then a fourth reach line (hereinafter also referred to as the fourth reach line) is additionally displayed below the third reach line, with a number pattern that is one step before the number pattern that makes up the third reach line in the display order of the cyclic display (see Figure 152(i)). Then, when the fourth reach line is displayed, the special reach display ends.
Furthermore, if the executed special reach display is an 8-line pattern, the same processing as described above is carried out, and the 5th reach line (hereinafter also referred to as the 5th reach line), the 6th reach line (hereinafter also referred to as the 6th reach line), the 7th reach line (hereinafter also referred to as the 7th reach line), and the 8th reach line (hereinafter also referred to as the 8th reach line) are additionally displayed in order, until a total of 8 reach lines are displayed. Then, when the 8th reach line is displayed, the special reach display ends.

As described above, when the special reach display ends, a special development effect is executed (see Figure 152 (j), Figure 153, Figure 154, Figure 155).
The special development effects executed in mode PT3 include a miss pattern in which a stop suggestion display is made to suggest whether or not the third stop pattern will be stopped by the number patterns that make up the reach line displayed in the special reach display, and a miss is announced when none of the number patterns that make up the reach line are stopped; a normal jackpot pattern in which the above-mentioned stop suggestion display is made, and a jackpot is announced when the third stop pattern is stopped by one of the number patterns that make up the reach line; and a reversal jackpot pattern in which a miss is initially announced when the above-mentioned miss pattern is made, but then a specific number pattern (the number pattern "7" in another application example 13) causes the third stop pattern to be stopped, and a jackpot is announced. Three types of patterns are provided, and the special development effects are executed according to one of the patterns depending on the result of the win/lose lottery and the determination result of the special pattern.
Specifically, in the stop suggestion display described above, the number symbols constituting each reach line are displayed popping out one by one, from the back of the display unit 21a to the front, gradually expanding from the number symbol constituting the lowest reach line to the number symbol constituting the highest reach line, and the popped-out number symbols are either erased or displayed as stopped symbols (see, for example, Figure 152(j), Figures 153(a)-(g)). If the popped-out number symbol is erased, this erasure suggests that the third stop symbol has not been displayed as stopped symbols, and if the popped-out number symbol is displayed as stopped symbols, this stop display suggests that the third stop symbol has been displayed as stopped symbols.

If a special development effect is executed due to a losing pattern, the above-mentioned stop suggestion display will be displayed, all number symbols making up the reach line will be erased without being displayed as stopped symbols, and the third stop symbol will be displayed as a number symbol that is one symbol after the uppermost number symbol making up the reach line (i.e., the number symbol making up the first reach line; in other words, the number symbol that was the target of the reach teasing effect) in the cyclical display (see Figure 154). As a result, the third stop symbol will be displayed as a number symbol that is different from the first and second stop symbols (i.e., a number symbol that is one symbol off from the first and second stop symbols), and a loss will be announced.

In addition, when a special development effect is executed due to a normal jackpot pattern, the stop suggestion display described above is performed, and the third stop symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol using one of the number symbols that make up the reach line (see Figure 152 (j) and Figures 153 (a) to (h)). As a result, the first, second, and third stop symbols are all displayed as the corresponding number symbols, and a jackpot win is announced.

Here, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, a special reach display is made by a two-line pattern, and when a special development effect is executed by a normal jackpot pattern, a third stop pattern is displayed by the number pattern constituting the first reach line or the number pattern constituting the second reach line, and when a special reach display is made by a four-line pattern, and when a special development effect is executed by a normal jackpot pattern, a third stop pattern is displayed by the number pattern constituting the first reach line, the number pattern constituting the second reach line, the number pattern constituting the third reach line, or the number pattern constituting the fourth reach line.
On the other hand, when a special reach display is performed by an 8-line pattern and a special development effect is executed by a normal jackpot pattern, the third stop symbol is always displayed by the number symbols that make up the first reach line. Note that even in this case, the third stop symbol may be displayed by the number symbols that make up any of the first reach line to the eighth reach line.

Furthermore, when a special development effect is executed due to a reversal jackpot pattern, the above-mentioned stop suggestion display is performed, as in the loss pattern, and all number symbols constituting the reach line are erased without being displayed as stopped symbols, and the third stop symbol is displayed as a number symbol different from the first and second stop symbols (a number symbol shifted by one symbol from the first and second stop symbols), and a loss is initially announced (see Figures 155(a)-(e)). However, after that, a reversal image (e.g., an image of "!!!") is displayed indicating that the loss has been overturned, and the first, second, and third stop symbols all become specific number symbols (the number symbol "7" in another application example 13) (see Figures 155(f)-(g)). As a result, the first, second, and third stop symbols all become stopped symbols of the number symbol "7," and a jackpot is announced. In addition, the number "7" is displayed in a stopped state, and in addition to the winning of the jackpot, it is also announced that a special game in which 10 rounds of play will be played will be executed.
Here, when a reversal jackpot pattern is executed, as described above, a miss notification is first made, so that a special reach display using an 8-line pattern is not made, and instead a special reach display using a 2-line pattern or a 4-line pattern is made.
In addition, when a reversal jackpot pattern is executed, after the above-mentioned reversal image is displayed, the first, second and third stopping patterns do not all become specific number patterns, but may become any of the number patterns that make up the reach line, or may become number patterns other than the number patterns that make up the reach line.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a losing one (i.e., when the received variation pattern command is "03H"), a special development effect is executed by a losing pattern, when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a winning jackpot and the determined jackpot pattern is X1 or X3 (i.e., when the received variation pattern command is "A3H"), a special development effect is executed by a normal jackpot pattern, and when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a winning jackpot and the determined jackpot pattern is X2 (i.e., when the received variation pattern command is "A6H"), a special development effect is executed by either a normal jackpot pattern or a reversal jackpot pattern.
That is, while the normal jackpot pattern can be executed when the jackpot symbol X1 or X3 is determined (when a special game with five rounds of play is executed) or when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined (when a special game with ten rounds of play is executed), the reversal jackpot pattern can be executed only when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined. Therefore, when the normal jackpot pattern is executed, it is not possible to know whether the special game executed based on the winning of the jackpot will be five rounds of play or ten rounds of play, but when the reversal jackpot pattern is executed, it is possible to know that the special game executed based on the winning of the jackpot will be ten rounds of play.

(Specific examples of aspects PT1 and PT2)
Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when a variable effect according to mode PT1 or mode PT2 is executed, the type of the number symbol to be stopped and displayed as the first stop symbol is determined. This determined number symbol becomes the number symbol to be the target of the reach-inducing effect.
Then, after the first stop symbol is stopped and displayed by the determined number symbol, the above-mentioned reach-inducing effect is executed.
For example, when a variable effect according to mode PT1 or mode PT2 is executed and the number symbol stopped and displayed as the first stopping symbol is determined to be "1," the number symbol "1" is stopped and displayed as the first stopping symbol, and then a reach prompting effect is executed to prompt whether the number symbol "1" will stop as the second stopping symbol (see FIGS. 150(b) and 151(b)). Then, after the number symbol "1" scrolls downward, the number symbol "2" is stopped and displayed as the second stopping symbol (see FIGS. 150(c) and 151(c)).

(Specific example of aspect PT3)
When the variable presentation according to mode PT3 is executed, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot win, the type of special development presentation to be executed (normal jackpot pattern, reversal jackpot pattern) is determined. Furthermore, when a normal jackpot pattern is determined, the types of number symbols to be stopped and displayed as the first, second, and third stop symbols (i.e., the number symbols ("1" to "8") that notify a jackpot win) are determined, and when a reversal jackpot pattern is determined, the types of number symbols to be stopped and displayed as the first and second stop symbols on the first reach line (i.e., the number symbols ("1" to "8") that constitute the reach on the first reach line) are determined. Furthermore, when a normal jackpot pattern is determined, either a 2-line pattern, a 4-line pattern, or an 8-line pattern is determined as the type of special reach display to be executed, and when a reversal jackpot pattern is determined, either a 2-line pattern or a 4-line pattern is determined as the type of special reach display to be executed. Furthermore, when a normal jackpot pattern is determined, the type of reach line (first reach line and second reach line in a 2-line pattern, first reach line, second reach line, third reach line and fourth reach line in a 4-line pattern, and first reach line in an 8-line pattern) on which the numerical symbols indicating the above-mentioned jackpot are displayed in a stopped state is also determined.
On the other hand, when the result of the lottery is a loss, a loss pattern is determined as the special development effect to be executed, and the types of number symbols to be stopped and displayed as the first and second stop symbols on the first reach line (i.e., the number symbols ("1" to "8") that make up the reach on the first reach line), and the type of special reach display to be executed (2-line pattern, 4-line pattern) are determined.
When the above-mentioned determination is made, the numerical symbols to be the targets of the reach-inducing effect in mode PT3 are determined.

(Specific Example 1)
For example, suppose the result of the lottery is a jackpot, and the numerical symbol indicating the jackpot is an "8," the special development effect to be executed is a normal jackpot pattern, the special reach display is a four-line pattern, and the second reach line (i.e., the second reach line from the top) is the reach line on which the numerical symbol "8" is displayed. Since the numerical symbol constituting the second reach line in the four-line pattern is "8," the numerical symbol constituting the first reach line is "1," the numerical symbol constituting the third reach line is "7," and the numerical symbol constituting the fourth reach line is "6." In another application example 13, the numerical symbol constituting the first reach line is the target of the reach stimulation effect in mode PT3, and therefore the reach stimulation effect is executed using the numerical symbol "1" (see FIG. 152(b)).
In this case, the number symbols that are the target of the reach stimulation effect and the number symbols that notify of a big win will be different.

When the above-mentioned decision is made, after the number "1" is displayed as the first stop symbol, a reach prompting effect is executed to prompt whether the number "1" will stop as the second stop symbol (see FIG. 152(b)), after the number "1" scrolls downward, the number "2" is displayed as the second stop symbol, and further the number "1" is displayed as the third stop symbol (see FIGS. 152(c)-(d)). This initially notifies the player that they have lost.
After that, a development teasing effect and a development suggestion effect are executed (see Figure 152 (e) to (f)), and then a special reach display is executed. In this special reach display, first, a first reach line consisting of the number symbol "1" is displayed, followed by the additional display of a second reach line consisting of the number symbol "8", a third reach line consisting of the number symbol "7", a fourth reach line consisting of the number symbol "6" (see Figure 152 (g) to (i)).
When the fourth reach line is displayed, a special development effect is executed. In this special development effect, the number "6" constituting the fourth reach line is displayed, gradually expanding from the back to the front of the display unit 21a, and then disappears (see Figure 152(j) and Figures 153(a)-(b)). Next, the number "7" constituting the third reach line is displayed and disappeared in the same manner as the number "6" described above (see Figures 153(c)-(e)). Next, the number "8" constituting the second reach line is displayed in the same manner as the number "6" and "7" described above, and then the number "8" is displayed as the third stop symbol (see Figures 153(f)-(i)). This indicates a jackpot win.
Then, after a special game execution suggestion image (for example, an image saying "BONUS!") indicating that a special game will be executed is displayed (see Figure 153 (j)), the special game begins.

(Specific Example 2)
For example, suppose the result of the win/lose lottery is a jackpot, the numerical symbol "2" is determined as the numerical symbol indicating the jackpot, the normal jackpot pattern is determined as the special development effect to be executed, a four-line pattern is determined as the special reach display to be executed, and the first reach line (i.e., the first reach line) is determined as the reach line on which the numerical symbol "2" is stopped and displayed. Then, although not specifically shown, since the numerical symbol constituting the first reach line in the four-line pattern is "2," the numerical symbol constituting the second reach line is "1," the numerical symbol constituting the third reach line is "8," and the numerical symbol constituting the fourth reach line is "7." Then, as described above, the numerical symbol constituting the first reach line is the target of the reach stimulation effect in mode PT3, and the reach stimulation effect is executed by the numerical symbol "2."
In this case, the number symbols that are the target of the reach stimulation effect and the number symbols that notify of a jackpot win are the same.

When the above-mentioned decision is made, although not shown, after the number "2" is displayed as the first stop symbol, a reach-inducing effect is executed to incite whether the number "2" will stop as the second stop symbol, and after the number "2" scrolls downward, the number "3" is displayed as the second stop symbol, and further the number "2" is displayed as the third stop symbol. This initially notifies the player that it is a miss.
Also, although not specifically shown, in the special reach display that is executed after the development teasing effect and the development suggestion effect are executed, first, a first reach line consisting of the number symbol "2" is displayed, followed by an additional display of a second reach line consisting of the number symbol "1", an additional display of a third reach line consisting of the number symbol "8", and an additional display of a fourth reach line consisting of the number symbol "7".
Furthermore, although not specifically shown, in the special development effect that is executed after the fourth reach line is displayed, the number symbol "7" that constitutes the fourth reach line pops up and disappears, the number symbol "8" that constitutes the third reach line pops up and disappears, the number symbol "1" that constitutes the second reach line pops up and disappears, and then the number symbol "2" that constitutes the first reach line pops up, and then the number symbol "2" is displayed as the third stopped symbol. This notifies the player that they have won the jackpot.

(Specific Example 3)
For example, let us assume that the result of the lottery is a loss, and a loss pattern is determined as the special development effect to be executed, the number symbol "6" is determined as the number symbol that constitutes the reach of the first reach line, and a two-line pattern is determined as the special reach display to be executed. Although not specifically shown, as described above, the number symbol that constitutes the first reach line is the target of the reach stimulation effect in mode PT3, and therefore the reach stimulation effect will be executed by the number symbol "6".
Since the result of the lottery is a loss, the special development effect is executed according to the loss pattern.

When the above-mentioned decision is made, although not shown, after the number "6" is displayed as the first stop symbol, a reach-inducing effect is executed to incite whether the number "6" will stop as the second stop symbol, and after the number "6" scrolls downward, the number "7" is displayed as the second stop symbol, and further the number "6" is displayed as the third stop symbol. This initially notifies the player that they have lost.
In addition, in the special reach display that is executed after the development teasing effect and the development suggestion effect are executed, first, the first reach line consisting of the number pattern "6" is displayed, and then the second reach line consisting of the number pattern "5" is additionally displayed (see Figures 154 (a) to (b)).
Furthermore, in the special development effect that is executed after the second reach line is displayed, the number symbol "5" that constitutes the second reach line pops up and disappears, and the number symbol "6" that constitutes the first reach line pops up and disappears, and then the number symbol "7" is displayed as the third stop symbol (see Figure 154 (c) to (j)). This notifies the player that they have lost.

(Specific Example 4)
For example, suppose the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the determined jackpot symbol is X2, a reversal jackpot pattern is determined as the special development effect to be executed, a "1" is determined as the number symbol constituting the reach on the first reach line, and a four-line pattern is determined as the special reach display to be executed. Then, since the number symbol constituting the first reach line in the four-line pattern is "1," the number symbol constituting the second reach line is "8," the number symbol constituting the third reach line is "7," and the number symbol constituting the fourth reach line is "6" (see FIG. 155(a)). As described above, since the number symbol constituting the first reach line is the target of the reach stimulation effect in mode PT3, the reach stimulation effect is executed by the number symbol "1."
In this case, since it is a reversal jackpot pattern, the number symbol that indicates a jackpot win will be "7", and the number symbol that is the target of the reach stimulation performance and the number symbol that indicates a jackpot win will be different.

When the above-mentioned decision is made, although not shown, after the number "1" is displayed as the first stop symbol, a reach-inducing effect is executed to incite whether the number "1" will stop as the second stop symbol, and after the number "1" scrolls downward, the number "2" is displayed as the second stop symbol, and further the number "1" is displayed as the third stop symbol. This initially notifies the player that they have lost.
In addition, in the special reach display that is executed after the development teasing effect and the development suggestion effect are executed, first, the first reach line consisting of the number pattern "1" is displayed, and then, in sequence, the second reach line consisting of the number pattern "8" is additionally displayed, the third reach line consisting of the number pattern "7" is additionally displayed, and the fourth reach line consisting of the number pattern "6" is additionally displayed (see Figure 155 (a)).
Furthermore, in the special development effect that is executed after the fourth reach line is displayed, the number symbol "6" that constitutes the fourth reach line pops up and disappears, the number symbol "7" that constitutes the third reach line pops up and disappears, the number symbol "8" that constitutes the second reach line pops up and disappears, and the number symbol "1" that constitutes the first reach line pops up and disappears, in this order, and then the number symbol "2" is displayed as the third stopped symbol (see Figures 155(b) to (e)). As a result, a miss is initially announced, but then a reverse image is displayed, and the first, second, and third stopped symbols all become number symbols "7," announcing a jackpot win and the execution of a special game in which 10 rounds of play will be played (see Figures 155(f) to (g)).

(Outline of the number patterns that are the target of reach-inducing effects)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the first, second, and third stop symbols are all stopped and displayed as number symbols other than "7," only the winning of the jackpot is confirmed, but when the number symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, not only the winning of the jackpot but also the execution of a special game in which 10 rounds of play are played is confirmed. Therefore, compared to number symbols other than "7," the number symbol "7" is more strongly desired by players to be stopped and displayed.
In the above-mentioned modes PT1, PT2, and PT3, a reach prompting effect is executed to prompt whether or not a reach display consisting of a predetermined number symbol will be made. In this case, if a reach prompting effect is executed for the number symbol "7," the player will have a strong sense of expectation that a reach display using the number symbol "7" will be made, but in the end, the reach display using the number symbol "7" will not be made, which may cause the player to feel a strong sense of disappointment and reduce the player's interest in the effect.

Furthermore, when a variable effect according to mode PT3 is executed when a jackpot is won, the above-mentioned special reach display is executed after the reach prompting effect is executed, and the first, second, and third stop symbols are all stopped and displayed with the same number pattern, thereby announcing a jackpot. In this case, if a reach prompting effect is executed targeting the number symbol "7," and a reach prompting effect with the number symbol "7" is not executed, but a situation occurs in which a jackpot is announced by a number symbol other than "7" being stopped and displayed afterwards, the player will be made to think that if a reach prompting effect with the number symbol "7" had been executed, the first, second, and third stop symbols might have all been stopped and displayed with the number symbol "7." This gives the player a great sense of loss because a reach prompting effect with the number symbol "7" was not executed when the reach prompting effect was executed, and there is a risk that the player's interest in the effect will be reduced.

In accordance with another application example 13, when a variable effect according to mode PT1, mode PT2, or mode PT3 is executed, control is executed to prevent the target of the reach stimulation effect executed during the variable effect from becoming the number symbol "7." By executing this control, the reach stimulation effect is executed for a number symbol other than "7" in the variable effect according to mode PT1, mode PT2, or mode PT3, preventing the player's interest in the effect from decreasing, as described above. This control will be described in more detail later.

(Summary of various decisions when variable effects according to mode PT1, mode PT2, and mode PT3 are executed)
In another application example 13, the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 stores a mode PT1/PT2 number pattern determination table for determining the number pattern when it is decided to execute a variable performance according to mode PT1 or mode PT2, as shown in Figure 156.
In this mode PT1/PT2 number symbol determination table, number symbols are determined in association with number symbol determination random numbers, which are effect random numbers obtained within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 249).
Then, when it is decided to execute a variable effect according to mode PT1 or mode PT2, the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 obtains a random number for determining a number pattern of 1 from the above-mentioned numerical range, and determines a number pattern based on the obtained random number for determining a number pattern and the mode PT1/PT2 number pattern determination table.

As shown in Figure 156, according to the number symbol determination table for modes PT1 and PT2, the number symbol "1" (probability of determination: 13%), number symbol "2" (probability of determination: 13%), number symbol "3" (probability of determination: 13%), number symbol "4" (probability of determination: 13%), number symbol "5" (probability of determination: 12%), number symbol "6" (probability of determination: 12%), number symbol "7" (probability of determination: 12%), or number symbol "8" (probability of determination: 12%) is determined. In other words, the number symbol determination table for modes PT1 and PT2 allows any of the number symbols "1" to "8" to be determined, including the number symbol "7".

The determination of the number symbol based on the above-mentioned PT1/PT2 mode number symbol determination table is intended to provisionally determine the number symbol that will be stopped and displayed as the first stop symbol when it is determined that a variable effect will be performed in mode PT1 or mode PT2.

In addition, in another application example 13, the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 stores a mode PT3 special development effect determination table for determining the type of special development effect to be executed when it is decided to execute a variable effect according to mode PT3, as shown in Figure 157 (a).
In this mode PT3 special development effect determination table, the type of special development effect (miss pattern, normal jackpot pattern, reversal jackpot pattern) is determined in correspondence with the received variation pattern command (either "03H", "A3H", or "A6H") and the special development effect determination random number, which is an effect random number obtained within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 249).
Then, when it is decided to execute a variable performance according to mode PT3, the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 obtains a special development performance determination random number of 1 from the above-mentioned numerical range, and determines the type of special development performance to be executed based on the obtained special development performance determination random number, the received variable pattern command, and the mode PT3 special development performance determination table.

As shown in Figure 157 (a), according to the mode PT3 special development effect determination table, if the received variation pattern command is "03H" (i.e., if the result of the win/lose lottery is a lose), the lose pattern (with a 100% probability of being determined) is determined as the special development effect to be executed.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "A3H" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a jackpot and the determined jackpot pattern is X1 or X3 (a special game in which five rounds of play are played is executed)), the normal jackpot pattern (with a 100% probability of being determined) is determined as the special development effect to be executed.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "A6H" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a jackpot and the determined jackpot pattern is X2 (a special game in which 10 rounds of play are played is executed)), the normal jackpot pattern (with a probability of being determined of 85%) or the reversal jackpot pattern (with a probability of being determined of 15%) will be determined as the special development effect to be executed.

In addition, in another application example 13, the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 stores a mode PT3 number pattern determination table for determining the number pattern when it is decided to execute a variable performance according to mode PT3, as shown in Figure 157 (b).
In this PT3 number pattern determination table, number patterns are determined in correspondence with the received variable pattern command (either "03H", "A3H", or "A6H") and the number pattern determination random number obtained within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 249).
Then, when it is decided to execute the variable effect according to mode PT3, the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 obtains a number pattern determination random number of 1 from the above-mentioned numerical range, and determines the number pattern based on the obtained number pattern determination random number, the received variable pattern command, and the mode PT3 number pattern determination table.

As shown in Figure 157 (b), according to the number symbol determination table for mode PT3, when the received variable pattern command is "03H", the number symbol "1" (probability of determination is 13%), the number symbol "2" (probability of determination is 13%), the number symbol "3" (probability of determination is 13%), the number symbol "4" (probability of determination is 13%), the number symbol "5" (probability of determination is 12%), the number symbol "6" (probability of determination is 12%), the number symbol "7" (probability of determination is 12%) or the number symbol "8" (probability of determination is 12%) will be determined.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "A3H", the number symbol "1" (probability of determination is 13%), the number symbol "2" (probability of determination is 13%), the number symbol "3" (probability of determination is 13%), the number symbol "4" (probability of determination is 13%), the number symbol "5" (probability of determination is 12%), the number symbol "6" (probability of determination is 12%), the number symbol "7" (probability of determination is 12%) or the number symbol "8" (probability of determination is 12%) will be determined.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "A6H", the number symbol "1" (probability of determination is 12%), the number symbol "2" (probability of determination is 12%), the number symbol "3" (probability of determination is 12%), the number symbol "4" (probability of determination is 11%), the number symbol "5" (probability of determination is 11%), the number symbol "6" (probability of determination is 11%), the number symbol "7" (probability of determination is 20%) or the number symbol "8" (probability of determination is 11%) will be determined.
That is, in the PT3 number symbol determination table, regardless of whether the received variable pattern command is "03H,""A3H," or "A6H," any of the number symbols "1" to "8," including the number symbol "7," can be determined.

The determination of the number symbols based on the above-mentioned PT3 number symbol determination table is intended to provisionally determine the number symbols that make up the first reach line when it is determined that a special development effect will be executed due to a miss pattern, to provisionally determine the number symbols that indicate a jackpot win (the number symbols that are stopped and displayed as the first, second, and third stopping symbols) when it is determined that a special development effect will be executed due to a normal jackpot pattern, and to provisionally determine the number symbols that make up the first reach line when it is determined that a special development effect will be executed due to a reversal jackpot pattern.

In addition, in another application example 13, the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 stores a mode PT3 special reach display determination table for determining the type of special reach display to be executed when it is determined to execute a variable presentation according to mode PT3, as shown in Figure 157 (c), and the type of reach line on which the number pattern determined as described above (number pattern indicating a jackpot win) will be displayed in a stopped state when a normal jackpot pattern is determined.
This PT3 special reach display determination table defines the type of special development effect (either a miss pattern, a normal jackpot pattern, or a reversal jackpot pattern) determined as described above, and the type of special reach display to be executed in correspondence with the special reach determination random number, which is an effect random number obtained within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 249), and the type of reach line on which the number pattern determined as described above is displayed in a stopped state when a normal jackpot pattern is determined.
Then, when it is decided to execute the variable effect according to mode PT3, and the special development effect and number pattern are determined as described above, the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 obtains a special reach determination random number of 1 from the above-mentioned numerical range, and based on the obtained special reach determination random number, the determined type of special development effect, and the mode PT3 special reach display determination table, determines the type of special reach display to be executed and the type of reach line on which the above-mentioned number pattern will be displayed when a normal jackpot pattern is determined.

As shown in Figure 157 (c), according to the mode PT3 special reach display determination table, when a miss pattern is determined as the special development effect, a 2-line pattern (determination probability is 80%) or a 4-line pattern (determination probability is 20%) is determined as the type of special reach display.
In addition, when a normal jackpot pattern is determined as a special development effect, the type of special reach display and the type of reach line on which the above-mentioned number symbols are stopped and displayed are as follows: a 2-line pattern is executed and the above-mentioned number symbols are stopped and displayed on the first reach line (i.e., the jackpot is announced by the number symbols constituting the first reach line) a 2-line pattern hit on the first reach line (determining probability is 10%), a 2-line pattern is executed and the above-mentioned number symbols are stopped and displayed on the second reach line (i.e., the jackpot is announced by the number symbols constituting the second reach line) a 2-line pattern hit on the second reach line (determining probability is 20%), a 4-line pattern is executed and the above-mentioned number symbols are stopped and displayed on the first reach line a 4-line pattern hit on the first reach line (determining probability is 20%), The following are determined: a 4-line pattern second reach line hit (probability of winning: 15%), where a line pattern is executed and the above-mentioned number pattern is displayed stopped on the second reach line; a 4-line pattern third reach line hit (probability of winning: 15%), where a 4-line pattern is executed and the above-mentioned number pattern is displayed stopped on the third reach line (i.e., a jackpot is announced by the number pattern making up the third reach line); a 4-line pattern fourth reach line hit (probability of winning: 15%), where a 4-line pattern is executed and the above-mentioned number pattern is displayed stopped on the fourth reach line (i.e., a jackpot is announced by the number pattern making up the fourth reach line); or an 8-line pattern first reach line hit (probability of winning: 5%), where an 8-line pattern is executed and the above-mentioned number pattern is displayed stopped on the first reach line.
In addition, when a reversal jackpot pattern is determined as a special development effect, a two-line pattern (probability of determination is 30%) or a four-line pattern (probability of determination is 70%) is determined as the type of special reach display.

In addition, according to the PT3 special reach display determination table, when a normal jackpot pattern is determined as the special development effect, the probability that a 4-line pattern will be determined as the special reach display is higher than when a miss pattern is determined, and the probability that a 2-line pattern will be determined is lower. Therefore, the likelihood of winning a jackpot is higher when a 4-line pattern special reach display is executed than when a 2-line pattern special reach display is executed.

Furthermore, when a normal jackpot pattern is determined as the special development effect, when the special reach display is executed in a two-line pattern, a pattern in which a jackpot is announced by the number symbols constituting the second reach line (a second reach line win) is more likely to be determined than a pattern in which a jackpot is announced by the number symbols constituting the first reach line (a first reach line win). Also, when the special reach display is executed in a four-line pattern, a pattern in which a jackpot is announced by the number symbols constituting reach lines other than the first reach line (a second reach line win, a third reach line win, a fourth reach line win) is more likely to be determined than a pattern in which a jackpot is announced by the number symbols constituting the first reach line (a first reach line win). In other words, whether the special reach display is executed in a two-line pattern or a four-line pattern, a jackpot is more likely to be announced by the number symbols constituting reach lines other than the first reach line than by the number symbols constituting the first reach line.
This makes it easier to notify of a big win at an early stage of the special development presentation, thereby improving the presentation effect of the special development presentation.
In addition, the pattern in which a jackpot is announced by the number symbols constituting the first reach line may be made easier to determine than the pattern in which a jackpot is announced by the number symbols constituting reach lines other than the first reach line.

(Outline of control to prevent the target of reach stimulation effect from becoming the number symbol “7”)
By making the various decisions described above, the numerical symbols that will be the target of the reach stimulation effect will be provisionally determined regardless of whether the variable effect is performed in mode PT1, mode PT2, or mode PT3.
Specifically, when a variable effect is performed in mode PT1 or mode PT2, the number pattern determined as described above will be displayed as the first stop pattern, and therefore the number pattern will be the target of the reach-inducing effect.
Furthermore, when a variable effect is performed by mode PT3, if a miss pattern is determined as the special development effect to be executed, the number symbols determined as described above become the number symbols that make up the first reach line, and therefore these number symbols become the target of the reach-inducing effect. Also, if a reversal jackpot pattern is determined as the special development effect to be executed, the number symbols determined as described above become the number symbols that make up the first reach line, and therefore these number symbols become the target of the reach-inducing effect. Also, if a normal jackpot pattern is determined as the special development effect to be executed, the number symbols that make up the first reach line are determined based on the number symbols determined as described above, the type of special reach display, and the reach line on which the number symbols are stopped and displayed, and therefore these number symbols become the target of the reach-inducing effect.
Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the target of the reach-inducing effect is the number symbol "7," there is a risk that the player's interest in the effect will be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the target of the reach stimulation effect provisionally determined by the various decisions described above will be the number symbol "7", and if the target of the reach stimulation effect will be the number symbol "7", the number symbol determined as described above is changed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 158, the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 in another application example 13 has a reach stimulation effect target pattern check table in which number patterns that are the target of the reach stimulation effect are stored, which are determined based on the number patterns determined as described above, the mode of the variable effect to be executed (mode PT1, mode PT2, mode PT3), the type of special development effect determined as described above, the type of special reach display, and the type of reach line on which the number patterns described above are stopped and displayed when a normal jackpot pattern is determined.
When the various decisions described above are made, the sub-CPU 301 refers to this reach stimulation effect target symbol check table and checks the number symbols that are the targets of the reach stimulation effect based on the contents of the various decisions.

As shown in FIG. 158, according to this reach stimulation effect target symbol check table, (1) when a variable effect according to mode PT1 or mode PT2 is executed, and the number symbol "7" is determined by the various decisions described above, (2) when a variable effect according to mode PT3 is executed, and a miss pattern, a 2-line pattern, and the number symbol "7" are determined by the various decisions described above, (3) when a variable effect according to mode PT3 is executed, and a miss pattern, a 4-line pattern, and the number symbol "7" are determined by the various decisions described above, (4) when a variable effect according to mode PT3 is executed, and a miss pattern, a 4-line pattern, and the number symbol "7" are determined by the various decisions described above, When the effect is executed, the normal jackpot pattern, the 2-line pattern, the second reach line hit, and the number symbol "6" are determined by the various decisions described above; (5) when the variable effect by mode PT3 is executed, the normal jackpot pattern, the 2-line pattern, the first reach line hit, and the number symbol "7" are determined by the various decisions described above; (6) when the variable effect by mode PT3 is executed, the normal jackpot pattern, the 4-line pattern, the fourth reach line hit, and the number symbol "4" are determined by the various decisions described above; (7) when the variable effect by mode PT3 is executed, the normal jackpot pattern, the 4-line pattern, the fourth reach line hit, and the number symbol "4" are determined by the various decisions described above; (8) When a variable performance according to mode PT3 is executed, and the normal jackpot pattern, the 4-line pattern third reach line hit, and the number symbol "5" are determined by the various decisions described above, (9) When a variable performance according to mode PT3 is executed, and the normal jackpot pattern, the 4-line pattern second reach line hit, and the number symbol "6" are determined by the various decisions described above, (10) When a variable performance according to mode PT4 is executed, and the normal jackpot pattern, the 4-line pattern first reach line hit, and the number symbol "7" are determined by the various decisions described above, (11) When a variable performance according to mode PT5 is executed, and the normal jackpot pattern, the 4-line pattern first reach line hit, and the number symbol "7" are determined by the various decisions described above, (12) When a variable performance according to mode PT6 is executed, and the normal jackpot pattern, the 4-line pattern first reach line hit, and the number symbol "7" are determined by the various decisions described above, (13) When a variable performance according to mode PT7 is executed, and the normal jackpot pattern, the 4-line pattern third reach line hit, and the number symbol "5" are determined by the various decisions described above, (14) When a variable performance according to mode PT8 is executed, and the normal jackpot pattern, the 4-line pattern first reach line hit, and the number symbol "7" are determined by the various decisions described above, (15) When a variable performance according to mode PT9 is executed, and the normal jackpot pattern, the 4-line pattern first reach line hit, and the number symbol "7" are determined by the various decisions described above, (16) When a variable performance according to mode PT1 is executed, and the normal jackpot pattern, the 4-line pattern When a variable effect is executed by T3, and a normal jackpot pattern, an 8-line pattern first reach line hit, and the number symbol "7" are determined by the various decisions described above, (11) when a variable effect is executed by mode PT3, and a reversal jackpot pattern, a 2-line pattern, and the number symbol "7" are determined by the various decisions described above, (12) when a variable effect is executed by mode PT3, and a reversal jackpot pattern, a 4-line pattern, and the number symbol "7" are determined by the various decisions described above, the target of the reach teasing effect becomes the number symbol "7".
Therefore, in any of the above cases (1) to (12), the sub-CPU 301 determines that the target of the reach stimulation effect will be the number symbol "7."

Then, when it is determined that the target of the reach stimulation effect will be the number pattern of "7", if the number pattern determined by the various decisions described above is other than "6", the sub-CPU 301 changes this determined number pattern to the number pattern that comes next in the display order of the cyclic display (i.e., if the determined number pattern is "1", it will be "2", if the determined number pattern is "2", it will be "3", if the determined number pattern is "3", it will be "4", if the determined number pattern is "4", it will be "5", if the determined number pattern is "5", it will be "6", if the determined number pattern is "7", it will be "8", and if the determined number pattern is "8", it will be "1"), and when the number pattern determined by the various decisions described above is "6", it changes this determined number pattern to the number pattern that comes previous in the display order of the cyclic display, "5".
As a result, the target of the reach stimulation effect will not be the number symbol "7".

Here, if the determined number symbol is "6," then, just as when a number symbol other than "6" is used, changing the display order of the cyclical display to the next number symbol results in the number symbol "7." In this case, for example, if a jackpot symbol X1 or X3 has been determined, the jackpot will be announced by the number symbol "7" even though five rounds of play will be played in the special game that is subsequently played, resulting in the content of the presentation being inconsistent with the game result. Therefore, as mentioned above, when the determined number symbol is "6," the display order of the cyclical display is changed to the previous number symbol.

The change to the determined number pattern is not limited to the processing described above. For example, it may be possible to determine which of the numbers "1," "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," and "8" is the number pattern for which the target of the reach stimulation effect is not "7," and change to one of the determined number patterns.

As described above, in pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when variable effects according to mode PT1, mode PT2, or mode PT3 are executed, the number "7" symbol used to notify of a jackpot win and the execution of a special game in which 10 rounds of play are played is not subject to the reach-inducing effect. This prevents the player from feeling strongly disappointed by the lack of a reach indication using the number "7," and ultimately prevents the player's interest in the effects from decreasing.

(Variations regarding the variable effects according to aspect PT1, aspect PT2, and aspect PT3)
The variation effects according to mode PT1, mode PT2, and mode PT3 are intended to be executed when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 during a normal game state excluding a variation immediately before the first low-probability time-saving mode, but are not limited to this. For example, they may be executed when a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 16 during a normal game state excluding a variation immediately before the first low-probability time-saving mode, or when a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 15 or the second start winning slot 16 during a game state other than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability time-saving mode, a second low-probability time-saving mode, or a first low-probability time-saving mode).
In this case, the opportunities for executing the variable effects according to the mode PT1, mode PT2, and mode PT3 increase, which can increase the interest of the player.

Furthermore, in the reach prompting effect executed during the variable effects according to mode PT1, mode PT2, and mode PT3, only the number symbol "7" is not included in the prompting as to whether or not to display a reach prompting display, but this is not limited to this. For example, if the number symbol "3" is set to be statically displayed only when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, which sets a high-probability time-shortened game state after the special game ends (the number symbol "3" indicates a jackpot win), the number symbol "3" may also not be included in the prompting as to whether or not to display a reach prompting display in the reach prompting effect. Even in this case, the same control as in Application Example 13 may be applied.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 can be achieved.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned reach prompting effect may be set to be executed even when a variable effect is performed in a mode other than mode PT1, mode PT2, and mode PT3 (for example, a mode in which a predetermined preview image is displayed at a predetermined timing, a mode in which the above-mentioned pseudo consecutive effect is executed, etc.). And, even in the reach prompting effect that is executed when a variable effect is performed in a mode other than mode PT1, mode PT2, and mode PT3, the number pattern of "7" may not be used as a target for prompting whether or not to perform a reach display.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 can be achieved.
In addition, in the reach prompting effect that is executed when a variable effect is performed based on a mode other than mode PT1, mode PT2, or mode PT3, the number pattern of "7" may be used as the target for prompting whether or not to display a reach.

Furthermore, when the variable effects according to mode PT1, mode PT2, and mode PT3 are executed, the number symbol "7" is not always set as the target of the reach stimulation effect, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the number symbol "7" is determined as the number symbol that notifies a jackpot win (i.e., when the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol are all stopped and displayed as the number symbol "7," thereby notifying a jackpot win), the number symbol "7" may be set as the target of the reach stimulation effect.
In this case, even if the reach prompting effect is performed and the reach display by the number symbol "7" is not performed, the winning of the jackpot is eventually announced by the number symbol "7", so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a loss, while increasing the variety of execution of the reach prompting effect and increasing the interest of the player.

Furthermore, the control to exclude the number "7" from the target of the reach-inducing effect may also be applied to other effects. For example, if a reach display is made using a predetermined number symbol and a miss is initially announced, but then a reach display is made using a different number symbol and a reach-development effect is executed, the number "7" may not be displayed as a stop in the reach display that is performed first. Furthermore, for example, if a provisional stop is made using a predetermined number symbol in a so-called pseudo-consecutive effect, the provisional stop using the number "7" may not be performed. Furthermore, for example, in a pre-reading effect that can start a predetermined suggestion related to a reserved memory before the start of a variable effect based on the predetermined reserved memory, a suggestion is made using a predetermined number symbol, and a suggestion is made using a different number symbol in the variable effect based on the above-mentioned predetermined reserved memory, the predetermined suggestion using the number "7" may not be performed during the pre-reading effect.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 can be achieved.

Furthermore, whether the variable effect according to mode PT1, mode PT2, or mode PT3 is executed, the numerical symbol to be stopped and displayed is first provisionally determined from the numerical symbols "1" through "8," including the numerical symbol "7," through the various determinations described above. Then, the numerical symbol to be the target of the reach-inducing effect is determined. If the numerical symbol is the "7," the determined numerical symbol is changed to another numerical symbol. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the variable effect according to mode PT1 or mode PT2 is executed, the numerical symbol to be stopped and displayed as the first stop symbol is determined. Therefore, any numerical symbol other than the numerical symbol "7" may be determined. Furthermore, instead of determining a provisional numerical symbol, the numerical symbol to be the target of the reach-inducing effect may first be determined, and then the numerical symbol to indicate a jackpot win may be determined by determining the special reach display and special development effect mode in addition to the result of this determination.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 can be achieved.

(Outline of warning effects)
The warning effect is an effect that gives the player a predetermined warning.

In a pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, if a game ball enters the second start winning slot 16 during normal game play and the result of the lottery based on that ball entering is a loss, a "590-second fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation display and fluctuation presentation of the second special symbol (losing symbol) based on that ball entering is executed over an extremely long fluctuation time of 590 seconds (see Figure 133 (a)).

Here, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, if the first special symbol (jackpot symbol) that has been determined as a jackpot in a win/lose lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning slot 15 is displayed in a stopped state during the 590-second changing display of the second special symbol (losing symbol), the second special symbol, which is the losing symbol that is being displayed in a changing state, is also forcibly displayed in a stopped state along with this stopped display.
For example, even if a game ball is shot into the second game area 12b due to an operating error or the like and enters the second start winning port 161 during normal game play, and the display of the second special symbol (missing symbol) begins to change over an extremely long period of time, such as 590 seconds, if a jackpot is won based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and the first special symbol (jackpot symbol) is displayed in a stopped state, the second special symbol will also be displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, when the special game based on the above-mentioned jackpot win ends and a high-probability time-saving game state or a second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the display of the second special symbol in a stopped state can be started again from this point on.
Therefore, in the above-mentioned case, even though a high probability time-shortened game state or a second low probability time-shortened game state is set, a new second special chart change display cannot be made until the change display of the second special chart that has been continuing since before the start of the special game has ended, and a situation in which smooth game progress is hindered does not occur.

In contrast to this, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, if the first special symbol (losing symbol) that has been determined as a losing symbol in a winning/losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning slot 15 is displayed in a stopped state during the 590-second changing display of the second special symbol (losing symbol), the second special symbol, which is the losing symbol during the changing display, is not forcibly displayed in a stopped state, and the changing display of the second special symbol continues.
In this case, for example, in a situation where the first low-probability time-saving game state will be set if the first special symbol is displayed only a few more times (i.e., just before the first low-probability time-saving game state is set), if a game ball shot into the second game area 12b due to an operating error or the like normally enters the second start winning port 161 and the display of the second special symbol (losing symbol) begins for an extremely long display time of 590 seconds, the game ball will enter the first start winning port 15, resulting in a loss, and even if the first special symbol (losing symbol) is displayed as a stopped symbol, the second special symbol will not be displayed as a stopped symbol. Therefore, although the first low-probability time-saving game state will be set, a new display of the second special symbol cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol until the display of the ongoing second special symbol has finished, which may hinder smooth game progress.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, in order to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned situation as much as possible, it is possible to execute a warning effect that prevents game balls from being shot toward the second game area 12b during the period in which the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times before the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set.

Specifically, the sub-CPU 301 executes the above-mentioned warning effect based on the fact that the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes that have been executed without winning a jackpot since the second low-probability time-saving game state (low-probability game state) was set after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or X6 was completed satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, reaching 802 times), that the high-probability game state that was set after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, X2, X4 or X5 was completed without winning a jackpot, and that the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes that have been executed without winning a jackpot since the normal game state (low-probability game state) was set after the completion of the high-probability game state was completed without winning a jackpot satisfies a predetermined condition, or that the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes that have been executed without winning a jackpot since the normal game state was set after the RAM was cleared satisfies a predetermined condition.
In other words, the above-mentioned warning effect is executed when the remaining number of time-saving activations (900 times) reaches a predetermined number (98 times) after the counting of the number of time-saving activations has started (i.e., when the count value reaches a predetermined value (98) after the time-saving activation counter has started counting).

In this warning presentation, as shown in Figure 159, a warning notice is given to the player to prevent him or her from shooting the game ball towards the second game area 12b (for example, a warning image is displayed in which the words "Right-handed shots strictly prohibited!" scroll horizontally).
The above-mentioned warning effect continues to be executed until the sum of the number of times the first special chart changes and the number of times the second special chart changes reaches the number of times the time-saving feature is activated (i.e., the count value of the time-saving feature activation counter becomes 0), and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set or a jackpot is won.

In pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, each time the first or second special symbol is displayed, a time-saving activation count command indicating the count value of the time-saving activation count counter is sent from main control board 100 to sub-control board 300, thereby enabling sub-control board 300 to grasp the count value of the time-saving activation count counter (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving activations). Sub-CPU 301 then derives the total number of times the first special symbol has changed and the second special symbol has changed based on the count value indicated by the received time-saving activation count command, and determines whether the derived result satisfies the above-mentioned predetermined condition. If it determines that the predetermined condition is met, it executes the above-mentioned warning effect. Furthermore, during the execution of the warning effect, sub-CPU 301 determines whether the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set and whether a jackpot has been won, and if it determines that the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set or a jackpot has been won, it terminates the warning effect being executed.

As a result of the above, as long as the player continues playing in accordance with the above-mentioned warning effects, the game ball will not normally enter the second start winning slot 161, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned situation as much as possible.

Here, the number of times as the above-mentioned predetermined condition is set to the number of times the time-saving function is activated minus the maximum number of times the first special chart variable display can be executed between the start and end of the variable display based on a single game ball entering the normal second start winning port 161 during normal game play.
In other words, the time from the start to the end of the fluctuation display based on one game ball entering the normal second start winning port 161 during normal game mode (590 seconds) is divided by the shortest fluctuation time for one fluctuation based on a game ball entering the first start winning port 15 during normal game mode (6 seconds) to obtain the number of times (98 times) minus the number of times (900 times) that the time-saving function is activated, and the result is set as the number of times as the above-mentioned specified condition (802 times).
By setting it up in this way, if a single game ball were to enter the normal second start winning slot 161 immediately after the warning display has begun, there is a high possibility that the variable display of the second special chart based on that ball entering will end before the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, thereby making it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned situation as much as possible.

The number of times set as the above-mentioned predetermined condition is not limited to the above.
For example, it may be the number of times the time-saving feature is activated minus the average number of times the first special chart's variable display can be executed between the start and end of the variable display based on a single game ball entering the normal second start winning port 161 during normal game mode (i.e., the number obtained by dividing the time "590 seconds" from the start to the end of the variable display based on a single game ball entering the normal second start winning port 161 during normal game mode by the average variable time per variable display based on a game ball entering the first start winning port 15 during normal game mode).
Alternatively, the number of times the time-saving feature is activated may be the maximum number of times that the first special chart can be displayed between the start of the display of the changes based on the first game ball and the end of the display of the changes based on all game balls when a number of game balls (four in this application example) equivalent to the maximum number of reserved balls that can be stored during the normal game state enter the normal second start winning port 161 (i.e., the number obtained by dividing the time from the start of the display of the changes based on the first game ball to the end of the display of the changes based on the fourth game ball when four game balls enter the normal second start winning port 161 during the normal game state, which is 2,360 seconds (= 590 seconds x 4 balls), by the shortest time for one change based on a game ball entering the first start winning port 15 during the normal game state, which is 6 seconds).
Alternatively, the number may be the number obtained by subtracting the average number of times the time-saving feature is activated from the number of times the first special chart changes from the start of the change display based on the first game ball to the end of the change display based on all game balls when a number of game balls equivalent to the maximum number of reserved balls that can be stored during the normal game state enter the normal second start winning port 161 (i.e., the number obtained by dividing the time "2360 seconds" from the start of the change display based on the first game ball to the end of the change display based on the fourth game ball when four game balls enter the normal second start winning port 161 during the normal game state by the average change time per change based on game balls entering the first start winning port 15 during the normal game state).

In addition, the warning notification used in the warning performance is not limited to the display of the warning image as described above. In addition to or instead of displaying the warning image, a sound (for example, a sound saying "Right hits strictly prohibited!") may be output or a specified lamp may be turned on to prevent the player from attempting to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b.

Furthermore, in conjunction with the execution of the above-mentioned attention-calling effect, the remaining number of fluctuations (the remaining number of times that time-saving will be activated) until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set may be displayed. Note that the display of this remaining number of fluctuations may be started in conjunction with the start of the above-mentioned attention-calling effect, or may be set at a time point different from the start of the above-mentioned attention-calling effect (a time point earlier than the start of the above-mentioned attention-calling effect (for example, the time point when a fluctuation that is a predetermined number of times before the fluctuation that starts the attention-calling effect starts, the time point when this fluctuation ends, etc.), or a time point later than the start of the above-mentioned attention-calling effect (for example, the time point when a fluctuation that is a predetermined number of times after the fluctuation that starts the attention-calling effect starts, the time point when this fluctuation ends, etc.)).
In this way, when the remaining number of variations is displayed, the player's expectations regarding the setting of the first low-probability time-shortened gaming state can be increased.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, when a game ball enters the normal second start entry port 161 during normal game play, an operation notification is executed to encourage the game ball to be shot toward the first game area 12a, but this operation notification may also be executed while the above-mentioned warning effect is being executed, or this operation notification may not be executed while the above-mentioned warning effect is being executed.
Furthermore, if the above-mentioned operation notification is set to be executed even while the above-mentioned warning effect is being executed, the warning image displayed in the warning effect may be set to have a higher display priority than the operation notification image displayed in the operation notification, or the priority may be set to be lower.

Next, the control processing of the sub-control board 300 in another application example 13 will be explained, focusing on the contents related to the execution of the first number display effect and the second number display effect in the high probability time-shortening game state, the contents related to the execution of the first low probability time-shortening information suggestion effect, and the contents related to the execution of the variable effects according to mode PT1, mode PT2, and mode PT3.
In the sub-control board 300 of another application example 13, main processing, timer interrupt processing, and variation pattern command reception processing are executed, but since these processes are almost the same as the main processing, timer interrupt processing, and variation pattern command reception processing executed in the sub-control board 300 of the above-mentioned embodiment (see Figures 55 to 57), their explanation will be omitted.

Next, among the command analysis processes executed in the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 300, the special game end setting command reception processing executed when a setting command is received after the special game end will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 160.
In step 7800, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the received post-special game end setting command and determines whether the game state set after the special game end is a high-probability time-shortened game state. If it is determined that the game state is not a high-probability time-shortened game state, it terminates the post-special game end setting command reception process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is a high-probability time-shortened game state, it proceeds to the next step 7801.
In step 7801, the sub-CPU 301 turns on a high-probability time-shortening flag (configured in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 303) indicating that the high-probability time-shortening gaming state is being set. Although not specifically shown, this high-probability time-shortening flag turns off when the high-probability time-shortening gaming state ends. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 7802.
In step 7802, the sub-CPU 301 executes control to display on the display unit 21a a first remaining number suggestion image indicating 100 remaining times in the high-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving times (high-probability number) indicated by the setting command after the special game ends). This starts the first remaining number display effect, and the first remaining number suggestion image of "100", which corresponds to 100 remaining times, is displayed in the lower left corner of the display unit 21a. Then, after the special game ends, the setting command reception process ends.

Next, the time-saving count command reception process executed when a time-saving count command is received, which is one of the command analysis processes described above, will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 7810, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the high-probability time-saving flag is on. If it is determined that the high-probability time-saving flag is not on (i.e., it is off), the sub-CPU 301 ends the time-saving count command receiving process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high-probability time-saving flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 7811.
In step 7811, the sub-CPU 301 executes control to update and display the first remaining number indication image currently being displayed in accordance with the number included in the received time-saving number command (i.e., the count value of the time-saving number counter, in other words, the number of times remaining until the high-probability time-saving game state ends).The time-saving number command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, so that the first remaining number indication image currently being displayed is updated to a display mode indicating the remaining number of times at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.Then, the process proceeds to the next step 7812.

In step 7812, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the remaining number of times included in the received time-saving number command and determines whether the remaining number of times is equal to or less than a predetermined number (5 times). If it determines that the remaining number of times is not equal to or less than the predetermined number of times (i.e., exceeds the predetermined number of times), it ends the time-saving number command reception process. On the other hand, if it determines that the remaining number of times is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times, it proceeds to the next step 7813.
In step 7813, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the variable display that has started is a variable display of the second special symbol. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, a symbol determination command indicating the type of special symbol determined based on the results of the win/lose lottery is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. The sub-CPU 301 can determine whether the variable display that has started is a variable display of the second special symbol by referencing the type of special symbol indicated by this symbol determination command. If it is determined that the variable display is not a variable display of the second special symbol (i.e., that the variable display is a variable display of the first special symbol), the sub-CPU 301 terminates the time-reduction count command reception process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display is a variable display of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to step 7814.

In step 7814, the sub-CPU 301 executes control to display on the display unit 21a a second remaining number indication image indicating the number of times remaining in the high-probability time-saving game state at the current time. This executes the second remaining number display effect, and the second remaining number indication image corresponding to the current remaining number of times is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a. The time-saving number command reception process then ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine according to Application Example 13, the number of time-saving times and the number of high-probability times corresponding to the high-probability time-saving game state are both 100, so the value of the number of times (remaining times) included in the time-saving number command and the value of the number of times (remaining times) included in the high-probability number command are both the same. Therefore, the above-mentioned time-saving number command reception process may be performed not when a time-saving number command is received, but when a high-probability number command is received.

Next, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect execution process that is executed when a predetermined operation is performed during the customer waiting state and in the state before winning after RAM clear execution or the state before winning after RAM not clear execution will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 162. Note that this first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect execution process is executed in the timer interrupt process of the sub-control board 300.
In step 7820, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether a predetermined operation (pressing the operation button 9b) has been performed. If it is determined that the predetermined operation has not been performed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect execution process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed, the process proceeds to the next step 7821.
In step 7821, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the game is waiting for a customer. If it is determined that the game is not waiting for a customer, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect execution process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is waiting for a customer, the process proceeds to the next step 7822.

In step 7822, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the state is after power recovery and before the first jackpot has been won, that is, whether the state is before a win after RAM clear execution or before a win after RAM not being cleared. If it is determined that the state is not as described above, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect execution process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is as described above, the process proceeds to the next step 7823.
In step 7823, the sub-CPU 301 acquires a random number of 1 from a predetermined range of values (0 to 249), and determines the mode of the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect to be one of modes 1 to 7 based on the current state (the state before winning after RAM clearing or the state before winning after not clearing RAM), the number of times the special symbol has changed since power was restored, the count value of the time-saving activation counter (the number of times remaining until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set), the acquired random number, and the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect mode determination table. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 7824.

In step 7824, the sub-CPU 301 executes control to perform the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect in the manner determined in step 7823 described above. The first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effect execution process then ends.

Next, the processing performed when a variation pattern command of "03H", "A3H" or "A6H" is received and it is decided to execute a variation performance of mode PT1, mode PT2 or mode PT3 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 163.
In step 7830, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the variation effect mode determined based on the received variation pattern command "03H", "A3H", or "A6H" is mode PT1, mode PT2, or mode PT3. If it is determined that the mode is not mode PT1, mode PT2, or mode PT3, it ends the predetermined mode determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode is mode PT1, mode PT2, or mode PT3, it proceeds to the next step 7831.
In step 7831, the sub-CPU 301 determines the various decisions mentioned above, namely, the number symbol, the type of special development effect (miss pattern, normal jackpot pattern, reversal jackpot pattern), the type of special reach display (2-line pattern, 4-line pattern, 8-line pattern), and the type of reach line on which the number symbol is stopped and displayed when a normal jackpot pattern is determined (2-line pattern per first reach line, 2-line pattern per second reach line, 4-line pattern per first reach line, 4-line pattern per second reach line, 4-line pattern per third reach line, 4-line pattern per fourth reach line, 8-line pattern per first reach line). Then, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 7832.

In step 7832, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the reach stimulation effect target symbol check table, and checks the number symbols that are targets of the reach stimulation effect based on the content determined in the above-mentioned step 7831. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 7833.
In step 7833, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the numerical symbol that is the target of the reach stimulation effect confirmed in the above-mentioned step 7832 is "7." If it is determined that it is not "7," the process proceeds to step 7837. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is "7," the process proceeds to the next step 7834.

In step 7834, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the number symbol determined in step 7831 is "6." If it is determined that the number symbol is not "6," the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to step 7836. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number symbol is "6," the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 7835.
In step 7835, the sub-CPU 301 changes the number symbol determined in step 7831 to the number symbol immediately preceding it in the display order of the cyclic display.

In step 7836, which is reached when it is determined in step 7834 that the number symbol is not "6," the sub-CPU 301 changes the number symbol determined in step 7831 to the number symbol that is next in the display order of the cyclic display. Then, the process proceeds to step 7837.
In step 7837, if the number symbols have been changed in step 7835 or step 7836, the sub-CPU 301 executes the variable effects according to mode PT1, mode PT2, and mode PT3 based on the changed number symbols and the content determined in step 7831, or if the number symbols have not been changed, based on the content determined in step 7831. Then, the predetermined mode determination process ends.

(Modification of Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 13)
In the variable presentation in another application example 13, when a game ball enters the starting winning hole into which game balls mainly enter during the set game state, a variable display of a special pattern based on the ball entering is executed in the center of the display unit 21a, and a variable display of a presentation pattern 50 corresponding to the special pattern is executed in the center of the display unit 21a. In addition to the variable display of the presentation pattern 50 in the center of the display unit 21a, a variable display of a specific pattern may be executed in a predetermined display location on the display unit 21a, and the result of the winning/losing lottery may be announced by the stop display mode of the presentation pattern 50 and the stop display mode of a specific pattern different from the presentation pattern 50.
Specifically, for example, during normal game play, when a game ball enters the first start entry port 15, which is the main entry port for game balls, a changing display of the performance pattern 50 corresponding to the first special pattern is executed in the center of the display unit 21a, and in synchronization with the changing display of this performance pattern 50, a changing display of a specific pattern that is extremely smaller than the performance pattern 50 and is more difficult for the player to see than the performance pattern 50 is executed in the lower left corner of the display unit 21a.
Furthermore, for example, when a game ball enters the second start entry port 16 into which game balls mainly enter during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state or the high-probability time-shortening game state, a changing display of the performance pattern 50 corresponding to the second special pattern is executed in the center of the display unit 21a, and in synchronization with the changing display of this performance pattern 50, a changing display of a specific pattern that is extremely smaller in size than the performance pattern 50 and is more difficult for the player to see than the performance pattern 50 is executed in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 can be achieved.

In addition, if a game ball enters a starting entry port other than the starting entry port into which game balls mainly enter during the currently set game state, the display of the effect pattern 50 corresponding to that special pattern in the center of the display unit 21a will not be executed. However, it is also possible to execute the display of the effect pattern 50, but not the specific pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, the first number display effect and the second number display effect can be executed during a high probability time-saving game state and a first low probability time-saving game state, but the game states in which these effects can be executed are not limited to these.
For example, even during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the first number display effect and the second number display effect may be executed to indicate the remaining number of times (remaining number of time-saving plays) until the second low-probability time-saving game state ends.
In addition, in a pachinko machine that has a high-probability non-time-reduced game state that combines a high-probability game state and a non-time-reduced game state, the first number display effect and the second number display effect may be executed even during the high-probability non-time-reduced game state to indicate the remaining number of plays (remaining high-probability number of plays) until the high-probability non-time-reduced game state ends.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, when a game ball enters the starting winning hole into which game balls mainly enter during the set game state, and a changing display of the performance pattern 50 corresponding to the special pattern in the center of the display unit 21a is executed, the execution of the changing display is triggered to update the display of the first remaining number suggestion image and to display the second remaining number suggestion image through the second number display performance, but the trigger for updating the display of the first remaining number suggestion image and displaying the second remaining number suggestion image is not limited to this.
For example, if a start notification effect is executed to notify the start of the changing display of the above-mentioned display pattern 50 at the start of the changing display, the execution of the start notification effect may be used as an opportunity to update the display of the first remaining number suggestion image or display the second remaining number suggestion image using the second number display effect.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the first and second count display effects in other application example 13, the remaining number of times until the currently set game state ends is counted down, but this is not limited to this. For example, the first and second count display effects may count up the value from a predetermined start value to a predetermined end value, and the same control as in other application example 13 may be adopted when counting up.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 can be achieved.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, as shown in FIG. 144, after a second remaining number suggestion image (for example, a number image of "5") indicating a predetermined number of remaining times is displayed, the first special symbol variable display is executed, and then the second special symbol variable display is executed, and when a second remaining number suggestion image (for example, a number image of "3") indicating the number of remaining times at this time is displayed, the second remaining number suggestion image (for example, a number image of "4") indicating the number of remaining times at the time the first special symbol variable display was executed is not displayed, and the second remaining number suggestion image (for example, a number image of "3") indicating the number of remaining times at the time the second special symbol variable display was executed is directly displayed, but this is not limited to this.
For example, just before displaying a second remaining number indication image (number image of "3") indicating the remaining number of times at the time when the variable display of the second special chart is executed, a second remaining number indication image (number image of "4") indicating the remaining number of times at the time when the variable display of the first special chart is executed may be displayed.
Even in this case, the same effect as that of the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 13 can be achieved, and the remaining number of times can be counted down using the second remaining number of times indication image while minimizing the sense of incongruity in the presentation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, both the first number display effect and the second number display effect are executed, but it is also possible to execute only one of the first number display effect and the second number display effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the variable display of the special pattern has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, the count value of the time-saving activation counter is updated (decremented by 1), and when the count value becomes "0", the first low-probability time-saving game state is set at this point, but the timing of updating the count value of the time-saving activation counter is not limited to this.
For example, the count value of the time-saving activation counter may be updated at any point between the start of the changing display of the special pattern and the elapse of the stopped display time of the special pattern, and when the stopped display time of the special pattern has elapsed, it may be determined whether the count value is "0" or not, and the first low-probability time-saving game state may be set.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 can be achieved.
In addition, since the time-saving count counter is updated when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the time-saving activation count counter may also be updated at the same time. In this case, since both the time-saving count counter and the time-saving activation count can be updated at the same time, in addition to the above-mentioned effect, processing can be consolidated and the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.

Furthermore, as described above, if the count value of the time-saving activation counter is updated at any point between the start of the variable display of the special pattern and the elapse of the stopped display time of the special pattern, rather than determining whether the count value is "0" or not at the time when the stopped display time of the special pattern has elapsed, it may be determined whether the count value is "0" or not at the time when the count value is updated, and when the count value becomes "0", the first low-probability time-saving game state is set at that time.
Specifically, for example, the count value of the time-saving activation counter may be updated at the start of the display of the changing special pattern, and when the updated count value becomes "0" at this point (i.e., at the start of the display of the changing special pattern), the first low-probability time-saving game state may be set.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, when the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set while the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, after the display of the variable manner currently being performed ends, various effects (such as switching the background image and switching the effect pattern 50) based on the setting of the first low-probability time-shortening game state are executed at the time when the display of the special pattern in a variable manner based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16, which is mainly entered during the first low-probability time-shortening game state, begins, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the above-mentioned effect may be executed when the display of a changing special pattern begins based on a game ball entering the first start winning port 15, rather than when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16, or the above-mentioned effect may be executed when the display of a changing special pattern begins based on a game ball entering either the second start winning port 16 or the first start winning port 15.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 can be achieved.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 may be set to be able to win a time-saving award that sets a time-saving game state by a win/lose lottery, and for example, if the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the time-saving award ends and the stopped display time has elapsed during the variable display of the first special symbol, it may be possible to set a time-saving game state based on the winning of the time-saving award even during the variable display of the first special symbol. And in this case, too, control regarding the execution of various effects based on the setting of the time-saving game state may be applied, similar to the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, a first low-probability time-saving setting notification image is displayed as a first low-probability time-saving setting notification that notifies the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state, but the form of the first low-probability time-saving setting notification is not limited to this.
For example, a movable body that can be protruded and retracted from the front of the pachinko machine P (for example, a movable speaker that is provided on the top of the pachinko machine P and can be protruded and retracted from the front of the pachinko machine P) may be provided, and a movable body effect may be executed in which the movable body that is immersed in normal play mode is protruded as a first low-probability time-saving setting notification.
Furthermore, in the case where a movable body effect is executed as a first low-probability time-saving setting notification, when a variation (a variation immediately before the first low-probability time-saving setting) based on the first special symbol (missing symbol Z1) is executed 900 times after the second low-probability time-saving game state or the normal game state is established through the execution of a special game, and when the first low-probability time-saving game state is established, the movable body effect may be executed between the start and end of this variation immediately before the first low-probability time-saving setting, or between the end of the variation immediately before the first low-probability time-saving setting and the elapse of the stopped display time.In contrast, when a variation (a variation immediately before the first low-probability time-saving setting) based on the first special symbol (missing symbol Z1) is executed 900 times after the normal game state is established through a RAM clear, and the first low-probability time-saving game state is established, the movable body effect may be executed from the time when the first special symbol variation display (variation effect) begins after the first low-probability time-saving game state is established.
Here, if the mode of variable presentation executed when a jackpot is won is set to execute a specific movable body presentation that moves a specific movable body different from the movable body described above, and the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set via RAM clearing and a jackpot is won in the first win/lose lottery after the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set, there is a possibility that the execution of the above-mentioned movable body presentation and the execution of the above-mentioned specific movable body presentation will be performed in overlapping fashion, but if multiple movable bodies are moved in overlapping fashion, there is a risk that the current value will exceed the allowable value.
Therefore, if the first low-probability time-saving game state is set via RAM clearing and a jackpot is won in the first win/lose lottery after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the specific movable object effect may be executed after the execution of the movable object effect has ended. For example, if the time from the start to the end of the movable object effect is six seconds, the specific movable object effect may be executed six seconds after the start of the first variable display of the special symbol (variable effect) after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. In this way, the movable object effect and the specific movable object effect can be reliably executed without the current value exceeding the allowable value.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 13, as a warning effect to give a predetermined warning to the player, it is possible to execute a warning effect that prevents the game ball from being shot toward the second game area 12b during the period when a predetermined number of variable displays are executed before the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, but the warning effects that can be executed are not limited to this.
For example, if the next jackpot is won and a special game is played during the second low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state) or high-probability time-saving game state (high-probability game state) set after the end of a special game based on a winning jackpot, a warning effect may be executed to prevent the storage medium (card) storing the value information necessary for lending game balls from being left inserted in the game ball lending device R (i.e., to prevent the card from being forgotten) during the special game based on the winning of the next jackpot, based on the total number of times the first special chart and the second special chart have changed since the end of the previous special game until the next jackpot is won satisfying a predetermined condition.
Specifically, the ending time of the special game based on the winning of the next jackpot (the execution time of the ending process performed at the end of the special game) is set to differ depending on the total number of times the first special chart changes and the second special chart changes executed from the end of the previous special game until the next jackpot is won during the second low-probability time-shortening game state or the high-probability time-shortening game state. For example, if the total number of wins is 90 or more, the ending time of the special game based on the next jackpot win is set to the default ending time, the DF ending time (e.g., 10 seconds); if the total number of wins is 50 or more but less than 90, the ending time of the special game based on the next jackpot win is set to the first extended ending time (15 seconds), which is the DF ending time extended by a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds); and if the total number of wins is less than 50, the ending time of the special game based on the next jackpot win is set to the second extended ending time (25 seconds), which is the first extended ending time extended by a further predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). In other words, the smaller the total number of wins, the longer the ending time of the special game based on the next jackpot win is set to be.
Then, if the total number of times the first special chart changes and the second special chart changes executed from the end of the previous special game until the next jackpot is won during the second low-probability time-shortened game state or the high-probability time-shortened game state is less than 50 (i.e., when the ending time of the special game based on the next jackpot winning is the second extended ending time (25 seconds)), a warning effect is executed to prevent the above-mentioned card from being forgotten during the ending processing of the special game based on the next jackpot winning, and on the other hand, if the total number is 50 or more (i.e., when the ending time of the special game based on the next jackpot winning is the first extended ending time or DF ending time), the above-mentioned warning effect is set not to be executed.
Although not specifically shown, this warning effect is set to issue a warning notice to the player to ensure that he or she does not forget to take the card (for example, by displaying a warning image saying "Be careful not to forget to take your prepaid card").
The above-mentioned attention-calling performance is set to be executed until the ending process is completed.
In this case, the extended ending time of the special game can be effectively utilized to give the player a predetermined warning.

It should be noted that, if the total number of times is equal to or greater than 50 and less than 90 (i.e., if the ending time of the special game based on the next big win is the first extended ending time or the DF ending time), the above-mentioned attention call effect is not executed, but this is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned attention call effect may be set to be executed in this case as well. In other words, the above-mentioned attention call effect may be executed whenever the ending time of the special game is extended.
Furthermore, the warning notification given in the above-mentioned warning performance is not limited to the display of the warning image as described above, but may also include, in conjunction with or instead of the display of the warning image, outputting a sound to remind the player not to forget to take the card (for example, outputting a sound saying "Please be careful not to forget to take your prepaid card" or lighting up a predetermined lamp, etc.
Furthermore, the contents of the warning given in the above-mentioned warning effect are not limited to preventing players from forgetting to take the card. For example, it may be a warning not to get too absorbed in the game (for example, outputting a warning image or sound saying, "Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation"), or, when a moving role effect is executed in which a role device installed above the pachinko machine P moves based on the execution of a special game or the setting of a game state advantageous to the player (high probability time-shortened game state, second low probability time-shortened game state, first low probability time-shortened game state), a warning not to get injured by the movement of this role device (for example, outputting a warning image or sound saying, "Watch your head"), etc.
Furthermore, instead of varying the ending time of the special game based on the winning of the next jackpot, the opening time of the special game (the execution time of the opening process performed at the end of the special game) may be set to vary depending on the sum of the number of times the first special symbol fluctuates and the number of times the second special symbol fluctuates. In other words, the smaller the above-mentioned total, the longer the opening time of the special game based on the winning of the next jackpot. If the opening time is extended, the above-mentioned attention-calling effect may be executed during the opening process.
Furthermore, the interval time between the end of the previous round of play and the start of the next round of play in the special game may be set to vary depending on the total amount. That is, the smaller the total amount, the longer the interval time in the special game based on the next big win. If the interval time is extended, the above-mentioned attention-calling effect may be executed during the elapse of the interval time.
Even in the above case, the various extended special game times can be effectively utilized to give the player predetermined warnings.
In addition, the above-mentioned warning effect may be executed when the first low-probability time-shortened game state is set.
Specifically, when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set by the number of times the first special chart and the number of times the second special chart change reaches the number of times that time-saving is activated without winning a jackpot after the special game ends and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, or when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set by the number of times the first special chart and the number of times that the second special chart change reaches the number of times that time-saving is activated without winning a jackpot after the normal game state is set after RAM clearing is executed, or when the high-probability time-saving game state that was set after the special game ends and the normal game state is set, a warning effect may be executed to warn players to be careful, for example, to prevent them from forgetting to take their cards, to prevent them from becoming addicted to the game, and to prevent them from getting injured by the movement of the special device.

Furthermore, the various controls in other application example 13 may be applied to machines other than pachinko machines in which simultaneous spin control is executed, within the scope of not causing any contradictions. For example, a pachinko machine (so-called type 1/2 mixed pachinko machine) in which a small prize is awarded as a result of a win/lose lottery, and a large prize opening with a special area into which a game ball can enter is opened in a small prize game that is executed not only when the result of the win/lose lottery is a big prize win, but also when a small prize is won, and a special game is executed even if a game ball that entered the large prize opening during the small prize game enters the special area, or a pachinko machine with simultaneous spin control or type 1/2 mixed pachinko machine Even in pachinko machines that do not have this feature, that is, pachinko machines that are set so that while either the first or second special design is being displayed, the other is not displayed and special games are played only when a jackpot is won, various controls in other application example 13 may be applied to the extent that no contradictions arise, to execute various effects based on the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state, first low-probability time-saving information suggestion effects, first number of times display effects, second number of times display effects, variable effects based on mode PT1, mode PT2, and mode PT3, warning effects, etc.

(Another Application Example 14)
The pachinko machine P relating to other application example 14 has almost the same configuration as the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 11, but differs from the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 11 in the type of time-saving symbol that is determined when a time-saving award is won, the game state that is set, the processing when a time-saving award is won, etc.
Below, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, and explanations of the same configurations will be omitted unless necessary.

(Types of game states)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, the fourth low-probability time-shortening game state in the other application example 11 is not provided, and the settable game states are the normal game state, the first low-probability time-shortening game state, the second low-probability time-shortening game state, the third low-probability time-shortening game state, and the high-probability time-shortening game state. Then, one of the game states is set and the game progresses.

(Outline of lottery)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, as in the other application example 11, when a low-probability game state (normal game state, first low-probability time-shortened game state, second low-probability time-shortened game state, third low-probability time-shortened game state) is set, in the win/loss lottery it is possible to win a jackpot or a time-shortened game, and when a high-probability game state (high-probability time-shortened game state) is set, it is not possible to win a time-shortened game, and only a jackpot can be won (see Figure 164 (a)).
164(a), if the time-saving award is won in the lottery based on the game ball entering the first start winning slot 15, the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, with the probability of the time-saving symbol J1 being determined being 80/100 (80%) and the probability of the time-saving symbol J2 being determined being 20/100 (20%). If the time-saving award is won in the lottery based on the game ball entering the second start winning slot 16, the time-saving symbol J3 or J4 is determined, with the probability of the time-saving symbol J3 being determined being 70/100 (70%) and the probability of the time-saving symbol J4 being determined being 30/100 (30%).
The probability of winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot symbol determined in the event of a jackpot win, and the type of losing symbol determined in the event of a losing win are the same as those in other application example 11.

(Outline of the fluctuation pattern to be determined)
A pachinko machine P according to another application example 14 is provided with the following fluctuation pattern tables 114 storing fluctuation pattern commands associated with fluctuation patterns: Table A, which is referred to when determining a fluctuation pattern command (fluctuation pattern) during a normal game state; Table B, which is referred to when determining a fluctuation pattern command during a second low-probability time-shortening game state or a third low-probability time-shortening game state; Table C, which is referred to when determining a fluctuation pattern command during a high-probability time-shortening game state; and Table D, which is referred to when determining a fluctuation pattern command during a first low-probability time-shortening game state (see FIG. 165). Then, as in the above-described embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 or the second start winning slot 16, a fluctuation pattern command is determined by referring to one of the fluctuation pattern tables 114 corresponding to the currently set game state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 165, according to table A (the variation pattern table 114 referred to during normal game mode), if the result of the lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a loss and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, and if the first reserved number at that time is less than 2, then either the variation pattern command "00H" associated with the variation pattern of "13 second variation (the variation time of the special symbol is 13 seconds)" (probability of determination is 90%), the variation pattern command "02H" associated with the variation pattern of "20 second variation (the variation time of the special symbol is 20 seconds)" (probability of determination is 8%), or the variation pattern command "03H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 second variation (the variation time of the special symbol is 60 seconds)" (probability of determination is 2%) will be determined. If the first reserved number at the above-mentioned time is 2 or more, either the fluctuation pattern command "01H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "6-second fluctuation (special pattern fluctuation time is 6 seconds)" (probability of determination is 90%), the fluctuation pattern command "02H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" (probability of determination is 8%), or the fluctuation pattern command "03H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" (probability of determination is 2%) will be determined.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the first special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined, regardless of the first reserved number, either the fluctuation pattern command "0AH" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" (determination probability is 10%) or the fluctuation pattern command "0BH" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" (determination probability is 90%) will be determined.
In addition, if the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is selected by the lottery based on the first special symbol random number, then regardless of the first reserved number, either the fluctuation pattern command "0EH" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" (probability of determination is 10%) or the fluctuation pattern command "0FH" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" (probability of determination is 90%) will be selected.
In addition, if the lottery based on the second special pattern random number results in a loss and the losing pattern Z2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "00H" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "13-second fluctuation" is determined regardless of the second reserved number.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot pattern X3, X4 or X5 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "0AH" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds fluctuation" is determined regardless of the second reserved number.
In addition, if the time-saving grant is awarded by the lottery based on the second special chart random number and the time-saving chart pattern J3 or J4 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "0EH" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" is determined regardless of the second reserved number.

As shown in FIG. 165, according to table B (the fluctuation pattern table 114 referenced during the second low-probability time-shortened game state or the third low-probability time-shortened game state), if the lottery based on the second special pattern random number results in a loss and the losing pattern Z2 is determined, and the second reserved number at that time is less than 2, then either the fluctuation pattern command "10H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "13-second fluctuation" (determination probability 90%), the fluctuation pattern command "12H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" (determination probability 8%), or the fluctuation pattern command "13H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" (determination probability 2%) will be determined. If the second reserve number at the above-mentioned time point is 2 or more, either the fluctuation pattern command "11H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "6-second fluctuation" (probability of determination is 90%), the fluctuation pattern command "12H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" (probability of determination is 8%), or the fluctuation pattern command "13H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" (probability of determination is 2%) will be determined.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the second special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X3, X4 or X5 is determined, regardless of the second reserved number, either the fluctuation pattern command "1AH" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds fluctuation" (determination probability is 10%) or the fluctuation pattern command "1BH" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" (determination probability is 90%) will be determined.
In addition, if the time-saving grant is won by the lottery based on the second special random number and the time-saving symbol J3 or J4 is determined, and the second reserved number at that time is less than 2, the variation pattern command "1CH" (determination probability 100%) associated with the variation pattern of "13-second variation" is determined. If the second reserved number at the above-mentioned time is 2 or more, the variation pattern command "1DH" (determination probability 100%) associated with the variation pattern of "6-second variation" is determined.
In addition, if the lottery based on the first special pattern random number results in a loss and the losing pattern Z1 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "10H" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "13-second fluctuation" is determined regardless of the first reserved number.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the first special pattern random number and the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "1AH" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds fluctuation" is determined regardless of the first reserved number.
In addition, if the time-saving grant is awarded by a lottery based on the first special chart random number and the time-saving chart pattern J1 or J2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "1CH" (with a 100% probability of being determined) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "13-second fluctuation" will be determined regardless of the first reserved number.

As shown in FIG. 165, according to Table C (the variation pattern table 114 referenced during the high-probability time-saving game state), if the lottery based on the second special symbol random number results in a loss and the loss symbol Z2 is determined, and if the second reserved number at that time is less than 2, either the variation pattern command "20H" associated with the variation pattern of "13-second variation" (determination probability 90%), the variation pattern command "22H" associated with the variation pattern of "20-second variation" (determination probability 8%), or the variation pattern command "23H" associated with the variation pattern of "60-second variation" (determination probability 2%) is determined. If the second reserved number at the above time is 2 or more, either the variation pattern command "21H" associated with the variation pattern of "6-second variation" (determination probability 90%), the variation pattern command "22H" associated with the variation pattern of "20-second variation" (determination probability 8%), or the variation pattern command "23H" associated with the variation pattern of "60-second variation" (determination probability 2%) is determined.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the second special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X3, X4 or X5 is determined, regardless of the second reserved number, either the fluctuation pattern command "2AH" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds fluctuation" (determination probability is 10%) or the fluctuation pattern command "2BH" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" (determination probability is 90%) will be determined.
In addition, if the lottery based on the first special pattern random number results in a loss and the losing pattern Z1 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "20H" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "13-second fluctuation" is determined regardless of the first reserved number.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the first special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "2AH" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds fluctuation" is determined regardless of the first reserved number.

165, according to table D (variation pattern table 114 referred to during the first low-probability time-saving game state), if the lottery based on the second special symbol random number results in a loss and the losing symbol Z2 is determined, and if the second reserved number at that time is less than 2, the variation pattern command "30H" (determination probability 100%) associated with the variation pattern of "13-second variation" is determined.If the second reserved number at the above-mentioned time is 2 or more, the variation pattern command "31H" (determination probability 100%) associated with the variation pattern of "3-second variation (the variation time of the special symbol is 3 seconds)" is determined.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the second special pattern random number and the jackpot pattern X3, X4 or X5 is determined, regardless of the second reserved number, the fluctuation pattern command "3AH" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "10-second fluctuation (the fluctuation time of the special pattern is 10 seconds)" is determined.
In addition, if the time-saving grant is won by the lottery based on the second special random number and the time-saving symbol J3 or J4 is determined, and the second reserved number at that time is less than 2, the variation pattern command "3CH" (determination probability 100%) associated with the variation pattern of "13-second variation" is determined. If the second reserved number at the above-mentioned time is 2 or more, the variation pattern command "3DH" (determination probability 100%) associated with the variation pattern of "3-second variation" is determined.
In addition, if the lottery based on the first special pattern random number results in a loss and the losing pattern Z1 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "31H" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "3-second fluctuation" is determined regardless of the first reserved number.
In addition, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the first special chart random number and the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "3AH" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "10-second fluctuation" is determined regardless of the first reserved number.
In addition, if the time-saving grant is won by the lottery based on the first special chart random number and the time-saving chart pattern J1 or J2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "3DH" (determination probability is 100%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of "3-second fluctuation" is determined regardless of the first reserved number.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, a "6-second variation" or "13-second variation" variation pattern can be determined, whereas when a time-saving award is won during the normal game state, a "20-second variation" or "60-second variation" variation pattern can be determined. In other words, when a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, the determination rate of a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is higher than when a time-saving award is won during the normal game state. In other words, the execution rate of a variation display with a relatively short variation time is higher.
As a result, the time for which the special symbols fluctuate when the time-saving award is won is more likely to be shorter during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state than during the normal game state, allowing for smooth game progress.

Furthermore, the variation patterns of "6-second variation" and "13-second variation" that can be determined when a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state can be determined even in the case of a miss, but are not determined when a jackpot is won.
Therefore, in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, if the variation display is made with the variation pattern of "6-second variation" or "13-second variation," it is not possible to determine whether the result of the lottery is a loss or a win for the time-saving award based on the variation time. This makes it possible to make the player feel hopeful about winning the time-saving award even if the variation display of the special symbol is made with the variation pattern of "6-second variation" or "13-second variation."

In addition, the variation patterns of "20-second variation" and "60-second variation" that can be determined when a time-saving bonus is awarded during normal game play are also determined when a player loses or wins a jackpot.
Therefore, during normal game mode, when a variation display is made using a "20-second variation" or "60-second variation" variation pattern, it is not possible to determine whether the result of the lottery is a loss, a win for the time-saving award, or a jackpot based on the variation time. This allows the player to have expectations for a win for the time-saving award or a jackpot when a variation display of a special symbol is made using a "20-second variation" or "60-second variation" variation pattern.

Note that during each game state, the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on the same fluctuation pattern table 114 (either Table A, Table B, Table C, or Table D), but this is not limited to this. For example, even during the same game state, the fluctuation pattern command may be determined based on a different fluctuation pattern table 114 depending on the number of fluctuations since the start of that game state.

(General overview of general games)
The settings for the normal game in the pachinko machine P relating to the other application example 14 (probability of winning by drawing a normal pattern, the time for which the normal pattern changes, the operation time of the movable piece 16b when a winning normal pattern is drawn, etc.) are the same as those in the other application example 11.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, in any of the normal game state (non-time-shortened game state), the first low-probability time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state), the second low-probability time-shortened game state (second time-shortened game state), the third low-probability time-shortened game state (third time-shortened game state) and the high-probability time-shortened game state (second time-shortened game state), the probability of winning by lottery for the normal pattern is set high overall, but by varying the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the operation time of the movable piece 16b, the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 (i.e., the frequency of the game ball entering the second start winning port 16) is changed.
That is, during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, and the high-probability time-shortened game state, unlike during the normal game state, the movable piece 16b is likely to be maintained in an open state, and therefore the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning hole 16. Therefore, during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, and the high-probability time-shortened game state, it is possible to acquire an opportunity to win or lose the lottery while suppressing the decrease in game balls that occurs as the game progresses, compared to during the normal game state.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, and the high-probability time-shortened game state, control is performed to shorten the average time for the special symbols to fluctuate compared to during the normal game state (the so-called special symbol fluctuating shortening function is activated). This changes the frequency of the winning/losing lottery (in other words, the frequency of the fluctuating display of the special symbols).
Specifically, during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state and the high-probability time-shortened game state, the average time for the special pattern to fluctuate is shorter than during the normal game state, and this, combined with the fact that it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start entry port 16 mentioned above, makes it easier to execute the winning/losing lottery and the display of the special pattern fluctuations compared to during the normal game state.
Therefore, during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state and the high-probability time-shortened game state, the frequency of the winning/losing lottery (display of changing special symbols) can be increased while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses compared to during non-time-shortened game states.
In addition, during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, and the high-probability time-shortened game state (time-shortened game state), the performance of the normal game (the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol variation time, and the operation time of the movable piece 16b) may be set to the same as during the normal game state (non-time-shortened game state), and only the above-mentioned special symbol variation shortening function may be operated. Even in this case, during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, and the high-probability time-shortened game state, the win/loss lottery and the special symbol variation display may be more easily executed than during the normal game state.

(Outline of game state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, one of the game states is set to a normal game state, a first low-probability time-shortened game state, a second low-probability time-shortened game state, a third low-probability time-shortened game state, or a high-probability time-shortened game state.

When the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the high-probability time-saving game state is set, a time-saving count counter configured in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 begins counting the number of time-saving game states. Specifically, when the above-mentioned time-saving game state is set, a value corresponding to the number of time-saving game states for each game state is set in the time-saving game state counter. Each time a special symbol is displayed in a variable display, the count value of the time-saving game state counter is decremented by one upon the elapse of the static display time (0.5 seconds in other application example 14), which is the time for the special symbol to be statically displayed after the variable display of the special symbol has ended. This counts the number of time-saving game states remaining until the end of each time-saving game state. Then, when the time-saving game state is reached (i.e., when the count value of the time-saving game state counter reaches 0), the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the high-probability time-saving game state currently set ends, and the normal game state is set.
In addition, when the RAM is cleared (reset) by a specified operation, the count value of the time-saving counter is reset.

(1) First Low-Probability Time-Shortening Game State As shown in FIG. 164(b), when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the predetermined number of times for activating the time-shortening game (900 times in other application example 14) without winning a jackpot in a low-probability game state (normal game state, second low-probability time-shortening game state, third low-probability time-shortening game state) (i.e., when the results of the win/loss lottery in the low-probability game state are other than a jackpot), the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set. When the first low-probability time-shortening game state is set, the number of times for activating the time-shortening game is set to 1200.

The first low-probability time-saving game state ends when one of the following conditions is met: a jackpot is won, or the result of the win/lose lottery is drawn 1,200 times (the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 1,200) without a jackpot being won.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won during the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the first low-probability time-shortened game state ends, and after the special game based on the winning is finished, a game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined based on the winning is set.
Furthermore, if the results of the winning/losing lottery during the first low-probability time-shortening game state are other than the big win for all 1200 times, the first time-shortening game state is changed to a non-time-shortening game state while the low-probability game state remains as it is, thereby ending the first low-probability time-shortening game state and setting a normal game state.

In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, as in the other application example 11, a time-saving activation counter for counting the number of time-saving activations that will result in the first low-probability time-saving game state being set is configured in a specified memory area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of the time-saving activation counter is reset when one of the following reset conditions is met: RAM is cleared (reset) by a specified operation, special game play ends, or the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is set.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the game state thereafter is set to the normal game state (low probability game state), and from this point on, counting by the time-saving activation number counter begins.
When the special game based on the determination of the big win symbol X1 or X3 is finished, the game state is set to the second low probability time-shortening game state, and from this point onwards, counting by the time-shortening activation number counter is started.
On the other hand, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, X4 or X5 ends, the game state is set to a high probability time-saving game state (high probability game state), and the time-saving activation counter does not start counting from the point when the special game ends. Then, for example, if the result of the win/loss lottery is derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot and the normal game state (low probability game state) is set, the time-saving activation counter starts counting from this point.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the count value of the time-saving activation counter is decremented by 1 at the point when the stop display time has elapsed after the variable display of the special symbol has ended. Then, when the count value of the time-saving activation counter becomes "0" (i.e., when the number of times the special symbol has changed since the low-probability game state was set reaches the time-saving activation count), the first low-probability time-saving game state is set at this point.

After the RAM is cleared (reset) or after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot, until the next jackpot is won, the first low-probability time-shortening game state can be set only once.
That is, after the results of the lottery for winning or losing in the low probability game state are all other than the jackpot for 900 times and the first low probability time-shortened game state is set, the first low probability time-shortened game state cannot be set again until the next jackpot is won.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter is reset by setting the first low-probability time-saving game state, counting by the time-saving activation counter is stopped until the next jackpot is won or the RAM is cleared. In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, counting by the time-saving activation counter is executed only in low-probability game states (normal game state, second low-probability time-saving game state, third low-probability time-saving game state) excluding the first low-probability time-saving game state.

(2) High-Probability Time-Shortening Game State As shown in FIG. 164(b), when a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, and when a jackpot is won by the lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbol X4 or X5 is determined, the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to a high-probability game state and a second time-shortening game state, thereby setting a high-probability time-shortening game state. In addition, the number of high-probability wins and the number of time-shortening wins are both set to 10,000.

The high-probability time-saving game state ends when one of the following conditions is met: a jackpot is won, or the result of the win/lose lottery is drawn 10,000 times, which is the number of high-probability and time-saving times, without winning a jackpot (the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 10,000).

Specifically, if a jackpot is won during the high probability time-saving game state, the high probability time-saving game state ends, and after the special game based on the winning is completed, a game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined based on the winning is set.
Furthermore, if the results of the winning/losing lottery during the high-probability time-shortening game state are other than the big win for all 10,000 times, the high-probability game state is changed to a low-probability game state and the first time-shortening game state is changed to a non-time-shortening game state, thereby ending the high-probability time-shortening game state and setting a normal game state.

(3) Second Low-Probability Time-Shortening Game State As shown in FIG. 164(b), when a jackpot is won and a jackpot symbol X1 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the first special random number, and when a jackpot is won and a jackpot symbol X3 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number, the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to a low-probability game state and a second time-shortening game state, thereby setting the second low-probability time-shortening game state. In addition, the number of time-shortening times is set to 100.

The second low-probability time-saving game state ends when one of the following conditions is met: a jackpot is won, 100 win/lose lottery results are derived without a jackpot being won (the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100), or a time-saving grant is won and the number of time-saving grants that can be set corresponding to the determined time-saving symbol is greater than the number of time-saving grants remaining.

Specifically, if a jackpot is won during the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state ends, and after the special game based on the winning is finished, a game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined based on the winning is set.
Furthermore, if the results of all 100 win/lose lotteries during the second low-probability time-shortened game state are anything other than a jackpot, the second time-shortened game state is changed to a non-time-shortened game state while the low-probability game state remains the same, thereby ending the second low-probability time-shortened game state as described above and setting the normal game state.

Furthermore, in both cases where a time-saving award is won by a win/lose lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and a time-saving symbol J3 or J4 is determined, and the number of time-saving awards that can be set corresponding to the time-saving symbol is greater than the number of time-saving awards remaining in the second low-probability time-saving game state at that time, and where a time-saving award is won by a win/lose lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, and the number of time-saving awards that can be set corresponding to the time-saving symbol is greater than the number of time-saving awards remaining in the second low-probability time-saving game state at that time, the second time-saving game state ends while the low-probability game state remains, thereby ending the second low-probability time-saving game state and setting a normal game state, and then a third time-saving game state is set, thereby setting a third low-probability time-saving game state. In other words, in this case, the second low-probability time-shortening game state being set ends, and the game state transitions to a normal game state once, and then the game state transitions to a third low-probability time-shortening game state.
In contrast, in both cases where a player wins a time-saving grant by a lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the second low-probability time-saving game state and a time-saving symbol J3 or J4 is determined, and the number of time-saving grants that can be set corresponding to that time-saving symbol is equal to or less than the number of time-saving grants remaining in the second low-probability time-saving game state at that time, and where a player wins a time-saving grant by a lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the second low-probability time-saving game state and a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, and the number of time-saving grants that can be set corresponding to that time-saving symbol is equal to or less than the number of time-saving grants remaining in the second low-probability time-saving game state at that time, the second low-probability time-saving game state being set will continue as is.
The process for winning the time-saving grant will be described in detail later.

(4) Third Low-Probability Time-Shortening Game State As shown in FIG. 164(b), if a time-shortening award is won during the normal game state, or if a time-shortening award is won during the second low-probability time-shortening game state or the third low-probability time-shortening game state and the number of time-shortening awards that can be set corresponding to the determined time-shortening symbol is greater than the number of time-shortening awards remaining, the low-probability game state remains in place, the non-time-shortening game state, the second time-shortening game state, or the third time-shortening game state ends, and the third low-probability time-shortening game state is set. The number of time-shortening awards that can be set will be described in detail later.

The third low-probability time-saving game state ends when one of the following conditions is met: a jackpot is won, the result of a lottery is drawn for the set number of time-saving times without a jackpot being won (the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the number of time-saving times), the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches "0" (the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability game state reaches the number of time-saving activations without a jackpot being won), or a time-saving award is won and the number of time-saving times that can be set corresponding to the determined time-saving symbol is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times.

Specifically, if a jackpot is won during the third low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state ends, and after the special game based on the winning is finished, a game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined based on the winning is set.
Furthermore, if the result of the winning/losing lottery during the third low-probability time-shortening game state is anything other than a jackpot for all the set number of time-shortening games, the third time-shortening game state is changed to a non-time-shortening game state while the low-probability game state remains as it is, thereby ending the third low-probability time-shortening game state and setting a normal game state.
Furthermore, when the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches 0 during the third low-probability time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state is changed to the first time-saving game state while the low-probability game state remains, thereby ending the third low-probability time-saving game state and setting the first low-probability time-saving game state. Note that in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, as described above, counting by the time-saving activation counter starts from the time when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and counting by the time-saving activation counter continues even in the normal game state that may be set after the second low-probability time-saving game state ends, and in the third low-probability time-saving game state that may be set by winning a time-saving award during the normal game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, or the third low-probability time-saving game state. Therefore, the count value of the time-saving activation counter may reach 0 during the third low-probability time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in either case, when a player is selected to receive a time-saving award by a lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the third low-probability time-saving game state and a time-saving symbol J3 or J4 is determined, and the number of time-saving awards that can be set corresponding to the time-saving symbol is greater than the number of time-saving awards remaining in the third low-probability time-saving game state at that time, or when a player is selected to receive a time-saving award by a lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the third low-probability time-saving game state and a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, and the number of time-saving awards that can be set corresponding to the time-saving symbol is greater than the number of time-saving awards remaining in the third low-probability time-saving game state at that time, the third time-saving game state ends while the low-probability game state remains, the third low-probability time-saving game state ends, and a normal game state is set, and then the third time-saving game state is set, and a new third low-probability time-saving game state is set. That is, in this case, the third low-probability time-shortening game state being set ends, the game state transitions to the normal game state once, and then the game state transitions again to the third low-probability time-shortening game state.
In contrast, in both cases where a time-saving award is won by a lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the third low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J3 or J4 is determined, and the number of time-saving awards that can be set corresponding to the time-saving symbol is equal to or less than the number of time-saving awards remaining in the third low-probability time-saving game state at that time, and where a time-saving award is won by a lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the third low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, and the number of time-saving awards that can be set corresponding to the time-saving symbol is equal to or less than the number of time-saving awards remaining in the third low-probability time-saving game state at that time, the third low-probability time-saving game state that is currently set will continue as is.

(Outline of the process when you are selected for reduced working hours)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, it is possible to win a time-saving award by a win/lose lottery during a low-probability game state, so it is possible to win a time-saving award during a normal game state in which a non-time-saving game state is set, and it is also possible to win a time-saving award during a first low-probability time-saving game state, a second low-probability time-saving game state, or a third low-probability time-saving game state in which a time-saving game state is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when a time-saving grant is won, the number of times that the time-saving can be set is determined depending on the type of time-saving pattern determined and the game status at a predetermined reference point (in another application example 14, the point at which the display of the changing special pattern begins).
164(b), when the determined time-saving symbol is J1 or J3, if the game state at the reference time is a non-time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times that can be set is set to 30, and when the game state at the reference time is a time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times that can be set is set to 20. Also, when the determined time-saving symbol is J2 or J4, if the game state at the reference time is a non-time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times that can be set is set to 60, and when the game state at the reference time is a time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times that can be set is set to 50.

When the time-saving award is won during the normal game state, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display time for the special symbol to be displayed in a stopped state has elapsed, a third low-probability time-saving game state is set with the number of time-savings corresponding to the type of the determined time-saving symbol and the game state at the reference time.
Furthermore, if a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving increments corresponding to the determined type of time-saving symbol and the game state at the reference time is greater than the number of time-saving increments remaining in the currently set second low-probability time-saving game state, the currently set second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning starts, and then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display time has elapsed, a third low-probability time-saving game state is set with the number of time-saving increments corresponding to the determined type of time-saving symbol and the game state at the reference time.In contrast, if the number of time-saving increments corresponding to the determined type of time-saving symbol and the game state at the reference time is equal to or less than the number of time-saving increments remaining in the currently set second low-probability time-saving game state, the currently set second low-probability time-saving game state continues as is.
Similarly, if a time-saving award is won during the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving awards corresponding to the determined type of time-saving symbol and the game state at the reference time is greater than the remaining number of time-saving awards in the currently set third low-probability time-saving game state, the currently set third low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning award begins, and then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display time has elapsed, a new third low-probability time-saving game state is set with the number of time-saving awards corresponding to the determined type of time-saving symbol and the game state at the reference time.In contrast, if the number of time-saving awards corresponding to the determined type of time-saving symbol and the game state at the reference time is equal to or less than the remaining number of time-saving awards in the currently set third low-probability time-saving game state, the currently set third low-probability time-saving game state continues as is.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, if a time-saving grant is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state is not set, and the first low-probability time-saving game state that is currently set continues as is.
In addition, even if a time-saving award is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the same control may be performed as when a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state.

Below, we will explain, with specific examples, the processing when a time-saving bonus is awarded during normal play mode, when a time-saving bonus is awarded during the second low-probability time-saving play mode, and when a time-saving bonus is awarded during the third low-probability time-saving play mode.

(1) In the case where a time-saving award is won during the normal game state During the normal game state, game balls are mainly shot toward the first game area 12a, and as long as game balls are shot toward the first game area 12a, a lottery is held to determine whether the game is won or lost based on the first special symbol random number (a special symbol random number obtained when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15). Then, if the time-saving award is won by the lottery based on the first special symbol random number, the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined (see FIG. 164(a)).
Here, as described above, since the game state at the start of the variable display of the special pattern (time-saving pattern J1 or J2) (i.e., the reference time) is a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), when the time-saving pattern J1 is determined, the number of time-saving times can be set to 30, and when the time-saving pattern J2 is determined, the number of time-saving times can be set to 60 (see Figure 164 (b)).
Then, if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, when the variable display of the special symbol (time-saving symbol J1) based on the winning of the time-saving award has finished and the stopped display time has elapsed, the game state is set to the third low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving plays is set to 30. Also, if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the time-saving award has finished and the stopped display time has elapsed, the game state is set to the third low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving plays is set to 60.

On the other hand, if a game ball is shot toward the second game area 12b during normal game mode, a lottery may be held based on the second special random number (a special random number obtained when the game ball enters the second start winning slot 16). If the player wins the time-saving award through the lottery based on the second special random number, the time-saving symbol J3 or J4 will be determined (see FIG. 164(a)).
Since the game state at the start of the display of the special pattern changes is a non-time-saving game state, when the time-saving pattern J3 is determined, the number of time-saving times can be set to 30, and when the time-saving pattern J4 is determined, the number of time-saving times can be set to 60 (see Figure 164 (b)).
Then, if the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the time-saving award ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the game state is set to the third low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times is set to 30. Also, if the time-saving symbol J4 is determined, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the time-saving award ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the game state is set to the third low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times is set to 60.

(2) When the time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state (Example 1)
For example, when the number of remaining time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state is 30, the time-saving award is won by a lottery based on the second special pattern random number, and the time-saving pattern J4 is determined.
In this case, the game state at the start of the changing display of the special pattern (time-saving pattern J4) (i.e., the reference time) is a time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state), so the number of time-saving times can be set to 50 in response to the determination of the time-saving pattern J4 (see Figure 164 (b)).
Then, since the number of time-saving times (50 times) that can be set in response to the determination of the time-saving pattern J4 is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times (30 times) in the second low-probability time-saving game state that is currently set, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set at the time when the display of the special pattern changes begins, and then, when the display of the special pattern changes ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the game state is set to the third low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times is set to 50 times.
(Specific Example 2)
For example, when the number of remaining time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state is 30, the time-saving award is won by a lottery based on the second special pattern random number, and the time-saving pattern J3 is determined.
In this case, since the game state at the start of the changing display of the special pattern (time-saving pattern J3) is a time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times can be set to 20 in response to the determination of the time-saving pattern J3 (see Figure 164 (b)).
Then, the number of time-saving times (20 times) that can be set in response to the determination of the time-saving symbol J3 is equal to or less than the remaining number of time-saving times (30 times) in the second low-probability time-saving game state that is currently set, so the second low-probability time-saving game state that is currently set continues as is. In other words, even though the time-saving award has been won, the third low-probability time-saving game state is not set, and the remaining number of time-saving times remains 30.

(Specific Example 3)
For example, when the number of remaining time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state is 10, the time-saving award is won by a lottery based on the first special chart random number, and the time-saving chart pattern J1 is determined.
In this case, since the game state at the start of the changing display of the special pattern (time-saving pattern J1) is a time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times can be set to 20 in response to the determination of the time-saving pattern J1 (see Figure 164 (b)).
Then, since the number of time-saving times (20 times) that can be set in response to the determination of the time-saving pattern J1 is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times (10 times) in the second low-probability time-saving game state being set, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set at the time when the variable display of the special pattern starts, and then, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the game state is set to the third low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times is set to 20 times.
(Specific Example 4)
For example, when the number of remaining time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state is 60, the time-saving award is won by a lottery based on the first special pattern random number, and the time-saving pattern J2 is determined.
In this case, since the game state at the start of the changing display of the special pattern (time-saving pattern J2) is a time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times can be set to 50 in response to the determination of the time-saving pattern J2 (see Figure 164 (b)).
Then, the number of time-saving times (50) that can be set in response to the determination of the time-saving symbol J2 is equal to or less than the remaining number of time-saving times (60) in the second low-probability time-saving game state that is currently set, so the second low-probability time-saving game state that is currently set continues as is. In other words, even though the time-saving award is won, the third low-probability time-saving game state is not set, and the remaining number of time-saving times remains 50.

(3) When the time-saving award is won during the third low-probability time-saving game state (Example 1)
For example, when there are five remaining times of time-saving in the third low-probability time-saving game state, a lottery based on the second special chart random number is conducted to determine whether the player has won the time-saving award and the time-saving chart pattern J3 is determined.
In this case, the game state at the start of the changing display of the special pattern (time-saving pattern J3) is a time-saving game state (third low-probability time-saving game state), so the number of time-saving times can be set to 20 in response to the determination of the time-saving pattern J3 (see Figure 164 (b)).
Then, since the number of time-saving times (20 times) that can be set in response to the determination of the time-saving pattern J3 is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times (5 times) in the currently set third low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set at the time when the display of the special pattern changes begins, and then, when the display of the special pattern changes ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the game state is newly set to the third low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times is set to 20 times.
(Specific Example 2)
For example, when the remaining number of time-saving times in the third low-probability time-saving game state is 50, the player wins the time-saving award by lottery based on the second special chart random number, and the time-saving chart pattern J4 is determined.
In this case, since the game state at the start of the changing display of the special pattern (time-saving pattern J4) is a time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times can be set to 50 in response to the determination of the time-saving pattern J4 (see Figure 164 (b)).
Then, the number of time-saving times (50) that can be set in response to the determination of the time-saving symbol J4 is equal to or less than the remaining number of time-saving times (50) in the currently set third low-probability time-saving game state, so the currently set third low-probability time-saving game state continues as is. In other words, even though the time-saving award has been won, a new third low-probability time-saving game state is not set, and the remaining number of time-saving times remains 50.

(Specific Example 3)
For example, when the remaining number of time-saving times in the third low-probability time-saving game state is 40, the player wins the time-saving award by lottery based on the first special chart random number, and the time-saving chart pattern J2 is determined.
In this case, since the game state at the start of the changing display of the special pattern (time-saving pattern J2) is a time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times can be set to 50 in response to the determination of the time-saving pattern J2 (see Figure 164 (b)).
Then, since the number of time-saving times (50 times) that can be set in response to the determination of the time-saving pattern J2 is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times (40 times) in the currently set third low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set at the time when the display of the special pattern changes begins, and then, when the display of the special pattern changes ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the game state is newly set to the third low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times is set to 50 times.
(Specific Example 4)
For example, when the remaining number of time-saving times in the third low-probability time-saving game state is 30, the time-saving award is won by a lottery based on the first special chart random number, and the time-saving chart pattern J1 is determined.
In this case, since the game state at the start of the changing display of the special pattern (time-saving pattern J1) is a time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times can be set to 20 in response to the determination of the time-saving pattern J1 (see Figure 164 (b)).
Then, since the number of time-saving times (20 times) that can be set in response to the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 is equal to or less than the remaining number of time-saving times (30 times) in the currently set third low-probability time-saving game state, the currently set third low-probability time-saving game state continues as it is. In other words, even though the time-saving award has been won, a new third low-probability time-saving game state is not set, and the remaining number of time-saving times remains 30.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, if a time-saving grant is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, it is possible to set a third low-probability time-saving game state based on the time-saving grant winning at the time when the variable display of the time-saving pattern (special pattern) determined based on the winning has ended and the stop display time has elapsed, and when the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, the third low-probability time-saving game state being set ends and the normal game state is set at the time when the variable display of the above-mentioned time-saving pattern begins.
In other words, when the third low-probability time-shortening game state is set based on winning a time-shortening award while the time-shortening game state is being set, the time-shortening game state being set is terminated before the third low-probability time-shortening game state is set, so that the main control board 100 can reliably grasp the start of the third low-probability time-shortening game state based on winning a time-shortening award.

In addition, because the normal game state occurs from the time the above-mentioned time-saving symbol changing display begins until the changing display ends and the stop display time has elapsed, it is difficult for the player to notice that the currently set time-saving game state has ended and a new time-saving game state has been set based on a time-saving bonus win, giving the impression that the time-saving game state is continuing.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, if the number of time-saving times according to the determined type of time-saving pattern and the game state at the reference time is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state being set, the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state being set is terminated at the start of the display of the changing time-saving pattern, and the third low-probability time-saving game state with the above-mentioned number of time-saving times is set at the point when the display of the changing time-saving pattern ends and the stop display time has elapsed.
This not only gives the impression that the time-shortened game state is continuing, but also gives the impression that the number of remaining time-shortened times in the time-shortened game state has increased, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Next, an overview of the processing related to winning the time-saving award will be explained using a flowchart.
First, the time-saving award winning change start processing that is executed when the display of the special pattern changes when the time-saving award is won will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 166.
In step 8000, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving award has been won by the winning/losing lottery. If it is determined that the time-saving award has not been won, the time-saving award winning change start processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving award has been won, the process proceeds to the next step 8001.
In step 8001, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start of the variable display of the special symbol. If it is determined that it is not the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the time-saving grant winning variable start processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 8002.

In step 8002, the main CPU 101 checks the game state at the time (i.e., the game state at the reference time) and the number of time-saving times that can be set corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the winning of the time-saving award. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 8003.
In step 8003, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game is currently in the second low-probability time-shortened game state or the third low-probability time-shortened game state. If it is determined that the game is not currently in either the second low-probability time-shortened game state or the third low-probability time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step 8006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is currently in the second low-probability time-shortened game state or the third low-probability time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to the next step 8004.

In step 8004, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of time-saving times confirmed in step 8002 is greater than the number of time-saving times remaining in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state at that time. If it is determined that the number is not greater, the time-saving award winning variation start processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number is greater, the process proceeds to the next step 8005.
In step 8005, the main CPU 101 ends the second low-probability time-shortened game state or the third low-probability time-shortened game state that has been set, and sets the normal game state. At this time, the count value of the corresponding time-shortened game counter is also reset (cleared to zero). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 8006.

In step 8006, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving grant game state setting waiting flag setting process to set a time-saving grant game state setting waiting flag, which indicates that the game is waiting to be set to a time-saving game state based on the time-saving grant win. Specifically, if the game state at the time the time-saving grant win was the normal game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, or the third low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving grant game state setting waiting flag is turned on. Then, the time-saving grant win change start processing is terminated.

Next, the processing at the time of elapse of the time-saving award winning stop display time, which is executed when the stop display time has elapsed after the variable display of the special pattern based on the time-saving award winning has ended, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 167.
In step 8010, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time has elapsed after the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the time-saving award has ended and the stop display time for the special symbol to be displayed in a stopped state has elapsed. If it is determined that the stop display time has not elapsed, the time-saving award winning stop display time elapsed processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the processing proceeds to the next step 8011.
In step 8011, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time-saving game state setting waiting flag is on. If it is determined that the flag is not on (i.e., it is off), the time-saving game state setting waiting flag ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 8012.

In step 8012, the main CPU 101 sets the third low-probability time-saving game state, and sets the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the winning of the time-saving award in the corresponding time-saving number counter. This starts counting the number of time-saving times corresponding to the set time-saving game state, and the count value of the time-saving number counter is decremented by 1 each time a variable display of a special symbol is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 8013.
In step 8013, the main CPU 101 turns off the time-saving award game state setting waiting flag, and then ends the time-saving award win stop display time lapse processing.

(Outline of the production)
Next, with regard to the effects executed in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, we will explain mainly the various effects executed in relation to the variable effects and the setting of the time-saving game state (third low-probability time-saving game state) based on winning the time-saving award.

(Summary of the variable effects)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, a variable effect is executed in which the result of the winning/losing lottery is notified by the display mode of the effect pattern 50 while the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. In this variable effect, the variable display of the effect pattern 50 (dummy pattern) is performed superimposed on the background image displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21. Then, the result of the winning/losing lottery can be suggested (notified) to the player by the combination (stop display mode) of the effect pattern 50 that is stopped and displayed after the variable display.
As described above, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14 does not perform so-called simultaneous rotation control, and while a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner based on a game ball entering either the first start winning slot 15 or the second start winning slot 16, a special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner based on a game ball entering the other slot. Therefore, in the center of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, only a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed based on the game ball entering the slot is executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, as in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the appearance of the display pattern 50 that is displayed in a variable manner during the variable performance differs depending on the game state, and the variable display is performed using the display pattern 50 in an appearance that corresponds to the game state being set.
Specifically, the effect pattern 50 that changes during the normal game state (hereinafter also referred to as the normal effect pattern) is in the form of an upright Gothic font (see Figures 168 (b) and (d)), the effect pattern 50 that changes during the high-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as the high-probability time-saving effect pattern) is in the form of an upright Mincho font (not specifically shown), the effect pattern 50 that changes during the first low-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as the low-probability time-saving effect pattern A) is in the form of an italic Gothic font (not specifically shown), and the effect pattern 50 that changes during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the third low-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as the low-probability time-saving effect pattern B) are both in the form of an italic Mincho font (see Figure 169 (b)).
When the game state is switched, the appearance of the effect pattern 50 displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 is also switched accordingly.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 14, the same type of effect pattern 50 is displayed to change during both the second low-probability time-shortened game state and the third low-probability time-shortened game state, so it is impossible to determine whether the set game state is the second low-probability time-shortened game state or the third low-probability time-shortened game state based on the type of effect pattern 50 that is displayed to change.

The appearance of the effect symbols 50 is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to provide effect symbols 50 with different display colors or effect symbols 50 with different characters attached for each game state. Also, it is possible to have a variable display using effect symbols 50 with different appearances in all game states.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, all of the effect symbols 50 have the numeral symbols "1" to "8" and the alphabet symbol "J", and the changing display of the effect symbols 50 is cyclically displayed as follows: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "7" → "8" → "J" → "1" → ...

In any game state, if a jackpot is won, the first, second, and third stop symbols will all be displayed as the same number pattern (for example, 222, 555, etc.), indicating that a jackpot has been won. Note that, hereafter, this type of stop display pattern will also be referred to as the "jackpot pattern."

In addition, in the case of a loss, at least one of the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol is displayed as a different number symbol (for example, 312, 558, 282, etc.) in any game state. Note that, hereinafter, such a stop display mode will also be referred to as a "loss mode."
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when a time-saving award is won during a normal game state, the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol are all displayed as "J" symbols (JJJ). Note that, hereinafter, such a stop display mode will also be referred to as a "time-saving award winning mode."
In contrast, if a time-saving award is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, or the third low-probability time-saving game state, the display will stop in a losing state, as in the case of a losing game described above.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, during normal game mode, if a time-saving grant is won, the winning of the time-saving grant is indicated by the display stopping in a time-saving grant winning mode, and if a loss is not won, the fact that a loss has been made is indicated by the display stopping in a losing mode.
In contrast, in the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the third low-probability time-saving game state, the stop display is in a losing mode regardless of whether the time-saving award is won or lost. Therefore, in these game states, the stop display mode of the effect symbol 50 does not clearly indicate a loss or a win in the time-saving award, and the player cannot know whether the result of the lottery is a loss or a win in the time-saving award.

Furthermore, the effect patterns 50 that are displayed in a stopped state are not limited to the above-mentioned patterns, and may be special patterns (for example, pseudo-consecutive patterns indicating that a pseudo-consecutive effect will be executed, or pre-reading patterns indicating that a pre-reading effect will be executed) that indicate that a predetermined effect will be executed when the effect is displayed in a stopped state (for example, a pseudo-consecutive effect described below, or a pre-reading effect that is executed for a predetermined hold and can be executed before a variable effect based on that hold).Furthermore, a first low-probability time-saving pattern may be displayed in a stopped state that indicates that a first low-probability time-saving game state will be set.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, the variable presentation patterns include a normal miss pattern, a reach pattern with development, a reach pattern without development, and a reach pattern with confirmation notification.

The normal losing pattern is a pattern in which the first and second stop symbols are stopped and displayed in different patterns (i.e., without a reach display), and then stopped and displayed in a losing mode.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when the determined variation pattern command is "00H", "01H", "10H", "11H", "1CH", "1DH", "20H", "21H", "30H", "31H", "3CH", or "3DH", the variation performance is executed according to the normal miss variation pattern.
That is, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined in the normal game state and a fluctuation pattern of "6 seconds fluctuation" or "13 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined in the second low probability time-saving game state or the third low probability time-saving game state and a fluctuation pattern of "6 seconds fluctuation" or "13 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when a time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3 or J4 is determined in the second low probability time-saving game state or the third low probability time-saving game state and a fluctuation pattern of "6 seconds fluctuation" or "13 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when a high probability time-saving game state When a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined in the first low-probability time-saving game state and a fluctuation pattern of "6-second fluctuation" or "13-second fluctuation" is determined, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined in the first low-probability time-saving game state and a fluctuation pattern of "3-second fluctuation" or "13-second fluctuation" is determined, or when a time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3 or J4 is determined in the first low-probability time-saving game state and a fluctuation pattern of "3-second fluctuation" or "13-second fluctuation" is determined, a fluctuation presentation based on a normal losing fluctuation pattern can be executed (see Figure 165).

In the reach pattern with development, a reach display is performed in which the first and second stopping patterns are displayed as the same pattern, and then a reach development display is executed in which a predetermined development display image (not specifically shown) is displayed, and then the pattern is displayed as a miss, jackpot, or time-saving winning pattern.
In a pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when the determined variation pattern command is "03H", "0BH", "0FH", "13H", "1BH", "23H", or "2BH", a variation effect can be executed by a development reach pattern.
That is, when a losing symbol Z1 is determined in the normal gaming state and a "60-second variation" variation pattern is determined, a variation effect based on a reach-to-development pattern can be executed, and in this case, the display is stopped in a losing mode. Also, when a jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined in the normal gaming state and a "60-second variation" variation pattern is determined, a variation effect based on a reach-to-development pattern can be executed, and in this case, the display is stopped in a jackpot mode. Also, when a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined in the normal gaming state and a "60-second variation" variation pattern is determined, a variation effect based on a reach-to-development pattern can be executed, and in this case, the display is stopped in a time-saving winning mode (see FIG. 165).
Furthermore, when a losing symbol Z2 is determined in the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the high-probability time-shortened game state, and a "60-second variation" variation pattern is determined, a variation effect based on a reach-to-win pattern with a possibility of development can be executed, and in this case, the display is stopped in a losing mode. Furthermore, when a jackpot symbol X3, X4, or X5 is determined in the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the high-probability time-shortened game state, and a "60-second variation" variation pattern is determined, a variation effect based on a reach-to-win pattern with a possibility of development can be executed, and in this case, the display is stopped in a jackpot mode (see FIG. 165).

In the no-development reach pattern, after the reach display is made, the above-mentioned reach development performance is not executed, and the display stops in a miss mode, a big win mode, or a time-saving winning mode.
In a pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when the determined variation pattern command is "02H", "0AH", "0EH", "12H", "1AH", "22H", "2AH", or "3AH", a variation effect can be executed by a no-development reach pattern.
That is, in the normal gaming state, when a losing symbol Z1 is determined and a "20-second variation" variation pattern is determined, a variation effect based on a no-development reach pattern can be executed, and in this case, the display is stopped in a losing mode. Also, in the normal gaming state, when a jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, or X5 is determined and a "20-second variation" variation pattern is determined, a variation effect based on a no-development reach pattern can be executed, and in this case, the display is stopped in a jackpot mode. Also, in the normal gaming state, when a time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, or J4 is determined and a "20-second variation" variation pattern is determined, a variation effect based on a no-development reach pattern can be executed, and in this case, the display is stopped in a time-saving award winning mode (see FIG. 165).
Furthermore, when a losing symbol Z2 is determined in the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the high-probability time-shortened game state, and a "20-second variation" variation pattern is determined, a variation effect based on a no-development reach pattern can be executed, and in this case, the display is stopped in a losing mode. Furthermore, when a jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, or X5 is determined in the second low-probability time-shortened game state, the third low-probability time-shortened game state, or the high-probability time-shortened game state, and a "20-second variation" variation pattern is determined, a variation effect based on a no-development reach pattern can be executed, and in this case, the display is stopped in a jackpot mode (see FIG. 165).
In addition, when the jackpot pattern X1, X2, X3, X4 or X5 is determined in the first low-probability time-saving game state and the "10-second fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is determined, a fluctuation effect using a no-development reach pattern can be executed, and in this case the display will stop in a jackpot mode (see Figure 165).

The confirmed notification reach pattern is a type of reach pattern with development or reach pattern without development, in which, while the display of the changing performance pattern 50 is being displayed, a confirmed notification (for example, rainbow-colored light emitted by a lamp serving as the performance lighting device 23, a rainbow-colored character image being displayed, a rainbow-colored hold display, etc.) is given to indicate that a jackpot or a time-saving award has been won, and the pattern is displayed stopped in a jackpot mode or a time-saving award mode.
In a pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when the determined variation pattern command is "0BH", "0FH", "1BH", or "2BH", a variation effect can be executed by a confirmed notification reach pattern.
That is, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined in the normal gaming state and the "60-second variation" variation pattern is determined, a variation effect based on the confirmed notification reach pattern can be executed, and in this case, the display is stopped in the jackpot mode. Also, when the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined in the normal gaming state and the "60-second variation" variation pattern is determined, a variation effect based on the confirmed notification reach pattern can be executed, and in this case, the display is stopped in the time-saving award winning mode (see FIG. 165).
In addition, when the jackpot pattern X3, X4 or X5 is determined in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state and the variation pattern of "60-second variation" is determined, a variation effect using a confirmed notification reach pattern can be executed, and in this case the display will stop in a jackpot mode (see Figure 165).

Each of the above patterns has a plurality of modes.
For example, each of the above-mentioned patterns includes a mode in which a predetermined preview image is displayed in conjunction with the changing display of the performance pattern 50 (a mode in which a preview performance is executed), a mode in which a predetermined suggestion or notification is given when the operation button 9b is pressed (a mode in which a button operation performance is executed), and a mode in which the reel performance device operates in a predetermined mode (a mode in which a reel operation performance is executed).
In addition, for example, in the reach pattern with development and the reach pattern without development, all the performance symbols 50 temporarily stop in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, the first and second stop symbols temporarily stop with numbers that are one number apart, the third stop symbol temporarily stops with a temporary stop symbol that suggests a temporary stop, etc.), and then the variable display is resumed a predetermined number of times, after which a reach display is displayed (a mode in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed), etc. are provided.
Furthermore, for example, the reach pattern with development includes a mode in which, after executing a reach development effect in which a predetermined development effect image is displayed, it switches to a reach development effect in which a high expectation development effect image is displayed, which suggests that the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher than the predetermined development effect image (a mode in which a chance-up effect is executed), a mode in which the display is stopped in a miss mode, and then suddenly changes to a jackpot mode or a time-saving winning mode.
In addition, the above-mentioned preview image, the operation mode of the accessory effect device, the number of times the temporary stop is executed, the high expectation development effect image, etc. are provided in a plurality of types with different expectations of winning the jackpot.
Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned effects, in addition to displaying images and outputting sounds, the effect lighting device 23 (lamp) may be made to emit light in a predetermined lighting pattern or color.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, although not specifically shown, the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 is provided with a presentation mode determination table that stores the above-mentioned pattern modes in association with each of the variation pattern commands that can be determined. When the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 receives a variation pattern command at the start of variation, it acquires a predetermined presentation random number and determines the variation presentation mode based on the acquired presentation random number, the received variation pattern command, and the above-mentioned presentation mode determination table. The variation presentation is executed in the mode thus determined.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J3 or J4 is determined, a variation pattern of "3-second variation,""6-secondvariation," or "13-second variation" is determined. When these variation patterns are determined, a loss occurs during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the loss symbol Z2 is determined, and it is possible to execute a variation effect according to a normal loss pattern that is executed when the variation pattern of "6-second variation" or "13-second variation" is determined.
In other words, during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the third low-probability time-saving game state, the same type of variable presentation can be executed whether the player wins or loses the time-saving award, so depending on the type of variable presentation, it becomes difficult for the player to understand whether the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss or a win in the time-saving award.
As described above, during the second low-probability time-shortened game state and the third low-probability time-shortened game state, it is not possible to know whether the result of the win/loss lottery is a miss or a win for the time-shortened game even based on the change time of the special pattern or the stop display mode of the performance pattern 50, so it is difficult for the player to notice that the time-shortened game state will be set based on the win of the time-shortened game, and it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation for the setting of the time-shortened game state based on the win of the time-shortened game.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is selected as a winning symbol during the normal game mode, a "60-second variation" variation pattern can be determined. When this variation pattern is determined, it is possible to execute a variation effect based on a confirmation notification reach pattern, which is not executed when a losing symbol is selected during the normal game mode.
As a result, when a confirmation notification reach pattern is executed during the normal game state, the winning of a jackpot or a time-saving award is confirmed, thereby increasing the expectation for the setting of a time-saving game state based on the winning of a time-saving award.

(Overview of background image display)
In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, the background images displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 include a normal background image corresponding to the normal game state (see Figures 168 (a) to (d)), a high-probability time-shortening background image corresponding to the high-probability time-shortening game state (not specifically shown), a low-probability time-shortening background image A corresponding to the first low-probability time-shortening game state (not specifically shown), and a low-probability time-shortening background image B corresponding to the second low-probability time-shortening game state and the third low-probability time-shortening game state (see Figures 168 (e) and 169 (a) to (e)), and the corresponding background image is displayed on the display unit 21a during each game state.

Specifically, a normal background image is displayed during the normal game state, a high-probability time-saving background image is displayed during the high-probability time-saving game state that is set after the end of special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X2, X4 or X5, a low-probability time-saving background image A is displayed during the first low-probability time-saving game state that is set when the number of time-saving activations is reached, and a low-probability time-saving background image B is displayed during the second low-probability time-saving game state that is set after the end of special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 or X3 and during the third low-probability time-saving game state that is set after winning the time-saving award.
When the game state is changed, the displayed background image is also changed accordingly.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, as described above, if a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, the currently set second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state ends, the normal game state is set, and then the third low-probability time-saving game state based on the time-saving award winning is set. In this case, the low-probability time-saving background image B that was displayed while the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state was set is not switched to the normal background image when the normal game state is set, and continues to be displayed as is while the normal game state is set. In other words, if a player wins a time-saving award during the second or third low-probability time-saving game state and the third low-probability time-saving game state is set based on that winning, the low-probability time-saving background image B will continue to be displayed even after the third low-probability time-saving game state based on the time-saving award winning is set, without interruption from the previously set second or third low-probability time-saving game state.

(Outline of various effects when the time-saving gaming state (third low-probability time-saving gaming state) is set based on winning the time-saving award)
Next, we will explain the outline of various effects that occur when the third low-probability time-saving game state is set based on winning the time-saving award.

(1) When a time-saving award is won during a normal game state and a third low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the winning, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol (time-saving symbol) based on the winning of the time-saving award, a normal background image is displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, and the variable display starts along with the start of the variable display of the special symbol (see FIG. 168(a)). For example, when a reach pattern with development is determined as the variable display mode, a reach display using a "J" symbol is performed, and then a reach development display is executed, and the time-saving award mode is displayed (see FIGS. 168(b) to 168(d)).
Then, when the variable display of the special symbols described above has finished and the stop display time has elapsed, a third low-probability time-shortened game state is set, and various effects based on the setting of the third low-probability time-shortened game state are executed.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 168(e), the displayed normal background image is switched to the low-probability time-saving background image B, and the displayed normal effect symbol is switched to the low-probability time-saving effect symbol B. Also, a low-probability time-saving notification is made to notify that the third low-probability time-saving game state has been set (for example, a low-probability time-saving notification image saying "Chance time has started!" is displayed).
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, even when the second low-probability time-shortening game state is set after the special game ends, a low-probability time-shortening notification in the same manner as described above is made. That is, in both cases when the second low-probability time-shortening game state is set and when the third low-probability time-shortening game state is set, a low-probability time-shortening notification in the same manner is made, thereby notifying the setting of the second low-probability time-shortening game state or the third low-probability time-shortening game state.

In addition, a remaining number suggestion display is displayed indicating the number of time-saving times that are set in accordance with the type of time-saving symbol determined based on winning the time-saving award and the game state at the start (reference time) of the above-mentioned special symbol variation display (i.e., a value indicating the number of time-saving times remaining until the third low-probability time-saving game state ends is displayed; for example, if time-saving symbol J2 is determined, "60" is displayed, indicating 60 times (see Figure 168 (e))). Then, each time the special symbol variation display is executed, a countdown display is displayed for the value displayed in the remaining number suggestion display (i.e., a countdown display of the remaining number of time-saving times) at the start of the variation display.

In addition, a right-hit operation notification (for example, a right-hit operation notification image of "right hit →→→") is issued to prompt the player to perform an operation to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b. This right-hit operation notification ends when a predetermined operation notification time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed. Also, in the third low-probability time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 when a right-hit operation notification has not been issued, another right-hit operation notification will be issued from the time the ball entered until a predetermined re-operation notification time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed.

Although not specifically shown, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14 is provided with a right-hit notification lamp HL, which notifies the player that a game ball will be shot toward the second game area 12b, at a predetermined location outside the game area 12 on the game board 11. This right-hit notification lamp HL is connected to the sub-control board 300.
Although the right-hit notification lamp HL is off in the normal game state, when a time-shortened game state (first low-probability time-shortened game state, second low-probability time-shortened game state, third low-probability time-shortened game state, high-probability time-shortened game state) is set, a state transition command indicating that the time-shortened game state has been set is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving this command, turns on the right-hit notification lamp HL. The right-hit notification lamp HL remains lit during the above-mentioned time-shortened game state. Then, when the above-mentioned time-shortened game state ends and the normal game state is set, a state transition command indicating that the normal game state has been set is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving this command, turns off the right-hit notification lamp HL.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when a time-saving award is won during the normal game state and the third low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above, the right-hit notification lamp HL lights up.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, during a time-shortened game state (during a first low-probability time-shortened game state, a second low-probability time-shortened game state, a third low-probability time-shortened game state, or a high-probability time-shortened game state), the main CPU 101 is set to output an external signal indicating that the time-shortened game state is set to an external device of the pachinko machine P (such as a hall computer or a data display device that displays the number of jackpots, etc.).
As described above, when a time-shortening award is won during the normal game state and the third low-probability time-shortening game state is set, the main CPU 101 starts outputting the external signal described above.

(2) When a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the third low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the winning, at the time when the display of the special pattern based on the winning of the time-saving award starts, the low-probability time-saving background image B is displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, and the change effect starts along with the start of the display of the special pattern (see Figure 169 (a)).
Then, if the number of time-saving times that can be set based on the winning of the time-saving award described above is greater than the number of time-saving times remaining in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state currently set, the third low-probability time-saving game state based on the winning of the time-saving award is set, and as described above, at the start of the display of the changing special pattern based on the winning of the time-saving award, the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state currently set ends and the normal game state is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 14, as in other application example 13, for example, when the remaining number of time-saving plays in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state reaches 0 (when a predetermined number of win/lose draws are performed without winning a jackpot), the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state currently set ends and the normal game state is set.
When the normal game state is set in this way, the currently displayed low-probability time-saving background image B switches to the normal background image, the previously displayed low-probability time-saving effect pattern B switches to the normal effect pattern, and a low-probability time-saving end notification (for example, a low-probability time-saving end notification image saying "Chance time ended") is displayed to notify that the currently set second low-probability time-saving game state or third low-probability time-saving game state has ended and the normal game state has been set. In addition, the lit right-hit notification lamp HL goes out, and the output of an external signal to the external device ends. Furthermore, a left-hit operation notification (for example, a left-hit operation notification image saying "←←← left hit") is displayed to prompt the player to perform an operation to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a.

On the other hand, as mentioned above, if the second or third low-probability time-saving game state currently set ends and the normal game state is set at the time when the display of the special symbol changes based on the winning of the time-saving award begins, the low-probability time-saving background image B and the low-probability time-saving effect pattern B, which can indicate that the second or third low-probability time-saving game state is in effect, continue to be displayed (see, e.g., Figures 169(a)-(b)), the right-hit notification lamp HL continues to light up, and the output of an external signal to an external device also continues. In addition, the remaining number indication display, which indicates the number of remaining time-saving plays, also continues to be displayed (see, e.g., Figures 169(a)-(b)).
In contrast, even if the normal game state is set as described above, the low-probability time-saving end notification and the left-hit operation notification are not executed. In other words, when the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state that is set based on the winning of the time-saving award ends and the normal game state is set, the execution of the low-probability time-saving end notification and the left-hit operation notification is restricted.

If a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, the normal miss pattern variation effect is executed as described above, and the game is stopped and displayed in a miss mode (see FIG. 169(b)). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol described above ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low-probability time-saving game state is set.
Here, in the case of (1), the setting of the third low-probability time-shortening gaming state results in switching to the low-probability time-shortening background image B, switching to the low-probability time-shortening effect pattern B, execution of a low-probability time-shortening notification, execution of a right-hit operation notification, lighting of the right-hit notification lamp HL, output of an external signal, etc. However, in the case of (2), as described above, in the normal gaming state before the third low-probability time-shortening gaming state was set, the low-probability time-shortening background image B and the low-probability time-shortening effect pattern B were displayed, the right-hit notification lamp HL was lit, and an external signal was output. Therefore, rather than performing new processes such as display, lighting, and output when the third low-probability time-shortening gaming state was set, these processes continue without interruption from the normal gaming state.
Furthermore, since the above-mentioned processing continues, the player will recognize that the second low-probability time-shortening game state or the third low-probability time-shortening game state is continuing. Therefore, a new right-hit operation notification based on the setting of the third low-probability time-shortening game state will not be executed.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when the third low-probability time-shortening game state is set as described above and the display of the next special pattern begins to change, a time-shortening number notification is executed to notify the player of the number of time-shortening times set corresponding to the third low-probability time-shortening game state (the number of time-shortening times remaining until the third low-probability time-shortening game state, which is set based on winning the time-shortening award), which is set corresponding to the third low-probability time-shortening game state.
In this notification of the number of times time is reduced, an update display is performed in which the value indicating the remaining number of times time is reduced displayed in the remaining number indication display described above is increased by a number equivalent to the difference between that value and the number of times time is reduced set corresponding to the third low probability time-reduction game state described above.
Specifically, for example, if the number of remaining time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state is 21 (the value indicating the remaining number of time-saving times displayed in the remaining number suggestion display is "21"), and the time-saving award is won and the time-saving symbol J4 is determined, the third low-probability time-saving game state with 50 time-saving times is set. Then, when the variable display of the next special symbol begins, a countdown display is performed for the above-mentioned value displayed in the remaining number suggestion display, and the value indicating the remaining number of time-saving times becomes "20" (see FIG. 169(c)). Then, the difference between the value "20" indicating the remaining number of time-saving plays and the 50 number of time-saving plays set corresponding to the third low-probability time-saving game state is "30", and at this point, a remaining number increase notification is made to notify that the value displayed in the remaining number suggestion display will be increased (for example, a remaining number increase notification image such as "Added! +30" is displayed), and the value displayed in the remaining number suggestion display is updated to "50" (see Figures 169 (d) to (e)).
Thereafter, each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, a countdown display is performed for the value displayed in the remaining number indication display at the start of the variable display.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, when a time-saving award is won in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state and the third low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the winning, when the display of the special pattern changes based on the winning starts, the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state that is currently set ends and the normal game state is set, but the display of the low-probability time-saving background image B and the low-probability time-saving performance pattern B that were performed in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, the lighting of the right-hit notification lamp HL, the output of an external signal to an external device, etc. continue, and even if the normal game state is set, the low-probability time-saving end notification and the left-hit operation notification are not executed.
This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the normal game state has been set, and gives the player the impression that the second low-probability time-shortened game state or the third low-probability time-shortened game state is continuing as is.

In addition, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, when a third low-probability time-saving game state is set based on winning a time-saving award, an update display is executed to increase the value displayed in the remaining number suggestion display (a value indicating the remaining number of time-saving plays) by a number equivalent to the difference between that value and the number of time-saving plays set in accordance with the above-mentioned third low-probability time-saving game state.
This gives the player the impression that the number of remaining time-saving times has increased in the second low-probability time-saving game state and the third low-probability time-saving game state that were set before the new third low-probability time-saving game state based on the winning of the time-saving award, thereby increasing the player's interest.

(Modification of Pachinko Machine According to Application Example 14)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, if a time-saving award is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the setting of the third low-probability time-saving game state based on that winning is not performed, but this is not limited to this.
For example, even if a time-saving award is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state, a third low-probability time-saving game state may be set based on the time-saving award winning, just as in the case of winning a time-saving award during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state.
Specifically, if a player wins a time-saving bonus during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state may be ended and a normal game state may be set when the display of the special symbol (time-saving symbol) determined based on the winning bonus begins to change, and then the third low-probability time-saving game state may be set when the display of the special symbol changes to change and the stop display time has elapsed.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 can be achieved.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, the time-saving award is not awarded in the win/loss lottery during a high-probability game state (high-probability time-saving game state), but this is not limited to this, and for example, the time-saving award may be awarded even in the win/loss lottery during a high-probability game state.
In this case, for example, the above-mentioned high-probability non-time-shortened game state can be set as a settable game state, and when a time-shortened bonus is awarded during this high-probability non-time-shortened game state, a time-shortened game state (for example, a second time-shortened game state or a third time-shortened game state, etc.) can be set based on this, leaving the high-probability game state as it is, so that a game state combining a high-probability game state and a time-shortened game state (for example, a game state combining a high-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state (the high-probability time-shortened game state in this application example), a game state combining a high-probability game state and a third time-shortened game state, etc.) can be set.
Furthermore, for example, when a time-saving grant is won during a high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability game state may remain as it is, but the second time-saving game state may be ended and changed to a non-time-saving game state, thereby setting a high-probability non-time-saving game state (a game state combining a high-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state), and then a time-saving game state (for example, a third time-saving game state, etc.) based on the above-mentioned time-saving grant winning may be set, thereby setting a game state combining a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state (for example, a game state combining a high-probability game state and a third time-saving game state, etc.).
Furthermore, for example, even when a time-saving award is won during a high-probability time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state based on the winning may not be set, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state that has been set may continue as is. In other words, when a time-saving award is won during a high-probability gaming state, the time-saving gaming state based on the winning may not be set.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 can be achieved.

In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, it was possible to win the time-saving grant in either the win/loss lottery based on the first special chart random number or the win/loss lottery based on the second special chart random number, but this is not limited to this.
For example, it may be possible to win the time-saving grant in the lottery based on the second special random number, but not to win the time-saving grant in the lottery based on the first special random number.
In this case, during the time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, etc.), a game ball entering the second start winning slot 16 mainly causes a lottery to be drawn based on the second special random number, making it possible to win the time-saving award, but even if a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 due to an operational error or the like and a lottery to be drawn based on the first special random number, the time-saving award will not be won. Also, during the non-time-saving game state (during the normal game state), a game ball entering the first start winning slot 15 mainly causes a lottery to be drawn based on the first special random number, making it impossible to win the time-saving award, but even if a game ball entering the second start winning slot 16 mainly causes a lottery to be drawn based on the second special random number due to an operational error or the like, the time-saving award can be won.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 can be achieved.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state (during a second low-probability time-saving game state, a third low-probability time-saving game state, etc.), a relatively short fluctuation time is more likely to be determined than when a time-saving award is won during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) (i.e., the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is determined is high; in other words, the rate at which a fluctuation display with a relatively short fluctuation time is executed is high), but this is not limited to this.

For example, if a time-saving bonus is awarded during a time-saving play state, the setting may be such that a relatively longer variable time is more likely to be determined than if a time-saving bonus is awarded during a non-time-saving play state. Alternatively, the setting may be such that the determination ratio for both lengths of variable time is the same or approximately the same whether a time-saving bonus is awarded during a time-saving play state or a non-time-saving play state.

Also, for example, if a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state, the setting may be such that a relatively shorter variable time is more likely to be determined than if a loss occurs during the time-saving game state, or a relatively longer variable time is more likely to be determined than if a loss occurs during the time-saving game state. Also, the setting may be such that the determination ratio for both lengths of variable time is the same or approximately the same in both cases where a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state and where a loss occurs during the time-saving game state.
Also, for example, when a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state, the setting may be such that a relatively shorter variable time is more likely to be determined than when a jackpot is won during a time-saving game state, or a relatively longer variable time is more likely to be determined than when a jackpot is won during a time-saving game state. Also, the setting may be such that the determination ratio for both lengths of variable time is the same or approximately the same in both cases where a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state and where a jackpot is won during a time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state, the setting may be such that a relatively shorter variable time is more likely to be determined than if a loss occurs during the time-saving game state, or a relatively longer variable time is more likely to be determined than if a loss occurs during the time-saving game state. Also, the setting may be such that the determination ratio for both lengths of variable time is the same or approximately the same in both cases where a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state and where a loss occurs during the time-saving game state.
Also, for example, when a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state, the setting may be such that a relatively shorter variable time is more likely to be determined than when a jackpot is won during a time-saving game state, or a relatively longer variable time is more likely to be determined than when a jackpot is won during a time-saving game state. Also, the setting may be such that the determination ratio for both lengths of variable time is the same or approximately the same in both cases where a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state and where a jackpot is won during a time-saving game state.

Also, for example, when a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state, the setting may be such that a relatively shorter variable time is more likely to be determined than when a loss occurs during a non-time-saving game state, or a relatively longer variable time is more likely to be determined than when a loss occurs during a non-time-saving game state. Also, the setting may be such that the determination ratio for both lengths of variable time is the same or approximately the same in both cases where a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state and where a loss occurs during a non-time-saving game state.
Also, for example, when a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state, the setting may be such that a relatively shorter variable time is more likely to be determined than when a jackpot is won during a non-time-saving game state, or the setting may be such that a relatively longer variable time is more likely to be determined than when a jackpot is won during a non-time-saving game state. Also, the setting may be such that the determination ratio for both lengths of variable time is the same or approximately the same in both cases where a time-saving award is won during a time-saving game state and where a jackpot is won during a non-time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if a player wins a time-saving bonus through a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state, the setting may be such that a relatively shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be determined than if a player wins a time-saving bonus through a win/loss lottery based on the first special random number during the time-saving game state, or if a player loses through a win/loss lottery based on the first special random number during the time-saving game state, or if a relatively shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be determined than if a player wins a jackpot through a win/loss lottery based on the first special random number during the time-saving game state, or if a player loses through a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state, or if a relatively shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be determined than if a player wins a jackpot through a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state, or if a relatively shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be determined than if a player wins a jackpot through a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state. The variable time may be set so that it is easier to determine a relatively shorter variable time than when a time-saving lottery is won by a win/lose lottery based on the first special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state, or so that it is easier to determine a relatively shorter variable time than when a win/lose lottery based on the first special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state results in a loss, or so that it is easier to determine a relatively shorter variable time than when a jackpot is won by a win/lose lottery based on the first special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state, or so that it is easier to determine a relatively shorter variable time than when a win/lose lottery based on the second special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state results in a loss, or so that it is easier to determine a relatively shorter variable time than when a jackpot is won by a win/lose lottery based on the second special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if a player wins a time-saving award through a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state, the setting may be such that a relatively longer fluctuation time is more likely to be determined than if a player wins a time-saving award through a win/loss lottery based on the first special random number during the time-saving game state, or if a player loses through a win/loss lottery based on the first special random number during the time-saving game state, or if a relatively longer fluctuation time is more likely to be determined than if a player wins a jackpot through a win/loss lottery based on the first special random number during the time-saving game state, or if a player loses through a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state, or if a relatively longer fluctuation time is more likely to be determined than if a player wins a jackpot through a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state. The variable time may be set so that it is easier to determine a relatively longer variable time than when a time-saving bonus is awarded by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state, or so that it is easier to determine a relatively longer variable time than when a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state results in a loss, or so that it is easier to determine a relatively longer variable time than when a jackpot is awarded by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state, or so that it is easier to determine a relatively longer variable time than when a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state results in a loss, or so that it is easier to determine a relatively longer variable time than when a jackpot is awarded by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state.

Furthermore, for example, in both cases where a player is selected to receive a time-saving bonus through a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state, and where a player is selected to receive a time-saving bonus through a win/loss lottery based on the first special random number during the time-saving game state, the determination ratio for the variable time for each length may be set to be the same or approximately the same. Furthermore, in both cases where a player is selected to receive a time-saving bonus through a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state, and where a player is unsuccessful in ... In all cases where a jackpot is won by a win/lose lottery, the determination ratios for the variable time of all lengths may be set to be the same or approximately the same, and in all cases where a time-saving award is won by a win/lose lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state and where a loss is achieved by a win/lose lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state, the determination ratios for the variable time of all lengths may be set to be the same or approximately the same, and in all cases where a time-saving award is won by a win/lose lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state and where a jackpot is won by a win/lose lottery based on the second special random number during the time-saving game state, the determination ratios for the variable time of all lengths may be set to be the same or approximately the same. In both cases where a time-saving grant is won by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state and where a time-saving grant is won by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the non-time-saving game state, the determination ratio of the variable time of either length may be set to be the same or approximately the same; in both cases where a time-saving grant is won by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state and where a loss is made by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the non-time-saving game state, the determination ratio of the variable time of either length may be set to be the same or approximately the same; in both cases where a time-saving grant is won by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state and where a loss is made by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the non-time-saving game state, the determination ratio of the variable time of either length may be set to be the same or approximately the same; In all cases where a jackpot is won by lottery, the determination ratio for each length of variable time may be set to be the same or approximately the same. In all cases where a time-saving bonus is awarded by a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during time-saving play mode, and in all cases where a loss is achieved by a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during non-time-saving play mode, the determination ratio for each length of variable time may be set to be the same or approximately the same. In all cases where a time-saving bonus is awarded by a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during time-saving play mode, and in all cases where a jackpot is won by a win/loss lottery based on the second special random number during non-time-saving play mode, the determination ratio for each length of variable time may be set to be the same or approximately the same.

Furthermore, in order to make it easier to determine a relatively shorter variable time in one of the above cases than in the other case, all variable times that can be determined in one case may be set to be shorter than all variable times that can be determined in the other case, or the specified variable time that can be determined in one case may be set to be the same as or longer than the variable time that can be determined in the other case, but other variable times other than the specified variable time may be set to be shorter than the variable times that can be determined in the other case.
Furthermore, in order to make it easier to determine a relatively longer variable time in one of the above cases than in the other case, all variable times that can be determined in one case may be set to be longer than all variable times that can be determined in the other case, or the specified variable time that can be determined in one case may be set to be the same as or shorter than the variable time that can be determined in the other case, but other variable times other than the specified variable time may be set to be longer than the variable times that can be determined in the other case.

In another pachinko machine according to application example 14, when a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, if the number of time-saving times determined according to the type of time-saving symbol and the game state at the reference time is greater than the number of time-saving times remaining in the currently set second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state is set with the number of time-saving times determined according to the type of time-saving symbol and the game state at the reference time, but this is not limited to this.

For example, in the second low-probability time-shortening game state or the third low-probability time-shortening game state, when a time-shortening award is won after the remaining number of time-shortening awards has reached a predetermined specific number (for example, 20 times), the second low-probability time-shortening game state or the third low-probability time-shortening game state currently set ends and a normal game state is set at the time when the display of the special symbols changing based on the winning starts, and thereafter, when the display of the special symbols changing ends and the stop display time has elapsed, a third low-probability time-shortening game state with the number of time-shortening awards corresponding to the type of the determined time-shortening pattern and the game state at the reference time is set, and if a time-shortening award is won before the remaining number of time-shortening awards reaches the above-mentioned specific number, the third low-probability time-shortening game state based on the winning of the time-shortening award is not set, and the second low-probability time-shortening game state or the third low-probability time-shortening game state currently set may continue as is.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 can be achieved.

Furthermore, for example, whenever a time-saving grant is won in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state currently set may end and a normal game state may be set when the display of the special pattern changes based on the winning is started, and then, when the display of the special pattern changes ends and the stop display time has elapsed, a third low-probability time-saving game state may be set with the number of time-saving grants corresponding to the type of the determined time-saving pattern and the game state at the reference time.
In this case, the chances of a time-saving game state (third low-probability time-saving game state) being set based on winning the time-saving award can be increased, and the player's interest in winning the time-saving award can be heightened.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, the time-shortened game state that can be set based on winning the time-shortened award is the third time-shortened game state (third low-probability time-shortened game state), but it is not limited to this and may be another time-shortened game state (for example, the second time-shortened game state (second low-probability time-shortened game state)).
Furthermore, for example, when a time-saving award is won, the same time-saving game state may always be set, or different time-saving game states may be set according to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the winning. Specifically, for example, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the second time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) may be set, and when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the third time-saving game state (third low-probability time-saving game state) may be set.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 can be achieved.

In pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when a time-shortened game state is set based on a winning time-shortened award, the currently set time-shortened game state is ended when the display of the special symbol changes based on that winning begins, and then the time-shortened game state based on the winning time-shortened award is set when the display of the special symbol changes ends and the stop display time has elapsed. However, the timing for ending the currently set time-shortened game state and the timing for setting the time-shortened game state based on a winning time-shortened award are not limited to this.

For example, the timing for setting the time-saving game state based on winning a time-saving award may be the point at which the variable display of the above-mentioned special pattern has ended and the stop display time has elapsed, the point at which the variable display of the special pattern has ended, the point at which the machine enters a waiting state for customers if a reserved memory has not been made when the above-mentioned stop display time has elapsed, the point at which the variable display of the next special pattern based on the reserved memory has started when a reserved memory has been made when the above-mentioned stop display time has elapsed, etc.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 can be achieved.

In addition, when a time-saving award is won, the timing for ending the currently set time-saving game state can be any time from when the display of the special pattern based on the time-saving award winning starts to change until before the time-saving game state based on the winning is set.
Specifically, if a time-saving game state based on winning a time-saving award is set when the variable display of the special pattern has ended and the stopped display time has elapsed, when the above-mentioned waiting state for customers has begun, or when the variable display of the next special pattern has begun, the timing for ending the set time-saving game state may be, for example, when the variable display of the special pattern based on winning a time-saving award has begun, any time from when the variable display of the special pattern has begun to when it has ended, when the variable display of the special pattern has ended, when the variable display of the special pattern has ended and the stopped display time has elapsed (limited to before the time-saving game state is set), etc.
Furthermore, when a time-shortened game state is set based on winning a time-shortened award at the time when the display of the changing special pattern has ended, the timing for ending the set time-shortened game state may be, for example, the time when the display of the changing special pattern based on winning a time-shortened award has started, any time from when the display of the changing special pattern has started until it has ended, or the time when the display of the changing special pattern has ended (limited to before the time-shortened game state is set), etc.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 can be achieved.

In pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, the game state at the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on winning the time-saving bonus was referenced to determine (determine) the number of times the time-saving bonus would be played in the time-saving game state based on that winning (i.e., the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on that winning was used as the reference point for the game state for determining (determining) the number of times the time-saving bonus would be played in the time-saving game state based on winning the time-saving bonus), but this reference point is not limited to this.

For example, as described above, if a player wins a time-saving grant during a time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving grants according to the determined type of time-saving pattern and the game state at the reference time is greater than the remaining number of time-saving grants in the time-saving game state being set, the time-saving game state being set based on the winning may be set after the time-saving game state being set is ended, and the reference time may be any time before the time-saving game state being set is ended.
Specifically, for example, if the currently set time-saving game state is to be ended at the end of the changing display of a special pattern based on winning a time-saving award, the above-mentioned reference point may be the start of the changing display of the special pattern, any point from the start to the end of the changing display of the special pattern, the end of the changing display of the special pattern (limited to before the currently set time-saving game state is ended), etc.

Furthermore, for example, if a time-shortening grant is always won during a time-shortening game state, and the time-shortening game state based on the winning is set after the currently set time-shortening game state is terminated, the above-mentioned reference point may be any time before the time-shortening game state based on the winning of the time-shortening grant is set.
Specifically, for example, if a time-shortened game state based on a winning time-shortened award is set at the point in time when the display of a changing special pattern based on that winning time-shortened award has ended and the stopped display time has elapsed, the above-mentioned reference point may be the point in time when the display of a changing special pattern begins, any point in time from when the display of a changing special pattern begins to when it ends, the point in time when the display of a changing special pattern ends, the point in time when the display of a changing special pattern ends and the stopped display time has elapsed (limited to before the time-shortened game state based on a winning time-shortened award is set), etc.
Even in the above case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 can be achieved.

In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, as described above, when a time-shortening grant is won during a time-shortening game state and a time-shortening game state is set based on the winning, the time-shortening game state being set is terminated and a normal game state is set, but this is not limited to this.
For example, without setting the normal game state, the currently set time-saving game state may be directly updated (overwritten) to a time-saving game state based on winning a time-saving award.
Specifically, for example, if a player wins a time-saving award when there are 30 time-saving awards remaining in the second low-probability time-saving game state, and a third low-probability time-saving game state with 50 time-saving awards is set based on the winning, the second low-probability time-saving game state being set may be updated to a third low-probability time-saving game state with 50 time-saving awards (i.e., the second low-probability time-saving game state may be switched to the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the remaining number of time-saving awards may be updated from 30 to 50) at a predetermined setting point in time (for example, the point in time when the variable display of the special pattern based on the time-saving award winning has ended and the stop display time has elapsed).
In this case, the same effect as that of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 is achieved, and since the normal game state is not set when setting the time-saving game state based on winning the time-saving grant, it is more difficult to recognize that the time-saving game state has been updated.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when a time-saving grant is won during normal game mode, it is possible to execute a variation effect of the type that can be executed in the case of a loss (a variation effect with a no-development reach pattern that is executed when the variation pattern of "20-second variation" is determined), but this is not limited to this.
For example, if a time-saving award is won during normal game play, only a variable effect of a type that is not executed in the event of a loss (for example, a variable effect of a type that is executed only in the event of a jackpot win) may be executed, or a variable effect of a type that is not executed in the event of either a loss or a jackpot win (i.e., a variable effect of a type that is executed only in the event of a time-saving award) may be executed.
In addition, in the normal game state, when a time-saving award is won based on the first special random number and when a time-saving award is won based on the second special random number, only the same type of variable presentation may be executed, or different types of variable presentation may be executed. Furthermore, when a time-saving award is won based on the first special random number, the number of types of variable presentation that can be executed may be more or less than when a time-saving award is won based on the second special random number.
In this case, the player's interest in winning the time-saving bonus during the normal game state can be increased.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, when a time-saving grant is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, it is possible to execute a variation effect that can only be executed when a loss occurs (a variation effect according to a normal loss pattern that is executed when a variation pattern of "6-second variation" or "13-second variation" is determined), but this is not limited to this.
For example, if a time-saving grant is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, it may be possible to execute a variable effect in a manner that can be executed not only when a miss occurs but also when a jackpot is won (for example, a no-development reach pattern, etc.), or it may be possible to execute a variable effect in a manner that can be executed only when a jackpot is won, or it may be possible to execute a variable effect in a manner that is not executed when a miss occurs or when a jackpot is won.
Furthermore, during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, only the same type of variable effect may be executed when the time-saving award is won based on the first special random number and when the time-saving award is won based on the second special random number, or different types of variable effect may be executed. Furthermore, when the time-saving award is won based on the second special random number, the number of types of variable effect that can be executed may be more or less than when the time-saving award is won based on the first special random number.
In this case, the player's interest in winning the time-saving award during the time-saving game state can be increased.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 14, the manner of the variable presentation executed based on winning the time-saving award was set to be different between the normal game state and the time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state, third low-probability time-saving game state), but the presentation for which such settings are made is not limited to the variable presentation.
For example, similar settings may be made for predictive effects that can start making predetermined suggestions regarding a predetermined pending memory before the start of a changing effect based on that pending memory, or for pending change effects that change a predetermined pending display to a different state.
Specifically, in the normal game state, if it is determined in advance that the reserved first special random number will be a winner in the award of time-saving bonuses, a pre-reading effect can be executed that makes a predetermined suggestion (for example, a suggestion that there is a high possibility of winning the award of time-saving bonuses) based on the reserved memory, but in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, the above-mentioned pre-reading effect may not be executed even if it is determined in advance that the reserved second special random number will be a winner in the award of time-saving bonuses.
Furthermore, in the normal game state, when a hold display in a predetermined manner is made for the hold memory of the first special random number that has been pre-determined to be a winner of the time-saving award, a hold change effect can be executed that changes the hold display to a specific mode that suggests that the result of the win/loss lottery is more likely to be something other than a miss (a jackpot, a win of the time-saving award) than the predetermined mode; however, in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state, the above-mentioned hold change effect may not be executed even if a hold display in a predetermined manner is made for the hold memory of the second special random number that has been pre-determined to be a winner of the time-saving award.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 can be achieved.

In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, when a player wins a time-saving award in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state and sets the third low-probability time-saving game state based on the winning, when the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state being set is ended and the normal game state is set, the low-probability time-saving background image B and the low-probability time-saving performance pattern B are continuously displayed, the right-hit notification lamp HL is turned on, and an external signal is continuously output, but the continuation of these operations is not limited to the above-mentioned cases.
For example, if the remaining number of time-saving plays reaches 0, ending the second low-probability time-saving play state or the third low-probability time-saving play state and setting the normal play state, and the second special pattern random number (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining reserve) stored in reserve contains one that will result in a winning time-saving play, then the display of the low-probability time-saving background image B and the low-probability time-saving performance pattern B, the lighting of the right-hit notification lamp HL, the output of an external signal, etc. may continue during the above-mentioned normal play state.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 can be achieved.

In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 14, when setting a third low-probability time-saving game state based on winning a time-saving grant during a time-saving game state, during the normal game state that is set by ending the previously set time-saving game state, the display of the low-probability time-saving background image B and the low-probability time-saving performance pattern B, the lighting of the right-hit notification lamp HL, and the output of an external signal are all continued, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to continue only one or more of these.
In addition, although the right-hit operation notification in other application example 14 was set to end when a predetermined operation notification time has elapsed since the time-shortened game state was set, the right-hit operation notification may be set to be always performed during the time-shortened game state. In this case, when setting the third low-probability time-shortened game state based on winning the time-shortened award during the time-shortened game state, the right-hit operation notification may be set to continue even during the normal game state that is set by ending the previously set time-shortened game state.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 can be achieved.

In other application example 14, the time-saving count notification updates the value indicating the remaining number of time-saving times displayed in the remaining number of times indication display by a number equivalent to the difference between that value and the number of time-saving times set in accordance with the above-mentioned third low-probability time-saving game state when the third low-probability time-saving game state is set and the display of the next special symbol changes begins. However, the manner in which the time-saving count notification is executed is not limited to this, and the update display may be performed during the display of the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times after the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, or the update display may be performed multiple times.

(Variation 1 of time-saving count notification)
For example, it is assumed that the time-saving award is won and the time-saving symbol J4 (50 times of time-saving) is determined when the remaining number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state is 21. In this case, for example, in the fifth time that the special symbol is displayed after the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, an update display may be executed at the start of the display of the display of the change.
Specifically, although not specifically shown, at the start of the fifth display of the special pattern change after the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, the value indicating the remaining number of times to be shortened displayed in the remaining number of times suggestion display becomes "16," and the actual remaining number of times to be shortened in the set third low-probability time-saving game state becomes 46, so a remaining number of times increase notification is made to notify that the value displayed in the remaining number of times suggestion display will be increased by "30," and the value displayed in the remaining number of times suggestion display is updated to "46."

(Variation 2 of time-saving number notification)
Also, for example, suppose that the time-saving award is won when the number of remaining time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state is 31, and the time-saving symbol J4 (50 times of time-saving) is determined. In this case, the difference between the value indicating the remaining number of time-saving times displayed in the remaining number of times indication display and the number of time-saving times set corresponding to the third low-probability time-saving game state is "20," but it may be divided into multiple times, for example, in the first special symbol variation display after the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, an update display is executed to increase the value displayed in the remaining number of times indication display by "10" at the start of the variation display, and in the third special symbol variation display after the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, an update display is executed to increase the value displayed in the remaining number of times indication display by "10" at the start of the variation display.
Specifically, although not shown, at the start of the first variable display of the special symbol after the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, the value indicating the remaining number of times of time-saving displayed in the remaining number of times indication display is "30." At this time, a remaining number increase notification is issued to notify that the value displayed in the remaining number of times indication display will be increased by "10," and the value displayed in the remaining number of times indication display is updated to "40."
Furthermore, at the start of the third variable display of the special symbol after the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, the value indicating the remaining number of times of time-saving displayed in the remaining number of times indication display is "38." At this time, a remaining number of times increase notification is issued to notify that the value displayed in the remaining number of times indication display will be increased by "10," and the value displayed in the remaining number of times indication display is updated to "48."

The display of the change in the special pattern that causes the update display is not limited to the above-mentioned content (such as the display of the change in the special pattern for the first, third, and fifth times after the third low-probability time-saving game state is set), and for example, the update display may be performed in the display of the change in the special pattern when the value indicating the remaining number of times of time-saving displayed in the remaining number of times indication display becomes "0."
In addition, a plurality of patterns (for example, the third special pattern change display after the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, the fifth special pattern change display, the eighth special pattern change display, etc.) may be determined in advance as the change display of the special pattern that will cause the update display to be executed, and the update display may be executed when the change display of the special pattern is determined by a predetermined lottery.
Furthermore, when updating and displaying the display in multiple steps as in the second modification, the value to be increased in each updating and displaying may be the same or different.
Furthermore, the timing for notifying the number of times the time is reduced when the special pattern is displayed is not limited to the start of the special pattern display, but may be any time between the start and end of the special pattern display, when the special pattern display ends, or when the special pattern display ends and the stop display time has elapsed.
In addition, until the display of the special pattern that will cause the notification of the number of times the time is reduced is displayed, a provocative effect (for example, displaying an image in which the word "add-on" repeatedly crosses the display section 21a) may be executed to make the player expect that the notification of the number of times the time is reduced will be made.

In the above case, the same effect as that of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 14 can be achieved, and the interest of the player in the updated display of the remaining number of time-saving times can be increased.
Furthermore, the various controls in other application example 14 may also be applied to pachinko machines in which simultaneous spinning control is executed, or so-called one-type and two-type mixed pachinko machines, within the scope of not causing any contradictions.

The various settings and controls of the above-described embodiment, modified examples, and other application examples may be combined with one another within a range that does not cause contradictions.
Furthermore, the main CPU 101 that executes the win/loss determination process in Other Application Example 14 (Other Application Example 11, the above-described embodiment) corresponds to the determination means of the present invention. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 that executes the variable display of the special symbol in Other Application Example 14 (Other Application Example 11, the above-described embodiment) corresponds to the variable display means of the present invention. Furthermore, the normal game state in Other Application Example 14 corresponds to the first game state of the present invention. Furthermore, the third low-probability time-saving game state in Other Application Example 14 corresponds to the second game state of the present invention. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 that sets the normal game state or the third low-probability time-saving game state in Other Application Example 14 corresponds to the setting means of the present invention. Furthermore, the pachinko machine P in Other Application Example 14 corresponds to the gaming machine of the present invention. Furthermore, the display of the low-probability time-saving background image B or the low-probability time-saving effect symbol B in Other Application Example 14 corresponds to the first suggestion of the present invention. Furthermore, the low-probability time-saving end notification and the left-hit operation notification in Other Application Example 14 correspond to the second suggestion of the present invention.

P Pachinko machine 100 Main control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
300 Sub-control board 301 Sub-CPU
302 Sub ROM
303 Sub RAM

Claims (1)

A determination means for determining an execution result associated with the execution of a special game advantageous to a player or a non-execution result associated with the non-execution of the special game;
a variable display means capable of displaying a variable based on the result of the determination by the determination means;
and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a non-time-saving game state in which it is possible to play a game in which it is relatively difficult for a game ball to enter a predetermined starting area and the average time of the variable display is relatively long, thereby making it possible to play a game in which the variable display is executed relatively frequently, and a time-saving game state in which it is relatively easy for a game ball to enter a predetermined starting area and the average time of the variable display is relatively short, thereby making it possible to play a game in which the variable display is executed relatively frequently,
The time-shortened game state includes a first time-shortened game state that is set after the special game that is executed based on the execution result is completed when the execution result is determined, and a second time-shortened game state that is set when the non-execution result is determined,
the non-execution result includes a first non-execution result and a second non-execution result;
The setting means is
When the determination means determines the number of time reductions corresponding to the time reduction game state during the time reduction game state, the time reduction game state is ended and a non-time reduction game state is set;
In a situation where a predetermined number of determinations have been made by the determination means during the first time-shortening game state or the second time-shortening game state and the determination of the number of time-shortening times has not been made, if a first non-execution result is determined, the time-shortening game state being set is terminated before the variable display based on the determination stops, and a second time-shortening game state can be set when the variable display based on the determination stops, whereas if a second non-execution result is determined, the time-shortening game state being set is not terminated before the variable display based on the determination stops,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the setting contents of the second time-shortening game state set based on the determination are different when the first non-execution result is determined and when the second non-execution result is determined.